MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Integrated FA Software
Screen Design Manual
Functions
(for GOT1000 Series)

SW1DNC-GTWK3-E

01 10 2009
SH(NA)-080867ENG
Version A

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the
product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

DANGER

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that failure to observe the

CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]

DANGER
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device value, a current or set
timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the relevant manual to fully understand the
operating procedures.
When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.

A-1

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

(1) Required memory of a personal computer and the free capacity of the hard disk
For required memory and the free capacity of the hard disk, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.1 Operating environment

(2) Error messages displayed while starting and editing

"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to secure
at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.

(3) GT Designer3 and the GOT display

(a) Precautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line and others) in bold
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer.
However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line, line freeform, or polygon is displayed differently between
GT Designer3 and the GOT.
GT Designer3

(c)

On GOT

Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different between
GT Designer3 and the GOT.

(d) Drawing of different type lines

The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
The display position of the scale value displayed in the graph is different between GT Designer3 and the
GOT.
Even if the display-start-line of a comment is set, the comment is displayed from the first line on GT
Designer3.
(f)

Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the filled-paint
may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200%

A-2

Display magnification: 100%

(4) Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system
environment (256 colors
2 colors)
The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a red rectangle-figure is changed to [2(mono)], the red color remains.
The colors of the image data (BMP format file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is closed
and that image data is double-clicked.

(5) When device type is changed

Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device. The device flag
may be represented as "??", depending on the settings.
Example: D0.b0

D0D0.b5

??

(6) OS setting
Set the font size to [Normal] when setting OS (Windows) screens.
If the font size is set to other than [Normal], the GT Designer3 dialog box and others cannot be displayed
correctly.

A-3

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ............................................................................................A - 2
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 4
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 4
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 13
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 16
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 20

FIGURES
1. FIGURES
1.1

Line .................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2

1.2

Line Freeform .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 4

1.3

Rectangle......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 5

1.4

Polygon ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 8

1.5

Circle................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 9

1.6

Arc ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10

1.7

Sector ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 12

1.8

Scale .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 13

1.9

Piping ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14

1.10 Paint............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.11 Import Figure File........................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.1 Importing figure files ........................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data............................................................................................ 1 - 30
1.12 Capture .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 31
1.12.1 Capturing displays .............................................................................................................. 1 - 31

TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

2. TOUCH SWITCH
2.1

Setting Switch .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 3

2.2

Setting Bit Switch ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 27

2.3

Setting Word Switch ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 31

2.4

Setting Go To Screen Switch......................................................................................................... 2 - 34

A-4

2.5

Setting Change Station No. Switch................................................................................................ 2 - 44

2.6

Setting Special Function Switch .................................................................................................... 2 - 50

2.7

Setting Key Window Display Switch .............................................................................................. 2 - 58

2.8

Setting Key Code Switch ............................................................................................................... 2 - 60

2.9

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 2 - 62

2.10 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 2 - 64

3. LAMP
3.1

Setting Bit Lamp .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 2

3.2

Setting Word Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 11

3.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 3 - 22

3.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 3 - 23

NUMBERS, CHARACTERS
4. GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
4.1

Text.................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 1

4.2

Logo Text......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5

5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

5.1

Setting Numerical Display................................................................................................................ 5 - 3

5.2

Setting Numerical Input ................................................................................................................. 5 - 14

5.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 5 - 31

5.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 34

6. ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

6.1

Setting ASCII Display ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2

6.2

Setting ASCII Input .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 7

6.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 6 - 16

6.4

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 18

6.5

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 6 - 19

7. DATA LIST
7.1

Settings............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 2

7.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 7 - 12

7.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 13

7.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 7 - 15

8. DATE DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY

8.1

Setting Date Display ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 2

8.2

Setting Time Display........................................................................................................................ 8 - 6

8.3

Relevant settings ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 10

8.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 11

9. COMMENT DISPLAY
A-5

9.1

Setting Bit Comment ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 3

9.2

Setting Word Comment ................................................................................................................. 9 - 14

9.3

Setting Simple Comment ............................................................................................................... 9 - 28

9.4

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 9 - 29

9.5

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 9 - 30

ALARM
10. ALARM
10.1

Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms ...................................................................................... 10 - 3

10.1.1 Alarm function................................................................................................................... 10 - 14
10.1.2 Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................. 10 - 18

10.2

Advanced Alarm Common ........................................................................................................... 10 - 23

10.3

Advanced User Alarm Display ..................................................................................................... 10 - 24

10.3.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................... 10 - 25
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation ........................................................................ 10 - 42
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display................................................................................ 10 - 54
10.3.4 Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 10 - 72
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions ....................................................................................... 10 - 73
10.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 94

10.4

Advanced System Alarm Display............................................................................................... 10 - 102

10.4.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................. 10 - 103
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings ................................................................ 10 - 119
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting.......................................................................... 10 - 123
10.4.4 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 140
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 141
10.4.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 149

10.5

Alarm History Display ................................................................................................................ 10 - 155

10.5.1 Alarm history settings ..................................................................................................... 10 - 157
10.5.2 Alarm history display setting ........................................................................................... 10 - 169
10.5.3 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 175
10.5.4 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 176
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 182
10.5.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 185

10.6

User Alarm Display .................................................................................................................... 10 - 187

10.6.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 188
10.6.2 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 195
10.6.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 196
10.6.4 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 203
10.6.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 206

10.7

System Alarm Display................................................................................................................ 10 - 208

10.7.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 209
10.7.2 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 211
10.7.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 212
10.7.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 213

10.8

Advanced Alarm Popup Display ................................................................................................ 10 - 214

10.8.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................. 10 - 215
10.8.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 219
10.8.3 Relevant Settingss.......................................................................................................... 10 - 230

A-6

10.8.4
10.8.5
10.9

Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 231

Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 241

Scrolling Alarm Display.............................................................................................................. 10 - 247

10.9.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 248
10.9.2 Relevant Settings ........................................................................................................... 10 - 252
10.9.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 253
10.9.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 255

GRAPH, METER
11. LEVEL
11.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 2

11.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 11 - 11

11.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 11

11.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 11 - 13

12. PANELMETER
12.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2

12.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 12 - 12

13. LINE GRAPH

13.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 2

13.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 13 - 13

13.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 13

13.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 13 - 14

14. TREND GRAPH

14.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 2

14.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 14 - 12

14.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 12

14.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 14

15. BAR GRAPH

15.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 1

15.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 15 - 11

15.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 11

15.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 15 - 12

16. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH

16.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 1

16.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

16.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

16.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 16 - 11

A-7

17. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

17.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 1

17.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 17 - 10

17.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 10

17.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 17 - 11

18. SCATTER GRAPH

18.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 2

18.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 18 - 13

18.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 13

18.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 17

19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

19.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 2

19.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 19 - 15

19.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 15

19.4

Useful operations/functions ......................................................................................................... 19 - 17

19.5

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 19 - 21

PARTS
20. PARTS DISPLAY
20.1

Bit Parts Settigs ............................................................................................................................. 20 - 3

20.2

Word Parts Settings ..................................................................................................................... 20 - 10

20.3

Fixed Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 20 - 19

20.4

Parts Settings .............................................................................................................................. 20 - 24

20.5

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 20 - 25

20.6

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 26

20.7

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 20 - 31

21. PARTS MOVEMENT

21.1

Bit Parts Settings ........................................................................................................................... 21 - 3

21.2

Word Parts Settings ..................................................................................................................... 21 - 10

21.3

Fixed Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 21 - 20

21.4

Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen) ............................................... 21 - 26

21.5

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 21 - 28

21.6

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 21 - 29

21.7

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 36

A-8

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

DATA COLLECTION
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
22.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 22 - 3

22.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 22 - 6
22.2.1 Saving and managing recorded data.................................................................................. 22 - 6
22.2.2 Display and process ........................................................................................................... 22 - 7
22.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file ................................................................................... 22 - 15

22.3

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 16

23. LOGGING FUNCTION

23.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 1
23.1.1 Control of logging settings .................................................................................................. 23 - 9

23.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 23 - 10

23.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 11
23.3.1 File save mode ................................................................................................................. 23 - 13
23.3.2 Buffer historical mode ....................................................................................................... 23 - 16
23.3.3 Display and process ......................................................................................................... 23 - 18
23.3.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file ................................................................................ 23 - 21

23.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 23 - 23

RECIPE
24. RECIPE
24.1

Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function ........................................ 24 - 5

24.2

Recipe Function........................................................................................................................... 24 - 11
24.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 24 - 11
24.2.2 Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 24 - 17
24.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 24 - 18

24.3

Advanced Recipe Function.......................................................................................................... 24 - 19

24.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 24 - 19
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting ................................................................................... 24 - 25
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value.................................................................................... 24 - 28
24.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file............................................................. 24 - 31
24.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error................................ 24 - 41
24.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 24 - 43

TRIGGER ACTION
25. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION
25.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 25 - 2
25.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting ................................................................................ 25 - 7

25.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 25 - 9

25.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 25 - 10

25.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 25 - 12

A-9

26. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

26.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 2

26.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 26 - 6

26.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 26 - 7

27. TIME ACTION FUNCTION

27.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 27 - 2

27.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 27 - 5

27.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 27 - 7

SCRIPT FUNCTION
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION
28.1

Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 28 - 1
28.1.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 28 - 1
28.1.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 28 - 5

28.2

Project Script, Screen Script ........................................................................................................ 28 - 10

28.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 28 - 10
28.2.2 Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 28 - 22
28.2.3 Actions and settings.......................................................................................................... 28 - 23
28.2.4 Control structure ............................................................................................................... 28 - 26
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 28 - 33
28.2.6 Program examples............................................................................................................ 28 - 50
28.2.7 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 28 - 55
28.2.8 Precautions for using bmov .............................................................................................. 28 - 59

28.3

Object Script ................................................................................................................................ 28 - 62

28.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 28 - 63
28.3.2 Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 28 - 73
28.3.3 Actions and settings.......................................................................................................... 28 - 74
28.3.4 Control structure ............................................................................................................... 28 - 76
28.3.5 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 28 - 89
28.3.6 Program examples............................................................................................................ 28 - 90
28.3.7 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 28 - 95

28.4

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 28 - 98
28.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger ............................................ 28 - 98
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check ........................................................................ 28 - 102
28.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................. 28 - 104
28.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script..................................................................................... 28 - 113

PERIPHERALS
29. BARCODE FUNCTION
29.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 29 - 2

29.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 29 - 3

29.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 29 - 4

29.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 29 - 7

A - 10

30. RFID FUNCTION

30.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 30 - 2

30.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 30 - 4

30.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 30 - 5

30.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 30 - 16

31. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION FUNCTION

31.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 31 - 2

31.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 31 - 4

31.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 31 - 4

31.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 31 - 6

32. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

32.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 32 - 2

32.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 32 - 5

32.3

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 32 - 14

33. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

33.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 33 - 3

33.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 33 - 8

33.3

Multimedia Interaction Tool.......................................................................................................... 33 - 19

33.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 33 - 30

34. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

34.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 34 - 2

34.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 34 - 6

34.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 34 - 6

34.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 34 - 8

35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION

35.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 35 - 2

35.2

Relevant settings ........................................................................................................................... 35 - 3

35.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 35 - 4

35.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 35 - 7

36. REPORT FUNCTION

36.1

Report screen creation (screen property) ...................................................................................... 36 - 2

36.2

Setting common to each report (report setting) ............................................................................. 36 - 6

36.3

Print layout setting ......................................................................................................................... 36 - 8

36.4

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 36 - 16

36.5

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 17

36.6

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 36 - 19

37. HARD COPY FUNCTION

A - 11

37.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 37 - 2

37.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 37 - 5

37.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 37 - 5

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

38.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 38 - 1

38.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 38 - 2

38.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 38 - 2

APPENDICES
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File .............................................................................App - 1
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board................................................................................App - 2
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT .................................................App - 3

REVISIONS

A - 12

MANUALS

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
Packaging

Manual Number
(Model code)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions

Enclosed in product

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080866ENG
(1D7MB9)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080867ENG
(1D7MC1)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080868ENG
(1D7MC2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080869ENG
(1D7MC3)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080871ENG
(1D7MC5)

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080858ENG
(1D7MA7)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080859ENG
(1D7MA8)

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080860ENG
(1D7MA9)

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080861ENG
(1D7MB1)

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080862ENG
(1D7MB2)

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080863ENG
(1D7MB3)

GT16 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080778ENG
(1D7M88)

GT15 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)

GT12 Supplementary Description

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080864ENG
(1D7MB7)

GT11 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D17501
(09R815)

Handy GOT User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D20101
(09R817)

GT10 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D24701
(09R819)

Manual Name

A - 13

 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals)

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects
Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

1/2, 2/2

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

Simulating a created project on a personal computer

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual

Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products)

Connecting multiple controllers (Multi-channel function) to one GOT

Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Products 1)

Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Products 2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,

MODBUS Products, Peripherals)

Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT
Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

A - 14

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals)

 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and
options) of each GOT
Installing the GOT
Operating the utility

GT16 User's Manual

GT15 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
Handy GOT User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

Configuring the gateway function

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

Configuring the MES interface function

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual

Configuring the extended function and option function

Using a personal computer as the GOT

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Functions)
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual

A - 15

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
GT1695M-X

Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD

GT1685

GT1685M-S

Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD

GT1675M-S

Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD

GT1675M-V

Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD

GT1665M-S

Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD

GT1665M-V

Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD

GT1595-X

Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD

GT1585V-S

Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD

GT1585-S

Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD

GT1575V-S

Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-S

Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-V

Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VN

Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD

GT1572-VN

Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

GT1675

GT1665
GT16
GT1595
GT1585

GT157

GT156

GOT1000
Series

Description

GT1695

GT155

Abbreviation of GT1695,GT1685, GT1675, GT1665

GT1565-V

Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD

GT1562-VN

Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

GT1555-V

Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GT1555-Q

Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT1550-Q

Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD

GT15

GT115

Handy GOT

Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT1155-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,

GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD

GT1150-Q

Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD

GT1155HS-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD

GT1150HS-Q

GT11
GT105

GT104

Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,

GT1055-Q

Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD

GT1050-Q

Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD

GT1045-Q

Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD

GT1040-Q

Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD

GT1030

Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,

GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030-LWLW

GT1020

Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,

GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW

GT10

Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

GT SoftGOT1000

Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series

Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series

GOT800 Series

Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

A - 16

 Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Bus connection unit

Serial communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

RS-422 conversion unit

GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P

Ethernet communication unit

GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE controller network communication

unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link communication unit

GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit

GT15-75IF900

Serial multi-drop connection unit

GT01-RS4-M

Connection Conversion Adapter

GT10-9PT5S

*1
*2
*3

A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Printer unit

Video/RGB unit

Description
GT15-PRN

Video input unit

GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4

RGB input unit

GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1

Video/RGB input unit

GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1

RGB output unit

GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT

Multimedia unit

GT16M-MMR

CF card unit

GT15-CFCD

CF card extension unit*1

GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit

GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit

GT15-SOUT

Fingerprint unit

GT15-80FPA
*1

GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

A - 17

 Option
Abbreviations and generic terms
CF card

Description
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC

Memory card adaptor

GT05-MEM-ADPC

Option function board

GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,

GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M

Battery

GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT

For GT16

GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,

GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,
GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,
GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW

For GT15

GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,

GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW

For GT11

GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW,

GT11H-50PSC

For GT10

GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,

GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,
GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW

Protective Sheet

Protective cover for oil

GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO

USB environmental protection cover

GT16-UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT11-50UCOV

Stand

GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND

Attachment

GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,

GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85

Backlight

GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT,

GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT,
GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN

Multi-color display board

GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB

Connector conversion box

GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop sw guard cover

GT11H-50ESCOV

Memory loader

GT10-LDR

Memory board

GT10-50FMB

Software
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

GT Works3

Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series

GT Simulator3

Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT1000

Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000

GT Converter2

Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GX Works2

Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

engineering software

GX Simulator2

Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function

GX Simulator

Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)

GX Developer

Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package

PX Developer

Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

MT Works2

Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNC-MTW2E)

MT Developer

Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series

A - 18

Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

MR Configurator

Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software

FR Configurator

Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

FX Configurator-FP

Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)

FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool

Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

RT ToolBox2

Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

Abbreviations and generic terms
License

Description
GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

Others
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

OMRON

Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE

Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI

Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

SHARP

Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation

JTEKT

Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation

SHINKO

Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO

Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA

Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION

TOSHIBA MACHINE

Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.

HITACHI IES

Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI

Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.

FUJI FA

Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.

PANASONIC

Abbreviation of Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd.

FUJI SYS

Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.

YASKAWA

Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YAMATAKE

Abbreviation of Yamatake Corporation

YOKOGAWA

Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation

ALLEN-BRADLEY

Abbreviation of products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

GE FANUC

Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

LS IS

Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

SCHNEIDER

Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA

SIEMENS

Abbreviation of Siemens AG

RKC

Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

PLC

Abbreviation of programmable controller

Temperature controller

Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation

Indicating controller

Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation

CHINO controller

Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION

PC CPU module

Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD

GOT (server)

Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function

GOT (client)

Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Windows font

Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)

Intelligent function module

Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
to the base unit.

MODBUS/RTU

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
communication.

MODBUS/TCP

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network.

A - 19

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

The following symbols are used in this manual.

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT11,
GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are
applicable or not.

: Applicable

: Not applicable

[ ] : Shows the setting item displayed on

the software screen or the GOT
screen.

POINT

Refers to information
required for operation.

HINT

Refers to information useful

for operation.

Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual, or

others of relevant information.
(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)
(Functions): GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual
(Functions)
Shows the operation steps.
Operate the steps from the step 1.

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT11,

GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are
applicable or not.
Black: Applicable
Gray: Not applicable

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

A - 20

FIGURES

FIGURES

FIGURES

1.

Arc
(including elliptic arc)

1.4 Polygon

LAMP

Circle
(including ellipse)

1.3 Rectangle

1.5 Circle

1.6 Arc

Sector

1.7 Sector

Scale

1.8 Scale

Piping

1.9 Piping

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Polygon

1.2 Line Freeform

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Rectangle

1.1 Line

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Line Freeform

Reference

7
DATA LIST

Line

Drawing example

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Figure

TOUCH SWITCH

The following figures can be drawn in the screen using GT Designer3.

1-1

1.1 Line
This function enables to draw lines in the screen.

1.
2.

Select [Figure]

[Line] from the menu.

Draw the line in the screen.

Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2).
The following shows a drawing example.
Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)
1)

2)

45 degrees

Draw while pressing the [Ctrl] key.

start point
1)

2)

2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45 degrees.

1-2

1.1 Line

A line can be drawn from the start point as a

center.

FIGURES

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the line to be set to open the setting dialog box.

TOUCH SWITCH

Item

Description

Line Style

Model

Select the style of the line.

*1

Line Width

Select the width of the line.

Line Color

Select the color of the line.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Select this item to assign a category to the line.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
*2

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.

Use Lamp Attribute

Check this to set the lamp attribute.

When the lamp attribute is set, the figure color can be changed when a bit device turns on in the
same way as a lamp.
When the lamp attribute is set, it is handled as an object.

Device

The device is set. (Bit specification)

Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on.
Select the blink speed. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Object Name

Valid when [UseLamp Attribute] is selected.

Up to 30 characters can be entered regardless of one or two-byte characters.
*1
*2

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Line Color

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.

Blink

LAMP

A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
Adjust the figure position as necessary.
By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.

POINT

DATA LIST

Setting lamp attribute

The display and operation on GT Designer3 are the same as those of an object.
However, the object ID is not assigned.
Max. setting points per one screen is counted as a lamp (an object).
For details of maximum setting points for one object screen, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

1.1 Line

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

1-3

1.2 Line Freeform

This function enables to draw freeform lines in the screen.

1.

Select [Figure]

2.

[Line Freeform] from the menu.

Draw consecutive lines in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example.
2)

4)

3)

1)
Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2) of
the first line.

Click at the end point of next line 3).

Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)
45 interval

2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45
interval.

3.

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the freeform line to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Refer to the following for setting details.
1.1 Line

1-4

1.2 Line Freeform

Repeat the operation in 3) until a figure is

drawn. Double click end point 4) to complete
drawing.

FIGURES

1.3 Rectangle

This function enables to draw rectangles in the screen.

[Rectangle] from the menu.

Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)

TOUCH SWITCH

Draw rectangles in the screen.

Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2).
The following shows a drawing example.
Draw while pressing the [Ctrl] key.

1)

3
start point
1)

2)

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

A rectangle can be drawn from the start point as

the center.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

A square can be drawn.

LAMP

2)

2)

7
DATA LIST

2.

Select [Figure]

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.

1.3 Rectangle

1-5

3.

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the rectangle to be set to open the setting dialog box.

Item

Description

Line Style

Select the line style of the rectangle.

Line Width*1

Select the line width of the rectangle.

Line Color

Select the line color of the rectangle.

Pattern

Filling pattern is selected.

Pattern Color

Display color of filling pattern is selected.

Background Color

Background color of filling pattern is selected.

Type*3

Select the type of the rectangle.(Ordinary/Rounded/Octagonal)

Radius

Radius is set when Rounded or Octagonal is selected from Type.

Select this item to assign a category to the rectangle.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
*2

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.
Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.

User Lamp Attribute

Check this to set the lamp attribute.

When the lamp attribute is set, the figure color can be changed when a bit device turns on in the
same way as a lamp.
When the lamp attribute is set, it is handled as an object.

Device

The device is set. (Bit specification)

Line Color

Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Pattern

Select the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Pattern Color

Select the display color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Background Color

Select the background color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Blink

Select the blink speed. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Object Name

Valid when [User Lamp Attribute] is selected.

Up to 30 characters can be entered regardless of one or two-byte characters.
*1

A figure of which line width is 3 dots or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
Adjust the figure position as necessary.
*2
By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.
For details of *3, refer to the following.

1-6

1.3 Rectangle

Model

The type selection is available only for rectangles.

The following types can be selected.
When [Rounded] is selected for the type and a [Line Width] other than [1Dot] is selected, only the straight line can be
selected for [Line Style].
When Ordinary is selected

When rounded is selected

When Octagonal is selected

FIGURES

*3 Figure forms when selecting types

TOUCH SWITCH

POINT

LAMP

Setting lamp attribute

The display and operation on GT Designer3 are the same as those of an object.
However, the object ID is not assigned.
Max. setting points per one screen is counted as a lamp (an object).
For details of maximum setting points per object screen, refer to the following.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.3 Rectangle

1-7

1.4 Polygon

This function enables to draw polygons in the screen.

1.
2.

Select [Figure]

[Polygon] from the menu.

Draw polygons in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example.
4)

3)
1)

2)

Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) of the

first side.

A dashed line is displayed. Click at the end point

of next side 3).

Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)
45 interval

2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45
interval.

3.

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the polygon to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Refer to the following for setting details.
1.3 Rectangle

1-8

5)

1.4 Polygon

Repeat the operation in 3) until the desired

figure is drawn. Double click 4) to complete
drawing.

FIGURES

1.5 Circle
This function enables to draw circles in the screen.

[Circle] from the menu.

Draw circles in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example.
Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)

TOUCH SWITCH

2.

Select [Figure]

Draw while pressing the [Ctrl] key.

1)

start point
1)
2)

A complete round circle can be drawn.

A circle can be drawn from the start point as a

center.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the circle to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Refer to the following for setting details.
1.3 Rectangle

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

2)

2)

LAMP

1.

1.5 Circle

1-9

1.6 Arc
This function enables to draw arcs in the screen.

1.
2.

Select [Figure]

[Arc] from the menu.

Draw arcs in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example
2)

3)
4)

5)

1)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) to
determine the radius of arc.
A dashed line is displayed inside the circle.

1 - 10

1.6 Arc

Click the left mouse button at the start point of arc

3), and move the cursor to end point 4).

Click end point 4) to complete drawing.

FIGURES

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the arc to be set to open the setting dialog box.

TOUCH SWITCH

Item

Description

Model

Select this item when creating a sector.

LAMP

Not checked

Line Style

Select the line style of the arc or sector.

Line Width*1

Select the line width of the arc or sector.

Line Color

Select the line color of the arc or sector.

Pattern

Select the filling pattern. (Only available when [Sector] is selected)

Pattern Color

Select the display color of the filling pattern. (Only available when [Sector] is selected)

Background Color

Select the background color of the filling pattern (Only available when [Sector] is selected)

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Checked

Sector

Select this item to assign a category to the arc or sector.

Category

*2

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.
Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

*2

A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
Adjust the figure position as necessary.
By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.

7
DATA LIST

*1

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

1.6 Arc

1 - 11

1.7 Sector

This function enables to draw sectors in the screen.

1.
2.

Select [Figure]

[Sector] from the menu.

Draw sectors in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example
2)

3)
4)
5)

1)
Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) to
determine the radius of sector.
A dashed line is displayed inside the circle.

3.

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the sector to be set to open the setting dialog box.
Refer to the following for setting details.
1.6 Arc

1 - 12

Click the left mouse button at the start point of

sector 3), and move the cursor to the end point 4)
.

1.7 Sector

Click end point 4) to complete drawing.

FIGURES

1.8 Scale
This function enables to draw scales in the screen.

[Scale] from the menu.

Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)

TOUCH SWITCH

Draw scales in the screen.

Drag from the start point 1) to the end point 2).
The following shows a drawing example
Draw while pressing the [Ctrl] key.

1)

start point
1)
2)

2)

2)
A scale with the same vertical and horizontal
sizes can be drawn.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the scale to be set to open the setting dialog box.

Item

Description

Scale Points

Model

Set the number of lines on the scale. (2 to 255)

Direction of the scale is selected.

Vertical:

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Horizontal:

Direction

Position of the center line that makes a right angle to the scale is selected.
Center Line

Center:

Line Style

None:

Select the line type of the scale.

*1

Line Width

Select the line width of the scale.

Line Color

Select the line color of the scale.

DATA LIST

Select this item to assign a category to the scale.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
*2

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

A scale can be drawn from the start point as a

center.

LAMP

2.

Select [Figure]

Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.
*1
*2

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1.

A figure which line width is [3Dot] or more may be partly laid off the screen if it is placed at the edge of the screen.
Adjust the figure position as necessary.
By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.

1.8 Scale

1 - 13

1.9 Piping
This function enables to draw pipings in the screen.

1.
2.

Select [Figure]

[Piping] from the menu.

Draw pipings in the screen.

The following shows a drawing example
1)

2)

3)

Drag from start point 1) to end point 2) of the first

line.

Click at the end point of next line 3).

4)
Repeat the operation in 3) until a figure is drawn.
Double click at the end point 4) to complete
drawing.

Draw while pressing the [Shift] key.

1)
45 interval

2)
Lines can be drawn at the angle of 45

interval.

POINT
Using piping
The vertex editing is defined when the 100th vertex is set, and a message appears.
Some piping may not be created, depending on the piping width and angle.

1 - 14

1.9 Piping

FIGURES

Display the dialog box.

Double-click the piping to be set to open the setting dialog box.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

4
Piping Width

Piping width of the figure is set in dot unit. (3 to 100)

Line Color

Piping color of the figure is selected.

Pattern

Line color of the figure is selected.

Piping Color

Pattern of the figure is selected.

Background Color

Background color pattern of the figure is selected.

Model
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Description

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Select this item to assign a category to the piping.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
*1

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.

Use Lamp Attribute

Check the box when setting lamp attribute.

When the lamp attribute is set, the figure color can be changed when a bit device turns on in the
same way as a lamp.
When the lamp attribute is set, the figure is treated an object.

Device

Device is set. (Bit setting)

Line Color

Select the line color to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Pattern

Select the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Piping Color

Select the display color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Background Color

Select the background color of the filling pattern to be displayed when the bit device turns on.

Blink

Select the blink speed. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Layer

Layer setting is selected from the Front and Back screen.

Object Name

Valid when [Use Lamp Attribute] is selected.

Up to 30 characters can be entered regardless of one or two-byte characters.
*1

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.

1.9 Piping

1 - 15

POINT
Setting lamp attribute
The display and operation on GT Designer3 are the same as those of an object.
However, the object ID is not assigned.
Max. setting points per one screen is counted as a lamp (an object).
For details of maximum setting points per object screen, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

1 - 16

1.9 Piping

FIGURES

1.10 Paint
This function enables to paint closed areas and polygons on the screen.

Settings
1. Select [Figure]

2
TOUCH SWITCH

[Paint] from the menu.

Move the cursor to the area for painting and click within the paint area.

Click

The [Paint] dialog box appears. Set the attribute and click the [OK] button.

LAMP

2.

Description

Boundary Color

The boundary color of the area is selected.

The line set here is the boundary line of the painted area.

Pattern

Filling pattern is selected.

Pattern Color

The color of filling pattern is selected.

Background Color

Model

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Background color of filling pattern is selected.

Select this item to assign a category to the figure.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.
Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.

The paint mark is displayed at the click position and the figure is painted.

DATA LIST

The paint mark is displayed on the GT Desinger3 only and not on the GOT.
To edit the attribute of painting, double click the paint mark.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

1.10 Paint

1 - 17

 Actions
Before painting, draw the areas for painting as follows:

(1) Close the area to paint with solid lines.

Solid line

Paint this area.

Solid line
Solid line

Paint this
area.

Paint a polygon.

Solid line

Solid line

Solid line

(2) Use the same color for outlines of the area to be painted.
Paint this area.

Paint this area.

Draw with the same color.

Draw with the same color.

POINT
(1) Precautions for figure to be painted
(a) Note that any opening of the outline leads to protrusion of paint from the edge of the figure.
(b) Inside of the figure drawn with the same boundary color as the background color cannot be painted.
Select a boundary color different from the background color.
(c)

The figure may not be painted if the paint area is painted in Fill pattern and the pattern background color
is the same as the boundary color.
Shift the paint position.

(2) How to redisplay

Note that use of paint may cause some area to remain unpainted.
Executing redisplay can display the screen correctly.
Refer to the following section for redisplay.
(Fundamentals) 3.8 Basic Operation of Drawing Screen

HINT
Paint mark display
If a paint mark is not displayed on the screen, the marked figure is not painted.
When paint mark is displayed

Paint mark

1 - 18

1.10 Paint

When paint mark is not displayed

1.11.1

Select the file to be imported with the following operations:

File format

Operation

BMP

A BMP file is imported as an image.

Select [Figure]

[Import Image] from the menu.

DXF

A DXF file is imported as an image.

Select [Figure]

[Import DXF data] from the menu.

IGES

An IGES file is imported as an image.

Select [Figure]

[Import IGES data] from the menu.

JPEG

A JPEG file is imported as an image.

Select [Figure]

[Import Image] from the menu.

Model

The Open a File dialog box appears.

Select the file of the figure data to be imported and click the [Open] button.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

2.

Description

LAMP

1.

Importing figure files

2
TOUCH SWITCH

This function enables to import figure data in BMP/DXF (AutoCAD Data Exchange Format), IGES (Data exchange format
among CADs), and JPEG format to GT Designer3 and paste the figure on the screen.

FIGURES

1.11 Import Figure File

When selecting BMP, DXF or JPEG files, the specified figure data is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Move
the cursor to the area to place and click.
Refer to the following when selecting IGES files.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Using IGES files

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 19

POINT
(1) Image quality of JPEG file
Image quality parameter is settable only when a JPEG file is selected.
The lower the image quality, the smaller the file size. The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.
(2) Importing IGES Files
The following dialog box appears if some entity in the IGES file data cannot be imported.

Click [Yes] to abort processing.

Click [No] to continue processing, although unsupported entities which cannot be imported are not displayed
in the screen.
Refer to the following for the details about importable IGES data.
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data
Unimportable IGES data can be displayed on the GOT by capturing the image on the screen and importing it
with the Capture Image function.
1.12 Capture

HINT
Pasting a file by drag-and-drop
The BMP/JPEG/DXF file can be pasted onto the GT Desinger3 screen by drag-and-drop operation.

Drag-and-drop

Using BMP files

(1) Importable BMP files
As BMP files, 2-color (monochrome), 16-color, 256-color, and 24-bit BMP files can be imported.

(2) The size of the figure to be imported

When the size of the figure to be imported is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to fit
the temporary area.

1 - 20

1.11 Import Figure File

1
(1) Importing BMP files to GT Designer3
The following shows how BMP files that include more colors than the color setting are displayed, when BMP
files are imported to GT Desiger3.
BMP format data

Reduced to 65536
colors

Displayed in 256
colors

Displayed in 16
colors

Displayed in 2
(monochrome)
colors

256 colors

Reduced to 256
colors

Displayed in 256
colors

Displayed in 16
colors

Displayed in 2
(monochrome)
colors

16 colors

Reduced to 16
colors

Reduced to 16
colors

Displayed in 16
colors

Displayed in 2
(monochrome)
colors

Reduced to 16
(Grayscale)

Reduced to 16
(Grayscale)

Reduced to 16
(Grayscale)

Displayed in 2
(monochrome)
colors

Reduced to 2
(monochrome)

Reduced to 2
(monochrome)

Reduced to 2
(monochrome)

Displayed in 2
(monochrome)
colors

256 or 65536 colors are used

to display the image data

16

(Grayscale)*2

2 (Mono)

*1

*1

Model

For GOTs that can display 65536 colors, refer to the following.

Users Manual for the GOT used

*2

16 (Gray Scale) can be selected on the GT155

2
TOUCH SWITCH

2 (monochrome)
colors

LAMP

16-color

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

256-color

-Q and GT11.

7
DATA LIST

(2) The display when display color settings are changed

When the number of colors on the GT16 or GT15 is reduced
The color setting is changed when the [Color Setting] of [GOT Type Setting] is shifted to [256] after BMP
files are read, or when the following operations are performed without changing the editor display during
[Color Setting] change in the [GOT Type Setting] dialog box.
1. Double click, image editing by changing properties
2. Reopening a file after saving it
3. Closing the screen and reopening it
When the color setting is changed from 256-color to 2-color (16 (Grayscale)) on the GT11
The above change made in the system settings will be instantly reflected on the editor.
The BMP file which colors are reduced once on GT Designer3 cannot be returned to the previous color
setting. Import the BMP file again.
The color scheme of the original BMP file may differ from the color scheme of image data displayed on GT
Designer3 and GOT.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

24bit

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

System settings

FIGURES

POINT

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 21

(3) Editing graphic data in the BMP file

(a) Opening an image data file with Paint

1.

2.

Duble-click the image data file to be edited to

open the Bitmap Attribute Change dialog
box.

Select [Open image data in Paint]. (GT16,

GT15, GT SoftGOT 1000)

*If an image file is opened with Paint, the transparent color

setting becomes invalid.

3.
4.

1 - 22

1.11 Import Figure File

The Paint starts up. Edit the image.

After editing, close the Paint and return to the
GT Designer3 screen.
To edit again, proceed from the step 2.

1.

Duble-click the image data file to be edited to

open the Bitmap Attribute Change dialog
box.

FIGURES

(b) Setting transparent colors(GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT 1000)

TOUCH SWITCH

3
Select [Specify a transparent color for
image data].

LAMP

2.

The [Transparent Setting] dialog box

appears.
Select the [Use Transparent Setting] to
display the preview image and to change the
cursor to
.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

3.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Select the color to make transparent by

clicking it.

7
DATA LIST

(Continued to next page)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

4.

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 23

5.

Item

Description

Use Transparent
Setting

Checking the checkbox enables transparent

color setting.

+ button

This button zooms in on the image.

- button

This button zooms out of the image.

Specify Zoom Level

Magnification setting

Transparent

The color that is selected as the transparent

color appears here.

Background Color

The background color for the Preview window

can be specified here.

6.

(4) Registering category

After imported, the BMP file is registered and stored as [Other].

1 - 24

The selected color becomes transparent.

Click the [OK] button to save the setting and
close the dialog box.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the dialog
without saving the setting box.

1.11 Import Figure File

The image that is made to be transparent

appears.

Using DXF files

(1) Compatible DXF data

FIGURES

(a) Compatible DXF format data

The DXF format data created using the following Auto CAD (version) can be imported.
Release 12 Release 13 Release 14

Details of DXF data import

The following DXF data can be imported to GT Designer3.
If some figures or attributes cannot be imported, draw them or make the relevant settings on GT Designer3.
After import
(GTD3 data)

(Ignored)

ATTRIB

Text

CIRCLE

Circle

LAMP

Arc

ATTDEF

The text size is converted to the nearest one (0.5 to 8 times) of GT Desiger3.
The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
The text style including slant angle is not supported.

DIMENSION

Group

The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block definition instead of the layer.

ELLIPSE

Circle or Arc

The slanted figure is converted so that its main axis will be rotated horizontally or vertically.

INSERT

Group

The color and line style are converted based on the DIMENSION block definition instead of the layer.
The scale and rotation angle are not supported.

LEADER

Line Free Form

The figure is converted to be a line free form (the end points are connected in a straight line).

LINE

Line

LWPOLYLINE

Line Free Form or

Polygon

The figure is converted to be a line free form or polygon (the end points are connected in a straight line).
The curved lines between the points are ignored.

MLINE

Line Free Form

The MLINESTYLE is not supported.

Each line free form color and the line style are converted based on the layer definition.
Cap processing is not supported.

MTEXT

Text

POINT

Circle, Rectangle,
Line

POLYLINE

Line Free Form or

Polygon

SOLID

Polygon

SPLINE

Line Free Form or

Polygon

The figure is converted to be a line free form or polygon (the fit lines are connected in a straight line).

TEXT

Text

The text size is converted to the nearest one (0.5 to 8 times) of GT Desiger3.
The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
The text style including slant angle is not supported.

TRACE

Polygon

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

ARC

Remarks

The text size is converted to the nearest one (0.5 to 8 times) of GT Desiger3.
The rotation setting is converted to the nearest one in 90-degree units.
The form code is deleted.
The text style is not supported.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Before import
(DXF data)

The figure is converted to a line free form or polygon (the end points are connected in a straight line).
The curved lines between the points are ignored.
-

7
DATA LIST

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

(c)

TOUCH SWITCH

(b) Notes on importing data

The data with the layer off cannot be converted.
Only the Shift JIS code text is compatible.
The coordinate unit "1" is converted to 1 dot on GT Designer3.
10 minutes or longer may be required in some cases.
Figures larger than 2048
1536 dots cannot be imported with GT Designer3.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 25

POINT
Converting data to be imported
GT Desginer3 converts only compatible characters when importing DXF data.
Therefore, some characters may appear differently from the original data.
Make sure to modify the figure after data import.
Example 1) "<IG>" cannot be imported.
As the "<IG>" in DXF data is not in the Shift JIS code, this character cannot be imported.
Example 2) The BLOCK created with rectilinear and circle figures on the AutoCAD
As the scale is set in the INSERT, the BLOCK cannot be correctly imported.
(d) Converting lines
The line width is converted to 1 dot.
The following shows how line types are converted.
Before import (DXF data)

After import (GTD3 data)

CONTINUOUS

Full line

DASHED

Dotted line

HIDDEN

Dotted line

CENTER

Dashed line

PHANTOM

Dashed line

User definition

Full line

Others

Full line

(e) Converting colors

The following shows how colors are converted.
Before import (DXF data)
Red (0

01)

After import (GTD3 data)

Red (224)

Yellow (0

02)

Yellow (252)

Green (0

03)

Green (28)

Light blue (0
Blue (0

04)

Light blue (31)

05)

Purple (0

Blue (3)

06)

Purple (227)

White (0

07)

White (255)

Black (0

08)

Black (0)

Dark red (0

09)

Dark red (160)

Dark yellow (0

0A)

Dark yellow (180)

Dark green (0

0B)

Dark green (20)

Dark-light blue (0
Dark blue (0
Dark purple (0
Dark white (0

0C)

0D)
0E)
0F)

Others

Dark-light blue (22)

Dark blue (2)
Dark purple (162)
Dark white (109)
Others (255)

(2) Editing DXF figure data

To edit a grouped figure data on GT Desinger3, ungroup it once in [Ungroup].
After the edition, group them again.

(3) Registering categories

After imported, the DXF files are registered and stored as [None].
(The ungrouped data will be also stored as [None].)
If necessary, register it again.

1 - 26

1.11 Import Figure File

Using IGES files

(1) Preview display of IGES files

FIGURES

A preview of captured IGES files is displayed.

Preview screen can be magnified up to 1600 1200 dots (the same size as temporary area).
Figure data is pasted on the drawing screen (editor) as displayed size.

TOUCH SWITCH

Description
Saves the direction, size, and option setting.

Reset

Resets the direction, size.

Option

Displays the [Option] dialog box.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Save

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(a) Operation on the preview window

Determine the direction and size of the display data to make it fit on the preview screen by following
operation.
Left drag: 3D model is rotated to the direction of dragging.
Right drag: 3D model is moved to the direction of dragging.
Right and Left drag: The size of 3D model is changed.

(Expansion: Move the mouse up, Reduction: Move the mouse down)
Display data cannot be saved while display data is located out of the preview screen.

(b) Setting Data conversion quality

Click the

button to display the [Option] dialog box, and set the optimization level for converting

curves into lines.

Low : Simplifies curves. Data size is decreased.
High: Curve is drawn. Data size is increased.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Item

LAMP

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 27

(2) Pasting IGES files

Save the setting by clicking

button.

Determine the position to paste the figure on the GT Designer3 screen by moving the cursor and paste the
figure by clicking the screen.

Click

HINT
Editing imported IGES data
After importing the IGES data, click the [Ungroup] button in GT Designer3 to set and change the line type, width,
color, and others.
Refer to the following for setting details.
(Fundamentals) 5.2.3 Grouping multiple figures and objects
1.1 Line

1 - 28

1.11 Import Figure File

Using JPEG files

If "GT16 Series" or "GT15 Series" is selected as the GOT type, JPEG files can be selected in [Import Image].

FIGURES

(1) Type of JPEG file format to be loaded

(2) The size of the figure to be imported

When the size of the figure to be imported is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to
fit the temporary area.

POINT

LAMP

Precautions for importing JPEG files

The number of colors of the original JPEG file is kept as far as the loaded file remains unedited.
However, the image is displayed in the specified number of colors of screen display in GT Designer3.
If the designatedJPEG file specified in the JPEG file loading is in the JFIF format other than the base line type,
or if the loaded JPEG image is edited, the image quality may deteriorate. If image quality deterioration is
substantial, use a bit map file.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

JFIF
EXIF

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.11 Import Figure File

1 - 29

1.11.2

Precautions for importing data

Importable data
Only wire frame format IGES files (*.igs/*.ige/*.iges file) manufactured by Autodesk, Inc with Autodesk Inventor
can be imported.
When IGES data has unsupported entity, the part that comes after unsupported entity in IGES data cannot be
imported. When clicking [No] on the message indicating that the data has unsupported entities, the following
processes take place.
EX1) Parent entity (importable)-child entity (importable)-grandchild entity (not importable)
Parent entity and child entity are displayed. Grandchild entity is not displayed.
EX2) Parent entity (importable)-child entity (not importable)-grandchild entity (importable)
Parent entity is displayed. Neither child entity nor grandchild entity is displayed.
EX3) Parent entity (not importable)-child entity (importable)-grandchild entity (importable)
None of them is displayed because parent entity is not importable.

Entities to be imported
IGES import function allows the entities defined by JAMA-IGES to be imported. Importable entities are as
follows.
Entity name

Entity ID

Circular arc

100

Ellipse

104

Line

110

Transformation matrix

124

Rational B-spline curve

126

General note

212

Subfigure definition

308

Color definision

314

Subfigure entity

408

Category of figures and characters imported with the IGES import function
The category of figures and characters imported with the IGES import function is [None].

Nested format groups

When importing IGES data in nested format, only the bottom level folders are imported.

(Example)

Before the IGES data is imported

Group 1

After the IGES data is imported

Group 1

Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Group 3
Group 4

POINT
Unimportable IGES data
Unimportable IGES data can be displayed on GOT by using Capture Image function.
1.12.1 Capturing displays

1 - 30

1.11 Import Figure File

FIGURES

1.12 Capture

This function enables to capture images and import it to GT Designer3 as BMP or JPEG files.

Capturing displays

TOUCH SWITCH

1.12.1

Operation method
1. Activate the window to be captured by clicking it.

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Select [Figure]
[Capture] from the menu on GT Designer3 to define the capture area.
Once capture area is defined, the GT Designer3 window becomes minimized.
Only the function to specify capture area can be operated. To cancel this function, press the [ESC] key.
If "GT16 Series" or "GT15 Series" is selected as the GOT type, JPEG files can be selected in [Specify Rectangle
Range]/[Specify Window].

DATA LIST

8
(Continued to next page)

1.12 Capture

1 - 31

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

3.

There are two ways to specify a capture area.

[Specify Rectangle Range]
Selecting [Specify Rectangle Range] minimizes the GT Designer3 window, and the cursor changes to a
[Specify Rectangle Range] dedicated cursor.
Drag the cursor from the starting point to the ending point to determine the range to be captured.

Capture range

[Specify Window]
Selecting [Specify Window] minimizes the GT Designer3 window and the cursor changes to
, dedicated
for [Specify Window]. The area to be captured is framed with black line by moving
into the client area.
Click the area to select it.

Capture range

(Continued to next page)

1 - 32

1.12 Capture

The captured figure is imported to GT Designer3 as BMP or JPEG data.

FIGURES

4.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

4
How to edit
For editing imported BMP files, refer to the following.
1.11.1 Importing figure files

POINT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Precautions for capturing

It may take some time for the screen to appear when a large captured figure is imported or when the screen on
which many figures are pasted is opened.
When the size of the captured data is bigger than that of temporary area, it is automatically adjusted to fit the
temporary area.
Some files that are created with DirectX or animation application cannot be captured.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1.12 Capture

1 - 33

1 - 34

1.12 Capture

TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

TOUCH SWITCH

FIGURES

2.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
Touch switch functions list
Reference

3
2.1 Setting Switch

Bit Switch

Turns on or off the bit device.

Turns on the specified bit device. (SET)
Turns off the specified bit device. (RESET)
Reverses (switches on or off) the current status of a specified bit device. (ALT)
Turns on the specified bit device while switch is pressed. (Momentary)

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

Word Switch

Changes the value of word devices.

Writes the set value to the specified word device. (Constant)
Writes the set word device value to the specified word device. (Indirect device)
Writes the set word device and the constant to the specified word device. (Constant
+ Indirect device)

2.3 Setting Word Switch

Go to Screen Switch

Switches the base screen and the windows screen.

Switches to the screen of which base screen No. that was displayed previously.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified according to specified
bit device ON/OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified
comparison expression, switches to the specified station No.

2.4 Setting Go To Screen

Switch

Change Station No. Switch

Switches the device of the actually monitored object to the same device in other
station.
Switches to the station No. specified as monitor target.
Switches to the specified station No. when the bit device (of which monitor target is
specified) turns ON/OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified
comparison expression, switches to the specified station No.

2.5 Setting Change Station No.

Switch

Special Function Switch

Switches to a screen such as the utility or a screen of the extended function or option
function.

2.6 Setting Special Function

Switch

Key Window DIsplay Switch

Displays the specified key window at the specified position.

Displays the cursor on the specified object.

2.7 Setting Key Window

Display Switch

Key Code Switch

Controls numerical input, key input of ASCII input, alarm list, data list , alarm
history, and advanced alarm.

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

LAMP

Switch

Enables multiple actions of the following switches.

GT16, GT SoftGOT1000 : Max. 135 actions
GT15
: Max. 129 actions
GT11
: Max. 123 actions
GT10
: Max. 122 actions

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Description

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Switch type

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2-1

Application Example
Comment display changes with each touch

Change the switching screen according to device status

2.3 Setting Word Switch

1 will be added to D10 with each touch.

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

Base screen 10

Base screen 1
ON

Line 1 checked

Line 2 checked

M10

Operate

D10 : 1
(Device for comment display)

D10 : 2

Return to the previously displayed screen

OFF
Changes the switching screen
according to the status of M10

Operate
starts
Base screen 20
Stop
with error

Switches different station No. among different screen types

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

Station 1

Graph 1

Graph 1

D10

100

D10

30

Graph 2
Back

The screen displayed previously appears

2-2

Base screen : Station 1 monitored Station 2

Window screen: Station 2 monitored

100

30

FIGURES

2.1 Setting Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch] from the menu.

TOUCH SWITCH

[Switch]

Action tab

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item
Action List

Description

Model

The set actions will be displayed in list format.

Select the actions to add to the Action List.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Click this button to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for the switch.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

(1) Bit
Click this button to set the word device value change for the switch
(2) Word
Click this button to make the settings in order that a screen such as the utility, the extended function or
option function is switched by the switch.

(3) SP Function
Click this button to make the settings in order that the base screen is switched by the switch.
(4) Screen Switching

DATA LIST

Click this button to make the settings in order that the station number is switched by the switch.
(5) Station No.
Click this button to set the key code of the key for object input.

(6) Key Code

Click this button to set the key window display for the switch.
(7) Key Window Display

(Continued to next page)

2.1 Setting Switch

2-3

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Add Action

Item

Description
Select an action to be utilized from the [Action List] and click the [Utilize] button to copy the selected action to the [Action
List].
Select an action to be edited from the [Action List] and click the [Edit] button to edit the action.
Select an action to be deleted from the [Action List] and click the [Delete] button to delete the action.

User ID for a
key input and
data change

Specify the ID for designating an object for which the key code is input. (0 to 65535)
(8) User ID for a key input and data change
Click this button to change the order of the action.
(9) Change Order
Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape)
Key

Bit

ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.

OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, set the device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the OFF shape is
switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:

Lamp

Word

Object Name

2-4

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Device:Sets the word device.
Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
ON Range: After setting the specified word device, click on [Exp] button to set the switch range for
ON/OFF shape.

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Action] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

(1) Bit
The followings can be set as the touch switch actions taken when the bit device turns ON/OFF.

FIGURES

Setting of the Action (Bit) dialog box

Item

Description

Model

Set the device of write destination.

Device

TOUCH SWITCH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Action

LAMP

Select the corresponding function to the bit device as write destination when touched.
Set
: Turns on bit when touched.
Alternate : Switches bit on or off when touched.
Reset
: Turns off bit when touched.
Momentary : Turns on bit while touched only.

4
(2) Word
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

The followings can be set for changing the word device value with the switch.
Setting of the Action (Word) dialog box

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Description

Model

Set the device of write destination.

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Select the data type of the value to be set in [Setting Value] and [Initial Value Condition].
(Fundamentals) 2.9 Available Numeric Data
Signed BIN16
BCD16

Unsigned BIN16
BCD32

Signed BIN32
Real

Unsigned BIN32
DATA LIST

Data Type

Select the type of the value to be written to the set device. Always select either type.
Constant
: Select this item to set a fixed value to the write destination word device. (32768 to 32767)
Indirect Device
: Select this item to set an indirect device to the write destination word device.

Setting Value

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

When Constant and Indirect Device are both selected, the value (Constant + Indirect Device) is written into the word
device.

Initial Value
Condition

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

If the value becomes the condition value when Constant and Indirect Device are both set in the [Setting Value], the
reset value is written into the specified word device.
Conditioin Value : Set the value as condition for writing the reset value into the specified word device.
Reset Value
: Set the value written into the word device when the condition value is satisfied.

2.1 Setting Switch

2-5

(3) SP Function
Click the [SP Function] button to display the following dialog box.
Set a function for [Switch Action] in the Action (SP Function) dialog box.
The following shows the settings for each function.

(a) [Ladder Monitor]

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to search for the set device at the ladder monitor start.

Ladder Search
Device
Use Onetouch Ladder
Jump

Set a device to be searched for.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Ladder Search
Mode
Specify Search
File

Select the search method. (Coil/Factor)

Select this item to enable specifying the program file to be searched.
This setting is valid only for the QCPU and QnACPU.
After selecting this item, specify a file name.
(Up to eight characters can be set.)

(b) [PX Developer Function Call]

Item

Description
Set the number for the PX Developer function to be called.
The number for the function set in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box is set for [No].

No.

Click the button, and then the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box is displayed.
This button can be clicked only when [PX Developer Function Call] is set for [Switch Action].
For the settings in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box, refer to the following manual.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3

(c)

For the other functions

Set a action for [Switch Action] and click the [OK] button.
For models compatible with extended actions, refer to the following.
2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

2-6

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

(4) Screen Switching

Make the following settings to switch windows using the switch.
For details of window switching, refer to the following.

FIGURES

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

Setting of Action (Screen Switching) dialog box

TOUCH SWITCH

3
Item

Model

Select the type of the window to be switched.

LAMP

Screen Type

Description

Select the action of switching screen.

Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen number which was displayed previously.
Select this item to switch to the base screen of which screen No. was displayed previously.
As GOT can store the displayed screen number including the current base screen, up to 10 base
screens can be switched based on the history.

Device

Select this item to switch to the base or window screen specified by the screen number,
according to the ON/OFF status or the current value of the specified device.
Before setting the device, select the data type of the monitor device. (Bit/Signed (BIN16)/BCD16)
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action.

Screen No.

Specify the target screen number when switching screens.

This item is available only when the screen to be switched is a base screen.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Back
(Previous/History)

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Select this item to switch to the base or window screen specified by the screen number.
After selecting, set the base or window screen number of the switching destination.
Click the [Browse] button to display the screen image dialog box.
Make the settings while checking the image of the currently edited screen on the dialog box.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Next Screen

Fixed

2.1 Setting Switch

2-7

(5) Station No.

When setting the station No. switching function with the touch switch, set the following actions.
For the details of the station No. switching function, refer to the following.
2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch
Setting of Action (Station No. Switching) dialog box

Item

Description
Select the action of switching station No.

Next Station

Mode

2-8

Host

Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.

Other

Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.

Set the network number and station number to be switched to in decimal.

Device

Select this item to switch to the station, specified by the No., based on the ON/OFF status of
current value of the specified device.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored. (Bit/Signed BIN16/BCD16)
After selecting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action.

Set the target to be switched.

Project
: Select this item to switch the whole project by station number.
Screen Type
: Select this item to switch the specified screen by station number.
When selecting [Screen Type], set the following.
Screen Type : Set the screen to be switched.

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

(6) Key Code

FIGURES

When setting a key code to the switch, specify the following action.

Item

Description

Model

Specify the key code.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

Key Code Type

Numerical/ASCII Input
Alarm/Data List

Historical Trend Graph

Document Display

: Select this item to input the key code for numeric value input/ASCII input.
: Select this item to input the key code for data list, user alarm list display, system
alarm list display, alarm history display, advanced user alarm display or advanced
system alarm display.
: Select this item to input a key code to the historical trend graph.

Action

Select this item to input a numeric value or character using the key code.
After checking this item, input the numeric value/character and press [Convert to Key Code] to
convert automatically into the key code.
Check this item to set an action by a key code.
After checking this item, select and set the action.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Code Setting

LAMP

: Select this item to input a key code in the document display.

For a single switch, only one of the key codes above can be set.
ASCII

TOUCH SWITCH

(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

POINT
(1) Specifying multiple key codes
Multiple key codes can be registered to one switch.
By registering multiple key codes, switches for inputting character strings at a time can be created.

6
MITSUBISHI
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

004D : M
0049 : I
0054 : T
0053 : S
0055 : U
0042 : B
0049 : I
0053 : S
0048 : H
0049 : I
0000 : (Settle)

(2) Character code reading/writing order

The reading/writing order of the character code set to the switch can be selected according to the specification
of the controller to be monitored.
6. ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

2.1 Setting Switch

2-9

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

If a switch to which multiple key codes are registered is arranged on a usercreated key window, only the first
key code can be executed.
When inputting key codes in the advanced alarm, only the first key code can be executed.

DATA LIST

Input "MITSUBISHI" at a time.

(7) Key Window Display

When setting the key window display switch to a switch, specify the following action.

Item

Description

Model

X coordinate
Specify the position (coordinate values) where the key window is
displayed.
X : Specify the coordinate value of the X axis. (0 to 639)
Y : Specify the coordinate value of the Y axis (0 to 479)

Key Window
Position

Y coordinate

POINT
Setting the key window display target object and the key window
The object that has the same user ID as the one specified at [User ID for a key input and data change] in the Action
tab is taken as the target object.
The key window that is set in the key window setting in project or screen units is displayed.
(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting

(8) User ID for a key input and data change

This user ID specifies the object to be operated when operating advanced alarm, historical trend graph or others
with the key code.
Specify the same value for the [User ID for a key input and data change] of the switch and the [User ID] of each
object.
Setting of switch and advanced alarm

Set the same value.

2 - 10

2.1 Setting Switch

(9) Change Order

FIGURES

To change the order of action, specify as shown below.

TOUCH SWITCH

3
Item

Description

Model

LAMP

Executes in the order from the action displayed at the top first.
Since the key code is executed first, the order of action may not be changed.
The second and later actions can be changed by the user.
Click this button to change the order of the selected action to one earlier.

Click this button to change the order of the selected action to one later.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Click this button to set the order created by the [Up] button/[Down] button.
(The item cannot be used with the operation panel.)
Click this button to clear the order created by the [Up] button/[Down] button.
(The item cannot be used with the operation panel.)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Order of
Action

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 11

 Style tab

Preview list

Item

Description

Preview List

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

Reverse Switch
Area

Select this item to reverse the switch shape display.

Shape

Set the switch shape.

Frame Color

Select the frame color of the switch shape.

Switch Color

Select the lamp color of the switch shape.

Background

Select the background color and the pattern for the switch shape.

Color
Shape Attribute

Pattern

2 - 12

Model

2.1 Setting Switch

The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch

Example:

Background :
Pattern

Switch

Background

For switches, the comment set for basic comment or comment group can be used as the texts displayed on the
object by selecting a text type.
The text types are described below.

FIGURES

Text tab

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Text

Description

Model

Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.

Indirect Text
Set a comment of basic comment.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(Basic
Comment)
Comment
Group

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Set a comment that has been set for comment group.

For basic comment and comment group, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

The setting items differ depending on text type.

Setting items of each text type are shown on the following pages.

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 13

(1) Text

Preview list

Item

Description

Preview List

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings
Text Only

Copy OFF
ON

Model

: Copies all text settings.

: Copies texts only.

Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF
ON
: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

OFF
Font

Text Size

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

6 8dot font
12-dot high quality Mincho
12-dot standard font 12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot standard font 16-dot high quality Mincho
Stroke

Windows

16-dot high quality Gothic

TrueType Mincho
TrueType Gothic

font

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Script
Common settings
of Display
Position

Select a character set available for the specified font.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Select an effect for the text.
: Displays the text in italic characters.
: Displays the text in underlined characters.

Text Color

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

(Continued to next page)

2 - 14

2.1 Setting Switch

1
Description

Text

Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)

Press the [Enter] key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Select the text position.

Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

Text

LAMP
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
object frame. (0 to 100)

7
DATA LIST

Offset to Frame

Offset to frame

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Text Settings

Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the

object.
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

TOUCH SWITCH

Display Position

Model
FIGURES

Item

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 15

(2) Indirect text (Basic comment)

Preview list

Item

Description

Preview List

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings
Text Only

Copy OFF

ON

/
Copy ON

Model

OFF

: Copies all text settings.

: Copies texts only.

Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF

ON

: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

Text Size

Select the character size

For details of the size, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Text Color

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

Select a display format to the text.

Text Settings

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Set this item when changing the switch text display from the device value.
Device1
Offset*1
Device2

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The comment (basic comment) of the same number as the value stored in the set device is
displayed.
Select this item when adding the value of another device to the [Device1] value.
After selecting this item, set the device which stores the value to be added.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to next page)

2 - 16

2.1 Setting Switch

1
Description

Offset
Preview No.

FIGURES

Set a comment No. for the text of the switch displayed on the screen of GT Designer3.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed.
Clicking the button displays the edit dialog box to edit the comment.

TOUCH SWITCH

2.1 Text tab (2) (a) Edit Comment dialog box

HINT

Make the setting when changing the text displayed on the switch by a device value.
Device 1

(1) When only the [Device1] is set.

10

Touch switch ON display

Touch switch OFF display

LAMP

The comment (basic comment) of the same number as

the value of [Device1] is displayed, regardless of the ON/
OFF status of the switch.

Line A operation

Line A operation

Comment No. 10 is displayed.

(2) When [Device1] and [Device2] are set.

Device 1

10

Device 2

Touch switch ON display

Touch switch OFF display

The comment (basic comment) of the same number as

the addition value of [Device1] + [Device2] is displayed,

Line E operation

Line E operation

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

regardless of the ON/OFF status of the switch.

Comment No. 14 is displayed.

(3) When [Device1] and [Fixed] are set.

The comment (basic comment) of the same number as
the addition value of [Device1] + [Constant ON] is

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Constant

Model

Select this item to add another value to the [Device1] value, depending on the display status (ON/
OFF) of the switch.
After checking, set values to be added when the device is ON and OFF.

Device 1

10

Fixed ON

10

Device 1
Fixed OFF

Touch switch ON display

Touch switch OFF display

displayed when the switch is ON.

When the switch is OFF, the comment (basic comment)
Line B operation

of the same number as the addition value of [Device1] +

Line A operation

[Constant OFF] is displayed.

Comment No. 11 is displayed. Comment No. 10 is displayed.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Item

The comment (basic comment) of the same number as

the addition value of [Device1] + [Device2] + [Constant

Device 1

10

Device 2

Device 2

Fixed ON

Fixed OFF

Touch switch ON display

Touch switch OFF display

ON] is displayed when the switch is ON.

When the switch is OFF, the comment (basic comment)
of the same number as the addition value of [Device1] +
[Device2] + [Constant OFF] is displayed.

Line G operation

Line F operation

Comment number 16 is displayed. Comment number 15 is displayed.

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 17

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

(4) When [Device1], [Device2], and [Fixed] are set.

10

DATA LIST

7
Device 1

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.

Item

Comment

2 - 18

Description
Edit the comment for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

FIGURES

(3) Comment group

Preview list

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Copy Range

Copy ON

: Copies all text settings.

: Copies texts only.

Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF

ON

: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.
Set the copy range.
All Settings
Text Only

ON
OFF

Preview
Column No.

Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3.

(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.

(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

Device

Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
After selecting, set a device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Size*1

Comment No.

Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.

When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
After selecting this item, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots, default : 8)

Set the number of the comment to be used.

Fixed : Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.
After selecting, set the number of the comment group to be used by directly inputting it.
Device : Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
After selecting, set a device.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed.
Clicking the button displays the Edit dialog box to edit the comment.

DATA LIST

Adjust Text

Text Settings

Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.

After selecting, set the number of the comment group to be used by directly inputting it.
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Fixed

Comment
Group

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

OFF=ON

Copy OFF

Model

2.1 Text tab (3) (a) Edit Comment dialog box

Preview No.

Set a comment No. to be displayed on the screen of GT Designer3.

(Continued to next page)

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 19

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Preview List

Description

Item

Description
Font

Text Size

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

12-dot high quality Mincho 16-dot high quality Gothic
12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot standard font
Stroke
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Model
12-dot standard font
16-dot high quality Mincho

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Select this item to change the comment attribute.
Text Color: Select the display color of the text.

Text Settings

Change
Attribute of
Comment
Setting

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in bold format.
Solid Color: Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Select the text position.

: Select the horizontal position.

Alignment

: Select the vertical position.

Offset to frame
Offset to Frame

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
the object frame.Up to 100 dots can be set.

Text

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.

Item

Description

Column No.

Select the row No. to edit the comment.

Comment

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

2 - 20

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

FIGURES

Extended tab

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

4
Description

Security Level
(Display/Input)

Model
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting
The number of [Input] must be larger than that for [Display].

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Delay

Select the delay

After selecting the delay, set the delay time. (1 to 5)
None
: No delay time will occur.
ON
: Select the item to turn on the device after pressing the touch switch for the set time.
This setting can prevent an incorrect operation from occurring.
OFF
: Select the item to turn off the device in the set time after operating the switch. The device
is on during the set time.
Press Twice : Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is touched once and then
touched for the second time within the set time.
After selecting this item, set the [Style] and [Text] for the simultaneous press occurrence.
Click the [to Style Tab] and [to Text Tab] buttons and set the [Press Twice] in [Preview
List].

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Extended

Select this item to disable simultaneous press of a switch.

After selecting this item, select the switch operation when simultaneous press is disabled.

(Continued to next page)

7
DATA LIST

Press*1

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Simultaneous

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 21

Item

Description
Select the time the buzzer is on when the switch is touched.
Always
: The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Only if conditions are met : The sound is on only when the switch is touched and the trigger has been
satisfied.
None
: The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is touched.
When [Always ] or [Only if conditions are met] is selected, set the followings.
One Shot
: Select this item to output sound only at the moment the switch is touched.
During Push
: Select this item to keep outputting sound whie the switch is touched.

Buzzer

Select this item to set a user ID (1 to 65535)

When the user ID is set, the following operation is enabled.
To specify the used object in the operation log.

User ID

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Extended

Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5 )-Gothic

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

KANJI Region

[Japan]

[China (GB) -Mincho]

This setting is available when any of the following fonts is selected.

12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot high quality Mincho
12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot high quality Mincho
16-dot high quality Gothic
Stroke

Operation Log
Target

Layer

Category

Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1, refer to the following.

2 - 22

2.1 Setting Switch

Model

*1 Simultaneous Press (Prohibition)

The following list shows the actions of the switch when Simultaneous Press is set.

FIGURES

Switch action

Switch operation

On Preference

Off Preference

At operation 1. : Remains OFF.

At operation 2. : Turns ON.
At operation 3. : Turns OFF.

At operation 1. : Remains OFF.

At operation 2. : Remains OFF.
At operation 3. : Remains OFF.

1. Press the touch invalid area of the switch.

2. Slide the finger to the touch valid area of the switch.
3. Release the switch.

1. Press the touch valid area of the switch.

2. Slide to the invalid touch area of the switch.
3. Release the GOT screen.

TOUCH SWITCH

3
At operation 1. : Turns ON.
At operation 2. : Turns OFF.
At operation 3. : Remains OFF.
LAMP

At operation 1. : Turns ON.

At operation 2. : Remains ON.
At operation 3. : Turns OFF.

At operation 1. : Turns ON.

At operation 2. : Remains ON.
At operation 3. : Remains ON.
At operation 4. : Turns OFF.

1. Touch the switch A where Simultaneous Press is set.

2. Touch the switch B.
(The switch action when the simultaneous press prohibition is set is the same as
that when the simultaneous press prohibition is not set.)

At operation 1. : Turns ON.

At operation 2. : Turns OFF.
At operation 3. : Remains OFF.
At operation 4. : Remains OFF.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Touch the switch.

Touch an area where no object is located.
Release the switch.
Release the area where no object is located.

5
<Action of A>
At operation 1. : Turns ON.
At operation 2. : Remains ON.
<Action of B>
At operation 1. : Remains OFF.
At operation 2. : Remains OFF.

<Action of A>
At operation 1. : Turns ON.
At operation 2. : Turns OFF.
<Action of B>
At operation 1. : Remains OFF.
At operation 2. : Remains OFF.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1.
2.
3.
4.

<Action of A>
At operation 1. : Remains OFF.
<Action of B>
At operation 1. : Turns ON.

7
DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

1. Arrange the switch A (simultaneous press prohibition is set) on the front layer and
arrange the switch B (simultaneous press prohibition is not set) on the back layer.
Then, press the part where the switches overlap.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 23

POINT
When sliding the finger from the touch key invalid area to the touch key valid area across the screen, the GOT
recognizes the operation as touching multiple areas simultaneously.
The GOT cannot distinguish between sliding the finger across the areas and touching different areas
simultaneously.
Therefore, the GOT recognizes sliding the finger across the areas as touching multiple areas simultaneously.
When sliding the finger from the touch key valid area to the touch key invalid area, the GOT also recognizes the
operation as touching multiple areas simultaneously.

Touch the touch key

valid area and the touch key
invalid area simultaneously.

2 - 24

2.1 Setting Switch

Slide the finger across

the touch key valid area and
the touch key invalid area.

FIGURES

Trigger tab

TOUCH SWITCH

Item

Description

Model

Select the trigger for displaying the object.

Trigger Type

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Ordinary

Range

ON

OFF

Bit Trigger
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
For details of each item, refer to the following.

OFF

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Range

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Settings

Bit Trigger

Select this item for repeat the set operation while the switch is touched.

Start Delay

Set the time from when the switch is touched until the start of operation repeat.
This can be set in the range of 0.1 to 2 seconds (0.1 second units). (Default : 0.3)

Cycle Period

Set a cycle for repeating the operation.

This can be set in the range of 0.1 to 1 secondes (0.1 second units). (Default : 0.2)

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Repeat the
operation while
the switch is
pressed

LAMP

POINT
Operations for which auto repeat while switch is pressed can be set.
For operations for which auto repeat can be set while switch is pressed, refer to the following.

7
DATA LIST

2.10 Precautions

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.1 Setting Switch

2 - 25

 Script tab

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28.3 Object Script

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Extended

Security Level
(Display)

security

4)

Security Level
(Input)

input_security

2)

Delay

delay

2)

beep

2)

Buzzer, One Shot/

During Push
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

2 - 26

2.1 Setting Switch

FIGURES

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the bit switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged bit switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Bit Switch] from the menu.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

[Switch]

Device tab

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item

Description

Action

Select the function corresponding to the bit device as write destination.

Momentary : Turns on bit only when being touched.
Alternate
: Switches bit ON/OFF with each touch.
Se t
: Turns ON bit when touched.
Reset
: Turns OFF bit when touched.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Switch Action

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Click this switch to add actions to the switch function

2.1 Action tab

Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape)

Lamp

ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.

OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
DATA LIST

Key

When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting this item, set the device.
Bit

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set this item to reflect the bit device of the bit switch to the bit device of the lamp function.

(Continued to next page)

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

2 - 27

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Device

Model

Set bit device as write destination.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Description
When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the OFF shape
is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
Device : Sets the word device.

Lamp

Word

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Display range
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Range] button to set the switch
range for ON/OFF shape.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Object Name

2 - 28

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
This Object Name is also displayed in other than the [Device] tabs.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

Model

(a) If the following cases occur while a touch switch with bit momentary setting is being touched, the bit
device may remain ON even when the operator's finger is released from the switch.
GOT hardware error
GOT power-off
Communication error with a controller
Set timeout time of consecutive ON time to the relevant device as appropriate and turn the bit device off
forcibly by controller at the occurrence of timeout.
(b) When base screen switching request is performed while the touch switch is touched, the screen switches
to a window screen after the operator's finger is released off the switch.
When touching the touch switch while the targeted bit device is ON, the OFF timing of the device
depends on whether the execution condition is satisfied or not.

LAMP

When the execution condition is satisfied

Bit device turns off when the finger is released.
When the execution condition is not satisfied
Bit device turns off when the finger is touched.

(a) When "Key" is selected

Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched. With the setting, the OFF
shape appears when the touch switch is released, regardless of the device status. Therefore, select [Bit]
or [Word] to show the device status.
M100
ON

Run

M100
ON

Run

ON shape appears when the touch switch is

touched.

OFF shape appears when the touch switch is

released regardless of the device status.

(b) When "Bit" or "Word" is selected

Select this item to switch the touch switch image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the device tab, the device status can be shown by touch switch (lamp
function).

Run

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Example: Bit: M100 Setting

M100
ON

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(2) Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(c)

2
TOUCH SWITCH

(1) Touch switch operation when bit momentary is set

FIGURES

POINT

M100
OFF

Stop

7
DATA LIST

OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

ON shape appears when M100 is ON

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

2 - 29

 Style tab
The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab
The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Trigger tab

2 - 30

2.2 Setting Bit Switch

FIGURES

2.3 Setting Word Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the word switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged word switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Word Switch] from the menu.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

[Switch]

Device tab

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Description

Model

Set the device of write destination.

Data Type

Switch Action

Setting Value

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Select the data type of the value to be set in [Setting Value].
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Unsigned BIN32

Fixed : Select this item to write a fixed value into the word device set as write
destination, and then set the value. (-32768 to 32767)
Indirect Device: Select this item to write the specified value into a word device, and then
set the word device.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When [Fixed] and [Indirect Device] are both checked, the value (fixed value + indirect
value) is written into the word device.

Initial Value Condition

Select this item for setting the condition value and reset value.
This item can be set when [Indirect Device] is selected.

Key
Lamp
Bit

DATA LIST

Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape)
ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.
OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.

When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting this item, set the device
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to next page)

2.3 Setting Word Switch

2 - 31

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Item

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Description

Model

When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the
OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
Device : Sets the word device.

Lamp

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the
switch range for ON/OFF shape.

Word

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
This Object Name is also displayed in other than the [Device] tabs.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

Object Name

HINT
Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(1) When Key is selected
Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched. With the setting, the OFF shape
appears when the touch switch is released, regardless of the device status. Therefore, select [Bit] or [Word] to
show the device status.
M100
ON

Run

M100
ON

Run

ON shape appears when the touch switch is

touched.

OFF shape appears when the touch switch is

released regardless of the device status.

(2) When Bit or Word is selected

Select this item to switch the image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the device tab, the device status can be shown by touch switch (lamp
function).
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100
ON

Run
ON shape appears when M100 is ON

2 - 32

2.3 Setting Word Switch

M100
OFF

Stop
OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

Style tab

FIGURES

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab

2
TOUCH SWITCH

The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
LAMP

The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Trigger tab

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.3 Setting Word Switch

2 - 33

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the Go to Screen switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged Go to Screen switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch]

[Go To Screen Switch] from the menu.

Next Screen tab

Item

Description

Model

Select the screen type of switching destination.

Screen Type

Base

Switches to base screen.

Overlap Window1

Switches to or display overlap window1 screen.

Overlap Window2

Switches to or display overlap window2 screen.

Overlap Window3

Switches to or display overlap window3 screen.

Overlap Window4

Switches to or display overlap window4 screen.

Overlap Window5

Switches to or display overlap window5 screen.

Superimpose
Window1

Switches to or display superimpose window1.

Superimpose
Window2

Switches to or display superimpose window2.

Dialog Window

Switches to or displays dialog window screen.

(Continued to next page)

2 - 34

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

1
Item

Description

Model

Back
(Previous/History)*1
Next Screen

Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number.
After selecting, set the base/window screen number of switching destination.
Click the [Browse] button to display the [Screen Image List] dialog box.
Make the settings while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.

Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen number that was displayed previously.
This item is available only when switching base screen.
As GOT can store displayed screen numbers including the current base screen, up to 10 base
screens can be switched based on the history.

Device*2

Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number according to
the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified device.
Before setting device, select data type of monitor device.
Bit
Signed BIN16
BCD16
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set an action.

Screen No.

Specify the target screen number when switching screens.

This item is available only when the screen to be switched is a base screen.

TOUCH SWITCH

Fixed

FIGURES

Select the action of switching screen.

LAMP

Click this switch to add actions to the switch function.

2.1 Action tab
Click this switch to add actions to the switch function.

Bit

ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.

OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting this item, set the device.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Key

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When the word device set in [Device] is within the range specified in [ON Range], the OFF shape
is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
Device : Sets the word device.

Word

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Lamp

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Display range
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the switch range
for ON/OFF shape.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Next Screen] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Object Name

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

2 - 35

HINT
Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(1) When "Key" is selected
Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched. With the setting, the OFF shape
appears when the touch switch is released, regardless of the device status. Therefore, select [Bit] or [Word] to
show the device status.
M100
ON

Run

M100
ON

Run

ON shape appears when the touch switch is

touched.

OFF shape appears when the touch switch is

released regardless of the device status.

(2) When Bit or Word is selected

Select this item to switch the touch switch image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the [Next Screen] tab, the device status can be shown by the touch switch
(lamp function).
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100
ON

Run
ON shape appears when M100 is ON

2 - 36

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

M100
OFF

Stop
OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

*1 Back (previous/history)
Select the hierarchy mode or history mode using the specified touch switch.
This is fixed to history mode for GT10. (History preservation mode cannot be used.)

FIGURES

Hierarchy mode (Upper tier switch mode)

Pressing the touch switch display, i.e., switches to the base screen set as the upper tier.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.

1)
Base 1

2)
Base 12

Base 23
3)

When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the base screen
12 is pressed, the base screen1, that is set as the upper tier, will be displayed.

TOUCH SWITCH

Example:

History mode (Previous screen switch mode)

Pressing the touch switch returns to the base screen that was previously displayed.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.

Base 12

Base 23

3)

When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the base
screen12 is pressed, the base screen23, that was previously displayed, will be displayed again.
(After this, whenever the touch switch is pressed, the screen will return to base screen12 base screen1.)

POINT
Hierarchy/history mode information
If GOT is powered off, the hierarchy/history information become invalid.
Therefore, once GOT is powered off, and then on again, the screen will not be switched based on the previous
hierarchy/history.
For details of how to save history information in a CF card, refer to the following.
(2) Storing the history information in a CF card

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

The hierarchy mode is set as default.

When using the "Previous" touch switch as history mode, carry out either of the following operations.
(a) Set the history mode on GT Designer3.
Select [Common]

2.

Select [History] for [Back Screen Switching].

[GOT Environmental Setting]

[Screen Switching/Window] from the menu.

7
DATA LIST

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting

(b) Switching to history mode using the GOT internal device (GS450.b14)
Turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b14.
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application examples, refer to the following.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

(2) (c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

(1) Method of switching between the hierarchy mode and history mode

1.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Base 1

2)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1)

LAMP

Example:

2 - 37

(2) Storing the history information in a CF card

When history mode is used, up to 10 screens of history information can be stored into a CF card.
By using the stored history information can return to the screen before GOT is powered off.
(a) How to store the history information
Enabling the history information to be stored in a CF card on GT Designer3.

1.

In [Common], select [GOT Environmental Setting]

2.

Set [History] for [Back Screen Switching], and select the item [Store history to the memory card].

[Screen Switching/Window] from the menu.

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting

Enabling the history information to be stored in a CF card using the GOT internal device (GS450.b13).
When the history mode is set (GS450.b14 is on), turn on the GOT internal device GS450.b13to enable
the history information to be stored in a CF card.
Use the status observation function to turn on the above device.
For application examples, refer to the following.
(c) Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device
(b) Operation overview
The history information is stored into a CF card when switching screens.
After powering on GOT, the historical information stored in the CF card is read when switching the initial
screen.
Run

Line A status

Line ctrl status

Pro. target vol.

150

300

Pow.

Run

Stop

Lad.

Password

Screen switching
action
History mode action 1) After switching the screen, turn power
OFF.

1)
GOT powered OFF

Run

Line A status

GOT powered ON

Line ctrl status

No.1

Pro. target vol.

No.2

150

300

Pow.

Run

Stop

Lad.

Password

2)

2 - 38

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

3)

2) After turning power ON, touch the

Previous switch of history mode to return to
the screen before power-OFF.
3) After turning power ON, screen can be
switched to the 10th screen before powerOFF.

Setting history mode

Making the setting in the status
ocservation function of project
Set the trigger observation cycle as
[Ordinary]

LAMP

Setting for storing history

information in a CF card

FIGURES

Setting example for switching the mode using the GOT internal device
Set the history mode at the first line of status observation function.
(After GOT is powered ON, it switches to the history mode instantly.)
When switching from the hierarchy mode to the history mode during monitoring, if screen change has been
done, the screen information within GOT might be lost.
In this case, it is impossible to return to the previous screens as the history.
When the history mode is used, it is recommended to switch to the history mode instantly after powering
GOT on.

TOUCH SWITCH

(c)

(b) Once changed from the hierarchy mode to the history mode, the mode cannot be returned to the hierarchy
mode even by turning GS450.b14 off.
To return to the hierarchy mode, power off the GOT.
This also applies to GS450.b13.
When switching from the Hierarchy mode to the History mode using the GOT internal device (GS450.b14),
set the Hierarchy mode for GT Designer3.
If the History mode is set for GT Designer3, the ON/OFF of GS450.b14?ON/OFF is invalid.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

(c)

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(a) If the history information is stored into a CF card, do not change the screen switching device value in the
controller while GOT is off.
As the history information while GOT is off is not saved, it is impossible to switch back to the screen as
controlled in controller.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(3) Cautions

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

2 - 39

*2 Device (Switch base/window screen according to ON/OFF status/current value of specified device.)
Set the following actions.
Switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number according to the ON/OFF status of the
specified device.
When the current value of specified device corresponds to the set comparison expressions, switch to the
base/window screen specified by the screen number.
(Up to 64 comparison expressions can be set.)

(1) When specifying bit device

After setting the bit device, click the [Detail Settings] button, and set the action when switching screens on the
following dialog box.
Setting of Details of Action dialog box

Item

Description

No.

Select this item for switching to the base/window screen specified by the screen number when the specified
device turns ON/OFF
Set the screen number of the switching destination screen.

Hold

Select this item when making the settings in order the screen will not be switched when the specified device
turns ON/OFF.

ON/OFF

2 - 40

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

(2) When specifying word device

After setting the word device, click the [Detail Settings] button, and set the action when switching screens on the
following dialog box.

FIGURES

Setting of the Details of Action dialog box

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

Item
Preview List

Description
Displays the set status for each condition.
Creates a new condition

LAMP

Deletes the condition

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

Switching Type
Indirect
Hold

: Switch to the base/window screen specified by the screen number when the specified device value corresponds to the
set condition.
Set the screen number of the target screen on the Spin box.
Click the [Browse] button to display the screen image list dialog box.
Set the screen, while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
: Switch to the screen number corresponding to the specified word device when the specified device value corresponds
to the set conditional expression.
: Do not switch screen when specified device value corresponds to the set conditional expression.

HINT
How to Switch Screens
Sequence program also can be used to switch screen.
Create a sequence program that writes the value of the device for switching each screen number by using the
value of the screen number to be switched.
By using this sequence program, the base/window screen can be switched without using the touch switch function.

Base Screen No.10

Base Screen No.1

M0

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

No.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Range

M0
M0VP K10 D100

M0VP K10 D100

No sequence program can be used to switch base/window screen when GOT internal devices (GB, GD, GS) are
used as base/window screen switching device.

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

2 - 41

POINT
(1) How to erase windows
When erasing window screens, touch the close button, or set the switching screen device value to "0" by
using the touch switch or sequence program. (Fixed: 0)
(2) Timing to switch screens
The switching timing for base/window screens can be selected with ON or OFF (synchronization mode).
For how to set this item, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting
If the touch switch is kept touched for a long time, this will delay the timing when the actual screen is
displayed, and the screen may not appear as specified with the device value.
When using status observation function to monitor switching screen device, the value different from actually
displayed screen No. may be stored, depending on the timing of scanning.
Lift
Touch

Switch to screen
No. 20
Touch switch
Switch screen
Device: GD10

Actual displayed
screen

20

10

Base screen
No.10
10

Monitor screen switching device

(Save the value of screen switching
device GD10 according to the status
observation function)

Base screen
No.10
20

Do not switch
display screen.

Base screen
No.20
20

Switch display screen

to base screen No.20

In this case, set the script function for each screen as the following, in order that the screen is displayed as
specified by the screen number.
Screen script
Trigger
: GB100 (Ordinary ON, Rise)
Script
: [w: GD87] = [w: GD10];
Set the GOT special register GS386 (screen script initial action) to "0" to execute the script function after
switching screens.

2 - 42

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

Style tab

FIGURES

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab

2
TOUCH SWITCH

The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
LAMP

The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
(The setting item [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is not available for this switch.)
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

2.1 Trigger tab

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.4 Setting Go To Screen Switch

2 - 43

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the change station No. switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged change station No. switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch]

[Change Station No. Switch] from the menu.

Next Station tab

Item

Description

Model

Select the action of switching station No.

Host

Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.

Other

Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.

Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch
destination in decimal.

Device*1

Select this item to switch to the station specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or
current value of the specified device.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit
Signed BIN16
BCD16
After setting the device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the actions.

Next Station

All
Screen Type
Mode

:Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.

:Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
Click this switch to add actions to the switch function.
2.1 Action tab

(Continued to next page)

2 - 44

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

1
Description

Model

Key

Bit

FIGURES

Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape)
ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.
OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.

When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, set the device.

TOUCH SWITCH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When the range of specified word device is set to [ON Range] in [Device], the OFF shape is
switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
Device : Sets the word device.

Word

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Display range
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Range] button to set the switch
range for ON/OFF shape.

LAMP

Lamp

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Next Station] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

POINT
The required settings for switching station No.
Enabling/Disabling station No.switching for each screen
[Screen Property] from the menu, and set the [Switch Station No.] on the [Basic] tab in the
Select [Screen]
[Screen Property] dialog box.
Setting the station No.switching device
(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

2 - 45

HINT
(1) Lamp
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(a) When "Key" is selected
Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched. With the setting, the OFF
shape appears when the touch switch is released, regardless of the device status. Therefore, select [Bit]
or [Word] to show the device status.
M100
ON

Run

M100
ON

Run

ON shape appears when the touch switch is

touched.

OFF shape appears when the touch switch is

released regardless of the device status.

(b) When Bit or Word is selected

Select this item to switch the touch switch image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the basic tab, the device status can be shown by touch switch (lamp
function).
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100
ON

Run
ON shape appears when M100 is ON

2 - 46

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

M100
OFF

Stop
OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.

Set the following actions.

Switch station No. according to the ON/OFF status of the specified bit device.
Switch to the screen specified by station No. when current value of specified word device corresponds to the
set condition. (Up to 64 conditions can be set.)

(1) When specifying bit device

2
TOUCH SWITCH

After setting the bit device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action for switching station No. on the
following dialog box.

FIGURES

*1 Device (Switch station No. to be monitored according to the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified
device.)

Setting of Details Of Action dialog box

Host

Select this item to monitor the controller connected with GOT.

Other

Select this item to switch monitoring destination to other station.

Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch destination
in decimal.

Hold

Select this item when making the settings in order that the screen will not be switched when the specified
device turns ON/OFF.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

ON/OFF

Description

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item

LAMP

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

2 - 47

(2) When specifying word device

After setting the word device, click the [Detail Setting] button to set the action on switching screen according to
the device status.
Refer to the following for the details about setting method.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting
Details of action (word) dialog box

Preview list

Item
Preview List

Description
Displays the set status for each condition.
Creates a new condition
Deletes the condition

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

Range

Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
Select the displaying method for switching station No. when the specified word device value corresponds to the condition set in
Range.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Switching Type

2 - 48

Host
Other

: Monitor the controller connected with GOT when the specified device value corresponds to the set condition.
: Switch the monitor destination to other station when the device value corresponds to the set condition.
Set the network No. (in [NW No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as the switch destination in
decimal.
Indirect Device : Switch to monitoring destination corresponding to the specified device when the specified device value corresponds
to the set condition.
Hold
: Do not switch monitoring destination when the specified device value corresponds to the set condition.

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

Style tab

FIGURES

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab

2
TOUCH SWITCH

The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
LAMP

The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.5 Trigger tab

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.5 Setting Change Station No. Switch

2 - 49

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the special function switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged special function switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch]

[Special Function Switch] from the menu.

SP Function tab

Item

Description

Model

Select the extended function to be displayed.

For GT SoftGOT1000, some functions do not operate even though the functions are set.
For the details, refer to the following manual.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version 3 Operating Manual

Switch Action

Utility

Displays the utility.

Communication
Settings

Displays communication settings screen

Key Window

Displays the key window for numerical/ASCII input function.

Start HardCopy

Starts hard copy function. (Starts to collect screen data)

Abort HardCopy

Aborts the hard copy function presently processed (Aborts to collect screen data).

Setup

Displays setup screen

Change Brightness

Displays the change brightness screen.

Password
(Security Level)
Clock Setting

Displays the screen for changing security levels.

The item is enabled when the security level authentication is selected in the system environment.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting
Displays clock setting screen.

(Continued to next page)

2 - 50

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

1
Description

Model
FIGURES

Item

Displays data maintenance screen.

Advanced Recipe

Displays the advanced recipe Information screen.

Logging

Displays the logging information.

Preservation
Function

Displays the debug screen.

Operation Log

Displays the operation log information.

System Monitor

Displays the screen of system monitor function.

Device Monitor

Displays the screen for the device monitor function.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Data Maintenance

LAMP

Displays the network monitor screen.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Network Monitor

Displays the screen of ladder monitor function.

(1) Ladder monitor detail settings

Ladder Editor

Displays the ladder editor screen.

Intelligent Module
monitor

Displays the intelligent unit monitor screen.

Servo Amplifier
Monitor

Displays the servo amplifier monitor screen.

Q Motion Monitor

Displays the Q motion monitor screen.

CNC Monitor

Displays the CNC monitor screen.

Network Unit
Display

Displays the network unit status display screen.

System Alarm
Display

Displays system alarm and resets GOT error.

A List Editor

Displays the screen of A list editor function.

FX List Editor

Displays the screen of FX list editor function.

This item is not available for the GT1030 and GT1020.

GOT Start Time

Displays the day/time the GOT has started, total run hour, and present time.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Ladder Monitor

Displays the window for test function.

Self Check

(Fundamentals) 9.3 Switching ON/OFF the Device (Test Function)

Displays self check screen.

(Continued to next page)

DATA LIST

Test Window

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Switch Action

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

2 - 51

Item

Description

Batch Self Check

Displays the self check results menu screen.

Maintenance Report

Displays maintenance report screen.

Clean / Disable
Screen

Displays the screen for screen clear.

PX Developer
Function Call

Switch Action

Starts PX Developer.
A number for the function set in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box is set for [No.].
(2) PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box

CNC Data Input/

Output

Displays the CNC data I/O screen.

FX List Monitor

Displays the screen for the FX list monitor.

This item is not available for the GT1030 and GT1020.

Operator
Information
Management
Log-in/Log-out
(Operator
Authentication)
Password Change
(Operator
Authentication)

Fingerprint
Authentication
Backup/Restore

Displays the operator setting menu screen.

The item is enabled only when the operator authentication is selected.
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the screens for login and logout.
The item is enabled only when the operator authentication is selected.
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the operator management screen.
The item is enabled only when the operator authentication is selected.
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the Fingerprint information management screen.
The item is enabled for the operator authentication only.
(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting
Displays the screens for backups and restorations.
Displays the SFC monitor screen.

SFC Monito
USB Device Display

(3) SFC monitor detail settings

Displays the USB device status display screen.
Displays the multimedia screen.

Multimedia

Object Name

2 - 52

(4) Multimedia detail settings

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Action] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

Model

(1) Ladder monitor detail settings

FIGURES

By setting the following items, the set device can be searched for automatically when the ladder monitor is
started from the special function switch. (One-touch ladder jump function)

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Description

Model

Check this item to search the set device at ladder monitor start.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Ladder Search
Mode

Select a search method from coil-search or defect search.

Specify Search File

Check this item to specify a program file to be searched.

This setting is valid only for the QCPU and QnACPU.
After the check, specify a file name.
(Up to eight characters can be set.)

POINT
When using ladder search settings
Select [Common]
[GOT Environmental Setting]
[GOT Setup] from the menu.
Select the item [Enable GOT Setup] and then, select [Read out a sequence program automatically] in the [Ladder
Monitor] tab.
(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Use One-touch
Ladder Jump

Set a device to be searched for.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Ladder Search
Device

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

For the ladder monitor function, refer to the following.

DATA LIST

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

2 - 53

(2) PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box

Set the PX Developer function to be called.

For the settings in the PX Developer Function Call Setting dialog box, refer to the following manual.
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual

2 - 54

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

(3) SFC monitor detail settings

FIGURES

By setting the following items, the GOT can display the set SFC program on the block list screen or SFC
diagram monitor screen when the SFC monitor is started using the special function switch.

TOUCH SWITCH

Item

Description

Model

Network

Set the network for the controller to be monitored.

Host
: The GOT monitors the controller set as the host station.
Other : The GOT monitors the controller set as the other station.

N/W No.

Set the network No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 255)

This item can be set only when [Other] is set for [Network].

PC Station No.

Set the station No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 120)

This item can be set only when [Other] is set for [Network].

CPU Machine

Set the CPU No. of the controller to be monitored. (0 to 4)

File Name

Specify the file name of the SFC program to be read from the controller.
Up to four two-byte characters or eight one-byte characters can be input.

Block No.

Set the block No. of the block to be displayed when starting the SFC monitor. (0 to 319)
This item can be set only when [SFC Diagram] is set for [Display Screen].

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

CH No.

Select the channel No. of the controller to be monitored. (1 to 4)

Only the channel numbers with the following controller types set can be selected.
MELSEC-QnU, Q17nD/NC/DR, CRnD-700
MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*
MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Use Block List/

SFC Diagram
display function

Select a screen to be displayed when starting the SFC monitor.

Block List
: The block list screen is displayed.
SFC Diagram
: The SFC diagram monitor screen is displayed.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Check this item to display the set SFC program on the block list screen or SFC diagram monitor screen when starting
the SFC monitor.
Display Screen

LAMP

POINT

DATA LIST

When using SFC monitor function

For the SFC monitor function, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

2 - 55

(4) Multimedia detail settings

By setting the following items, the GOT can display the set multimedia screen when the multimedia function is
started using the special function switch.

Item

Description

Initial Display
Screen

Select a multimedia screen to be displayed when touching the switch.

File Menu
: The file menu screen is displayed.
Video Image
: The video image screen is displayed.
Video Playback
: The video playback screen is displayed.

File Name

Set the file name and the extension (3GP or MP4) of the video file to be played.
Set this item only when [Video Playback] is selected for [Initial Display Screen].
Set the file name with up to 70 one-byte alphanumeric characters.
When this item is selected, the device value set for [Playback File Time Specification Device] in [Multimedia] of

Add date to
playback files

[Peripheral Setting] is added to the file name of the video file to be played as the recording date and time.
Displays the dialog box of multimedia setting.

POINT
Multimedia function
For the multimedia function, refer to the following.
33. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

2 - 56

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

Model

Style tab

FIGURES

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
(Setting items for the [Lamp] are not available in this switch.)
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab

TOUCH SWITCH

The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
LAMP

This item can be set when the Switch Action in the [SP Function]tab is set to [Key Windows].
The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
(The setting item [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is not available for this switch.)
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

2.1 Trigger tab

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

2 - 57

2.7 Setting Key Window Display Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the key window display switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged key window display switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch]

[Key Window Display Switch] from the menu.

Key Input tab

Item

Switch

Description

Model

User ID for a key

input

Set the user ID of the object where the cursor is displayed when the data change switch is
touched.

Key Window
Position

Specify the position (coordinate values) where the key window is displayed.

Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape)
Key
Lamp
Bit

ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.

OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, the OFF shape is switched to the ON shape.
After selecting this item, set the device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to next page)

2 - 58

2.7 Setting Key Window Display Switch

1
Item

Description

Model
FIGURES

When the range of specified word device is set to [ON Range] in [Device], the OFF shape is
switched to the ON shape.
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
Device : Sets the word device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Word

Data type
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Display range
ON range: After setting the specified word device, click the [Exp] button to set the switch range
for ON/OFF shape.

TOUCH SWITCH

Lamp

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

LAMP

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Key Input] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

Style tab

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

2.1 Style tab

Text tab
The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Extended] tab are the same as for the switch.
(Setting items for [User ID] and [Operation Log Target] are not available in this switch.)
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Trigger tab
The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Trigger tab

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.7 Setting Key Window Display Switch

2 - 59

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the key code switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged key code switch to display the setting dialog box.

[Switch]

[Key Code Switch] from the menu.

Key Code tab

Item

Description
Specify the key code type.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

KeyCode Type

Numerical/ASCII Input
: Select to input the key code for numeric value/ASCII input.
Alarm/Data List
: Select to input the key code for data list, alarm list, alarm history or advanced alarm.
Historical Trend Graph
: Select to input a key code to the historical trend graph.
Document Display
: Select to input a key code in document display.
For a single touch switch, only one of the key codes above can be set.
ASCII

Code Set
Action

Check this item to input the numeric value or character using key code.
After checking this item, input the numeric value/character and press [Conversion] to convert
automatically into the key code.
Check this item to set an action by a key code.
After checking the item, select and set the action.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

Object Name

2 - 60

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Key Code] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

Model

Style tab

FIGURES

The setting contents for the [Style] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Style tab

Text tab

2
TOUCH SWITCH

The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.
2.1 Text tab

Extended tab
The setting contents for the [Text] tab are the same as for the switch.
(Setting items for [User ID] and [Operation Log Target] are not available in this switch.)
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

2.1 Extended tab

Trigger tab
LAMP

The setting contents for the [Trigger] tab are the same as for the switch.
For details of the setting contents, refer to the following.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

2.1 Trigger tab

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

2 - 61

2.9 Relevant Settings

The touch switch is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

GOT environment setting (Screen switching/Window)

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting
Function
Setting the timing for switching the screen when the go to screen is touched.
(ON/OFF)

Set description

Model

[Operation Timing]

GOT environment settings (Key window)/Screen properties

Settings can be made by project (GOT environment setting) or screen (Screen property).
(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting
Function

Set description

Displaying the key window when condition success.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Key Window]

Displaying the key window when switching screens.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the key window]

Displaying the cursor when switching screens.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the cursor]

Displaying the cursor when condition success.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Cursor]

Deleting the key window and cursor when condition fails.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Clear the key window and the cursor] in [When
operating conditions are not satisfied]

Model

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

2 - 62

Set description

Notifying the key code which is assigned to the input key when a value is
entered by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: system signal 1-1.b9)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

2.9 Relevant Settings

Model

Sound file settings

Set description
[Use a sound file for touch key tone]

Cancelling all running sound outputs and outputting the touch key sound when a
touch switch is touched.

[Give top priority to sound output of a switch]

Model

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Function
Setting a sound for when the touch switch is touched.
(A sound file is required.)

FIGURES

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

HINT
Changing the touch key sound
For changing the touch key sound, a sound file must be registered in advance.

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

GOT internal device

Set description

Switching the operation of switching to the previous screen of the touch switch.
(Hierarchy/Historical)

GS450.b14

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

GS450.b13

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Saving the screen switch history to a CF card.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

GS450.b12

7
DATA LIST

Setting the operation timing of touch switches with overlapping bit alternate/bit
set/bit reset and screen switching /station number settings.

Model

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Function

LAMP

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

2.9 Relevant Settings

2 - 63

2.10 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using touch switches

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 1000 touch switch objects can be set.
(Up to 50 touch switch objects can be set for GT10.)

(2) Action of touch switch

Multiple functions can be set for one touch switch.
(Multiple functions cannot be set if special function switch is set.)
GT16, GT SoftGOT1000

GT15

GT11
1

for multi setting*1

Key window display

Key window display

Key window display

Key code

: 16

Key code

: 16

Key code

: 16

Word set

: 20

Word set

: 20

Word set

: 20

Word set

: 20

Set

: 20

Set

: 20

Set

: 20

Set

: 20

Reset

: 20

Reset

: 20

Reset

: 20

Reset

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Base

Base

Base

Base

Overlap Window1

Overlap Window1

Overlap Window1

Overlap Window1

Overlap Window2

Overlap Window2

Overlap Window2

Overlap Window2

Overlap Window3

Superimpose1

Superimpose1

Superimpose1

Superimpose2

Total

:122

Overlap Window4

Superimpose2

Superimpose2

Overlap Window5

Station No. switching

Dialog window

Superimpose1

Dialog window

Superimpose2

Total

:129

Total

:123

Station No. switching

Dialog window

Total

:135
*1

Key window display

Key code

: 16

High

Low

The action sequence (except for the key window display, key code, and dialog window) can be changed on the [Action] tab.

(3) Minimum size of touch switches

The minimum size of touch switches differs depending on the GOT used.
GOT

Minimum size of touch switches

GT16, GT1595-X,
GT SoftGOT1000, GT1020

2 dots (vertical)

Other than the above

16 dots (vertical)

2 dots (horizontal)
16 dots (horizontal)

(4) Valid range of touch switch

The setting unit for touch switch valid area differs depending on the GOT used.
GOT

2 - 64

Action sequence

GT10

Minimum size of touch switches

GT16, GT1595-X,
GT SoftGOT1000, GT1020

1-dot unis

Other than the above

16-dot unis

2.10 Precautions

By right-clicking the mouse on an object and setting [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region], the shape and valid area
size of the touch switch can be set individually.
For setting the [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region] with GT10, enable the [Specify the touch area].

FIGURES

(Fundamentals) 3.7.1 Creating a new screen

Also, the valid area of a touch switch can be fit in an object frame with [Touch Area Auto Adjustment].
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Screen 1

Touch switch shape

Valid area of touch switch

(5) Character display when using indirect text setting

(a) When the indirect text (basic comment) is used, only the first line of the comment is displayed on the touch
switch.
For the indirect text (basic comment), create a comment in one line.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

(b) When the character size is greater than the frame of the touch switch, no character is displayed.
Also, any comment part overflowing from the frame cannot be displayed.

(6) Key codes multiple setting

The following key codes must be set last, as the other key codes will not be executed, if set after them.

0080H

Move cursor to the right

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0081H

Move cursor to the left

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0082H

Move cursor upward

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0083H

Move cursor downward

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0084H

Kanji Conversion

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0085H

The former candidate

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0086H

The next candidate

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0087H

Select/No Conversion

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0092H

User ID ascending order movement of cursor

Numerical/ Ascii Input

0093H

User ID descending order movement of cursor

Numerical/ Ascii Input

FFB0H*2

Show cursor

FFB1H*2

Hide cursor

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB2H

Move cursor upward

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB3H*2

Move cursor downward

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB4H

Display date/time of selected data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB5H

Display data/time of all data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB6H

Clear the selected alarm data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB7H

Clear all alarm data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB8H

Display detail/ Move to the lower hierarchy

Alarm/ Data List Control

Alarm/ Data List Control

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB9H

Reset the selected alarm data

FFBBH

Save alarm contents to CF card

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFC2H

Move to the upper hierarchy.

Alarm/ Data List Control

For the obFor key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

*2

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Numerical/ Ascii Input

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Numerical/ Ascii Input

Delete cursor

DATA LIST

Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move the cursor

001BH

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Key Code Type

000DH

*2

*1

Description

The alarm history allows setting of multiple key codes.Only the advanced alarm does not allow setting of multiple key codes.

2.10 Precautions

2 - 65

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Key Code*1

(7) Precautions when superimposing switches

(a) Switches that cannot be superimposed
Make sure that the following switches will not overlap with other ones.
If "Simultaneous Press" is not set, the simultaneous press (On Preference) settings are applied to them.
Therefore, they will not function when superimposed with other switches or objects that can be touched.
Key Code*1

Description

FFB0H

Show cursor

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB1H

Hide cursor

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB2H

Move cursor upward

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB3H

Move cursor downward

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB4H

Display date/ time of selected data (Check)

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB5H

Display date/ time of all data (Check all)

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB6H

Clear the selected alarm data (Delete)

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB7H

Clear all alarm data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB8H

Display detail/ Move to the lower hierarchy

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFB9H

Reset the selected alarm data

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFBBH

Save alarm contents to CF card

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFBCH

Display ladder

Alarm/ Data List Control

FFC2H

Move to the upper hierarchy

Alarm/ Data List Control

*1

Key Code Type

Special Function Switch

For key codes applicable to each object, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

(b) When superimposing the key window display switch with another switch
In the following cases, the switch superimposed with the key window display switch does not operate.
When a touch switch is set behind the key window display switch using the superimpose window or set
overlay screen function.
When the object ID of the superimposed switch is longer than that of the key window display switch.
If the touch switch fails to operate, set another touch switch over the key window display switch using the
superimpose window or the overlay screen function.
For details of superimposing using the superimpose window or set overlay screen function, refer to the
following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
(c)

2 - 66

When a part data is updated, the data of all switches and lamps that use the updated part must be updated.
Accordingly, it may take a longer time than usual when storing the project data or opening the
communication dialog.

2.10 Precautions

(8) Setting [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed]

(a) Precautions for switches with operation repeat set.

Bit switch

If bit momentary is set for the action, the operation repeat is invalid.

Word Switch

None

Key window display switch

If any key window, dialog window, popup window, or comment window is displayed while operation
repeat is performed, the operation repeat is aborted.

Key code switch

If any dialog window is displayed while operation repeat is performed, the operation repeat is
aborted.

(b) Touching simultaneously multiple touch switches with operation repeat set
When multiple touch switches with operation repeat set are touched simultaneously, the operation repeat
setting is valid only for the last touched touch switch.

(1) Simultaneously press is disabled.

The following shows precautions for the simultaneous press on the GOT screen.

GT16, GT1595-X

Precautions
Do not touch the GOT screen at two or more points simultaneously.
Simultaneous touch of two or more points may cause a point that is not touched to respond.
To reduce malfunctions that occurs when more than two points are touched simultaneously,
select [False Input Reduction] for [Touch Detection Mode] of GOT setup.
For touch detection mode, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting

GT1585V-S,
GT1575-S,
GT1572-VN,
GT1555-Q,

GT1585-S, GT1575V-S,
GT1575-V, GT1575-VN,
GT1565-V, GT1562-VN,
GT1550-Q

Simultaneous touch of touch switches is allowed at up to two points.

This feature can be used, for example, to press two points on the GOT screen by both hands
to ensure safe operation.
If three points are touched simultaneously, touching of the third switch is disregarded.

(a) When two-presses is set

If operate the monitor screen while the touch switch is set to [Attribute for middle of two presses] when two
presses is set to touch switch, the two press does not operate normally.

(b) When two presses and operation repeat are set

When two-presses and operation repeat are set for the touch switch, the operation repeat is disabled at the
first touch.
The operation repeat is enabled with the second touch.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

(2) Delay setting

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

GOT

LAMP

Precautions for use

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Switch

FIGURES

Precaution
When operation repeat is set for a switch, do not set special functions, switching screens, or
switching station numbers to the action.
If special functions, switching screens, or switching station numbers is set, the operation repeat
setting is invalid.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Switch type

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

2.10 Precautions

2 - 67

(3) Setting overlapping actions (either of bit set/reset/alternate and either of screen switching/station
number switching) for a touch switch.
If overlapping actions (either of bit set/reset/alternate and either of screen switching/station number switching)
are set for a touch switch, the screen or station number switching timing varies as the following, according to the
ON/OFF of the GS450.b12.
Make sure to set GS450.b12 before first operation of the touch switch.
This can change the device status after screen switching.
GS450.b12

Setting item

ON

OFF

Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Set

When the touch switch is released

When the touch switch is touched

Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Reset

When the touch switch is released

When the touch switch is touched

Screen switching/Station No. Switching +

Alternate

When the touch switch is released

When the touch switch is touched

Screen switching/Station No. Switching +

Momentary
Screen switching/Station No. Switching + Word

When the touch switch is released

When the touch switch is touched

When the touch switch is touched

The following shows an example of how to make the settings so that the status observation function works to
automatically turn GS450.b12 ON after the GOT is powered ON.
Example of setting the status observation function
The GOT internal device (device that is always ON: GS0.b4) functions as a trigger.
GS450.b12 turns ON when the trigger is ON.
With this settings, the status observation function works and GS450.b12 turns ON after the GOT is powered ON.
For details of observation function, refer to the following.
26. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

Make the settings in the Project tab within

the Status Observation screen
Put the settings in the first line (GS450.b12
turns ON right after the GOT is powerd ON)
Set Observe Cycle to [Ordinary]

2 - 68

2.10 Precautions

Base screen 50

M100
M100 turns ON when
the touch switch is touched.

Base screen 2

M100
The screen changes when
the touch switch is released.

Base screen 2

Base screen 1

M100
M100 turns OFF when the
touch switch is touched again.

M100
The screen changes when
the touch switch is released.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

(a) Action when GS450.b12 is ON.

After the bit set/reset/alternate is executed, the screen or station number is switched when the touch switch
is released, and the GOT operates with the values after the bit set/reset/alternate is executed.

FIGURES

Example) When multiple actions including followings are set for a touch switch.
Bit Alternate
: M100
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 2 when M100 turns ON.
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 1 when M100 turns OFF.

LAMP

(b) Action when GS450.b12 is OFF.

The screen or station number is switched simultaneously to the execution of bit set/reset/alternate, and the
GOT operates with the values before the bit set/reset/alternate is executed.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Base screen 2

M100
M100
M100 turns OFF and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100:
ON) before the bit Alternate is executed.)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

M100
M100
M100 turns ON and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100:
OFF) before the bit Alternate is executed.)

Base screen 1

7
DATA LIST

Base screen 1

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Base screen 50

2.10 Precautions

2 - 69

(4) When [Repeat the operation while the switch is pressed] is set
(a) Operation repeat cycle disturbance
When communication time is longer than the set repeat cycle, the operation repeat cycle may be disturbed.
In such a case, take measures such as setting a longer time for start delay and repeat cycle, or reducing
monitor target devices.
Example: When the operation repeat is used for the switch adding "1" to a device value
Object used: Word switch
Setting item

Setting

Device

D100

Constant

Indirect device

D100

When operations are repeated normally

The device value is added with 1 every time the touch switch operates.

First touch

Second touch

Third touch

When the operation repeat cycle is disturbed

The device value may not be added with the value even when the touch switch operates.

First touch

Second touch

Third touch

(b) Operation repeat abort

If any key window, dialog window, popup window, or comment window is displayed while operation repeat
is performed, the operation repeat is aborted.
(c)

Touch switch pressing time and device write time

While a value is written to the device, the touch switch is recognized as being touched.
Therefore, if writing to the device is not finished even when the finger is released from the touch switch
within the time set for start delay, the touch switch may be recognized as being touched for more than the
set start delay time, what activates operation repeat.
In such a case, set a longer time for start delay.

(d) Switching operations while the touch switch is touched

While the touch switch is touched, security switching, language switching, and station No. switching are
performed.
When the trigger device value of security switching, language switching, or station No. switching is
changed while the touch switch is touched, the switching is performed when the finger is released from the
touch switch.

2 - 70

2.10 Precautions

LAMP

FIGURES

3.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
Bit lamp
3.1 Setting Bit Lamp
This function turns ON/OFF the lamp according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device.
X10 = OFF

Run

Stop

ON

OFF

LAMP

X10 = ON

Word lamp
3.2 Setting Word Lamp

D100 = over 100

Stop

Run

Error

OFF

ON

Flicker

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

D100 = 1 to 99

HINT
(1) To control a figure in the similar manner as a lamp
It is possible to change the color of a figure in response to turning ON of the bit device, like a lamp, by setting
the lamp attribute to the figure.
For details, refer to the following.
1. FIGURES

7
DATA LIST

(2) Differences between a lamp and a figure for which lamp attribute is set
With the figure for which lamp attribute is set, only changing of the color is possible in response to turning ON
of a bit device.
To set a layer, text, etc. to an object, it is necessary to use a lamp.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

D100 = 0

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

This function enables changing lamp color according to the word device value.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3-1

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the bit lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged bit lamp to display the setting dialog box.

[Lamp]

[Bit Lamp] from the menu.

Device/Style tab
Set the device to be monitored and the lamp figure (shape, color) to be displayed when the device is ON/OFF.

Preview list

Item
Lamp Type

Description

Model

Select the lamp type. (Bit/Word)

Set a device to be monitored.

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Preview List

Displays the status set for On and OFF.

Shape

Set a Lamp Figure.

Use Image
Transparent

Select this item for enabling the transparent setting of the image data set as a lamp figure.
If this item is not selected, the transparent setting is disabled.
This item can be selected only when a figure for the parts or library is set to the lamp figure.
For details of enabling the transparent settings of an image data, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

(Continued to next page)

3-2

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

1
Description

Model

Select the color of the lamp shape.

Lamp Color

Select the color of the lamp figure.

When a figure in the library (except my favorites) is set to [Shape], the set figure can be changed to
a figure in a different color registered in the library with changing the lamp color.

Background Color

Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.

The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Frame Color

FIGURES

Item

Shape Attribute

Pattern + Lamp
Pattern

Blink

Pattern

Lamp

Background

Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp. (None/Low/Medium/High)

LAMP

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet)
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Object Name

Background :

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

3-3

 Text tab
For the bit lamp, any text directly input or comment set for Comment Group can be used as the text displayed in the
object, by making the selection for Text Type.
The text types are described below.

Item
Text Type
Comment
Group

Description
Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.
(1) Text
Set a comment that has been set for comment group.
(2) Comment group

For details of the comment group, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

3-4

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

Model

FIGURES

(1) Text

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

Description

Preview List

Displays the status set for On and OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings
: Copies all text settings.
Text Only
: Copies texts only.

ON
Copy ON
OFF

Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF

ON

: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

Font

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

6 8dot font
12-dot high quality Mincho*1
12-dot standard font 12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot standard font 16-dot high quality Mincho

Text Size

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Copy OFF

Model

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item

LAMP

16-dot high quality Gothic

TrueType Mincho
TrueType Gothic

Windows font
Stroke*2
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

: Displays the text in italic characters.

: Displays the text in underlined characters.
Script
Text Color

Select a character set available for the specified font.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.

DATA LIST

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

(Continued to next page)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Common
Settings of
Display
Position

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Select an effect for the text.

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

3-5

Item

Description

Model
T

Display
Position

Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the

object. (Center/Up/Down/Left/Right)

Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)

Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)

Text

Text Settings

Select the text position.

Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

Text
Offset to
Frame

*1
*2

3-6

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and
object frame. (0 to 100)

Not available for GT1020.

Not available for GT11 and GT10.

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

Offset to frame

FIGURES

(2) Comment group

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

Description
Displays the status set for On and OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings
Text Only

ON

Copy ON
OFF

Preview Column
No.

: Copies all text settings.

: Copies texts only.

Used to copy the set attribute.

Copy OFF

ON

: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Copy OFF

Model

Preview List

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Item

Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3.

(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

Select this item for adjusting the character size automatically along with the object area.
The character size after adjustment is the maximm size for fitting the text string in the object area.
GT Designer3 Version

Minimum Size

Text Settings

Comment No.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Adjust Text Size

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Set the minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment. (8 to 128)

Set the comment No.

Fixed : Set by inputting directly the comment No. to be used. (0 to 32767)
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed.
Clicking the button displays the [Edit Comment] dialog box, to edit the comment.
(a) Edit Comment dialog box
Device : Select the item to display the comment corresponding to the comment No. that is the
same as the value stored in the device to be set. After selecting the item, set the
device.

DATA LIST

Commoent
Group

Set the group No.

Fixed : Enter the comment group number directly. (1 to 255)
Device : Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to be set.
After selecting it, set the device.

(Continued to next page)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Group No.

LAMP

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

3-7

Item

Description

Model

Preview No.

Displays the comment of the specified comment No. on the screen of GT Designer3.

Font

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

12-dot standard font*1
12-dot high quality Mincho

Text Size

16-dot standard font

16-dot high quality Mincho
Stroke*2

12-dot high quality Gothic

16-dot high quality Gothic
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Text Settings
Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Select the text position.

: Select the horizontal position.

Alignment

: Select the vertical position.

Text
Offset to Frame

*1
*2

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text
and object frame. (0 to 100)

Offset to frame

Not available for GT1020.

Not available for GT11 and GT10.

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.

Item

3-8

Description

Column No.

Select the row No. to edit the comment.

Comment

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

Model

Extended tab

FIGURES

Set the security level, offset value, kanji region, layer, and category.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Use Offset

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.
After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5)-Gothic

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Extended

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

KANJI Region

[Japan]

[China (GB) -Mincho]

12-dot standard
1 2-dot high quality Gothic
Stroke
Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

DATA LIST

Category

12-dot high quality Mincho

16-dot high quality Gothic

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Layer

16-dot standard
16-dot high quality Mincho

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

This setting is available only when any of the following fonts is selected in the [Text] tab.

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

3-9

 Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
28.3 Object Script

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height
Extended
*1

Security Level

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

3 - 10

security

3.1 Setting Bit Lamp

4)

FIGURES

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the word lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged word lamp to display the setting dialog box.

[Word Lamp] from the menu.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

[Lamp]

Device/Style tab
Set the lamp figure (shape/color) corresponding to the device to be monitored or monitor device value.

LAMP

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Preview list

Item

Device

Model

Select the lamp type. (Bit/Word)

Set a device to be monitored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
BCD16

Preview List*1

Displays the set status for each condition.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Lamp Type

Description

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Sets the display format of the preview list to range.

Sets the display format of the preview list to text.

Creates a new condition

Deletes the condition

DATA LIST

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Bit

Trigger Type

Range

Set the condition by which the display attribute is changed.

When a word device value is taken as a condition, click the [Exp] button to enter the conditional
expression in the [Edit Range] dialog box for editing the display range.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

(Continued to next page)

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 11

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Item

Description
Set a lamp figure.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box, or to select library shapes.

Shape

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Check the item for enabling the transparent setting of the image data set as a lamp figure.
If the item is not checked, the transparent setting is disabled.
This item is available only when shapes from [Parts]/[Library] are selected in the [Shape].

Use Image
Transparent

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Frame Color

Select the frame color of the lamp figure.

Lamp Color

Select the color of the lamp figure.

When a figure in the [Library] (Except my favorites) is set for [Shape], the set figure can be
changed to the same figure with a different color, by changing the lamp color.

Background

Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.

The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.

Shape Attribute

Pattern

Stop

Blink

Object Name

Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp. (No/Low/Middle/High)

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
Move to the [Text] tab.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

3 - 12

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

Model

*1 Condition
For details of conditions, refer to the following.

FIGURES

(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

(1) When conditions are overlapped

When conditions are overlapped, the condition with smaller No. has priority.
Example) Monitor device
: D100
Data type
: Signed BIN16
The operation
priority for setting
overlap conditions

Condition No.

High

M10 ON

Red

Stop

No

60<=$V<=80

Yellow

Caution

No

81<=$V

Red

Alarm

Low

TOUCH SWITCH

Normal case
(Condition 0)

Blue

Normal operation

Lamp

Display text

Blink

Condition 1

When M10 is ON, the lamp

will be red and the displayed
text will be Stop.

LAMP

* $V is the monitor device value.

Stop

Condition 2

When the device value is

between 60 and 80
(60<=$V<= 80), the lamp will
be yellow and the displayed
text will be "Caution"

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Caution

Alarm

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Normal case
(Condition 0)

When the condition is other

than the conditions 1. 2, and
3, the lamp lights in blue and
"Normal operation" is
displayed.

Blink every
second.

Normal operation

7
DATA LIST

Condition 3

When the monitor device

value is 81 or more (81<=$V),
the display (lamp color and
displayed text) on the
condition 3 and the lamp color
on the condition 0 blink
alternately. The text set on the
condition 0 is not displayed.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Low

Range

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 13

 Text tab
For word lamp, texts directly input or comments set for Comment Group can be used as the texts displayed on the
object by selecting [Text Type].
The text types are described below.

Item

Description
Set a text to be displayed by directly imputting it.

Text Type

(1) Text

Comment
Group

Set a comment that has been set for comment group.

(2) Comment group

For comment group, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

3 - 14

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

Model

FIGURES

(1) Text

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

Item
Preview List

Description

Model

Displays the set status for each condition.

Sets the display format of the preview list to text.

Creates a new condition

Deletes the condition

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Font

Text Size

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Sets the display format of the preview list to range.

LAMP

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

6 8dot font
12-dot high quality Mincho
12-dot standard font 12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot standard font 16-dot high quality Mincho

16-dot high quality Gothic

TrueType Mincho
TrueType Gothic

Stroke
Windows font
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Select an effect for the text.
: Displays the text in italic characters.
: Displays the text in underlined characters.
Script
Text Color

Select a character set available for the specified font.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Select a color for the text to be displayed.
Select a display format to the text.

DATA LIST

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

(Continued to next page)

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 15

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Common
Settings of
Display
Position

Item

Description

Select Position to
Edit Text

Text Input Area

Select the position where the text is to be displayed on

the object.
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

Model
T
L

Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)

Press the [Enter] key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Select the text position.

Text Settings
Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

Text
Offset to Frame

Set the number of dots for the distance between the

text and object frame. (0 to 100)

Move to the [Device/Style] tab.

*1
*2

3 - 16

Not available for GT1020.

Not available for GT11 and GT10.

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

Offset to frame

FIGURES

(2) Comment group

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

Item
Preview List

Description

Model

LAMP

Displays the status set for On and OFF.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Sets the display format of the preview list to range.

Sets the display format of the preview list to text.
Creates a new condition
Deletes the condition

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

Preview
Column No.

Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3.

(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

Adjust Text Size

Select this item for adjusting the character size automatically along with the object area.
The character size after adjustment is the maximm size for fitting the text string in the object area.
GT Designer3 Version

Minimum Size

Text Settings

Comment No.

Preview No.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Commoent
Group

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Set the minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment. (8 to 128)

Set the comment No.

Fixed : Set by inputting directly the comment No. to be used. (0 to 32767)
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed.
Clicking the button displays the [Edit Comment] dialog box, to edit the comment.

DATA LIST

Group No.

Set the group No.

Fixed : Enter the comment group number directly. (1 to 255)
Device : Select this to display the same comment group number as the device value to be set.
After selecting it, set the device.

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Device : Select the item to display the comment corresponding to the comment No. that is the
same as the value stored in the device to be set. After selecting the item, set the
device.

Displays the comment of the specified comment No. on the screen of GT Designer3.

(Continued to next page)

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 17

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Item

Description
Font

Model

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

12-dot standard font*1
12-dot high quality Mincho

Text Size

16-dot standard font

16-dot high quality Mincho

12-dot high quality Gothic

16-dot high quality Gothic
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Stroke*2

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Change comment attributes.
Text: Select a color for the text to be displayed.
: Displays the text in bold format.

Change Attribute of
Comment Setting

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.

Text Settings

Solid: Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Select the text position.

Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

Text
Offset to Frame

*1
*2

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and the
object frame.(0 to 100)

Offset to frame

Not available for GT1020.

Not available for GT11 and GT10.

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.

Item

Description

Column No.

Select the row No. to edit the comment.

Comment

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

3 - 18

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

Model

Extended tab

FIGURES

Set the security level, offset value, kanji region, layer, and category.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5)-Gothic

Extended

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

KANJI Region

[China (GB) -Mincho]

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

[Japan]

This setting is available only when any of the following fonts is selected in the [Text] tab.
12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot high quality Gothic 16-dot high quality Mincho
Stroke

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

GT Designer3 Version

DATA LIST

Category

12-dot high quality Mincho

16-dot high quality Gothic

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Layer

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Security Level

Model

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 19

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Check this item to enable bit shift operation.

Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Left
:Left shift
Right :Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.

3 - 20

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

Model

(2) Script

FIGURES

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28.3 Object Script

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

Tab name

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

width
height
security

4)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.

28.3.4 Control structure

DATA LIST

*1

Security Level

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Extended

3.2 Setting Word Lamp

3 - 21

3.3 Relevant Settings

The lamp is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

3 - 22

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

3.3 Relevant Settings

Model

3.4 Precautions

FIGURES

This section explains the precautions for using the lamp.

(1) Maximum number of objects settable on one screen

Up to 1000 lamps can be placed.
If lamps and figures for which a lamp attribute is set are placed on the same screen, the number of lamps that
can be set decreases by one for each figure placed.

(2) Display on GT Designer3 and GOT

With GT Designer3, only figures for which bit devices are ON are displayed. However, with GOT, a figure
corresponding to bit device ON may be displayed overlaying a figure that corresponds to bit device OFF state.
(When a bit device is ON, bit lamp display may differ between GT Designer3 and GOT.)
In such a case, take appropriate measures so that the figure corresponding to bit device OFF will not be
displayed. Setting a lamp color or background color can be effective.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Precautions for drawing

Display on GOT

Bit device OFF

ON

OFF

OFF
ON

OFF

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Setting at GT Designer3

Display
Bit device ON

*The representation above is given only for the purpose of explanation and it differs from actual display.

(3) When using a part as a lamp figure

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

In the state the project is already written to the GOT, if only a part is modified and written to the GOT or if the part
written to the GOT is deleted, it is necessary to check the setting for the lamp figure again.
The lamp may not be displayed correctly if the part size is modified.
The lamp is not displayed if the part is deleted.
When updating a part data, the data of all switches and lamps that use the updated part must be updated.
Accordingly, it may take a longer time than usual when storing the project or opening the communication dialog.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

LAMP

Example of a bit lamp displayed differently between GT Designer3 and GOT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

3.4 Precautions

3 - 23

3 - 24

3.4 Precautions

NUMBERS, CHARACTERS

GRAPHIC CHARACTERS

FIGURES

4.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
The following characters can be displayed on the screen using GT Designer3.
Graphic character

Drawing example

Text

Reference

4.1 Text

4.2 Logo Text

LAMP

Logo text

4.1 Text

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

This function enables to display texts on the screen.

2.

[Text] from the menu.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Settings
1. Select [Figure]

Display the text on the screen.

How to display
Clicking on the screen displays the [Text] dialog box.
Enter the texts to be displayed, set their attributes and click the [OK] button. The entered texts are displayed.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

7
DATA LIST

When MS Mincho font is selected

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

When 16-dot standard font is selected

4.1 Text

4-1

Item

Description

Model

Enter the text to be displayed.

Up to 512 characters can be entered as texts.
(A line feed occupies one character.)
A text can be entered on multiple lines.
To start a new line (line feed), press the Enter key at the end of the current line.
Entry example
Display example

Text

Select the font for the text.

6 8dot 12dot Standard 6dot Standard 12dot HQ Mincho
12dot HQ Gothic 16dot HQ Mincho 16dot HQ Mincho
True Type Mincho True Type Gothic
Stroke
The GT1020 does not support 12-dot Standard and 16-dot Standard (Mincho).
The GT1030 does not support 16-dot Standard (Mincho).

Font*2

Click the

button to display the text in italic characters. Click the

button to display the

text underscored (straight line).

Script

Select the language.

Size*2

Select the text size (width height magnification or dots).

The applicable text size and magnification range change, depending on the font.

Text Color

Select the text display color.

Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

Background Color*3

Select this item to apply a background color to the text.

Direction

Select the text orientation (Horizontal/Vertical).

[Horizontal]AAA [Vertical] A
A
A
Click the

Alignment

button or the

button is selected.

button to select the position by which character strings on multiple lines

are aligned.
(This item is available only when the [Direction] item is set to [Vertical].)

AAA
Interval

Set the interval, i.e., space between lines of character strings.

Interval
BBB

(Continued to next page)

4-2

4.1 Text

1
Item

Description

Model

FIGURES

Select a Kanji region for the text.

Japan
: Displayed in Japanese kanji character.
China (GB)-Mincho
: Displayed in simplfied Chinese.
China (Big5)-Gothic
: Displayed in traditional Chinese.
Example) Difference between Japan and China (GB)-Mincho
KANJI Region*2

[Japan]

[China (GB)-Mincho]

TOUCH SWITCH

This setting is available only when any of the following [Font] is selected in the Text tab.
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
12dot HQ Mincho
12dot HQ Gothic
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
Select this item to assign a category to the text.
Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.

*1

Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.
LAMP

Convert to the logo text.

*1 By setting the user-set attributes as defaults, a figure of the same attributes can be drawn consecutively.
For details of *2, *3, refer to the following.

*2 Setting the font and size.

(1) Width x Length

(2) Dots

Width x Length

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

The following shows the setting list of selected font and size.
Dots

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Size
(1) Width
Width

Length

12dot Standard

1 to 8

1 to 8

16dot Standard

0.5 to 8

0.5 to 8

12dot HQ Mincho

2, 4, 6, 8

2, 4, 6, 8

12dot HQ Gothic

2, 4, 6, 8

2, 4, 6, 8

16dot HQ Mincho

2, 4, 6, 8

2, 4, 6, 8

16dot HQ Gothic

2, 4, 6, 8

2, 4, 6, 8

True Type Mincho

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

N/A

8dot

N/A

7
24 to 128 dots (4-dot unit)

True Type Gothic

DATA LIST

(2) Dots

Length

24 to 128 dots (4-dot unit)

Font provided for Windows OS

N/A
8 to 128 dots (1 dot increment)

Stroke

The 12-dot standard font and 16-dot standard font use Unicode 2.1, and for part of the Traditional Chinese and
Korean character sets, characters similar to the proper character may be displayed.
To display Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese characters on the GT16 or GT15, install the following fonts
(Option OS) so that the appropriate characters can be displayed.

4.1 Text

4-3

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Font

Set the kanji region for each object and install the following fonts.
Standard font [China GB] 12-dot characters)
Standard font [China GB] 16-dot characters
Standard font [China Big5] 12-dot
characters

The Simplified Chinese (GB) font is a GB2312-encoded font mainly used on mainland China.

The Traditional Chinese (Big5) font is a Big 5-encoded font mainly used in Taiwan.

Standard font [China Big5] 16-dot

characters

*3 Setting the background

When the [Background Color] and

buttons are pressed simultaneously, the left or top of the text string

may be located out of the text background color.

POINT
(1) Precautions for vertical text
If the text is displayed in the vertical direction, the text is displayed as follows:
(Example 1) In the case of "-"
Horizontal direction: Terminal
Vertical direction:T
E
R
M
I
N
A
l

(Example 2) In the case of "()"

Horizontal direction: (Caution)
Vertical direction : (
C
a
u
t
i
o
n
)

(2) Texts supported the GOT

(a) The 6 8 dot font uses ASCII characters 20H to 7EH*.
When characters other than above are used, they are displayed differently between GT Designer3 and
GOT.
For GT Designer3: Unsupported characters are displayed as " ".
For GOT: Characters after unsupported ones cannot be displayed.

Example) A B C

1 2 3

Display on GT Designer3

Display on GOT

A B C

ABC

1 2 3

Not displayed.

* Alphanumeric: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9
Symbol
: !,",#,$,%,&,',(,),*,+,-,,,.,/,:,;,
<,=,>,?,@,[,\,],^,_,`,{,|,},~,space
(b) The GOT and GT Designer3 supports common Unicode 2.1-compatible fonts. Therefore, they can
display fonts used in various countries, e.g. Japanese, Korean, Chinese (Pekingese), English, German
and French.
For multi-language input, refer to the following section.
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

4-4

4.1 Text

FIGURES

4.2 Logo Text

This function enables to display logo texts on the screen.

2.

2
[Logo Text] from the menu.
TOUCH SWITCH

Settings
1. Select [Figure]

Display logo texts on the screen.

How to display
Clicking the screen displays the [Logo Text] dialog box.
Enter the texts to be displayed, set their attributes and click the [OK] button. The entered texts are displayed.

LAMP

(1) Basic tab

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Text

Description

Model

Enter the text to be displayed.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
A text can be entered on multiple lines.
To start a new line (line feed), press the Enter key at the end of the current line.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

7
DATA LIST

Click this to use the current attribute as the default user setting.
In the next attribute setting, the default user setting is displayed.
The attribute set as the default user setting is held to the next start-up of GT Designer3.
Click this to return the attribute as the default value to the initial status.
Convert to the Text Figure.

(Continued to next page)

4.2 Logo Text

4-5

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Font

Select the font for the text.

True Type Mincho
True Type Gothic
Windows Font

Item

Description
Click the

Model

button to display the font in Bold.

Display example:

Click the

button to display the font in Italic.

Display example:

Click the

button to display the font underscored (straight line).

Display example:

Select the position by which character strings on multiple lines are aligned.

Size

Set the horizontal size of the font. (1 to 800)

Set the vertical size of the font. (1 to 800)

Text Color*1

Set the text color.

Background Color

Select the background color for the text.

Select this item to assign a category to the logo text.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose
(Category list)
Select an effect for the text.
The following shows display examples.

(Outline)
Effect

4-6

4.2 Logo Text

(Solid)

(3D)

(Stamp)

(Neon)

FIGURES

(2) Detail setting

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Description

Model

Text Width

Set the thickness of the text. (0 to 100)

Antialiasing

Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the text. (0 to 100)

Text Interval

Set the spacing between texts. (0 to 100)

Line Interval

Set the spacing between the lines of texts. (0 to 16)

Effect

Select the effect on the [Basic] tab.

The setting items vary depending on the selected effect.
For details of setting items of the effects, refer to the following.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(2) Detail setting (a) to (e)

(a) Outline

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

7
Description

Model

Outline Color*1

Set the color of the outline.

Outline Width

Set the thickness of the outline. (0 to 100)

Outline
Antialiasing

Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the outline. (0 to 100)

3D Display

When this item is selected, the outline is displayed in a solid display.

Illuminant
Direction

Set the light-source direction in solid display.

DATA LIST

Item

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

4.2 Logo Text

4-7

(b) Solid

Item
Solid Color*1

Set the shade color.

Solid Width

Set the thickness of the shade. (0 to 100)

Solid Antialiasing

Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the shade. (0 to 100)

Relative
Coordinate

(c)

Description

(X)

Set the X-axis relative coordinate of the shade.

(Y)

Set the Y-axis relative coordinate of the shade.

Model

3D

Item
Side Color

*1

Description

Model

Set the color of the solid lateral surface.

Depth

Set the depth of the solid part. (1 to 20: dot)

3D Direction

Set the solid direction.

(d) Stamp

Item

4-8

Description

Solid Color*1

Set the shade color of the stamp.

Solid Length

Set the length of the stamp shade. (1 to 20: dot)

Illuminant Direction

Set the light-source direction of the shade.

4.2 Logo Text

Model

FIGURES

(e) Neon

Item

Description

Model

Outline Color*1

Set the color of the outline.

Outline Width

Set the thickness of the outline. (0 to 100)

Outline Antialiasing

Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the outline. (0 to 100)

Neon Color

Set the color of the neon.

Neon Width

Set the thickness of the neon. (0 to 100)

Neon Antialiasing

Set the antialiasing (which smoothens the aliasing of pixels) value of the neon. (0 to 200)

When other color or the filling effect is selected in the color setting, the following windows are displayed for users to set.
LAMP

Even when color settings are changed in the system settings, the setting of the color selected in [More Colors] is saved.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

*1

TOUCH SWITCH

4.2 Logo Text

4-9

4 - 10

4.2 Logo Text

NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL
INPUT

FIGURES

5.

Numerical display (

TOUCH SWITCH

5.1 Setting Numerical Display)

This function allows the data saved in PLC CPU devices to be displayed as numeric values on GOT.

D100

349

D100=349

722

LAMP

D100

D100=722

Numerical input (

5.2 Setting Numerical Input)

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

This function enables writing any value from GOT to controller device.
Use input keys provided in the default key window or touch switches assigned with key codes.
Using touch switches on screen to input value

1 2 3 4 5 C AC
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1234

123

1 2 3 4 5 C AC
6 7 8 9 0 C- C C C

Using a key window to input value

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

1234

123

*1 For key window types and operation, refer to the following.

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

GT Designer3 Version

5-1

Example
Displays numeric values in various patterns
Device/Style tab

Displays/Inputs numeric value with decimal points

Device/Style tab

125

24.4

321
Changes display /background color depending on the value
Display Case tab

Present temperature

58

5-2

Uses numerical display/numerical input in combination with

the lever display function
11. LEVEL

Present temperature

125

25

98

FIGURES

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the numerical display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged numerical display to display the setting dialog box.

[Numerical Display] from the menu.

TOUCH SWITCH

[Numerical Display/Input]

Device/Style tab
Set the device, view format, frame format and preview.

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Data Type

Select the function to use. (Numerical Display/Numerical Input)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Set a device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Device].
Signed BIN16
: The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN16 : The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32
: The word device value is handled as a signed 32-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN32 : The word device value is handled as an unsigned 32-bit binary.
BCD16
: The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
BCD32
: The word device value is handled as a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
Real
: The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.

(Continued to next page)

DATA LIST

Device

Model

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Type

Description

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5-3

Item

Description

Model

Select the displayed data format of a monitored device.

Signed (Unsigned) Decimal
: The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal
: The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Octal
: The value is displayed in octal.
Binary
: The value is displayed in binary.
Real
: The value is displayed in real number.
Format

Example:GOT display examples

Signed decimal
: -12623
Unsigned decimal
: 12623
Real
: 1262.3

Binary
Octal
Hexadecimal

: 0011000101001111
: 30517
: 314F

The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format (unsigned
decimal, BCD, real), change the setting in [Data Type] on the [Device/Style] tab.
Font

Select a numeric font.

6 8dot
12-dot Standard
16-dot Standard

12-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot HQ Gothic
TrueType Gothic1

Stroke

Number Size
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Display the
numerical value to
be shown on the
screen with asterisk

Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.

Digits

Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.

The available number of digits vary depending on the [Format] of [Display Format].
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Octal
: 1 to 6 digits
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)

Display Format

Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when the
selected in [Alignment].
Example (In the case of five digits)
Zero not displayed
Zero displayed

button is

Fill with 0

Alignment

0005

Select the text position.

: Select the horizontal position.
When REAL is selected in [Format] of [Display Format], set the number of digits after the decimal
point (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
If "0" is set, the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.

Example: Device value: 6.57

Number of digits after decimal point: 1
Rounded off

Decimal Point

6.57
6.6

6.57

(Continued to next page)

5-4

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

1
Item

Description

Model

Adjust Decimal
Point Range

Number of digits after

decimal point: 3
controller device
value: 20

0.20

TOUCH SWITCH

Example: Number of digits after

decimal point: 2
controller device
value: 20

FIGURES

Select this item to display the device value of integer (when data format other than binary floating
point value is stored in monitor target devices) as a value with decimal point, when Real is
selected in the [Format] of [Display Format].

0.02

Display Format

0.20 is displayed on GOT.

0.02 is displayed on GOT.

The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:

Display range
: $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the specified
device value
Data operation : $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value
LAMP

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Format String*1*2

Set this item when displaying characters (such as alphanumeric characters and symbols) with
device values.
Input "#" for the part where a numeric is displayed.
The "#" signs set with the format string setting are replaced by a device value when displayed.
Numerics displayed are assigned from the ones place.
The sign included in the device value is displayed same as numerics.
Set a shape for the object.
When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
GT Designer3 Version

GT Designer3 setting

Figure frame area

Shape Settings
(Normal)

Frame Color

Before updating data

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Shape

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot
correctly display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
GOT display
After updating data

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Plate
Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
Select this item for reversing the numeric character.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.

None
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Medium : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High
: Blinks every 0.2 seconds.

Blink Scope

Select a blink area.

Data only
Data and Plate

Preview

Sample Value

Set the numerical value to be displayed on the preview shape.

Description

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

7
DATA LIST

Reverse

: Makes the numerical value blink.

: Makes the numerical value and plate blink.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Numerical Color

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Frame
Plate Color

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5-5

*1 Precautions for format strings

The following shows precautions for using format strings.

(1) Setting items disabled when format strings are used

When TrueType font is set, format strings cannot be used.
Settings of [Digits] in the Device/Style tab is disabled.
Setting of [Alignment] on the Device/Style tab is disabled and the right alignment is set.

(2) Characters that cannot be displayed for format string

If any character of other than ASCII code (0x20 to 0x7E) is included in the format string when 6x8 dot is set for
font, this character and the following characters are not displayed.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
*2 Display example of format string settings
The following shows display examples where format string settings are used.
Example1: When other than [Real] is set to [Format] of [Display Format]
Format string

Decimal place

##m##cm

Device value

Display

1234

12m34cm

123

1m23cm

12345

23m45cm

-123

-1m23cm

Example2: When [Real] is set to [Format] of [Display Format]

Format string

Decimal place

Device value

##m##cm
####cm

Display
m12cm

12.345

##.##cm

12m35cm
1235cm
12.35cm

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area in
the specified figure frame
Plate area
Plate area
Figure frame area

5-6

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

: Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure frame.

Display Case tab

FIGURES

Set the device range and shape.

For details of the conditions, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

LAMP

Item
Preview list*1

Description

Model

Displays the set status for each condition.

Up to 64 conditions can be set (including the normal case). (The condition No. 0 indicates the normal case)

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Creates a new condition

Deletes the condition
/

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Select the condition for display change depending on the state.
Bit
: Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit
device. Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Type

GT Designer3 Version

Shape Settings

Set the value of the word device to change the display.

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Condition

Set the device status of the bit device. (ON/OFF)

Range

Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.

Plate Color

Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.

Numerical Color

Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.

None
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Medium : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High
: Blinks every 0.2 seconds.

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the numerical display.

7
DATA LIST

Device

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

: Select this item to change the display based on a word device .

After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device value with
the [Exp] button.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Range

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Word

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

For details of *1, refer to the following.

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5-7

*1 Conditions

(1) Display for condition other than those set on the [Display case] tab
When the condition is other than the one set at the [Display case] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set
on the [Device/Style] tab.

(2) Display when conditions are overlapped

When conditions are overlapped, the condition with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device
: D100
Data Type
: Signed BIN16
Priority level for
overlapped setting

State No.

High

Low

Range

Color

M10 ON

Red (Blink)

200<=$V<=300

Blue

1000<=$V

Yellow (Reverse)

Normal case
(State 0)

Green

* represents the monitor device value.

State 1

When M10 is ON, the numeric value will be displayed in red

(Blink).

150

State2

When the device value is within a range of 200 to 300 (200<=$V<=

300), the numeric value will be displayed in blue.

200

State3

When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$V), the numeric

value will be displayed in yellow (Reverse).

3000

Normal case
(State 0)

5-8

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

When the condition is out of the range of conditions 1 to 3, the

numeric value is displayed in green.

150

FIGURES

Extended tab

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
GT Designer3 Version

Use Offset

Model

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Security Level

Description

Select a desired display mode when displaying a numeric value with the level display overlapped.
[Transparent]

GT Designer3 Version
(Fundamentals)

Screen Design Manual

98

[XOR]

20

50
(Continued to next page)

7
DATA LIST

Display Mode

: Displays the numeric value on the level display.

: In order to identify the level and numeric easily, the numeric
character is displayed in color different from the level color based
on XOR. This is valid when GOT is Monochrome type.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Transparent
XOR

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Item

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5-9

Item

Description
Set a kanji region for the characters to be displayed when setting the format string on the Device/Style tab.
GT Designer3 Version
Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5 )-Gothic

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

KANJI Region

[Japan]

[China (GB) -Mincho]

This setting is available when any of the following [Font] is selected in the Device/Style tab
12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot high quality Gothic
Stroke

Layer

Category

5 - 10

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

Model

Trigger tab
GT Designer3 Version

FIGURES

Set conditions for displaying the object.

For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Model

Select trigger by which the object is displayed.

When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range,
Rise
Fall
Bit Trigger

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Trigger Type

Description

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Settings

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5 - 11

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Model

Bit Mask

Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Check this item to enable bit shift operation.

Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.

With GT10, the decimal point is rounded down with operations including the division or decimals when [Data Type] on
the Device/Style tab is set to other than the real number.

HINT
Division with adjusting decimal point range
With GT10, division up to values lower than the decimal point can be executed only when device values are divided
by 10n, by setting [Adjust Decimal Point Range] and [Decimal Point] on the Device/Style tab. (Numbers of decimal
place are not rounded down.)
Example) When using the data operation for GT10
Device: 1265
Decimal point: 0
Adjust decimal point range: No
Data operation: $$ (Device value) /100
12.00

The GOT displays 12.00.

5 - 12

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

When using the adjust decimal point range for GT10

Device: 1265
Decimal point: 2
Adjust decimal point range: Yes
Data operation: No
12.65

The GOT displays 12.65.

FIGURES

(2) Script tab

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28.3 Object Script

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

width

Extended
*1

3)

Number Size (X)

text_width

4)

Number Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Blink Scope

blink

5)

Security Level

security

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

7
DATA LIST

3)

text_color

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Device/Style

decimal_point
Numerical Color

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

height

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

5.1 Setting Numerical Display

5 - 13

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the numerical input is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged numerical input to display the setting dialog box.

[Numerical Display/Input]

[Numerical Input] from the menu.s

Device/Style tab
Set the device, view format, frame format and preview.

Item
Type
Device

Data Type

Description

Model

Select the function to use. (Numerical Display/Numerical Input)

Set a device to be monitored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Device].
Signed BIN16
: The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN16 : The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32
: The word device value is handled as a signed 32-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN32 : The word device value is handled as an unsigned 32-bit binary.
BCD16
: The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
BCD32
: The word device value is handled as a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded decimal).
Real
: The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.

(Continued to next page)

5 - 14

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

1
Item

Description

Model

Example:GOT display examples

Signed decimal
: -12623
Unsigned decimal
: 12623
Real
: 1262.3

Binary
Octal
Hexadecimal

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Format

FIGURES

Select the displayed data format of a monitored device.

Signed (Unsigned) Decimal
: The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal
: The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Octal
: The value is displayed in octal.
Binary
: The value is displayed in binary.
Real
: The value is displayed in real number.

: 0011000101001111
: 30517
: 314F

The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format (unsigned
decimal, BCD, real), change the setting in [Data Type] on the [Device/Style] tab.
Font

Select a numeric font.

6 8dot
12-dot Standard
16-dot Standard

12-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot HQ Gothic
TrueType Gothic

1Stroke

Number Size
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.

asterisk*1

Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when the
selected in [Alignment].
Example (In the case of five digits)
Zero not displayed
Zero displayed

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Digits

button is

Fill with 0

Alignment

0005
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Select the text position.

: Select the horizontal position.
When REAL is selected in [Format] of [Display Format], set the number of digits after the decimal
point (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
If "0" is set, the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.

Example: Device value: 6.57

Number of digits after decimal point: 1

DATA LIST

Display Format

Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.

The available number of digits vary depending on the [Format] of [Display Format].
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Octal
: 1 to 6 digits
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)

Rounded off

Decimal Point

6.57
6.6

8
6.57

(Continued to next page)

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 15

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Display the
numerical value to
be shown on the
screen with

LAMP

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to display the device value of integer (when data format other than binary floating
point value is stored in monitor target devices) as a value with decimal point, when Real is
selected in the [Format] of [Display Format].

Example: Number of digits after

decimal point: 2
controller device
value: 20
Adjust Decimal
Point Range

0.20

Number of digits after

decimal point: 3
controller device
value: 20
0.02

Display Format

0.20 is displayed on GOT.

0.02 is displayed on GOT.

The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:

Display range
: $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the specified
device value
Data operation : $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value

Format String*2*3

Set this item when displaying characters (such as alphanumeric characters and symbols) with
device values.
Input "#" for the part where a numeric is displayed.
The "#" signs set with the format string setting are replaced by a device value when displayed.
Numerics displayed are assigned from the ones place.
The sign included in the device value is displayed same as numerics.

(Continued to next page)

5 - 16

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

1
Item

Description

Model
FIGURES

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

GT Designer3 setting

Figure frame area

Frame Color

Before updating data

TOUCH SWITCH

Shape

GOT display
After updating data

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

LAMP

Frame

Plate Color

Plate

Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the numeric character.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.

None
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Medium
: Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High
: Blinks every 0.2 seconds.

Blink Scope

Select a blink area.

Data only
: Makes the numerical value blink.
Data and Plate : Makes the numerical value and plate blink.

Preview

Sample Value

Set the numerical value to be displayed on the preview shape.

Description

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Numerical Color

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

*1 Precautions for asterisk display

The following shows precautions for using the asterisk display.

(1) Values that are displayed as asterisks

Example of format string settings

Without asterisk display

With asterisk display

##m##cm

12m34cm

**m**cm

7
DATA LIST

Numeric values, signs, and decimal points are displayed as asterisks.

When character strings (other than "#") are set for the format string, the character strings are not displayed as
asterisks.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Shape Settings
(Normal)

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot
correctly display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.

(2) Stored values for operation log function

Even when the asterisk display is set, actual values (not asterisks) are stored for the operation log.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 17

*2 Precautions for format strings

The following shows precautions for using format strings.

(1) Setting items disabled when format strings are used

When TrueType font is set, format strings cannot be used.
Settings of [Digits] in the Device/Style tab is disabled.
Setting of [Alignment] on the Device/Style tab is disabled and the right alignment is set.

(2) Characters that cannot be displayed for format string

If any character of other than ASCII code (0x20 to 0x7E) is included in the format string when 6x8 dot is set for
font, this character and the following characters are not displayed.
GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

*3 Display example of format string settings

The following shows display examples where format string settings are used.
Example1: When other than [Real] is set to [Format] of [Display Format]
Format string

Decimal place

##m##cm

Device value

Display

1234

12m34cm

123

1m23cm

12345

23m45cm

-123

-1m23cm

Example2: When [Real] is set to [Format] of [Display Format]

Format string

Decimal place

Device value

##m##cm
####cm

Display
m12cm

12.345

##.##cm

12m35cm
1235cm
12.35cm

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area
in the specified figure frame
Plate area
Plate area
Figure frame area

5 - 18

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

: Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure frame.

Input Case tab

FIGURES

Set the range.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Preview list

LAMP

Item

Model

Displays the set status for each condition.

Up to 64 conditions can be set (including the normal case). (The condition No. 0 indicates the normal case)
Creates a new condition.
Deletes the condition.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Range

7
DATA LIST

Range

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Preview List

Description

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 19

 Display Case tab

The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of conditions, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Preview list

Item

Description
Displays the set status for each condition.
Up to 64 conditions can be set (including the normal case). (The condition No. 0 indicates the normal case)

Preview list*1

Creates a new condition.

Deletes the condition.
Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

Type

Range
Device
Condition

Shape Settings

Select the condition for display change depending on the state.

Bit
: Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.
Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Word
: Select this item to change the display based on a word device .
After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device
value with the [Exp] button.
Set the value of the word device to change the display.
GT Designer3 Version

Set the device status of the bit device. (ON/OFF)

Range

Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.

Plate Color

Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.

Numerical Color

Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.

None
: Not blink.
Low
: Blinks every 1 second.
Medium
: Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High
: Blinks every 0.2 seconds.

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the numerical display.

For details of *1, refer to the following.

5 - 20

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

Model

*1 State
When the condition is other than the one set at the [Display case] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set
on the [Device/Style] tab.

(2) Display when conditions are overlapped

When conditions are overlapped, the condition with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device
: D100
Data Type
: Signed BIN16
State No.

Range

High

200<=$W<=300

Blue

1000<=$W

Yellow (Reverse)

$W<=0

Red (Blink)

Normal case
(State 0)

Green

TOUCH SWITCH

Priority level for

overlapped setting

Low

FIGURES

(1) Display for condition other than those set on the [Display case] tab

Color

* $V represents the monitor device value.

When the device value is 200 to 300 (200<=$W<= 300), numeric

value will be displayed in blue.

200

LAMP

State 1

State2

When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$W), the numeric

value will be displayed in yellow (reverse).

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

4
3000

When the device value is 0 or less ($W<= 0), the numeric value will
be displayed in red (blink).

-200

Normal case
(State 0)

When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the numeric

value will be displayed in green.

150

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

State3

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 21

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Security Level

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

The number of [Input] must be larger than that for [Display].

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.
After selecting this item, set the offset device.

Use Offset

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Write

Select this item for writing the value input in Numerical Input to devices.
When the data operation has been set, the data before operation can be saved.

Write Check

Select this item for turning on the device after completion of numerical input.
After selecting this item, set the device.
When setting is completed, set the device operation.
ON
: When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on.
ON to OFF : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on, and it will be
turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed.
It is very convenient for the case that handshake on the controller side is difficult.
After selecting, set the time for which the bit device is on (0.5 to 3 seconds).

Setting items of
Numerical
Input

Select this item for setting the user ID number (1 to 65535).

Setting a user ID allows the following functions.
The cursor position at screen switching can be determined.
GT Designer3 Version
User ID*1*2*3

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

The numerical input function while the cursor is shown can be checked.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

To specify the used object in the operation log.

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

(Continued to next page)

5 - 22

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

1
Item

Description

Setting items of
Numerical
Input

ID*2

Select the [Advanced Setting] tab from [Common]

[GOT Environmental Setting]

FIGURES

Select this item for moving the cursor to the specified user ID number numerical input after the
numerical input is completed.
After selecting this item, set the user ID number to where moving the cursor.
After checking, set the user ID No. to move the cursor for the next numerical input.
Click the [Screen Property] button, and select the [Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
Select [Prioritize screen setting over project setting] in [Key Window/Cursor Movement].
Select [Control the cursor] in [Defined key action]. Set [Move in order of User IDs (not move if it
cannot shift)] in [Cursor Move Destination].

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Move Destination

Model

[Key

Window].
Select [Control the cursor] for [Defined key action] in [Key Window/Cursor Movement].
Select [Move in order of User IDs (not move if it cannot shift)] in [Cursor Move Destination].
Operation Log
Target

Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Set a kanji region for the characters to be displayed when setting the format string on the Device/Style tab.
Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)
LAMP

GT Designer3 Version
Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5 )-Gothic

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

[Japan]

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

KANJI Region

[China (GB) -Mincho]

This setting is available when any of the following [Font] is selected in the Device/Style tab
12-dot standard
316-dot standard
12-dot high quality Gothic
16-dot high quality Gothic
Stroke

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

7
DATA LIST

Category

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Layer

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 23

*1 User ID
Set the [User ID] to enable the following operations.
Setting of the cursor position for switching the screens
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Storing the numerical input confirmation timing to a device

(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)
Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs
(2) Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs

(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)

When a input value is entered using the numerical input function, the user ID is written to [Numeric Value Input
Number] in [System Information] and the numeric value input signal (System signal 2-1.b4) turns on.
When clearing the user ID written to the numeric value input number (System signal 2-1.b4) or turning off the
Numeric value input signal (System signal 2-1.b4), turn on the Numeric value input read complete signal.
(After clearing, turn off the numeric value input read complete signal (System signal 1-1.b4). If the signal
remains ON, storing the user ID or turning on the bit device cannot be done even if the numerical value has
been input.)

Key input of numeric value

Confirm

ON
Numeric value input signal
System signal 2-1. b4

OFF

Numeric value input number

Stores user ID number

Stores "0"
ON

Numeric value input read

complete signal
System signal 1-1. b4

OFF

System signal 2-1.b4 Numeric value input signal : Turn on when a value is entered using the numerical input function.
System signal 1-1.b4 Numeric value read complete signal : When this signal turns on, the numeric value input signal
(System signal 2-1.b4) turns off.

For the setting method of the [System Information], refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

(2) Moving the cursor according to the ascending/descending order of user IDs
It is possible to move the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs by using the key code switches
indicated below.
(a) Cursor movement in the ascending order of user IDs (key code: 0092H)
10

0
1)

User ID: 1
2)

User ID:4

3)

0
User ID: 3

User ID: 2

0
User ID:2

Cursor does not move to this object since the same

ID is used for another object.
If there is a duplication of user ID, the cursor moves
to the object having the smallest object ID.

The cursor moves in the order of 1)

2)
3).
After movement 3), the cursor does not move any more since there are no further user IDs.

5 - 24

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

(b) Cursor movement in the descending order of user IDs((key code: 0093H)
0
3)
User ID: 1

10

User ID: 2
2)

FIGURES

User ID:4

1)

0
User ID:2

TOUCH SWITCH

User ID: 3

Cursor does not move to this object since the same

ID is used for another object.
If there is a duplication of user ID, the cursor moves
to the object having the smallest object ID.

The cursor moves in the order of 1)

2)
3).
After movement 3), the cursor does not move any more since there are no further user IDs.

The move destination ID number indicates the user ID number of the numerical input function to which the cursor
moves next.
Example: Cursor movement by move destination ID

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

User ID: 1

B
2)

User ID

User ID: 2
4)

3)

User ID: 3

0
User ID:4

*3 Setting the user ID

To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully so that the
user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
When different user IDs are set for each object
The cursor moves properly with the user ID
when the Set Overlay Screen function or
superimposed window is used.

When the same user ID are set for all If more

than one object having the same user ID are
identified on the screen (including the Set
Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window), the
cursor may not move correctly with the user ID.
Base screen 1

Base screen 1

Window screen 1

Window screen 1
0

1 to 4 : User ID

128

128

1 to 2 : User ID

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

10

Numerical input

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

1)

Move destination
ID

LAMP

*2 Relationship between user ID and move destination ID

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 25

 Trigger tab
This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
GT Designer3 Version

Item
Trigger Type

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Description
Select trigger by which the object is displayed.
(For GT10, [Range] and [Bit Trigger] cannot be selected.)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Range
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary

Settings

ON
OFF

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Range
Bit Trigger

5 - 26

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

Model

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

TOUCH SWITCH

GT Designer3 Version

FIGURES

Operation/Script tab

LAMP

Model

Bit Mask

Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.

Bit Shift

Check this item to enable bit shift operation.

Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

Select an operational expression format for data operation.

Monitor

Click on this and set the operational expression for monitoring device.

Write

Click on this and set the operational expression for writing to device.

*1

With GT10, the decimal point is rounded down with the operation including the division or decimals when [Format] on the
Extended tab is set to other than the real number.

7
DATA LIST

Operation*1

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Data

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Description

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Item

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 27

HINT
Division with adjusting decimal point range
The device values in the GT10 are divided by 10n only when [Adjust Decimal Point Range] and [Decimal Point] are
set on the Basic tab. (Numbers of decimal place are not rounded down.)
Example) When using the data operation for GT10
Device: 1265
Decimal point: 0
Adjust decimal point range: No
Data operation: $$ (Device value) /100

12.00

The GOT displays 12.00.

5 - 28

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

When using the adjust decimal point range for GT10

Device: 1265
Decimal point: 2
Adjust decimal point range: Yes
Data operation: No

12.65

The GOT displays 12.65.

FIGURES

(2) Input object script

For details of settings made on the input object script tab, refer to the following
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

width

decimal_point

3)

Numerical Color

text_color

3)

Number Size (X)

text_width

4)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

height

Number Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Security Level(Display)

security

4)

Security Level(Input)

input_security

2)

DATA LIST

Device/Style

*1

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Extended
1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.
For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5 - 29

(3) Display object script

For details of settings made on the display object script tab, refer to the following
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height
decimal_point

3)

Numerical Color

text_color

3)

Number Size (X)

text_width

4)

Number Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Security Level(Display)

security

4)

Device/Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

5 - 30

5.2 Setting Numerical Input

5.3 Relevant Settings

FIGURES

The numerical display/numerical input is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

Function

Set description

Model

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

TOUCH SWITCH

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting

GOT environment settings (Key window)/Screen properties

Settings can be made by project (GOT environment setting) or screen (Screen property).

Model

Displaying the input range when a numeric value out of input range is input.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the valid input range when an invalid
value is input in Numerical Input]

Displaying the cursor when condition success.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Cursor]

Deleting the key window and cursor when condition fails.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Clear the key window and the cursor] in [When
operating conditions are not satisfied]

Enabling/disabling the key window for each screen.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Automatically move the key window when it
overlaps with an input object]

Check this option when displaying the value being input on the key window.

Set in the following item in [Basic Setting] tab/[Key

Window Basic Setting] tab.
[Display value during input]

Check this option when displaying the applicable data input range on the key
window.

Set in the following item in [Basic Setting] tab/[Key

Window Basic Setting] tab.
[Display input function range]

Displays the dialog for confirming input data when the RTN key is pressed.
(Specific to numeric value input or ASCII input)

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the cursor with a touch on the Enter/
arrow key when the cursor is hidden]

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are

input, by touching the RTN key.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the input confirmation dialog when
setting the function of Numerical/ASCII Input]

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Check the input range while entering numerical
values]

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Checking the input range when a numerical value is input.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Set description

7
DATA LIST

Function

LAMP

(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

(Continued to next page)

5.3 Relevant Settings

5 - 31

Function

5 - 32

Set description

Displaying the key window when condition success.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Key Window]

Displaying the key window when switching screens.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the key window]

Displaying the cursor when switching screens.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the cursor]

Selecting the cursor display method for numeric input and ASCII input.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Cursor Type]

Displaying the key window as soon as the touch input is detected; erasing key
window when the RET key is touched.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Key Window]
[Defined key action]

Setting the input order when multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input
are provided.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area automatically.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Defined key action]
[Reference for determining cursor destination]

Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and
ASCII input.

Set in the following item in [Basic Setting] tab/[Key

Window Basic Setting] tab.
[Key Window]

5.3 Relevant Settings

Model

GOT environment settings (System information)

[Previous Numeric Value Input(32bit)]

Notifying the value determined by the numeric value input function (32 bits).
(Write device)

[Current Numeric Value Input(32bit)]

Notifying the determined numerical value input.

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b4)

[system Signal 2-1]

Notifying the user ID of the determined numeric value input.

(Write device)

[Numeric Value Input Number]

Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
previous time. (Write device)

[Previous Cursor Display Object ID]

Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
previous time. (Write device)

[Previous Cursor Display User ID]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

Notifying that the key window is on the screen.

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b11)

[system Signal 2-1]

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

[system Signal 1-1]

Turning off the numerical value input signal

(Read device: System Signal 1-1.b4)

[system Signal 1-1]

Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently.
(Write device)

[Current Cursor Display Object ID]

Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently.
(Write device)

[Current Cursor Display User ID]

Notifying that the cursor is being displayed by the numeric/ASCII value input.
(Write device: System Signal 2-2.b11)

[system Signal 2-2]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

[system Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[system Signal 2-1]

Notifying that a value out of the range is stored.

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b14)

[system Signal 2-1]

LAMP

Notifying the value before changed by the the numeric value input function (32
bits).
(Write device)

Model

TOUCH SWITCH

Set description
[Clear the cursor information when deleting the
cursor]

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

GOT internal device

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

GS450.b0

Checking the input range when a numerical value is input

(Write device)

GS450.b1

Storing 0 at the current cursor position of the system information when the
cursor disappears. (Write device)

GS450.b3

Model

7
DATA LIST

Set description

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Function
Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are
input by touching the RTN key. (Write device)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Function
Clearing the cursor information such as cursor display object ID and cursor
display user ID when the cursor is deleted.

FIGURES

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

5.3 Relevant Settings

5 - 33

5.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the numerical display/numerical input function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on 1 screen
Number of numerical display objects : 1000
Number of numerical input objects : 1000

(2) Overlaying numerical display with level display

Arrange the numerical display on the same layer as the level display.
When displaying numerical values with the level display overlapped, refer to the level cautions.
11. LEVEL

(3) Numerical input arrange position (Other than GT16, GT1595-X, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT1020)
Depending on the arranged position of the numerical input, there are cases the input operation is not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the numerical input by the
data check function of GT Designer3.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 3.13 Data Check
If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.

1.

Change the grid to 16 dots pitch in the screen of GT Designer3.

2.

Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer3

1234
Input operation is not possible
unless the center point of 16-dot grids
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.

5 - 34

5.4 Precautions

1234
Arrange an object so that it includes the
center point of 16-dot grids.

Precautions for use

When the numeric input objects are simultaneously displayed on the base screen and overlap window, the input
cursor that is displayed by other than touch operation (key window display by special function switch, etc.) will
appear on the overlap window.

FIGURES

(1) When numerical input is set on window screen

0
0

To display the cursor on the numerical input of the base screen, touch the numerical input of the base screen.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
D10 150
D10 20 0
D30
D40

(2) When special function switch (key window) is set

(a) For default key window

A default key window for decimal input is displayed.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(b) For user-created key window

The screen set at [Window Screen No. for DEC] is displayed.
When [Window Screen No. for DEC] is not set (or is set to "0"), a default key window for decimal input is
displayed.

LAMP

If a key window is displayed using a special function switch when an input cursor is not displayed at a numerical
input, the key window will be displayed as follows;

(3) Blink display

The input cursor will stop blinking temporarily when it is displayed.

(a) Don't turn on twenty-one devices above simultaneously.

Or not, the 22nd device or later cannot be turned off automatically.
(b) At using the same write completed device for multiple numerical inputs, set the numerical input to not be
able to input the value while the write completed device is ON.
Setting example : Set the operation condition to trigger type "OFF" and the device "M10"

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

(4) [ON and OFF] is set in [Write Check]

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

5.4 Precautions

5 - 35

At inputting before turning OFF, the write completed device will not turn OFF at normal timing.
Example : Write completed device: M10 (which turns OFF in 3 seconds after it turned ON)
Numerical input A

Numerical input B

400

100
OFF timing of numerical input B

Write completed
device (M10)

Actual OFF timing

ON
OFF
3 seconds

(c)

The write completed device will not turn OFF if screen switching (including switching to the utility) occurs
while the write completed device is ON. It keeps ON for the specified period of time.

Executing the range check during numerical value input

For precautions of executing range check during numerical value input, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting

(1) Precautions for screen design

(a) When more than two conditions are set, the range check will be disabled during the numerical value input.
The check is executed when the input is determined.
(b) Use any of the following patterns to set the range formula for conditions.
If the pattern other than below is used to set the range formula, the range check will be executed when the
input is determined.
$W<A, $W<=A
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
A
: Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
A<$W<B, A<=$W<B, A<$W<=B, A<=$W<=B
$W : The device set for the numeric value input
A
: Fixed value or other device
B
: Fixed value or other device (positive value (+) only)
(c)

When input range and display range are set separately

Only the input range will be checked.

(2) Precautions for operation

(a) Inputting negative value (-)
Enter the minus sign (-), and then the numerical value.
(b) The lower limit value check
The lower limit value check is executed when the input is determined.
(c)

Comparison with device

When the value of the comparison target device cannot be read, a message will appear.

(d) Cursor movement

When cursor is moved within the object during numerical value input, the range check will not be executed
during input.
The range check will be executed when the input is determined.
To enable the range check during input, hide the cursor (after the numerical input mode is released) and
input a numerical value again.

5 - 36

5.4 Precautions

Precautions for input confirmation message display

Depending on GOT types, the numeric value digits available for display is different.
The digits after the following will not be displayed on the message. Make sure that the digits of the input value
are within the following.
GT16, GT15 (excluding GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q), GT SoftGOT1000 : 35 digits
GT15 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT11 : 23 digits

FIGURES

(1) Number of digits for numeric value available for message

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Example) GT11
Do you want to change
to the following value?
12345678901234567890123 4567890
OK

Cancel

The 24th digits or later

are not displayed.

* Any input confirmation message is displayed for GT10.

(2) Message position

The message position will be different depending on the key window type.
LAMP

(a) When using default key window

The message is displayed on the key window.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(b) When using user-created key window or no key window

The message is displayed on the center of the screen.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

5.4 Precautions

5 - 37

5 - 38

5.4 Precautions

ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

FIGURES

6.

ASCII display
6.1 Setting ASCII Display
ASCII display is the function that treats the data stored in word device as text code (ASCII code) to display the text
column.

QX 42
LAMP

QX 40

TOUCH SWITCH

5851H (XQ)
3420H (4 )
0030H (0)

D12 5851H (XQ)

D13 3420H (4 )
D14 0032H (2)

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

D12
D13
D14

ASCII input
6.2 Setting ASCII Input
ASCII input is the function that writes the input text into word device in text code (ASCII code).
The keys for input are created by assigning key codes to touch switch.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Input from the touch switches arranged on the screen

ABCD

ABC

A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CCCC

A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CC

ABC

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Input from the key window

ABCD

7
D10 0000H
D11 0000H

Using the Write key (key code: 000DH),

write the input text in text code
D10 4241H (BA)
D11 4443H (DC)

DATA LIST

Input a text

POINT

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Key window
The key window must be created by the user.
Refer to the following section for the creating method, types and operation method of the key window.
(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting

6-1

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the ASCII display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged ASCII display to display the setting dialog box.

[ASCII Display/Input]

[ASCII Display] from the menu.

Device/Style tab
This tab is used to select ASCII display or ASCII input, and set the device and view format (font, text size, digits,
display frame, shape)

Item

Description

Type

Select the function to be used (ASCII Display/ASCII Input)

Device

Set the head bit device where text code is stored

Digits

Set the number of digits (1 to 100) for the text to be displayed/input.

The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit

Alignment

Select the text position.

: Select the horizontal position.
Font

Text Size
Text Settings

Model

Select a font.
16 dot standard font
6 8dot font
12 dot standard font*1
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Stroke*2

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Text Color

Select the color of text to be displayed.

Display the text to

be shown on the
screen with
asterisk

Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.

(Continued to next page)

6-2

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

Text Settings

Description

Model

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High)

Blink Scope

Select the range to blink.(Text only/Text and Plate)

Reverse

FIGURES

Item

Select this item for reversing the text.

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures
can be selected as shape.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot
correctly display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.

GOT display
GT Designer3 setting

Before updating data

After updating data

Shape Settings

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

LAMP

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

Figure frame area

Select the frame color and plate color.

ABCDEFG
Plate Color

Frame color
Plate color

Text

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
*1
*2

Select the text to be displayed on the preview shape.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Preview

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Frame Color

Not available for GT1020.

Not available for GT11 and GT10.

POINT

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Figure frame area

The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area in
the specified figure frame
Plate area

: Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure frame.

Plate area

DATA LIST

Figure frame area

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

6-3

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Display in order of
High -> Low

Layer

Category

6-4

Select this item for displaying text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

Model

Trigger tab

FIGURES

This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item

Model

Select trigger by which the object is displayed.

When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Trigger Type

Description

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Settings

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

6-5

 Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
28.3 Object Script

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Device/Style

Extended
*1

Text Size (X)

text_width

4)

Text Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Text Color

text_color

3)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Blink Scope

blink

5)

Security Level

security

4)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

6-6

6.1 Setting ASCII Display

FIGURES

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the ASCII input is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged ASCII input to display the setting dialog box.

[ASCII Input] from the menu.

Device/Style tab

LAMP

This tab is used to select ASCII display or ASCII input, and set the device and view format (font, text size, digits,
display frame, shape)

TOUCH SWITCH

[ASCII Display/Input]

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Description
Select the function to be used (ASCII Display/ASCII Input)

Device

Set the head bit device where text code is stored

Digits

Set the number of digits (1 to 100) for the text to be displayed/input.

The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit

Select the display position for the text to be displayed.

: Select the horizontal position.
Select the display position for the text to be input.
: Select the horizontal position.

(Continued to next page)

DATA LIST

Input Alignment

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Display
Alignment

Model

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Item
Type

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

6-7

Item

Description

Model

For inputting character strings, if the number of input characters is less than the number specified for [Digits] in the
[Device/Style] tab, it is possible to select the ASCII code that fill the blank area from the followings.
Space (0x20)

: Secures the blank area as space.

If this option is selected,

and

of [Display Alignment] cannot be selected.

Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for [Digits] is "7"

Character string

(SP)

(SP)

(SP)

(SP)

ASCII code

(0x41)

(0x42)

(0x43)

(0x20)

(0x20)

(0x20)

(0x20)

Input Character
String Terminal
NULL

(0x00)

: Stores NULL (0x00) at the first digit place following the input character string.
The character string preceding the NULL is taken as valid data and characters that follow
NULL are indefinite and thus disregarded.
Example: When 3 characters were input while the setting for [Digits] is "7"

Character string

(NULL)

ASCII code

(0x41)

(0x42)

(0x43)

(0x0)

Font

Text Size

Select a font.
(When [16dot Standard] is selected, [Text Size] cannot be set to [0.5].)
6 8dot font
12 dot standard font
16 dot standard font
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
GT Designer3 Version

Text Color
Text Settings

Display the text to

be shown on the
screen with

Stroke

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Select the color of text to be displayed.

Select this item for displaying values on the screen as asterisks.

asterisk*1
Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None/Low/Medium/High)

Blink Scope

Select the range to blink.(Text only/Text and Plate)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

Set a shape for the object.
When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures
can be selected as shape.
GT Designer3 Version

Shape

GT Designer3 setting

Shape Settings

Figure frame area

Frame Color

Plate Color

Before updating data

GOT display
After updating data

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

Select the frame color and plate color.

ABCDEFG

Frame color
Plate color

Preview

Text

Select the text to be displayed on the preview shape.

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

6-8

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly
display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

The following shows precautions for using the asterisk display.

Values that are displayed as asterisks
String characters and control characters (other than "NULL") are displayed as asterisks.
Because control characters are displayed as asterisks, the number of displayed asterisks differs according to
the input character string terminal settings.
Example: When the number of digits is set to six for [Digits], and the
is set for [Display Alignment].
Without asterisk display

Space (0x20)

With asterisk display

ABCD

NULL (0x00)

2
TOUCH SWITCH

Input character string terminal

settings

FIGURES

*1 Precautions for asterisk display

******

ABCD

****

(1) Stored character strings for operation log function

Even when the asterisk display is set, actual character strings (not asterisks) are stored for the operation log.

(2) Kana-kanji conversion function

LAMP

When the asterisk display is used, the Kana-kanji conversion function is not available.
Even when GS450.b4 turns on, the function is not available.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

POINT

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Figure frame area

The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area in
the specified figure frame
: Area that displays the color set
for the plate in the figure frame.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Plate area

Plate area
Figure frame area

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

6-9

 Extended tab

Item

Description
Display input value
on destination
object location

Model

When this item is checked, the numeric value input using such as the key window is immediately
reflected to the object on the screen.
(The input value is written to a device after the RET key is touched.)
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Security Level

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

The number of [Input] must be larger than that for [Display].

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
GT Designer3 Version

Display in order of
High -> Low

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Select this item for displaying text codes of the device in the order from higher to lower byte.
Select this item for setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535)
By setting the user ID, the following operations are available.
Decides the cursor display position when switching screen.

Extended

GT Designer3 Version
User ID*1*2

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Confirms the ASCII input definition timing using PLC CPU.

GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

To specify the used object in the operation log.

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
Move Destination
ID

*1*3

Operation Log
Target

Select this item for moving the cursor to the ASCII input specified by the user ID no. after an
ASCII input is defined.
After selecting the item, set the user ID No. for the ASCII input to which the cursor is moved.
Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
Select this item to use the Kanji conversion function.

KANA KANJI
Conversion

6.5 Precautions
This item is not available when [Display the text to be shown on the screen with asterisk] on the
[Device/Style] tab is selected.

(Continued to next page)

6 - 10

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

1
Description

Model
FIGURES

Item
Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)
Layer

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

TOUCH SWITCH

Category

For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

*1 Relation between User ID and Move Destination ID

AB C

1)

User ID: 1

B
2)

User ID

Move Destination
ID

DEF
User ID: 2
4)

GHI

3)

User ID: 3

JKL
User ID: 4

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

ASCII input

LAMP

The destination ID No. indicates the user ID No. of ASCII input function to which the cursor will move.
Example: Cursor movement to the destination ID

*2 Moving the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

It is possible to move the cursor in the ascending/descending order of user IDs by using the key code switches
indicated below.
(a) Cursor movement in the ascending order of user IDs (key code: 0092H)

AB C

DEF
1)
User ID: 2
2)

GHI
User ID: 3

JKL
User ID:4

3)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

User ID: 1

DEF
User ID:2

Cursor does not move to this object since the same

ID is used for another object.
If there is a duplication of user ID, the cursor moves
to the object having the smallest object ID.

7
DATA LIST

The cursor moves in the order of 1) 2) 3).

After movement 3), the cursor does not move any more since there are no further user IDs.

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

6 - 11

Cursor movement in the descending order of user IDs (key code: 0093H)
ABC

DEF
3)

User ID: 1
2)

User ID:4

1)

GHI
User ID: 3

JKL

User ID: 2

DEF
User ID:2

Cursor does not move to this object since the same

ID is used for another object.
If there is a duplication of user ID, the cursor moves
to the object having the smallest object ID.

The cursor moves in the order of 1)

2) 3).
After movement 3), the cursor does not move any more since there are no further user IDs.
*3 Setting the user ID
To control the cursor with the user ID, set different user ID numbers for each object.
Also, when using the Set Overlay Screen function or superimpose windows, design the screen carefully so that the
user ID of the displayed object will be unique.
When the same user ID are set for all If more
than one object having the same user ID are
identified on the screen (including the Set
Overlay Screen or Superimpose Window), the
cursor may not move correctly with the user ID.

When different user IDs are set for each object

The cursor moves properly with the user ID
when the Set Overlay Screen function or
superimposed window is used.
Base screen 1

Base screen 1

Window screen 1
2

Window screen 1

1 to 4 : User ID

DEF

AB C

1 to 2

DEF

GHI

JKM

6 - 12

AB C

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

GHI

JKM

: User ID

Trigger tab
GT Designer3 Version

FIGURES

This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item
Trigger Type

Description

Model

Select the trigger by which data is displayed in ASCII.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Range
Bit Trigger

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Range
Bit Trigger

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Settings

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

6 - 13

 Script tab
(1) Input object script

For details of settings made on the input object script tab, refer to the following.
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Device/Style

Extended
*1

Text Size (X)

text_width

4)

Text Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Text Color

text_color

3)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Blink Scope

blink

5)

Security Level (Display)

security

4)

Security Level (Input)

input_security

2)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

6 - 14

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

FIGURES

(2) Display object script

For details of settings made on the display object script tab, refer to the following
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

Tab name

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box

Object property
Setting item

Property name

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

width
height

Extended
*1

4)

Text Size (Y)

text_height

4)

Text Color

text_color

3)

Blink

blink

5)

Reverse

highlight

5)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Blink Scope

blink

5)

Security Level

security

4)

7
DATA LIST

text_width

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Device/Style

Text Size (X)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

6.2 Setting ASCII Input

6 - 15

6.3 Relevant Settings

The ASCII display/ASCII input are available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

6 - 16

Set description

Outputting the input signal/input number when ASCII characters are input.

[Output object ID of ASCII Input to the system

information device]

Clearing the cursor information such as cursor display object ID and cursor
display user ID when the cursor is deleted.

[Clear the cursor information when deleting the

cursor]

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

[System Signal 1-1]

Turning off the numeric value input signal. (Read device: System signal 1-1.b4)

[System Signal 1-1]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: System Signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying the determined numerical value input.

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b4))

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying that the key window is on the screen.

(Write device: System Signal 2-1.b11)

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying that the cursor is being displayed by the numeric/ASCII value input.
(Write device: System Signal 2-2.b11)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying the user ID of the determined numeric value input. (Write device)

[Numeric Value Input Number]

Notifying the ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently.

(Write device)

[Current Cursor Display Object ID]

Notifying the object ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
previous time. (Write device)

[Previous Cursor Display Object ID]

Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor is positioned currently.
(Write device)

[Current Cursor Display User ID]

Notifying the user ID of the object on which the cursor was positioned at the
previous time. (Write device)

[Previous Cursor Display User ID]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

6.3 Relevant Settings

Model

GOT environment settings (Key window)/Screen properties

Settings can be made by project (GOT environment setting) or screen (Screen property).

Displaying the cursor when switching screens.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the cursor]

Displaying the cursor when condition success.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Cursor]

Deleting the key window and cursor when condition fails.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Clear the key window and the cursor] in [When
operating conditions are not satisfied]

Selecting the cursor display method for numeric input and ASCII input.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Cursor Type]

Displaying the key window as soon as the touch input is detected; erasing key
window when the RET key is touched.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Key Window]
[Defined key action]

Setting the input order when multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input
are provided.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area automatically.

Set the following item in the [Key Window

Advanced Setting] tab.
[Defined key action]
[Reference for determining cursor destination]

Set the window screen to be used for numeric value input (decimal/hex) and
ASCII input.

Set the following item in the [Basic Setting] tab/

[Key Window Basic Setting] tab.
[Key Window]

Enabling/disabling the key window for each screen.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Automatically move the key window when it
overlaps with an input object]

It is possible to set whether the cursor is displayed or remains hidden when the
RET key or an arrow key is pressed while the cursor is hidden.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the cursor with a touch on the Enter/
arrow key when the cursor is hidden]

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are

input, by touching the RTN key.

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the input confirmation dialog when
setting the function of Numerical/ASCII Input]

TOUCH SWITCH

Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/

[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Display the key window]

LAMP

Displaying the key window when switching screens.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Displaying the key window when condition success.

Model

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Set description
Set in the following item in [Advanced Setting] tab/
[Key Window Advanced Setting] tab.
[Key Window]

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Function

FIGURES

(Fundamentals) 4.5 Key Window Setting

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

Set description

Displaying the input confirmation dialog when numerical/ASCII characters are

input by touching the RTN key. (Write device)

GS450.b0

Storing "0" at the current cursor position of the system information when the
cursor disappears. (Write device)

GS450.b3

Converting the Kana text input in ASCII to Kanji. (Write device)

GS450.b4

Model

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Function

DATA LIST

GOT internal device

6.3 Relevant Settings

6 - 17

6.4 Actions
Text code reading/writing order
The text code reading/writing order can be selected according to the specifications of the controller to be monitored.

(1) Reading/writing in order from lower byte to higher byte

Text codes are read/written in reverse order of every 8 bits.
(Default setting)
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII codes "41 (A)", "42 (B)" are displayed)

D10

L
H

Set device

ASCII display

41H

AB

42H
(4142H)

(4241H)
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte

(2) Reading/writing in order from higher byte to lower byte

Text codes are read or written in the order from the higher byte to the lower byte.
(Select the item [Display in order of High -> Low] in the [Extended] tab.
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII code "41(A)","42(b)" are displayed)
Device

D10

41H

42H
(4142H)

ASCII display
AB
(4142H)

L: Lower byte H: Higher byte

Number of display digits and available devices

One word device is used for ASCII display/ASCII input every two display digits.
Example: Set device (head device) : D1
Number of display digits : 3
Two word devices D1 and D2 are used.

6 - 18

6.4 Actions

6.5 Precautions

FIGURES

This section provides the precautions when using ASCII display/ASCII input function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum Number of ASCII display/input objects that can be set in one screen

1000
Depending on the arranged position of the ASCII input, there are cases the input operation is not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the numerical input by the
data check function of GT Designer3.
For using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer3 Version

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.

Change the grid to 16 dots pitch in the screen of GT Designer3.

LAMP

1.

TOUCH SWITCH

(2) ASCII input arrange position (Other than GT16, GT1595-X, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT1020)

2.

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed on GT Designer3

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ABCD

ABCD
Input operation is not possible
unless the center point of 16-dot grids
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

6
Arrange an object so that it includes the
center point of 16-dot grids.

Precautions for OS
Option OS

Kana-kanji conversion (enhanced version)

KANA KANJI(JPN)(Enhanced Version)

Kana-kanji conversion

KANA KANJI(JPN)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Function

DATA LIST

To use the Kana-kanji conversion function, install the option OS on the GOT.
The following shows the option OS required according to the type of the Kana-kanji conversion function to be used.

6.5 Precautions

6 - 19

 Precautions for hardware

To use the Kana-kanji conversion function with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GT16, no option function board is required.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

Precautions for use

(1) When unavailable ASCII codes are stored
If any of the following text codes are included in data for the ASCII display, characters after the text code are not
displayed.
0000H to 001FH
0080H
00F0H to 00FFH
Example: If a control code 09H (tab) is included
Control code 09H (Tab)
"40," which is located after the
control code, is not displayed.
(QX 40)
D10 5851H "X" "Q"
D11 3409H "4" "09H(Tab)"
D12 0030H "0"

(2) System message and ASCII input/display

The character code to be displayed differs depending on the language that is set for the system message (utility
or [System Language] in [GOT setup]).
Other than English: Treated as the Shift JIS code.
English
: Treated as the ASCII code (Characters such as Kana are not displayed.)

6 - 20

6.5 Precautions

DATA LIST

FIGURES

7.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
This section explains the data list function that displays multiple word device values in list form.
With this function, line No. and ruled lines of the list are displayed automatically.

No.

Plan Output Fault

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Plan Output Fault

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

D10:1000

D11:800

D12: 2

D20: 500

D21:250

D22: 0

D30: 800

D31:600

D32: 1

D40: 900

D41:850

D42: 3

LAMP

Line

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

No.

Line

Example:
Sort lines according to the values of the prior setting item.

Display the list with statistics graph on the same screen

16. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH,

7.1 Device tab

Line

Plan Output Fault

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 1

1000

800

Line 4

900

850

No.

Line

Plan Output Fault

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Device status can be displayed effectively.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

The lines will be displayed in ascending order of "Output"

values.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

No.

17. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

POINT

Comments displayed by using data list

Comments must be registered in advance for displaying in data list.

DATA LIST

(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

7-1

7.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the data list is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged data list to display the setting dialog box.

[Data List Display] from the menu.

Device tab
This tab screen is used to set the device value to be monitored and the list form to display a comment.

Title, device and comment can

be input directly.
Title

Comment No.

Item

Device

Description

Model

Rows

Set the number of lines for monitoring devices using the data list. (1 to 128)

Display Rows

Set the number of lines to be displayed on the screen. (1 to 27)

The lines out of the screen can be displayed with scroll up/scroll down key.
7.3 Actions

Columns

Set the number of columns to be displayed. (2 to 6)

Set the text (title, comment, numeric value) to be displayed and ruled line space of the list (0
to 32 dots).

Space

No.

Result

Output

List Form
Font
Text Size

Select a font.
16 dot standard font 12 dot high quality Mincho
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Sort

Set the method of arranging (sort) lines.

No. order
: Display in line number column order.
Ascending
: Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
Without sort : Not sort.

Sort/Attribute
Column

Set the sort basis column.

(Continued to next page)

7-2

7.1 Settings

1
Item

Description

Model
FIGURES

Click this button to set the display attribute of comment column.

(1) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box
Click this button to set the display attribute of data column.
to

(2) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box

Click this button to set the contents to be displayed in rows. (device, comment, label color)

to

TOUCH SWITCH

(3) Edit Rows dialog box

Select a device setting method.
Continuous : Set devices of continuous No. through all rows.
Random
: Set devices in each row.

Set initial device

Row 1
Row 2
Row 3

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4

1
D10
D11
D12
D14
D15
2
D13
3
D16
D17
D18

Set initial device in each row

Row 1
Row 2
Row 3

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4

1
D10
D11
D12
D21
D22
2
D20
3
D30
D31
D32

Select a comment setting method.

Continuous : Set comments of continuous No. through all rows.
Random
: Set comments of continuous No. in each row.

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

LAMP

Comment No.

4
GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Device No.

(1) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box

This dialog box is used to set the number of comment characters, the title and title color of the column.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

6
Select this item for using components.
After selecting the item, set the component width. (1 to 6)

Title

Input the title of comment column.

Color

Select the title color.

7
DATA LIST

Element Width

Model
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Description
Set the number of comment characters to be displayed. (Up to 80 characters can be set.)

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Item
Digits

7.1 Settings

7-3

(2) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box

(a) Format
This tab is used to set the number of digits for device value, view format/ data type of the device to be
monitored, title and title color of the column.

Item

7-4

Description

Model

Format

Select the view format of the monitor device value.

Signed decimal
Unsigned decimal
Hexadecimal

Alignment

Select the position based on the width of data column.

: Select the horizontal position.

Digits

Set the number of digits for the device value to be displayed in data column.
The available number of digits is different depending on the [Format].
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits

Fill with 0

Select this item for displaying zeros on the left to the numeric value when

Decimal Point

When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits for the decimal point. (1 to 32)

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Title

Input the title of data column.

Color

Select the title color.

7.1 Settings

Octal

Binary

Real

is selected in the [Alignment].

Unsigned BIN32

(b) Data operation

This tab is used to set the expression to operate the device value and display the results.
For details of data operation, refer to the following.

FIGURES

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Description

Model

Bit Mask

Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Check this item to enable bit shift operation.

Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right : Right shift

Data
Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

7.1 Settings

7-5

(3) Edit Rows dialog box

This dialog box is used to set the device to be monitored, comments to be displayed, and display attributes of
the components.

Item

Description
Set a device to be monitored.

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment No.

Set the comment No. to be displayed in the selected line.

Element Pattern

This item is available when [Element Width] is selected for [Edit Columns (Comment Column)] is selected.
Set the component pattern, color and background.

Element Pattern
Color

Element Pattern
Element
Background Color

7-6

Element Pattern + Element Pattern Color

Example:
:

:
Element Pattern Color
Element Background Color :

7.1 Settings

Element Background Color

Model

Style tab

FIGURES

Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
For details of the conditions, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Preview list

Shape Settings

Description

Shape

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, no shape will be displayed.
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library
figures can be selected as shape.

Frame*1

Set the frame color of the data list display.

Title*1

Preview list

Set the title color of the data list display.

*1

*2

Model

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Item

Ruled Line

Set the line color of the data list display.

Plate

Set the plate color of the data list display.

Displays the set status for each condition.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Creates a new condition.

Deletes the condition.
Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

*1

Row Background
Color*1
Reverse

Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.

Select a text color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.
Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the condition display are satisfied.
DATA LIST

Text Color

Range

Select this item for reversing the numerical display.

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Range

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

7.1 Settings

7-7

*1 Setting each color displayed in the the data list

For the parts that color changes when setting colors in the data list, refer to the following.
Title
(The color of each title)

No.
1
2
3
4
5

Frame

Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5

Output
25
30
32
41
38

Fault
3
3
5
3
0

Text
Plate

Ruled Line

*2 Condition

(1) Display when conditions are overlapped.

When conditions are overlapped, a condition with smaller number has priority.

7-8

7.1 Settings

(2) Condition settings of data list

FIGURES

In a data list, the $V value of a condition (monitor device) is the device value set in the second column.
Example:

TOUCH SWITCH

D10, D20, D30 and D40 are treated as $V value.

Example: Device
: D10, D20, D30, D40
Data view format : Signed BIN16
Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Output
D10
D20
D30
D40

Fault
D11
D21
D31
D41

LAMP

No.
1
2
3
4

Range

Text color

Plate color

1000<=$V

White

Green

900<=$V<=999

Yellow

White

Normal case
(Condition 0)

Black

White

Condition 1

When monitor device value is over

1000 (1000<=$V), the plate color will be
changed to green.

No.
1
2
3
4

Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Output
1000
1000
950
980

Fault
2
0
1
3

Condition 2

When monitor device value is 900 to 999

(900<=$V<=999), the text color will be
changed to yellow.

No.
1
2
3
4

Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Output
890
880
920
910

Fault
2
0
1
3

Normal case
(Condition 0)

When monitor device value is out of the

range (below 899), the text color will be
black and the plate color will be white.

No.
1
2
3
4

Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Output
890
880
820
810

Fault
2
0
1
3

7
DATA LIST

Low

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

High

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Condition No.

overlaps

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

when setting

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Action priority

7.1 Settings

7-9

 Extended tab
Set the security and offset.

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level (1 to 15).
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
After checking, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Layer

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category

7 - 10

GT Designer3 Version

7.1 Settings

Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Model

Trigger tab

FIGURES

This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

Item
Trigger Type

Description

Model

Select the condition to display or activate the object.

When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Range
Bit Trigger

DATA LIST

8
DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Settings

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

7.1 Settings

7 - 11

7.2 Relevant Settings

The data list is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

7 - 12

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

7.2 Relevant Settings

Model

7.3 Actions

FIGURES

Methods of setting data list

Set the basic functions of data list on the [Device] tab.

(1) Set the number of columns and lines for data list.
Fixed Comment
text
column
Plan

Output

Fault

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Label Comment is
(Rows) displayed.

TOUCH SWITCH

Line

Data column
Setting item name is displayed.

Number of lines (rows, displayed rows)

Device value is
displayed.
LAMP

No.

(2) Set devices, comments, label color or similar on each dialog box.

1)
2)
3)
4)

Set the view format of

comment columns.

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

1)
2)
3)
4)

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Set devices, comments,

label color to be displayed
in lines.

Set the view format of data

columns.

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

7
DATA LIST

Continuous : Set continuous comments and devices.

Set the head comment and device in 1).
Random
: Set comments and continuous devices for each line.
Set comments and the head device in 1) to 4).

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

7.3 Actions

7 - 13

 Data list function

(1) Scroll function
In data list, the number of screen display lines (display rows) can be set separately from the number of
corresponding set lines (rows).
When scroll up/scroll down key is set, data list can be scrolled up and down
Lines displayed on screen
Lines monitored actually
No.

Line

Plan

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Output

Scroll up

Fault

No.

Display
rows: 4 lines

Scroll down

Create scroll keys by setting key code in touch switch.

Scroll up: 00F2H
Scroll down: 00F3H

No.

Line

Plan

Output

Line 5

1000

900

Line 6

1000

950

Line 7

800

300

Line 8

900

700

Scroll up

Line

Plan

Output

Fault

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Line 5

1000

900

Line 6

1000

950

Line 7

800

300

Line 8

900

700

Rows:
8 lines

Fault

Scroll down

Touch scroll up/scroll down key to switch the screen

display by one screen.

(2) Sort function

Lines can be sorted based on device status of specified columns (ascending/descending order of device value).
Example: Sort the lines in descending order of device values of the third column.
Make the settings on the [Device] tab as follows:
Rows
: 8 lines
Sort
: Desending
Display rows : 4 lines
Sort/Attribute column : 3 columns
The lines will be sorted in descending order of "Output" values.
No.

Display
rows

Lines not
displayed

7 - 14

Line

Plan

Output

Fault

No.

Line

Plan

Line 1

1000

800

Line 2

500

250

Line 3

800

600

Line 4

900

850

Output

Fault

Line 6

1000

950

Line 5

1000

900

Line 4

900

850

Line 1

1000

800

2
0

Line 5

1000

900

Line 8

900

700

Line 6

1000

950

Line 3

800

600

Line 7

800

300

Line 7

800

300

Line 8

900

700

Line 2

500

250

7.3 Actions

7.4 Precautions

FIGURES

This section explains the precautions for using the data list function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen

Up to one data list object can be placed.

TOUCH SWITCH

(2) Applicable screen

Only base screen can be set.

(3) Precautions for using together with other object

(a) The object that cannot be set on the same screen
Alarm history cannot be set on the same screen.

(b) The object restricted on the applicable function

For restrictions when using the alarm list on the same screen, refer to the following.

LAMP

10.6.5 Precautions

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

7.4 Precautions

7 - 15

7 - 16

7.4 Precautions

DATE DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY

FIGURES

8.

TOUCH SWITCH

2
Date display
8.1 Setting Date Display
Date display is the function for displaying a date on GOT.
Year display is the function for displaying the last 2 digits of the year.

LAMP

02/12/25

Time display

8.2 Setting Time Display

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

Time display is the function for displaying the time on GOT.

The hour is displayed in 24-hour display format.

13:48

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

POINT
Displayed clock data
The GOT clock data is displayed in the date display/time display.
For details of the GOT clock, refer to the following.

6
ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

8-1

8.1 Setting Date Display

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the date display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged date display to display the setting dialog box.

[Date/Time Display]

[Date Display] from the menu.

Date Setting tab

Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.

Item
Type

Display Format

Description

Model

Select whether to display the date or time

Date: Displays the Year/Month/Day
Time: Displays the time
Date Type

Select the date display.

The selectable items vary depending on the contents selected in [Sort] and [Font] of the [Display
Format].

Fill with 0

Select this item for displaying "0" before month and day.

Sort

Set the sorting of year, month, and day.

Delimiter

Set the delimiter for year, month, and day.

Font

Select a numeric font.

6
8dot font
12 dot high quality Gothic

12 dot standard font*1

16 dot high quality Gothic

16 dot standard font

TrueType Numerical

Stroke*2
Size
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

(Continued to next page)

8-2

8.1 Setting Date Display

1
Description

Model
FIGURES

Item

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape settings

TOUCH SWITCH

Shape

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly
display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
GOT display
GT Designer3 setting

Shape Settings
Figure frame area

Before updating data

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

After updating data

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

Frame Color

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

LAMP

Plate Color

Plate
Frame color

Text Color

*1
*2

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Date Setting] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
Not available for GT1020.
Not available for GT1 and GT10.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Object Name

Select the color for displaying numbers.

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.

Plate area

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area

in the specified figure frame
: Area that displays the color set
for the plate in the figure fra

Plate area
Figure frame area

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

8.1 Setting Date Display

8-3

 Extended tab
Set the security, layer, and category.

Item

Security Level

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Layer

Category

8-4

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

8.1 Setting Date Display

Model

Script tab

FIGURES

For details of the [Script] tab setting contents, refer to the following.
28.3 Object Script

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

4
Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
: Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Number Size (X)

text_width

4)

Number Size (Y)

text_height

4)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

width

Text Color

text_color

3)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Security Level

security

4)

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.

28.3.4 Control structure

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Date Setting

DATA LIST

height

8.1 Setting Date Display

8-5

8.2 Setting Time Display

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the time display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged time display to display the setting dialog box.

[Date/Time Display]

[Time Display] from the menu.

Time Setting tab

Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.

Item
Type

Description

Model

Select whether to display the date or time

Date: Displays the Year/Month/Day
Time: Displays the time
Time Type

Select the time display format.

Items selectable for [Time Type] differ depending on the contents set for [Font] of [Display Format].

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.

Font

Select a numeric font.

6
8dot font
12 dot high quality Gothic

Display Format

12 dot standard font*1

16 dot high quality Gothic

16 dot standard font

TrueType Numerical

Stroke*2
Number Size
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

(Continued to next page)

8-6

8.2 Setting Time Display

1
Description

Model
FIGURES

Item

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

GT Designer3 setting

Shape Settings
Figure frame area

Before updating data

TOUCH SWITCH

Shape

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly
display the overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
GOT display
After updating data

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

A part of characters
displayed before updating
the data remains in
the figure frame area.

Frame Color
Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

LAMP

Plate Color

Plate
Frame color

Text Color

*1
*2

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Time Setting] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
Not available for GT1020.
Not available for GT1 and GT10.

5
NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

Object Name

Select the color for displaying numbers.

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.

Plate area

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area

in the specified figure frame
: Area that displays the color set
for the plate in the figure fra

Plate area
Figure frame area

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

8.2 Setting Time Display

8-7

 Extended tab
Set the security, layer, and category.

Item

Security Level

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Layer

Category

8-8

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

8.2 Setting Time Display

Model

Script tab

FIGURES

For details of the [Script] tab setting contents, refer to the following.
28.3 Object Script

TOUCH SWITCH

LAMP

4
Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
: Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Number Size (X)

text_width

4)

Number Size (Y)

text_height

4)

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

width

Text Color

text_color

3)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Security Level

security

4)

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.

28.3.4 Control structure

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

Time Setting

DATA LIST

height

8.2 Setting Time Display

8-9

8.3 Relevant settings

The date display/time display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

8 - 10

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

8.3 Relevant settings

Model

8.4 Precautions

FIGURES

This section explains the precautions for using the date display/time display function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen

Precautions for use

(1) GOT clock
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock used for date display/time display, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

TOUCH SWITCH

Up to two objects can be set for the date display/time display.

LAMP

GRAPHIC
CHARACTERS

NUMERICAL
DISPLAY/
NUMERICAL INPUT

ASCII DISPLAY/
ASCII INPUT

DATA LIST

DATE DISPLAY/TIME
DISPLAY

8.4 Precautions

8 - 11

8 - 12

8.4 Precautions

COMMENT DISPLAY

COMMENT DISPLAY

9.

10
Bit comment
X10=ON

Pro. line con.

Pro. line con.

Conv. st.

During oper.

Comment when bit

device is OFF

Comment when bit

device is ON

11

LEVEL

X10=OFF

ALARM

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

It is the function to display the comment corresponding to the ON/OFF status of bit device.

12

Word comment

D100

10

D100

100

Pro. line con.

Pro. line con.

Pro. line con.

During oper.

Conv. st.

Completed

Display comment of
comment No.1

Display comment of
comment No.10

Display comment of
comment No. 100

13
LINE GRAPH

D100

PANELMETER

9.2 Setting Word Comment

It is the function to display the comment corresponding to word device value.

Simple comment
9.3 Setting Simple Comment
The function enables the GOT to display the comment without setting the device.

14
TREND GRAPH

Comment No.1
Pro. line con.

15

Always display comment

of comment No.1

BAR GRAPH

POINT
Comment displayed by comment display
The comment to be displayed by comment display needs to be registered in advance.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

9-1

Example
Switch all the comment on the screen
(Comment display (bit/word))

Used with level function

(Comment display (bit/word))

Comment tab

Production

Extended tab

Production

Production

Targ. 1 comp.

Targ. 2 comp.

Actual
Line 1
Line 2

50
150

50
150

POINT
Comment display
(1) How to adjust objects in which shape is set.
Adjust the display position of the object and shape after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
D10

Object outline frame

Shape

(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

(2) Displaying comments out of the display range
(a) Wrapping the text
When the comment is out of the horizontal display range, display the remaining part in the next line.
Comment
Please check the frame.

Please check
the frame.
Comment display

When the comment is out of the vertical display range, only the part within the display range is displayed.
Comment
Please check the frame.
OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
NG: Res. aft. switch. NG

Please check the frame.

OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
Comment display

(b) Not wrapping the text.

If the item [Adjust Text Size] is selected, the font size changes automatically.
For details of setting methods, refer to the following.
9.1 Comment tab (2) Comment Group
9.2 Comment tab (2) Comment Group
9.3 Setting item

9-2

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the bit comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged bit comment to display the setting dialog box.

[Comment Display]

[Bit Comment] from the menu.

10

ALARM

Device/Style tab
Set the shapes and devices to be monitored.

LEVEL

11

Preview list

PANELMETER

12

Item

Device
Preview List

Description

Model

Select the bit.

14

Set a device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

TREND GRAPH

Comment
Display Type

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

15

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly display the
overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.
GOT display
Before updating data

Figure frame area

A part of characters that

overlaps with the figure
frame area is not displayed.

After updating data

BAR GRAPH

GT Designer3 setting

A part of characters displayed

before updating the data remains
in the figure frame area.

16
(Continued to next page)
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Shape

LINE GRAPH

13

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9-3

Item

Description
Frame Color

Shape Attribute

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

ABCDEFG

Plate Color

Frame color
Plate color

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet).
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

Object Name

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area
in the specified figure frame
Plate area
Plate area
Figure frame area

9-4

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

: Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure frame.

Model

Select [Comment Type] in the comment display to use comments set in the basic comment and comment group.
The following shows the [Comment Type].

COMMENT DISPLAY

Comment tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

Set the [Basic Comment] as the comment to be displayed.

Basic Comment
Comment Type

(1) Basic Comment

13

Set the [Comment Group] as the comment to be displayed.

Comment Group

PANELMETER

12

(2) Comment Group

LINE GRAPH

For Basic Comment and Comment Group, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9-5

(1) Basic Comment

Preview list

Comment string

Item

Description

Preview List

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings : Copies all text settings.
Text Only : Copies texts only.

OFF -> ON

Used to copy the set attribute.

/
ON -> OFF

Copy OFF

ON

:The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

:The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

HQ Type

Common
Settings (ON/
OFF)

Text Size

Model

Select a font.
16dot HQ Gothic
16dot HQ Mincho
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Select the text position.
: Select the horizontal position.

Alignment

: Select the vertical position.

Display Type
Comment
Comment No.

Select the method for displaying the comments.

Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Text
: Input characters, and set the contents to be displayed on the GT Designer3
screen.
Set the comment number of the comment to be displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box
appears, and the comment can be edited.
(a) Edit Comment dialog box

(Continued to next page)

9-6

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to change the comment attribute.

Text Color: Select the display color of the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.

10

: Displays the text in solid format.

Change Attribute of
Comment Setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

, and

ALARM

Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
cannot be set simultaneously.

Comment string

Input the text to be displayed.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)

Use High Quality

Font

Select this item to use the HQ font set in [HQ Type] of [Common Settings (ON/OFF)].
When this item is not selected, the content will be displayed in 16-dot standard font.

Text Color

11

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

LEVEL

Comment

Select a display format to the text.

: Displays the text in bold format.

12

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None, Low, Medium, High)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

PANELMETER

Solid Color

13
LINE GRAPH

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.

Model

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

15
BAR GRAPH

Comment

Description

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Item

TREND GRAPH

14

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9-7

(2) Comment Group

Preview list

Item

Description

Preview List

Model

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

OFF=ON

Select this item to configure the same settings for OFF and ON.

Copy Range

Set the copy range.

All Settings : Copies all text settings.
Text Only : Copies texts only.

OFF ON

Used to copy the set attribute.

ON OFF

Preview Column No.

Copy OFF

ON

: The OFF attribute is copied to the ON attribute.

Copy ON

OFF

: The ON attribute is copied to the OFF attribute.

Set the comment column No. to be displayed on GT Designer3.

(Use the language switching device for specifying the comment column No. to be displayed on the GOT.)
This item can be set only when the setting for language switching is valid.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting
Fixed

Device

Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.

After selecting, set the number of the comment group to be used by directly inputting it.
Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
After selecting, set a device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment Group

Adjust Text
Size

Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.

When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
After selecting, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Font

Text Size
Common Settings
(ON/OFF)

Select a font.
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
12dot HQ Gothic
16dot HQ Mincho
Stroke
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

12dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Select the text position.
Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

(Continued to next page)

9-8

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

Item

Description

Display Type

Comment No.

Model

Select the method for displaying the comments.

Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Text
: Input characters, and set the contents to be displayed on the GT Designer3
screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

Set the comment number of the comment to be displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears,
and the comment can be edited.
(a) Edit Comment dialog box

ALARM

Select this item to change the comment attribute.

Text Color: Select the display color of the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
Change
Attribute of
Comment
Setting

11

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Comment

, and

LEVEL

Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
cannot be set simultaneously.

Text Color

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

12
PANELMETER

Comment
string

Input the text to be displayed.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)

Select a display format to the text.

: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

13

Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None, Low, Medium, High)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

button is selected.

LINE GRAPH

button or the

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.

TREND GRAPH

14

15
Description

Model

Column No.

Select the row No. to edit the comment.

Comment

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

BAR GRAPH

Item

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9-9

 Extended tab
Set the method for displaying security, offset and comment (such as Display Mode/Display Start Row).

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level display.

Extended
FULL

Display Mode

XOR : Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.

20%

40%

Level can be distinguished from the comment.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.4 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

(Continued to next page)

9 - 10

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to change the line number of display start when multiple comments are set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device value to
be set.
After selecting, set the device.

10

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT
Device: D10 1
Insp.1
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Start displaying from the
Conv. insp.
first line of comment.
Insp.2
Device value
Proc. prod. insp.
changes from 1 to 3
Insp.3
Line insp.
Insp.2
Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
Start displaying from the
third line of comment.

Line1
Line2
Line3
Line4
Line5
Line6

ALARM

Display Start
Row

COMMENT DISPLAY

11

The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.

Extended

LEVEL

Select this item to change the line number of display start when multiple comments are set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the device value
to be set.
After selecting, set the device.

12

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT
Device: D20
2
Insp.1
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Display 2 lines of comment.
Conv. insp.
Insp.2
Device value
Proc. prod. insp.
changes from 2 to 4
Insp.3
Line insp.
Device: D20
4
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Display 4 lines of comment.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.

PANELMETER

Number of
Display Rows

Line1
Line2
Line3
Line4
Line5
Line6

13

If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment is not displayed.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Japan
: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
China (Big5 )-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.

14

Example: Difference between [Japan] and [China (GB) - Mincho]

[Japan]

TREND GRAPH

KANJI Region

LINE GRAPH

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

[China (GB) -Mincho]

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

Layer

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

15

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

BAR GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Category

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9 - 11

 Trigger tab
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Item

Description
Select trigger for displaying the object.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Trigger Type

Rise

For details of each item, refer to the following.

Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigge

9 - 12

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Script tab

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28.3 Object Script

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

Tab name

13

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

LINE GRAPH

Setting dialog box

PANELMETER

12

14

width

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Text Size (X)

text_width

3)

Text Size (Y)

text_height

3)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Text Color

text_color

3)

Blink

blink

3)

Reverse

highlight

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

Blink Scope

blink

3)

TREND GRAPH

height
Device/Style

15

*1

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Extended

BAR GRAPH

Comment

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

9.1 Setting Bit Comment

9 - 13

9.2 Setting Word Comment

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the word comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click on the arranged word comment to display the setting dialog box.

[Comment Display]

[Word Comment] from the menu.

Device/Style tab
Set the shapes and devices to be monitored.

Preview list

Item

Description

Comment Display
Type
Device

Select the word.

Set a device to be monitored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 BCD16

Preview List*1

Displays the set status for each condition.

Model

The display of the [Preview List] is switched.

Creates a new condition
Deletes the condition

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.

(Continued to next page)

9 - 14

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Item

Description

Model

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

When the characters to be displayed overlap with the figure frame area, the GOT cannot correctly display the
overlapped characters when updating data.
Set the characters and the figure frame area so that the characters and the area do not overlap.

GOT display

Shape

Before updating data

After updating data

ALARM

GT Designer3 setting

11
Frame Color

Object Name

Plate Color

ABCDEFG

Frame color
Plate color

12

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

PANELMETER

Shape Attribute

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

LEVEL

Figure frame area

A part of characters that

A part of characters displayed
overlaps with the figure
before updating the data remains
frame area is not displayed. in the figure frame area.

For details of *1, refer to the following.

*1 Condition

13

(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab

LINE GRAPH

When the condition is other than the one set on the [Device/Style] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute
set on the [Extended] tab.

(2) Display when conditions are overlapped

When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitored device : 100
Data format : Signed BIN16
Registered comment : Comment No.1 The production volume is 1 set
Comment No.100 Over 100 sets
Comment No.101 Production completed

State No.

High

Comment

$V<=0

Not displayed

1<=$V<=100

Indirect

101<=$V<=199

No.100

Normal case
(State 0)

No.101

15
BAR GRAPH

Low

Range

TREND GRAPH

Operation priority for

repeated setting

14

* $V represents the monitor device value.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 15

State 1

Comment is not displayed when the monitor device

value is 0 or lower. ($V<=0)

State 2

Comment corresponding to the monitor device value

is displayed when monitor device value is between 1
and 100 (1<=$V<=100).

State 3

Comment No.100 is displayed when monitor device

value is between 101 and 199 (101<=$V<=199).

Normal case
(State 0)

Comment No.101 is displayed when condition is other

than state 1 to 3.

Production volume
is 1 set.

Over 100 sets

Over 100 sets

Production is
completed.

POINT
Figure frame area
The figure frame area is the area excluding the plate area in the specified figure.
For details of figure frame area and plate area, refer to the following.
Figure frame area : Area excluding the plate area
in the specified figure frame
Plate area
Plate area
Figure frame area

9 - 16

9.2 Setting Word Comment

: Area that displays the color set

for the plate in the figure frame.

Select [Comment Type] in the comment display to use comments set in the basic comment and comment group.
The following shows the [Comment Type].

COMMENT DISPLAY

Comment tab

ALARM

10

Preview list

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

12

Comment Type

PANELMETER

Set the [Basic Comment] as the comment to be displayed.

Basic Comment

(1) Basic Comment

Set the [Comment Group] as the comment to be displayed.

Comment Group

(2) Comment Group

13

For Basic Comment and Comment Group, refer to the following.

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 17

(1) Basic Comment

Preview list

Item
Preview List
/

Description

Model

Displays the set status for each condition.

The display of the [Preview List] is switched.
Creates a new condition
Deletes the condition

Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Text Size

Common
Settings of
State

Select the text size to be displayed.

Select the text position.
: Select the horizontal position.

Alignment

: Select the vertical position.

Display Type
Comment

Comment No.

Select the method for displaying the comments.

Not Display
: The comment is not displayed.
Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Indirect Device: Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to monitor device
value.
Set the comment number of the comment to be displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box
appears, and the comment can be edited.
(a) Edit Comment dialog box

(Continued to next page)

9 - 18

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to change the comment attribute.

Text Color: Select the display color of the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.

10

: Displays the text in solid format.

Change Attribute of
Comment Setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

,
Comment

Text Color

, and

ALARM

Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
cannot be set simultaneously.

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

11

Select a display format to the text.

: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.
Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

LEVEL

Solid Color

12
PANELMETER

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered basic comment and comment No. are displayed.

Model

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. is displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Comment

Description

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Item

LINE GRAPH

13

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 19

(2) Comment Group

Preview list

Item

Description

Preview List

Model

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

The display of the [Preview List] is switched.

Creates a new condition

Deletes the condition
Changes the priority of the conditions in the preview list.

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Fixed

Device

Select this item when displaying a specified comment group.

After selecting, set the number of the comment group to be used by directly inputting it.
Select this item when displaying the comment of the number same with the device value.
After selecting, set a device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment Group

Adjust Text
Size

Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.

When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
After selecting, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Font

Text Size
Common Settings
of State

Select a font.
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
12dot HQ Gothic
16dot HQ Mincho
Stroke
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

12dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Select the text position.
Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

: Select the vertical position.

(Continued to next page)

9 - 20

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Item

Description

Display Type

Comment No.

Model

Select the method for displaying the comments.

Not Display
: Select the text size to be displayed.
Comment No. : Set to display the comment No. of the comment to be used.
Indirect Device: Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to monitor device
value.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

Set the comment number of the comment to be displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears,
and the comment can be edited.
ALARM

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Select this item to change the comment attribute.
Text Color: Select the display color of the text.

11

: Displays the text in bold format.

Change
Attribute of
Comment
Setting

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Comment

, and

LEVEL

Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
cannot be set simultaneously.

Input the text to be displayed.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Press the [Enter] key at the end of a line to input a new line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)

Text Color

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

12
PANELMETER

Comment
string

Select a display format to the text.

: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.

13

: Displays the text in raised format.

Preview No.

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape.(None, Low, Medium, High)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

LINE GRAPH

Solid Color

Set the comment No. of the comment to be virtually displayed on the GT Designer3 screen.
Click the [Edit] button to edit the comment to be displayed. The Edit Comment dialog box appears, and the comment
can be edited.

14
TREND GRAPH

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

(a) Edit Comment dialog box

Edit the displayed comments for the comment group.
Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.

Description

Model

Select the row No. to edit the comment.

Comment

Edit the comment for the comment group.

Create a new comment when an unregistered comment group No. and comment No. are displayed.
The comment text can be input within 512 characters regardless of whether the character size is one-byte or two-byte.

9.2 Setting Word Comment

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Item
Column No.

BAR GRAPH

15

9 - 21

 Extended tab
Set the method for displaying security, offset and comment (such as Display Mode/Display Start Row).

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level display.

Extended
FULL

Display Mode

XOR : Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.

20%

40%

Level can be distinguished from the comment.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.4 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

(Continued to next page)

9 - 22

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to change the line number of display start when multiple comments are set.
Fixed
: Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device value
to be set.
After selecting, set the device.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT
Device: D10 1
Insp.1
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Start displaying from the
Conv. insp.
first line of comment.
Insp.2
Device value
Proc. prod. insp.
changes from 1 to 3
Insp.3
Line insp.
Insp.2
Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
Start displaying from the
third line of comment.

Line1
Line2
Line3
Line4
Line5
Line6

ALARM

Display Start
Row

11

The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.

Extended

LEVEL

Select this item to change the line number of display start when multiple comments are set.
Fixed
: Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
After selecting, set the device.

12

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment registered in GT Designer3 Display in GOT
Device: D20
2
Insp.1
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Display 2 lines of comment.
Conv. insp.
Insp.2
Device value
Proc. prod. insp.
changes from 2 to 4
Insp.3
Line insp.
Device: D20
4
Insp.1
Conv. insp.
Display 4 lines of comment.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.

PANELMETER

Number of
Display Rows

Line1
Line2
Line3
Line4
Line5
Line6

13
LINE GRAPH

If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment is not displayed.

Switches the layer to allocate the object.(Front/Back)
Layer

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

14

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

TREND GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Category

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 23

 Trigger tab
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Item

Description
Select trigger for displaying the object.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Trigger Type

Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigge

9 - 24

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Operation/Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

None

Select this item to not execute [Data Operation]/[Script].

Data Operation

Select this item to execute [Data Operation].

Script

Select this item to execute [Script].

PANELMETER

12

13
LINE GRAPH

Operation Type

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 25

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in
[Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts].
Left : Left shift
Right : Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

9 - 26

9.2 Setting Word Comment

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28.3 Object Script

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

13

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

LINE GRAPH

Setting dialog box

PANELMETER

12

14

width

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

5)

Text Size (X)

text_width

3)

Text Size (Y)

text_height

3)

Alignment

arrange

3)

Text Color

text_color

3)

Blink

blink

3)

Reverse

highlight

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

Blink Scope

blink

3)

TREND GRAPH

height
Device/Style

15

*1

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Extended

BAR GRAPH

Comment

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

9.2 Setting Word Comment

9 - 27

9.3 Setting Simple Comment

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the simple comment is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged simple comment to display the setting dialog box.

[Comment Display]

[Simple Comment] from the menu.

Setting item
Set the comment No. to be displayed in [Simple Comment Display], and the view format for the comment.

Item

Description

Comment Group
No.

Set the comment group No. to be used.

When a nonexistent comment group No. is set, no comment is displayed.

Preview Column
No.

Displays the comment of specified column No. on GT Designer3.

Comment No.

Set the comment No. to be displayed.

When the comment No. is set to "0", no comment is displayed.

Model

Set the font and displayed position of the comment.

Font

Select a font.
12dot Standard*1
12dot HQ Gothic

Text Size

16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho

12dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic

Stroke*2
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Select the text position.

Size/Alignment

: Select the horizontal position.

Alignment

: Select the vertical position.

Adjust Text
Size

Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.

When this item is not selected, line feed is automatically performed for text strings.
After selecting, set the minimum text size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Minimum
Size

Specify a minimum character size for the automatic text size adjustment.

(Continued to next page)

9 - 28

9.3 Setting Simple Comment

Description

Model

Select this item to change the comment attribute.

Text Color: Select the display color of the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.

Change Attribute of
Comment Setting

: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color : Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

COMMENT DISPLAY

9
Item

10

button is selected.

Blink:Select the blinking pattern of the comment or shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)
Reverse: Select this item for reversing the comment.
,

, and

cannot be set simultaneously.

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

ALARM

Text Color

Select a display format to the text.

: Displays the text in bold format.

11

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid Color

Select the color of the shadow when the

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/shape. (None, Low, Medium, High)

Reverse

Select this item for reversing the text.

button is selected.

LEVEL

button or the

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

Layer

12

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

PANELMETER

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
*1
*2

These object functions cannot be set for GT1020.

These object functions cannot be set for GT10.

13
LINE GRAPH

9.4 Relevant Settings

The comment display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

14

GOT type settings

Function

Set description
[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and

objects overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in GT Designer3]

15
BAR GRAPH

Checking if objects are overlapping.

Model

TREND GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

9.4 Relevant Settings

9 - 29

9.5 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using comment display function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 256 objects can be set for the comment display.

(2) Comment to be used

For comment display, the comment that is created by Basic Comment or Comment Group is used.

(3) Object arrangement

When switching language, some comments registered may not be displayed within the comment display range.
Examine the number of characters of the comments registered before setting the object display range.
The comment display range can be confirmed on the GT Designer3 screen by changing the Preview Column
No.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

(4) Using comment group

When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, a comment is not
displayed.

(5) Using cascading level display

When overlapping comment and level on the same layer or overlapping them using Front/Back Layer, there are
the following restrictions, respectively.
(a) Restrictions on overlapping comment and level on the same layer
Only one comment can be cascaded to one level function.
At arranging two or more comments, the second or later comments are not displayed.
Comment cannot be set to blink (flickering display).
Comment cannot be reversed.
A comment extended off the display frame of a level is not XOR-combined.
When a shape is set to a comment, the level is displayed only inside the shape.
The display is updated only at changing the monitor device value of the level display.
The display is not updated at changing the monitor device value set to the comment display.
When the style of the comment is set to text, solid, or raised, the comment character may be dropped or
the character color may not be displayed.
(b) Restrictions on overlapping comment and level by separating them for front of back layer
Comment display will not be XOR-displayed.

9 - 30

9.5 Precautions

ALARM

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

10. ALARM
This chapter explains the functions that display following alarms.

Alarm types

10

The GOT can detect the alarms as shown below.

It is possible to display the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
(Specific to advanced user alarm observation, advanced user alarm display, and user alarm display)
This feature is suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.

11

ON
ON

M100 Temp. error

M100Temp. error

M101 Fuse error

M101
of theFuse
powererror
module with
new one.

Detail

LEVEL

Replace the fuse

Detail

12

Touch!

(2) Displaying an error of GOT, controller or network as an alarm

It is possible to display the error code and error message when an error occurs on the GOT, controller or
network.(Specific to advanced system alarm monitoring, advanced system alarm display, and system alarm
display)
This feature is suitable for the case in which the GOT, controller or network error needs to be displayed.

400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30

9

13
LINE GRAPH

Error
occurance

PANELMETER

M100: OFF
M101: OFF

ALARM

(1) Displaying the user-created comment as an alarm message

AC down error

14
TREND GRAPH

803 Transient error

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10 - 1

 Functions for displaying alarms

The functions for displaying alarms are as shown below.
Alarm function

10.1.1 Alarm function

Advanced alarm function

10.1.2 Advanced alarm function

POINT
(1) When using GT11 or GT10
The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000 only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
10.1.1 Alarm function
(2) Comment displayed when an alarm occurs
To display the user-created comments as alarm messages, it is necessary to register the comments in
advance.
(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting
Function

Alarm function

Display comment

User alarm display, System alarm display

Register to the basic comment.

Alarm history display

Register to the basic comment or

the comment group.

Scrolling alarm display

Advanced alarm function

10 - 2

Advanced user alarm,

Advanced system alarm,
Advanced alarm popup display

Register to the comment group.

This section explains the alarm-relevant functions, and differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm
function.
Select the alarm by referring this section.
Specific to Advanced

Description with Alarm Function applies to the advanced alarm function only.
Description without icon is common to the alarm function and advanced alarm function.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10

Displaying preset comments at alarm occurrence

ON
ON

Display

11

Detailed Display

Temp. error

Temp. error

Replace the fuse

of theFuse
powererror
module with
new one.

Fuse error

Detail

LEVEL

Detail

Touch!

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

(1) Displaying the comments for each hierarchy

The different comments for an alarm can be displayed on the three hierarchies (higher, middle and general),
respectively.
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
Therefore, it is possible to provide the alarm information ranging from simple to details, in the hierarchical order.

Factory

Occurred
04/6/1
04/6/1

Line1

Display of higher
hierarchy alarms

Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

The alarms occurred

on the factory lines
are displayed.

Line2

12
PANELMETER

M100 : OFF
M101 : OFF

13
LINE GRAPH

Set a comment

ALARM

Any comment can be registered for displaying as a user alarm.

14
TREND GRAPH

Touch!

Switching from higher hierarchy

to middle hierarchy

Equipment A

Equipment B

Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

The alarms occurred

on line 2 are
displayed.

Touch!

Switching from middle

hierarchy to general hierarchy

Occurred

Power
module

Driving
module

Error
occurrence

Control
module

Power
module

Driving
module

Error
occurrence

Control
module

04/6/1
04/6/1

Error
occurrence

Pwr. module error

Control module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

16

Display of general
alarm

Comment

Check

The module on which

the alarm occurred
actually is displayed
with details.

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

15
BAR GRAPH

04/6/1
04/6/1

Display of middle
hierarchy alarms

Comment

10 - 3

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

(2) Switching the language

Switch the language of the comment displayed on the screen by the device value (language switching device)

Comment group settings

Occurred Comment
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 11:35:52

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

04/6/1 09:45:30

04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

04/6/1 08:15:45

04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Japanese

Language Switching Device :

English

Japanese

English

POINT
(1) Settings for displaying the comment on each of three hierarchies.
The comments can be set in a single group or divided into multiple groups.
Therefore, it is possible to classify comment groups for each hierarchy, by dividing the comments into multiple
comment groups.

Setting the comments of higher, middle and

general hierarchies in a comment group.

Setting and dividing the comments of

higher, middle and general hierarchies
into multiple comment groups.

(2) Hierarchy displayed when an alarm occurs

The hierarchy of the comments displayed at alarm occurrence (initial display hierarchy) can be set.
Use the touch switch or similar to move to upper or lower hierarchy.

HINT
Language switching
For details, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

10 - 4

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

and so on)
The alarm function can display the following items (6 types).
Occurred time

Comment

Restored time

Checked time

Cumulative time*1

Occurred frequency

The above information help to confirm the device statuses and determine the cause of productivity deterioration.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Confirming device status by displaying information on alarms occurred (occurrence time

10

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

Alarm status

Down time*2

Level*3

ALARM

In addition, the following items are available.

Group*3

11

LEVEL

*1 Total alarm occurrence time (including the time when alarms occurred in the past)
*2 Time from alarm occurrence to restoration
*3 It is possible to decide the contents to be displayed for each level and group by setting these items for each alarm.

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 5

 Alarm display operation

(1) Change the display order by the settings
Set the order in which alarms will be displayed.
It can be set in the ascending/descending order of the occurrence date or device.
When displaying alarms in the descending order of occurrence date

Occurred

The display items can be

changed by the settings.

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

The display order can be set.

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

The display content can be sorted in the ascending/descending order of occurred date, comment, alarm status,
restored date, checked date, occurred frequency, cumulative time, down time, level, or group.
D10 : 1

D10 : 0

Occurred

Comment Restore

Occurred

Comment Restore

04/6/1

11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 11:50:57

04/6/1

02:30:16

Motor error

04/6/1

09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 13:30:14

04/6/1

04:33:12

In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49

04/6/1

08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 09:30:18

04/6/1

09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1

05:22:35

Fuel error

04/6/1 11:35:52

04/6/1

11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 11:50:57

04/6/1

04:33:12

In. pressure error 04/6/1 18:46:49

04/6/1

05:22:35

Fuel error

04/6/1 11:35:52

04/6/1

02:30:16

Motor error

04/6/1

08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 09:30:18

04/6/1 19:18:20

04/6/1 19:18:20

04/6/1 13:30:14

Displaying alarms in the order of recovery date

Displaying alarms in the order of occurrence date

HINT
Using the device value to change the display order
The display order can be changed by using the device value as well.
(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display

(2) Using the device to operate the alarm display

(a) Displaying/Hiding an alarm
An alarm can be displayed or hidden using the device.
M100 : OFF

ON

M100 : ON

OFF

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error

Alarms are displayed.

10 - 6

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

Alarms are hidden.

(b) Refining the display content

It is possible to refine and decide the display content using the device.
(Display content can be refined according to the hierarchy, level, group, display order and the alarm ID and
comment group set in the advanced user alarm.)
When refining to the alarms of group 2

Group

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Oil error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuel error

10

ALARM

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Occurred

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

11

LEVEL

Example)
Set device A to group 1,
and device B to group 2.

(3) Setting the display color according to alarm types

The alarm types and others can be identified visually when different font colors are displayed on each alarm
comment.
Font color settings for the each alarm function are shown below.
: Applicable
Alarm Status (Occur, Check,
Restored), Level, Group

Function
User alarm display
System alarm display
Alarm history display
Scrolling alarm display

14

Advanced user alarm display

Advanced system alarm display

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

15

Alarm types and so on can

be identified visually!

BAR GRAPH

Occurred

TREND GRAPH

Advanced alarm popup display

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Advanced alarm
function

13

Group comment

LINE GRAPH

Alarm function

: Not applicable

12
PANELMETER

As level or group can be set for alarms, the display content can be refined for each level or group. (Also,
two or more items can be specified as refinement conditions.)

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 7

 Display alarm only when alarm occurs

By using the advanced alarm popup display function and the scrolling alarm display function, the GOT can display an
alarm without alarm display objects. (only when the alarm occurs.)
The GOT displays alarms even some objects are placed on the alarm display position on the screen.
Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

For the advanced alarm function, the screen switching, stage hierarchy switching, and detailed display are possible
when touching the advanced alarm popup display that is displayed on the screen.
X1 : OFF

ON

A 1254 A 1254

Alarm Processing Screen

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

Error

Touch!

04/6/1

Temp. error

04/6/1

Fuse error

Upper hierarchy

Error occurrence

Displaying an alarm regardless of

the screen (scrolled from right to left)

Comment

Occurred

Check

Screen Switching/
Stage hierarchy switching is possible.

POINT
Availability of this function
(1) For GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000
Only the advanced alarm popup display function can display alarms regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the advanced alarm popup display function.
(2) For GT11 and GT10
Only the scrolling alarm display function can display alarms regardless of the screen displayed.
To display alarms regardless of the screen displayed, use the scrolling alarm display function.

Scrolling comments on screen

Comments can be scrolled across the screen from right to left when an alarm occurs.
This floating alarm display is suitable when displaying an alarm in small area, as all the parts of the comment can be
scrolled and completely displayed on the screen.

Occurred Comment

Restore

Occurred Comment

Restore Check

04/6/1

P/S

04/6/1

Error occurred on

04/6/1

Drive

04/6/1

04/6/1

Control

04/6/1

Occurred Comment
04/6/1

P/S module

Error occurred on

04/6/1

drive module

Error occurred on

04/6/1

control module

Restore Check

Scrolling comments across the screen from left to right.

For each alarm function, whether or not to set the scrolling alarm display is shown below.
: Applicable
Function
Alarm display
Alarm function

Alarm history display *1,

Scrolling alarm display

Advanced alarm function

*1

10 - 8

Advanced user alarm,

Advanced system alarm,
Advanced alarm popup display

GT10 is available only.

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

Scrolling alarm display

: Not applicable

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Writing alarm information to device

The total No. of alarms which occurred so far and which are currently occurring can be output to the device.
D200 : 15
D201 : 3
Occurred

Comment

04/6/1

Temp. error

04/6/1

Fuse error

04/6/1

Oil error

10

ALARM

Details

Total alarms : 15
Current alarms : 3

11

LEVEL

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

The alarm information can be written to the device by touching the corresponding part.
The following shows the information (15 types) that can be written.
Occurred Time
Restored Date
RestoredTime
Checked Date
Checked Time

12

Level
Group
Occurred Frequency
Cumulative Time
Down Time

PANELMETER

Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Occurred Date

This enables the detailed message on the selected alarm to appear as a comment.
The data, which cannot be displayed due to insufficient screen area, can be written in the device.

Switching the comment on the screen

according to the value written in the
device (comment display is used.)

LINE GRAPH

Alarm on line 1 being selected

13

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

14
TREND GRAPH

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 9

 User-Setting of alarm monitoring device

The alarm monitoring device can be set freely by the user.
In the alarm function, the monitoring device and alarm display can be set on a single setting screen. (The monitoring
device can be set for each object placed.)
Monitoring device settings
Alarm display settings

Display

M100
M101

Temp. error
Fuse error

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

In the advanced alarm function, the monitor device (advanced user alarm observation, advanced system alarm
observation) and alarm display (advanced user alarm display, advanced system alarm display) are set on the
respective screens.
This enables the following settings to be made.
Advanced Alarm Observation
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3

Advanced Alarm Display

Display

Make the settings so that

the alarm will be displayed
as alarm ID1.

Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1

Temp. error
Fuse error

04/6/1

Oil error

In addition, set the switching

device of alarm ID (advanced
user alarm observation) to
GD0.

Switch

GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.

GD0=2: The alarm of alarm ID2 is displayed.
GD0=3: The alarm of alarm ID3 is displayed.

Advanced user alarm: up to 255

Advanced system alarm: up to one

Make multiple monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation), and switch the alarms on the screen.

Display

Advanced Alarm Observation

Advanced Alarm Display

Occurred Comment
04/6/1

Alarm ID1

Temp. error

Make the settings so that the

alarm will appear as alarm
ID1 (single-line display).
Make the settings so that
the alarm will appear as
alarm ID1 (multiple-line
display).

Single-line display

Occurred Comment
04/6/1
04/6/1

Temp. error
Fuse error

04/6/1

Oil error

Multiple-line display
Providing different displays based on the same monitoring device settings (advanced alarm observation).

10 - 10

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

(1) Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure)

By storing the alarm data in the CF card as an alarm log file, the alarm history can be retained when GOT is
powered off.
The history of user alarms can be stored in the CF card.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Storing alarm data (data retention under power failure) and utilization of stored data

10
Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

ALARM

04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error

Alarm data can be stored

in the CF card.

11

12
PANELMETER

The advanced alarm function supports the following operations.

Storing system alarm history in a CF card.
Selecting whether to store alarm data or not for each monitoring device setting (advanced user alarm
observation, advanced system alarm observation)
Setting a folder to store alarm data and the file name for each monitoring device setting (advanced user alarm
observation, advanced system alarm observation)
Storing alarm data at an arbitrary timing using the device (rise, fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF
Sampling).
Automatically reading alarm data from the CF card that includes an alarm log file when the GOT is power off
and on.

LEVEL

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 11

(2) Output to a CSV file

Alarm data can be output to a CSV file.
The alarm data output to a CSV file can be displayed by on PC and so on.

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

CSV file

04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

Store the output data within a PC in either of the following methods.

Reading resource data by GT Designer3
(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data
Reading out the CSV file stored in a CF card using a personal computer.
Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

Alarm data can be converted into a text file as well.

(3) Converting alarm log file

Alarm log files can be converted to CSV files or Unicode text files.
The following methods are available.
Converting with GOT utility
User's Manual for the GOT used
Converting with Convert Trigger
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

10 - 12

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

(4) Utilization of the alarm data stored in the CF card

The stored alarm data can be displayed in graph form on the GOT.
Historical graph
The history of alarm occurrence is displayed in a historical graph.
Alarm history is displayed as the symbols below.

ALARM

: Restored time

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

: Checked time

10

The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed in a total graph.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

: Occurred time

Total graph

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Specific to Advanced
Alarm Function

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 13

10.1.1

Alarm function

This section explains alarm functions by the type and differences among the functions.

Alarm function types

The alarm functions are classified as shown below.

Alarm Function

User Alarm Display

System Alarm Display

User

System

User
Alarm

System
Alarm

Alarm History Display

Scrolling alarm display

User

User

User
Alarm

User
Alarm

Select an alarm function from the display alarms, the display items, and the features.
Function
User alarm display

10 - 14

Display alarm
User alarm

Display item

Feature

Reference
(1) User alarm display

Comment, Occurred
Display each object that is
monitored by each device.

System alarm display

System alarm

Error code,
Error message,
Occurred Time

Alarm history display

User alarm

Comment, Occurred,
Restored, Checked,
Cumulative Time,
Occurred Frequency

Displaying an alarm history and

storing data into a CF card are
available.

(3) Alarm history display

Scrolling alarm display

User alarm

Comment, Occurred

With or without objects, alarms

can be displayed on the screen.

(4) Scrolling alarm display

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

(2) System alarm display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(1) User alarm display

The function that displays the user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
Suitable for the case in which the alarm, which is created by the user, needs to be displayed.
M100: OFF
M101: OFF

ON
ON

10
M100 Temp. error

M100Temp. error

M101 Fuse error

M101
of theFuse
powererror

Replace the fuse

module with
new one.

Detail

ALARM

Detail

Touch!

11

(2) System alarm display

LEVEL

The function that displays the error code and error message when an error occurs on the controller, GOT or
network.
Use this function when displaying an error on the controller, GOT or network.

12

Error
occurance

PANELMETER

400 Unable to communicate with CPU 16:40:30

AC down error

803 Transient error

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 15

(3) Alarm history display

When a user alarm occurs, this function stores the user-created comments, occurred time, restored time,
checked time, cumulative time (time from alarm occurrence to fixing), and occurred frequency and displays the
alarm history in list.

1. Alarm
Occurred

Up Down Check

M100 : OFF

ON

Message

Restore

Check

04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05

Temp. error
Fuse error

11:25

10:45

The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.

Replace the fuse of

the power module in
Line1 with new one.

2. Alarm Detail
Display

Occurred

Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.

Up Down Check

Alarm details are displayed on the comment window, base screen or window screen.

3. Alarm
Checked
Time

Up Down Check

Occurred

Message

Restore

Check

04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05

Temp. error
Fuse error

11:25

10:45
12:10

Alarm checked time is

displayed by the touch switch.
Create the touch switch by setting a key code on it.

System Restoration

4. After System
Restoration

Up Down Check

Occurred

Message

Restore

Check

04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 12:05

Temp. error
Fuse error

11:25
12:45

10:45
12:10

The restoration time

is displayed.
M100 : ON

10 - 16

OFF

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

This function displays the user-created comments and the occurred time when a user alarm occurs.
Even if the alarm display object is not allocated on the screen, the GOT can display long comments that extend
the alarm display area.
X1:OFF

ON

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

Error occurrence

10

occurrence
ALARM

Error

COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) Scrolling alarm display

Scrolling alarm display

11

POINT

LEVEL

(1) Comments need to be set

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

User alarm display, System alarm display

Register to the basic comment.

Alarm history display

Register to the basic comment or

the comment group

Scrolling alarm display

Register to the comment group.

12

(2) Alarms that can be stored in a CF card.

Alarms can be stored by the alarm history display function only.
The system alarm history cannot be stored in a CF card, as the system alarm history settings cannot be made
using the alarm history display.
Use the advanced alarm function when storing the system alarm history.
(3) Using the user alarm display and alarm history display, or the system alarm display and alarm history
display together.
The user alarm display and alarm history display, or the system alarm display and alarm history display can be
used together.

PANELMETER

Alarm function

Display comment

13
LINE GRAPH

Function

14
TREND GRAPH

HINT
(1) Details and usage of each function
For the details and usage, refer to the following.
10.5 Alarm History Display

15

10.6 User Alarm Display

BAR GRAPH

10.7 System Alarm Display

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display
(2) Differences between the alarm function and advanced alarm function
For the differences, refer to the following.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 17

10.1.2

Advanced alarm function

The advanced alarm functions are more advanced than the alarm functions

POINT
When using GT11 or GT10
The advanced alarm function is applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000 only.
When using GT11 or GT10, use the alarm function.
10.1.1 Alarm function

Advanced alarm function types

Make the settings of the advanced alarm function in the advanced alarm observation and advanced system alarm
observation.
The set alarms are displayed as the advanced user alarm display, advanced system alarm display, or advanced
alarm popup display.

Advanced Alarm Function

Advanced Alarm Settings
Advanced User
Alarm Observation
User

Advanced
user alarm

Advanced System
Alarm Observation
System

Advanced
system alarm

Advanced Alarm Display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Advanced User
Alarm Display
User

Advanced
user alarm

Advanced System
Alarm Display

User

System

Advanced
user alarm

Advanced
system alarm

System

Advanced
system alarm

User

Advanced
user alarm

A series of operations from advanced alarm settings to display is shown below.

10 - 18

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

System

Advanced
system alarm

Advanced system alarm

observation settings

ALARM

Only one advanced system alarm observation object

can be set.

Object Placement
Place the [Advanced User Alarm Display] and [Advanced System Alarm Display] for displaying the alarm set in
the step 1.
Select [Common]
[Alarm]
[Advanced User Alarm Observation] or [Advanced System Alarm Observation]
from the menu.
To display alarms regardless of the presence/absence of the object (regardless of the display screen), place the
[Advanced Alarm Popup Display].
Select [Common]
[Advanced Alarm Popup Display] from the menu.

Placement as Advanced
User Alarm Display *1
Base screen 1 (The occurrence date,
comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID1 are displayed.)
Occurred

Comment Restore

Placement as Advanced System

Alarm Display *2
Base screen 3 (The system alarms of all
statuses are displayed.)

Occurred

Comment Restore

Setting of Advanced
Alarm Popup Display
Alarms are displayed on the screen
regardless of the presence/absence of the
object for the advanced alarm display.

Occurred

Comment Restore

Make the settings so that

alarm ID2 will appear.

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.

An error has occurred

Window screen 2 (The system alarms that

are currently occurring are displayed.)

Set the method for displaying alarms from

the following.
Display advanced user alarms only
Display advanced system alarms only
Display advanced user alarms or
advanced system alarms

Occurred

Comment Restore

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.

Window screen 1 (The comment, level, and

group of the alarm set as alarm ID1 are
displayed.)

15

Group

BAR GRAPH

Comment Level

Make the settings so that

alarm ID1 will appear.

Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display content
can be set for each object.
*1
*2

14
TREND GRAPH

Base screen 2 (The occurrence date,

comment, and restoration date of the alarm
set as alarm ID2 are displayed.)

12

13

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Make the settings so that

alarm ID1 will appear.

11

LEVEL

Advanced user alarm observation can be set for

multiple user IDs. (Up to 255 objects)

2.

10

Advanced System Alarm

PANELMETER

Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2

LINE GRAPH

Advanced user alarm

observation settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Setting the advanced alarm observation

Select [Common]
[Alarm]
[Advanced User Alarm Observation] or [Advanced System Alarm Observation]
from the menu.

Multiple objects, which are based on the

settings made in the advanced alarm
observation, can be placed.
Different settings such as display
content can be set for each object.

To display advanced alarms on the screen

regardless of the presence/absence of
display objects for advanced alarms, make
the settings of advanced alarm popup
display.

Select the advanced user alarm display when displaying alarms set in the advanced user alarm observation.
Select the advanced system alarm display when displaying alarms set in the advanced system alarm observation.

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 19

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

1.

POINT
Alarm ID
As the multiple sets of alarm settings can be made on the advanced user alarm observation, each of the sets can
be identified by the alarm ID.
Specify the alarm ID for each set when placing the object as the advanced user alarm display; the alarms appears
based on specified alarm IDs.
Advanced alarm observation settings
Advanced user alarms

Advanced system alarms

Alarm ID1

Alarm ID2

Multiple sets of alarm settings!

Place as advanced alarm display

Occurred

Comment

Restore

Occurred

Make the settings so that

alarm ID1 will appear.

Occurred

Level

Group

Window screen 1 (The comment,

level, and group of the alarm set as
alarm ID1 are displayed.)

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

Comment

Restore

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.

Base screen 2 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID2 are displayed.)

Make the settings so that

alarm ID1 will appear.

10 - 20

Restore

Make the settings so that

alarm ID2 will appear.

Base screen 1 (The occurrence

date, comment, and restoration
date of the alarm set as alarm
ID1 are displayed.)
Comment

Comment

Occurred

Base screen 3 (The system alarms

of all statuses are displayed.)

Comment

Restore

Make the settings so that advanced

system alarms will appear.

Window screen 2 (The system

alarms that are currently occurring
are displayed.)

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Relation between advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm popup display
The advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm popup display can be set separately.
The following setting patterns are available.

(1) Placing different display contents based on a set of advanced alarm observation settings

10

Advanced Alarm Display

Occurred Comment
04/6/1

Display on a line according to the

settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)
Display on multiple lines according
to the settings of alarm ID1
(Make the settings on the object
placed as advanced alarm display)

Temp. error

ALARM

Alarm ID1

Placement as
advanced alarm display

11

Single-line display

Occurred Comment
04/6/1

Temp. error

04/6/1

Fuse error

04/6/1

Oil error

LEVEL

Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation

12
Multiple-line display
PANELMETER

Different settings can be made for each display

object! (initial display hierarchy, touch mode,
display item, display condition and so on)

Alarm ID1
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)

Placement as
advanced alarm display
Set the switching device
of alarm ID (advanced user
alarm observation) to GD0

Alarm ID2
(settings in the advanced
alarm observation)

Advanced Alarm Display

14

Occurred Comment
04/6/1

Temp. error

04/6/1

Fuse error

04/6/1

Oil error

Switch

GD0=1: The alarm of alarm ID1 is displayed.

GD0=2: The alarm of alarm ID2 is displayed.

15
BAR GRAPH

Switching the display on a screen according to

the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation!

TREND GRAPH

Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation

13
LINE GRAPH

(2) Switching the display on the object according to the multiple sets of alarm settings made in the
advanced alarm observation.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

10 - 21

(3) Settings for whether to popup or hide advanced alarms

Settings in
the advanced alarm
observation

Settings in the
advanced alarm popup display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Alarm ID1

(Popup)

Settings of advanced alarm

popup display
(Settings in the advanced
alarm popup display)

Alarm ID2
(Hide)

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

04/6/1 13:20 Advanced a

Only the errors of alarm ID1 and

alarm ID3 are popped up.

Alarm ID3
(Popup)

Whether to popup or hide can be

set for each set of advanced alarm
observation settings!

POINT
(1) When only advanced alarm observation settings are made
When only advanced alarm observation settings are made, no alarm is displayed.
However, the device is monitored and saved based on the advanced alarm observation settings.
To display alarms, select either advanced alarm display or advanced alarm popup display.
Use a set of settings throughout the project

Make the settings for each screen

Advanced Alarm Display

Section 8.4 Advanced Alarm Display)

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Section 8.5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display)

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

04/6/1 13:20 Power module

Occurred
04/6/1 10:25
04/6/1 8:05

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error

Restore
11:25

Check
10:45

Pop up generated alarms

regardless of the screen.

Create a screen to display alarms, and confirm

the details of the alarms and take measures.

(2) Comments displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object

The comments that will be displayed on the advanced user alarm observation object must be registered in
advance.
(Register the comments as a comment group.)
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

HINT
Details and usage of advanced alarm observation and advanced alarm display
For details and usage, refer to the following.
10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display
10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display
10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 22

10.1 Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

10
Select [Common]

[Alarm]

[Advanced Alarm Common] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Advanced Alarm Common

ALARM

Set this item to control alarm log file conversion with a device.

LEVEL

11

Description
Select this item to set the device control for alarm log file conversion.

Convert Trigger Device

Set trigger device for file conversion.

Alarm ID Device

The file to be converted is created with the advanced alarm observation. Set the device that specifies
the ID for the advanced alarm observation.

Convert-in-motion Notification
Device

Select this item to set a device for notifying that a file is during conversion.

File Convert Language

(Advanced User Alarm)

Set a column No. for comment group used for file conversion.
Work with Language Switching Device : Switches the column No. using the language switching
device.
Fixed Column No.
: Fixes the column No. to be used.
After the selection, set a column No. to be used. (1 to 10)

File Convert Language

(Advanced System Alarm)

Set system language used for file conversion.

Work with System Language Switching : Select this item to convert a file in system language
displayed on the GOT.
Fixed Language
: Select this item to convert a file in specified language.
After the selection, specify the language.

Model

LINE GRAPH

13

14
TREND GRAPH

Item
Convert alarm logs into Unicode
Text/CSV (project common)

PANELMETER

12

10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

(2) When using Advanced System Alarm Observation
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is required in the File Save tab of
[Advanced System Alarm Observation].
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

10 - 23

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

To control alarm log file conversion with a device

(1) When using Advanced User Alarm Observation
To control alarm log file conversion with a device, setting for file conversion is required in the File Save tab of
[Advanced User Alarm Observation].

BAR GRAPH

15

POINT

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

The advanced alarm observation is the function that saves the alarm occurrence time when the condition of the device
set for alarm detection is met (the bit turns OFF to ON/word device range) and the comments in the GOT internal
memory, and displays these information as alarm history in list format.

POINT
Before setting advanced user alarms
This section explains the advanced user alarm observation and advanced user alarm display of the advanced
alarm function.
Read the following before setting the advanced user alarm observation or advanced user alarm display.
10.1.2 Advanced alarm function

Advanced Alarm Function

Advanced Alarm Settings
Advanced User
Alarm Observation

Advanced System
Alarm Observation

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

Advanced Alarm Display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 24

Advanced User
Alarm Display

Advanced System
Alarm Display

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Before setting

This section describes the settings and function needed for using the advanced user alarm.

Advanced user alarm observation

(1) Alarm detection conditions and range

10

OFF) of the bit device

(b) Collection timing (watch cycle)

Alarms are collected in the GOT buffering area and updated in the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s),
regardless of the screen displayed.
(c)

Setting range
Number of device points that can be monitored (alarm (device) points): 32767 max.
Alarm collection pattern (alarm ID)
For advanced user alarms, multiple sets of alarm collection settings are made for each alarm purpose
(255 max.).

Alarm ID : 10
(Alarms for maintenance)
40 "Oil refill"
500 "Fuel refill"

Alarm ID : 50
(Alarms for emergency use)
M10:OFF
M20:OFF
M30:OFF
M40:OFF

ON "Line A error stop"

ON "Line B error stop"
ON "Line C error stop"
ON "Line D error stop"

12

Settings
Alarm condition
: Word device value
Watch cycle
: 3600s
Alarm (Device) points : 50

Settings
Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 2s
Alarm (Device) points : 4

PANELMETER

D10
D20

11

LEVEL

Set the alarm condition and collection timing (watch cycle)

/alarm (device) points for each alarm ID.

ALARM

(a) Detection conditions

Rising (OFF ON) or falling (ON
Value of the word device

Alarm ID : 255 max.

(Alarm ID number can be set in the
range of 1 to 32767.)
Alarm (Device) Points : 32767 max.
(Total number of alarm (device)
points set to alarm IDs)

13
LINE GRAPH

10.3.1

14
Alarm ID : 900
ON "Confirm the battery"
ON "Confirm hydraulic pressure"
ON "Confirm internal pressure"
ON "Confirm the fuse"

Settings
TREND GRAPH

M80:OFF
M81:OFF
M82:OFF
M83:OFF

Alarm condition
: Bit device
Watch cycle
: 60s
Alarm (Device) points : 4

15

POINT

BAR GRAPH

Settings for each alarm ID

The functions set for the advanced user alarm operate for each alarm ID.
When displaying alarms and saving the history simultaneously, set them with an alarm ID.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 25

(2) Collection flow and collection mode

(a) Collection flow
Advanced user alarms are collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory) in the
cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s) regardless of the screen displayed.
The collected user alarm data are temporarily saved in the buffering area, and then displayed as alarms on
the GOT.
Alarm data are collected in the buffering area in
the cycle set by the user (1 to 3600s), regardless
of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.

User area
(C drive + add-on memory)

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 14:46:49 Temp. error

04/6/1 13:30:14 Fuse error

Buffering area

The advanced user alarm data

collected in the buffering area
are displayed as alarms.

HINT
(1) Clearing data in the buffering area
For details, refer to the following.
(3) Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory)
Data to be collected differ depending on the collection mode.

10 - 26

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

(
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation)
Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.
Example: When displaying data by advanced user alarm display
Status
Comment
04/06/01 20:00 P/S module error
04/06/01 18:30 Hydraulic pressure error Chk
04/06/01 16:10 Drive moduIe error
Chk

1)

Info displayed

2)

Restore Check OccurFreq DownTime Cum.Time Level Gr

2
1
1
2
1
18:50
16:30
2
00:20
00:40
2
16:20

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10

1
ALARM

Occurred

Description
Historical mode

Cumulative mode

The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.

2) Comment

The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.

3) Status

The status of the alarm on the screen is displayed.

Ocr: Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk: Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr: Alarm has been restored

4) Restore

The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

11

Only Current Alarm

LEVEL

1) Occurred

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Alarm collection modes

Select the collection mode from three options: historical mode, cumulative mode, and only current alarm.

12
PANELMETER

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.

Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions
5) Check

Comment
Pwr. module error

Restore Check

Check

Comment
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00

13

6) Occur Freq

The number of alarm occurrence times is

displayed.

7) Down Time

Time from alarm occurrence to restoration is

displayed

LINE GRAPH

(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)

Total alarm occurrence time including the past

alarm occurrence time (total down time) is
displayed.

14

A/O
status
(M10) OFF

A/O
(1st)
ON
OFF

D/T A

OFF

D/T B

A/O : Alarm occurrence status

D/T : Down time

9) Level

A/O
(3rd)
ON

A/O
(2nd)
ON

D/T C

15

time

The level set to the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified according to the alarm level.
Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or alarms at particular level only can be displayed.

BAR GRAPH

8) Cum. Time

TREND GRAPH

Cumulative Time

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

16

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

10) Group

The group set on the alarm is displayed.

Alarms can be classified into some groups according to the content.
Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or alarms in a particular group only can be displayed.

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 27

 Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the user area (C drive + add-on memory) every time an
alarm occurs. (The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.
Cumulative mode
In this mode, the information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time collected for each alarm type.
Only Current Alarm
In this mode, only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed.
The display disappears when the alarm is restored.

10 - 28

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced user alarm display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
ON

ON
OFF

"Temp. error"
(M10 : OFF ON)

OFF

10

ON

"Fuse error"
(M20 : OFF ON)

*1

12:00
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user *1

Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.(

15:30
3)

18:25
4)

19:00
5)
ALARM

11:30
1)

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions)

11

Historical mode
The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
LEVEL

Not collected in the historical mode.

1) "Temp. error" occurs.
Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore

Check

OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

12

"Temp. error" occurs!

Temp. error
Fuse error

PANELMETER

Occurred

2) "Temp. error" is checked.

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore

Temp. error
Fuse error

Check

OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

"Temp. error" is
checked.

12:00

13

Check

Occurred

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Comment

Restore

Check

Temp. error
Fuse error

15:30

12:00

OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

(Key code: FFB4H)

LINE GRAPH

3) Restored from "Temp. error"

Restoration date/time
is displayed.

14

4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

Comment

18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error
10:25 Fuse error

Restore

Check

15:30

12:00

Restore

Check

OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

A new line is added

and displayed.

TREND GRAPH

Occurred

5) "Temp. error" restored

Comment

04/06/01
04/06/01

18:25 Temp. error

11:30 Temp. error

04/06/01

10:25 Fuse error

19:00
15:30

12:00

15

OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Restoration date/time
is displayed.
BAR GRAPH

Occurred

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

(c)

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 29

 Cumulative mode
The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the cumulative
alarm occurrence time are collected for eachaOnly Current Alarm
1) "Temp. error" occurs
Occurred

Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

1
1

00:00
00:00

"Temp. error" occurs!

2) "Temp. error" is checked

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

12:00

1
1

00:00
00:00

"Temp. error" is
checked
Check

3) Restored from "Temp. error"

Occurred

04/06/01
04/06/01

11:30
10:25

(Key code: FFB4H)

Comment

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

15:30 12:00
12:00

1
1

04:00

04:00
00:00

Restoration date/time,
down time, and cumulative
time are displayed.

4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01

18:25

04/06/01

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

12:00

04:00
00:00

2
1

The occurrence time when

the alarm occurred again is
displayed on the same line of
the alarm. Frequency is
increased by one.

5) Restored from "Temp. error"

Occurred

10 - 30

04/06/01

18:25

04/06/01

10:25

Comment

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

19:00

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

2
12:00

00:35

04:35
00:00

Restoration date/time and

down time are displayed.
The time when the alarm
occurred is added to
the cumulative time.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Only Current Alarm

Only the alarms that are currently occurring are collected.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Alarms are not collected in the no alarm collection.
1) "Temp. error" occurs.
Occurred

Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

"Temp. error" occurs!

10

2) "Temp. error" is checked.

Comment

04/06/01

11:30

04/06/01

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Temp. error
Fuse error

12:00

ALARM

Occurred

"Temp. error" is
checked.
Check

3) Restored from "Temp. error"

Occurred

Comment

10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

Fuse error

The restored alarm

is cleared.
LEVEL

04/06/01

11

(Key code: FFB4H)

12

4) The restored "Temp. error" occurs again.

04/06/01
04/06/01

Comment

18:25
10:25

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

The alarm that occurred

again is displayed.

Temp. error
Fuse error

PANELMETER

Occurred

5) Restored from "Temp. error"

Restore Check OccurFreq Down Time Cum. Time

13

The restored alarm

is cleared.

LINE GRAPH

Fuse error

14
TREND GRAPH

Comment

10:25

15
BAR GRAPH

04/06/01

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 31

(3) Retention and clear of collected advanced alarm data

Advanced alarm data are saved in the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory).
Advanced alarm data are cleared at the following timings.
(a) Power-off or reset of GOT
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities
Item

Description

Communication setting
GOT setup

Display

[Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]

Operation

[Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]

Program/data control

OS and project writing

Debug & self

check

[I/O check]

Self check

Main menu

(c)

[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]

Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button

OS and project data write, drive information delete and drive format

(d) Setting and operations by the user

The history of restored alarms can be freely cleared by the user.The history of restored alarms can be
freely cleared by the user.
Clear by device
All restored alarm data are cleared by turning on the [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device].
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
Clear by touch switch
One or all restored alarm logs can be cleared.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions
Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01
04/06/01

10:25
09:10

Comment
Hydraulic error

Drive module error

Control module error

Restore
15:30

Delete

Occurred
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10

(Key code: clear one log FFB6H

clear all logs FFB7H)

10 - 32

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Comment
Restore
Drive module error
Control module error

(a) Outline of data retention under power failure

By saving advanced user alarm data in the memory card as alarm log file, the data are retained even when
GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the CF card, the alarm log file is read out
automatically, and the historical status of the advanced user alarm saved before GOT power-off is restored.

Data
are
stored

10

The timing of saving data in the CF card can be set freely.

(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can be saved by pressing the touch switch as well.

AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
DDD EEE FFF
DDD EEE FFF

AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC

Power off

ALARM

CF card

COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure

The status saved

before power-off
Current status

11

Power on

LEVEL

The status saved before power-off

and the current status are displayed.

Precautions for starting up the GOT

When restoring the advanced user alarm data by reading it out from a CF card, insert the CF card to the GOT
before turning on the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned on, the data in the CF card cannot be restored.
Also, when the CF card is inserted after turning on, the advanced user alarm data in the CF card is overwritten at
saving data to the CF card.

12
PANELMETER

POINT

13
LINE GRAPH

HINT
Advanced user alarm data saved in the CF card
Advanced user alarm data are created in the CF card for each alarm ID.
File name (can be changed freely)
AAM00001.G1A
AAM00002.G1A
AAM00003.G1A

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Alarm ID
Alarm ID1
Alarm ID2
Alarm ID3

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 33

(b) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced user alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
monitored using the device.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
writing

Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14

Temp. error
Fuse error

Writing

Write error

Save

Status during writing can be monitored.

(c)

File name to be saved and saving timing

A file can be named freely for each alarm ID.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.

(d) Method of data retention under power failure

Retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the following methods.
The file names and so need to be set on the [File Save] tab previously.
Save by the store trigger device (
Save by the touch switch(

10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation)

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions)

Save by buffer flash forced saving signal(GS520.b0) (

Devices)

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported

(e) Required memory capacity

For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced user alarm data under power failure, refer to
the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.2 Data Capacity Available for Storage on CF Card

10 - 34

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

9
(1) Information to be saved
The alarm log file content to be saved in the CF card varies depending on the collection mode.
10.3.1 Before setting
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the CF card
After the advanced user alarm data is stored as an alarm log file in the CF card, the file can be utilized as
follows.
The occurrence history of advanced user alarms can be displayed as a graph.
In the historical mode : Displayed as a historical graph
In the cumulative mode: Displayed as a total graph
For a display on a personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to Unicode text file/CSV file with
the GOT utility or convert trigger device.

10

ALARM

HINT

11

(3) Backup of the alarm log file

By selecting [Auto Backup at Save] on the [File Save] tab, the alarm log file just before a saving can be saved
as a backup file.
For details, refer to the following.

12
PANELMETER

10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

LEVEL

Data are saved in the Unicode text file/CSV file in the order of alarm occurrence.

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 35

(5) Converting alarm log files

The alarm log files created with the advanced user alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to Unicode text files or CSV files for displaying and editing the files on a personal
computer.
The following explains how to convert alarm log files.
(a) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with utility.
Convert binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to Unicode text files or CSV files with the utility.

1.

2.

Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch the G1A->CSV button or
the G1O TXT button for converting the file.

Store the converted Unicode text file/CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
Transferring files with GT Designer3
The resource data is read from the GOT. For the procedure, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data
Storing files in CF card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB
memory using the personal computer.

Alarm log file

3.

CF card/
USB memory

Alarm log file

Display and edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.

POINT
How to operate utility
Refer to the following manual for the details.
User's Manual for the GOT used

10 - 36

CF card/
USB memory

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with device.
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the
specified device.
When converting the files to Unicode text files or CSV files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the convert
trigger device.
Advanced Alarm Common
File conversion (the File Save tab in the Advanced User Alarm Observation screen)

10

10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

11

LEVEL

Precautions for file conversion with external control device

Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced user alarm observation that creates a file to be
converted into the alarm ID device. (For the advanced user alarm observation: 1 to 32767)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the advanced user alarm observation,
the alarm log file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.

ALARM

POINT

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 37

 Setting the advanced user alarm display

(1) Method of displaying alarm
(a) Types of alarm displayed
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
All alarms
: Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
Occurring alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Alarm status
(Comment)

(Occurred)
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58

(Restored)

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Light error

--

--

-12:05
-10:14
09:45

12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15

In case of [Occurring alarm]

In case of [All alarms]

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58

Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error

Restored Checked

12:05
10:14
09:45

Internal pressure error

Light error

(Checked)

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error

12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15

Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is

displayed.

Restored Checked
12:25
10:55

The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light

error are deleted because these alarms have been restor

(b) Comment display methods

The display methods below can be selected. (

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)

Fixed
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
Flow
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left. If display the comment by
flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width or a comment in multiple lines can
be displayed.
Comment contents displayed
1)Comment No.1 (comment group)
Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

Comment
Pwr. module
Check oil pre
Motor error

Restored Checked

Pwr. module temp. error.

12:05

12:25
11:50

Displayed as a flow from right to left.

Check fuse.
2)Comment No.2 (comment group)
Check oil pressure.

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

Comment Restored Checked

temp. error.
12:25
ssure.
12:05
11:50
error

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

error. Check
Check
Motor

3)Comment No.3 (comment group)

Motor error

Restored Checked

12:05

12:25
11:50

A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.

10 - 38

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Comment over
multiple lines

1.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Alarm display order

Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:
Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.
The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest

10

Sort in the descending order of occurrence date/time

Comment
Pwr. module error
Oil pressure error
Drive module error
Motor error
Light error

Status
Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.

Restored Checked OccurFreq

--1
-2
18:50
16:30
5
16:20
14:10
4
15:00
1
14:30
13:50

Cum.Time Down Time Level

--1
-00:20
1
04:10
2
00:20
01:00
02:30
2
2
01:00
01:00

Group
2
1
1
1
1

11

LEVEL

Setting example: Specify the settings on the [Display] tab as follows:

12
PANELMETER

Items displayed by the advanced

alarm display function

Select a display order

(descending or ascending).

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Select an item for sort

(Occurred).

LINE GRAPH

13

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 13:30

ALARM

(c)

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 39

2.

By setting the [Switching Device], the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
For details of [Switching Device], refer to the following.
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency

Change the item for sorting to the occurrence frequency (descending order).
Occurred
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 13:30

Comment
Drive module error
Motor error
Oil pressure error
Pwr. module error
Light error

Status
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time

16:20
16:30
5
04:10
15:00
4
02:30
14:10
-18:50
2
00:20
---1
1
01:00
14:30
13:50

Down Time
00:20
01:00
--01:00

Level
2
2
1
1
2

Group
1
1
1
2
1

Setting example) Set the items on the [Extended] tab as follows.

Switching device
D100

The sort condition can be changed by the value

of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

: Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)

: Occurrence date/time
: Restoration date/time
: Check date/time
: Comment (displayed comment No.)
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
(Ascending:check
restore occur)
(Descending:occur
restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
11 : Down Time

POINT
Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified at the same time
If both [Display Order] on the [Display] tab and [Priority Display Attribute] in [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
tab are set, the data are displayed in the order specified in [Priority Display Attribute].

10 - 40

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Various operations are possible for alarms displayed by touch switches for the advanced user alarm display.
Touch switches for the advanced user alarm display can be arranged easily by the library.

COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Operations by touch switches

ALARM

10

11
Touch switches for advanced alarm display

LEVEL

HINT
Details of the touch switches for advanced alarm display
For details, refer to the following.

12
PANELMETER

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 41

10.3.2

Setting advanced user alarm observation

Advanced alarm common

For the settings of the advanced alarm common setting dialog box, refer to the following.
10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

Advanced user alarm observation list

Select [Common]

[Alarm]

[Advanced User Alarm Observation] from the menu, to display the setting dialog box.

Make the settings of advanced user alarms (devices, watch cycle, and collection mode) for each alarm ID.
Up to 255 alarm IDs can be set.

Item

Description
Click this button when setting a new alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
(

Advanced User Alarm Observation)

Click this button to when editing the selected alarm ID, and the setting dialog box will appear.
(

Advanced User Alarm Observation)

Click this button to copy the selected alarm ID.

Click this button when pasting the copied alarm ID to the alarm ID list.
The destination of the alarm ID can be set.
Click this button to delete the selected alarm ID.
Click this button to delete all alarm IDs.

10 - 42

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Model

Double click [Alarm]

box.

[Advanced User Alarm Observation]

[New] in the project tree to display the setting dialog

(1) Basic tab

Set the collection mode and buffering for saving the alarm history.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Advanced User Alarm Observation

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item
Alarm ID
Alarm Name

Description

Model

Set the alarm ID No. (1 to 32767) and name of the advanced user alarm.
Up to 32 characters can be entered for the alarm name.
Select a mode to collect advanced user alarms.

PANELMETER

12

13

10.3.1 Before setting

Collection Mode

Popup Display
Basic

: Data of advanced user alarms are collected as history. Historical data is

added every time an advanced user alarm occurs.
Cumulative
: The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have
occurred and the cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each
alarm type.
Only Current Alarm : Only alarms that are currently occurring are displayed. The history of
restored alarms is not saved.

LINE GRAPH

Historical

14

Check this item when displaying collected advanced user alarms by the advanced alarm popup
display function.

Check this item when storing the total number of advanced user alarm logs in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of
occurrence, check, and restoration.
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing that number.

15

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to the next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Generated Number
Storage

Check this item when storing the number of advanced user alarms that are currently occurring in
the word device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing that number.

BAR GRAPH

History Number
Storage

TREND GRAPH

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 43

Item

Description
Set the buffering for saving the history of collected advanced user alarms.
This item is available only when [Historical] or [Cumulative] is selected as the [Collection Mode].
10.3.1 Before setting
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

Stored Number

Set the number of advanced user alarms to be saved as history (32767 max.).
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].
Set a number greater than or equal to the [Alarm Points] on the Device tab.
Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation to be performed when the number of the advanced user alarms stored in the
buffering area reaches the [Stored Number]
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].

Action when
Buffer is Full

Full Notification
Signal Device
Buffering

Delete old data : The oldest one is deleted from the restored advanced user alarms and the data
of the new advanced user alarm are added.
Add no item
: The collection of advanced user alarms is interrupted. Even if a new
advanced user alarm occurs, it is not collected.
Select this item to turn on the device and notify externally when the number of storable advanced
user alarms becomes lower than the number set in [Notification Number].
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the full alert signal device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Notification
Number

Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area has
decreased (storable advanced user alarms: 0 to 255).
This item is available only when the [Collection Mode] is [Historical] and the item [Full Notification
Signal Device] is set.
When the number of storable advanced user alarms is equal to or less than the number set in
[Notification Number], the [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.
Example: Setting [Stored Number] to 1000 and [Notification Number] to 10.
The [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on when the number of total saved
advanced user alarms is 990 or more.

Buffering Data
Clear Trigger
Device

Buffering Data
Clear Completion
Signal Device

Check this time to delete the restored advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area by the
device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Check this time to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button t o set the Buffering Data Clear Completion Signal
Device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This item is available only when [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device] is selected.

10 - 44

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Model

Set the timing for collecting advanced user alarms and make the settings of advanced user alarms (device
settings for advanced user alarms, comments displayed when advanced user alarms occur, resetting of
advanced user alarms, and the level/group settings).

COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Device tab

10

ALARM

Comment group

Alarm setting list

LEVEL

11

Description

Model

Watch Cycle

Set a cycle to monitor the device (1 to 3600s).

Alarm Points

Set the number of device points (1 to 32767 points).

The maximum points (32767) are the total alarm (device) points set on all alarm IDs.

Device Type

Select the data type of the device to be monitored.

Bit
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

Select a method to set the device No.

Continuous
: Devices are numbered consecutively from the set one.
Random
: Devices are numbered at random.
Identical
: When other than [Bit] is selected in the [Device Type], multiple occurrence ranges are set by the
same word device.

Signed BIN32

13

Unsigned BIN32

LINE GRAPH

Item

14

Comment Group
No.

Set the comment group No.

Comment Type

Select the setting method for comments.

Continuous
: The comment groups are numbered consecutively from the comment No. of
the comment group to be set.
Random
: The comment No. of comment groups are set at random.

TREND GRAPH

Set the comment group No. and the setting method for comment groups displayed with the comments of general
alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detailed display.

15
BAR GRAPH

(Continued to the next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Comment group

PANELMETER

12

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 45

Item

Description

Display Column

Model

Select the items to be displayed on the alarm setting list.

Copies and pastes the contents of the alarm setting list.

*6

Reads out the advanced user alarm observation settings edited in an Unicode text file/CSV file to GT Designer3.

*5

Saves the advanced user alarm observation settings set by GT Designer3 as an Unicode text file/CSV file.

*5

Set up a device for the alarm and comments displayed when an alarm occurs.
Device

Set up a device for the alarm. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Set the device value condition for displaying an alarm.

When [Device Type] is set to [Bit].
ON
Alarm Range

: Alarms are displayed by the rising (OFF

ON) of the bit device.

OFF : Alarms are displayed by the falling (ON

OFF) of the bit device.
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit].
Click the [Exp] button to set up the range of the values of the word device to display the alarm.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

General
Comment No. *1
*2
Middle
Comment No. *1
*2

Set the comment to be displayed when the alarm occurs by the comment No. of the comment
group.
For an alarm, specify the comment Nos. of the comment groups used for the higher alarm,
middle alarm, and general alarm, respectively.
Specify "0" when not displaying the middle or higher alarm.

Upper Comment
No. *1 *2
Select a method of detailed display.
Set the comment No., base screen No., and window screen No. of the comment group displayed
in [Detail No.]
Not Display
: Details are not displayed.

Alarm setting list

Detail Display *3
*4

Detail No.

Comment Window *3 : Details are displayed on the window for detail display. Registered
comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen

: The base screen is displayed as detail display. The base screen set to
the detail No. of the device is displayed.

Window Screen

: The window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed as detail display.

The window screen set to the device's detail No. is displayed.

Set the comment No., window screen No., and base screen No. of the comment group displayed
in details when an alarm occurs.
Select whether or not to enable the reset operation of alarm (turn off or reset the device specified
for the alarm by the touch switch for resetting).

Reset

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

YES :The device specified for the alarm will be turned off or set to the reset value.
If device is a word device, set a reset value after selecting this option.
NO :The device specified for the alarm will not be turned off or set to the reset value.

*7

Level

Set a level (1 to 255) to the alarm.

Alarms can be displayed in the level order from highest to lowest, or only the alarms at the
particular level can be displayed.

Group

Set a group (1 to 255) on the alarm.

Alarms can be displayed in the group order, or only the alarms of the particular group can be
displayed.

Click this button to set the searching for selected alarm device at the ladder monitor start.
For details of *1 to *7, refer to the following.

10 - 46

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

A setting example for displaying comments in comment groups as higher alarms, middle alarms, general alarms, and
detail display is provided below.

1.

Register the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs as a comment group.

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Method of setting the comments to be displayed when an alarm occurs

10

Comment group No.1

(for higher alarms)

ALARM

Register a comment group for

each alarm hierarchy.
Comment group No.2
(for middle alarms)

11

LEVEL

Comment group No.3

(for general alarms)

12
PANELMETER

Comment group No.4

(for detail display)

2. 1. Set the comments registered at step 1 as follows by the advanced user alarm observation function.
1) Set the comment group No. to be displayed for each hierarchy.

LINE GRAPH

13

2) Set the comments to be displayed for each hierarchy (general alarms, middle alarms, higher alarms, and detail display) of the alarm.
Comment displayed
for alarm M10
Comment displayed
for alarm M11

TREND GRAPH

14

15

Comment displayed
for alarm M12
Set the comment No. of
comment group No.2.

Set the comment No. of

comment group No.1.

Set the comment No. of

comment group No.4.

BAR GRAPH

Set the comment No. of

comment group No.3.

Example) Comment display when alarm M10 occurs

Pwr. module error
Control module error
Drive module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of middle alarms

Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment C error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of higher alarms

Detail display

Line1 error
Line2 error

Line1 error
Oil supply
Equipment B error
Equipment C error

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Display of general alarms

Check

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 47

*2 When "No Message" is displayed as comment

When the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs is set as follows, "No Message" is displayed when an alarm
occurs.
Comment settings have not been performed (comment No. remains "0.")
No comment has been registered for the comment No.
In addition, when alarms are hierarchized and comments are not set for some hierarchies, it is recommended to set
blank comments (enter space only) so that "No Message" is not displayed.
Example 1: When no comment is specified
No comment is set.

Pwr. module error

Control module error
Drive module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of general alarms

Equipment A error
No message
No message
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of middle alarms

Line1 error
No message
No message
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

"No message"
is displayed.

Check

Display of higher alarms

Example 2: When a blank comment is specified

Set a blank comment
(comment No.2).

"

" Enter a space character.

Register a blank comment as shown

above.
Pwr. module error
Control module error
Drive module error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of general alarms

Equipment A error

Line1 error

A blank comment is displayed.

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of middle alarms

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Display of higher alarms

*3 Detail type settings

All alarms are displayed on the same destination specified on [Detail Display] (Not Display, Comment Window, Base
Screen, or Window Screen) when [Comment Type] is set to [Continuous].
To change the [Detail Display] for each alarm, set the [Comment Type] to [Random].
In addition, when changing the settings of [Comment Type] from [Random] to [Continuous], the destinations of all
alarms set on the [Detail Display] are changed to the same destination as the top alarm.

10 - 48

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

1) Display the detail display screen

by the one-touch operation
Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35

Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error

COMMENT DISPLAY

*4 Method of displaying the comment window

2) Display the detail display screen
by the touch switch

Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28

Occurred
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35

Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error

Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:28

10

Display on the comment window

Display on the window screen

(overlap window)

ALARM

Details

Display on the base screen

11
Check line 2

Check line 2
Check line 2

LEVEL

The specified base screen and window screen are displayed.

12

(a) Number of characters available for comment window

39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
(b) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
(c)

Comment text is displayed as follows

Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse, blink and HQ fonts are not supported, regardless of the comment registration
settings.

Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

15
BAR GRAPH

When a comment is registered

14

Comment window display

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

13

TREND GRAPH

(d) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed for the
comment.

PANELMETER

The specified comment is displayed.

Alarm historical display

LINE GRAPH

Alarm historical display

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 49

*5 Import/Export
An exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited using spreadsheet software and others.
After editing, the Unicode text file or CSV file can be read out to GT Designer3 by importing the file.
Example: Import/export of a CSV file

Exported in CSV file

Editing the exported file

Add the setting using applications

R
such as Microsoft Excel.

Importing to GT Designer2

The added contents

are displayed.

POINT
Import/export in multilingual environment
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment.
Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.

10 - 50

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

9
*6 Copy Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box

Description

Model

Source No.

Set the row number to be copied.

Destination No.

Set the row number to paste the copied contents.

Number of Copy

Set the number of times to paste the copied contents.

From the row numbers set in [Destination No.], the number of rows set in [Number of Copy] are pasted sequentially.

Copy Item

Select the content to be copied.

When the [Comment Type] of [General], [Middle], [Upper], or [Detail] in the [Comment group] is set to [Continuous], the
followings cannot be selected.
General Comment No.
Middle Comment No.
Upper Comment No.
Detail No.

11

LEVEL

Item

ALARM

10

12

*7 Starting ladder monitor

PANELMETER

To start ladder monitor, touch switch setting is required.

For details, refer to the following.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions
Ladder Search Settings dialog box

LINE GRAPH

13

Select a search method. (Coil / Factor)

Specify the
search file

Select this item to specify the program file to be searched.

This setting is valid only for the QCPU and QnACPU.
After selecting this item, specify a file name.
(Up to eight characters can be set.)

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Ladder Search
Mode

Model

TREND GRAPH

Description

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Item

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 51

(3) File save tab

Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the CF card.
10.3.1 Before setting

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to write the advanced user alarm history saved in the buffering area to the CF card as an alarm log
file.
The data are written to the CF card as a binary format file. (*.G1A)
This item can be selected only when [Historical] or [Cumulative] is selected for [Collection Mode].

Save alarm log

files *2

Drive Name

The destination drive is displayed.

Folder Name *1

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.

Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.
By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common]
[GOT Type Setting] is preset.

File Access
File Name *1

Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
By default, the file name is set to AAM

Trigger Type
Store Trigger

Device
Writing Notification
Device

Select a timing at which the advanced user alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to the
CF card.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1 to
1440 minutes).
Rise
Sampling
OFF Sampling
Fall
ON Sampling
Specify the store trigger device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to the next page)

10 - 52

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Item

Description
Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is restored.
When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
displayed on the GOT utility.)

Save *2

Ex.: AAM00001.G1A

10

AAM00001.G1A.BAK

ALARM

Make the settings to convert files.

When converting files, the [Advanced Alarm Common] must be set.
Set this item in the [Advanced Alarm Common] dialog box, by clicking the [Advanced Alarm Common] button.
10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

*1

Conversion
Format

Select a file format after conversion. (Unicode text/CSV)

Add date
information to
file name

Select this item to add date information to the converted file name.

Destination

Select this item to change the save destination of the converted file.
After selecting this item, select the drive and folder where the file is to be stored.

11

LEVEL

File Convert *3

For details of folder names and file names used in GOT, refer to the following.

12

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

For details of *2 to *3, refer to the following.

*2 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the following status,
system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs. In this case, reading out of the
alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file is present (check [Auto Backup at Save]), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no system alarm
occurs.)
*3 Advanced Alarm Common

PANELMETER

Auto Backup at

13
LINE GRAPH

Writing Error
Notification Device

Model

COMMENT DISPLAY

14

To control alarm log file conversion with a device, set [Advanced Alarm Common].
For setting items of Advanced Alarm Common, refer to the following.

TREND GRAPH

10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 53

10.3.3

Setting advanced user alarm display

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the advanced user alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged advanced user alarm display to display the setting dialog box.

[Alarm Display]

[Advanced User Alarm Display ] from the menu.

Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed, message display method, and operation when the screen is
touched.

Alarm tab

Item
Display Alarm

Alarm ID

Description

Model

Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function. (User Alarm/System Alarm)
The [User Alarm] is selected in this section, for explaining the advanced user alarm display.
Set the alarm ID of the advanced user alarm observation to be displayed.
Click the [Edit] button to display the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
Select how to display collected alarms.

Display Target

10.3.1 Before setting

All Alarm
: Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is displayed.
Generating Alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm
10.3.1 Before setting

Display Type

Fixed: Displays the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs in a line.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the comment
is not displayed.
Flow : Displays the comment flowing it from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting this item, select a speed to display the comment as a flow in [Speed].

(Continued to next page)

10 - 54

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Item

Speed

Model

Initial Display
Hierarchy

Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed by the advanced user alarm display function.
(General/Middle/Upper)

Touch Mode

Select the operation when the advanced user alarm display screen is touched.
None
: No operation even when touched.
Selection : The touched alarm is selected.
Operation : Alarm hierarchies are switched or the detailed screen is displayed for the touched alarm.
Operations differ depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When higher/middle alarm is displayed : The alarm hierarchy is switched to the lower one.
When general alarms are displayed
: The touched alarm is selected.
When touching the selected alarm again, the detailed screen is
displayed.

10

ALARM

Display Type

Description
Select a speed for the flowing display when [Flow] is set for [Display Type].
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per
second.
Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per
second.
Low
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per
second.

11

Occurred

Comment

04/11/05 10:25

Temp. error

11:25

10:45

04/11/05 12:05

Fuel error

12:25

12:28

04/11/06 08:30

Motor error

09:45

09:40

LEVEL

Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).

Example: When setting the number of rows to 3
Number of
Rows

Restored Checked

12

Number of rows
(not including the title row)

PANELMETER

Set which alarm is displayed in the top row when the number of alarms exceed the number of rows set in [Number of
Rows].
When the number of alarms exceeds the value set for [Display Start Row].
The alarm corresponding to the value set for [Display Start Row] is displayed in the top row.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 2, and the number of alarms is 5.

Alarm occurrence
Occurred
Comment
1. Temp. error
2. Fuse error
04/06/01 17:00 Fuse error
04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
3. Oil error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error
4. Fuel error
5. Internal pressure error
Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number
specified on "Display Head Row."

13
LINE GRAPH

Display order
of alarms

When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Display Start Row].
The last alarm is displayed in the bottom row.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 10, and the number of alarms is 5.
Row *1

Display order
of alarms

Alarm occurrence
1. Temp. error
2. Fuse error
3. Oil error
4. Fuel error
5. Internal pressure error

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

14

Comment

TREND GRAPH

Display Start

Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error

Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.

When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Number of Rows].
The setting for [Display Start Row] becomes invalid, and all the alarms are displayed.
Example) When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set ti 3, and the number of alarms is 2.

Alarm occurrence
1. Temp. error
2. Fuse error

15

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Temp error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error

BAR GRAPH

Display order
of alarms

Displays all occurred alarms.

16

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Alarm] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Object Name

COMMENT DISPLAY

Click this button to display the manual in PDF related to the advanced user alarm.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 55

*1 Display Start Row

If the number of alarms becomes higher than the number set to [Display Start Row] while the advanced user alarm is
displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the advanced user alarm
display screen.

HINT
Application example of Display Start Row
If different [Display Start Row] are set on screens, different advanced alarm display can be displayed for each
screen.
Alarm occurred number
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th

1st
2nd
3rd

4th
5th
6th

7th
8th
9th

10 - 56

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Screen 1
(Display Head Row: 1)

Screen 2
(Display Head Row: 4)

Screen 3
(Display Head Row: 7)

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Display tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (contents and display order).

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Description

Model

Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.

Direct

Select this item to enter characters displayed on the title from [Title].

13

Comment

Adjust Text Size : Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
If this item is not selected, a new line is automatically started, and the
character string is adjusted.
After the check, set the minimum character size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)

14

(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Select this item to hide the title.

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

Hide

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Title

LINE GRAPH

Select this item to display characters displayed on the title in the comment of comment group.
After the selection, set the group No.
Group No.
: Set the comment group where characters displayed on the title has been
registered.

TREND GRAPH

Item

PANELMETER

12

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 57

Item

Description
Display

Model

Select the items displayed for advanced alarm display.

"Occurred"

"Status"
"Comment"

Occurred

Comment

"Level"

"Cum.Time"

"Checked"

"Restored"

"OccurFreq"

"Down Time"

"Group"

Status Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time Down Time Level Group

-04/06/01 20:00 Oil pressure error Chk.

Chk.
-04/06/01 18:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:10 Oil pressure error Rstr. 16:30

-18:50
16:20

1
2
2

--00:40

--00:20

1
1
2

2
1
1

Occurred
Comment
Status

Attribute

: Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.

: Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
: Select when displaying alarm status.
The alarm status is displayed as follows.
Ocr. : An alarm is occurring
Rstr. : The alarm is restored
Chk. : Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checked: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the alarm
was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is displayed.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions
Comment Restored
Motor error

Checked

Check

Comment Restored
Motor error

Checked
12:00

(Key code : FFB4H)

Frequency
Cum.Time
Contents
Down Time
Level
Group

: Select this item when displaying the number of alarm occurrences.

: Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm
occurrences in the past (total down time).
: Select this item when displaying the time from the alarm occurrence to
restoration of it.
: Select this item when displaying the level specified on the alarm.
: Select this item when displaying the group specified on the alarm.

Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.

Example: When the message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25

Comment
Motor error

Restored
11:25

Checked
10:45

Displayed in a width of 12 digits

Width

Title

The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Occurred
: The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Comment
: 10 to 80 digits
Status
: 6 to 80 digits
Restored
: The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Checked
: The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Frequency : 5 to 80 digits
Cum.Time : 8 to 80 digits
Down Time : 8 to 80 digits
Level
: 3 to 80 digits
Group
: 3 to 80 digits
Set the characters displayed on the title of advanced alarm display.
When [Direct] is selected in [Title]
: Characters for the number specified by [Width] can be
input.
When [Comment] is selected in [Title] : Set the comment group No. or the content to be
displayed.
When [Hide] is selected in [Title]
: The [Title] cannot be set.

(Continued to next page)

10 - 58

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Item

Description

Model

Set the display for date and time when alarm occurs (Occurred/Restored/Checked).
Contents

Date/Time Format

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display order in the advanced user alarm display.

The items of [Contents] selected in [Display] are displayed.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

ALARM

Select the item to change the order and set the order with the
and
buttons.
Example) When [Occurred], [Comment], [Status], [Checked], and [Cum.Time] are selected in [Display].

Display Order

11

LEVEL

The items selected in [Display]

are reflected.

Select an item and method to sort alarm display.

The items of [Attribute] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select one of the following 2 methods.
Ascending : Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending : Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.

Ascending : Old
Descending : New

PANELMETER

When selecting [Date/Time Format] for the item to be sorted, the items are sorted as follows.
New
Old

For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following.

13
LINE GRAPH

10.3.1 Before setting

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Sort

12

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 59

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

Preview area

Item

Description

Preview area

The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

Contents

Select a display type of date and time.

Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time
Date
Time
When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.
Sort

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/9/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 9/1/09) dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/9/09)
Select asorting type of date.
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a
week.
The display examples below show the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort] and [/] for [Delimiter].

Type
09/9/1
Sep/1
SEP/1
Sep/1(WED)
SEP/1(WED)
09/Sep/1
09/SEP/1
09/Sep/1(WED)
09/SEP/1(WED)
2009/Sep/1
2009/SEP/1
2009/Sep/1(WED)
2009/SEP/1(WED)

Date Setting

Delimiter

Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
/ (Example: 09/9/1) - (Example: 09-9-1)
. (Example: 09.9.1)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example: To display September 1, 2009
Selected
:09/09/01
Not selected :09/9/1

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time] for [Contents], set the following items.
Type

Select the display type of time.

Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10:1
10:1:27
10:1(AM)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example: To display 1 past 10
Selected
:10:1
Not selected :10:01

Time Setting

10 - 60

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Text tab
Set the font to display the alarm.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Model

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

12dot standard
16dot standard
12dot HQ Mincho
12dot HQ Gothic
Stroke
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

13

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Text Size

Text Color

LINE GRAPH

Set the format of characters displayed on the title of advanced user alarm display.
Select a color for the text to be displayed.
Select a display format to the text.
Style

: Displays the text in bold format.

14

: Displays the text in solid format.

: Displays the text in raised format.
Select a color of the shadow when the [Style] is set to

button or

button.

TREND GRAPH

Solid Color

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

Title Format

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

15

Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"

Japan

China (GB) -Mincho

(Continued to next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

KANJI Region

Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5)-Gothic

BAR GRAPH

Font

Description

PANELMETER

Item

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 61

Item

Description

Model

Select a display format to the text.

Style

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Switching

Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
Fixed : Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Status : Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occurred,
restored, or checked).
Level : Select this item when using different colors depending on level.
Group : Select this item when using different colors depending on group.

Fixed

Select the character color when [Fixed] is selected in [Switching].

Status

Select the character color for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked) when [Status] is
selected for [Switching].

Level

Select the character color for each level number when [Level] is selected for [Switching].

Group

Select the character color for each group number when [Group] is selected for [Switching].

Table Format

POINT
Displaying alarm status, level color, and group color for higher/middle alarms.
For higher/middle alarm, the character colors specified on [Table Format] are displayed in the following character
colors, regardless of alarm status or level/group.
[Fixed] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Fixed].
[Status] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Occurred].
[Level] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Level 1].
[Group] : Characters are displayed in the color set in [Group 1].

10 - 62

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Style tab
Set the ruled line type and shape of advanced user alarm display.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Draw Ruled
Line

Space

Model

Select a color of the cursor for selecting the alarm.

Style

Select a ruled line type for the advanced user alarm display.

Width

Select a ruled line width for the advanced user alarm display. (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 dots)

Color

Select a ruled line color for the advanced user alarm display.

Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the characters such as
time display.
X: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
Y: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
According to the setting of [Text Size] (magnification of the character size), the actual
horizontal space is as follows:
Magnification of character size

13
LINE GRAPH

Cursor

Description

Occurrence date/time

14

set value in [Space]

TREND GRAPH

Example:
When [Text Size:2] and [Space:8] are set, a space of 16 dots is ensured.

Shape

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color
Shape Settings

PANELMETER

12

15

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Plate color

BAR GRAPH

Plate Color

Frame color

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 63

 Extended tab
Set the switching of the data displayed by the advanced user alarm display using a device.

Item

Description

Model

Check the item whose display is switched by the device.

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

Hierarchy *1

Select this item to switch the alarm hierarchy to display by the value of the device.
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Select this item to display alarms of the specified level number only.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (
Level
Switching Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Store the level number of the advanced user alarm to be displayed in the device.
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if a nonexistent level number is specified, any advanced user alarm is displayed.
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
Select this item to display alarms of the specified group number only.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Group

Store the group number of the advanced user alarm to be displayed in the device.
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if a nonexisting group number is specified, any advanced user alarm is displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.

Priority Display

Select this item to switch the sort key by the value of the device.

Attribute *2

After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

(Continued to next page)

10 - 64

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to display the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
When storing "0" in this device, the alarm with the alarm ID set on the [User Alarm] item of
[Display Alarm] on the [Alarm] tab is displayed.
If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.

10

Select this item to switch the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarms, middle
alarms, or higher alarms by the value of the device.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

ALARM

General
Comment
Group/
Middle
Comment
Group/
Upper
Comment
Group

Switching Device

After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group set by advanced user alarm observation is
displayed.
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, [No message] is displayed.

User ID *3

Set a user ID for advanced user alarm display.

Operation Log
Target

Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.

11

LEVEL

Advanced User
Alarm
Observation

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Display

12

Operation

PANELMETER

To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).

Set "0" when not setting the security function.
Be sure to set a number for security (Operation) larger than the number for security (Display).

Security Level

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

Layer

COMMENT DISPLAY

13

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

*1 Hierarchies

14

Store values in the device to switch hierarchies.

b14 to b2

b1

b0
TREND GRAPH

b15

b1 to b0 : Specifis the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0): General alarms
01(1): Middle alarms
10(2): Higher alarms
b14 to b2: Not usable
b15
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, set this bit to "0."
0: Switching by the switching device
1: Switching by touching the display area

BAR GRAPH

15

For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
10.3.6 Precautions

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 65

*2 Priority display attribute

Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15

b14 to b4

b3 to b0 : Specifies a sort key.(

b3

b2

b1

b0

: Reserved)

0 H:

Regular (Occurred)

4 H:

Comment No.

9 H:

1 H:

Occurred Date/Time

2 H:

Restored Date/Time

3 H:

Checked Date/Time

OccurFreq

5 H:

Level

A H:

Cum.Time

6 H:

Group

B H:

Down Time

7 H:

Alarm Status

b14 to b4: Not usable

b15

: Specifies ascending order or descending order.(

0

: Reserved)

: Descending order

8
H: Ascending order
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
Occur Freq, Cum. Time and Down Time are effective only when the collection mode of advanced alarm observation is
[Cumulative].
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.
*3 User ID
When user ID setting is required
If the advanced alarm display and alarm history display/alarm display are set on the same screen, the touch
switches set for the advanced alarm display may not operate.
To make the touch switches for advanced alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced alarm
display.
Alarm list display

02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error

02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error

Occurred
Comment Restored
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25
04/11/05 12:05 Light error
12:28
04/11/05 12:35

Checked
10:45

Advanced alarm display

Oil pressure error

Cursor ON

Up

Check

Cursor OFF

Down

Delete

Touch switch for advanced

alarm display

If the same user ID is set for advanced alarm display and touch switches, the operations of
the touch switches for advanced alarm display are effective for advanced alarm display.

10 - 66

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Setting method
Set a user ID for advanced alarm display.
Set the touch switches for advanced alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions
Setting of touch switch (Action tab)

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12
Set the same user ID as for advanced alarm display

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 67

 Trigger tab
Set the condition for displaying an object.
For the details of the display condition, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Item
Trigger Type

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Settings

Ordinary
ON

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

OFF

10 - 68

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Model

Perform the settings for writing the information about the alarm selected on the advanced user alarm display into the
device.

COMMENT DISPLAY

External Output tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

If this item is selected, the information about the touched alarm can be written into the device.

13

10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

Trigger Device

When cursor is
hidden

LINE GRAPH

Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected for [Trigger Type].

14

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the external output when the cursor is hidden.
Clear External Output Device
: The external output device value is cleared.
Output alarm information of the top row : The alarm information displayed in the top row is output.

TREND GRAPH

Trigger Type

Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary : Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
ON
: When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.

Set the device to which alarm data are written.

Head Device

15

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Alarm ID

If this item is selected, the alarm ID of the touched alarm can be written into the device.

(Continued to next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Device

Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)

BAR GRAPH

Use
External
Output

PANELMETER

12

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 69

Item

Description

Model

Comment Group
No.

If this item is selected, the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm can be
written into the device.

Comment No.

If this item is selected, the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm can be written
into the device.
If this item is selected, the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
The following values are written.

b15 to b3

b2

b1

b0

: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
1: Occurring

b1

: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.

0: Not checked
1: Checked

b2

: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not.
0: Not effective
1: Effective
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.

Alarm Status*1

b0

b15 to b3 : Not usable

Occurred Date
Device

*1,*2

Occurred Time
*1,*2

Restored Date
*1,*2

Restored Time
*1,*2

Checked Date
*1,*2

Checked Time
*1,*2

If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred date can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred time can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored date can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored time can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked date can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked time can be written into the device.

Level *1

If this item is selected, the touched alarm level number can be written into the device.

Group *1

If this item is selected, the touched alarm group number can be written into the device.

Frequency of
Occurrences *1
Cumulative Time
*1,*2

Down Time *1,*2

If this item is selected, the number of times the touched alarm occurred can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the cumulative time of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
If this item is selected, the down time of the touched alarm can be written into the device.

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which the alarm data can be written.

Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment group No., and
comment No.).
In addition, if the alarm is restored, "0" is written into the down time.

(2) Writable data according to the collection mode

The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Before setting

10 - 70

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

*2 Writing format of date and time

Date and time are written in word data of two words.
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)

(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.

D254

b8 b7

Month (1 to 12)

b15
D255

to

to

to

10
b0

Day (1 to 31)

b8 b7

to

ALARM

b15

b0

Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year

11

(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15

b8 b7

to

b0

b15
D257

to

b8 b7

00H

to

LEVEL

D256

to

Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)

b0

12

Hour (0 to 23)

b15
D254

to

b8 b7

07H
(Month)

b15

to

to b0
01H
(Day)

b8 b7

20H

D255

PANELMETER

Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

to

13

b0

04H

(Minute)

b15
D257

to
00H

b8 b7

to
56H

b0

(Second)

to

14

b0

12H
(Hour)

TREND GRAPH

b8 b7

15
BAR GRAPH

to
24H

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

b15
D256

LINE GRAPH

(Dominical year)

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 71

10.3.4

Relevant settings

The advanced user alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Set description

Notifying the status of access to the drive.*1

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b0, b1)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying the that the drive is short of capacity.*1

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b4, b5)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying that access to the drive failed.*1*2

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b7, b8)

[System Signal 2-2]

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

[System Signal 1-1]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

[system Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

Model

*1

The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full, however, operate
differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.

*2

The File access error reset signal (read device: System signal 1-2, b0) resets the Drive A/B file access error signal (write device:
System signal 2-2, b7, b8).

10.3.6 Precautions for use (8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function

Saving the data in the buffering area to a CF card *1

*1

Set description

GS520.b0

Only saved when [Save alarm log files] in the File Savetab is selected.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
10.3.2 Advanced User Alarm Observation (3) File save tab

10 - 72

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Model

This section explains some useful functions when using advanced user alarms.

Advanced user alarm observation

(1) Hierarchical alarm example
The figure below shows an example of the system in which alarms are hierarchized. The comment registration
required for the system and the application example are explained in this section.

Line1

Equipment B

10

Higher Alarm

Line2

Equipment A

COMMENT DISPLAY

Useful operations and functions

Equipment A

Middle Alarm

Equipment B

ALARM

10.3.5

11
Drive
module

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

General Alarm

Control
module

Setting example
Set comments that will be displayed at alarm occurrence for each hierarchy (Higher hierarchy, Middle hierarchy,
and General hierarchy) as shown below.

LEVEL

Power
module

12
PANELMETER

Settings in the Advanced User Alarm Observation dialog box (device tab)

LINE GRAPH

13

Higher Comment No.

Middle Comment No.

M10

ON

M11

ON

M12

ON

2 Drive module error

3 Control module error

1 Equipment A error
1 Equipment A error

1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error

4
5

M13
M14

ON
ON

1 Pwr. module error

2 Drive module error

2 Equipment B error
2 Equipment B error

1 Line1 error
1 Line1 error

Detail Type

1 Equipment A error

1 Line1 error

Reset

Detail No.

15

Level

Group

Comment Window

1 Hydraulic pressure error

YES

Base Screen
Window Screen

YES
YES

Comment Window

4 Low coolant water pressure YES

YES
5 Refill fuel

0
0

2
2

1
2

3
4
5

Comment Window

BAR GRAPH

General Comment No.

1 Pwr. module error

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Device Alarm Range

TREND GRAPH

14

10 - 73

(a) Alarm location refinement

The alarm information can be displayed ranging from summary to details in the hierarchical order.
Switching from higher hierarchy to middle hierarchy

Switching from middle hierarchy to general

Lower
hierarchy

(FFB8H)

Line1 error
Line2 error
Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

Lower
hierarchy

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Upper
hierarchy

Check

(FFC2H)
Switching from middle hierarchy to higher hierarchy
Display higher hierarchy alarms
(Alarm status in factory
line is displayed.)

10 - 74

(FFB8H)

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Upper
hierarchy

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Check

(FFC2H)
Switching from general to middle hierarchy

Display middle hierarchy alarms

(Alarm status in line 2 is displayed.)

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Pwr. module error

Control module error

Display general alarms

(The faulty module in system B
and the details are displayed.)

Operation

Description

Check

The time when the alarm occurrence was confirmed is recorded.

Delete

The history of restored alarms is cleared.

Line2 error

Line2

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Display middle
hierarchy alarms

Powe
module

Drive
module

Equipment B

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Display
general alarms

Touch Delete
(FFB6H)

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

12

Pwr. module error

Drive module error
Control module error

PANELMETER

Equipment A

11
Delete

LEVEL

Display higher
hierarchy alarms

Restored alarm
Occurred alarm

Display middle
hierarchy alarms

Delete

LINE GRAPH

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Equipment A

13

Line2 error

Display higher
hierarchy alarms

Line2

10

ALARM

When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for higher hierarchy alarms
A batch of alarms of the middle and general hierarchies, located below the higher hierarchy can be
operated.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Simultaneous execution of the operations of Check (FFB4H) and Delete (FFB6H) for multiple alarms
The following operations can be executed simultaneously for multiple alarms included in the lower
hierarchy.

Equipment B error

Equipment B

14
Powe
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Drive module error

TREND GRAPH

Control
module

A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.

15
BAR GRAPH

Drive
module

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Powe
module

Display
general alarms

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 75

 When operating Check (FFB4H) or Delete (FFB6H) for middle hierarchy alarms
A batch of general alarms located below the middle hierarchy can be operated.

Line2

Equipment A

Equipment B

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Display middle
hierarchy alarms

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Delete

Touch Delete

(FFB6H)
Power
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Display
general alarms

Pwr. module error

Drive module error
Control module error

Restored alarm
Posted alarm

Line2

Equipment A

Power
module

Drive
module

Equipment B

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Display middle
hierarchy alarms

Upper
hierarchy
Lower
hierarchy

Control
module

Display
general alarms

Delete

Drive module error

A batch of restored alarm

logs is cleared.

HINT
Reset operation
The reset operation of restoring an alarm manually (ON OFF/reset value) by the Reset (FFB9H) button is not
usable for a batch of alarms.
Perform reset operation when general alarms are displayed.
Comment
Occurred
04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error

Restore Check

04/06/01 12:35

Control module error

Reset

Control module error

(FFB9H)

Perform the reset operation for each alarm.

10 - 76

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Restore Check
13:00

Alarm Classification according to the level or group

Alarms can be classified according to the level or group.
The contents displayed at alarm occurrence can refined according to the level or type.
Example: Refine the alarms to be displayed by changing the switching device (level switching: D32, group
switching: D33).

10

Display in order of alarm occurrence

04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

14:25
12:25
09:40
07:35

Comment
Level
Hydraulic pressure error
1

Low coolant pressure

Oil refill
Little material remaining
Fuel refill

2
1
1
2

Group
1
1
2
2
2

Level
switching device
(D32)
0
Group
switching device
(D33)
0

ALARM

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51

11

Display level 1 alarms only

Comment
Level Group Level
switching device
Hydraulic pressure error
1
1
(D32)
1
Oil refill
Little material remaining

1
1

2
2

Group
switching device
(D33)
0

LEVEL

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 12:25
04/06/01 09:40

COMMENT DISPLAY

(c)

12
Display level 2 alarms only

04/06/01

09:40

Comment
Oil refill
Little material remaining

Level Group
1
2
1

Level
switching device
(D32)
1

PANELMETER

Occurred
04/06/01 12:25

Group
switching device
(D33)
2

13
LINE GRAPH

HINT
Switching device
Set the switching device by the advanced user alarm display function.
For details, refer to the following.

14

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display

TREND GRAPH

Example:

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 77

(2) Display example of general alarms (Detailed display)

General alarm's details such as causes or corrective actions can be displayed on another screen (comment
window, base screen or window screen).
Setting example

(a) Comment window

Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the comment window.
Example) Advanced alarm display
Oil pressure error.

Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25

Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Control module error

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01
16:13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01
15:51 Drive module error
04/06/01
10:25 Control module error

Base Screen1

Base Screen1

Comment Window

(b) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.
Example) Advanced alarm display
Tank A

Occurred
04/06/01 16:13
04/06/01 15:51
04/06/01 10:25

Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Control module error

Base Screen1

(c)

Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C

90

40

60

Run Stop

Run Stop

Run Stop

Base Screen5

Window screen
The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
Example) Advanced alarm display

Feed material from the

feed opening.
Feed opening
Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

16:13
15:51
10:25

Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
Control module error

Base Screen1

10 - 78

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Occurred Date
04/06/01 1 6: 13 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 15:51 Drive module error
04/06/01 10:25 Control module error

Base Screen1

Window Screen10

If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or almost
reaches the [Stored Number] on the [Basic] tab, the status can be notified using a device.
(a) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored and
confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be confirmed.

Occurring
number:

Confirm the historical number

and occurring number

Full
notification:

ALARM

1254

Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49

Temp. error

04/6/1 13:30:14

Fuse error

11

LEVEL

(b) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.
Issuing the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in [Full Notification Signal Device]
on the [Basic] tab.)
Selecting the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in [Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic]
tab.)

Historical
number:

1254

Occurring
number:

10

Full
notification:

12
PANELMETER

Historical
number:

COMMENT DISPLAY

(3) Action when buffer is full

13

Full notification
Temp. error

04/6/1 13:30:14

Fuse error

LINE GRAPH

Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49

14
TREND GRAPH

HINT
(1) Settings
For details, refer to the following.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

15

(2) Buffering area

For details, refer to the following.

BAR GRAPH

10.3.1 Before setting

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 79

(c)

Buffering size
The buffering size required for advanced user alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the user area (C drive + add-on memory) of the GOT, decreases. Adjust
buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the user area.
Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode

Historical
Cumulative
Only Current Alarm

Settings relevant to buffering area size

Number of device points set for the alarm ([Alarm Points] on the [Device] tab)
Total number of alarms saved ([Stored Number] on [Basic] tab)
Number of device points set for the alarm ([Alarm Points] on the [Device] tab)

Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced user alarms
The buffering area size for the alarm ID being set can be confirmed on the [Basic] tab.

Buffering Area Size

10 - 80

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

For advanced alarm display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods. However, the
display scope differs depending on the switching methods
Touch the advanced alarm display directly or switch the hierarchy by the touch switches
Use the device specified in [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching
method.

Equipment A

Drive
module

"Pwr. module error"

(group 1)

Equipment B

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Equipment A

Control
module

Power
module

Drive
module

Power
module

Control
module

"Control module error"

(group 3)

"Control module error"

(group 3)

Middle Alarm

Equipment B

Drive
module

"Pwr. module error"

(group 4)

Control
module

11

General Alarm

"Control module error"

(group 6)

: The alarm is occurring

12

(a) Switch alarm hierarchies by touching the advanced alarm display directly or using the touch switches.
Display the hierarchies below the selected alarm.
The following is the case that [Initial Display Hierarchy] on the [Alarm] tab is specified as higher alarms.

13

1)The alarm hierarchy specified for initial display

hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.
Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend

Restored

All higher alarms are displayed

Checked

Line1

Equipment A

Line2

Equipment B

LINE GRAPH

Occurred

Equipment B

2)Select an alarm to switch to middle alarms.

Occurred

Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend

Restored

PANELMETER

: No alarm (normal run)

Power

Checked

Control

Control

Power

Control

14
TREND GRAPH

Display scope
3)The middle alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Occurred

Comment

Restored Checked

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Equipment A

Power

Equipment B

Control

Control

15

4)Select an alarm to switch to general alarms.

Occurred

Comment

Restored Checked

BAR GRAPH

Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Display scope
5)The general alarm of the selected alarm are displayed.
Comment
Occurred
Restored Checked
04/06/01 14:25 Pwr. module error
12:25
04/06/01 12:10 Control module error

Power

Control

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Power
module

Higher Alarm

Line2

LEVEL

Line1

10

ALARM

(1) Switching alarm hierarchies

COMMENT DISPLAY

Advanced user alarm display

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 81

POINT
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being
displayed
If a new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while an alarm belonging to the higher/
middle hierarchy is being displayed, the new alarm is not displayed.

A specified scope is being displayed.

Occurred
Comment
Restored
04/06/01 14:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:10 Control module error

Display scope

Checked
12:25

Power

Control

Display scope
Occurred
Comment
Restored
04/06/01 14:25 Pwr. module error
04/06/01 12:10 Control module error

Checked
12:25

Power

The new alarm is not displayed!

Control

An alarm belonging to another

higher/middle hierarchy has occurred!

Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified hierarchy.
(2) Switching displays by device (set in [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.

10 - 82

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Displays all higher alarms

---

Comment
Line1 abend
Line2 abend

Restored Checked
-----

Line1

Equipment B

Equipment A

Power

Control

10

Line2

Control

Equipment B

Power

Control

ALARM

GD110

Occurred
---

Displays all middle alarms

11

Display scope
Occurred

GD110

----

----

Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error
Equipment B error

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy] in [Switching Device] on the Extended tab.
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device.
The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.

Restored Checked
----

----

Equipment B

Equipment A

Control

Control

Power

Control

LEVEL

Power

Equipment B

12

Displays all general alarms

Control

Control

Power

Control

13

POINT
(1) Switching method to the upper alarm hierarchy
To switch the hierarchy to the upper alarm hierarchy (general alarms
operate the touch switches for advanced alarm display.

middle alarms

higher alarms),

14

(6) Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display

(2) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm hierarchy as the initial display
hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are displayed with the vertical
hierarchies ignored.
Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 09:00
04/06/01 08:40

Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
Drive module error
12:25
11:20
Control module error
Control module error 11:00
09:20
Control module error 10:20
08:50

All the alarms belonging to the general hierarchy are displayed.

(3) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of the hierarchy being
displayed
When the advanced user alarms (alarm ID) to be displayed are switched or language switching is performed,
all the alarms of the hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy are displayed.

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

LINE GRAPH

Power

10 - 83

TREND GRAPH

Comment
Restored Checked
Pwr. module error
Control module error
12:25
11:00
Control module error
Pwr. module error
10:10
09:55
09:40
Control module error 10:20

15
BAR GRAPH

14:25
12:10
10:00
09:15
08:35

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

GD110

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

PANELMETER

Display scope

(2) Switching displays by device (set in [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)
Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
The display shown below is available. (

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)

Refined display of data by level, group, and alarm ID

Change the comments displayed according to the target user or purpose.
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and so on).
(a) Items to which a switching device can be set
Display alarm

Switching device setting usable

item

Advanced user alarm

Hierarchy*1

All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.

Level*1

Alarms at the specified level are displayed.

Group*1

Alarms of the specified group are displayed.

Priority Level Attribute

The display order is changed between ascending order and descending order.
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time, check date/time, comment No., level,
group, alarm status (occurred, checked, or restored), occurrence frequency, cumulative time, or
down time can be selected.

Advanced User Alarm

Observation

The setting of advanced user alarm observation (alarm ID) displayed by advanced alarm display
can be changed.
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced alarm display window.

General Comment Group

Middle Comment Group

The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be changed for each comment group.
The comment displayed can be changed according to the user or purpose.

Higher Comment Group

*1 The hierarchy, level, and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

10 - 84

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Assume that the alarms below occurred.

Select display
All levels
level
Select sort item Occurred

Major

Middle

Level

Alarm

Level
1
3
3
3
3
2
Minor

Switch the display depending on the level.

Major

Displays alarms at level 1 (D102: 1)

Middle

Displays alarms at level 2 (D102: 2)

Minor

Display alarms at level 3 (D102: 3)

Change items for sorting alarms.

Occurred
Level

Touch switch for switching the alarm display data

Alarm

Minor

Displays alarms in the order of occurrence

date (descending order) (D103: 1)
Displays alarms in the order of level
(descending order) (D103: 5)

"7" is written into D103

(2)

12

Only level 3 alarms are displayed.

Switching device
(priority level
attribute): D103

11

Displays alarms in the order of alarm status

(descending order) (D103: 7)

Alarm

"3" is written into D102.

(1)
Switching device
(level): D102

10

Displays all alarms (D102: 0)

All levels

ALARM

Comment
Status
Temp. error
Ocr.
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
Oil error
Rstr.
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
Rstr.
Fuse error

LEVEL

16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40

PANELMETER

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (level) is set to D102 and the switching device
(priority level attribute) to D103.

7
Alarm display is sorted
by alarm status.

13

16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40

Comment
Status Level
1
Temp. error
Ocr.
3
Ocr.
Motor error
Chk.
3
Oil error
Rstr.
3
Fuel error
Internal pressure error Rstr.
3
Rstr.
Fuse error
2

Comment

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10

Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error

Status Level
3
Ocr.
Chk.
3
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3

Only level 3 alarms are displayed.

Comment

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

14:25
10:00
08:10
11:20

Motor error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Oil error

Status Level
3
Ocr.
Rstr.
3
Rstr.
3
Chk.
3

Alarm display is sorted in the order of

alarm status (occur
restore
check).

POINT

15
BAR GRAPH

Changing the alarm sorting order by [Priority Level Attribute]

Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot be changed while higher alarms
or middle alarms are displayed.

14
TREND GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

LINE GRAPH

Display of general alarms

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 85

(3) Setting of display colors for each alarm status, level, and group
The advanced alarm display function allows visually identification of alarms by setting display colors for each
item as the following. (

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display)

Alarm status (occurrence, restore, and check)

Level
Group

Occurred

10 - 86

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Identifies alarm
status visually!

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely

(a) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)
A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.

Occurred

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

ALARM

Temp. error

10

Setting available for text color,

style, and kanji region!

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

11
(b) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the language
switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
LEVEL

(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting

Comment group settings

PANELMETER

12

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 11:35:52

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

04/6/1 09:45:30

04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

04/6/1 08:15:45

04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Japanese

English

15
BAR GRAPH

English

14

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Japanese

Language
switching device

Language switching
is available for the
table title since the
comment specified
in a comment
group can be used
for the table title!

Comment

TREND GRAPH

Occurred

LINE GRAPH

13

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 87

(5) Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
(a) Alarm data written into the device
Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (15 types).
Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Occurred Date

Occurred Time
Restored Date
Restored Time
Checked Date
Checked Time

Level
Group
Frequency of Occurrences
Cumulative Time
Down Time

(b) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm display are written.
D200: 0601H
D201: 2004H
Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10

Comment
Temp. error
Motor error

The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device.

POINT
Touch mode when data are written in the device
When writing alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab to [Selection] or [Operation].

10 - 88

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Touch switches for displaying advanced alarm can be read from the library of GT Designer3.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced alarm display.

COMMENT DISPLAY

(6) Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display

ALARM

10

11

Touch switches for advanced alarm display

Touch switch

Key code

Description

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

12

14:50

PANELMETER

15:10

14:50

Show the cursor!

13
(Continued to next page)
LINE GRAPH

FFB1H

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

14
TREND GRAPH

Hide cursor

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

15
BAR GRAPH

FFB0H

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Show cursor

LEVEL

Show/Hide the Cursor.

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 89

Touch switch

Key code

Description

If the cursor is hidden:

The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).

Move cursor upward

FFB2H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 13:54 Fuel error
Rstr.
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error Chk.
Ocr.
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error

Restored Checked
14:00
13:15

15:10

14:50

Move to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).

Move cursor downward

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

FFB3H

15:10

14:50

Move the cursor!

The alarm status is changed to "checked."

Display date/time of selected data (check)

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Ocr.

Restored Checked

FFB4H

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

FFB5H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Display date/time of all data (check all)

14:50

The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
Clear the selected alarm data (delete)
FFB6H

Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked
17:15

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

15:10

14:50

14:50

The restored alarm is deleted!

(Continued to next page)

10 - 90

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Key code

Description
If touched while general alarms are displayed, the detailed screen of the selected
alarms is displayed.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

COMMENT DISPLAY

Touch switch

10

Display detail

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

ALARM

Temp. error on power

module.
Check power module.

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

The detailed screen is displayed!

FFB8H

If touched while higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, alarms displayed are
switched to the lower hierarchy.
Occurred

Comment
Pwr. module error
Drive module error

Status
---

Restored Checked
---

---

LEVEL

---

11

Move to the lower hierarchy

12
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error

Status

Restored Checked

Ocr.
Ocr.

PANELMETER

Comment

The hierarchy is moved to the lower one!

The selected alarm is reset.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked
17:11

14:50

LINE GRAPH

15:10

13

Reset the selected alarm data*1

FFB9H

15:10

14

14:50

The selected alarm is reset!

The device value is changed to OFF status/reset value specified on the [Device]
tab.Resetting is performed only for general alarms.

(Continued to next page)

TREND GRAPH

Occurred

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 91

Touch switch

Key code

Description
Advanced alarm data are saved in the CF card as an alarm log file.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Save alarm contents to CF card

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

FFBBH

The data are saved into the CF card!

A device is automatically searched in specified program file by coil-search/defect
search, and the result is displayed on the ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder
jump function)
Specify the search mode and program file to be searched in the setting dialog box of the
Advanced User Alarm Observation.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Display ladder

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

FFBCH

M999
MOV 1 D1
MOV 2 D2

Displays the ladder monitor screen

(displays the ladder including the specified device)
The hierarchy of the alarms displayed is switched.
Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.

Restored Checked

Comment
Status
-Pwr. module error
-Drive module error

Restored Checked
-----

Move to the upper hierarchy

FFC2H
Occurred
---

The hierarchy is moved to the upper one!

For the details of *1 refer to the following.

*1 Resetting of advanced user alarms

To turn off or reset the device value by the touch switch, set [YES] for [Reset] in the [Device] tab of the [Advanced
User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

10 - 92

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

9
HINT
(1) Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status
The touch switches for advanced alarm display operate differently depending on the display status.
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).

10

ALARM

Display detail (FFB8H) / Move to the lower hierarchy (FFB8H)

This touch switch operates in 2 ways for a key code.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, the display is moved to the lower hierarchy.
When general alarms are displayed, details are displayed on the comment window.
(2) Operation method by directly touching Advanced Alarm Display
The following operations can be performed by setting [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab.

11

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display

The touched alarm is selected.

(2) Change of cursor color
The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor]
on the Table tab.

Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

12

The alarm is deselected by touching it

again.

PANELMETER

Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

LEVEL

Selection of an alarm (Set [Touch Mode] to [Selection])

Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)

10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display

Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

13
LINE GRAPH

Hierarchy switching and detail display of alarms (Set [Touch Mode] to [Operation])
Alarm hierarchies can be switched and detail screen can be displayed by touching the advanced alarm
display directly. (equivalent operation to displaying detail or moving to the lower hierarchy)
Occurredthe fuse ofComment Restored Checked
Change
04/06/01
16:51 Fuse error
the
power supply
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
module.

14
TREND GRAPH

When the selected alarm is touched again, display is moved

to the lower alarm hierarchy and detail screen is displayed.

(3) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor] on the [Style] tab.
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display

15

(4) Setting method of touch switches

For details, refer to the following.

BAR GRAPH

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 93

10.3.6

Precautions

This section explains the precautions for using the advanced user alarm.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be placed (set) on one screen.
Only one advanced user alarm display can be placed (set) on a base screen, an overlap window, or a
superimpose window, respectively.

(2) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device (set on the [Extended] tab) is specified for the following objects, the
objects may not be displayed on the specified initial display hierarchy.
Advanced User Alarm Display
Advanced Alarm Popup Display
This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching device when the
screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects above,
respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Example: When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)
Setting of advanced user alarm display
Hierarchy switching device : GD10
Initial display hierarchy
: General
Place on base screen 1

Setting of advanced alarm popup display

Hierarchy switching device : GD10
Initial display hierarchy
: Higher

Operations when base screen 1 is displayed

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

Occurred
--

-- Line 1 abend

-- Line 1 abend

Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)

Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)

2 (higher)
Different values are
written into the same device

10 - 94

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

Comment
Line 1 abend

Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device (specified on the [Extended] tab) is changed to 1 by
touching, mask the device value with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
Example: When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Corresponding comment No.

Comments displayed

General alarms being displayed.

Middle alarms being displayed.

Higher alarms being displayed.

(a) When masking is applied

11

Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.

Higher alarms being displayed

Occurred
-----

Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error

12

Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy

Touch!

Masking
1

AND

Middle alarms being displayed

Occurred
-----

Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Mask value (7FFFH)

13
LINE GRAPH

Value of hierarchy
switching device
1

14

The comment of comment No.1

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 1.

15
BAR GRAPH

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

LEVEL

PANELMETER

TREND GRAPH

10

ALARM

Value of hierarchy switching device

COMMENT DISPLAY

(3) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 95

(b) When masking is not applied

0

Comment
Line1 error
Line2 error

Touch!

Occurred
-----

Comment
Equipment A error
Equipment B error

Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.

Higher alarms being displayed

Occurred
-----

Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy
0

Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767

The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.

(4) Settings for saving advanced alarm data in the CF card.

To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.
(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the [File Save] tab described in the following to save the advanced alarm
data.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation
(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm display was
specified to save the data.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

(5) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the target text color
is set to Black with [Switching] on the [Text] tab. (Characters are hidden since the text color and the cursor color
are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to other than
Black.

10 - 96

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(6) Precautions for setting

(a) Setting number
The object setting size cannot exceed the GOT user area.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.
For computing method for the setting size of the advanced alarm display, refer to the following.

10

(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

For the free user area available for the GOT, refer to the following.

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer

(b) Saving a file
The CF card capacity must be larger than the size of the file to be saved.
For the file size of CF cards, refer to the following.

11

10.3.1 Before setting

When an inexistent value (column No.) is set at the language switching device, "No message" is displayed.

Precautions for use

12
PANELMETER

(1) If the same data exists in the CF card

Overwritten!

Save

Temp. error
Fuse error

Ocr.
Ocr.

04/06/01

Oil error

Ocr.

AAM00000.G1A

AAM00000.G1A
LINE GRAPH

Status

04/06/01
04/06/01

13

Save

14

Touch
Key code: FFBBH
or
store trigger device

The data in the CF card are overwritten. Therefore, to keep the data unchanged, move the data from the CF
card to the personal computer by either of the following methods.
Read out resource data by GT Designer3.

TREND GRAPH

Occurred Comment

LEVEL

(7) Precautions for using comment group

15

(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data

BAR GRAPH

Read out the CSV file saved in the CF card by a personal computer.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 97

(2) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file

While saving an alarm log file in the CF card, the observation of the advanced user alarm with the alarm ID
corresponding to the log file is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced user alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.
Example: When saving advanced user alarm data with alarm ID1

While saving an alarm log file to a CF card,

the observation of the advanced user alarm
with the alarm ID corresponding to the log
file is interrupted temporarily.

Saving...

Alarm ID1
GOT internal memory

Occurred
04/6/1 14:46:49
04/6/1 13:30:14

Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error

Alarm ID2
Buffering area

Save
Alarm ID3

(3) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced alarms to be saved as an alarm
log file (set on the [File Save] tab) are saved in the CF card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.

(4) When turning off from on the CF card access switch of the used drive
When turning off the CF card access switch while the CF card is ejected from the drive, the data in the CF card
are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the CF card from the drive until the following LED or signal turns off and the file saving is
completed.
CF card access LED on the used drive turns off
Drive status notification signal of the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and advanced
alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set in the [File Save] tab).

(5) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the CF card does not match with the project in the GOT, the file cannot be
read out from the CF card. (The alarm history before the GOT is powered off cannot be restored)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
[Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.

10 - 98

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed according to settings made in the
[Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic] tab.
Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.
Not collect advanced user alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set [Full Notification Signal Device] on the [Basic] tab, and clear the restored
alarm when the device turns on.

10

ALARM

10.3.1 Before setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

(6) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

Action When Buffer is Full

Full Notification Signal Device

11

(7) Error when the alarm log file is saved

LEVEL

If an error occurs when a file is saved, [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
Confirm the following.
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".
The CF card is full.
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification signal,
operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
Operation (difference)
Drive status notification signal

Difference between [Full Notification Signal

Device] set by advanced alarm observation and
drive status notification signal (system signal 22.b4, b5)

Turns on when the number of saved alarms

reaches the [Stored Number] set on the [Basic]
tab. (When the buffering area reserved for
advanced user alarms is full)

Turns on when the CF card is full.

Difference between [Writing Notification Device]

set by advanced alarm observation and drive
status notification signal (system signal 2-2.b0,
b1)

Turns on while advanced user alarm data are

written into the CF card.

Turns on when data are being written in the CF

card (also when data other than advanced user
alarms are being written)

14
Turns on when the CF card cannot be
accessed (for example, when the CF card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set to
"transfer prohibited").

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Difference between [Writing Error Notification

Device] set by advanced alarm observation and
drive status notification signal (system signal 22.b7, b8)

Turns on if an error occurs when the alarm

log file in the CF card is accessed (For
example, the project of the alarm log file in
the CF card does not match with the project
in GOT).
Turns on when the CF card cannot be
accessed (for example, when the CF card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set
to "transfer prohibited").

13
LINE GRAPH

Advanced alarm observation

TREND GRAPH

Item

PANELMETER

12

(8) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 99

(9) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting

(10) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.

For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

(11) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including MicrosoftExcel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer3.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

(12) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in advanced user
alarm observation, it may take a few minutes to display the data.
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions

(13) Priority of alarm display

(a) When the displayed alarms are not changed by the [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.

Comment

Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

(b) When the displayed alarms are changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.

(14) Display of the comment window and key window

When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
When try to open the detail display (comment
window display) while the key window is displayed.

7
4
1
0

Key window

8
5
2

9 AC
6 Del
3 +/Enter

04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error

04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35 Control module error

Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!

10 - 100

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

When setting the advanced alarm display on the called screen, do not set the advanced alarm display on the
base screen.
The called screen cannot display the advanced alarm display when the advanced alarm display is set on the
base screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY

(15) Advanced alarm display when using the set overlay screen function

10
Comment
Fuel error

Advanced alarm display

on called screen

Restored

Internal pressure error 16:10

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:27 Oil error

ALARM

Occurred
04/06/01 17:24
04/06/01 16:15

Restored

Advanced alarm display

on base screen

15:10

11

(Fundamentals) 9.2 Changing the Screen According to the Situation (Set Overlay Screen)

LEVEL

For settings of the set overlay screen, refer to the following.

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 101

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

When an error occurs in the GOT, controller or network, the advanced system alarm responding error code and message
are displayed.

POINT
Before setting advanced system alarms
This section explains the advanced system alarm observation and advanced system alarm display of the advanced
alarm function.
Read the following before setting the advanced system alarm observation and advanced system alarm display.
10.1.2 Advanced alarm function

Advanced Alarm Function

Advanced Alarm Settings
Advanced User
Alarm Observation

Advanced System
Alarm Observation

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

Advanced Alarm Display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

User

Advanced User
Alarm Display

10 - 102

Advanced System
Alarm Display

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Advanced user
alarm

System

Advanced
system alarm

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Before setting

This section describes the settings and functions needed for using the advanced system alarm.

Advanced system alarm observation

(1) Monitored alarm types and settings
(a) Alarm types
The following alarms can be monitored in the advanced system alarm.

10

ALARM

CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm.
GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm.
Network error : A network module error is displayed as an alarm.
The types of the system alarms monitored can be selected by the setting.
Because only particular alarm types can be displayed, alarm details can be observed quickly.

11

(b) Necessary settings to use advanced system alarms

To use advanced system alarms, select the [Use System Alarm] item and specify the target.
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

LEVEL

1) Check "Use System Alarm."

2) Check the target of monitoring.

12
In the advanced system alarm (advanced system alarm observation), set the types of the collected alarms
and the collection method.
Advanced System Alarms Observation

PANELMETER

10.4.1

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

Types of advanced system alarms monitored

Collection mode
Setting for history saving (alarms collected in the User
area)
Setting for the data retention of advanced system alarms
under power failure (saving on the memory card)

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 103

(2) Collection flow and collection mode

(a) Collection flow
CPU errors and network errors
CPU errors and network errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on
memory) in cycles of 3 seconds regardless of the displayed screen. (Watch cycle cannot be changed.)
In the buffering area, collected advanced system alarm data are temporarily saved as historical data,
and they are displayed on the GOT as alarms.
Alarm data are collected into the buffering area every 3 s,
regardless of whether the screen is displayed or hidden.
User area
(C drive + add-on memory)
Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confirm c
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa

Buffering area

Displays advanced system alarm

data collected into the buffering
area as alarms.

GOT errors
GOT errors are collected into the buffering area of the user area (C drive + add-on memory) when an
alarm occurs.

HINT
(1) Deletion of data in the buffering area
For details, refer to the following.
(3) Alarm restoration
(2) Data to be collected in the buffering area
Data to be collected differ depending on the history collection mode.

10 - 104

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Alarm collection modes

The history collection mode is selected from two options: historical and only current alarm.
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings)

Information to be collected varies depending on the collection mode as follows.

Example: When displaying data by advanced alarm display
Occurred

Message

04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10

402 Communication timeout. Confirm

70 Battery voltage low or equipment f
803 Transident error

2)

Ocr.
Chk.
Chk.

16:30

18:50
16:20

3)

4)

5)
ALARM

1)

10

Status Restore Check

2) Comment

Historical

Only Current Alarm

The date/time of the alarm occurrence is displayed.

An error code and an alarm message are displayed when an alarm occurs.
For error codes and corrective actions, refer to the following.
LEVEL

1) Occurred

11

Description

User's Manual for the GOT used

Alarm messages registered in GOT in advance are displayed.
The status of the alarm is displayed.
Ocr. : Alarm has occurred (Not checked yet)
Chk. : Alarm occurrence has been checked
Rstr. : Alarm has been restored

4) Restore

The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

12
PANELMETER

3) Alarm status

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.

Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

13

5) Check
Message
Restore Check
402 Communication timeout. Confirm

Check

Message
Restore Check
19:00
402 Communication timeout. Confirm

(Key code: FFB4H or FFB5H)

14
TREND GRAPH

Historical
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs.
(The data are added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
Up to 32767 alarm logs can be saved.

LINE GRAPH

Info. displayed

Only current alarm

In this mode, the latest alarms only are displayed.

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 105

(c)

Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of advanced alarm display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
Alarm
occurred

"402 Communication timeout.

Confirm communication
pathway or modules."

Alarm
occurred
Restoration*2

Alarm
occurred

"500 Warning! Built-in battery

voltage is low."
11:30
1)

12:00
2)
Alarm checked
by user*1

15:30
3)

16:00
18:25
4)
5)
Alarm resetting
by user*2

*1

Alarms are checked with the touch switch for confirmation. (

*2

For the GOT error, the alarm status is not changed to "Restored" even when the cause of the alarm is eliminated. (
Alarm restoration)

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions)

Historical
The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

2) "Communication timeout" is checked.

Occurred
Occurrence
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

Restore Check

"Communication
timeout" occurs!

Restore Check
12:00

"Communication
timeout" is
checked.
Check
(Key code: FFB4H)

3) Restored from "Communication timeout"

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

Restore Check
12:00

4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

Restore Check
16:00
12:00

"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.
"The alarm is
reset".
Reset
(Key code: FFB9H)

5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25

10 - 106

Message

Status

Restore Check

402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.

402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

16:00

12:00

The alarm status

is changed to
"Restored" on the
GOT and the
restored time is
displayed.
A new line
is added and
displayed.

(3)

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Only current alarm

Only the latest alarms of GOT errors, CPU errors, and network errors are displayed.
The historical data of the cleared alarms are not stored.
Not collected in the only
current alarm mode.
1) "Communication timeout" occurs.
Occurred
Message
Status Restore Check
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

"Communication
timeout" occurs!

10

Occurred
Message
Status Restore Check
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
12:00
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

ALARM

2) "Communication timeout" is checked.

"Communication
timeout" is checked

11

Check
(Key code: FFB4H)

4) The alarm is reset.

Occurred
Message
Status Restore Check
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

"Restoration" is
not indicated in
the alarm status
on the GOT.

LEVEL

Occurred
Message
Status Restore Check
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Co Chk.
12:00
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

12
PANELMETER

3) Restored from "Communication timeout"

Data are deleted

when the alarm
status is changed
to "Restored."

13

5) The restored "Communication timeout" occurred again.

The generated
alarm is displayed.

LINE GRAPH

Occurred
Message
Status Restore Check
04/06/01 18:25 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.
04/06/01 10:25 500 Warning! Built-in battery volt Ocr.

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 107

(3) Alarm restoration

The following shows how to change the alarm status of each error to "Restored".
(a) CPU error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the CPU error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a CPU error will
be changed to "Restored".
When using the multi-channel function, all alarm statuses will be changed to "Restored" by eliminating
causes of alarms of all channels.
(b) Network error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the network error.
By eliminating all causes of the alarm, the alarm status of the advanced system alarm by a network error
will be changed to "Restored".
(c)

GOT error
Eliminate all causes of the alarm of the GOT error.
The alarm status of a GOT error will not be changed to "Restored". Perform either of the following
operations.

Cause
eliminated

Error
occurred

Occurred

Message

Status

04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Co Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equipm Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error

Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.

Ocr.

The display on the GOT shows alarm

occurrences even if the alarm causes
on the GOT, controller and network
are eliminated.

Change the selected alarm status to "Restored" (using the system information)
Change the selected alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored" by the touch switch (key code: FFB9H).
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr.

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.

Reset

04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr.

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr.

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

Ocr.

Ocr.

(Key code: FFB9H)

Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored"

Turn ON the GOT error reset signal (System Signal 1-1.b13) of the system information to change all the
GOT error alarm statuses from "Occurred" to "Restored".
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Ocr.

Reset

04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Ocr.

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.

Ocr.

04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

Rstr.

(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)

Changing all the GOT error alarm statuses to "Restored" (using the utility)
At the system alarm display of the utility, change all the GOT error alarm statuses from "Occurred" to
"Restored".
User's Manual for the GOT used

10 - 108

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

The "Restored" status alarms can be cleared from the history.

To clear alarm data, perform either of the following operations.
(a) Clear by device
Turning on the device set for [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device] clears all the "Restored" alarm data.
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings
Occurred

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 11:30 402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.

Message

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

Status

COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) Clearing alarm data

10

Ocr.

Delete

04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.

Ocr.

04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

ALARM

Turn on "Buffer Clear"

(b) Clear by touch switch

By using a touch switch, one or all the "Restored" alarm data are cleared.

11

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

Message
Status
402 Communication timeout. Confirm Rstr.
70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.
803 Transient error
Ocr.

Delete

Occurred
Message
Status
04/06/01 10:25 70 Battery voltage low or equipment fa Rstr.
Ocr.
04/06/01 09:10 803 Transient error

LEVEL

Occurred
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25
04/06/01 09:10

(Key code: Clear one FFB6H

Clear all FFB7H)

POINT
(1) Before changing the alarm status of a GOT error from "Occurred" to "Restored"
Eliminate the alarm causes of the GOT error.
If the alarm status of a GOT error is changed from "Occurred" to "Restored" without eliminating the alarm
cause, the same alarm will occur again.
Example) When the alarm is reset while "460 Communication unit error" is occurring

Reset
Occurred

Message

04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error

04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error

Occurred

Message

LINE GRAPH

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.

14

Reset the alarms

(Turn on system signal 1-1.b13)
Status
Rstr.
Rstr.

TREND GRAPH

Message

04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error

04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error

13

All the alarms are

changed to the status
of "Restored."

15

Status

04/06/01 12:00 460 Communication unit error

04/06/01 11:30 803 Transient error

Ocr.
Rstr.

04/06/01 10:25 460 Communication unit error

Rstr.

The same alarm occurs

after resetting.
Displays the date and
time where the alarm is
detected again after it
is reset.

BAR GRAPH

Occurred

PANELMETER

12

(2) Clearable alarms on the GOT

Only the "Restored" status alarms can be cleared.
When clearing an alarm, change the alarm status from "Occurred" to "Restored".

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 109

HINT
Clearing alarm data
The following methods can also be used for clearing alarm data.
Powering off or resetting the GOT
Powering off or resetting the GOT deletes the alarm data.
However, if the advanced system alarm data are saved on the CF card, the data can be retained even if the
GOT is powered off.
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions
When the following settings are made within utilities
Item
Communication
setting
GOT setup

Description
[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]
Display

[Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]

Operation

[Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]

Program/data control

OS and project writing

Debug & self check

Self check

Main menu

Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button

[I/O check]

OS and project writing, drive information delete and drive format

10 - 110

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

(a) Data retention under power failure

By saving advanced system alarm data in the CF card as an alarm log file, the data are retained even when
GOT is powered off.
When GOT is turned on, if an alarm log file is saved in the CF card, the alarm log file is read out
automatically, and the historical status of the advanced system alarm saved before GOT power-off is
restored.

Data
are
stored

10

The timing of saving data in the CF card can be set freely.

(Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, and OFF Sampling).
Data can also be saved by pressing the touch switch.

402 Com...
70 Batt...

402 Com...
70 Batt...
803 Tran...
500 Warn...

ALARM

CF card

COMMENT DISPLAY

(5) Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure

The status saved

before power-off

11

Current status

Power on

Power off

(b) Status observation during writing

Status while advanced system alarm data are written and the presence/absence of write error can be
monitored using the device.

LEVEL

The status saved before the power-off

and the current status are displayed.

12
PANELMETER

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

Writing

Occurred

LINE GRAPH

13

Comment

14

Writing

Write error

TREND GRAPH

04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir

04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipmen

Save

15
BAR GRAPH

Status during writing can be monitored.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 111

(c)

File name and saving timing

Any file name can be given. (

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings)

In addition, trigger for saving the file (rise, fall and so on) can be set.
(d) Method of data retention under power failure
Retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure is performed by either of the following
methods. The file names and so forth need to be set on the File Save tab in advance.
Save by the store trigger device (
Save by the touch switch (

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings)

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions)

Save by the buffer flash forced save signal (GS520.b0) (

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported

Devices)
(e) Required memory capacity
For the memory capacity required for retention of advanced system alarm data under power failure, refer to
the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

HINT
(1) Information to be saved
The alarm log file content to be saved in the CF card varies depending on the collection mode.
10.4.1 Before setting
(2) Utilization of the alarm log file saved in the CF card
After advanced user alarm data is stored as an alarm log file in the CF card, the file can be utilized as follows.
User's Manual for the GOT used
The history of advanced system alarms can be displayed as a historical graph.
For a display on personal computer, the alarm log file can be converted to CSV file/Unicode text file with
GOT utility or Convert Trigger.
Data are stored in the CSV/text file in the order of alarm occurrence.
(3) Backup of the alarm log file
By checking [Auto Backup at Save] on the [File Save] tab, the alarm log file just before saved can be saved as
a backup file.
For details, refer to the following.
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

10 - 112

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

The alarm log files created with the advanced system alarm are binary files (*.G1A).
Convert alarm log files to Unicode text files or CSV files for displaying and editing the files on a personal
computer.
The following explains how to convert alarm log files.
(a) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with utility.
Convert binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to Unicode text files or CSV files with the utility.

10

Select a file in the G1A format in [Alarm information] of the utility, and touch G1A->CSV or
G1A->TXT button for converting the file.

ALARM

1.

COMMENT DISPLAY

(6) Converting alarm log files

LEVEL

11

Store the converted Unicode text file/CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
Transferring files with GT Designer3
The resource data is read from the GOT. For the procedure, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data
Storing files in CF card or USB memory
Save alarm log files in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB
memory using the personal computer.

13
LINE GRAPH

2.

PANELMETER

12

Alarm log file

CF card/
USB memory

Alarm log file

15
Display and edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.
BAR GRAPH

3.

CF card/
USB memory

TREND GRAPH

14

POINT
How to operate utility
Refer to the following manual for the details.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

User's Manual for the GOT used

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 113

(b) How to create Unicode text files or CSV files with device.
Convert the binary files (*.G1A) saved in a CF card to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the
specified device.
When converting the files to Unicode text files or CSV files, the following settings are required.
After setting the following, convert the files to Unicode text files or CSV files with turning on the convert
trigger device.
Advanced Alarm Common
File conversion (the File Save tab in the Advanced User Alarm Observation screen)
10.2 Advanced Alarm Common
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

POINT
Precautions for file conversion with external control device
Before converting an alarm log file, write the ID for the advanced system alarm observation that creates a file to be
converted into the alarm ID device. (For the advanced system alarm observation: 0)
Even though the convert trigger device is turned on before writing the ID for the advanced system alarm
observation, the alarm log file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.

(7) Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
Refer to the following manual for the details.
User's Manual for the GOT used

10 - 114

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Advanced system alarm display settings

(1) Method of displaying alarm
(a) Types of alarm displayed
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
Select the alarms to display from the two types of alarms below.
All alarms
: Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is displayed.
Occurring alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.

04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58

(Restored)

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Light error

--

--

-12:05
-10:14
09:45

12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15

In case of [All alarms]

Internal pressure error

Light error

10:14
09:45

12:25
11:50
10:55
09:48
09:15

Alarm history including the alarms occurred in the past is

displayed.

Restored Checked

12

12:25
10:55

The alarms of oil error, internal pressure error and light

error are deleted because these alarms have been restored.

(b) Comment display methods

The display methods below can be selected. (

10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting)

Fixed
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a line.
Flow
When an alarm occurs, the comment is displayed in a flow from right to left. If display the comment by
flowing it, the whole comment which is longer than the display width or a comment in multiple lines can
be displayed.

PANELMETER

12:05

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 12:10 Temp. error
04/06/01 11:45 Fuse error
04/06/01 10:47 Fuel error

LEVEL

In case of [Occurring alarm]

Restored Checked

Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error

11

13
LINE GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:47
04/06/01 09:30
04/06/01 08:58

(Checked)
ALARM

Alarm status
(Comment)

(Occurred)

10

14

1)Comment No.1 (comment group)

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

Comment
Pwr. module
Check oil pre
Motor error

Restored Checked

Pwr. module temp. error.

12:05

12:25
11:50

Displayed as a flow from right to left.

Check fuse.

Comment over
multiple lines

2)Comment No.2 (comment group)

15

Check oil pressure.

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

error. Check
Check
Motor

3)Comment No.3 (comment group)

BAR GRAPH

Comment Restored Checked

temp. error.
12:25
ssure.
12:05
11:50
error

Motor error

Restored Checked

12:05

16

12:25
11:50

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01 12:10
04/06/01 11:45
04/06/01 11:30

TREND GRAPH

Comment contents displayed

A comment over multiple lines is displayed on and after the second line as well.

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 115

(c)

Alarm display order

Set the order for displaying alarms as follows:

1.

Specify an item for sorting the alarm display.

The alarm display is sorted according to the specified item.
Display example) Display alarms in the order of occurrence date/time from the latest
Sort in the descending order of occurrence date/time
Occurred
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 13:30

Comment
Pwr. module error
Oil pressure error
Drive module error
Motor error
Light error

Status
Ocr
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.

Restored
--16:30
15:00
14:30

Checked
-18:50
16:20
14:10
13:50

Setting example) Specify the settings on the [Display] tab as follows.

Items displayed by the advanced

alarm display function

Select an item for sort

(Occurred).

10 - 116

Select a display order

(descending or ascending).

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

By setting the [Switching Device], the item for sorting the alarm display can be changed.
For details of [Switching Device], refer to the following.

COMMENT DISPLAY

2.

10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting

Display example) Sort alarms in the descending order of occurrence frequency
Change the item for sorting to the occurrence frequency (descending order).

10
Comment
Drive module error
Motor error
Oil pressure error
Pwr. module error
Light error

Status
Chk.
Chk.
Chk.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored
16:30
15:00
--14:30

Checked
16:20
14:10
18:50
-13:50

ALARM

Occurred
04/06/01 16:10
04/06/01 14:00
04/06/01 18:30
04/06/01 20:00
04/06/01 13:30

11

Setting example) Set the items on the [Extended] tab as follows.

Switching device
9

LEVEL

D100

The sort condition can be changed by the value

of the switching device (Priority Level Attribute).

12

: Not specify (sort by occurrence date/time)

: Occurrence date/time
: Restoration date/time
: Check date/time
: Comment (displayed comment No.)
: Level
: Group
: Alarm Status
(Ascending:check
restore occur)
(Descending:occur
restore check)
9 : Occurred Frequency
10 : Cumulative Time
11 : Down Time

PANELMETER

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

LINE GRAPH

13

Display order when the Sort on the Attribute tab and the switching device are specified at the same time
If both [Display Order] on the [Display] tab and [Priority Display Attribute] in [Switching Device] on the [Extended]
tab are set, the data are displayed in the order specified in [Priority Display Attribute].

TREND GRAPH

14

POINT

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 117

(2) Operations by touch switches

Various operations are usable for displayed alarms by the touch switches for advanced system alarm display.
These touch switches can be arranged easily by the library.

Touch switches for advanced alarm display

HINT
Details of the touch switches for advanced alarm display
For details, refer to the following.
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

10 - 118

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Advanced system alarm observation settings

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.4.2

Advanced Alarm Common

10

For setting items of the Advanced Alarm Common dialog box, refer to the following.
10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

Select [Common]
box.

[Alarm]

[Advanced System Alarm Observation] from the menu to display the setting dialog

(1) Basic tab

11

LEVEL

Set the types of the advanced system alarms monitored, the collection mode, and the buffering details for saving
historical data.

ALARM

Advanced System Alarm Observation

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

Model

Set whether to enable the advanced system alarm function or not.

Select the system alarms to be observed. (CPU error, GOT error, and network error)

Target

10.4.1 Before setting

15

Select a method for handling advanced system alarms.

10.4.1 Before setting

Basic

History Number
Storage

Historical

: Data of advanced system alarms are collected as history.

Historical data is added every time an advanced system alarm occurs.
Only Current Alarm : Only the latest alarms of GOT error, CPU error, and network error are
collected. When advanced system alarm statuses are changed to
"Restored" on GOT, they are deleted.

BAR GRAPH

Collection Mode

14

Select this item to store the total number of advanced system alarms in the word device.
The number of total alarm logs corresponds to the number of the alarms in all the status of
occurrence, check, and restoration.
This item is available when [Historical] is selected in [Collection Mode].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing the number.

16

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to the next page)

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 119

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Use System
Alarm

Description

TREND GRAPH

Item

Item

Basic

Description

Generated Number
Storage

When this item is selected, the number of advanced system alarms whose alarm status is
"Occurred" is stored in the word device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device for storing the number.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Make buffering settings for saving the collected advanced system alarms.
This item can be set when [Historical] is selected in .
10.4.1 Before setting
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions
Stored Number

Set the number of advanced system alarms to be saved. (512 to 32767)

Buffering size increases according to the number of alarms stored.
Select the operation performed when the number of advanced system alarms stored in the
buffering area reaches the [Stored Number].

Action When Buffer

is Full

Delete old data

Add no item

Full Notification
Signal Device

: The oldest advanced system alarm is deleted from those of in the restored
status, and new alarm data are added.
: The collection of advanced system alarms is stopped. Even if a new
advanced system alarm occurs, it is not collected.

Select this item to turn on the device to alert buffer full outside when the number of storable
advanced system alarms becomes lower than the number set in [Notification Number].
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Full Notification Signal Device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Buffering

Notification
Number

Set the timing for issuing an alert outside when the free space of the buffering area becomes
small (No. of storable advanced system alarms: 0 to 255).
This item can be set only when [Full Notification Signal Device] is selected.
When the number of storable advanced system alarms is equal to or less than the number set in
[Notification Number], the [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.
Example : Setting [Stored Number:1000] and [Notification Number:10]
The [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on when the number of total saved
advanced system alarms is 990 or more.

Buffering Data
Clear Trigger
Device

Buffering Data
Clear Completion
Signal Device

Select this item to delete the restored advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area by the
device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Trigger Device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Select this item to set the device for notifying of the completion of buffer clear.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the Buffering Data Clear Completion Signal
Device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This item can be set only when [Buffering Data Clear Trigger Devicer] is selected.

10 - 120

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) File Save tab

Make the settings to save the alarm history, which is saved in the buffering area, in the CF card.
10.4.1 Before setting

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Item

Folder Name*1

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.

Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{} \) can be used.
By default, the [Project Folder] from [Common]
[GOT Type Setting] is preset.

File Name*1

Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
By default, the file name is set to AAM00000.

Trigger Type
Store Trigger

Writing
Notification
Device

PANELMETER

14

Select a timing at which the advanced system alarms saved in the buffering area are stored to
the CF card.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in minutes (1
to1440 minutes)
Rise
Fall

Device

13
LINE GRAPH

The destination drive is displayed. (A: Standard CF Card / B: Extended Memory Card)

TREND GRAPH

File Access

Drive Name

Sampling
OFF Sampling
ON Sampling

Specify the store trigger device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

15

Set a device to notify that the alarm log file is being written.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to the next page)

BAR GRAPH

files*2

Model

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Save alarm log

Description
When this item is selected, the advanced system alarm history saved in the buffering area is written to the CF card as
an alarm log file.
The data are written to the CF card as a binary format file. (*.G1A)
This item can be selected only when [Historical] is selected in [Collection Mode].

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 121

Item

Description
Set a device to notify of an error when data writing in the alarm log file fails.

Writing Error
Notification
Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the error is restored.

Auto Backup at
Save*2

Model

When an alarm log file is saved, the file just before saving can be saved as a backup file.
For backup file name, add an extension called ".BAK" to the end of the original file name. (The BAK file is not
displayed on the GOT utility.)
Example: AAM00000.G1A
AAM00000.G1A.BAK
Make setting to convert a file.
When setting [File Convert], the [ Advanced Alarm Common] must be set.
Click the [Advanced Alarm Common Setting] button and make the settings in the [Advanced Alarm Common Setting]
dialog box.

File Convert*3

Conversion
Format

Select a file format after conversion. (Unicode Text/CSV)

Add date
information to file
name

This item is available only when [Change Save Path] is selected.

Select this item to add date information to the converted file name.

Destination

Select this item to change the save destination of the converted file.
After selecting this item, select the drive and folder where the file is to be stored.

*1 For details, refer to the following.

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT
For details of *2 to *3, refer to the following.

*2 Operations when an error occurs in the alarm log file

When the alarm log file is read out (when the GOT is powered on), if the alarm log file is in one of the following status,
system alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects." occurs.
In this case, reading out of the alarm log file is cancelled.
When the alarm log file is broken
When the alarm log file was saved in a different project
If a backup file exists (select ([Auto Backup at Save]), the backup file is read out. (In this case, no system alarm
occurs.)

*3 Advanced Alarm Common

To control alarm log file conversion, setting Advanced Alarm Common is required.
For setting items of Advanced Alarm Common, refer to the following.
10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

10 - 122

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Advanced system alarm display setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.4.3

1.

Select [Ocject]

2.

Click the position where the advanced system alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged advanced system alarm display to display the setting dialog box.

[Alarm Display]

[Advanced System Alarm Display] from the menu.

10

Alarm tab
ALARM

Set the types of the advanced alarm observation displayed (advanced user alarm / advanced system alarm),
message display method and operations when the screen is touched.

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Item

Display Alarm

Description

Model

Select a type of the advanced alarms displayed by the advanced alarm display function. (User Alarm / System Alarm)
[System Alarm] is selected because this section explains the system alarm display.
Click the [Edit] button to display the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.

LINE GRAPH

13

14

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

10.4.1 Before setting

All Alarm
: Alarm history including all the alarms generated in the past is displayed.
Generating Alarm : Only the alarms occurring at present are displayed.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm

15

10.4.1 Before setting

Speed

BAR GRAPH

Display Type

Fixed : Displays the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs in a line.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the comment
is not displayed.
Flow Z: Displays the comment flowing it from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment in multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting this item, select a speed to display the comment as a flow in [Speed].
When selecting [Display Type] to [Flow], select a speed for flowing display.
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per
second.
Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per
second.
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per
Low
second.

16

(Continued to next page)

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 123

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Display Target
Status

TREND GRAPH

Select how to display collected alarms.

Item

Touch Mode

Description

Model

Select the operation when the advanced system alarm display is touched.
None
: No operation even when touched.
Selection : The touched alarm is selected.
Operation : Alarm hierarchies are switched or the detailed screen is displayed for the touched alarm.
(This item can be selected for advanced user alarms only.)
Operations differ depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When higher/middle alarm is displayed : The alarm hierarchy is switched to the lower one.
When general alarms are displayed
: The touched alarm is selected.
When touching the selected alarm again, the detailed screen
is displayed.
Set the number of rows displayed on a screen (1 to 27).
Example) When setting the number of rows to 3

Number of
Rows

Occurred

Comment

04/11/05 10:25

Temp. error

11:25

10:45

04/11/05 12:05

Fuel error

12:25

12:28

04/11/06 08:30

Motor error

09:45

09:40

Restored Checked

Number of rows
(not including the title row)

Select which alarm is displayed in the top row when the number of alarms exceeds the number of rows set in [Number of
Rows].
When the number of alarms exceeds the value set for [Display Start Row].
The alarm corresponding to the value row number set in [Display Start Row] is displayed in the top row.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 2, and the number of alarms is 5.

Alarm occurrence

Display order
of alarms

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Fuse error
04/06/01 16:51 Oil error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuel error

Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the number

specified on "Display Head Row."
When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Display Start Row].
The last alarm is displayed in the bottom row.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 10, and the number of alarms is 5.
Display Start

Alarm occurrence

Row*1

Display order
of alarms

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Comment
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error

Alarms are displayed based on the alarm of the bottom row.

When the number of alarms is less than the value set for [Number of Rows].
The setting for [Display Start Row] becomes invalid, and all the alarms are displayed.
Example: When [Number of Rows] is set to 3, [Display Start Row] is set to 3 and the number of alarms is 5.

Alarm occurrence

Display order
of alarms

1. Temp. error
2. Fuse error

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:00 Temp error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error

Displays all occurred alarms.

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Alarm] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
Click this item to display the PDF manual related to the advanced system alarm display.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

10 - 124

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

If the number of alarms becomes higher than the number s set to [Display Start Row] while the advanced system alarm
is displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the advanced system alarm
displays screen.

HINT

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Display Start Row

10

LEVEL

Screen 3
(Display Head Row: 7)

12
PANELMETER

7th
8th
9th

11
Screen 2
(Display Head Row: 4)

13
LINE GRAPH

4th
5th
6th

Screen 1
(Display Head Row: 1)

14
TREND GRAPH

1st
2nd
3rd

15
BAR GRAPH

1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Alarm occurred number

ALARM

Application example of Display Start Row

If different [Display Start Row] are set on screens, different advanced alarm display can be displayed for each
screen.

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 125

 Display tab
Set the data displayed for alarms (contents and display order).

Item

Description

Model

Select a setting method of the characters displayed on the title.

Direct

Title

Comment

Select this item to enter characters displayed on the title from [Title].
Select this item to display characters displayed on the title in the comment of comment group.
After the selection, set the group No.
Group No.
: Set the comment group where characters displayed on the title has been
registered.
Adjust Text Size : Select this item to perform Adjust Text Size.
If this item is not selected, a new line is automatically started, and the
character string is adjusted.
After the check, set the minimum character size for Adjust Text Size.
(8 to 128 dots)
(Fundamentals) 5.2.7 Changing size of figures/objects

Hide

Select this item to hide the title.

(Continued to next page)

10 - 126

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Item

Description
Set the items displayed for the advanced system alarm display.
"Occurred"

"Status"
"Comment"

Occurred

Comment

"Checked"

"Restored"

"Down Time"

"Group"

10

Status Restored Checked OccurFreq Cum.Time Down Time Level Group

-04/06/01 20:00 Oil pressure error Chk.

Chk.
-04/06/01 18:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:10 Oil pressure error Rstr. 16:30

Attribute

"Level"

"Cum.Time"

"OccurFreq"

-18:50
16:20

1
2
2

--00:40

--00:20

1
1
2

2
1
1

ALARM

Occurred : Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.

Comment : Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
Status
: Select when displaying alarm status.
The alarm status is displayed as follows.
Ocr. : An alarm is occurring
Rstr. : The alarm is restored
Chk. : Alarm occurrence is checked
Restored : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
Checked : Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the alarm
was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is
displayed.

11

LEVEL

Display

Model

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

Contents

Checked

Check

Comment Restored
Motor error

12

Checked
12:00

PANELMETER

Comment Restored
Motor error

(Key code : FFB4H)

Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.
Example: When the message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25

Restored
11:25

13

Checked
10:45

Displayed in a width of 12 digits

LINE GRAPH

Width

Comment
Motor error

The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Occurred : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Comment : 10 to 80 digits
Status
: 6 to 80 digits
Restored : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].
Checked : The item is set automatically based on the setting of [Date/Time Format].

TREND GRAPH

Set the display for date and time when alarm occurs (Occurred / Restored / Checked).
(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

Date/Time Format

14

Set the characters of the title of advanced system alarm display.

When [Direct] is selected in [Title]
: The number of characters set in [Width] can be input.
When [Comment] is selected in [Title] : Set the comment No. (comment group) or content of the
displayed comment.
When [Hide] is selected in [Title]
: The [Title] cannot be set.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Title

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 127

Item

Description
Set the display order for the advanced system alarm display.
The items of [Contents] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select the item to change the order and set the order with the
and
buttons.
Example: When [Occurred], [Comment], [Checked], and [Cum.Time] are selected in [Display].

Display Order

The items selected in [Display]

are reflected.

Select an item and method to sort alarm display.

The items of [Attribute] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select one of the following 2 methods.
Ascending : Each value of the item is sorted in ascending order.
Descending : Each value of the item is sorted in descending order.
Sort

When selecting [Date/Time Format] for the item to be sorted, the items are sorted as follows.
Ascending : Old

New

Descending: New

Old

For the details of the method for sorting alarms, refer to the following.
10.4.1 Before setting

10 - 128

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

Preview area

ALARM

10

11
Description

Preview area

The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

Contents

Select a display type of date and time.

Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time
Date
Time

LEVEL

Item

12

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/9/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 9/1/09) dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/9/09)
Select asorting type of date.
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a
week.
The display examples below show the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort] and [/] for [Delimiter].

Type
Date Setting

Delimiter

Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
/ (Example: 09/9/1) - (Example: 09-9-1)
. (Example: 09.9.1)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example: To display September 1, 2009
Selected
: 09/09/01
Not selected : 09/9/1

14

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time] for [Contents], set the following items.
Type

Select the display type of time.

Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10:1
10:1:27
10:1(AM)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example) To display 1 past 10
Selected
: 10:1
Not selected : 10:01

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Time Setting

13
LINE GRAPH

09/9/1
Sep/1
SEP/1
Sep/1(WED)
SEP/1(WED)
09/Sep/1
09/SEP/1
09/Sep/1(WED)
09/SEP/1(WED)
2009/Sep/1
2009/SEP/1
2009/Sep/1(WED)
2009/SEP/1(WED)

TREND GRAPH

Sort

PANELMETER

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 129

 Text tab
Set the font to display the alarm.

Item

Font

Description

Model

Select a font for the text to be displayed.

12dot Standard
16dot Standard
12dot HQ Mincho
12dot HQ Gothic
Stroke
If high quality font is set for the advanced system alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Text Size

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Set the format of characters displayed on the title of advanced system alarm display.
Text Color

Select a color for the text to be displayed.

Select a display format to the text.

Style

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid Color

Select a color of the shadow when the [Style] is set to

button or

button.

Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.

Title Format

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

KANJI Region

Japan
: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.
China (GB) - Mincho : Displays simplified Chinese characters.
China (Big5)-Gothic : Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"

Japan

China (GB) -Mincho

(Continued to next page)

10 - 130

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Item

Description

Model

Select a display format to the text.

Style

: Displays the text in bold format.

: Displays the text in solid format.

10

: Displays the text in raised format.

Switching

Select a color for the columns to display alarms, the target for separating by color.
Fixe : Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.
Status : Select this item when using different colors depending on alarm status (occurred,
restored, or checked).

Fixed

Select the character color when [Fixed] is selected in [Switching].

Status

Select the character color for each alarm status (occurred, restored, or checked) when [Status] is
selected for [Switching].

ALARM

Table Format

COMMENT DISPLAY

11

12
PANELMETER

Display of alarm status, level color, and group color for higher/middle alarms
For higher/middle alarm, the character colors specified on [Table Format] are displayed in the following character
colors, regardless of the alarm status.
[Fixed] : Characters are displayed in the color of [Fixed].
[Status] : Characters are displayed in the color of [Occurred].

LEVEL

POINT

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 131

 Style tab
Set the ruled line type and shape of advanced system alarm display.

Item

Description

Cursor

Model

Select a color of the cursor for selecting the alarm.

Draw Ruled
Line

Style

Select a ruled line type for the advanced system alarm display.

Width

Select a ruled line width for the advanced system alarm display. (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 dots)

Color

Select a ruled line color for the advanced system alarm display.

Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the characters such as
time display.
Y: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
X: 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
According to the setting of [ Text Size] (magnification of the character size), the actual
horizontal space is as follows:
"Magnification of character size set value in Space"

Space

Example:
When [Text Size:2] and [Space:8] are set, a space of 16 dots is ensured.

Shape

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Shape Settings

Plate color

Plate Color

Frame color

10 - 132

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Occurrence date/time

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Extended tab
Set the switching of the data displayed by advanced user alarm display using a device.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

Check the item whose display is switched by the device.

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions
Switching Device
Priority Display

Select this item to switch the sort key by the value of the device.

Attribute *1

After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

Operation Log
Target

Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Display

To set the security function, set a security level (1 to 15).

Set "0" when not setting the security function.
Be sure to set a number for security (Operation) larger than the number for security (Display).

Operation

14

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

TREND GRAPH

Security Leve

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

15

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

BAR GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Category

LINE GRAPH

Set a user ID for advanced system alarm display.

Layer

13

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

User ID*2

PANELMETER

12

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 133

*1 Priority display attribute

Stores values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15

b14 to b4

b3 to b0 : Specifies a sort key.(

0 H:

b3

b2

b1

b0

: Reserved)

Regular (Occurred)

4 H:

Alarm No.

9 H:

OccurFreq

1 H:

Occurred Date/Time

5 H:

Level

A H:

Cum.Time

2 H:

Restored Date/Time

6 H:

Group

B H:

Down Time

3 H:

Checked Date/Time

7 H:

Alarm Status

b14 to b4: Not usable

b15

: Specifies ascending order or descending order.(

0

: Reserved)

: Descending order

H: Ascending order
8
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
Occur Freq, Cum. Time and Down Time are effective only when the collection mode of advanced alarm observation
is [Cumulative].
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of occurred.

*2 User ID
When user ID setting is required
If the advanced alarm display and alarm history display/user alarm display/system alarm display are set on the same
screen, the touch switches set for advanced alarm display may not operate.
To make the touch switches for advanced alarm display to securely operate, set user ID for advanced alarm display.
Alarm list display

02/12/01 10:25 Processing machine error

02/12/01 13:25 Line 1 error

Occurred
Comment Restored
04/11/05 10:25 Motor error 11:25
04/11/05 12:05 Light error
12:28
04/11/05 12:35

Checked
10:45

Advanced alarm display

Oil pressure error

Cursor ON

Up

Check

Cursor OFF

Down

Delete

Touch switch for advanced

alarm display

If the same user ID is set for advanced alarm display and touch switches, the operations of
the touch switches for advanced alarm display are effective for advanced alarm display.

10 - 134

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Setting method
Set a user ID for advanced alarm display.
Set the touch switches for advanced alarm display as follows after setting the user ID.
For the details of the touch switch setting, refer to the following.
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions
Setting of touch switch (Action tab)

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
PANELMETER

Set the same user ID as for advanced alarm display

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 135

 Trigger tab
Set the condition for displaying an object.
For the details of the display condition, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Item
Trigger Type

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Settings

Ordinary
ON

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

OFF

10 - 136

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Model

Make the settings for writing the information about the alarm selected in the advanced system alarm display into the
device.

COMMENT DISPLAY

External Output tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description

Model

If this item is selected, the information about the touched alarm can be written into the device.

13

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

Trigger Device

When cursor is
hidden

LINE GRAPH

14

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the external output when the cursor is hidden.
Clear External Output Device
: The external output device value is cleared.
Output alarm information of the top row : The alarm information displayed in the top row is output.

Set the device to which alarm data are written.

Comment No.

Select this item to write the error code displayed by the touched alarm into the device.

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

Device

Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected for [Trigger Type].

TREND GRAPH

Trigger Type

Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary : Alarm data are written into the device when touched.
ON
: When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Use
External
Output

PANELMETER

12

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 137

Item

Description

Model

If this item is selected, the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device.
The following values are written.

b15 to b3

Alarm Status

b2

b1

b0

: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored.

0: Restored
1: Occurring

b1

: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not.

0: Not
1: Checked

b2

: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not.
0: Not effective
1: Effective
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.

*1

b0

b15 to b3: Not usable

Device

Occurred
Date*1,*2
Occurred
Time*1,*2
Restored
Date*1,*2
Restored
Time*1,*2
Checked
Date*1,*2
Checked
Time*1,*2

If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred date can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the touched alarm occurred time can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored date can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the touched alarm restored time can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked date can be written into the device.

If this item is selected, the touched alarm checked time can be written into the device.

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

*1 Writable data according to the collection mode

The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
10.4.1 Before setting

10 - 138

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

*2 Writing format of date and time

Date and time are written in word data of two words.
(This section describes with occurred date as D254 (2 points) and occurred time as D256 (2 points).)

(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.

D254

b8 b7

Month (1 to 12)

b15
D255

to

to

to

10
b0

Day (1 to 31)

b8 b7

to

ALARM

b15

b0

Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year

11

(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15

b8 b7

to

b0

b15
D257

to

b8 b7

00H

to

LEVEL

D256

to

Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)

b0

12

Hour (0 to 23)

b15
D254

to

b8 b7

07H
(Month)

b15

to

to b0
01H
(Day)

b8 b7

20H

D255

PANELMETER

Example: July 1, 2004 12:24:56

to

13

b0

04H

(Minute)

b15
D257

to
00H

b8 b7

to
56H

b0

(Second)

to

14

b0

12H
(Hour)

TREND GRAPH

b8 b7

15
BAR GRAPH

to
24H

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

b15
D256

LINE GRAPH

(Dominical year)

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 139

10.4.4

Relevant Settings

The advanced system alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Set description

Resetting the system alarm or system information (GOT error code, GOT error
detecting signal). (Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the status of access to the drive.*1

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b0, b1)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying the that the drive is short of capacity.*1

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b4, b5)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying that access to the drive failed.*1*2

(Write device: System signal 2-2. b7, b8)

[System Signal 2-2]

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

[System Signal 1-1]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

*1

Model

The advanced user alarm observation also uses the signals that notify of the status of accessing and full, however, operate
differently from the drive status notification signal. For details, refer to the following.
10.4.6 Precautions for use (11) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)

*2

The File access error reset signal (read device: System signal 1-2, b0) resets the Drive A/B file access error signal (write device:
System signal 2-2, b7, b8).

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function
Saving the data in the buffering area to a CF card

Set description
*1

GS520.b0

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (GOT error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS262

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (CPU error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS263

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (Network error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS264

*1

Saved only when [Save alarm log files] is selected in the File Save tab.
The advanced user alarms of the unchecked alarm IDs are not saved.
10.4.2 Advanced System Alarm Observation (2) File Save tab

10 - 140

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Model

This section describes some useful functions to know when using the advanced system alarms.

Advanced system alarm observation

(1) Action when buffer is full
If the number of the advanced user alarms that are temporarily saved in the buffering area reaches or almost
reaches the [Stored Number] on the [Basic] tab, the status can be notified using a device.
(a) Confirmation of historical number and occurring number
The information on the number of total alarms temporarily saved in the buffering area can be stored and
confirmed in a device.
In addition, the number of the advanced user alarms that are currently occurring can also be confirmed.

Confirm the historical

number and occurring
number

Historical
number:

1254

Occurring
number:

Occurred

COMMENT DISPLAY

Useful operations and functions

10

ALARM

10.4.5

11

Full
notification:

Comment

LEVEL

04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi

04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipmen

(b) When the buffering area is full

In this case, the status can be notified using a device.
In addition, the following operations are available by making the settings.

Historical
number:

1254

Occurring
number:
Occurred

Full
notification:

2
Comment

04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confi

14

Full
notification

TREND GRAPH

04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipmen

13
LINE GRAPH

Issuing the full notification before the area is full. (Make the settings in [Full Notification Signal Device]
on the [Basic] tab.)
Selecting the process under buffer full. (Make the settings in [Action when Buffer is Full] on the [Basic]
tab.)

PANELMETER

12

15

HINT

BAR GRAPH

(1) Settings
For details, refer to the following.
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings
(2) Buffering area
For details, refer to the following.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

10.4.1 Before setting

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 141

(c)

Buffering size
The buffering size required for advanced system alarms varies depending on the settings.
As buffering size increases, the area in the GOT internal memory applicable for other objects, decreases.
Adjust buffering size in accordance with the capacity of the internal memory.
Settings relevant to buffering area size
Collection mode
Historical

Setting related to buffering area size

Total No. of alarms saved (Stored Number)

Only Current Alarm

Confirming the buffering area size needed for advanced system alarms
The size can be confirmed at [Buffering Area Size] on the Basic tab.

Buffering Area Size

(2) Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions taken for error codes
For details, refer to the manual below.
User's Manual for the GOT used

Advanced system alarm display

(1) Switching displays by device (set in [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab)
Data displayed can be switched by the value of device.
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
(a) Items to which a switching device can be set
Display alarm

Switching device setting usable

item

Priority Display Attribute

10 - 142

Advanced system alarm

The display order is changed between ascending order and descending order.
For the sort key, occurrence date/time, restoration date/time, check date/time, error code, or alarm
status (occurred, checked, or restored) can be selected

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Assume that the alarms below occurred.

Comment

04/06/01 16:50
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 10:00
04/06/01 08:10
04/06/01 07:40

330 Memory card

383 USB drive
449 Specified device
354 Recipe file
361 Specified file
402 Communication

Restored

Select sort item Occurred

17:10
14:42
12:05
15:00
08:25
07:58

10

Checked
17:20
14:50
15:20
15:05
08:30
08:45

Change items for sorting alarms.

Checked

Restored

Occurred

Displays alarms in the order of occurrence date

(descending order) (D103: 1)

Restored

Displays alarms in the order of restored date

(descending order). (D103: 2)
Displays alarms in the order of checked date
(descending order). (D103: 3)

Checked

ALARM

Occurred

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) Display example

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device (switching device).
This section shows an example when the switching device (level) is set to D102 and the switching device
(priority level attribute) to D103.

11

Touch switch for switching the alarm display data

Restored

"3" is written into D102.

"7" is written into D103

LEVEL

Checked

12
2

The alarm display is sorted in the order

of the checked date.

PANELMETER

The alarm display is sorted in the order

of the restored date.

Display of general alarms

Restored Checked
17:10
14:42
12:05
15:00
08:25
07:58

17:20
14:50
15:20
15:05
08:30
08:45

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01 16:50
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 10:00
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 07:40
04/06/01 08:10

330 Memory card

449 Specified device
354 Recipe file
383 USB drive
402 Communication
361 Specified file

Restored Checked
17:10

17:20

12:05
15:00

15:20
15:05
14:50
08:45
08:30

14:42
07:58
08:25

The alarm display is sorted in the order

of the checked date.

Occurred

Comment

04/06/01 16:50 330 Memory card

04/06/01 10:00 354 Recipe file
04/06/01 14:25 383 USB drive
04/06/01 11:20 449 Specified device
04/06/01 08:10 361 Specified file
04/06/01 07:40 402 Communication

Restored Checked
17:10

17:20

15:00
14:42
12:05
08:25
07:58

15:05
14:50
15:20
08:30
08:45

The alarm display is sorted in the order

of the restored date.

13

14
TREND GRAPH

330 Memory card

383 USB drive
449 Specified device
354 Recipe file
361 Specified file
402 Communication

15
BAR GRAPH

Comment

04/06/01 16:50
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 11:20
04/06/01 10:00
04/06/01 08:10
04/06/01 07:40

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred

LINE GRAPH

Switching device
(priority level
attribute): D103

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 143

(2) Setting of alarm status display color

Set display colors for each alarm status (Occurrence, restore, and check) in the advanced system alarm display
to visually identify alarms. (

10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting)

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

Identifies alarm
status visually!

(3) Set or change table titles and comments displayed freely

(a) Format setting of the table title (title format setting)
A style, text color, and kanji region can be set on the characters displayed as the table title.
This allows displaying alarms in a more easy-to-view table.

Occurred

Setting available for text color,

style, and kanji region!

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Fuel error

(b) Change the comments displayed using the language switching function
When setting comments in a comment group, the comments displayed can be changed by the language
switching device by setting the comments in multiple languages.
(Fundamentals) 4.3 Language Switching Device Setting
Comment group settings

Occurred

04/6/1 11:35:52

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

04/6/1 09:45:30

04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

04/6/1 08:15:45

04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error

04/6/1 05:22:35

Japanese

Language
switching device

10 - 144

Language switching
is available for the
table title since the
comment specified
in a comment
group can be used
for the table title!

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

English

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Japanese

English

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm display can be written into the device (word device).
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display
(a) Alarm data written into the device
Select the alarm data written in the device from the items below (8 types).
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Occurred Date

Occurred Time
Restored Date
Restored Time

Checked Date
Checked Time

10

ALARM

(b) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm display are written.
D200: 0601H
D201: 2004H

11

Comment
Temp. error
Motor error

LEVEL

Occurred
04/06/01 14:25
04/06/01 12:10

POINT

13
LINE GRAPH

Touch mode when data are written in the device

When writing alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab to [Selection] or [Operation].

PANELMETER

12

The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device.

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 145

(5) Description on touch switches for advanced alarm display

Touch switches for displaying advanced alarm can be read from the library of GT Designer3.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying advanced alarm display.

Touch switches for advanced alarm display

Touch switch

Key code

Description
Show/Hide the Cursor.

Show cursor
FFB0H

Hide cursor
FFB1H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

15:10

14:50

14:50

Show the cursor!

If the cursor is hidden:
The cursor moves to the previous/next page (page by page).

Move cursor upward

FFB2H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
Status
04/06/01 13:54 Fuel error
Rstr.
04/06/01 12:23 Internal pressure error Chk.
Ocr.
04/06/01 11:11 Motor error

Restored Checked
14:00
13:15

15:10

14:50

Move to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line).

Move cursor downward

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

FFB3H

15:10

14:50

Move the cursor!

(Continued to next page)

10 - 146

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Key code

Description

COMMENT DISPLAY

Touch switch

The alarm status is changed to "checked."

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Ocr.

Restored Checked

FFB4H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

FFB5H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Display date/time of selected data (check)

10
14:50

ALARM

The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.
FFB6H

Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Rstr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked
17:15

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Status
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

11

14:50

15:10

LEVEL

Clear the selected alarm data (delete)

14:50

12

The restored alarm is deleted!

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Save alarm contents to CF card

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

PANELMETER

Advanced alarm data are saved in the CF card as an alarm log file.
Restored Checked

15:10

14:50

13

FFBBH

The data are saved to the CF card!

A device is automatically searched in specified program file by coil-search/defect
search, and the result is displayed on the ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder
jump function)
Specify the search mode and program file to be searched in the setting dialog box of the
Advanced User Alarm Observation.

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 16:51 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Oil error

Display ladder

Status
Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.

Restored Checked

15:10

14
TREND GRAPH

10.2 Advanced Alarm Common

LINE GRAPH

Display date/time of all data (check all)

14:50

FFBCH

15
M999
BAR GRAPH

MOV 1 D1
MOV 2 D2

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Displays the ladder monitor screen

(displays the ladder including the specified device)

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 147

HINT
(1) Touch switches operating differently depending on the display status
The touch switches for advanced alarm display operate differently depending on the display status.
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) / downward (FFB3H)
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (page by page).
While the cursor is displayed, the cursor is moved upward/downward (line by line).
(2) Operation method by directly touching Advanced Alarm Display
The following operations can be performed by setting [Touch Mode] on the [Alarm] tab.
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
Selection of an alarm (Set [Touch Mode] to [Selection])
Alarms can be selected by touching the advanced alarm display directly.
(equivalent operation to cursor show/hide)
Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

The touched alarm is selected.

(2) Change of cursor color
The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor]
on the Table tab.

Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

The alarm is deselected by touching it

again.

Hierarchy switching and detail display of alarms (Set [Touch Mode] to [Operation])
Alarm hierarchies can be switched and detail screen can be displayed by touching the advanced alarm
display directly. (equivalent operation to displaying detail or moving to the lower hierarchy)
Occurred
Comment Restored Checked
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50

Occurredthe fuse ofComment Restored Checked

Change
04/06/01
16:51 Fuse error
the
power supply
04/06/01 14:25 Temp. error 15:10 14:50
module.

When the selected alarm is touched again, display is moved

to the lower alarm hierarchy and detail screen is displayed.

(3) Change of cursor color

The cursor color can be changed by [Cursor] on the [Style] tab.
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting
(4) Setting method of touch switches
For details, refer to the following.
2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

10 - 148

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

Precautions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.4.6

This section explains the precautions for using the advanced system alarm.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be placed (set) on one screen.
Only one advanced user alarm display can be placed (set) on a base screen, an overlap window, or a
superimpose window, respectively.

10

(2) Settings for saving advanced alarm data in the CF card.

(a) When setting the storing trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the storing trigger device on the File Save tab described in the following to save the advanced alarm
data.

ALARM

To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.

11

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

(b) When saving the data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm display was
specified to save the data.

LEVEL

10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the target text color
is set to Black with [Switching] on the [Text] tab. (Characters are hidden since the text color and the cursor color
are the same.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the text color to other than
Black.

(4) Precautions for setting

(a) Setting number
The object setting size cannot exceed the GOT user area.
Therefore, some of the setting (device number, etc.) may not be set at the maximum value.
Set within the free user area available for GOT.

12
PANELMETER

(3) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed

LINE GRAPH

13

For computing method for the setting size of the advanced alarm display, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3
For the free user area available for the GOT, refer to the following.

14
TREND GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer

(b) Saving a file
The CF card capacity must be larger than the size of the file to be saved.
For the file size of CF cards, refer to the following.
10.4.1 Before setting

15

(5) Precautions for using comment group

BAR GRAPH

When an inexistent value (column No.) is set at the language switching device, "No message" is displayed.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 149

 Precautions for use

(1) Controllers for which advanced system alarms are not displayed on GOT
CPU errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the advanced system alarm of
the GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
YAMATAKE temperature controller
RKC temperature controller
Inverter

(2) Alarm resetting

The alarm status of a GOT error is not changed to "Restored" even if the alarm cause is eliminated.

Error
occurred

Cause
eliminated

Occurred

Message

Status

04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equi Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error

Alarm causes on the GOT, controller,

or network are eliminated.

Ocr.

Even if alarm causes on the GOT,

controller, and network are eliminated,
the status of alarm occurrence is still
displayed on the GOT.

For details, refer to the following.

10.4.1 Before setting

(3) Network error restoration and clear

The alarm status of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit, MELSECNET/10
communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be changed to "Restored" until the GOT is
powered OFF or reset even after the alarm cause is eliminated.
When clearing an alarm of the "Restored" status, refer to the following.
10.4.1 Before setting

10 - 150

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(4) If the same data exists in the CF card

Overwritten!

Save

Occurred

Comment

Status

AAM00000.G1A

04/06/01 402 Communication timeout. C Ocr.

04/06/01 70 Battery voltage low or equip Ocr.
04/06/01 803 Transient error

10
AAM00000.G1A

ALARM

Ocr.

Save

11

Touch

The data in the CF card are overwritten. Therefore, if the data needs to be kept unchanged, move the data from
the CF card to the personal computer by either of the following methods.

LEVEL

Key code: FFBBH

or
Store Trigger device

12

Upload resource data by GT Designer3

(Fundamentals) 7.3.8 Reading resource data

PANELMETER

Read out the CSV file saved in the CF card by the personal computer.

(5) Alarm observation during saving of alarm log file

When an alarm log file is being saved to the CF card, the monitoring is interrupted temporarily.
Note that the advanced system alarm occurred and restored when the file is saved is not displayed.

LINE GRAPH

13

Saving...

14
TREND GRAPH

User area
(C drive + add-on memory)

Occurred Comment
04/6/1 14:46:49 402 Communication timeout. Confir
04/6/1 13:30:14 70 Battery voltage low or equipment

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Save

While saving to
the CF card, monitoring
is suspended.

BAR GRAPH

Buffering area

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 151

(6) Saving by the buffer flash forced saving signal (GS520.b0)

The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced alarms to be saved as an alarm
log file (set on the [File Save] tab) are saved in the CF card.
If the observation interrupt time needs to be shorter, save the data for each object as follows.
Set a trigger for each advanced alarm observation settings and save the data.
Set a touch switch (key code: FFBBH) for each advanced alarm display and save the data.

(7) When turning off from on the CF card access switch of the used drive
When turning off the CF card access switch while the CF card is ejected from the drive, the data in the CF card
are inevitably saved.
Do not eject the CF card from the drive until the following LED or signal turns off and the file saving is
completed.
CF card access LED on the used drive turns off
Drive status notification signal of the used drive (System Signal 2-2. b0, b1) is off.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
The saving process may take several minutes because the data of all advanced user alarms and advanced
alarms are saved as an alarm log file (set in the [File Save] tab).

(8) When restoring alarm history at the timing when the GOT is turned off and on
If the project of the alarm log file in the CF card does not match with the project in the GOT, the file cannot be
read out from the CF card. (The alarm history before the GOT is powered off cannot be restored)
In this case, the alarm below occurs or the signal below turns on.
[Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
System alarm 525 "Unable to read/write alarm log files under different projects" occurs.

(9) Alarm collection when the buffering area is full

When the buffering area is full, one of the following operations is performed according to settings made in the
[Action When Buffer is Full] on the Basic tab.
Clear restored advanced user alarms and adding new alarms.
Not collect advanced user alarms.
To avoid the operations above, set [Full Notification Signal Device] on the [Basic] tab, and clear the restored
alarm when the device turns on.
10.4.1 Before setting

Action when buffer is full

Full notification signal device

10 - 152

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

If an error occurs when a file is saved, [Writing Error Notification Device] on the [File Save] tab turns on.
The GOT's CF card access switch is set to "transfer prohibited".
The CF card is full.

(11) Difference from the drive status notification signal (write device: system signal 2-2)
Although buffer full, writing, and writing error can be notified through the drive status notification signal,
operation is different from that of the device set by the advanced system alarm observation function.

COMMENT DISPLAY

(10) Error when the alarm log file is saved

10

Operation (Differences)
Drive status notification signal

Turns on when the number of saved alarms

reaches the value set in [Stored Number] on the
[Basic] tab. (When the buffering area reserved for
the advanced system alarm is full.)

Turns on when the CF card is full.

Difference between [Writing Notification Device]

set by advanced alarm observation and drive
status notification signal (system signal 2-2.b0,
b1)

Turns on while the advanced system alarm data

are saved in the CF card.

Turns on while data are written in the CF card.

(Also when data other than advanced system
alarm are written.)

Difference between [Writing Error Notification

Device] set by advanced alarm observation and
drive status notification signal (system signal 22.b7, b8)

Turns on if an error occurs while the alarm log

file in the CF card is accessed. (For example, if
the project of the alarm log file in the CF card
does not match with the project in GOT.)
Turns on when the CF card cannot be
accessed. (For example, when the CF card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set to
"transfer prohibited".)

ALARM

Difference between [Full Notification Signal

Device] set by advanced alarm observation and
drive status notification signal (system signal 22.b4, b5)

Turns on when the CF card cannot be

accessed. (For example, when the CF card is
not set, or the CF card access switch is set to
"transfer prohibited".)

(12) Display of occurrence time, check time, and restoration time

For occurrence time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to the following.

12

13
LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

11

LEVEL

Advanced alarm observation

PANELMETER

Item

(13) Unicode text file converted with utility, etc.

For the cautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

10 - 153

(14) Priority of alarm display

(a) When the displayed alarms are not changed by the [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.

Comment

Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

(b) When the displayed alarms are changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.

(15) Display of the comment window and key window

When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
When try to open the detail display (comment
window display) while the key window is displayed.

7
4
1
0

Key window

8
5
2

9 AC
6 Del
3 +/Enter

04/06/01 10:25 Pwr. module error

04/06/01 12:05 Drive module error
04/06/01 12:35 Control module error

Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!

(16) Advanced alarm display when using the set overlay screen function
When setting the advanced alarm display on the called screen, do not set the advanced alarm display on the
base screen.
The called screen cannot display the advanced alarm display when the advanced alarm display is set on the
base screen.

Occurred
04/06/01 17:24
04/06/01 16:15

Comment
Fuel error

Restored

Advanced alarm display

on called screen

Internal pressure error 16:10

Occurred
Comment
04/06/01 17:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 16:51 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:27 Oil error

Restored

15:10

Advanced alarm display

on base screen

For settings of the set overlay screen, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 9.2 Changing the Screen According to the Situation (Set Overlay Screen)

10 - 154

10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5 Alarm History Display

Alarm
occurred

Up Down Check

Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error

Restore Check
11:25
10:45

11

The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are

displayed when X0 turns ON.

Alarm
detail
display

ON

Supply oil to the

arm of Line 1.

LEVEL

X0:OFF

Alarm details, error measures and

so on are displayed.

12

Up Down Check

13

Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:10

LINE GRAPH

Up Down Check

Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error

PANELMETER

The window for detail display is any of the comment window,

base screen, or window screen.

Alarm
checked
time

10

ALARM

The times and comments of the alarms occurred are stored in the GOT incorporated memory and displayed as a history
list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit OFF to ON/word device range).

With the touch switch for alarm history

display, the alarm check time is displayed.
To create the touch switch for alarm history display, set a key code to the touch switch.

14

X0:ON

OFF

Restore Check
11:25
10:45
12:45
12:10

15

The restoration time

is displayed.
BAR GRAPH

Up Down Check

Occurred
Message
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error
04/03/01 12:05 Oil error

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

After
system
restoration

TREND GRAPH

System Restoration

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 155

HINT
Comments displayed on the alarm history display
Comments displayed on the alarm history display must be registered in advance.
Register comments in the basic comment or comment group.
(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

Examples
Display alarm data on PC

Display number of alarm that have been historical

10.5.1 Alarm history settings
CSV file

Date

Date

10.5.1 Alarm history settings

Time Message

04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.

Time Message

04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.

Date Time Message

Date Time Message

04/02/01 10:25 Temp.Err.

04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.

04/02/01 10:25 Atm Err.

CF card

Alarm his. number

The alarm historical data saved to a CF card in a CSV file

are read by spreadsheet software.

Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm history display

and searching a device automatically
(One-touch ladder jump function)
2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

Date

Time Message

M999

02/02/01 10:25 Line 1 error

K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2

Ladder
display

Ladder monitor function is

displayed by touch switch

10 - 156

Device corresponding to the alarm

displayed on alarm history display
is automatically searched.

10.5 Alarm History Display

Alarm his. number

The number of all alarms historical is displayed in alarm history.

Alarm history settings

Select [Common]

[Alarm]

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5.1

[Alarm History] from the menu, for displaying the setting dialog box.

10

Basic tab

ALARM

Set the collecting method of alarm data and the device.

LEVEL

11

12
PANELMETER

Alarm setting list

Item

Model

Select a collection mode of the alarm history display function.

Historical : Corrects alarm data as history.
If an alarm in the restored status occurs again, the alarm data is collected as a new alarm.
Cumulative : The latest alarm status, the cumulative period of time the alarm has been generated, and the
cumulative number of times of the alarm occurrences are calculated.
If any alarm in the restored status occurs again, the occurrence frequency increases, and the previous
alarm information (occurrence date/time, restored time, and checked time) is updated to the latest one.
For differences in the collection modes, refer to the following.

13
LINE GRAPH

Mode

Description

14

Set the cycle in which the GOT monitors the specified devices of the controller.
Cycle can be set from 600ms to 80s in the units of 100ms.

Data Type

Select a data type of the device monitored.

(For GT10, [Bit of Word], [Signed BIN16], [Unsigned BIN16], [Signed BIN32], [Unsigned BIN32], [BCD16], [BCD32], and
[Real] cannot be selected.)
Bit
Bit of Word
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32 BCD16
BCD32
Real

BAR GRAPH

Watch Cycle

15

16

(Continued to the next page)

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 157

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Number of
Alarms

Set the points of the device to be monitored.

The number of the device points you can specify differs depending on the type of the device monitored.
(For GT10, the bit of word, word device (16 bits), word device (32 bits) cannot be set.)
Bit device
: 1 to 3072 Points (GT10: 1 to 1000 Points)
Bit device or bit specification of word device : 1 to 3072 points
Word device (16 bits)
: 1 to 1024 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)
Word device (32 bits)
: 1 to 512 points
(ON status is recognized through the value range setting.)

TREND GRAPH

10.5.4 Actions

Item

Description

Device Setting

Select a device setting method.

(For GT10, [Random] and [Identical] cannot be selected.)
Continuous : Set devices continuously starting from the device specified.
Random
: Set devices one by one.
Identical
: This item can be selected when the followings are selected in [Data Type]. Set multiple alarm ranges
in the same word device.
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
When [Random] is selected, it is not allowed to set a bit device and word device bits together as monitoring devices.

Model

Comment No.

Select how to set the comment No. corresponding to the specified device.
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)
Continuous
: Set continuous comment numbers starting from the comment No. specified.
Random
: Set comment numbers one by one.

Comment Type

Select the type of the comment to be displayed. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)

When [Comment Group] is selected, the used comment group No. is displayed.
This item is available only when selecting [Comment Group] for [Comment Type].
When sending a mail, select the comment column No. from the comment group to be used for the
comment.
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the mail comment row No. to 3.

Cmment

Comment group No.2

Mail Comment
Column No.

Comment column No.

Comment No.

Product 1-1 Product 1-2 Product 1-3 Product 1-4 Product 1-5

Product 2-1 Product 2-2 Product 2-3 Product 2-4 Product 2-5

Use this comment row No. when sending a mail.

Display Destination

Select a method for displaying alarm details.

Set the comment No., base screen No., or window screen No. for [Detail] in the alarm setting list.
(For GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)
Not Display
: No details are displayed.
Comment Window*1 : Created comments are displayed on the comment window.
Base Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on the base screen.
Window Screen*6

Detail

*2
2

: The detailed information is displayed on the window screen (Overlap

window 1).

Detail No.

Select how to set the comment window, window screen, or base screen for detail display.
Continuous : Set continuous numbers starting from the comment No., window screen No.,
or base screen No.
Random
: Set numbers one by one.

Comment Type

Select the comment types. (Basic Comment/Comment Group)

When selecting [Comment Group], set the comment group No.

Reads out the alarm history settings edited in a CSV file to GT Designer3.
Saves the alarm history settings set by GT Designer3 as a CSV file.
When copying the set data to another field, click the [Copy] button to set the copy contents.
(1) Copy Alarm History dialog box
Set the devices specified for alarms, conditions for alarm occurrences, and operation when an alarm occurs.
Device

Alarm setting
list
Alarm Range*2

Set a device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
When setting [Data Type] as the word device, click the [Exp.] button to set the range of the word
device values for the alarm data display.
(2) Edit Alarm Range dialog box

(Continued to the next page)

10 - 158

10.5 Alarm History Display

Item

Description

Model

Set a comment No. used for the device specified.

Comment No.

Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05

Message
Temp. error
Oil error

Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:25 12:28

10

Detail

Set the comment No., window screen No., or base screen No. for displaying detailed data when
an alarm occurs (when specified device conditions are satisfied).

RST

Select whether or not to enable the alarm resetting (turning off or resetting the specified device
by the touch switch for resetting).
After selecting [ON], set up the [RST Value] if the device is a word device.

11

Set a value written into the word device (reset value) when the GOT is reset by the touch switch
for alarm history display. (Fixed to "0" for GT10)

Mail

Select a mail-sending mode.

None
: No mails are sent.
Occur
: The occurred date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm occurs (when the conditions of the device are met).
Restore
: The restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm is restored (when the conditions of the device are not met).
Both
: The occurred or restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email
when an alarm occurs or an alarm is restored.

12
PANELMETER

RST Value

LEVEL

10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

For details of *1 to *2, refer to the following.

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Alarm setting
list

Comment Selection

ALARM

Set a comment No. of the message to be displayed in this area.

The comment corresponding to [Comment No.] is displayed.
Any comment registered can be selected. If a comment is selected here, the "Cmnt. No." is
switched automatically.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 159

*1 Displaying the comment window

1) Display the detail display screen by
one touch operation
Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35

Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error

2) Display the detail display screen by

key input from the touch switch

Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28

Occurrence
02/02/01 10:25
02/02/01 12:05
02/02/01 12:35

Message
Line 1 error
Line 2 error
Line 3 error

Restore Check
11:25 10:45
12:28

Details

Comment window is displayed

(Window screen for alarm history).

Window screen is displayed

(Overlap window).

Check Line 2

Base screen is displayed.

Check Line 2

Alarm history display

Check Line 2

Alarm history display

The specified comment is displayed.

The specified base screen or window screen is displayed.

(1) Number of characters available for comment window

GOT

Number of characters available for comment window

GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1665, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 ,

GT156 , GT155 (GT1555-V only), GT SoftGOT1000
GT155 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT115
Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104
GT1030, GT1020

39 characters

11 lines (429 characters)

23 characters

7 lines (161 characters)

18 characters

3 lines (54 characters)

(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows

Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.

(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed for the
comment.

Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module

Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module

Check the power module

Check the power module

When a comment is registered

10 - 160

10.5 Alarm History Display

Comment window display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

*2 Import/Export
The exported CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.

ALARM

10

11

LEVEL

Exported in CSV file

Editing the exported file

Add the setting using applications

such as Microsoft Excel.
R

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

Importing to GT Designer2

14
TREND GRAPH

The added contents

are displayed.

BAR GRAPH

15

POINT
When using languages other than Japanese and English
For using languages other than Japanese and English for comments, do not import or export CSV files.
When CSV files are imported or exported, data stored in the files may not be correctly displayed.

10.5 Alarm History Display

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10 - 161

(1) Copy Alarm History dialog box

This section explains how to copy the set alarm history items to other place.

Item

Description

Source No.

Set the alarm history No. that will be copied.

Destination No.

Set the alarm history No. that will be a copy destination.

Number of Copy

Set the number of copies.

Check the relevant items.

Copy Item

10 - 162

Comment No.

Copies comment No. (Basic comment) of the source.

Detail No.

Copies the detailed display No. of the source.

Device Reset

Copies the device reset settings of the source.

Alarm Range

Copies the range setting of the source.

Send Mail

Copies the send mail settings of the source.

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Edit Alarm Range dialog box

Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms.

10

Description

ALARM

Item

Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms using a conditional expression.

11

Select any of the following conditional expressions.

Set a conditional expression by a combination of a device value ($V) and constants.

Device value for alarm display ($V)

Relational operator

LEVEL

Constant

To set an expression other than the above 3 patterns, select [Other] and then click the [Exp] button.
When the [Edit Range] dialog box appears, set any conditional expression.
In a conditional expression set by a user, the value of another word device can be set as a condition.

12

13
LINE GRAPH

Indicates the value of the device used for alarm display.

Select this item to display the [Edit Range] dialog box.
(a) Edit Range dialog box

14
TREND GRAPH

$V

Set a relational operator for the conditional expression.

< : The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
== : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!= : The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term

15
BAR GRAPH

(Relational operator)

Enter a value in decimal.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

(Constant)

PANELMETER

Alarm Range

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 163

(a) Edit Range dialog box

Input Each Term (A-C)

Item

Description
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.
For setting three types (A, B, and C), select a relational operator other than [None] between B and C.
None : No relational operator is set.
<
: The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
== : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!=
: The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term

Constant Data
Type

Input Each Term

(A-C)

Select the data type of the fixed value to be set. (Hex/Dec/Oct)

Set each of the terms of the conditional expression.
Constant
: Set a constant.
$V
: Set the word device by which an alarm is displayed.
Other Device : Set s value of device other than the word device set for alarm display as a term of the
conditional expression.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

10 - 164

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Option tab
Set the history retention (history clear, saved to CF card) for alarm history.
The settings on this tab will be reflected in all alarm history display.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Number of
Histories

Description

Model

Select this item to store the number of alarms currently occurred and restored to a word device.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button and set the storing device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the [Basic] tab.

13

Select this item to enable forced deleting of the restored-state alarm data by changing the specified device status from
OFF to ON.
After selecting this item, click the [...] button to set the device to be used as a history clear trigger.

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on the [Basic] tab.
Alarm data can be cleared by the touch switch (the switch for history clearance) as well.
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

14
TREND GRAPH

(Continued to the next page)

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

History Clear
Trigger

PANELMETER

12

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 165

Item

Description

Store to Memory
Card *3

Model

Select this item to save alarm historical data to the CF card.

After selecting this item, select the timing to store data to the CF card.
Cycle : The alarm history is stored by the set sampling cycle, respectively.
After checking, select the storage cycle in one-minute unit within a range from 1 minute to
maximum 60 minutes.
On the Occurence of Alarm : When alarms occur, store the alarm history.
Data can be stored to the CF card using the alarm history switch.
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions
Select the name of drive where the alarm data are saved.

Drive Name*2

Folder Name

(For the GT105 , GT104 , and GT1030, the item is fixed to [D: Built-in SRAM]. For the
GT1020, the item is fixed to [C: Built-in Flash Memory].)
Enter the name of the folder in which the CSV file is stored. (Up to 62 characters)
Alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}-\) can be used.
The following shows the procedure to add folder names that can be selected.
1) Select [Common]
[GOT Type Setting] from the menu.
2) Set the project name in [Project Folder].
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

File Name

Store to Memory
Card

Create a CSV file

simultaneously*1

The file name is displayed.

The displayed content varies depending on the selection or not of [Create a CSV file
simultaneously].
When selected: Displayed as ALARMHST.CSV
When not selected: Displayed as ALARMHST.G1H
When this item is selected, the alarm data can be saved in the CF card in the CSV file format.
This item can be set when selecting [Create a CSV file simultaneously], and then [Comment
Group] in [Comment Type] on the [Basic] tab.
When storing an alarm history in the CF card, select the comment column No. from the comment
group to be used for the CSV file.
Example) When setting the comment group No. to 2 and the CSV file comment column No. to 3.

CSV Storage
Comment Column
No.

Comment group No.2

Comment column No.

Comment No.

Product 1-1 Product 1-2 Product 1-3 Product 1-4 Product 1-5

Product 2-1 Product 2-2 Product 2-3 Product 2-4 Product 2-5

Use this comment column No. when the CSV file is output.
Writing
Notification
Device
Writing Error
Notification
Device

Clear the oldest

history when the
number of
histories exceeds
the specified
value

Set the device to be ON while alarm data are written to the CF card.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Set the device by which an error is notified when alarm data writing to the CF card fails.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
This device must be turned off manually because it is not turned off automatically even after the
error is restored.

Select this item so that the oldest alarm history data is deleted and a new alarm data is added, when the number of
occurred alarms reaches or exceeds the upper limit (GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: 3072; GT11: 2048; GT10: 1000) and
conditions for the specified device are met.
10.5.6 Precautions
If this item is not selected, new alarm data are not added when the number of alarms occurred reaches or exceeds the
upper limit.
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

10 - 166

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Saving data in the CSV format

(1) Data stored

Alarm data are converted into a CSV file data as follows.
The CSV file can be read and displayed on a PC by spreadsheet software.
Not collected in
historical mode

10

Cumulative Occurrence
Occurrence date/time
Comment Restoration Check
frequency
(may be displayed differently
date/time date/time time
(e.g. "2004/5/29") depending
on the spreadsheet software
setting.)

ALARM

Number of alarms occurred

Number of restored-state alarms
Number of checked alarms

11

Data collected on the alarm history display are overwritten to the CSV file at the user-specified cycles (1 to
60min).
Because the alarm data deleted on the alarm history display are deleted in the CSV file as well, do not delete
the alarm to be kept in the CSV file.

LEVEL

(2) Updating stored data

When all of alarm history data are deleted

If the alarm history is stored to a CSV file after all data have been deleted with the touch switch Delete (FFB7H)
or [History Clear Trigger], the CSV file is left blank.

PANELMETER

12

HINT

Stored to a CSV file with alarm history deleted

LINE GRAPH

13
Nothing is stored.

14

*2 Storage drive

Applicable storage drive

A : Standard CF Card, B : Extended Memory Card

GT11

A : Standard CF Card, D : Built-in SRAM

15
BAR GRAPH

GT16, GT15,
GT SoftGOT1000

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

GOT

TREND GRAPH

The following shows the applicable storage drives for each GOT type.

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 167

*3 Storing erroneous alarm information data

If the CF card is faulty or the files are different from those in the CF card, the GOT internal device (Error detection
common information: GS252.b0) turns ON to disable the alarm information to ne stored. (Device data collection is
continued).
If the storage operation is done in this situation, the system alarm will occur.
If GS252.b0 turns ON, replace the CF card or check the data within the CF card.
Turning ON the GOT internal device (error detection common control: GS452.b0) will turn GS252.b0 OFF. This allows
the file storage to be resumed.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

If an alarm information
file is faulty,
GS252.b0 turns ON..

Power ON.
Monitoring
start

Reading alarm
information files

While GS252.b0 is ON,

the alarm information
file is not stored.

Turn GS452.b0 ON using

touch switch or similar,
Alarm information
as this causes GS252.
after monitoring
starts is stored.
b0 to turn OFF.

Alarm information
storage

Alarm information
storage

GOT operation

Alarm information
status

Alarm information
is not stored.

Error status

Error detection common

information (GS252.b0)

Alarm information
is stored.
Normal status

ON

Error detection common

control (GS452.b0)

OFF
ON
OFF

HINT
Application of error detection common information
An overlap window (for file error detection) can be displayed by detecting GS252.b0 with script function.

10 - 168

10.5 Alarm History Display

Alarm history display setting

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5.2

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the alarm history display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged alarm history display to display the setting dialog box.

[Alarm Display]

[Alarm History Display] from the menu.

10

ALARM

Display tab
Set the display details (e.g. style, order of display).

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Description

Model

Click this button to display the [Alarm History] dialog box.

Set the number of rows displayed for each screen. (Up to 27 rows)
Example: When this is set to 3
Message

Restore Check

04/11/05

10:25

Temp. error

11:25

10:45

04/11/05

12:05

Oil error

12:25

12:28

04/11/06

08:30

Fuel error

09:45

09:40

14
TREND GRAPH

Number of
Rows

Occurred date Time

Display rows
(not including the title line)

Set the alarm row No. from which alarm display starts in the order of occurrence (1 to 1024) when the conditions of
more than one specified device are met.
If the number of generated alarms is lower than the value set in [Display Start Row], the display is left blank.
Example: 4 is set as head row.

Row*1
Occurrence
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05

Message
M3 ON
M4 ON

Restore
11:25
12:25

Alarms occurred
1) M0 is ON
2) M1 is ON
Check
3) M2 is ON
10:45
4) M3 is ON
12:28
5) M4 is ON

Order of alarm
occurrence

BAR GRAPH

Display Start

15

Alarms of the No.4 and later are displayed.

Title

16

Select the setting method of the title color and title name.
Title Color
: Select the title color.
Direct
: Select this item to input the title name in [Title] of [Contents].
Comment Group : Select this item to display the title name with a comment set for the comment group.
After selecting, set the comment group No. for the comment displayed in the title name.

(Continued to the next page)

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 169

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Item

LINE GRAPH

13

Item

Description
Display

Model

Select the items to be displayed on the alarm history display.

Restorations
Cumulative Time
Checks
Occur. Frequency

Occurred
Occurred
02/11/05 10:25
02/11/05 12:05

Occurred
Message
Restored
Checks

Message
Restore
Conveyer 1 error 11:25
Conveyer 2 error 12:25

Check
10:45
12:28

Cumulate
01:00
00:20

Count
1
5

: Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.

: Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the alarm was restored.
: Select this item when displaying the date/time at which the occurrence of the
alarm was checked.
The time at which the check switch was touched after the alarm occurred is
displayed.
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

Attribute

Comment Restored
Motor error

Checked

Check

Comment Restored
Motor error

Checked
12:00

(Key code : FFB4H)

Cum.Time

: This item is available when [Cumulative] is selected for [Mode] on the [Basic] tab
in the [Alarm History] dialog box.
Select this item when displaying the total alarm occurrences including the alarm
occurrences in the past (total down time).
(Not available for GT10)
: Select this item to display how many times alarms were generated.

Frequency

Contents

Set the number of digits displayed for each Item.

Example: When message width is set to 12
Occurred
04/11/05 10:25

Comment
Motor error

Restored
11:25

Checked
10:45

Displayed in a width of 12 digits

Width

Title

Date/Time Format

The number of digits set for each Item is as shown below.

Occurred : Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20)
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format].
Message : 10 to 80 digits
Restored : Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20)
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]
Checks
: Set the number of digits when [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]. (1 to 20)
This item is automatically set when other than [Text] is set in [Date/Time Format]
Cum.Time : Fixed to 8 digits
Frequency : Fixed to 8 digits
Set the characters to be displayed on the alarm history display title.
When [Direct] is selected for [Title]
: Characters for the number specified by [Width]
can be input.
When [Comment Group] is selected for [Title] : Set the comment group No. or the comment
contents to display on the title of advanced user
alarm display.
Set the view format for date, time and characters of alarm occurrence (Occurred/Restored/
Checks).
(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Alarm Text Color

Select a character color for each alarm status (Occurrences/Restorations/Checks).

Sort Setting

Select the display order for the alarm. (Latest/Oldest)

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Display] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1 refer to the following.

10 - 170

10.5 Alarm History Display

If the number of alarms becomes higher than the numbers set to [Display Start Row] while the alarm history is
displayed on the GOT, the [Display Start Row] setting is not valid.
To enable the [Display Start Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the alarm history display
screen.

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Display Start Row

10

HINT

Alarm occurred number

No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Item No. 1

Screen 1
(Line No. of display start: 1)

Item No. 2

11

Item No. 3

Item No. 4

Screen 2
(Line No. of display start: 4)

Item No. 5
Item No. 6

Item No. 7

Screen 3
(Line No. of display start: 7)

LEVEL

Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item
Item

ALARM

Application example of Display Start Row

If different line No. of display start are set on plural screens, different alarm history can be displayed for each
screen.

Item No. 8
Item No. 9

12
PANELMETER

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

13
LINE GRAPH

Preview area

14

Contents

Select a display type of date and time.

Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time
Date
Time
Text

TREND GRAPH

Description
The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.
Date Setting

Sort

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/4/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 4/1/09) dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/4/09)
mm/dd (Example: 4/1)

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time] for [Contents], set the following items.

Text

Type

Select the display type of time.

Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10 : 1
10 : 1 : 27
10 : 1(AM)

16

This item is available when selecting [Text] in [Contents].

Set the contents to be displayed on [Date Format] in the [Display].

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Time Setting

15
BAR GRAPH

Item
Preview area

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 171

 Style tab
Set the frame, ruled line/vertical line for alarm history.

Item

Space

Description
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the characters such as
time display.
X : 0 to 32 dots (Set in 1-dot units.)
Y : 0 to 32 dots (Set in 8-dot units.)
According to the setting of [Text Size] (the magnification of character size), the actual
horizontal space is as follows:
Magnification of character size

Model

Occurrence date/time

set value in [Space]

Example:
When [Text Size: 2] and [Space: 8] are set, a space of 16 dots is ensured.

Text Size

Select a size of the character displayed on the alarm history display (magnification of horizontal size (X)
(Y) (1 to 8).
When X

Use High
Quality Font

Y is 1

1, the character size is 8

16 dots (X

vertical size

Y).

Select this item for displaying the characters in high-quality font.

(Only when the character horizontal and vertical magnification are both set to 2, 4, 6, or 8)
When this item is selected, the characters are displayed in 16-dot HQ Mincho font.
When not selected, the characters are displayed in 16-dot standard font.
To display HQ font characters, set the HQ font in the Basic Comment setting.
When this item is selected, the detailed display screen can be displayed by touching any row of the alarm history.

Single Touch
Operation

Use comment
scrolling
depending on
the message
width

Touch a row you want to view the details

Occurred
Message
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error

Restore
11:25
12:25

Check
10:45
12:28

The details of the touched row are displayed.

Check Line 1

When this item is selected, the comment to be displayed in the message field can be scrolled from right to left.

(Continued to the next page)

10 - 172

10.5 Alarm History Display

Item

Description

Shape

Model

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

10

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Shape Settings

Plate

ALARM

15963

Plate Color

Frame

11

When this item is selected, ruled lines can be drawn for the alarm history.
After selecting this item, select a color for the ruled line.
Time

Restore

Check

04/11/05

10:25

11:25

10:45

04/11/05

10:25

11:25

10:45

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Message

LEVEL

Occurred date

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Draw Ruled Line

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 173

 Extended tab
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the dialog box.

Item

Security Level

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

User ID

Select this item to set the user ID (1 to 65535)

When the user ID is set, the following operation is enabled.
To specify the used object in the operation log.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Operation Log
Target

Comment No.
Device

Select this item to set the object being set as the target for logging the operation.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
Specify the device where the comment number of an alarm with the cursor displayed is stored.
Use the following operation to store a comment number by displaying the cursor on an alarm.
Select the [Display the cursor in a selected row] item.
Use the touch switch (key code switch (cursor display)) for alarm history display.
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

Display the
cursor in a
selected row

10 - 174

When this item is selected, the cursor can be displayed by touching the displayed alarm.
(This allows displaying of the cursor for the alarm without setting a touch switch.)
Set the [Comment No. Device] item to store the comment number of touched alarms to the device.

10.5 Alarm History Display

Model

Relevant Settings

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5.3

The alarm history display function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Model

[system Signal 1-1]

[system Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[system Signal 2-1]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

12
PANELMETER

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

LEVEL

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

Set description

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 175

10.5.4

Actions

Collected alarms are displayed as history.

Register messages to be displayed in the basic comment or comment group in advance.

Alarm collection mode

Select either of the two collection modes, historical mode or cumulative mode.
When an alarm occurs, the following information can be collected and displayed.
Occurred
Message
Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 20:00 Pwr. module error
1
04/06/01 18:30 Oil pressure error
18:50
2
04/06/01 16:10 Drive module error 16:30 16:20 00:20
2
1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

(In the example above, 3), 4), and 5) indicate time only.)

Info displayed

Description
Historical mode

Cumulative mode

1) Occurred

The date/time of alarm occurrence is displayed.

2) Message

The comment assigned to an alarm is displayed when the alarm occurs.

3) Restore

The date/time of alarm restoration is displayed.

The date/time when alarm occurrence was checked is displayed.
Alarm occurrence is checked by the corresponding touch switch.
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

4) Check

Message
Pwr. module error

Restore Check

Check

Message
Restore Check
Pwr. module error
19:00

(FFB4H)
Displays the total amount of time for which alarms were
generated in the past.

Cumulative time = t1 + t2 + t3
5) Cumulative
time

Status of alarm
occurrence
(X0: OFF ON)

t1
Alarm
occurred
(1st)

t2
Alarm
occurred
(2nd)

t3
Alarm
occurred
(3rd)

Time
6) Count

The number of alarm occurrence times is displayed.

Historical mode
In this mode, the data of the alarm is added to the GOT internal memory every time an alarm occurs. (The data are
added to the history every time an alarm occurs.)
GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000 : 3072
GT11
: 2048
GT10
: 1000
Cumulative mode
In this mode, the latest alarm status and the cumulative count and time of the alarms that occurred in the past are
calculated and displayed for each alarm type.

10 - 176

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Example: Examples of alarm display

This section shows examples of alarm history display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
ON
"Temp. error"
(M10:OFF ON)

ON
OFF

OFF

10

ON

"Fuse error"
(M20:OFF ON)

*1

15:30
3)

18:25
4)

19:00
5)
ALARM

11:30
12:00
1)
2)
Alarm confirmation
by the user*1

Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.

11

10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

(1) Historical mode

LEVEL

The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.

Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
Not collected in the historical mode.

12

1) "Temp. error" occurs.

Restore Check Cumulate Count

"Temp. error"
occurs!

PANELMETER

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

2) "Temp. error" is checked.

Restore Check Cumulate Count
12:00

13

"Temp. error" is checked.

Check (FFB4H)

LINE GRAPH

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

3) Restored from "Temp. error"

Restore Check Cumulate Count
15:30 12:00

Restoration date/time
is displayed.

14
TREND GRAPH

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again.

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25

Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

Restore Check Cumulate Count

15:30

12:00

A new line is added

and displayed.

15

5) Restored from "Temp. error"

Restore Check Cumulate Count
19:00
15:30 12:00

Restoration date/time
is displayed.

BAR GRAPH

Message
Temp. error
Temp. error
Fuse error

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01 18:25
04/06/01 11:30
04/06/01 10:25

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 177

(2) Cumulative mode

The information on the latest alarm status,the number of alarms that have occurred and the cumulative alarm
occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error

Restore Check Cumulate Count

00:00
1
00:00
1

"Temp. error" occurs!

Restore Check Cumulate Count

12:00 00:00
1
00:00
1

"Temp. error" is checked.

2) "Temp. error" is checked

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

Check (FFB4H)

3) Restored from "Temp. error"

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

Restore Check Cumulate Count

15:30 12:00 04:00
1

Restoration time and

cumulative time are
displayed.

4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

Restore Check Cumulate Count

04:00
2

5) Restored from "Temp. error"

Occurred
Message
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error

Restore Check Cumulate Count

19:00 04:35
2

The occurrence time when

the alarm occurred again
is displayed on the same
line of the alarm frequency is
increased by one.
Restoration time is
displayed.
The time during which
the alarm has been
generated is added to
the cumulative time.

Collecting and holding alarm data

(1) Collecting alarm data
The GOT collects alarm data at any time and saves the data in the GOT internal memory.
Alarm data are constantly collected and updated even while the monitor screen not including alarm history
display is displayed.

AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC

No. 25 D1 10
D2 20

Switch to another screen

10 - 178

10.5 Alarm History Display

AAA BBB CCC

AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC

The alarm data updated while

the other screen was displayed
are shown.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Deleting alarm data

Alarm data are deleted at the following timing.
(a) Power-off or reset of the GOT
(b) When the following settings are made within utilities
Item

Description

Communication
setting
GOT setup

Display

[Opening screen time], [Screen save backlight], [Language]

Operation

[Buzzer volume], [Window move buzzer], [Utility call key]

OS installation, project writing.

Debug & self

check

Self check

Main menu

Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button

ALARM

Program/data
control

[I/O check]

11

(d) Clear trigger device

Turning on the device specified at [History Clear Trigger] (Set on the [Option] tab) deletes all the alarms in
the restored status.
(e) Key operations of the touch switches for alarm history display.
Alarms in the restored status can be deleted using the following touch switches.

Delete (FFB6H)

Delete All (FFB7H) : Delete all the alarms in the restored status.

12

: Delete the alarms in the restored status one by one.

10.5.5 Useful operations and functions

(f)

LEVEL

Project data writing and OS installation, drive information delete and drive format

When the number of alarms occurred exceeds the upper limit (When the [Mode] is [Historical])
When [Clear the oldest history when the number of histories exceeds the specified value] is selected on the
[Option] tab, if the number of occurred alarms exceeds the upper limit, the older alarms are deleted from
the oldest one.

13
LINE GRAPH

Upper limit in total number of alarms occurred

GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000 : 3072
GT11
: 2048
GT10
: 1000

PANELMETER

(c)

10

[Channel No. (Ch No.) setting], [Communication settings], [RS232 5V power supply]

14
TREND GRAPH

Operation setting for the case where the maximum number of alarms is exceeded

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Alarm History dialog box (Option (Common tab))

(3) Holding alarm data under power failure

Alarm data can be held even if the GOT is powered off by saving them to a CF card.

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 179

 Detail display
(1) Usable screens (

10.5.3 Relevant Settings)

To display alarm causes and corrective actions in details, any of the following 3 screen types can be selected.
(a) Comment window
Comments registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comments such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the comment window.

Temperature error
of the line 1's
power module
Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Base screen 1

Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Base screen 1 + Comment window

(b) Base screen

The specified base screen is displayed.

Tank A

Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

90

40

60

Run Stop

Run Stop

Run Stop

Base screen 5

Base screen 1

(c)

Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C

Window screen
The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.

Feed material from the opening.

Occurred
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Base screen 1

10 - 180

10.5 Alarm History Display

Feed opening

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Base screen 1 + Window screen 10

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Display method

Select either of the following 2 methods for detail display.
(a) One touch (
10.5.2 Alarm history display setting)
Display the detail display by touching the alarm history display item directly.

10
Temperature error of
the line 1's power
module
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

ALARM

Occurrence
04/6/1 16:13:01
04/6/1 15:51:38
04/6/1 10:25:16

11

LEVEL

(b) Touch switch (

10.5.5 Useful operations and functions)
Create a touch switch for alarm history to display the detailed data.

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

Display the cursor

Display

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

Move the cursor (using Up or Down)

to the target alarm.

04/6/1 10:25:16

Oil error

Display

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

PANELMETER

Display

12

Make the details displayed

13
LINE GRAPH

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Message

14
TREND GRAPH

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Occurrence

Replace
the fuse of
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
line 1's power
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
module.

15
BAR GRAPH

Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred
Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 181

10.5.5

Useful operations and functions

Description on touch switches for alarm history display

Touch switches for displaying alarm history can be read from the library for GT Designer3.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying alarm history.

Touch switches for alarm history display

Touch switch

Key code

Description
Show/Hide the cursor

Show cursor
FFB0H

Hide cursor
FFB1H

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

Show the cursor!

If the cursor is hidden:
The cursor moves to the previous/next page. (page by page)

Move cursor upward

Occurrend
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore Check

Occurred
04/06/01 13:54
04/06/01 12:23
04/06/01 11:11

Message
Fuse error
Internal pressure error
Motor error

Restore Check
14:00
13:15

15:10

14:50

FFB2H

Moved to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line (line by line)

Move cursor downward

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

FFB3H

Move the cursor!

(Continued to the next page)

10 - 182

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
Key code

Description

COMMENT DISPLAY

Touch switch

The alarm status is changed to "checked."

Display date/time of selected data (check)
FFB4H

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

10
FFB5H

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

14:50

ALARM

Display date/time of all data (check all)

The alarm status is changed to "Checked"!

A restored alarm or all restored alarms are deleted.

FFB6H

Clear all alarm data (delete all)

FFB7H

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore
17:15

Check

15:10

14:50

Occurred
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

11

LEVEL

Clear the selected alarm data (delete)

12
PANELMETER

The restored alarm is deleted!

The detailed screen of the selected alarms is displayed.
Occurred

Message

04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
Temp.15:20
error
04/06/01
module.
04/06/01
14:25

Message
Temp. error
at
power
Fuse
error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

13

Display detail

LINE GRAPH

FFB8H

Check power module.

Resets the selected alarm data. (Changes the device value to off or the reset value
according to the setting on the device tab)
Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

FFB9H

15
Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore
17:15

Check

15:10

14:50

The selected alarm is reset!

(Continued to the next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Occurred
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

BAR GRAPH

Reset the selected alarm data *1

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

TREND GRAPH

14

The detailed screen is displayed!

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 183

Touch switch

Key code

Description
Stores alarm data to the CF card.
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Save alarm contents to CF card

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

FFBBH

The data are saved to the memory card!

Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in the
ladder monitor screen.AiOne-touch ladder jump function)
Occurrence

Message

04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore

Check

15:10

14:50

Display ladder
FFBCH

M999

K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2

Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)
For details of *1 refer to the following.

*1 Resetting user alarms

To change the device value to the OFF status or the reset value by a touch switch, set "ON" in [RST] on the [Basic]
tab.
10.5.1 Alarm history settings

HINT
(1) Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status
Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function differently depending on the
display status.
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per page basis).
If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).
(2) Directly touching alarm history display data
The detailed screen of the selected alarm can be displayed by setting [Single Touch Operation] on the [Style]
tab.
10.5.2 Alarm history display setting
Occurrence
04/06/01 16:51
04/06/01 15:20
04/06/01 14:25

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Restore Check

15:10

14:50

Occurrence
Message
Replace
fuseTemp.
on error
04/06/01 the
16:51
the
power15:20
module.
04/06/01
Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25

Oil error

Restore Check

15:10

14:50

The detailed screen is displayed.

(3) Touch switch setting method

For details, refer to the following.
2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

10 - 184

10.5 Alarm History Display

Precautions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.5.6

This section describes precautions to be taken when using alarm history display.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be placed (set) on one screen.
Only one object can be set for the alarm history display.

10

(2) Usable comments

The alarm history display uses comments registered in the basic comment or comment group.

(3) Usable screen

ALARM

The alarm history display can be set on the base screen only.

(4) Devices to be set

Only one set device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but set devices have to be the
same.

11

(5) The comment window cannot be displayed while the key window is displayed.
LEVEL

Erase the key window to display the comment window.

12

Window screen
for alarm history
Key window

PANELMETER

1000

Numerical input Alarm history display

(6) When using other objects at the same time

(a) The following objects cannot be set on the screen where the alarm history function has been set.
Data list function object
User alarm display function object with the up/down scroll function setting
(b) Precautions for the case when the alarm history and alarm display are displayed simultaneously
If the touch switches for user alarm display are set for the user alarm display and any other screen, they
may function for the alarm history.
Example: When the touch switches for alarm list are set for the other screen (overlap window2)

04/12/01 10:25 Internal pressure error

04/12/01 13:25 Oil pressure error

Occurred
04/11/05 10:25
04/11/05 12:05

Message
Temp. error
Fuse error

04/11/05 12:35

Oil error

Rest. Check
11:25 10:45
12:28

TREND GRAPH

Up
Down

14

Alarm display
(set to overlap window 1)

15

Alarm history display

(set to base screen)

BAR GRAPH

Delete
Cursor ON

LINE GRAPH

13

As the base screen has higher precedence,

the touch switches function for alarm history.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.5 Alarm History Display

10 - 185

(7) Display of occurred time, checked time, and restored time

For the occurred time, GOT's clock data are displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions on the clock function that is controlling GOT's clock data, refer to the
following.
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

(8) The character display of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the pattern color of
the screen color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab is set to white.
(Characters are hidden since the color of the text and cursor is the same with the screen color.)
To display the characters of the row on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the pattern color of the screen
color or [Plate Color] of the [Style] tab to other than white.

(9) Timing when alarm history file is newly created (overwritten)

If the alarm history setting screen is opened and then closed with the [OK] button, writing the project data to the
GOT disables the view of past alarm history. (Whether the setting is changed or not on the screen, the past
alarm history cannot be viewed by the operation above.)
Furthermore, when the alarm history is stored to the CF card with the above GOT, the history data is cleared.
(The file is newly created (overwritten).)
Then, the CSV file is also overwritten.
To view alarm history after the setting is changed, make setting before the operation above so that the alarm
history data is stored to CSV file for backup.
By the backup, the alarm history can be viewed on personal computer even after alarms on the GOT are
cleared/overwriteen.
(To prevent data mismatch, the alarm history data file (Extension: DAT) cannot be displayed on the GOT to
which new project data are written.)

(10) When using GT10

Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.

Precautions for use

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application functions
for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer3.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

10 - 186

10.5 Alarm History Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

10.6 User Alarm Display

10

User alarm is a function that displays user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
When multiple devices turn on, the comments are displayed as alarm messages in the set display order.

ALARM

M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON

M100 Temp. error

M100
M100 Temp. error

M101 Fuse error

Replace the fuse of

M101
error
M10
1 Fuse
the
power
module
with new one.

11

Detail

LEVEL

Detail

HINT

12
PANELMETER

Comments to be displayed as user alarm

The comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register the comments that will be displayed on the user alarm as basic comment.
(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

13
Displaying the number of alarms occurred

searching a device automatically

(One-touch ladder jump function)
2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

10.6.1 Settings

14

Alarm Status
02/02/01 10:25 Machine error
02/02/01 13:25 Line 1 error

M999

K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2

Temp. error
Fuse error

Ladder
display

Alarm event count 6

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Timing belt error

The number of all alarms occurred is

displayed on the alarm list display.

15
BAR GRAPH

A device corresponding
to a cause of an alarm is
automatically searched.

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Displays the ladder monitor

function by touch operation.

M100
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105

TREND GRAPH

Starting the ladder monitor function on alarm list display and

LINE GRAPH

Example:

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 187

10.6.1

Settings

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the user alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged user alarm display to display the setting dialog box.

[Alarm Display]

[User Alarm Display] from the menu.

Device tab
Set the number of monitor devices and view format (Number of Comments/Device).

Item

Description

Alarm Points

Set the number of monitor devices.

The number of devices that can be set varies according to the settings in [Device No.] in [Device].
In [Continuous] setting : 8192 points (Up to 512 points for GT10)
In [Random] setting
: 512 points ([Random] cannot be set for GT10.)

Number of
Comments

Set the number of comments to be displayed.

Plural : Display plural comments in frame.
Single : Display only one comment in frame.

Model

Set the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs. (Setting range: 1 to 32767)
The comment No. (Basic comment) set here is assigned in head device of device tab.
Continuous comment No. will be set respectively according to the number of monitor devices from the comment No. of
head comment No. (Basic comment)
Head Comment
No.

Example) Head device: M100, head comment No.: 1

Monitor device

Comment No.(Basic comment)

M100

1 Temp. error

Head comment No.

M101

2 Fuse error

M102

3 Oil error

The comment of continued

No. is set from head comment No.

(Continued to next page)

10 - 188

10.6 User Alarm Display

Item

Description

Model

Select the method of displaying the detailed alarm comment information.

This item is available only when [Plural] is selected in [Number of Comments].
(For GT10, [Window Screen] is not available.)
Not Display
: No detailed information to be displayed.

Device No.

Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.

(For GT10, [Random] is not available.)
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered from the set device.
Random
: Devices are numbered at random.

Generated Number
Storage

ALARM

11

LEVEL

Detail Display No.

This item is available when [Comment Window], [Base Screen], or [Window Screen] is selected
in [Display Destination] of the [Device].
Select the method of displaying the comment window/base screen/window screen used for
providing detailed information of alarm.
Continuous : Devices are consecutively numbered starting from the set comment
No.(Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No.
Random
: Devices are numbered at random.

Device

10

Comment Window*1: A comment window is displayed to provide detailed information.

A registered comment is used for the window.
(Register comments as basic comment.)
Base Screen
: The detailed information is displayed on a base screen.
The base screen specified by detailed displayed No. of the alarm device
is used.
Window Screen
: Display the window screen (Overlap window1) by details display.
Display the window screen that is set in the detailed No. of alarm
device.

12

Select this item to write the number of occurred alarms (the number of devices that turned ON)
into the word device.
After selecting this item, set the device to store alarms.

PANELMETER

Display Destination

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

This item is available when [Comment Window], [Base Screen], or [Window Screen] is selected
in [Display Destination] of [Device].
Select this item to switch the detailed information on the screen according to the value of one
device.
The comment No. (Basic comment)/base screen No./window screen No. set as the detailed No.
of alarm device is added to the device (offset device) value set here.
(The data size of the set device is fixed to 16 bits)
For the details about offset function, refer to the following.

13
LINE GRAPH

Detail No. Offset

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

15
BAR GRAPH

For details of *1, refer to the following.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Object Name

14

This item is available when [Comment Window], [Base Screen], or [Window Screen] is selected
in [Display Destination] of the [Device].
Select this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the user alarm.

TREND GRAPH

Single Touch
Operation

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 189

*1 Display Method of Comment Window

(1) Number of characters available for comment window

GOT

Number of characters available for comment window

GT1695, GT1685, GT1675, GT1665, GT1595, GT1585, GT157 ,

GT156 , GT155 (GT1555-V only), GT SoftGOT1000
GT155 (GT1555-Q and GT1550-Q only), GT115
Handy GOT, GT105 , GT104
GT1030, GT1020

39 characters

11 lines (429 characters)

23 characters

7 lines (161 characters)

18 characters

3 lines (54 characters)

(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen

The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.

(3) Comment text is displayed as follows

Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse and blink are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.

(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new line.
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed for the
comment.

Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

When a comment is registered

10 - 190

10.6 User Alarm Display

Preparing for operation

Please wait for about 6 minutes.

Comment window display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Style tab
Set the view format (Number of comments/sort/shape).

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Description

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Frame Color
Plate Color

Plate Color

Text Size

13

Select the size of text to be displayed.

When (1 x 1) is set, the font size is 8 x 16 dots.)
When displaying comments that is set to high quality font in Basic comment as high quality font,
set the font size to the multiple of even number.
If set to the multiple of odd number, it will not be displayed as high quality font.

Display Format

LINE GRAPH

Frame Color

1 to 8

14

1 to 8
Select the text position.
: Select the horizontal position.

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

Alignment

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Shape Settings

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

12
PANELMETER

Shape

Model

TREND GRAPH

Item

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 191

Item

Description

Model

Select the sort of comment.

(For GT10, [Oldest] and [Latest] are not available.)
Ascending : display according to the order of the smallest to the biggest.
Descending : display according to the order of the biggest to the smallest.
Oldest
: display according to the order of the oldest to the latest.
Latest
: display according to the order of the newest to the oldest.
When monitor is set randomly, [Ascending] and [Descending] are based on the setting order of
the device.
Example) When making following settings in device tab.

Display comment
Temp. error
Fuse error

Sort

Oil error
Display Format

Displayed in [Ascending]
M100 ON
M101 ON
M102 ON

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Displayed in [Decending]
M102 ON
M101 ON
M100 ON

Oil error
Fuse error
Temp. error

When [Oldest] or [Latest] is selected, set the [Store Memory] on the [Trigger] tab for collecting
data of the alarm occurrence date.

Date Display (yy/

mm/dd hh: mm:
ss)

Display Start Row

Select this item to display the date when an alarm occurs.

Date is displayed in the form of "yy/mm/dd: hh: mm: ss"
(Year is displayed with the last 2 digits, and hour is displayed in the 24-hour system.)

04/06/01 09:30:40
Space
Space

Temp. error

20 digits

Comment

Select this item to specify the display start line when setting multiple-line comments. After selecting this item, set the
number of each line.
Fixed : Set by direct input (1 to 32767)
Device : Select this option to set the device value to the start line No.
Then, set the device. (
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)
When comment appears as blank, check if the value set as the start line No. is within the number of created comment
lines.

Number of Display
Rows

This item is available only when [Single] of [Number of Comments] is displayed in the [Device] tab.
Select this item to specify the number of displayed lines when setting multiple-line comments.
After selecting this item, set the values of each line.
Fixed : Set by direct input. (1 to 32767)
Device : Select this option to set the device value to the number of comment lines.
Then, set the device. (

10 - 192

10.6 User Alarm Display

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Extended tab
Set the security, offset.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Item

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

PANELMETER

Security Level

Description

(Fundamentals) 4.7 Security Setting

Comment No.
Offset

Select this item to switch the comment on the user alarm according to the device value.
The device value set here is added to the comment No. (Basic comment) that has been set in [Head Comment No.]
on the [Device] tab.
(The data size of the device is fixed to 16 bits.)

13

For details on offset function, refer to the following.

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Select this item to operate the user alarm by using a touch switch for which the key code is set for the user alarm.
After selecting this item, arrange the above touch switch.
Scroll ON

10.6.4 Useful operations and functions

14

Comment No.
Device

TREND GRAPH

Note that this item is not available in the following cases:

The data list and alarm history are set to be displayed on the same screen
Multiple user alarms including the one with [Scroll ON] selected are placed on a single screen.
Specify the device to store the comment No. of the alarm.
For one comment only, the comment No. of the displayed alarm is stored.
For multiple comments, the comment No. of the alarm at the cursor position is stored.
To display the cursor in the row of the occurred alarm, the following settings are required.
Select [Display the cursor in a selected row].
Place the touch switch for the alarm display (Key code switch (Cursor display)) on the screen that the alarm display
is set.
For how to set the touch switch, refer to the following.

15

Layer

Category

This item is available when [Single] is selected for [Number of Comments] on the [Device] tab.
When this item is selected, the cursor can be displayed by touching the displayed alarm.
(This allows displaying of the cursor for the alarm without setting a touch switch.)
Set the [Comment No. Device] item to store the comment number of touched alarms to the device,

16

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Display the cursor

in a selected row

BAR GRAPH

10.6.4 Useful operations and functions

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 193

 Trigger tab
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
For the details about trigger setting, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Item

Description
Select this item to collect the alarm occurrence time even when a screen where the user alarm is not set is displayed.

Store Memory

10.6.3 Store memory)

The alarm occurrence status are always monitored and stored to the GOT internal memory.
After selecting this item, set the cycle to collect data in [Trigger Type]. (1 to 3600 s)

Trigger Type

Select a condition to display/activate the object.

When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 s) in 1-second unit.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Rise
Fall
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise

For details of each item, refer to the following.

Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

10 - 194

10.6 User Alarm Display

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

Relevant Settings

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.6.2

The user alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Carry out check for overlapping objects within

GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device : System Signal 1-1.b9)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device : System Signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying the key code that is assigned to the input key when a value is entered
by the ASCII input or touch switch. (Write device)

[Key Code Input]

Model
LEVEL

Set description
[System Signal 1-1]

12
PANELMETER

Function
Turning off the key input signal. (Read device : System Signal 1-1.b3)

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 195

10.6.3

Actions

This function displays alarm occurrence time and user-registered comments as alarm messages.
The comments used as alarm messages must be registered as the basic comment in advance.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

Number of displayed alarms

Select whether to display multiple alarm occurrences (with plural comments) or only one (with single comment).
Display range

Number of comment: "Plural"

Number of comment: "Single"

04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

04/6/1 13:52:15

Display range

Machine No.1 is ove

Cancel [Supply stops] and restart supply.

One alarm is displayed in one line.

The text out of the line will not be displayed.
If a comment is longer than two lines, only the first
line is displayed.

The texts will be continuously displayed in the second

line.
Even if the comment size exceeds two lines, the texts
from the second line can be displayed, providing it does
not exceed the display range.

HINT
Display method for multi line comment (
10.6.1 Settings)
Any line of the multi line comment can be specified to display.
Example) Display any line of the 6-line comment that has been registered
Multi line comment contents
Inspection1
Conv. insp.

Method of displaying comment

Inspection2
Proc. prod. insp.

Start line of display

Number of display lines

: 3rd
: 2(only when the number of
comment is set as "one")

Inspection3
Line insp.

Number of comment: "Plural"

04/6/1 13:52:20
04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30

Inspection2
Temp. error
Fuse error

Number of comment: "Single"

Inspection2
04/6/1 13:52:20
Processed products inspection

Only one line can be randomly specified to be displayed. The range of lines to be displayed can be specified.

10 - 196

10.6 User Alarm Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Sort
Set the order to display alarm occurrences.
It can be set by the device No. order (ascending/descending) and alarm occurrence order (Oldest /Latest).
Example) Display alarms by "Latest" sort
Alarm Status

10

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Timing belt error

ALARM

04/6/1 11:35:52
04/6/1 09:45:30
04/6/1 08:15:45
04/6/1 05:22:35
04/6/1 04:33:12
04/6/1 02:30:16

Number of comment: "Plural"

11

Number of comment: "Single"

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

LEVEL

M2
M4
M0
M3
M5
M1

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

Scroll on
Checking if the alarm comment exceeds the display range is done by scrolling the user alarm with touch switches
Create the touch switches for user alarm.

PANELMETER

12

13

10.6.4 Useful operations and functions

04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error

04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove

heat
Cancel [Stop Supply] and restart the supply.

Scroll down

Scroll up

14

Scroll down

TREND GRAPH

Scroll up

LINE GRAPH

Number of comment: "Single"

Number of comment: "Plural"

Scroll up

Scroll down

Display 1
line by
each
scrolling.

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

Scroll up

Switch to
the next
alarm display.

16

Scroll down

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error

BAR GRAPH

15

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 197

 Details of display (only for [Plural] number of comment)

(1) Applicable screen (

10.6.1 Settings)

To display the cause and corrective action of alarm in details, select a screen from the following three types.
(a) Comment window
Display the user-registered comment in a comment window.
The comment different from that in user alarm comment can be displayed as a detailed comment.
Temp. error at the
power supply module
on Line 1

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Base Screen1

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Base Screen1+Comment Window

(b) Base screen

Display the specified base screen.
Tank A

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

90
RUN

Base Screen1

(c)

Tank control screen

Tank B
Tank C

STOP

40
RUN

STOP

60
RUN

STOP

Base Screen5

Window Screen
Display the specified window screen (overlap window 1).

Feed material from the feed

opening.
Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Base Screen1

10 - 198

10.6 User Alarm Display

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Base Screen1+Window Screen10

Detailed alarm display type screen

Screen that includes user alarm

Comment window

Base screen
Overlap window 1

Window screen

Base screen

Simultaneous display

Switch

Switch

COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Screen that includes user alarm and the corresponding detailed alarm type screen.

10

Overlap window 2
Overlap window 3

Simultaneous display

Overlap window 4

Simultaneous display

Simultaneous display

ALARM

Overlap window 5
Superimpose window 1
Superimpose window 2

Switch
: Switch the screen that includes user alarm to the corresponding detailed alarm display type screen.
Simultaneous display : Display the detailed alarm display type screen keeping the screen that includes user alarm on the display.

11

By setting [Detail No. Offset] on the [Device] tab, an offset value for the following details display can be
specified. (
10.6.1 Settings)
No. of the basic comment that will be displayed on the comment window
No. of the Base screen and Window screen
While monitoring by the GOT, the comment No. or screen No. can be switched using the device.

LEVEL

(3) Specifying a comment No. to be displayed or offset value for screen No. (Offset for Datailed No.)

12

Comment No. (Basic comment)

Comment

Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 1.

Check the power supply module.

Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 1.

13

11

Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 2.

Check the power supply module.

12

Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 2.

LINE GRAPH

PANELMETER

Example) When the device for [Detail No. Offset] is set to "D0", and the following comments are registered.

14

04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

Comment No.1 is displayed

10
TREND GRAPH

Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 1.
Check the power supply module.

D0

Temperature error at the power

supply module on Line 2.
Check the power supply module.

04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

15

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

BAR GRAPH

Comment No.11 is displayed

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

D0

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 199

HINT
To match the user alarm display with details screen:
The comment on the user alarm cannot be changed by using [Detail No. Offset].
The offset value for comment No. (Basic comment) on the user alarm is specified in [Comment No. Offset] on the
[Extended] tab. (

10.6.1 Settings)

Match display the user alarm with the comment on the details screen by using [Detail No. Offset] and [Comment
No. Offset].

(4) Display method

Select the method for details display from the following two types.
(a) Single Touch Operation (

10.6.1 Settings)

Touch the user alarm directly to display the detailed information.

Temperature error at
the power supply
module on Line 1
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:26 Oil error

(b) Touch switch (

10.6.4 Useful operations and functions)

Create touch switches for user alarm to display the detailed information.

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error

Cursor ON

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

Display the cursor

10 - 200

10.6 User Alarm Display

Cursor ON

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

Move (up/down) the cursor to

the alarm for details display.

04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error

Replace the fuse at

04/6/1
15:51:38
Fuse error
the
power
supply
04/6/1 10:25:16
module
on LineOil
1. error
Display

Up

Delete

Down

Detail

Display the detailed information

Select [Store Memory] when collecting the information on alarm occurrence date/time even when a screen where the
user alarm is not set is displayed.
The GOT monitors the alarm occurrence status at all times and stores the information in the GOT internal memory.
[Store Memory] is provided on the [Trigger] tab.
10.6.1 Settings

COMMENT DISPLAY

Store memory

10

Example: The following shows differences of the user alarm display with store memory setting enabled or disabled,
when the screen switches and the alarm devices turn ON/OFF at the timing below.

11

04/6/1 12:10:15
Display on the screen
including alarm list
display

Display Screen
No.10

Display Screen
No.20

ALARM

With the settings in [Store Memory], the alarm occurrence date/time is displayed as follows:
Store Memory enabled : The alarms are displayed with the date and time when the alarm actually occurred.
Store Memory disabled : The alarms are displayed with the time and date when the screen is displayed.

Display Screen
No.10

LEVEL

ON (04/6/1 10:15:35)
M100 OFF
ON (04/6/1 11:38:08)
Alarm
Device

12

M101 OFF

PANELMETER

ON (04/6/1 09:00:22)
M102 OFF

04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error

13

04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error

04/6/1 10:15:35 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:38:08 M101 Fuse error

LINE GRAPH

Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory enabled)

14

04/6/1 12:10:15 M100 Temp. error

04/6/1 12:10:15 M101 Fuse error

15

04/6/1 12:10:15 M102 Oil error

Alarm occurrence time shows date and time

when the screen has changed to Screen No.10
(all alarms show the same date and time)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Display Screen No.10

(Store Memory disabled)

BAR GRAPH

04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Oil error

TREND GRAPH

Alarm occurrence date and time can be

displayed correctly.

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 201

POINT
(1) The timing when the data stored in memory is cleared.
The data stored in memory is cleared when the GOT is reset or powered off.
(2) The timing when the alarm occurrence date/time is cleared with the Store Memory disabled.
When "Store Memory" is disabled, alarm occurrence time information is not collected at any of the timings
below, causing the collected alarm occurrence time to be cleared:
The screen including the user alarm is hidden and then displayed again.
The screen is switched to the base screen while the user alarm is on the superimpose window.
The security switching is made.
The language switching is made.
The machine No. switching is made.
The offset switching is made.

10 - 202

10.6 User Alarm Display

Useful operations and functions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.6.4

Touch switch for displaying user alarm

Touch switches for displaying the user alarm can be read from the library for GT Designer3.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for displaying user alarm.

10

Screen example 2

ALARM

Screen example 1

Touch switch

Key code

LEVEL

11

Description
Scroll the display up/down one line.
This function is available only when the cursor is hidden.

12

00F2H

Scroll down by one line

00F3H

04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17
04/06/01 13:54:45

Fuse error
Oil error
Fuel error

PANELMETER

Scroll up by one line

13
LINE GRAPH

Scroll down by one line!

Show/Hide the cursor.

FFB1H

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

04/06/01 16:51:15

Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Fuse error
Oil error

14
TREND GRAPH

Hide cursor

04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Show the cursor!

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

FFB0H

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Show cursor

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 203

Touch switch

Key code

Description
If the cursor is hidden:
The cursor moves to the previous/next page.(page by page)
04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

04/06/01 13:54:45
04/06/01 12:23:11
04/06/01 11:11:12

Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Motor error

Move cursor upward

FFB2H

Move to the next page!

If the cursor is shown:
The cursor moves up/down one line. (line by line)
04/06/01 16:51:15

Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Fuse error
Oil error

04/06/01 16:51:15

Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Fuse error
Oil error

Move cursor downward

FFB3H

Move the cursor!

Display the screen for providing details on the selected alarm.
04/06/01 16:51:15

Temp. error

04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

Fuse error
Oil error

04/06/01 16:51:15

Temp. error

Display detail
FFB8H
04/06/01
15:20:41
Fuseaterror
Abnormal
temperature
04/06/01
14:25:17
Oil error
the power
supply module.

Check the power supply

module.

Display detail!
Searches alarm device automatically by coil-search, and displays the result in the
ladder monitor screen. (One-touch ladder jump function)
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error

Display ladder
FFBCH

M999

K
MOV 1 D1
K
MOV 2 D2

Ladder monitor screen is displayed!

(The specified device in ladder is displayed.)

10 - 204

10.6 User Alarm Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

9
POINT
Enabling the touch switch to be used for displaying user alarm:
Select [Scroll ON] on the [Extended] tab to use the touch switch for displaying the user alarm.
10.6.1 Settings

10

(2) Directly touching alarm history display data

The detailed screen of the selected alarm can be displayed by setting [Single Touch Operation] on the
[Device] tab.
10.6.1 Settings
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error

12

04/06/01 16:51:15
Temp. error
Replace
fuse at the
04/06/01 the
15:20:41
Fuse error
power supply module.
04/06/01 14:25:17
Oil error

PANELMETER

04/06/01 16:51:15
04/06/01 15:20:41
04/06/01 14:25:17

11

LEVEL

(1) Touch switches behaving differently depending on the display status

Move cursor upward (FFB2H) and Move cursor downward (FFB3H) function differently depending on the
display status.
If the cursor is hidden, the display is moved to the previous/next page (on a per page basis).
If the cursor is shown, the cursor is moved up or down (on a per line basis).

ALARM

HINT

Display detail

(3) Touch switch setting method

For details, refer to the following.

13
LINE GRAPH

2.8 Setting Key Code Switch

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 205

10.6.5

Precautions

This section provides the precautions to be taken when using user alarm.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be placed (set) on one screen.
Up to 24 user alarm objects can be set.

(2) When [Store Memory] is selected

(a) Up to 16 user alarm objects can be set in the whole project when [Store Memory] is set.
(b) Up to 8192 alarm list objects can be set in the whole projects as the devices applicable for monitoring by
[Store Memory], regardless of the preset number of user alarms.

(3) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the screen pattern
color or [Plate Color] of the Style tab is set to white.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen pattern color or
[Plate Color] of the Style tab to other than white.
(Fundamentals) 3.7.1 Creating a new screen
10.6.1 Style tab

(4) When using GT10

Both the user alarm and alarm history cannot be set on one screen.

(5) Precautions when selecting [Random] for [Device No.]

When selecting [Random] for [Device No.], set the same quantity of [Alarm Device] as the value specified for
[Alarm Points].
If the number of set [Alarm Device] is less than the value specified for [Alarm Points], the user alarms are not
displayed on the GOT.

Precautions for use

(1) Display of comment window
When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.

Comment
window
Key window
1000

Value input

User alarm

(2) Displaying the alarm occurrence time

To check alarm occurrence time, display the GOT clock data.
For precautions on the clock function that controls GOT time data and relevant restrictions, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

10 - 206

10.6 User Alarm Display

(4) Touch switch for user alarm

(a) Setting screen
Make sure to set the touch switch for user alarm and user alarm in the same screen.
If not, the touch switch may operate instead of the user alarm, when both alarm history and data list are
displayed.
(b) Setting only the touch switch on another screen
To set only the touch switch for user alarm on another screen, make the setting by referring to the following
priority order:
Priority order corresponding to the touch switch screen

11

Screen for which touch switch has been set

Base screen

10

ALARM

When [Scroll ON] on the [Extended] tab is selected, the following objects cannot be set in the same screen.
Data list function object
Alarm history function object

COMMENT DISPLAY

(3) When used with other objects

High

Call screen 1 to 5

Priority Order

LEVEL

Superimpose window 1
Superimpose window 2
Overlap window 1
Overlap window 2

12
PANELMETER

Overlap window 3
Overlap window 4

Low

Overlap window 5

Example) When touch switch has been set for other screens (overlap window 2)

Cursor ON

Down

LINE GRAPH

Up

04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error

04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error

Occurred
04/6/1 13:25:49
04/6/1 12:15:30
04/6/1 10:45:30

Message
Restore Check
Temp. error
13:30
Fuse error
12:28
Oil error
11:26
11:15

14

User alarm
(Set in the overlap window1)

TREND GRAPH

Cursor OFF

13

Alarm history
(Set in the base screen)

15
BAR GRAPH

As the base screen has higher priority,

operates it as the touch switch of alarm history.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.6 User Alarm Display

10 - 207

10.7 System Alarm Display

System alarm is a function used to display error codes and error messages when error occurs in the GOT, controller or
the network.
Displaying system alarm allows a user to check how the error occurred and its cause.

Error
occurance

400 Unable to communicate with CPU

9 AC down error
803 Transient error

HINT
Comments to display
Comments to display in system alarms do not need registration (Registered in GOT).

10 - 208

10.7 System Alarm Display

16:40:30

Settings

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the system alarm display is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged system alarm display to display the setting dialog box.

[Alarm Display]

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.7.1

[System Alarm Display] from the menu.

10
POINT

400 Unable to communicate with CPU

9
AC down error
803 Transient error

16:40:30

ALARM

Display field adjusting method

To prevent than alarm message from being truncated on display, adjust the display field as follows.
If the GOT screen size is smaller than the value described below, adjust the font size.

11

Set in 3 rows.
(Use 48 dots as vertical size in 3 rows
when text size is 1 1 times.)

LEVEL

Error message (maximum 64 digits) Occurrence time (fixed to 8 digits)

Display with 576 dots when text size is 1 1 times.
Increase the size to display the occurrence time at the right end.

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.7 System Alarm Display

10 - 209

Item

Description

Text Size

Select the text size of the error message to be displayed. (0.5 to 8)

Set a shape for the object.
When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

Shape

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape Settings
Frame Color

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Plate Color

Security Level

Frame Color
Plate Color

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Layer

Category

??

10 - 210

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 3.8.2 Layer display switching operation
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).
Up to 30 characters can be input.

10.7 System Alarm Display

Model

Relevant Settings

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.7.2

The system alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1 GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

Resetting the system alarm or system information (GOT error code, GOT error
detecting signal). (Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)

Set description

Model
LEVEL

Function

[System Signal 1-1]

12
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Set description

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (Network error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS264

LINE GRAPH

GS263

13

14
TREND GRAPH

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (CPU error) occurred.
(Write device)

15
BAR GRAPH

GS262

Model

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Function
Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (GOT error) occurred.
(Write device)

PANELMETER

GOT internal devices

10.7 System Alarm Display

10 - 211

10.7.3

Actions

Types of system alarm

System alarm has the following three types:
GOT error
: A GOT error is displayed as an alarm
CPU error
: A controller error is displayed as an alarm
Network error : A network error is displayed as an alarm

Method of collecting data

Even while the screen that does not include system alarm is displayed, data are always collected every 3 seconds
and stored into GOT.

Displayed information
The error code, error message as well as error time will be displayed in system alarm.
The error code and error message for display are provided by default within GOT. Therefore, they do not need to be
created by user.
400 Unable to communicate with CPU
9
AC down error
803 Transient error
Error code

Error message

16:40:30

Occured time
(Only for GOT error display)

Method of displaying alarm

(1) Maximum number of alarms can be displayed
Each system alarm is displayed in one line type; up to 3 lines can be displayed.
The alarm display is updated when new alarm is detected.
Example: When new alarm (Parameter error) is detected by controller
400 Unable to communicate with CPU
9
AC down error
803 Transient error

16:40:30

400 Unable to communicate with CPU

104 Parameter error
803 Transient error

16:40:30

Error display of controller is refreshed.(9

104)

(2) Display priority

When the display range is lower than 2 lines, alarms will be displayed in the following order.
1) GOT error
2) CPU error
3) Network error
When the number of alarm occurrence exceeds the display range, the lower priority alarms will not be displayed.
The error code, error message and error time beyond a single line will not be displayed.

Alarm causes for each alarm type and actions for error code
For the details, refer to the following manuals.
Users Manual for the GOT used

10 - 212

10.7 System Alarm Display

Precautions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.7.4

This section explains the precautions for using the logging function.

Precautions for drawing

Maximum number of system alarms that can be arranged (set) in one screen
One system alarm can be arranged (set).

10

Precautions for use

(1) Controllers for which system alarms are not displayed on GOT

ALARM

Errors that occurred in the controllers indicated below are not displayed by the system alarm of GOT.
Details of errors must be checked at the controller.
SIEMENS PLC CPU
YAMATAKE temperature controller
RKC temperature controller
Inverter

11

(2) Deletion of system alarms on GOT

LEVEL

(a) The GOT error will not be cleared even if the alarm cause is eliminated.
To clear the message, make sure to turn the following device of system information function ON.
GOT error reset message (system signal 1-1. b13)

(3) Displaying alarm occurred time

For alarm occurred time, displays the GOT clock data.
For precautions and restrictions for the clock function that manages GOT clock data, refer to the following.

12
PANELMETER

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

(b) The message of a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit, MELSECNET/10
communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be cleared until the GOT is powered
OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.

13

(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

(4) Text and background color

LINE GRAPH

As the text color for system alarm is fixed to white, set the plate color to non-white.

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.7 System Alarm Display

10 - 213

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not
(regardless of the display screen).
Since the display can be flown from right to left, even a long comment can be displayed all.

POINT
Before setting advanced alarm popup display
This section explains the advanced alarm popup display of the advanced alarm function.
Read the following before setting advanced alarm popup display.
10.1.2 Advanced alarm function

Advanced Alarm Function

Advanced Alarm Settings
Advanced User
Alarm Observation

Advanced System
Alarm Observation

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

Advanced Alarm Display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 214

Advanced User
Alarm Display

Advanced System
Alarm Display

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

User

System

Advanced user
alarm

Advanced
system alarm

User

Advanced user
alarm

System

Advanced
system alarm

Before setting

This section describes the setting and function needed for using the advanced alarm popup display.

Displayable alarm types and settings

(1) Alarm types
For advanced alarm popup display, advanced user alarms and advanced system alarms can be displayed.
Advanced alarm popup display is set as follows.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.8.1

10

(a) Setting of advanced alarm popup display

Select the alarm type displayed by advanced alarm popup display.
ALARM

10.8.2 Settings
Select the alarm type displayed

LEVEL

11

12
PANELMETER

(b) Auxiliary setting for each screen

Set whether to display popup display and the position of the popup display for each base screen.
Set the advanced alarm popup display in the [Screen Property] dialog box.
For details of this procedure, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 3.7.1 Creating a new screen

13
(1) When the display position overlaps other objects
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot be
operated. Therefore, set the object so that it does not overlap other objects.
(2) Switching of display position by touch operation
The position of advanced alarm popup display can also be switched by touch operation.
For details, refer to the following.

LINE GRAPH

HINT

14
TREND GRAPH

10.8.4 Useful operations and functions

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 215

(2) Settings required for using advanced alarm popup display

Set the alarm displayed on the advanced user alarm observation screen.
(a) To display advanced user alarms
Select [Popup Display] in the advanced user alarm observation screen.
10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display
Displays the alarm of the alarm ID on
which "Popup Display" is checked

HINT
The purpose of selecting [Popup Display]
This setting is to select whether to use popup display when displaying the advanced user alarms of multiple alarm
IDs.
The advanced user alarms can be displayed with one alarm ID refined by using a device.
10.8.4 Useful operations and functions

(b) To display advanced system alarms

Select [Target] on the advanced system alarm observation screen.
10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display
Displays the advanced system
alarm to which "Target" is checked

10 - 216

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Alarms displayed by popup display

With the advanced popup display, an alarm of the "Occurred" status (including "Chk") is displayed.
When the alarm becomes "Restored" (including the recovered alarm) status, the display disappears.
Alarm status
Occurred
10:30

Status

Temp. error

Ocr.

Occurred
04/6/1

10:30

Comment

Status

Temp. error

Rstr.

10

ALARM

04/6/1

Alarm status
Comment

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Restore

11

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

LEVEL

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

12
PANELMETER

The restored alarm is not displayed.

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 217

 Selection of display method

The following display methods are available. (

10.8.2 Settings)

(1) Fix
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed in a fixed row.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms can be switched and displayed automatically.
(Set the [Display Number] on the [Basic] tab to [Multiple])
When a temp. error and fuse error occur

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

The occurring alarms are switched and displayed!

(The cycle for switching display can be set by "Switching Cycle" on the basic tab)

(2) Flow
The comment displayed when an alarm occurs is displayed as a flow from right to left.
When more than one alarm occur, the alarms are displayed in order.
(Set the [Display Number] on the [Basic] tab to [Multiple])
When a temp. error and fuse error occur

04/6/1

A 1254

A 1254

A 1254

A 1254

A 1254

A 1254

348

10:30

348

Temp. error

348

348

04/6/1 9:45 Fuse error

348

9:45 Fuse error

The occurring errors are displayed as a flow from right to left

(The flow speed can be specified on "Floating Speed" on the basic tab.)

POINT
(1) Display priority (display order) when multiple alarms occur
For details, refer to the following.
10.8.5 Precautions
(2) When more than one comment rows are specified
Fix : Only the comment of the first row is displayed.
Comments on and after the second row cannot be displayed.
Flow: Displays the comment of the second row as a flow after the comment of the first row.
(The same applies to the third row and after.)

10 - 218

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

348

Settings

Select [Common]

[Alarm]

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.8.2

[Advance Alarm Popup Display] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Basic tab
Set the displayed advanced alarm popup display type, display contents and touch modes.

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Model

Select this item to use the advanced alarm popup display

13

Select an alarm type to be displayed.

For the display priority when multiple alarms occur, refer to the following.

LINE GRAPH

10.8.5 Precautions

Display Alarm

User Alarm
: Displays advanced user alarm only.
System Alarm
: Displays advanced system alarm only.
User Alarm + System Alarm : Displays advanced user alarm or advanced system alarm
Select the number of alarms displayed.
For the alarm display priority, refer to the following.

14

10.8.5 Precautions

Display Number

TREND GRAPH

Multiple : Displays more than one advanced alarms in order.

One
: Displays the alarm with the highest display priority.
Select a display method of the comment displayed for the alarm.
10.8.1 Before setting
Fix

: Displays the comment in a line when an alarm occurs.

Any part exceeding the length of the comment displayed in a line or the second line and after of the
comment over multiple lines is not displayed.
Flow : Displays the comment as a flow from right to left when an alarm occurs.
For the comment including multiple lines, the second line and after are also displayed.
After selecting [Flow], select a speed to display the comment as a flow by [Flow Rate].

Switching Cycle

This item is available when [Fix] is set for [Display Type].

Set a cycle to switch the alarm displayed while more than one alarm has occurred (1 to 60s).

Flow Rate

This item is available when [Flow] is set for [Display Type].

Select a speed for the flowing display.
High
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character x 13) per second.
Medium : The comment flows at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character x 7) per second.
Low
: The comment flows at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character x 3) per second.

15
BAR GRAPH

Display Type

16

(Continued to next page)

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 219

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Use Advanced
Alarm Popup
Display

Description

PANELMETER

12

Item

Description

Model

Set whether to enable or disable the display position switching of the advanced alarm popup display.
Display Position
Switching

10.8.4 Useful operations and functions

Switch : The display position switching is enabled.
None : The display position switching is disabled.
Display
Attribute

Select the items to be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display.
Date of Occurrence : Select when displaying the occurred date/time of the alarm.
Comment
: Select when displaying the comment related to the alarm.

Date Format

Select format in which occurred date/time of alarm is specified.

Select the [...] button to set the display format for date or date/time.

Contents

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Display Order

Set the display order in the advanced alarm popup display.

The items of [Contents] selected in [Display] are displayed.
Select the item to change the order and set the order with the

and

buttons.

Select the alarm hierarchy initially displayed when an advanced user alarm occurs.
10.8.4 Useful operations and functions
Initial Display
Hierarchy

General : General alarms are initially displayed.

Middle : Middle alarms are initially displayed.
Upper : Higher alarms are initially displayed.
This item can be set only when [Display Alarm] is [User Alarm] or [User Alarm + System Alarm].
Select the operation when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
10.8.4 Useful operations and functions
None
Screen Switching

Touch Mode

Destination
Screen

10 - 220

: No operation even if touching the popup display.

: If touch the advanced alarm popup display, displays the base screen
of the No. specified on [Destination Screen] or overlap window 1.
Stage Hierarchy Switching/Detail Display : Switches the alarm hierarchy of the touched alarm or displays the
detailed screen.
Operations vary depending on the alarm hierarchy being displayed.
When displaying higher/middle alarm: The alarm hierarchy is
switched to the lower one.
When displaying general alarm : The detailed screen is displayed.
This item is available when [Screen Switching] is selected for [Touch Mode].
Set the screen displayed when the advanced alarm popup display is touched.
Select [Base Screen ] or [Overlap Window1], and set a screen number (1 to 32767).
Only overlap window 1 is usable for advanced alarm popup display.
When [Overlap Window1] is selected, set the number of the window screens.

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

10

ALARM

Preview area

Description

Preview area

The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

Contents

Select a display type of date and time.

Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time Date
Time

12
PANELMETER

Item

LEVEL

11

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.
Sort

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/9/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 9/1/09) dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/9/09)
Select asorting type of date.
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a week.
The display examples below show the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort] and [/] for [Delimiter].
09/9/1
Sep/1
SEP/1
Sep/1(WED)
SEP/1(WED)
09/Sep/1
09/SEP/1
09/Sep/1(WED)
09/SEP/1(WED)
2009/Sep/1
2009/SEP/1
2009/Sep/1(WED)
2009/SEP/1(WED)

Delimiter

Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
/ (Example: 09/9/1) - (Example: 09-9-1)
. (Example: 09.9.1)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example) To display September 1, 2009
Selected
: 09/09/01
Not selected : 09/9/1

LINE GRAPH

Date Setting

14
TREND GRAPH

Type

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.
Select the display type of time.
Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10:1
10:1:27
10:1(AM)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example) To display 1 past 10
Selected
: 10:1
Not selected : 10:01

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Time Setting

BAR GRAPH

Type

13

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 221

 Text Style tab

Set the text format of alarms.

Item

Description
Select a font of the characters displayed.
12dot Standard
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
Stroke
If "HQ font" is set for the advanced alarm, the text of comment will be displayed in the standard font.
For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

Font

Size

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.

Solid

Select the color of the shadow when the

button or the

button is selected.

Select the target for applying color-coding.

10.8.4 Useful operations and functions
None (Fix)

Alarm Text Color

Switching*1

: Select this item when displaying characters in a color only.

Set the color after selecting [None(Fix)].
At each level
: Select this item when using different colors depending on levels.
For each group
: Select this item when using different colors depending on groups.
Comment Color (System Alarm: Fix) : Select this item to display the comments with the color specified for the
comment groups when displaying the advanced user alarm. (The font, size
and style are specified at the style setting on this setting. The setting of the
comment group except for [Text Color] is not effective.) For advanced
system alarms display, alarms are displayed in the color specified by [Fixed/
Defaoult Color].

Fixed/Default
Color*1

Display
Background

When [None(Fix)] is selected for [Alarm Text Color Switching]:

Select the character color when displaying text in a color only.
When [Comment Color (System Alarm: Fix)] is selected for [Alarm Text Color Switching]:
Select a character color to be used when there is no comment for advanced user alarms.
Select a character color of advanced system alarms.

Level*1

Select character colors for each level number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)

Group*1

Select character colors for each group number. (enabled only for advanced user alarms display)

When this item is selected, the background color of the advanced alarm popup display can be selected.
After selecting this item, select the background color.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

10 - 222

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Model

Switch target setting

Fix

Advanced user alarm

Displayed in the color

specified in [Fixed/Default
Color].

Advanced system alarm

Level

Group

Comment Color

Displayed in the color

specified in [Level].
Higher alarms and middle
alarms are displayed in the
color specified as [Level] 1.

Displayed in the color

specified in [Group].
Higher alarms and middle
alarms are displayed in the
color specified as [Group] 1.

Displayed in the color

specified for comment
group.
If there is no comment, the
comment area is displayed
in the color specified by
[Fixed/Default Color].

Displayed in the color

specified as [Level] 1.

Displayed in the color

specified as [Group] 1.

Displayed in the color

specified as [Fixed/Default
Color].

10

ALARM

Alarms displayed

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Relation between the specified character color and actually displayed character color

11

LEVEL

Level, group and comment are effective only when [User Alarm] or [User Alarm + System Alarm] is selected in
[Display Alarm] on the [Basic] tab.

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 223

 Extended tab
Perform the setting for switching the displayed contents of the advanced alarm popup display by using a device.

Item

Description

Model

Select the item whose display is switched by the device.

10.8.4 Useful operations and functions

Hierarchy *1

Select this item when switching the displayed alarm hierarchy using the value of the device.
All the alarms of the specified alarm hierarchy are displayed.
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.

Select this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified level number.
After checking this item, set the switching device. (
Level
Switching Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Store the level number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
To display a specified level, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if any nonexistent level number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all levels, specify 0 or 256 or more.
This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.
Check this item when displaying only the alarms of the specified group number.
After checking this item, set the switching device. (

Group

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Store the group number of the advanced alarm displayed in the device.
To display a specified group, specify a level number in the range of 1 to 255.
However, if any nonexistent group number is specified, advanced alarms are not displayed.
To display all groups, specify 0 or 256 or more.
This item is enabled only for advanced user alarms.

Priority Display

Check this item when switching the sort key by the value of the device.

Attribute*2

After checking this item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

(Continued to next page)

10 - 224

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to display the specified advanced user alarm (alarm ID).
After selecting this item, set the switching device. (

Switching Device
General
Comment
Group/Middle
Comment
Group/Upper
Comment Group

10

ALARM

Advanced User
Alarm
Observation

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

Store the alarm ID for advanced user alarm observation in this device.
The alarm of the stored alarm ID is displayed regardless of the setting of [Popup Display] of
advanced user alarm observation.
If store "0" in this device, displays only the alarms of which [Popup Display] item of advanced
user alarm observation is checked.
If any nonexistent alarm ID is specified, the alarm is not displayed.
This item is enabled for advanced user alarms only.
Select this item to switch the comment group of the comments displayed for general alarm, middle
alarm or higher alarm by the value of the device.
After checking the item, set the switching device. (

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting)

11

When "0" is stored in this device, the comment group specified for advanced user alarm
observation is displayed.
If any nonexistent comment group No. is stored, "No message" is displayed.
This item can be selected only when advanced user alarms are displayed.

Securiyu Level
Operation

LEVEL

To set the security function, specify a security level (1 to15).

Specify "0" when not setting the security function.
Be sure to specify a number for security (Operation) that is larger than the number for security
(Display).

Display

COMMENT DISPLAY

12

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

PANELMETER

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

*1 Hierarchies
Store values in the device as follows to switch hierarchies.

b14 to b2
b15

b1

13

b0

: Specify the target hierarchy of the alarm to switch.

00(0) : General alarms
01(1) : Middle alarms
xxx10(2): Higher alarms
: Not usable
: Stores the switching operations for switching hierarchies (hierarchy switching control identifier).
To switch hierarchies by the hierarchy switching device, be sure to set this bit to "0".
0
: Switching by the switching device
1
: Switching by touching the display area

For precautions about switching comment display using this device, refer to the following.
10.8.5 Precautions

LINE GRAPH

b1 to b0

b2

14
TREND GRAPH

b15 to b3

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 225

*2 Priority display attribute

Store values in the device as shown below to switch the alarm display order.
b15

b3 to b0

b14 to b4

: Specifies a sort key. (

b3

b2

b1

b0

: Reserved)

0H: Regular (Date of Occurrence)

1H: Date of Occurrence
5H: Level
6H: Group
b14 to sb4 : Not usable
b15

: Specifies ascending order or descending order. (

0

: Reserved)

: Descending order

H: Ascending order
8
Level and group are effective only for advanced user alarms.
If any value other than above is stored, alarms are displayed in the order of the date of occurrence.

10 - 226

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Perform setting for writing the information about the alarm touched on the advanced alarm popup display area into
the device.

COMMENT DISPLAY

External Output tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Description

Model

Check this item when writing the information about the touched alarm into the device.
10.8.4 Useful operations and functions

Trigger Type

Trigger Device

13
LINE GRAPH

Enable
External
Output

Select a timing to write the data of the touched alarm into the device.
Ordinary : When touched, the alarm data are written into the device.
ON
: When the device is ON and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.5.3.1 Device setting
OFF
: When the device is OFF and the alarm display is touched, alarm data are written into the
device.
Set the device to be used for trigger when [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type].
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the device to which alarm data are written.

TREND GRAPH

First Device

14

Set the head device (word device) into which the data of the touched alarm are written.
As selecting the items to be written into the device, the devices following the head device are
automatically set consecutively. (No device is set on any non-checked item.)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Alarm ID

Select this item to write the alarm ID of the touched alarm into the device.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.

Comment Group
No.

Select this item to write the comment group No. of the comment displayed by the touched alarm into the
device.
This item can be used only when advanced user alarm is displayed.

Comment No.

Select this item to write the comment No. (comment group) displayed by the touched alarm into the
device.
When advanced system alarm is selected, error code is written.

15

(Continued to next page)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Device

BAR GRAPH

Item

PANELMETER

12

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 227

Item

Description

Model

Check this item when writing the status of the touched alarm into the device.
The following values are written.

b15 to b3
Alarm Status*1

b2

b1

b0: Stores whether the touched alarm is occurring or restored. (0: Restored, 1: Occurring)
b1: Stores whether the touched alarm is checked or not. (0: Not checked, 1: Checked)
b2: Stores whether the status of the touched alarm can be written into the device or not. (0: Not
effective, 1: Effective)
This bit is set to "Not effective (0)" if a higher alarm or middle alarm is touched.
b15 to b3: Not usable

Date of
Occurrence*1 *2
Time of
Occurrence*1 *2
Device

Date of
Restoration*1 *2
Time of
Restoration*1 *2
Date of
Confirmation*1 *2
Time of
Confirmation*1 *2

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred date into the device.

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's occurred time into the device.

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored date into the device.

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's restored time into the device.

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked date into the device.

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's checked time into the device.

Level*1

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's level No. into the device.

Group*1

Check this item when writing the touched alarm's group No. into the device.

Frequency of

Check this item when writing the number of times of occurrence of the touched alarm into the
device.

Occurrence*1
Cumulative Time
*1 *2

Downtime*1 *2

Check this item when writing the cumulative time of the touched alarm into the device.
Check this item when writing the down time of the touched alarm into the device.

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

*1 Condition for writing

(1) Alarm hierarchy to which alarm data can be written (when advanced user alarm is displayed)
Only when general alarms are displayed, alarm data are written into the device.
When higher alarms or middle alarms are displayed, "0" is written (except for alarm ID, comment group No., and
comment No.).

(2) Writable data according to the collection mode

The data which can be written vary depending on the collection mode specified at Advanced Alarm Observation.
For the details, refer to the following.
10.3.1 Before setting

10 - 228

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Date and time are written in word data of two words.

(This section describes with date of occurrence as D254 (2 points) and time of occurrence as D256 (2 points).)

(1) Date
Year (AD), month, and day data are stored in the BCD code.
b15

b15
D255

to

b8 b7

Month (1 to 12)

to

to

10

b0

Day (1 to 31)

b8 b7

to

b0

Upper 2 digits of Lower 2 digits of

dominical year
dominical year

ALARM

D254

11

(2) Time
Hour, minute, and second data are stored in the BCD code.
b15

b8 b7

to

b0

Minute (0 to 59) Second (0 to 59)

b15
D257

to

b8 b7

00H

to

LEVEL

D256

to

b0

12

Hour (0 to 23)

b15
D254

to

b8 b7

07H
(Month)

b15

to

to b0
01H
(Day)

b8 b7

20H

D255

PANELMETER

Example) July 1, 2004 12:24:56

to

13

b0

04H

(Minute)

b15

to
00H

b8 b7

to
56H

b0

(Second)

to

14

b0

12H
TREND GRAPH

b8 b7

(Hour)

15
BAR GRAPH

to
24H

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

b15
D256

LINE GRAPH

(Dominical year)

D257

COMMENT DISPLAY

*2 Writing format of date and time

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 229

10.8.3

Relevant Settingss

The advanced alarm popup display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

Screen property
Set by screen (screen property).
(Fundamentals) 3.9 Changing Screen Property
Function
Setting whether to enable or disable the advanced popup display for each
screen.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
row.

Set description

Model

Set in the following items on the [Basic] tab.

[Popup the display of advanced alarm]
[Display Position]

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Set description

Turning off the key input signal. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b3)

[System Signal 1-1]

Disabling all key inputs. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b9)

[System Signal 1-1]

Resetting the system alarm or system information (GOT error code, GOT error
detecting signal). (Read device: System Signal 1-1. b13)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the key input. (Write device: system signal 2-1.b3)

[System Signal 2-1]

Model

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function

10 - 230

Set description

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (GOT error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS262

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (CPU error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS263

Storing the channel numbers where system alarm (Network error) occurred.
(Write device)

GS264

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Model

Useful operations and functions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.8.4

This section describes some useful functions to know before using advanced alarm popup display.

Operations when touching popup display directly

The following operations are available.

(1) Screen switching

Touching the alarm display can switch the screen to the base screen of the specified No. or overlapping window
1.
This function allows displaying the detailed alarm process screen when the popup display is touched.
10.8.2 Settings)

ALARM

10

11

Alarm details display/process screen

A 1254 A 1254

Occurred
04/6/1 10:30
04/6/1 9:45

Comment
Temp. error
Fuse error

04/6/1 8:15

Oil error
LEVEL

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

12

Touch!

PANELMETER

Displays the base screen of the specified No.

or overlapping window 1

(2) Stage hierarchy switching/detail display

The display hierarchy of comments can be switched (only when advanced user alarms are displayed)
10.8.2 Settings)
Displays middle alarms

Displays general alarms

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348

- Pwr. module error

Touch!

Switches middle
general hierarchy

04/6/1

Temp. error
Touch!

Switches general
hierarchy detail
display
Detail display
A 1254 A 1254

14

15

B on
348 B 348
Temp. error
power module
Check temperature

04/6/1 Temp. error

BAR GRAPH

Touch!

Switches higher
middle hierarchy

B 348

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

- Line abend

LINE GRAPH

Displays higher alarms

13

TREND GRAPH

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 231

POINT
(1) Hierarchies that can be switched by touch operation
By touch operation, hierarchies can be switched only to the lower ones.
To switch to the upper hierarchy, set [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab, and store the
hierarchy value in the device.
10.8.2 Settings
(2) Difference of display scope depending on the switching hierarchies method
Display scope is different between the case that hierarchies are switched by touch operation and by switching
device. For details, refer to the following.
Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is displayed))

10 - 232

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

If any other object is hidden by an advanced alarm popup display, the display position can be switched by touch
operation. (When [Display Position Switching] is set to enabled on the [Basic] tab in the Advanced Alarm Popup
Display dialog box)
Displayed on bottom of the screen

Displayed on top of the screen

04/6/1

A 1254 A 1254

Displayed on center of the screen

10:30
Temp.
error
A 1254
A 1254

10

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348

COMMENT DISPLAY

(3) Switching of display position

B 348

A 1254Temp.
A 1254
error
04/6/1 10:30

10:30 Temp. error

Display
position
switching

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

Display
position
switching

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

ALARM

04/6/1

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

Display position switching

11

For the details of *1, refer to the following.

By touching the leftmost of the advanced alarm popup display area, the display position is switched
to the top, center and bottom of the screen in order.
LEVEL

*1 Screen area for switching display position

The touch operation area for switching display position is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.

12
PANELMETER

Leftmost 16 dots

Mesh on the GOT screen

A 1254

A 1254

348

13

348

LINE GRAPH

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Display position during screen switching

When screen is switched during the popup display, the popup is displayed at the position before switching. (It is not
displayed at the position specified on the [Basic] tab in the [Screen Property] dialog box.)

38

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

15

Screen
Switching
Displayed at the position before switch
regardless of the display position setti

The display position set in the [Screen Property] becomes effective when a net popup display is displayed.

BAR GRAPH

A 1254 A 1254

14
TREND GRAPH

POINT

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 233

 Switching of alarm hierarchies (Only when advanced user alarms is displayed)

For advanced alarm popup display, alarm hierarchies can be switched by one of the following methods. However, the
display scope differs depending on the switching method.
Touch the popup display directly.
Use the device specified in [Hierarchy] of [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The following system example describes the difference of the display scope depending on the switching method.

Line1

Higher Alarm

Line2

Middle Alarm
Equipment A

Equipment B

Equipment A

Equipment B

General Alarm
Power
supply
module

Drive
module

Control
module

Power
supply
module

"Control
module error"

"Pwr. module
error"

Control
module

Drive
module

Power
supply
module

Drive
module

Control
module

"Control
module error"

Power
supply
module

"Pwr. module
error"

Drive
module

Control
module

"Control
module error"
: The alarm is occurring
: No alarm (normal run)

(1) Touch the popup display directly.

Displays the lower hierarchy of the touched alarm.
The following shows the case that the [Initial Display Hierarchy] on the [Basic] tab is specified as the higher
alarms.
1) The alarm hierarchy specified for initial
display hierarchy (higher alarms) is displayed.

All higher alarms are displayed

Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Equipment A
- Line1 error

Power

Touch!

Switches to middle alarms

2) The middle alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.

Display scope
Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Equipment A

Power

- Equipment A error

Touch!

Switches to general alarms

3) The general alarm of the selected alarm is displayed.
Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Display scope
Equipment A

04/6/1 Pwr. module error

Power

10 - 234

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

POINT
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being
displayed
A new alarm belonging to another higher/middle hierarchy has occurred while a specified scope is being displayed

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

A specified scope is
being displayed

Power

ALARM

Display scope

Control

11

The new alarm is

not displayed!

Power

LEVEL

Display scope

Control

12

An alarm belonging to
another higher/middle
hierarchy has occurred!

PANELMETER

Display the new alarm by one of the following methods.

Use the hierarchy switching device to display all the alarms of the specified hierarchy.
(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy ] of [Switching Device] on the

[Extended] tab.)
Display higher alarms and move to the hierarchy of the new alarm.
(And, move to the lower hierarchy and display the new alarm.)

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 235

(2) Switch the hierarchy using the device specified by [Hierarchy ] of [Switching Device] on the
[Extended] tab.
Display all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the device. (

10.8.2 Settings)

The following shows an example when the switching device of hierarchy is set to GD110.
Displays all higher alarms

Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Equipment A

GD110 2
- Line1 error

Power

Displays all middle alarms

Display scope
Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

Equipment A

GD110 1
- Equipment A error

Power

Displays all general alarms

Line1

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

GD110

Display scope
Equipment A

0
04/6/1 Pwr. module error

Power

10 - 236

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

POINT
(1) Alarm hierarchy specified as the initial display hierarchy
To display alarms in hierarchy, it is recommended to specify the highest alarm hierarchy as the initial display
hierarchy.
If any lower alarm hierarchy is specified as the initial display hierarchy, alarms are displayed with the vertical
hierarchies ignored.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

ALARM

Example: When the initial display hierarchy is specified to general alarms

All general alarms are

displayed!

(2) Timing at which alarms are switched to the initial display hierarchy regardless of the hierarchy being
displayed
In the following example, all the alarms of the hierarchy specified by the initial display hierarchy are displayed.

LEVEL

All the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored.

The advanced user alarm (alarm ID) to be displayed by the device is switched

11

Display switching by device

12

Example) When all the alarms of the displayed hierarchy are restored

PANELMETER

When the initial display hierarchy is specified as the middle hierarchy

All the alarms of the

displayed hierarchy
are restored.

LINE GRAPH

13

All the alarms of the

initial display hierarchy
are displayed.

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 237

 Specify font, text color, and background color to display alarms

Specifying a font, text color and background color can prevent from overlooking popup display.
In addition, although level and group cannot be displayed for the advanced alarm popup display function, level and
group can be identified visually by setting a display color. (

10.8.2 Settings)

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

By specifying a background color,

oversighting popup display can be prevented.

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

In addition, by specifying a text color for each

level or group, alarm's level and group can be
identified visually.

Display switching by device

Display data can be switched by the device value.
The display shown below is available. (
10.8.2 Settings)
Refinement display of data by level, group, and alarm ID (advanced user alarm only) specified by users
Change the comment displayed according to the target user or purpose
Change the displaying order (descending, ascending and soon)

(1) Items to which a switching device can be set

Available
switching device
settings

Available switching device settings

Advanced user alarm

Hierarchy*1

All the alarms generated in the specified alarm hierarchy are

displayed.

Level*1

Alarms at the specified level are displayed.

Group*1

Alarms of the specified group are displayed.

Priority Display
Attribute

The display order is changed between ascending order and

descending order.
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can be
selected.

Advanced User
Alarm
Observation

The setting of the advanced user alarm observation (alarm

ID) displayed by advanced alarm display can be changed.
Multiple sets of alarm data can be displayed by an advanced
alarm display window.

General Comment
Group
Midium Comment
Group
Upper Comment
Group

Advanced system alarm

The display order is changed between ascending order and

descending order.
For the sort key, occurred date/time, level or group can be
selected.

The comments displayed when an alarm occurs can be

changed for each comment group.
The comment displayed can be changed according to the
user or purpose.

*1 The hierarchy, level and group for alarms are set by the advanced user alarm observation function.
10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

10 - 238

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Alarms are refined and displayed by changing the value of the device.
This section shows an example that the switching device (level) is set to GD10 and the switching device (group)
to GD11.
Assume that the alarms below occurred.

16:50
14:25
11:20
10:00
08:10
07:40

Message
Temp. error

Status

Motor error
Oil error
Fuel error
Internal pressure error
Fuse error

Level Group

Ocr.
Ocr.
Chk.
Ocr.
Ocr.
Rstr.

1
3
3
3

1
1
2
2

1
1

10

"Restored" alarm is not displayed by

advanced alarm popup display.

ALARM

Occurred
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01
04/06/01

COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Display example

11

GD10 3
GD11 0

A 1254 A 1254

Occurred

Status

Level

Group

04/06/01
04/06/01

14:25
11:20

Motor error
Oil error

Ocr.
Chk.

3
3

1
2

04/06/01

10:00

Fuel error

Ocr.

12
PANELMETER

04/6/1 14:25 Motor error

Message

LEVEL

B 348 B 348

GD10 3
GD11 2

13
A 1254 A 1254

(Alarms to be displayed)
Occurred

04/6/1 11:20 Oil error

04/06/01
04/06/01

11:20
10:00

Message

Oil error
Fuel error

Status
Chk.
Ocr.

Level

Group

3
3

2
2

LINE GRAPH

B 348 B 348

14
TREND GRAPH

POINT

10.8.5 Precautions
(2) Changing the alarm sorting order by [Priority Display Attribute]
Sorting order can be changed only while general alarms are displayed, and cannot be changed while higher
alarms or middle alarms are displayed.
(3) Advanced user alarm (alarm ID) displayed
Alarms are displayed even when its alarm ID is not checked on the [Popup Display] item of the advanced user
alarm observation window. (Alarms are displayed regardless of whether the item is checked or not.)
When specify an alarm ID with the [Popup Display] item checked, only the alarm ID is displayed.

15
BAR GRAPH

(1) Display priority when not switching the display data by the device
For details, refer to the following.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 239

 Writing alarm data into device

The alarm data touched on the advanced alarm popup display can be written into the device (word device).
Data that cannot be displayed by advanced alarm popup display (down time and others) can also be written into the
device. (

10.8.2 Settings)

(1) Alarm data written into the device (15 types)

Alarm ID
Comment Group No.
Comment No.
Alarm Status
Date of Occurrence

Time of Occurrence
Date of Restoration
Time of Restoration
Date of Confirmation
Time of Confirmation

Level
Group
Frequency of Occurrence
Cumulative Time
Downtime

(2) Alarms to be written

The data of the alarm touched on advanced alarm popup display are written.

D200: 0601H

A 1254 A 1254

D201: 2004H

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch!

The occurred date of the selected alarm

(04/06/01) is output to the device

POINT
Touch mode when data are written into the device
To write alarm data into the device, set [Touch Mode] on the Basic tab to [Screen Switching] or [Stage Hierarchy
Switching/Detail Display].

10 - 240

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Precautions

This section explains the precautions for using the advanced alarm popup display.

Precaution for Drawing

(1) Hierarchy switching device for placing multiple display objects on the same screen
If the same hierarchy switching device is specified for the following objects, the objects may not be displayed on
the specified initial display hierarchy.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.8.5

10

This is because the value of the initial display hierarchy is written into the hierarchy switching device when the
screen is displayed (when the screen is switched).
To display the object on the specified initial display hierarchy, use different devices on the objects above,
respectively. (Prepare at least 2 hierarchy switching devices.)
Example) When the hierarchy switching device and initial display hierarchy are set as follows.
(Assume that other settings for displaying alarms have already been completed.)

11

Setting of advanced alarm popup display

Hierarchy switching device : GD10

Initial display hierarchy
: General
Place on base screen1

LEVEL

Setting of advanced user alarm display

ALARM

Advanced Alarm Display

Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Hierarchy switching device : GD10

Initial display hierarchy
: Upper

12

Comment
Temp. error

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

Occurred
--

13

-- Line 1 abend

-- Line 1 abend

Hierarchy switching
device (GD10)
0 (general)

2 (higher)

Comment
Line 1 abend

LINE GRAPH

Occurred
04/6/1 11:35:52

PANELMETER

Operations when base screen 1 is displayed

Even if the initial display hierarchy is

general alarm, the display is switched to
the higher hierarchy alarm! (if the hierarchy
switching device (GD10) is set to 2)

14
TREND GRAPH

Different values are

written into the same device

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 241

(2) When switching comment display and others using the hierarchy switching device
Since the uppermost bit of the hierarchy switching device is changed to 1 by touching, mask the device value
with 7FFFH so that the uppermost bit is fixed to 0.
Comment cannot be displayed correctly without masking.
Example) When switching the comments displayed by the value of the hierarchy switching device
Value of hierarchy switching device

Corresponding comment No.

Comments displayed

General alarms being displayed.

Middle alarms being displayed.

Higher alarms being displayed.

(a) When masking is applied

0

A 1254

A 1254
B

348

Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.

Higher alarms being displayed

B

348

- Line abend

Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy

Touch!

Masking
1

AND
0

Middle alarms being displayed

A 1254

A 1254

348

348

-Pwr. module error

10 - 242

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

Mask value (7FFFH)

Value of hierarchy
switching device
1

The comment of comment No.1

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 1.

A 1254

A 1254
B

348

348

- Line abend

A 1254

A 1254

348

348

10

Touch to switch the display

from higher hierarchy to
middle hierarchy

Touch!

Value of hierarchy
switching device
-32767

11

The comment cannot be

displayed correctly since
the uppermost bit is set to
1 and the value is -32767.

LEVEL

-Pwr. module error

12

(3) Setting for saving advanced alarm data in the CF card

(a) When setting the store trigger device by advanced alarm observation
Set the [Store Trigger] device on the [File Save] tab described in the following to save advanced alarm
data.
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation

PANELMETER

The touch switch for saving alarms cannot be assigned for advanced alarm popup display.
To place the button for saving advanced alarm data, perform one of the following settings.

(b) When store data by the touch switch for advanced alarm display
Place the touch switch for advanced alarm display on the screen where advanced alarm display was
specified, and store the data.
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions

LINE GRAPH

13

10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings

14

(4) Precautions for using comment group

When a value (column No.) that does not exist is set at the language switching device, [No message] is
displayed.

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Value of hierarchy
switching device
2

The comment of comment No.2

is displayed since the value of the
hierarchy switching device is 2.

Higher alarms being displayed

B

ALARM

TREND GRAPH

COMMENT DISPLAY

(b) When masking is not applied

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 243

 Precautions for use

(1) When an object is overlapping another object
If an object (touch switch and others) is hidden by advanced alarm popup display, the object cannot be
operated.
In such a case, change the position of the advanced alarm popup display area.
10.8.4 Useful operations and functions
Changes the display position

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Touch the leftmost

of the display area!

(2) When the advanced alarm popup display is not performed

Refer to the following to check the setting.
10.8.1 Before setting

(3) Alarm display priority

(a) When the displayed contents are not changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab
The alarms are displayed in the descending order of occurred date/time.
For advanced user alarms, only the alarm of the alarm ID to which [Popup Display] of advanced user alarm
observation is checked is displayed.

A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348
Alarms being occurred

04/6/1 11:35 Temp. error

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 11:35:52

Temp. error

Displayed first

04/6/1 09:45:30

Fuse error

Displayed second

04/6/1 08:15:45

Oil error

Displayed third

(b) When the displayed data is changed by [Switching Device] on the [Extended] tab.
The alarms are displayed as the display data specified by the switching device.

10 - 244

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

When [User Alarm + System Alarm] is selected in [Display Alarm] on the [Basic] tab
If an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm have occurred simultaneously, only the
advanced system alarm is displayed.
The advanced user alarm is displayed when all the advanced system alarms are restored.
When an advanced user alarm and an advanced system alarm occur
simultaneously

10

Posted advanced user alarms

Occurred

B 348 B 348

11:35:52

Temp. error

04/6/1

09:45:30

Fuse error

04/6/1

08:15:45

Oil error

*1

*1 Not displayed until all the advanced

system alarms are restored.

ALARM

A 1254 A 1254

Comment

04/6/1

Posted advanced system alarms

11

Occurred

Comment

04/6/1 10:46:49

400 Unable to communication with CPU

Displayed first

04/6/1 10:30:30

9 AC down error

Displayed second

04/6/1 07:11:15

803 Transident error

Displayed third
LEVEL

04/6/1 10:46 400 Unable to communicate with CPU

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(c)

Advanced system alarms are

displayed prior to others.

12
PANELMETER

POINT
Restoration method of advanced system alarms
For details, refer to the following.
10.4.1 Before setting

13

If switch the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device with [Display Type] on the [Basic] tab
specified to [Fix], the display is updated at the intervals specified by [Switching Cycle].
Therefore, note that display may not be switched soon after switching the hierarchy.

LINE GRAPH

(4) When switching the hierarchy displayed by the hierarchy switching device

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

10 - 245

(5) Refining-display of alarms when many alarms are monitored

If alarms are refined and displayed for many monitoring devices using the switching device in the advanced user
alarm observation, it may take a few minutes to display the data.
10.8.4 Display switching by device

(6) Display of the comment window and key window

When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed.
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
When try to open the detail display (comment
window display) while the key window is displayed.

7
4
1
0

Key window

8
5
2

9 AC
A 1254 A 1254
6 Del
3 +/- B 348 B 348
Enter

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

Detail display (comment window display) is disabled!

(7) Display of occurred time, checked time and restored time

For occurred time, GOT's clock data is displayed.
For the precautions and restrictions of the clock function for managing GOT's clock data, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

(8) Clearing of advanced alarm popup display (Network error)

The advanced alarm popup display for a network error that occurred in the CC-Link communication unit,
MELSECNET/10 communication unit, or MELSECNET/H communication unit will not be cleared until the GOT
is powered OFF or reset even if the alarm cause is eliminated.

10 - 246

10.8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

The function enables user-created comments to scroll across the screen from right to left when an alarm occurs.
A comment is repeatedly displayed until causes of the alarm are removed.
The comment display position can be selected from among the top, center, and bottom of the base screen.

ALARM

When only one alarm occurs

10

The comment corresponding to the occurred alarm scrolls across the screen from right to left.

11
A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

Error occurrence

occurrence

LEVEL

Error

Scrolling alarm display

12

The comments corresponding to the occurred alarms scroll across the screen from right to left in order of alarm
occurrence.

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

Error

Error1 occurrence Error2

The second or later alarm is

displayed following the first alarm.

13

Error2 occurrence
LINE GRAPH

Scrolling alarm display

PANELMETER

When multiple alarms occur

The GOT stops displaying comm

corresponding to the alarms that

14
TREND GRAPH

HINT
Comments to be displayed with scrolling alarm display
Comments to be displayed must be registered in advance.
Register comments to be displayed with the scrolling alarm display in the comment group.
(Fundamentals) 4.11.3 Comment registration

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

10 - 247

10.9.1

Settings

Select [Common]

[Alarm]

[Alarm Flow] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Basic tab
Set the timing of collecting alarm data, devices to be specified for alarms, comments to be displayed with alarm
occurrences, and others.

Item

Description

Use Alarm Flow

Select this item to use the scrolling alarm display.

Alarm (Device)
Points

Set the number of device points to be monitored (GT11: 1 to 3072, GT10: 1 to 512).

Watch Cycle

Set the cycle of monitoring set devices (1 to 3600 seconds).

Device Type

Select a device type of devices to be monitored. (For GT10, only [Bit] can be selected.)
Bit
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

Select a method to set devices. (For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)

Continuous
: Select the item for setting consecutive devices starting from the set device.
Random
: Select the item for setting devices one by one.

Comment

Model

Comment No.

Select a method to set comments of the comment group to be displayed. (For GT10, [Random]
cannot be selected.)
Continuous : Select the item for setting consecutive comment numbers of the comment group
starting from the set comment number.
Random
: Select the item for setting comment numbers one by one.

Group No.

Set the number of the comment group.

(Continued to next page)

10 - 248

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

Item

Description

Model

Set devices to be specified for alarms and comments to be displayed when alarms occur.
Device

Set devices to be specified for alarms.(

Alarm setting list

Alarm Range

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the ranges of the devices for displaying alarms. (For GT10, [Bit] and [ON] are fixed.)
When [Device Type] is set to [Bit]
ON : When a bit device turns on, an alarm is displayed.
OFF : When a bit device turns off, an alarm is displayed.
When [Device Type] is set to other than [Bit]
Click the [Exp] button, and then set the range of the word device value for displaying an alarm.

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

Comment No.

Set comment numbers of the comment group for displaying comments when alarms occur.

Select this item to store the number of alarm occurrences in the word device.
After selecting this item, set the device to store the number of alarm occurrences.

11

LEVEL

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Generated
Number Storage

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

10 - 249

 Format tab

Item

Description

Model

Select a scrolling speed of alarms.

High

Flow Rate

: Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 213 dots (16-dot character

Medium : Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 106 dots (16-dot character

Low

: Alarms scroll at a speed of approximately 53 dots (16-dot character

13) per second.

7) per second.
3) per second.

Attribute

Select an item to be displayed for the scrolling alarm display.

Date of Occurrence : Select the item to display the date and time of alarm occurrences.
Comment
: Select the item to display comments corresponding to alarms.

Date Format

Select whether to display both date and time, or either of date and time when [Attribute] is set to
[Occurred].
Select the [...] button to set the display format for date or date/time.

Display

Contents

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display order for the scrolling alarm display.
The items of [Contents] selected in [Display] are displayed.

Display Order

Select the item to change the order and set the order with the

and

buttons.

Select a font of characters. (For GT10, [12dot Standard] is not available.)

12dot Standard
16dot Standard
16dot HQ Mincho
16dot HQ Gothic
For details of fonts and the size, refer to the following.

Font

Size

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Select a display format to the text.
: Displays the text in bold format.
: Displays the text in solid format.
: Displays the text in raised format.
Solid

Select the color of the shadow when the

Alarm Text Color

Select a color of characters to be displayed.

Fixed
: Select the item to display characters in one color only.
After selecting [Fixed], set the character color.
Comment Color : Select the item to display comments for the scrolling alarm display in comment colors set in the
comment group.

Fixed/Default
Color

When [Fixed] is selected in [Alarm Text Color]

Select a character color to display characters in one color only.
When [Comment Color ] is selected in [Alarm Text Color]
Select a character color to be displayed when comments are not registered.

Display
Background

When this item is selected, the scrolling alarm display background color can be selected.
After selecting this item, select the background color.

10 - 250

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

button or the

button is selected.

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(1) Date/Time Setting dialog box

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

Preview area

10

ALARM

11
Description
The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

Contents

Select a display type of date and time.

Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time
Date Time

LEVEL

Item
Preview area

12

Sort

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/9/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 9/1/09)

dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/9/09)

Select asorting type of date.

Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a week.
The display examples below show the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort] and [/] for [Delimiter].
09/9/1
Sep/1
09/Sep/1
09/SEP/1
2009/Sep/1
2009/SEP/1
2009/SEP/1(WED)

SEP/1
Sep/1(WED)
09/Sep/1(WED)
09/SEP/1(WED)
2009/Sep/1(WED)

Delimiter

Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
/ (Example: 09/9/1) - (Example: 09-9-1)
. (Example: 09.9.1)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example : To display September 1, 2009
Selected
: 09/09/01
Not selected : 09/9/1

13

SEP/1(WED)

LINE GRAPH

Type
Date Setting

14

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example: To display 1 past 10
Selected
: 10 : 1
Not selected : 10 : 01

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Time Setting

BAR GRAPH

Select the display type of time.

Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10 : 1
10 : 1 : 27
10 : 1(AM)

TREND GRAPH

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time] for [Contents], set the following items.
Type

PANELMETER

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Date] for [Contents], set the following items.

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

10 - 251

10.9.2

Relevant Settings

The scrolling alarm display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

Screen property
Set by screen (screen property).
(Fundamentals) 3.9 Changing Screen Property
Function
Setting whether to display or not the scrolling alarm display for each screen.
The display position can be selected from the top row, center row, and bottom
row.

10 - 252

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

Set description
Set in the following items on the [Basic] tab.
[Display alarm flow]
[Display Position]

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Actions

Alarm types and alarm display

(1) Alarm types
The GOT can display user alarms only.

(2) Alarm display

(a) Display timing
When an alarm occurs, the scrolling alarm display appears on the GOT.
When causes of all the alarms are removed, the scrolling alarm display disappears from the screen.
(b) Displaying multiline comment
The second line of a comment is displayed following after the first line of the comment. (The same
operation is applied to comments with three or more lines.)
(c)

Displaying alarms with font, character color, and background color set
By setting the font, character color, and background color, the user can visibly notice the scrolling alarm
display.

10

ALARM

10.9.3

11

LEVEL

10.9.1 Settings

A 1254 A 1254

12
PANELMETER

B 348 B 348

By setting the background color,

the user can visibly notice the scrolling alarm display.

13

Operations when directly touching scrolling alarm display

When objects and window screens are hidden under the scrolling alarm display, the scrolling alarm display position
can be switched by the touch operation.
By touching the leftmost part of the scrolling alarm display area, the display position is switched to the top, center,
bottom of the screen, in that order.
Displayed on bottom of the screen

Displayed on top of the screen

Displayed on center of the screen

LINE GRAPH

04/6/110:30 Temp. error

14
10:30 Temp.
error
A 1254
A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

B 348

B 348

04/6/1

10:30 Temp. error

Display
position
switching

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

Display
position
switching

TREND GRAPH

A 1254 A 1254
Temp. error

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

Touch the leftmost of

the display area*1

15

Display position switching

BAR GRAPH

For details of *1, refer to the next page.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

10 - 253

*1 Screen area for switching display positions

The touch operation area for switching display positions is the leftmost 16-dot area of the display area.
Leftmost 16 dots

Mesh on the GOT screen

A 1254

A 1254

348

348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

The vertical touch operation area for switching display positions depends on the size of characters to be displayed.
The size of the vertical touch operation area changes in 16-dot units.
Example 1) When the character size (vertical) is 16 dots
Vertical touch operation area: 16 1 = 16 dots
Example 2) When the character size (vertical) is 24 dots
Vertical touch operation area: 16 2 = 32 dots

POINT
Display position when switching screens
When a screen is switched to another screen during the scrolling alarm display, the GOT displays the scrolling
alarm display at the same position as before screen switching. (It is not displayed at the position specified on the
[Basic] tab in the [Screen Property] dialog box.)

A 1254 A 1254

38

B 348 B 348

04/6/1 10:30 Temp. error

10:30 Temp. error

Screen
Switching
Displayed at the position before switching
regardless of the display position setting

The display position set in [Screen Property] is enabled when the GOT displays the scrolling alarm display for an
newly occurred alarm.

10 - 254

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

Precautions

COMMENT DISPLAY

10.9.4

Precautions for drawing

Only one scrolling alarm display setting is available for one project.
The GOT can display the same scrolling alarm display on multiple base screens.
Whether or not to display the scrolling alarm display can be set for each base screen.

10

(Fundamentals) 3.7.1 Creating a new screen

Precautions for use

The user cannot operate objects, including touch switches, and window screens hidden under the scrolling
alarm display.
Change the display position of the scrolling alarm display.

11

10.9.3 Actions

A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254

B 348 B 348

B 348 B 348

The GOT does not display a part of the

window screen hidden under the scrolling
alarm display area.
When a part of the touch switch is hidden
under the scrolling alarm display area,
the touch switch may not operate by
touching the switch.

Error occurrence
When the touch switch is completely hidden
under the scrolling alarm display area, the
touch switch does not operate by touching
the switch.

(2) Displaying occurred time

The GOT clock data is used for displaying the occurred time.
For precautions and restrictions on the GOT clock data for the clock function, refer to the following.

LEVEL

When alarm occurs

12
PANELMETER

When alarm does not occur

ALARM

(1) When scrolling alarm display overlaps with placed objects

13
LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

10 - 255

10 - 256

10.9 Scrolling Alarm Display

GRAPH, METER

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

11. LEVEL

This function fills the specified range equivalent to the device value, with the percentage of the difference between the
upper/lower limit values.
With this function, the device value can be shown as a level in any closed figure.
D100=0
100
75
50
25
0

D100=100

11

100
75
50
25
0

LEVEL

100
75
50
25
0

D100=50

ALARM

10

Example:

Numerical
display

12

9. COMMENT DISPLAY

Comment
display

PANELMETER

5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

When combined with the comment display

Decrease
Level

Level

13

D100=25
D100=50
The text of the comment display is changed
according to the level value, and the color is
XOR-combined.
11.1 Device/Style tab

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

D100=25
D100=50
Numeric value is displayed in the XOR-combined color.

LINE GRAPH

When combined with the numerical display

11 - 1

11.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the level is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

[Graph]

[Level] from the menu.

To display the level within a figure, adjust the dotted frame in order that it will fit the figure.
If the internal position mark( ) is overlapped with the figure, and the figure is highlighted, the level arrangement is
completed.
Level
Inter. pos.
mark data

Figure

4.

Adjust the dotted line of level display in order that it fits the outline of the figure.

5.

Double click the arranged level to display the setting dialog box.

11 - 2

11.1 Settings

HINT
When internal position mark ( ) are not overlapped with the figure
When internal position marks are not overlapped with the figure, move the internal position mark according to the
following procedure.
The level is not applicable to figures that are not overlapped with internal position mark.
When level is not valid

10

When level is valid

ALARM

Figure of level
display

11

[Edit

12
PANELMETER

Right-click the dotted frame for the level and click [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region]
Touch Area/Frame Region].

LEVEL

Frame for level

display area

1.

COMMENT DISPLAY

LINE GRAPH

13

Internal position mark data change from

Drag the internal position mark in order it will overlap with the figure.

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

2.

to

TREND GRAPH

14

Figure is reversed and

level is valid.

11.1 Settings

11 - 3

 Device/Style tab

Preview list

Item
Device

Description

Model

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type for monitor device.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
BCD16
BCD32

Preview list*1

Displays the set status for each state.

Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case). (The state No. 0 indicates the normal case)

Signed BIN32
Real

Unsigned BIN32

Creates a new state.

Deletes the state.
/

Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.

Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected state.

(Continued to next page)

11 - 4

11.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the direction the color changes when the monitor device value increases.
Direction

Up

Down

Left

Right

COMMENT DISPLAY

10
Set the frame line color of the figure for level display.

Shape of level object

Level is valid.
Lower Limit

Upper Limit

Range

Figure
LEVEL

Figure

11

Shape of level object

Level is invalid.

12

Select whether the device value range (lower/upper limit) for level display is displayed based on the
setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
Device : Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.

PANELMETER

Boundary Color

The level without the frame line is not displayed inside of the figure.
Example 1) When the boundary color is the
Example 2) When the boundary color differs
same as the figure frame line color
from the figure frame line color

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be
monitored.

Set the condition for word device range.

13

Level Color

Select filling color for level display.

Pattern
Background
Color

Select the pattern and background color for the level.

The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
LINE GRAPH

Display Format
(Common)

ALARM

Line of figure

Level Pattern + Level color

Color Settings

Example: Pattern Background :

Level Pattern

Level color

14

Pattern Background

TREND GRAPH

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Object Name

Level Pattern

11.1 Settings

11 - 5

*1 State

(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Device/Style] tab
When the state is other than the one set on the [Device/Style] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on
the [Extended] tab.

(2) When states are overlapped

When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Example) The level and comment are combined.
Set the same state (display range) to the level and comment display, and change the level color
and display comment simultaneously.
Level setting

Comment display setting

Increase

Level
Monitor device
Direction
Upper limit
Lower limit

Operation priority for

setting overlap state
High

Low

Display result

Increase

Comment display
Monitor device
: D100
Display mode
: Transparent
Register comment : Comment No. 1 Increase
Comment No. 2 Decrease
Comment No. 3 Proper

: D100
: Up
: 100
:0

Level

Comment display

Level color

Display comment

71<=$V

Red

Increase

$V<=30

Yellow

Decrease

Normal case
(State 0)

Light blue

Proper

State No.

Display range

* $V represents the monitor device value

11 - 6

State 1

When the device value is 71 or greater (71<=$V), the level color will appear
as red and the text, "Increase", will be displayed.

State 2

When the device value is 30 or less ($V<=30), the level color will appear as
yellow and the text, "Decrease" will be displayed.

Normal case
(State 0)

Under states other than the states 1 and 2, the level is displayed in light blue
and the text is displayed in "Proper".

11.1 Settings

Increase

Decrease

Proper

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Extended tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Item

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

PANELMETER

Security Level

Model

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

13

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Category

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Layer

11.1 Settings

11 - 7

 Trigger tab

Item
Trigger Type

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

11 - 8

11.1 Settings

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Operation/Script tab

10

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right : Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Data Operation

13
LINE GRAPH

Description

TREND GRAPH

Item

11.1 Settings

11 - 9

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Device/Style

Extended
*1

Level Color

graph_color

3)

Level Pattern

pattern

3)

Pattern Background
Color

back_color

3)

Security Level

security

4)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

11 - 10

11.1 Settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

11.2 Relevant Settings

The level is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

Description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

LEVEL

11.3 Actions
How to set the level
The following explains the general procedure to set the level.

12

Example: Level for tank injection

: 0 to 500 liter
: D10
: 0 to 100%
Numerical display

Set by combining multiple

objects and figures.

50

100
50

Figure, scale

50

100

Level is displayed within

a frame for a figure.
Draw scale if required.

Level

14

50

13

Displayed in XOR-combined
color according to the level.

LINE GRAPH

500

PANELMETER

Tank capacity
Injection volume
Injection rate

TREND GRAPH

Set the level display

range according to
a frame for a figure.
Injection volume
D10 value is monitored.

15

Upper/lower limit
Set tank capacity.

BAR GRAPH

Make the settings for figure, scale and numerical display before arranging the level.
Scale
100
50

Numerical display
Set the numerical value to be XOR-reversed.
5.2 Setting Numerical

16

Figure
Draw the figure that overlaps with the level as follows.
Use the boundary color set in the level
Draw the figure in enclosed shape.

11.2 Relevant Settings

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

1.

11 - 11

Example) Figure drawn for level display

Drawn by vertex,
circular or oval figure

Drawn by line
If the figure is of
the enclosed type,
the level display
is used.

The figure in
different color from
the boundary color
is filled.
Level frame

2.

Level frame

Level and figure overlapped

100

Figure
Numerical display

50
Level
Figure and numerical object must be enclosed within the "level" frame.
Arrange the level frame and figure to the same length.
If the length of level and figure are different, a value different with the actual one is displayed.

[When length is the same]

Level frame

[When length is different]

Upper limit: 100

Level frame

D10: 80

Upper limit: 100

D10: 80
Direction

Lower limit: 0

Direction

Lower limit: 0
Completely filled.

80% filled.

3.

Set the direction, boundary color and upper/lower limit of level.

500 100

Direction (Up)

50
0

Monitor device (D10)

Boundary color (set to the same color as shape)

Lower/Upper limit (lower limit: 0, upper limit: 500)

HINT
Display the value out of the lower/upper limit
When the monitor device value falls below the lower limit, it is not displayed.
When exceeding the upper limit, it is displayed as the new upper limit.
Upper limit: 500

Lower limit: 0
D10:-100

11 - 12

11.3 Actions

D10:600

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

11.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the level.

Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen

Up to 1000 objects can be set for the level.

10

Precautions when numerical/comment display object is arranged on a level object

(1) Precautions for arrangement
The displayed screen varies depending on whether the layer is used or not.

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

(a) To display XOR-combined level and numerical display/comment display
Description

Display example

Level display is not displayed correctly if

the numerical display or comment display
is arranged on the back layer and the
level display is arranged on the front
layer.

Numerical display

If the numerical display or comment

display is arranged on the front layer and
the level is arranged on the back layer,
the numerical display or comment display
is not inverted (XOR display not
possible).

LEVEL

Level

Impossible

12

Possible

13

Numerical display

Numerical display
Level

Not used
The numerical display and comment
display extended off the level range are
not XOR-combined.

Numerical display
Level

: Can be displayed as expected,

Impossible

: Cannot be displayed as expected

Description

Display example

The level is not displayed correctly if the

numerical display or comment display is
arranged on the back layer and the level
is arranged on the front layer.

Result

Impossible

15

Numerical display
Level

Used
The numeric display or comment display
is free from effects of the level if the
numeric display or comment display is
arranged on the front layer and the level
is arranged on the back layer.

Not used

Possible

50

Numerical display

The numerical display/comment display

in the transparent mode is not affected by
the level.

16

Level
Possible

: Can be displayed as expected,

: Cannot be displayed as expected

11.4 Precautions

14
TREND GRAPH

(b) To display numerical value/comment unaffected by level

LINE GRAPH

PANELMETER

Level

The XOR-combined numerical display

and comment display is displayed with
XOR display mode.

Layer

11

BAR GRAPH

Used

Result

11 - 13

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Layer

(c)

To display multiple numerical displays/comment displays over the level

Layer

Used

Description

Display example

More than one numerical display or

comment display are displayed if they
are arranged on the front layer and the
level is arranged on the back layer.

Result

Numerical display
:Displayed.

123
Injection

Comment display
:Not displayed.

Possible

Level

Not used

Numerical display
:Displayed.

45

Only one numerical display/comment

display is displayed.
The second or later numerical displays/
comment displays are not displayed.

Comment display
:Not displayed.

Level
: Can be displayed as expected ,

Impossible

: Cannot be displayed as expected

(d) To add a shape to the numerical display/comment display

Layer

Description

Used

The shape is free from effects of the level

if it is specified in the numerical display or
comment display and arranged on the
front layer and if the level is arranged on
the back layer.

Not used

Display example

Normal display may not be displayed

normally.

50

Result

Numerical display
Level

50

Numerical display
Level

: Can be displayed as expected ,

Possible

Impossible

: Cannot be displayed as expected

(2) Precautions for use

(a) The numerical/comment display is not updated when the level is updated.
The settings (trigger) to update the display for numerical display/comment display is not relevant.
To update the numerical display or comment display at a different timing from the level, arrange each of
them on separate layers.
(b) Numerical display/Comment display is not blinked or reversed.

Display on the drawing screen

If the internal position mark is not displayed on the drawing screen, the level is not filled.

Internal
position
mark

11 - 14

11.4 Precautions

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

12. PANELMETER

10

D100 = 2000

Ammeter

11

Ammeter

20

LEVEL

20

12
PANELMETER

13
LINE GRAPH

Ammeter

20

14
TREND GRAPH

10

10

15
BAR GRAPH

10

D100 = 3000

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

D100 = 1000

ALARM

This function enables meter display (needle display) of the word device value relative to the preset lower/upper limit
value.

12 - 1

12.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the panelmeter is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged panelmeter to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Panelmeter] from the menu.

Device/Style tab

Item
Device

Data Type
Lower Limit

Upper Limit

Description

Model

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Unsigned BIN32

Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by fixed values or specified
device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values.
Device : Sets the device values.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
The setting range of the lower and upper limit is specified by the data type of the monitored device.
Select the panelmeter type.

Top

Meter Format

Bottom

Left

Right

Top-left

Top-right

Bottom

Left

Right

Full circle

Type

Bottom-left Bottom-right Top

(Continued to next page)

12 - 2

12.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position
where device lower limit value is displayed) for the meter needle.
90

Base Point
0

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

180
270

Select the direction of the needle will move according to the monitor device value. (Clockwise/
Counterclockwise)
The base point of the panelmeter changes depending on the direction.

ALARM

Direction

Select the type of panelmeter display. (Needle/Fill/Needle and Fill)

(For GT10, only Needle is available.)
After the selection, click the color setting button and set [Needle Color], [Fill Color], [Background
Color], and [Pattern].

Needle

Fill

Needle and Fill

LEVEL

Meter Attribute

11

Needle Color

Pattern + Fill Color

Fill Color
Background Color

12

Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.

(Example) Fill Color :

PANELMETER

Meter Format

BG Color :
BG Color

Meter Frame

Select this item to display the meter frame.

Line width of the frame is fixed to 1 dot, and the color fixed to
white.

Meter Panel

Select this item to color the enter panel face.

After selecting this item, set the color.
This item is available only when the meter frame is displayed
by selecting [Meter Frame].

Core

Shape

Meter frame

13
LINE GRAPH

Pattern :

Meter panel

14
Radius

Select this item to display the core.

After the check, click the Color button to set the core color.

TREND GRAPH

Pattern

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
By clicking on the [Shape] button, basic figures other than those in the list box or library figures can
be selected as shape.

15

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

Select the frame color and plate color.

BAR GRAPH

Shape

Plate
Plate Color

Frame
Needle color

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet)
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

12.1 Settings

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Object Name

16

12 - 3

 Scale/Text tab

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale value to the panelmeter.

Example)

-100

100
Scale value
(Value number: 3)

Scale
(Scale points: 5)

-100
100
Scale in combination
scale value

Scale

Select this item to display the scale.

Scale Points
Color

After selecting [Scale], set the number of scale points (2 to 101) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.

Scale Value

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Value
Color

After selecting [Scale Value], set the number (2 to 101) and color of numeric values.
When changing the scale value, set the lower/upper limit values.
Example) Change the lower limit value.

Scale Settings

Changes automatically

50

Scale Value

-100

100

100

Lower limit change of scale value

-100 0
Font

Number Size

Set the scale font and numeric value size (0.5 to 8)

The following fonts are available.
The available numeric size depends on the selected font.
6 8 dot

: 1 0.5(Fixed)

12-dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10)

16-dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity
When changing the numeric value, set the lower limit/upper limit values for the scale value in the
Option tab.

(Continued to next page)

12 - 4

12.1 Settings

Item
Font

Description
Select a font.
6 8dot font
12-dot HQ Mincho
12-dot HQ Gothic TrueType Mincho

Text Size

16-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot standard font

12-dot standard font

16-dot HQ Mincho

TrueType Gothic Stroke (Not available for GT11) Windows font

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

10

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

Select a character set available for the specified font.

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

Text Color

Select the font display color.

Display Position

This selects the display position of text. (Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

Five patterns of text can be displayed simultaneously.
The following positions (A to E) can be set by combining display positions and edit text positions.

Text Settings
Text

B
DA
DA
DA
C

B
A
A
A
C

11

B
AE
AE
AE
C

LEVEL

Alignment

Select Position to Edit Text

A: Center
B: Up
C: Bottom
D: Left
E: Right

ALARM

Script

Input the text to be displayed on the panelmeter. (Up to 32 characters)

Press the [Enter] key to input a new line at the end of the first line.

12
Text

Text

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Set the number of dots for the distance between the text and the
object frame.
Up to 100 dots can be set.

Text

Offset to Frame

PANELMETER

Text

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Common
Settings of
Display
Position

Model

COMMENT DISPLAY

12.1 Settings

12 - 5

 Range tab

Preview list

Item
Preview list*1

Description
Displays the set status for each state.
Creates a new state.
Deletes the state.

Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.

Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected state.

Range

Set the condition for word device range.

Sets the needle, fill color, etc. of a meter.
Needle Color

Needle/Fill
Attribute

Fill Color

Pattern + Fill Color

(Example) Fill Color :
BG Color :

Background Color
Pattern
For details of *1, refer to the following.

12 - 6

12.1 Settings

Pattern :

BG Color

Model

(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Range] tab
When the state is other than those set on the [Range] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute set on the
[Devive/Style] tab.

(2) When states are overlapped

When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.

Operation priority for

setting overlap state

State No.

Display range

Needle Color

21<=$V<=60

Yellow

$V<=20

Red

Normal case
(State 0)

Blue

High

Low

10

: D100

ALARM

Example) Monitor device

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 State

11

State 2

25

When the device value is between 21 and 60

(21<=$V<=60), the needle color will be yellow.

50

100

25

When the device value is 20 or below

($V<=20), the needle color will be red.

75

50

75
100

12
PANELMETER

State 1

LEVEL

* $V indicates the monitored device value.

When the state is other than state 1,2 the needle color will be
blue.

25
0

50

75
100

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Normal case
(State 0)

LINE GRAPH

13

12.1 Settings

12 - 7

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting
Select a kanji region of the characters displayed.
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters
Japan
China (GB) - Mincho
China (Big5)-Gothic

Extended

: Displays Japanese-Chinese characters.

: Displays simplified Chinese characters.
: Displays traditional Chainese characters.

Example: Difference between "Japan" and "China (GB) - Mincho"

KANJI Region

Japan

China (GB) -Mincho

This setting is available only when the following fonts are selected on the [Scale/Text] tab.
12-dot standard
16-dot standard
12-dot HQ Mincho
12-dot HQ Gothic
16-dot HQ Mincho
16-dot HQ Gothic
Scale/Text tab

Layer

Category

12 - 8

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

12.1 Settings

Model

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Operation/Script tab

10

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Data Operation

13
LINE GRAPH

Description

TREND GRAPH

Item

12.1 Settings

12 - 9

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Device/Style

*1

Needle Color

graph_color

3)

Meter Panel

back_color

4)

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Pattern of Meter Panel

pattern

4)

BG Color of Meter Panel

pattern_bg_color

4)

Fill Color

fill_color

3)

BG Color of Fill

fill_bg_color

3)

Pattern of Fill

fill_pattern

3)

Core color

core_color

4)

BG Color of Core

core_bg_color

4)

Core pattern

core_pattern

4)

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

12 - 10

12.1 Settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

12.2 Relevant Settings

The panelmeter is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

LEVEL

12.3 Actions
Panelmeter setting method
The following explains the general procedure to set the panelmeter.

12

Conversion value
Monitors the value of D10.

Ammeter

20

13

Scale value
Indicates current input range.
LINE GRAPH

10

PANELMETER

Example) Panelmeter that indicates analog/digital conversion value for 12mA

Current input range
: 0 to 20mA
Digital output range
: 0 to 4000
Conversion value
: D10

4000

Lower/upper limit
Sets digital output range.

Set the meter type, needle color, shape, lower limit, upper limit, and the data format of the device to be monitored on
the [Device/Style] tab.
Figure frame
Monitored device (D10)
Direction (Clockwise)

15

Needle color
Meter type (top)
4000

Lower/upper limit
(Lower limit: 0, Upper limit: 4000)

BAR GRAPH

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

1.

TREND GRAPH

14

12.2 Relevant Settings

12 - 11

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
If the monitor device value exceeds the lower/upper limit value, the graph shows it as the lower/upper limit value.
Lower limit: 0

Upper limit: 4000

D10: -50

2.

D10: 4200

Set the panelmeter scale, scale display, and text on the [Scale/Text] tab.
0

-100

Ammeter

Scale (Scale points: 5)

100

4000

Scale display (Scale points: 3)

: Default value displayed.
Text (Inputs directly)

12.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the panelmeter.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 1000 objects can be set for the panelmeter.

12 - 12

12.4 Precautions

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

13. LINE GRAPH

10

400

400

200

200

ALARM

This function enables multiple word device data to be collected in batch and displayed in a line graph.

11

D10 = 100
D11 = 50
D12 = 200
D13 = 150

D10 = 150
D11 = 100
D12 = 250
D13 = 350

LEVEL

12

Example)
Compare the data with the ones previously collected. (Display the locus)

PANELMETER

13.1 Extended tab

Updated line
400

400

400

200

200

200

200

Every time cascade

the collected data with
the new graph.

0
1

13
2

Clears the displaying graph by

clearing the trigger. Displays the
graph with the new collected
data.

14
TREND GRAPH

0
1

15
BAR GRAPH

0
1

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

LINE GRAPH

400

13 - 1

13.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the line graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged line graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Line Graph] from the menu.

Data tab

Item

Description

Graph Type

Select the graph to be set. (Line Graph/Trend Graph/Bar Graph)

Number of Pens

Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

1 to 8 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)

Model

Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 500 points can be set. (For GT10, 2 to 50 points)
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.

Points : 5

Points

Space between
points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
Select the setting direction for the graph.

To right

Direction

To left

Value of the
monitored device

Value of the
monitored device

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1

Direction of the set

monitored device

Direction of the set

monitored device

(Continued to next page)

13 - 2

13.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Set the device to be monitored.

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Graph
Style
Width

(1) Edit Device dialog box

: Select the line color of graph.
: Select the line style of graph.
: Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)

ALARM

List

Upper Limit

10

Set the graph attributes.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Device
: Click the [Edit] button to set a word device to be monitored.

Device

Lower Limit

Unsigned BIN32

COMMENT DISPLAY

11

Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for line graph is displayed based on the setting by fixed
values or specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

12
PANELMETER

Object Name

LEVEL

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the [Data Type] of the device to be monitored.

(1) Edit Device dialog box

LINE GRAPH

13

Item

Device Settings

Description

Model

Select the setting method for devices in the device list.

(For GT10, only [Continuous] is available.)
Continuous
: The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head device, and any
other device will be consecutively assigned to the second and later points.
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.

TREND GRAPH

14

15

Check this item to display a point using 2 devices.

1 device/point

Device List

16

2 devices/point

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

2 Device/Point

BAR GRAPH

Display 2
devices by
one point.

Click on the desired item in the list to set the monitor device by direct input or clicking on the [...] button.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

13.1 Settings

13 - 3

 Style tab

Item

Description

Shape

Model

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape
Settings

Frame Color

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Plate

Plate Color

Flame

(Continued to next page)

13 - 4

13.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale value to the line graph.

100

50

50

0 50 100
Scale value display
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)

10

0
50 100
Combine the scale display
and scale value display
ALARM

Scale display
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)
Example)

100

Select this item to display the scale.

Scale

Color
Scale
Points

COMMENT DISPLAY

11

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit

Scale
Settings

Upper limit

Changed
automatically

50

Font

Lower limit

Scale Value

100

LEVEL

Value

Set the numeric color, numeric value (0, 2 to 101), lower limit value, upper limit value, font
and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X
axis) lines.
Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y

12

100
PANELMETER

Color

250

50

100

50

100

13

Change the scale value of Y.

Upper limit : "100"
"500"
In [Font], the following items can be selected.
Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
6 8dot

: 1 0.5 (Fix)

12dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)

LINE GRAPH

Number
Size

16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.

14

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

TREND GRAPH

The scale is not displayed when [Scale Points] is set to 0. Therefore, a scale can be
displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Select this item to display a frame for the graph.

Rectangle frame
Rectangle
Frame

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

13.1 Settings

13 - 5

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting
Select this item to display the updated line graph cascading on the previous graph.
The previous graph is stored in the GOT internal memory.

Display at the first time

100

100

50

50

Display at the second time

100

Display at the third time

50

0
0
1
5
1
2
3
4
5
Display the cascaded 1, 2, 3 data contents.
Select the timing of clearing locus after the check.
No Clear Trigger
: Does not erase the locus.
0

Locus
Extended

Clear On Trigger Rise : Erases the locus with the rise (turns ON) of bit device.*1
Clear On Trigger Fall : Erases the locus with the fall (turns OFF) of bit device.*1
When selecting [Clear On Trigger Rise] or [Clear On Trigger Fall], set the bit device to be used for
the clear trigger.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Check this item when setting the value without line connection.
After checking, set the not-displayed value.
Example) When not setting the not-displayed value
When setting 300 to the not-displayed value.
Hidden Value

300
200
100
00

300
200
100
0

3 4

300
0 1

3 4

The line connecting 1 to 3 is not displayed.

Layer

Category

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1, refer to the following.

13 - 6

13.1 Settings

The timing of recognizing clear trigger in the GOT is the same as the timing set in [Trigger Type] ([Trigger] tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set for clear
the trigger must be retained longer than the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Example of data retention for a period longer than that set in [Trigger Type].
Clear Trigger
: Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type
: Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

10

100

100

50

50

Touch the touch switch

set for the clear trigger

11

The graph displayed

previously is erased.
LEVEL

Erases
the graph

OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

13
LINE GRAPH

Sampling
(3 s)

PANELMETER

12

14
TREND GRAPH

15
BAR GRAPH

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

ALARM

The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear trigger (M10)
turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.

13.1 Settings

13 - 7

 Trigger tab

Item

Description
Select the condition to display or activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in seconds. (1 to 3600 s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range

Model

Bit Trigger

Trigger Type
The trigger is displayed as follows, when [Locus] is selected on the [Extended] tab.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600 s) in seconds.*1
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling OFF Sampling
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Settings

Fall
Sampling

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Range
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Collect data only
when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
This item is available when [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced. *2
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

13 - 8

13.1 Settings

(1) Update timing for ON Sampling or OFF Sampling

When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], the graph may not be updated at the set sampling cycle in
some cases.
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type].
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle

10

(When setting [Trigger Type] to [ON Sampling] and the cycle to 1 second.)
one
second

one
second

ALARM

one
second
Sampling set using "Trigger Type"
ON

11

OFF
3)
4)

5)
LEVEL

2)

At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.

At the timing of 2), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the line graph is updated.

12

(b) Countermeasures
The cycle set by [Trigger Type] is independent of the status of the device. (The cycle is not changed even
turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.

1.

Select [Rise] or [Fall] in the [Trigger Type].

2.

Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the sequence program.

(2) Update timing for Sampling, ON Sampling or OFF Sampling.

When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating timing varies depending on
whether to use the locus setting.

13

14
TREND GRAPH

(a) Without setting locus

Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At language switching
At security level change
The display is updated when the set cycle comes during any of the procedures above,

PANELMETER

1)

LINE GRAPH

Status of device set using "Trigger Device"

15
BAR GRAPH

(b) With setting locus

Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
When the drive information is displayed
At execution of an operation in which GOT is restarted in the utility.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

13.1 Settings

13 - 9

*2 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective
The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is
efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in the
display.
Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
100

100

50

50

0
1

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

50

0
1

13 - 10

Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

13.1 Settings

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Operation/Script tab

10

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked
in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Data Operation

13
LINE GRAPH

Description

TREND GRAPH

Item

13.1 Settings

13 - 11

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the object
setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Upper Limit (X)

scale_max[0]

4)

Upper Limit (Y)

scale_max[1]

4)

Lower Limit (X)

scale_min[0]

4)

Lower Limit (Y)

scale_min[1]

4)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

13 - 12

13.1 Settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

13.2 Relevant Settings

The line graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

13.3 Actions
LEVEL

Method for line graph setting

The following explains the general procedure to set the line graph.

12

50

14

Set the monitored devices, number of graphs, lower limit value, upper limit value and number of points on the [Data]
tab.
Graph number (1)
6000

Monitored device
(D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)

15

Points (5)

BAR GRAPH

Direction (to right)

: The setting procedure of device.
Figure frame
Lower/Upper limit
(Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 6000)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

1.

Production quantity (D10 to 14)

of each production line(1 to 5).
Scale value
Vertical : Indicates the completion ratio.
Horizontal: Indicates the No. of the production
line whose production quantity is
monitored.
Lower/upper limit
Set the production quantity.

LINE GRAPH

100

13

TREND GRAPH

6000

PANELMETER

Example) Line graph for displaying production quantity of multi production line.
Achievement ratio
: 0 to 100%
Production quantity
: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (line 1)
: D10
(line 2)
: D11
(line 3)
: D12
(line 4)
: D13
(line 5)
: D14

13.2 Relevant Settings

13 - 13

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the lower/upper limit, it is displayed numerically on the graph.
D10: 7000

Upper limit : 6000

Lower limit :

0
D10: -1000

2.

Set the shape, scale and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape

6000

Scale
Vertical (scale points: 5)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
0

Scale value
Vertical (upper limit: 50, lower limit: 0)
Horizontal (upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)

13.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the line graph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 32 objects can be set for the line graph.

(2) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting
Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is
set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System alarm
occurs).

(3) When using GT10

The line graph and trend graph cannot be set on the same screen.

13 - 14

13.4 Precautions

(1) Maximum number line graphs that can be set in one project
When the base screen arranged with line graph is multi-displayed in other base screen with the Set overlay
screen function, only the first line graph can be displayed and the second and later will not be displayed.

(2) Screens where the line graph can be arranged

The setting is available for the base screen only.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Precautions for the line graph which locus has been set.

10

(3) Windows that cannot be set on the base screen

When arranging the trend graph on the base screen, some windows cannot be displayed on the base screen.
The following shows the windows that cannot be displayed on each GOT.
Windows that cannot be displayed
Overlap window 5

GT15, GT11, GT10

Overlap window 2, test window

ALARM

GOT
GT16, GT SoftGOT1000

11

(4) Functions that cannot be used

The offset function and the station number switching function are not available.

(5) When using GT11

LEVEL

When [Format] is set to [Vertical] in the [System Environment], the line graph cannot be used.
(Not displayed on the GOT even when arranged on the screen.)

(6) When overlaying shapes

12

Pay attention to the following when a line graph is overlaid on a shape.

PANELMETER

(a) The BMP/JPEG file pasted to the screen cannot exceed the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the area that is not overlapped in the line graph frame will not be displayed.
Example)
Line graph frame BMP/JPEG files
for shape

BMP/JPEG files exceed

the line graph frame.

(b) When using shapes filled with color, arrange the frame of the shape (the boundary line of paint area) within
the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the shape will not be painted normally.
(c)

Since the shape set in the overlay screen is not displayed, it must be directly placed over and as the
background for the line graph.

(d) Do not use the superimpose window because shapes within the superimpose window will not be displayed
as background.

14
TREND GRAPH

Arrange BMP/JPEG files

in the line graph frame

LINE GRAPH

13

15
BAR GRAPH

Example)

Window screen

Set locus display

16

Do not set locus display

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Base screen

13.4 Precautions

13 - 15

13 - 16

13.4 Precautions

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

14. TREND GRAPH

10
This function is used to collect word device data continuously and display it in trend graph.
D10 = 150
D11 = 100

200

200

200

100

100

100

Graph1 (
): D10
Graph2 (------): D11

Displays to the end of

graph display range in
order.

ALARM

D10 = 200
D11 = 100

11

Continues to collect data

when the following graph
is displayed by scrolling.

LEVEL

D10 = 100
D11 = 50

12
Historical trend graph
Differing from the trend graph function described in this section, historical trend graph accumulates the collected
data and displays them in time sequence.
Since it displays the accumulated data, both the current and past information can be displayed as graphs.

13
LINE GRAPH

19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

PANELMETER

HINT

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

14 - 1

14.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged trend graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Trend Graph] from the menu.

Data tab

Item

Description

Graph Type

Select the graph to be set. (Line Graph/Trend Graph/Bar Graph)

Number of Pens

Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

1 to 8 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)

Model

Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph.
2 to 500 points can be set. (For GT10, 2 to 50 points)
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.

Example:
Points: 5
Points

Space between points = 20 dots

X 100 dots
Select the setting direction for the graph.

Right
Direction

Monitored
device
value

Left
Monitored
device
value

Elapsed time

Elapsed time

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Device
Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Unsigned BIN32

(Continued to next page)

14 - 2

14.1 Settings

Item

Description

Device

List

Lower Limit

Upper Limit

When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
([Random] is not available for GT10)
Continuous
: The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random
: One device to be monitored is set for each graph.

10

Set the graph attributes. Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Device
: Click the [...] button to set the word device to be monitored.
Graph
: Select the line color of graph.
Style
: Select the line style of graph.
Width
: Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)

ALARM

Device
Setting

Model

COMMENT DISPLAY

Select whether the device value range (Lower/upper limit value) for the trend graph is displayed based on the setting by
fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.

11

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be monitored.

Store Memory

LEVEL

Select this item to continually collect data even when a screen in which the trend graph is not set is displayed.
The data as many as the number of points for the graph are stored in the GOT internal memory.
Select the timing to erase the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
No Clear Trigger
: Does not clear the data stored in the GOT internal memory.

12

Clear on Trigger Rise : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device rises (turns ON).*1
*1

PANELMETER

Clear on Trigger Fall : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the bit device falls (turns OFF).
When [Clear on Trigger Rise] or [Clear on Trigger Fall] is selected, set the bit device for the clear trigger.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

13

For details of *1, refer to the following.

The timing of recognizing clear trigger in the GOT is the same as the timing set in [Trigger Type] ([Trigger] tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set for clear
the trigger must be retained longer than the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Example of data retention for a period longer than that set in [Trigger Type].
Clear Trigger
: Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type
: Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay

50

Touch the touch switch

where a clear trigger
is set.

The previously displayed

graph is deleted.

16

The graph is
deleted.

Sampling (3 s)

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

15
BAR GRAPH

100

50

TREND GRAPH

14

The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear trigger (M10)
turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
100

LINE GRAPH

*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

14.1 Settings

14 - 3

 Style tab

Item

Description

Model

Shape

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

Frame Color

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape
Settings

Plate

Plate Color

Frame

(Continued to next page)

14 - 4

14.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale value to the trend graph.

Example)

100

100

50

50

0 50 100
Scale value
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)

10

0
50 100
Scale is displayed in
combination with scale
value.
ALARM

Scale
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)

Select this item to display the scale.

Scale

Color
Scale
Points

COMMENT DISPLAY

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

11

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Upper
Limit

Upper

Font

100

Changed
automatically

50

LEVEL

Lower
Limit

Scale
Settings

Set the numeric color, numeric value (0, 2 to 101), lower limit value, upper limit value, font
and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X
axis) lines.
Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y

12

500
PANELMETER

Color
Value

250

Scale Value

Lower

50

100

50

100

Change scale value on Y

Upper: "100" "500"

13

In [Font], the following items can be selected.

Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
6 8dot

: 1 0.5 (Fix)

12dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)

16dot Standard

: 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

LINE GRAPH

Number
Size

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

14

Select this item to display a frame for the graph.

Rectangle frame
TREND GRAPH

Rectangle
Frame

BAR GRAPH

15

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16

14.1 Settings

14 - 5

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Layer

Category

14 - 6

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

14.1 Settings

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Trigger tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Model

Select a condition to display/activate the object.

Set sampling (0.1 to 3600 s) with 100ms as unit when selecting [Sampling] [ON Sampling] [OFF Sampling].
(For GT10, [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] and [OFF Sampling] cannot be set.)
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling

12
PANELMETER

Trigger Type

Description

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

13

Rise
Fall

LINE GRAPH

OFF Sampling

14

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

TREND GRAPH

Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced. *2
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

15
BAR GRAPH

Collect data only

when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

For details of each item, refer to the following.

ON Sampling

Sampling

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Settings

14.1 Settings

14 - 7

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle

(1) Update timing for ON Sampling or OFF Sampling

When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], the graph may not be updated at the set sampling cycle in
some cases.
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type].
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
(When setting [Trigger Type] to [ON Sampling] and the cycle to 1 second.)
one
second

one
second

one
second

Sampling set using "Trigger Type"

ON
Status of device set using "Trigger Device"

OFF
3)
1)

2)

4)

5)

At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.

At the timing of 2), the trend graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the trend graph is updated.
(b) Countermeasures
The cycle set by [Trigger Type] is independent of the status of the device. (The cycle is not changed even
turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.

1.
2.

Select [Rise] or [Fall] in the [Trigger Type].

Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.

(2) Update timing for Sampling, ON Sampling or OFF Sampling.

When using memory store while selecting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating
timing varies.
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At language switching
At station No. switching
At security level change
The display is updated when the set cycle comes during any of the procedures above,
(b) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
When the drive information is displayed
Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility

14 - 8

14.1 Settings

The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.

COMMENT DISPLAY

*2 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective

10

Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.

100

100

50

50

ALARM

Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

11

LEVEL

Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph

0
2

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

12

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

PANELMETER

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

13

50

0
5

LINE GRAPH

14
TREND GRAPH

15
BAR GRAPH

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

14.1 Settings

14 - 9

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data
Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

Data Operation

14 - 10

14.1 Settings

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

PANELMETER

12

13

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

14
TREND GRAPH

Tab name

Object property

LINE GRAPH

Setting dialog box

width
height

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Upper Limit (X)

scale_max[0]

4)

Upper Limit (Y)

scale_max[1]

4)

Lower Limit (X)

scale_min[0]

4)

Lower Limit (Y)

scale_min[1]

4)

Security Level

security

4)

15

*1

16

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.

STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Extended

BAR GRAPH

Style

28.3.4 Control structure

14.1 Settings

14 - 11

14.2 Relevant Settings

The trend graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

14.3 Actions
Setting method of trend graph
The following explains the general procedure to set the trendgraph.
Example) Trend graph for the comparison between Plan and Actual
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Plan (Graph 1)
: D10
Actual (Graph 2) : D11

1000

Actual
Monitors the value of D10.
Plan
Monitors the value of D11.

100

50

Scale value
X: Represents productivity.
Y: Represents elapsed time.
-3

-2

-1

Lower/Upper limit
Sets production.

1.

Set the number of graphs, lower limit value, upper limit value, number of points, device to be monitored, and line
attributes on the [Data] tab.
1000

Number of graphs (2)

Monitored device (D10, D11)
Points (6)
Direction (Right)

Lower/Upper limit
(Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 100)

14 - 12

14.2 Relevant Settings

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the lower/upper limit, it is displayed numerically on the graph.

0
ALARM

Lower limit:

10

D10: 1500

Upper limit: 1000

D10: -50

11
Set the shape, scale and scale values on the [Style] tab.

LEVEL

Shape
Line attribute (Graph color, line type, line width)

1000

Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
0

PANELMETER

Set the timing to collect data on the [Trigger] tab.

The default timing of collecting data is set in 1 second (1000ms) cycle.

13

Store memory
Executing the following operations clear the graph on the screen or collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, set [Store Memory] so that the collected data is held.
[Store Memory] is set on the [Data] tab.
Item

When Store Memory is not set

When Store Memory is set

LINE GRAPH

3.

12

Scale value: Displays default value.

X (Scale points: 3)
Y (Scale points: 3)

14

Switching screens or switching to utility

Switching language switching device
Switching the base screen when a trend graph is displayed on the
superimpose window

Display is cleared.
The device value is reset to zero.

Display is retained.
The device value is retained.

Switching the security level*1

Switching the station No. device
When the store memory is not set, if the security level or the device value set for the level device is switched in [Common]

15

[Security] from the menu , the display is erased and the device value is changed to 0.

BAR GRAPH

[GOT Environmental Setting]

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

*1

TREND GRAPH

2.

COMMENT DISPLAY

14.3 Actions

14 - 13

Operations when switching screens

Monitored device: D10, D11
Base screen 1

Device value

100

50

D10

D11

25

50
0
0

60

120

Switch display screen

Change device value

Base screen 5

D10

50

D11

25

D10

25

D11

50

D10

75

D11

90

Produce menu
Line 1
Line 2

Display base screen 1 again

Store memory

Do not store memory

100

100

50

50

0
0

60

120

Display the device value

before switching to other
screen, as well as the one
displayed on other screen
on the graph.

0
0

60

120

Display current device value

only after collecting and displaying
new data.
(The trend graph is displayed when
the conditions are met again and the
device value is monitored.)

POINT
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory
The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
When the project is downloaded
When the drive information is displayed
Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility

14.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the trendgraph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 24 objects can be set for the trendgraph.

(2) When using store memory

For the trend graph with store memory set, up to 16 objects can be set on the whole project.

(3) When setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
Do not make a setting in which the trigger is met simultaneously for 257 or more objects for which [Collect data
only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met and are not displayed correctly (causing system
alarm).

(4) When using GT10

Both the trend graph and line graph cannot be set on one screen.

14 - 14

14.4 Precautions

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

15. BAR GRAPH

10

ALARM

This section explains the function for collecting word device data and displaying them as a bar graph.

11
100
400
200

D10
D20
D30

-200
200
400
LEVEL

D10
D20
D30

12

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged bar graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Bar Graph] from the menu.

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

[Graph]

PANELMETER

15.1 Settings

15.1 Settings

15 - 1

 Data tab

Item

Description

Graph Type

Select the graph to be set. (Line Graph/Trend Graph/Bar Graph)

Number of
Pens

Set the number of graphs to be displayed.

1 to 8 graphs can be set. (For GT10, 1 to 4 graphs)

Model

Select the setting direction for the graph.

Y direction:
Direction

Monitor
device value

X direction:
In the set
order of
the device

In the set order of the device

Monitor device value

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in each
graph.
(For GT10, [Random] cannot be set.)
Continue : The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random : One device to be monitored is set for each graph.

Device

List

Unsigned BIN32

Set the graph attributes.

Select each item on the list to make the settings.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device for
monitoring.
Graph
: Select the graph color.
Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph.
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.

Example:
Graph

Pattern + Graph
:

Pattern :
BG

BG

(Continued to next page)

15 - 2

15.1 Settings

Item

Upper Limit

Base Value

Object
Name

Description

Model

Select whether the device value range (Lower/upper limit value, base value) for the bar graph is displayed based on the
setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the lower limit value, the upper limit value, and the base value.
Device : Sets the device values as the lower limit value, the upper limit value, and the base value.

10

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the data format of the device to be monitored.
The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

ALARM

Lower Limit

COMMENT DISPLAY

11

LEVEL

Style tab

PANELMETER

12

LINE GRAPH

13

14
Description

Shape

Model

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

TREND GRAPH

Item

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

Select the frame color and plate color.

15

Plate

Frame

(Continued to next page)

BAR GRAPH

Plate Color

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Shape
Settings

15.1 Settings

15 - 3

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale values to the bar graph.

Example :

100

100

50

50

0
Scale display
(X: 5)
(Y: 5)

0 50 100
Scale value
(X: 3)
(Y: 3)

0
50 100
Scale is displayed in combination
with scale value

Select this item to display the scale.

Color
Scale
Scale
Points

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale
points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical
direction only.

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Scale
Settings

Color
Value
Lower Limit
Upper Limit

Set the color of numeric display, number of numeric values (0, 2 to 101), lower limit
value, upper limit value, font of numeric display, and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
In [Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit], set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal
(X axis) lines.
Example : Change the upper limit of the scale value on Y
Upper

Font

100

100
Sets lower limit of the
scale value to "0"

50

Scale Value

Changes
automatically
Lower

Number
Size

-100

In [Font], the following items can be selected.

Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
6x8dot

:1

0.5(Fix)

12dot Standard

:1

1 to 8

16dot Standard

: 0.5

8 (Not available for GT10.)

0.5 to 8

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

(Continued to next page)

15 - 4

15.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select this item to display a frame for the graph.

Scale Settings

Rectangle frame

Rectangle
Frame

COMMENT DISPLAY

10

ALARM

Set the graph width. (1 to 500 dots)

The width of bar graph includes the 1 dot on the boundary line (Vertical bar: left side; horizontal bar:
upper side).

Graph Width

11
Boundary line (1 dot)

Boundary line (1 dot)

Graph width: including the boundary line

LEVEL

Set the space between graph origin and the selected position to edit the text bar in the bar graph that
is near to the origin. (0 to 100 dots)

12

Offset to
Graph Frame

PANELMETER

Distance from
graph frame
Distance from graph frame

Bar Graph
Attribute

Set the space between bar graphs. (1 to 500 dots)

The bar width is counted in the setting value.
Vertical graph

13

Horizontal graph

LINE GRAPH

Width + Space

Space (including graph width)

Select this item to select the sorting of the graphs.

(None/Ascending/Descending)

14

[Ascending]
X direction

TREND GRAPH

Y direction

Sort
[Descending]
X direction

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Y direction

15.1 Settings

15 - 5

 Extended tab

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Layer

Category

15 - 6

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

15.1 Settings

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Trigger tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Item

Model

Select a condition to display/activate the object.

When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

PANELMETER

Trigger Type

Description

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

13

Ordinary
ON

Settings

Rise
Fall

LINE GRAPH

OFF
For details of each item, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling

14

Range
Bit Trigger

TREND GRAPH

Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*1

15
BAR GRAPH

For details of *1, refer to the following.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Collect data only

when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

15.1 Settings

15 - 7

*1 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective
The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.
Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
100

100

50

50

0
1

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

50

0
1

15 - 8

Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

15.1 Settings

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data Operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

COMMENT DISPLAY

Operation/Script tab

10

ALARM

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

LEVEL

11

PANELMETER

12

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked
in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

14

BAR GRAPH

15

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Data Operation

13
LINE GRAPH

Description

TREND GRAPH

Item

15.1 Settings

15 - 9

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height
Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Upper Limit(X)

scale_max[0]

4)

Upper Limit(Y)

scale_max[1]

4)

Lower Limit(X)

scale_min[0]

4)

Lower Limit(Y)

scale_min[1]

4)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

15 - 10

15.1 Settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

15.2 Relevant Settings

The bar graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

10

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

ALARM

Function

11

LEVEL

15.3 Actions
The following explains the general procedure to set the bar graph.
Example: Bar graph displaying production quantity of multiple lines
Achievement ratio
: 0 to 100%
Production quantity
: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (Line 1)
: D10
(Line 2)
: D11
(Line 3)
: D12
(Line 4)
: D13
(Line 5)
: D14

PANELMETER

12

13

The production of each line

(1 to 5)(D10 to 14)

LINE GRAPH

Scale value
X: Indicates achievement ratio.
Y: Indicates line No.
0

Draws with figure and text.

14

Lower/Upper limit
Sets production.

Set the number of graphs, devices to monitor, graph color, lower limit value, upper limit value, and base value on the
[Data] tab.
6000

Number of graphs (5)

Monitor device (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)

15

Graph color
Base value

BAR GRAPH

Lower/Upper limit
(Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 6000)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

1.

TREND GRAPH

6000

15.2 Relevant Settings

15 - 11

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
If the monitor device value exceeds the lower/upper limit value, the graph shows it as the lower/upper limit value.
D13 = 7000
Upper limit: 6000

Lower limit:

0
D11 = 1000

2.

Set the shape, scale and scale values on the [Style] tab.
6000

Shape

Scale (Scale points: 5)

Scale value (Numerical value number: 3)

15.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the bar graph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 1000 objects can be set for the bar graph.

(2) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting
Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are
satisfied] is set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System
alarm occurs).

15 - 12

15.4 Precautions

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

16. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH

10

ALARM

The statistics bar graph enables to display the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total value.

11
12
76
12

D10
D20
D30

33
33
34

LEVEL

D10
D20
D30

Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen

12

Device status can be displayed more effectively by including the line graph legend.

No.

Ma. name

Target vol.

Prod. vol.

Ma. 1

5000

2000

Ma. 2

5000

1200

Ma. 3

5000

1000

PANELMETER

7. DATA LIST

13
LINE GRAPH

Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to device values

The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending order of device values.
16.1 Style tab

TREND GRAPH

14

16.1 Settings

15

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the statistics bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged statistics bar graph to display the setting dialog box.

BAR GRAPH

[Statistics Bar Graph] from the menu.

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

[Graph]

16.1 Settings

16 - 1

 Data tab

Item

Description

Graph Type

Select the graph to be set. (Bar (Rectangle)/Pie (Circle))

Number of
Divisions

Set the number of word devices to be monitored. (2 to 32)

Model

Select the setting direction for the graph.

Up
Direction

Down

D12

D10

D11

D11

D10

D12

Right

Left

D10 D11 D12 D12 D11 D10

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.

(For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)
Continuous : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.

Device

List

Unsigned BIN32

Set the graph attributes.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device for
monitoring.
Graph : Select the graph color.
Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph.
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.

Example:
Graph :

Pattern + Graph color

Pattern :
BG

Object Name

16 - 2

BG color

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

16.1 Settings

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Style tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

12
Description

Shape

Model
PANELMETER

Item

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

13

Select the frame color and plate color.

Frame

14
TREND GRAPH

(Continued to next page)

15
BAR GRAPH

Plate Color

LINE GRAPH

Plate

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Shape
Settings

16.1 Settings

16 - 3

Item

Description
Set the scale and scale values of the statistics bar graph.
Example)

Scale points: 9

100

100

75

75

50
25

50
25
Combined display of
scale and scale value

Scale value: 5

Select this item to display the scale.

Color
Scale
Scale Points

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale
points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Color
Scale
Settings

Set the numerical value color, number of numerical values (0, 2 to 101), font, and
numerical value size (0.5 to 8).
In [Font], the following items can be selected.
Also, the values available for the numerical value size vary depending on the selected
font.

Value
Font
Scale Value

Number Size

6 8dot

: 1 0.5 (Fix)

12dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)

16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None
: Sort is invalid.
Ascending : Arrange from the small device value to large device value.
Descending : Arrange from the large device value to the small device value.
Sort

16 - 4

16.1 Settings

[Ascending]

[Descending]

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

Extended tab

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

Item

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

13

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

LINE GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

Category

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Layer

12
PANELMETER

Security Level

Model

16.1 Settings

16 - 5

 Trigger tab

Item

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range

Trigger Type

Model

Bit Trigger

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Settings

Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Collect data only
when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*1
For details of *1, refer to the following.

16 - 6

16.1 Settings

The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.

COMMENT DISPLAY

*1 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective

10

Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.

100

100

50

50

ALARM

Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

11

LEVEL

Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph

0
2

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

12

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

PANELMETER

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

13

50

0
5

LINE GRAPH

14
TREND GRAPH

15
BAR GRAPH

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16.1 Settings

16 - 7

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data Operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data
Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

Data Operation

16 - 8

16.1 Settings

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

ALARM

10

LEVEL

11

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

13

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.

Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

LINE GRAPH

Setting dialog box

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

14
TREND GRAPH

width
height
Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.

BAR GRAPH

*1

15

28.3.4 Control structure

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

Extended

PANELMETER

12

16.1 Settings

16 - 9

16.2 Relevant Settings

The statistics bar graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

16.3 Actions
The following explains the general procedure to set the statistics bar graph.
Example: Statistics bar graph displaying the production ratio by model
Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model

100
75

Scale value
Display scale value

50
25
0

1.

Set the graph type, division number, monitor device, and graph color on the [Data] tab.

Graph type, division number, Graph color

100
75
50

Device (D10, D11, D12)

25
0

2.

Set the shape, scale, and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape
Scale (scale number: 4)

100
75
50
25

Scale value (value number: 4)

16 - 10

16.2 Relevant Settings

Model

9
COMMENT DISPLAY

16.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the statistics bar graph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen

10

Up to 32 objects can be set for the statistics bar graph.

Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are
satisfied] is set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System
alarm occurs).

Precautions for use

ALARM

(2) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting

11

(1) When device values are negative

For statistic graph, the absolute value is displayed when monitor device value is a negative number.
When D101 is "30"
D102=50

LEVEL

D100=20 D101=-30

12
60

80

100
PANELMETER

40

Displayed as 30

LINE GRAPH

13

TREND GRAPH

14

15
BAR GRAPH

20

16
STATISTICS BAR
GRAPH

16.4 Precautions

16 - 11

16 - 12

16.4 Precautions

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

SCATTER GRAPH

18
The statistics pie graph enables to display the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total value.

D10
D20
D30

33
33
34

D10
D20
D30

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19
12
76
12

Example:
Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen

Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to device

20

17.1 Extended tab

No.

Ma. name

Target vol.

Prod. vol.

Ma. 1

5000

2000

Ma. 2

5000

1200

Ma. 3

5000

1000

Device status can be displayed more effectively by including

the line graph legend.

21
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending order of
device values.

17.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click the position where the statistics pie graph is to be located to complete the arrangement

3.

Double click the arranged statistics pie graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Statistics Pie Graph] from the menu.

17.1 Settings

17 - 1

PARTS MOVEMENT

7. DATA LIST

PARTS DISPLAY

values

 Data tab

Item

Description

Graph Type

Select the graph to be set. (Bar (Rectangle)/Pie (Circle))

Number of
Divisions

Set the number of word devices to be monitored. (2 to 32)

Model

Set the device to be monitored.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.

(For GT10, [Random] cannot be selected.)
Continuous : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Random
: Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.

Device

List

Unsigned BIN32

Set the graph attributes.

Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Device : Enter the word device name directly, or click the [...] button to select a word device
for monitoring.
Graph : Select the graph color.
Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph.
BG
: Select the background color of the graph.

Example:
Graph :

Pattern + Graph color

Pattern :
BG

Object Name

17 - 2

BG color

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
This object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

17.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Style tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Item

Description

Shape

Model

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20

Select the frame color and plate color.

Plate

Plate Color

Frame

21
(Continued to next page)

17.1 Settings

17 - 3

PARTS MOVEMENT

Shape
Settings

PARTS DISPLAY

(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Frame Color

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale value of statistics pie graph.

Example)

0
75

25

75
50

50

Scale points: 8

25

Scale value: 4

Combined display of
scale and scale value

Select this item to display the scale.

Color
Scale
Scale
Settings

Scale Points

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale
points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Color

Set the numerical value color, number of numerical values (0, 2 to 101), font, and
numerical value size (0.5 to 8).
In [Font], the following items can be selected.
Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected
font.

Value
Font
Scale Value

Number Size

6 8dot

: 1 0.5 (Fix)

12dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)

16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

For details of each fonts and size, refer to the following:
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity
When "0" is set to the number of scale points, the scale is not displayed. Therefore, it is
possible to display a scale in the horizontal direction only or in the vertical direction only.

Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box. (None/Ascending/Descending)
None
: Sort is invalid.
Ascending : Arrange from the small device value to large device value.
Descending : Arrange from the large device value to the small device value.
Sort

17 - 4

[Ascending]

17.1 Settings

[Descending]

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Extended tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Item

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

21

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

PARTS MOVEMENT

Layer

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Security Level

Model

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

17.1 Settings

17 - 5

 Trigger tab

Item

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

Trigger Type

The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Settings

Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
Collect data only
when trigger
conditions are
satisfied

Select this item to collect data only when the trigger conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
Setting is possible when [Rise], [Fall] or [Sampling] is selected.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*1
For details of *1, refer to the following.

17 - 6

17.1 Settings

Model

Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

100

100

50

50

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph

0
2

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

20

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

PARTS DISPLAY

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

18
SCATTER GRAPH

The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

*1 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

50

0
1

17.1 Settings

17 - 7

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data Operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals)5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data
Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

Data Operation

17 - 8

17.1 Settings

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.

21

Tab name

Object property

Setting item

PARTS MOVEMENT

: Execution is not possible for the object property.

- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height
Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Extended
*1

PARTS DISPLAY

20

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

17.1 Settings

17 - 9

17.2 Relevant Settings

The statistics pie graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting
Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

17.3 Actions
The following explains the general procedure to set the statistics pie graph.
Example: Statistics pie graph displaying the production ratio by model
Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model

75

25

Scale value
Display scale value

50

1.

Set the graph type, division number, monitor device, and graph color on the [Data] tab.
Graph type, division number, Graph color
Device (D10, D11, D12)

2.

Set the shape, scale, and scale values on the [Style] tab.
Shape
Scale (scale number: 4)

Scale value (value number: 4)

17 - 10

17.2 Relevant Settings

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the statistics pie graph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
(2) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting
Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are
satisfied] is set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System
alarm occurs).

Precautions for use

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Up to 32 objects can be set for the statistics pie graph.

For statistics pie graph, the absolute value is displayed when the monitor device value is a negative number.
When D101 is "30"

D100=20
D102=50

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

(1) When device values are negative

20
PARTS DISPLAY

D101=-30

(2) Filling
When handling extremely small data in a statistics pie graph, the start point may coincide with the end point.
If this occurs, no filling is performed.

17.4 Precautions

17 - 11

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Displayed as 30

17 - 12

17.4 Precautions

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

18. SCATTER GRAPH

SCATTER GRAPH

18
By taking the values of 2 word devices as X and Y coordinates, the graph is displayed with points/lines.
The following two types of scatter graphs are available.

Sample
Two word device values are collected, and then displayed as a point on the graph.
This graph is updated to the new one with the previously displayed point(s) remained. (Locus)

19

X device: D100
Y device: D200

(300, 200)

(200, 100)

400

400

400

300

300

300

200

200

200

100

100

100

200

300

100
0

100

200

300

100

200

20

300

(50, 300)

(300, 200)

(200, 100)

400

400

400

300

300

300

200

200

200

100

100

100

200

300

PARTS DISPLAY

(2) When line is set as graph display attribute

21

100
0

100

200

300

100

200

300

Batch
Multiple data of 2 word device values are collected together and displayed as corresponding points.
When refreshing the data, the previously displayed point(s) can be either kept or erased depending on the setting
selection.

(1) When point is set as graph display attribute

X device: D100
D109
Y device: D200

400

400

400

300

300

300

200

200

200

100

100

100

200

300

100
0

100

200

300

100

200

300

D209

(2) When line is set as graph display attribute

X device: D100
D109
Y device: D200

400

400

400

300

300

300

200

200

200

100

100

D209

100

200

300

100
0

100

200

300

100

200

300

18 - 1

PARTS MOVEMENT

(50, 300)

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

(1) When point is set as graph display attribute

18.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the scatter graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged scatter graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Scatter Graph] from the menu.

Data tab
Set the graph type, device and lower limit/upper limit.

Item
Graph Type

Description

Model

Select the graph to be set. (Sample/Batch)

Points

Set the points to be displayed when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type], (2 to 500)

Display Mode

Select how to update the graph display when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type],
Replace : Only displays the graph of the latest data.
Locus
: Displays the latest data with the previous displayed graph overlapped.
Set a device to be monitored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Device Setting

Select the setting method for monitoring devices when selecting [Batch] from [Graph Type],
Continuous : The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head
device.
Random
: Devices to be monitored are set at random.

Device

X-Device
Y-Device
Lower Limit

Upper Limit

Unsigned BIN32

Input the device directly for each of X and Y axes, or click the [...] button to set the monitoring word
device.

Select whether to set the range (lower limit/upper limit) of the device displayed in the scatter graph in fixed values or in
the value of the specified device.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
The range available for the lower/upper limit values depends on the [Data Type] of the device to be monitored.

Object Name

18 - 2

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

18.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Style tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Description
Set a shape for the object.
When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape
Settings

Frame Color

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Shape

Model

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Plate color

21

Plate Color

Frame color

(Continued to next page)

18.1 Settings

18 - 3

PARTS MOVEMENT

Item

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Item

Description

Model

Set the scale and scale values for the scatter graph.
Example)

100

100

50

50

0
Scale display
(X:5, Y:5)

50

100

Scale value display

(X:3, Y:3)

50

100

Combine the scale display

and scale value display

Select this item to display the scale.

Scale

Color
Scale
Points

Set the colors and the number of scales (0, 2 to 101) for horizontal and vertical scale points,
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Color
Value
Lower
Limit

Scale
Settings

Upper
Limit

Set the numeric color, numeric value (0, 2 to 101), lower limit value, upper limit value, font
and numeric size (0.5 to 8).
When changing a scale value, set the lower limit/upper limit values.
Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and/or horizontal (X axis) line.
Example) Change the upper limit scale value on Y

Upper limit

Font
Scale Value

Lower limit

100

100

0
Change the scale value
of the horizontal axis
Upper limit: "100" to "200"
-100

-100
-100

Lower limit

100

-100

50

200

Upper limit

Changed automatically
Number
Size

In [Font], the following items can be selected.

Also, the setting enabled values for [Number Size] varies depending on the selected font.
6 8dot

: 1 0.5 (Fix)

12dot Standard : 1 1 to 8 8 (Not available for GT10.)

16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8
For the details of Font or Size, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity
Select this item to display a frame for the graph.
Rectangle
Frame

18 - 4

18.1 Settings

Graph frame

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Point/Line Attribute tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18
Preview list

Item

Description

Model

Select how to switch display attributes for the scatter graph (Type, size and color of point/line)
Fixed
: The display attribute is not switched. The display attribute set on the [Style] tab is used.
Bit
: The display attribute is switched depending on the bit device conditions ON/OFF.
Signed BIN16 : The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word device value (16bit binary value).
BCD16
: The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending on the word device (16-bit
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)).

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Example1) Attribute switching: [Bit], Switching device: M10

21
M10: ON
Points are
displayed as

M10: OFF
Points are
displayed as

PARTS MOVEMENT

Attribute
Switching

Example2) [Signed BIN16], Switching device: D10

D10 = 1
Points are
displayed as
Switching Device
Display Attribute

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

D10 = 10
Points are
displayed as

D10 < 100

Points are
displayed as

Set the device for display switching.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Select the display attribute of the scatter graph. (Point/Line)
Preview list*1

Displays the set status for each state.

Creates a new state.
Deletes the state.

State
/

Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.

Set the condition for word device range.

(Continued to next page)

18.1 Settings

18 - 5

Item

Description

Model

Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.

Type of point :
Type

Type of line

Attribute
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.

Range

Size

Select the size of the point (Large, Medium, Small)/line (1 to 7).

Color

Select the display color of the point/line.

Range

Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.

For details of *1, refer to the following.

*1 State

(1) Display for state other than those set on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab
When the state is other than those set on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab, it is displayed with the display attribute
set on the [Style] tab.

(2) When states are overlapped

When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Graph type
Switching device

: Sample
: D10

Operation priority for

setting overlap state

State No.

Display range

High

Low

Type

Size

Color

8<=$V<=12

Big

White

13<=$V<=18

Small

Black

Normal case
(State 0)

Big

Black

* $V indicates the monitored device value.

40

State 1

When the value of the switching device is between 8 and 12

30

(8<=$V<=12), it will appear as big white quadrangle (

10

).

20

0
0

10

20

30

40

10

20

30

40

10

20

30

40

40

State 2

When the value of the switching device is between 13 and 18, it

30

will appear as small black triangle (

10

).

20

40

Normal case
(State 0)

When other conditions except for the conditions of state 1 to 3

30

happen, it will appear as big black circle (

10

).

20

18 - 6

18.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Extended tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

20

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.
After selecting this item, set the offset device.

PARTS DISPLAY

Use Offset

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Store Memory

Select this item to enable data collection during display of the screen without a scatter graph.
Data of the points displayed in the graph are stored in the internal memory of GOT.

21

Not-displayed
value
Hidden Value

(0, 400)
(50, 0)

300
200

100

200

300

Graph displayed with points

Device

Operation at
frequency over
time

Layer

Category

(0, 400)
(50, 0)

300
200

Extended
Cumulative/
Average

Not-displayed
value
400

100

100
0

PARTS MOVEMENT

Select this item when setting the not-displayed value for X and/or Y of the scatter graph.
Example: [0] is set as [Hidden Value] for X and Y

400

100

200

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

300

Graph displayed with lines

Select this item when writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and
minimum vallue of collected data into devices.
Then, set the interval of writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and
minimum vallue into devices by specifying the number of update times.
The value set as not displayed value in the scatter graph display is not included.
When writing the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and minimum value, and
the interval of memory storage or trigger (sampling) is set to short, this may cause the object to
refresh the display considerably slower.
In this case, set a longer writing interval.
Select the operation when the following functions exceed the maximum sampling number.
Store Memory
: When exceeding the maximum display points (2000 points).
Accumulation frequency, Average value, Maximum value, Minimum value:
When accumulation frequency exceeds 65535 (9999).
Interrupt
: Interrupts the data collection, and does not update the graph display.
Initialize and Continue : After erasing the graph display and initializing the memory and
accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value and
minimum value, continues data collection.

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

18.1 Settings

18 - 7

 Trigger tab

Item
Trigger Type*1

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle in seconds. (1 to 3600 s)
Ordinary
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
Rise

Settings

Fall
Sampling

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Collect data
only when
trigger
conditions are
satisfied

Clear Trigger*3

Select this item to collect data only when the display conditions set in [Trigger Type] are satisfied.
This item is available when [Rise], [Fall], [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected.
For displaying the data in graph, communication is made with a controller even when display trigger is not satisfied.
By selecting this item, since communication with a controller is made only when the trigger is met, load due to
communication between the GOT and a controller can be reduced.*2
Check this item to set the trigger for erasing the display of graphs.
After checking, select the timing of erasing graph display.
Rise : Erases the graph at rise (turns ON) of bit device.
Fall : Erases the graph at fall (turns OFF) of bit device.
The [Clear Trigger] also clears the graph display stored in memory, the accumulation frequency and average value.
Assigning a device to function as a clear trigger.

Clear Trigger
Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected in [Trigger Typ], make sure to hold the clear trigger
device status for more than the sampling cycle set in [Trigger Type].
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

18 - 8

18.1 Settings

Model

(1) Update timing for ON Sampling or OFF Sampling

When setting [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], the graph may not be updated at the set sampling cycle in
some cases.
Causes of this problem and the countermeasures to the above are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling set in the [Trigger Type].
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

(When setting [Trigger Type] to [ON Sampling] and the cycle to 1 second.)
one
second

one
second

one
second

Sampling set using "Trigger Type"

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

ON
OFF
3)
2)

4)

5)

At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.

At the timing of 2), the scatter graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the scatter graph is updated.

20

(b) Countermeasures
The sampling set using the [Trigger Type] is not depending on the status of the device. (The sampling is not
changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.

1.
2.

Select [Rise] or [Fall] in the [Trigger Type].

Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the sequence
program.

2
(3) Update timing for Sampling, ON Sampling or OFF Sampling.
When setting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], the graph updating timing varies depending on
whether to use the locus setting.
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At station No. switching
At language switching
At security level change
The display is updated when the set cycle comes during any of the procedures above,
(b) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
When the drive information is displayed
Execution of operation of which GOT is restart in utility

18.1 Settings

18 - 9

PARTS DISPLAY

1)

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Status of device set using "Trigger Device"

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

*1 If the graph display is not updated at the set sampling cycle

*2 Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing of recognizing clear trigger in the GOT is the same as the timing set in [Trigger Type] ([Trigger] tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set for clear
the trigger must be retained longer than the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
Example of data retention for a period longer than that set in [Trigger Type].
Clear Trigger
: Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type
: Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch
: Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear trigger (M10) turns off
by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
400

400

300

300

200

200
100

100
0

Erase
the graph

100

200

300

Touch the switch set for

the clear trigger

100

200

300

The graph displaed previously

erased.

Sampling
(3 s)

OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

*3 When settings for Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied are effective
The number of communications can be reduced by selecting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied].
For graphs that do not require frequent update, the setting of [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied]
is efficient.
However, for graphs that require frequent update and display, it is recommended to not set [Collect data only when
trigger conditions are satisfied] (to enable continuous communication and acquisition of device values).
Setting [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] may cause delay in the screen update and failure in
the display.
Various graphs can be combined when [Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied] is set.
The following shows an example in which a line graph and a trend graph are used in combination.
Trigger Type
: Set at [Rise]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Checked
Object
: Line graph
100

100

50

50

0
1

Displayed (communicated) at the rise

and communication is not made thereafter.

Communication is made in the set cycle and

the display is updated accordingly.

Line graph is treated as the reference

value to allow comparison using Trend graph.

100

50

0
1

18 - 10

Trigger Type
: Set at [Sampling (3 sec)]
Collect data only when trigger
conditions are satisfied
: Not checked
Object
: Trend graph

18.1 Settings

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Operation/Script tab

18
SCATTER GRAPH

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Description

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked
in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation. (None/Data Expression)

Data Operation

18.1 Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Item

18 - 11

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box.
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

width
height

Frame Color

frame_color

Plate Color

plate_color

4)

Upper Limit (X)

scale_max[0]

4)

Upper Limit (Y)

scale_max[1]

4)

Lower Limit (X)

scale_min[0]

4)

Lower Limit (Y)

scale_min[1]

4)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Data

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

18 - 12

18.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

18.2 Relevant Settings

The scatter graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

SCATTER GRAPH

18

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

18.3 Actions
Setting method of scatter graph
The following explains the general procedure to set the scatter graph.

20

5000
2500

0
-10

21

Monitor conversion value

X: D100 (temperature digital output value)
Y: D200 (power consumption digital output value)
Display attribute
Switch according to operation mode.
Operation mode A: , operation mode B:
20

50

600

PARTS MOVEMENT

10000

PARTS DISPLAY

Example) A scatter graph to display power consumption and temperature during line operation
Digital output range for temperature
: 0 to 600
Digital output range for power consumption
: 0 to 10000
Power consumption variation range
: 0 to 5000W
Temperature variation range
: -10 to 50
Conversion value (Digital output value of temperature)
: D100
Conversion value (Digital output value of power consumption) : D200

Scale value
Vertical : Indicates power consumption
Horizontal: Indicates temperature
Lower/Upper limit
X: Indicates temperature digital output range
Y: Indicates power consumption digital output range

1.

Set the graph type, data type, lower limit value and upper limit value in the [Data] tab.
Graph type (sample)

10000

Monitor device (X: D10, Y: D11)

600
Lower/upper limit for X
(Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 600)
Lower/upper limit for Y
(Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 10000)

18.2 Relevant Settings

18 - 13

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the lower/upper limit, it is displayed numerically on the graph.
(800, 11000)

Upper limit: 10000

Lower limit:

0
Lower limit: 0

Upper limit: 600

(-1000, -1500)

2.

Set the shape, scale and scale values on the [Style] tab.
10000

100

Shape

Scale
(Scale points Horizontal: 7, Vertical: 5)

-100
-100

3.

100

600

Scale value
(Value number Horizontal: 3, Vertical: 3)
: Default value (Upper limit: 100, Lower limit: -100)
is displayed

Set the graph display method and graph attribute switch on the [Point/Line Attribute] tab.
(a) Display method
10000

Display attribute (point)

: Select either of point or line.
Point

100

Straight line
0

-100
-100

100

600

(b) Attribute switch

Attribute switch (bit, switching device: M10)
: Switch between 2 types of display attributes
Set the display attribute in the following [Attribute].

10000

ON/OFF attribute (ON: OFF: )

: Set display attribute when M10 is ON or OFF.

0
0

600

Point is displayed as
when M10 is ON.

18 - 14

18.3 Actions

Point is displayed as
when M10 is OFF.

17

Store memory

Screen with scatter graph set

Screen with scatter graph not set

Screen switching/Switching to
the utility

When Store Memory not set

When Store Memory set

Stores the device value

Stores the device value

18

Erases the display.

Changes the device value to 0.

Stores the display.

Stores the device value.

SCATTER GRAPH

Item

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Executing the following operations clears the graph on the screen or the collected data (device value: 0).
Therefore, enable [Store Memory] to hold the collected data.
[Store Memory] is provided on the [Extended] tab.

Screen with scatter graph not set

Screen with scatter graph set

Use Language Switching

Switching base screen when scatter graph is displayed on a superimpose
window

Switching station No. switching device

*1

When the store memory is not set, if the security level or the device value set for the level device is switched in [Common]
Environmental Setting]

[GOT

[Security] from the menu , the display is erased and the device value is changed to 0.

Example) Screen switching operation

Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Switching security level*1

20

Store memory
100

Device value

D101

50

50
0

Device value changes

100

D100

50

100

D101

50

25

100

50
0

50

100

Switch to
and display
base screen 5.

Base screen 1

Display base
screen 1 again.

50

PARTS DISPLAY

50

100

Base screen 1
Display both the device value (before being
switched to other screen) and the device value
in the display of other screen.

21

Do not store memory

PARTS MOVEMENT

D100

100
50
0

Production menu

50

100

Line 1

Base screen 1

Line 2

Base screen 5

Only graph display current device value

after collecting and displaying new data.

(1) The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory
Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph (sample, batch).

Sample
Batch

2000 times
2000
Points

times (Round off the part after decimal point)

For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for [Operation at frequency over
time] on the Extended tab.
Interrupt...........................Interrupts data collection
Initialize and continue.....Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter graph display and collects data again.

HINT
When the maximum number of sampling results is reached
An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has reached the maximum.
10.7 System Alarm Display

18.3 Actions

18 - 15

(2) Conditions for when the stored memory data is erased

(a) When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
(b) When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the maximum number at
selecting [Initialize and Continue] on [Operation at frequency over time]
(c)

When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF

(d) When the project is written

(e) When the drive information is displayed
(f)

When an operation in which the GOT is restarted is executed in the utility setup.

Cumulative/Average
The accumulation frequency and the average value, maximum value, or minimum value of the data collected in the
scatter graph can be written to devices.
Example) X-device: D100, Y-device: D200
Contents to be written
400

400

400

400

300

300

300

300

200

200

200

200

100
0

100
100

200

300

50
250

D100
D200

200

300

Accumulation Frequency

100

100
100

100

300
200

200

200
100

300

Value that has been

written

100

200

300

250
200
Y

Average Value

200

Maximum

300

Minimum

50

Average Value

187

Maximum

250

Minimum

100

HINT
(1) Average value
(a) The fractions below the decimal point of the average value are rounded off for setting [Average].
If the data type (set on the [Data type] ([Data] tab) of the monitor device is real, however, fractions below
the decimal point are written.
(b) Since the average value is calculated based on the average value of every sampling, some errors may
be observed.
(2) Maximum and minimum values
When the value of the monitor device exceeds the upper or lower limit of the scatter graph, the upper or lower
limit value will be written as the maximum or minimum accordingly.

(1) Upper limit of sampling number available for accumulation frequency/average value
The upper limit of the sampling number that can be counted as accumulation frequency/average value varies
according to the [Data Type] ([Data] tab) of the device.
[Data Type]
Signed BIN16, Unsigned BIN16, Signed BIN32, Unsigned BIN32, 32BCD, Real : 65535
BCD16
: 9999
When the accumulation frequency exceeds the upper limit, please set the operation in
[Operation at frequency over time] of the [Extended] tab.
Interrupt.................................Interrupts the sampling of data.
Initialize and continue...........Clears the interal memory and deletes the scatter graph display, and then
recollects data.

HINT
Displaying an error message when the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit
When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit, an error message can be displayed in the alarm
list (system alarm).
10.7 System Alarm Display

18 - 16

18.3 Actions

(a) When the conditions for the [Clear Trigger] (set in the [Trigger] tab) are satisfied
(b) When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit when setting [Operation at frequency over
time] to [Initialize and Continue].

18

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

When switching the screen

When switching the screen (base screen, window screen) with scatter graph arranged
When switching the screen with scatter graph arranged to other screens, the current accumulation
frequency/average value will be held. However, when the screen is switched back to the previous
screen, the data will be initialized.
When switching the base screen
The scatter graph arranged in superimpose window will be initialized when the base screen is switched
over.

(d) When the security level is changed

(e) When the station number is changed

HINT
Executing "the accumulation frequency/average value write" and the "store memory" simultaneously
If the [Cumulative/Average] and [Store Memory] are used simultaneously, the data of accumulation frequency/
average value is collected even when the screen is switched to others.
However, accumulation frequency/average value can be written until the time that the sampling number for store
memory reaches the maximum.
Refer to the following for the maximum sampling number of store memory.
Store memory

20
PARTS DISPLAY

(c)

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

The value "0" is written to the accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value, and minimum value.
The initialization is performed in the following timings.

17

SCATTER GRAPH

(2) Initialization timing of accumulation frequency, average value, maximum value, and minimum
value

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

18.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the scatter graph.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 24 objects can be set for the scatter graph.

(2) When using store memory

For the scatter graph with [Store Memory] set, up to 16 graph objects can be set in a whole project.

(3) Cautions when displaying superimpose window

Set the superimpose window not to overlap with a scatter graph.
The scatter graph area where the superimpose window is overlapped is not displayed.
Setting [Store Memory] enables full display of the scatter graph.

Superimpose
window

Base screen

Scatter graph is not

displayed fully when
[Store Memory] is not set.

The area overlapping with

superimpose window is also
displayed when [Store Memory] is set.

18.4 Precautions

18 - 17

(4) Collect data only when trigger conditions are satisfied setting
Do not make settings where more than 257 objects for which [Collect data only when trigger conditions are
satisfied] is set meet the trigger simultaneously.
The 258th or later objects are disabled even if the trigger is met, and they are not displayed correctly (System
alarm occurs).

18 - 18

18.4 Precautions

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

SCATTER GRAPH

18
This function displays the device data collected by the logging function in trend graph in time sequence.

Usually, the collected data

is displayed in trend graph.

Display of the past data

Display of the latest data

Graph Update

Graph display range

Graph Update

Graph display range

Graph Update

Graph display range

Data collected by
the logging function

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
PARTS DISPLAY

POINT
Historical trend graph
To use a historical trend graph, the logging function must be set in advance.
For the setting of the logging function, refer to the following.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

23. LOGGING FUNCTION

19 - 1

19.1 Settings
1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the historical trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged historical trend graph to display the setting dialog box.

[Graph]

[Historical Trend Graph] from the menu.

Data tab
Set the number of graphs, display method and device.

Item

Description
Number of
Pens

Select the graph to be set. (1 to 32)

Set the number of points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
Up to 1024 (3 to 1024) points can be set.
The space between point is automatically determined by the set number of points and the display range of X.

Display
Format

Example:
Points: 5
Points

Space between points = 20 dots

X 100 dots

(Continued to next page)

19 - 2

19.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the direction for graph.

Right
Monitored
device
value

Left
Monitored
device
value

SCATTER GRAPH

Up

Down
Elapsed
time

Monitored device value

19

Monitored device value

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Elapsed
time

18
Elapsed time

Elapsed time

Direction

Select the graph drawing mode (Pen Record/One by One).

Pen Record : The present value is displayed at the opposite side of display direction.
When the graph moves beyond the display range, data is deleted from the older
one and the graph displays the latest data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]

Display
Format

20
Present value

Present value

PARTS DISPLAY

Direction

Display Mode

Present value

One by One : The present value is displayed in the same side as the display direction.
When the graph moves beyond the display range, the graph presently displayed is
cleared and the graph is drawn starting from the succeeding data.
Example: When setting [Direction]=[Right]

21

Present value

Present value

PARTS MOVEMENT

Direction

Present value

Set the point type (Line/Point/Line + Point)

Point Type

(Line)
Logging ID

(Point)

(Line + Point)

Select the logging ID to be displayed in historical trend graph.

Selection is possible from logging ID and logging name.
Click this item to display the [Logging] dialog box.
The selected logging contents can be edited in the [Logging] dialog box.

Device

23. LOGGING FUNCTION

Device Setting

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Select the setting method for [No. Logging Device].

Continuous
: The set continuous device points are set from head device automatically.
Random
: Set the devices one by one for the specified number of points.

(Continued to next page)

19.1 Settings

19 - 3

Item

Description
Click this item to display the [Device List] dialog box.
(1) Device List dialog box
In the [Device List] dialog box, select the device to be displayed in graph from among the devices set for
the selected logging ID.
On a cell, the selected device and setting order of the logging device are displayed.

No. Logging
Device

Data Operation

Device
Setting order of the logging device
Represents the order the device is displayed in the
device list dialog box.
This allows the confirmation of the order number of
the device being set in the device list dialog box.
The number is conveniently used for confirming
the setting change.
Select whether to perform or not the data operation. (Yes/No)
When [Yes] is selected, click the [No] button on the right column and set the calculation expression.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Device
Line Attribute

Click the
button to display the [Line Attribute] dialog box.
This setting is available only when the setting for [Point Type] on the [Data] tab is [Line] or [Line + Point].
(2) Line Attribute dialog box

Point Attribute

Click the
button to display the [Point Attribute] dialog box.
This setting is available only when the setting for [Point Type] on the [Data] tab is [Point] or [Line +
Point].
(3) Point Attribute dialog box
Click this item to display the [Graph Information] dialog box.

Graph
Information

(4) Graph Information dialog box

The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value,
minimum value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.
Select this item to display the graph in the step mode.

Step Mode

Graph display without Graph display with

Step Mode checked Step Mode checked

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Lower Limit

Select whether the device value range (Lower limit / Upper limit) for historical trend graph is set by fixed values or
specified device values.
Fixed
: Sets the fixed values as the lower/upper limit values.
Device
: Sets the device values as the lower/upper limit values.

Upper Limit

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The range that can be set for lower and upper limit values depends on the [Data Size] and [Display Format] of the device
to be monitored.

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Data] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

19 - 4

19.1 Settings

Unsigned BIN32

Model

17

(1) Device List dialog box

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Displays the list of devices set for the selected logging ID.
Select the device to be used for historical trend graph.
A "*" symbol is displayed for the selected device.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
PARTS DISPLAY

(2) Line Attribute dialog box

Item

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

Description

Style

Select the line style of graph.

Width

Select the line width of graph. (1 to 7 dots)

Color

Select the line color of graph.

(3) Point Attribute dialog box

Item

Description

Type

Select the point type of graph.

Size

Select the point size (Large/Medium/Small/Minimum/Point) of graph.

Color

Select the point color of graph.

19.1 Settings

19 - 5

(4) Graph Information dialog box

The device value of the location where the cursor is displayed and the information (maximum value, minimum
value, average value) of the graph in the display range can be written to a device.

Item

Description

Device Data
Storage

When a device is set, the devices are automatically set for the following items consecutively.
Check only the items to be used. (The unchecked items will not be set.)

Data Type

Select the data type of the device value that stores the graph information.
Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Cursor Position
Data

Stores the device value where the cursor is displayed.

Maximum Data

Stores the maximum value of the device displayed in the display range.

Minimum Data

Stores the minimum value of the device displayed in the display range.

Average Data

Stores the average value of the device displayed in the display range.

POINT
Types to be selected for data type
Select the same type as the device type of the logging device. When the data type of the logging device is bit,
select any of signed BIN16, unsigned BIN16 and BCD16.
When the selected type differs from the device type of the logging device, the system alarm [307 Monitor device is
not set] occurs and the graph information is not stored in the device.
(a) The timing to be stored in a device
A value is stored in a device when the historical trend graph is operated by the touch switch for the
historical trend graph. (With exceptions of the timing at which the cursor is deleted or the latest data is
displayed.)
(b) The value to be stored in a device
When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.
[Data Operation] is set with a historical trend graph, values to be stored in the devices for [Graph
Information] are values before data operations.
Example: When storing the cursor displayed position value to a device
Displaying the cursor

Moving the cursor

100
75

100
75

50

50

25
0

25
0

10 15 20 25 30

This value is stored.

19 - 6

19.1 Settings

10 15 20 25 30

The data of the graph when the graph

drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.

This value is stored.

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Style tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Item

Description

Model

Up
0 3

Axis
Position

Left

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

50

300

25

200
0

0
0

Right

10 15 20 25 30

21

Down

After selecting this item, set the scale color and the number of scales (2 to 11).
Select [Sub Scale] to display sub scales between the set scales.
After selecting this item, set the sub scales color and the number of sub scales (1 to 9).
The scale intervals are automatically set according to the number of scales.

Main
Scale
Settings

PARTS MOVEMENT

Select this item to display the scale.

Scale
Points

Scale

Example: [Scale Points]: 4, [Scale Points] of [Sub Scale]: 5

Color

Without sub scales

With sub scales

Select this item to display the scale by numeric values.

Color
Value
Scale
Value

Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Font
Number
Size

After selecting this item, set the color of numerical values (2 to 11), number of numerical values,
lower value limit, upper value limit, font, and the size of numerical values (0.5 to 8).
The following fonts are available.
Also, the value that can be set for the numerical value size varies depending on the selected [Font].
6 8 dot

: 1 0.5 (Fixed)

12dot Standard

: 1 1 to 8 8

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Select the position at which the [Main Scale] and/or [Scale Value] settings are changed. (Left/Right/Top/Bottom)
Different setting is possible for each axis position.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

16dot Standard : 0.5 0.5 to 8 8

For details of each font and size, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

(Continued to next page)

19.1 Settings

19 - 7

Item

Description

Model

Check these items to display the vertical/horizontal grid.

After checking, select the grid color.
Vertical Grid

Grid is displayed according to the setting of [Scale Points] for [Main Scale] and [Sub Scale].
When the setting is made for [Top] / [Bottom], and [Left] / [Right], the setting for [Bottom] and [Left] has priority.

Vertical grid
Horizontal grid

Horizontal
Grid

Select this item to display a frame for the graph.

Rectangle frame
Rectangle
Frame

Shape

Set a shape for the object.

When [None] is selected, the shape is not displayed.
Click the [Shape] button to select shapes other than those in the list box.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.2 Shape setting

Shape
Settings

Select a frame color/plate color for the shape.

Frame Color

Plate color

Plate Color

Frame color

19 - 8

19.1 Settings

17

Auxiliary Line/Cursor tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the graph assistance line, time device and cursor attribute.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Item

Description

Graph
Auxiliary
Line

Lower Limit Line

Select this item to display the corresponding lines on the graph. ( Reference Line, Lower Limit Line,
Upper Limit Line)
After selecting this item, select whether the display position is set by a fixed value or a value of the
specified device.
Constant
: A constant is displayed as the [Reference Line], [Lower Limit Line], [Upper Limit Line].
Device
: A value of the device is displayed as the [Reference Line], [Lower Limit Line], [Upper
Limit Line].

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Reference Line

Model

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

After that, set [Style], [Width] and [Color].
Each of the reference line, upper limit line and lower limit line is displayed according to the values set in
[Lower Limit] and [Upper Limit] on the [Data] tab.

Upper limit value 100

Upper limit line (80)

Reference line (50)

Upper Limit Line

Lower limit line (20)

Lower limit value

Cursor
Attribute

Style

Select the cursor line type.

Width

Select the cursor line width. (1 to 7 dots)

Color

Select the cursor line color.

19.1 Settings

PARTS DISPLAY

20

19 - 9

 Extended tab
Set the security, time device.

Item

Description
When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Security Level

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

User ID*1

Set the user ID of historical trend graph. (1 to 65535)

Cursor Position
Time
Beginning
Position Time

Time Device*2

End Position Time

Display Position
Time Device*3

Layer

Category

Display Position
Time

Select the items to write the time of the cursor displayed position and the display range beginning/
end position time to a device. (The values are stored in BCD data.)
After selecting the item, set the device where the time is stored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Four points (Y/M, D/H, M/S, Day of week) of devices are set consecutively starting from the set
device.
Select the item to display data at the specified time. (Time specification jump function)
After checking the item, set the device where the specified time is stored.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Three points (year and month, date and hour, minute and second) of devices are set
consecutively starting from the set device.

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals)8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.

19 - 10

19.1 Settings

Model

(1) When user ID setting is required

If more than one object that is operated using the switch of the same key code exists on the screen, touching the
switch may fail to call the intended operation.
In such a case, it is possible to assign an ID (user ID) to individual objects by setting the user ID so that the ID
(object) to be operated by the touch switch can be specified. Thus, intended switch operation can be called by
touching the touch switch.

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

50

300

10 15 20 25 30

Historical
trend graph B

(User ID: 1)

(User ID: 2)

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

500
400
200
0

Historical
trend graph A

500
400

50

25

300

25

200
0

Display cursor

100

10

Display cursor

10 15 20 25 30

Display cursor

100

19
0

10

Display cursor
Up

Down

Hide cursor

Hide cursor

Hide cursor

Check Delete

Latest graph

Latest graph

Latest graph

Hide cursor

Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A

Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B

Touch switch for

historical
trend graph A
(User ID: 1)

Touch switch for

historical
trend graph B
(User ID: 2)

The touch switch that should be used for

historical trend graph A acts for historical
trend graph B.

20

Even if the same key code is used, the target

of operation is specified by an ID, making it
possible to call the intended operation.

(2) Touch switch setting

Input the user ID, which has been set in this step, to the [User ID for a key input and data change] item in the
Key Code Switch dialog box.
For details of key code switch, refer to the following.
2.8 Setting Key Code Switch
Touch switch setting ([Action] tab)

Set the user ID that has been set for an object.

19.1 Settings

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Historical
trend graph B

19 - 11

PARTS DISPLAY

Historical
trend graph A

18
SCATTER GRAPH

When user ID is set

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

When user ID is not set

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

*1 User ID

*2 Time device

(1) How the data is stored in the time devices

Time data is stored in upper and lower 8 bits of the set devices.
Example) When D100 is set.
D100

B15 to b8

B7 to b0

(Year)

(Month)

D101

B15 to b8

B7 to b0

(Day)

(Hour)

D102

B15 to b8

B7 to b0

(Minute)

(Second)

D103

B15 to b8

B7 to b0

(Not used)

(Day of week)
(0: Sunday, 1: Monday, 2: Tuesday, 3: Wednesday, 4: Thursday, 5: Friday, 6: Saturday)

To monitor the devices above by numerical display.

To monitor the above devices by the numerical display and others, execute mask processing and shift
processing using the data operation function as shown below.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting
For the data type of Numerical Display ([Device/Style] tab), set [BCD16]/[BCD32] since the value is stored in
BCD data.
Example: Setting example of numerical display ([Operation/Script] tab)
Displaying "year" (upper 8 bits)

Set the numerical display to execute mask

processing for lower 8 bits (b7 to b0) of D100
and to shift upper 8 bits (b15 to b8) of D100 to
the right by 8 bits.

Displaying "month" (lower 8 bits)

In numerical display, make settings to

execute mask processing for upper 8 bits
(b15 to b8) of D100.

19 - 12

19.1 Settings

(a) Value storing timing

The value is stored to the device at the following timing.
When the cursor is displayed on the graph.
When the displayed cursor is moved.
During the display of the cursor, when the historical trend graph is operated using a touch switch.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

(b) The value to be stored

When the cursor is displayed on the graph, graph drawing processing stops.
The value of the graph when the drawing processing stopped is stored in the device.

Moving the cursor

100
75

50

50

25
0

25
0
0

10 15 20 25 30

The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.

The data of the graph when the graph

drawing processing stops is stored in
the device at the timing of cursor
display / movements.
0

10 15 20 25 30

The time that corresponds

to this cursor position is stored.

*3 Displaying data at specified time (Time specification jump function)

With the display position time devices and a touch switch, logging data at the specified time can be displayed in the
center of a historical trend graph. (The cursor is displayed at the position for the logging data at the specified time.)
If no logging data at the specified time exists, logging data at the time closest to the specified time is displayed.

(1) Before using time specification jump function

(a) Specifications for settable time

21

Description
16-bit BCD (Binary coded decimal)

Data range

From January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2037

(b) Required settings

Place and set the following objects on the screen.
Item

Description
Touch switches are available from the library on GT Designer3.

Touch switch

19.4 Useful operations/functions

The user can create a touch switch by setting a key code for the switch.
2. TOUCH SWITCH

Historical trend graph

20

PARTS MOVEMENT

Item
Data format

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Displaying the cursor

PARTS DISPLAY

Example: When storing the time to a device

100
75

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

(2) The value to be stored in a device and value storing timing

Select the [Display Position Time] item on the Option tab, and set the device.
Extended tab

19.1 Settings

19 - 13

(2) Operation example

The following shows an example of operating the time specification jump function.
Example) When setting the display position time device to D1000 and displaying data at 21:05:30 on November
12, 2008
Display position time devices
15 bits
Year and month
(D1000)
Date and hour
(D1001)
Minute and
second (D1002)

0 bits

0x08

0x11

0x12

0x21

0x05

0x30

Set time for the display position time devices.

Time
specification
jump

Touch the touch switch that

the key code (FFD4) is set.

The data at the specified time

(21:05:30, November 12, 2008)
is displayed in the center of the graph.

POINT
Precautions for time specification jump function
(1) When using time specification jump function
When using the time specification jump function, the graph drawing processing stops.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is set.
(2) When performing other operations during the time specification jump
While the GOT searches for data at the specified time, the other operations for the historical trend graph are
unavailable.
(3) When multiple logging data at times close to the specified time exist
When no logging data at the specified time exists and multiple data at times closest to the specified time exist,
the data that the GOT detects first is displayed.
(4) When displaying the data at around the starting/ending point of the graph
When the logging data at the specified time is at around the starting or ending point of the graph, the data may
not be displayed in the center of the graph.
(5) When executing the time specification jump without specified time
When the time is not specified (all the display position time devices are 0) and the time specification jump is
executed, the graph drawing processing stops and the latest data is displayed.
To restart the graph drawing, touch the touch switch that the key code (FFEFH) is set.
(6) When no logging data exists
With no logging data, the time specification jump is not executed.
(7) When logging data is not in chronological order
When the logging data is not in chronological order because the GOT clock time is changed, the data at the
time closest to the specified time may not be displayed.
Do not change the GOT clock time during collecting logging data.

19 - 14

19.1 Settings

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

19.2 Relevant Settings

The historical trend graph is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

SCATTER GRAPH

18

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

19.3 Actions
Relationships with logging function
(1) Contents displayed in historical trend graph

20
PARTS DISPLAY

The historical trend graph displays the data collected by the logging function and stored in the buffering area
and/or memory card in graph.
To use the stored data, the present and past information can be displayed in graph.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Logging data

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

Displaying the stored data in graph

(2) The data collected by the logging function and displayed in historical trend graph
A historical trend graph can display the data set at only one logging ID.
To display multiple logging IDs, set multiple historical trend graphs.

Setting method of historical trend graph

The following explains the general procedure to set the historical trend graph.
Example) Historical trend graph for comparison between the planned and actual quantity
Productivity
: 0 to 100%
Time
: 0 to 3
Production
: 0 to 1000
Planned quantity (Graph 1) : D10
Actual quantity (Graph 2)
: D11
Actual quantity
Monitors the value of D10.
Planned quantity
Monitors the value of D11.
Scale value
Vertical: Represents productivity.
Horizontal: Represents elapsed time.
Lower/upper limit value
Sets the number of production.

19.2 Relevant Settings

19 - 15

1.

Set the number of graphs, the number of points, the lower and upper limit values on the [Data] tab.
Number of graphs (2)
Device value to be monitored
Points (6)

1000

Direction (Right)
0
Lower/upper limit value
(Lower limit value: 0, upper limit value: 1000)

HINT
Display of values exceeding the lower/upper limit
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the lower/upper limit, it is displayed numerically on the graph.
D10:1500

Upper limit value: 1000

Lower limit value:

0
D10:-50

2.

Set the scale and scale values of the graph on the [Style] tab.
1000

Shape

100

Main scale display

X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)

50

0
0

Scale value display

X (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 100)
Y (Lower limit value: 0, Upper limit value: 3)

3.

Set the line attribute on the [Auxiliary Line/Cursor] tab.

Graph axially line
(Reference line, Lower limit line, Upper limit line)
Cursor attribute

19 - 16

19.3 Actions

The following explains the useful functions for using the historical trend graph.
(These functions are provided only for historical trend graph and setting them is not possible for trend graph.)

(1) Displaying the cursor

It is possible to display and move the cursor on the graph using the touch switch for which a key code is
assigned.
It is also possible to output the value of the device on which the cursor is displayed to other device.
19.1 Data tab
Graph display is stopped while the cursor is displayed.

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

D100

D120
D100 258
D120 231

(2) Displaying the grid

20
With grid

21

(3) Displaying the reference line, lower limit line, upper limit line
19.1 Auxiliary Line/Cursor tab
It is possible to display the lines that are used as reference, such as the lower limit line, upper limit line and
reference line on the graph.
Without

With
Upper limit line
Reference line
Lower limit line

(4) Expanding / contracting the time axis

It is possible to expand or contract the time axis using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the graph is expanded/contracted.
Expansion

10 15 20 25 30

Contraction

15

20

25

30

19.4 Useful operations/functions

19 - 17

PARTS MOVEMENT

Without grid

PARTS DISPLAY

19.1 Data tab

It is possible to display the grid on the graph.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Useful information

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

19.4 Useful operations/functions

(5) Outputting the time data to a device

19.1 Extended tab
It is possible to output the beginning and end day/time of graph display and the day/time the cursor is displayed
using the touch switch for which a key code is assigned.
Graph display is stopped while the time data is output to a device.

19:00

21:00

23:00

(6) Displaying data at the specified time

19.1 Extended tab
With a touch switch that the key code is assigned, data at the specified time can be displayed.
The graph display is stopped while the data at the specified time is displayed.

Specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008

The data at the specified time is displayed in the center.

19 - 18

19.4 Useful operations/functions

Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be read out from the library of GT Designer3.
Also, the text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
Touch switches to be used for historical trend graph operation can be created by the user by setting a key code to a
touch switch.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Touch switches for historical trend graph operation

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19
Touch switches used for historical trend graph operation
Touch switch

Key code

Description
Shows / hides the cursor.
The cursor is displayed at the center of the graph.

Show Cursor
FFF0H

Hide cursor
FFF1H

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

20

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

10 15 20 25 30

PARTS DISPLAY

0 3

Displays the cursor.

21

0 3
Cursor Next
FFF2H

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

10 15 20 25 30

Moves the cursor

toward the new data.
0 3
Cursor Previous
FFF3H

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

New data side

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

PARTS MOVEMENT

Moves the cursor in the direction toward the new / past data.

10 15 20 25 30

Moves the cursor toward

the old data.
Old data side

(Continued to next page)

19.4 Useful operations/functions

19 - 19

Touch switch

Key code

Description
Moves the graph right and left.

Graph Next
FFF4H

Graph Previous
FFF5H

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

Scrolls the graph

toward the new data.
Graph Next Page
Scroll

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3
FFF6H

New data side

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

Graph Previous
Page Scroll

10 15 20 25 30

10 15 20 25 30

FFF7H

10 15 20 25 30

Scrolls the graph

toward the new data.

New data side

Expands (2 times) or reduces (1/2 times) the time axis of the graph taking the axis of the new data as
the reference.

Time Axis
Expansion
FFF8H

0 3

12

18

15

21

24

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

Time Axis
Reduction

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

FFF9H

10 15 20 25 30

15

20

25

30

Reference
Displays the latest data.

0 3
Latest Data
FFEFH

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

10 15 20 25 30

Displays the latest data.

Displays the data at the time stored in the display position time devices in the center of the graph.
(Time specification jump function)

0 3
Time Specification
Jump
FFD4H

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

0 3

6 9 12 15 18 21 24

500
400

50

500
400

50

300

25

300

25

200
0

200
0

10 15 20 25 30

10 15 20 25 30

Specified time
21:05:30, November 12, 2008

19 - 20

19.4 Useful operations/functions

The data at the specified

time is displayed in the center.

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

19.5 Precautions
Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of historical trend graphs that can set
For one project: 32
For one screen: 8

(3) Setting the graph assistance lines by a device

Since the [Graph Auxiliary Line] are displayed only for reference, abnormal state such that the lower limit value
exceeds the upper limit value or the upper limit value becomes smaller than the lower limit value does not cause
an error.
Upper limit line

Lower limit line

Upper limit line

Reference line

Reference line

Lower limit line

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

If the set logging device is changed or the data of other project data is used after setting the historical trend
graph, consistency between the device set for logging and the device in historical trend graph may be lost.
In such a case, it is necessary to set the device for historical trend graph again.
The historical trend graph is not displayed unless the device type agrees with each other.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

(2) Changing the set logging device or using the data of other project

20
(4) Devices set for time device and graph information]
PARTS DISPLAY

For devices to be set for [Time Device] and [Graph Information], use GOT internal devices.
If a device of a controller is specified, the monitoring speed may be lowered.

(5) Logging setting when historical trend graph is used

When historical trend graph is used, setting for [Number of Logs a File]
19.1 Data tab) in logging setting must be larger than a value set for [Points]

19.1 Data tab) of historical trend graph.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Precautions for OS
When historical trend graph is used, install the Option OS (Logging) to the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

When using the historical trend graph with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GT16, no option function board is required.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

19.5 Precautions

19 - 21

19 - 22

19.5 Precautions

PARTS

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

20. PARTS DISPLAY

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Parts switching method

(1) Bit parts display
20.1 Bit Parts Settigs
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to bit device ON/OFF.

X10 OFF

X10 ON

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

This function displays the registered parts and base screen/window screen according to the device status.

Parts corresponding
to bit device OFF are
displayed.

Parts corresponding
to bit device ON are
displayed.

(2) Word parts display

20.2 Word Parts Settings
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word device value.

No. 1 part is displayed.

D100 10

D100 100

No. 10 part is displayed.

No. 100 part is displayed.

(3) Fixed parts display

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings
This function displays the parts/base screen/window screen at rising/falling edge of a bit device.
Only one type of part can be displayed, but the part can be overlaid on the other parts display.
Part of parts display A

Part of parts display B

Rising edge
X1
ON

OFF
Parts display B is
displayed at rising
edge of X1.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

D100 1

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Parts display B is overlaid

on parts display A.

20 - 1

POINT
Parts displayed by Parts Display
There are the following two types for the parts displayed by Parts Display. The parts to be displayed by Parts
Display needs to be registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by GT Designer3 (registered parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the CF card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

Applicable parts types

Type

Description

Remarks

The figures registered as parts are displayed.

Example: Registrable figures as parts
Parts must have been
registered in advance.

Parts

Figures

Text

BMP/JPEG file

The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the device
value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.

White

Blue

Red

D100 = 50

D100 = 100

Mark

D100 = 0

BMP/JPEG format parts

cannot be used.
Draw the color-changed area
in white.
During the fixed parts
movement, the color change
(multiple-color display) is
disabled.
Only one color is used.

The color changing is displayed in the white area.

The figures on any base screens and window screens are displayed.
Base screen

Line A operation

Base Screen 1

Line A operation

The objects set on the base

screens and window screens
are not displayed.

Base Screen 20
Screen display

Window screen

The figure on Base Screen 20

is overlaid on Base Screen 1.

Application example
Display different images of the same part
(Parts display (bit/word))
20.1 Device/Style tab
20.2 Device/Style tab

Cascade multiple parts.

(Parts display (fixed))
20.3 Style tab

X10=OFF
Part No. 1
Part No. 2
Part No. 3

Only the white part of parts changes.

20 - 2

Three parts are

arranged in
cascaded way.

ON

X30=OFF

ON

(X10)
(X20)
(X30)

Part No. 1 is displayed

Part No. 3 is displayed

17

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged part to display the setting dialog box.

[Bit Parts] from the menu.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

[Parts Display]

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

Device/Style tab
In basic tab, the [Parts Type] and [Parts No.] during ON/OFF are set.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19
Preview list

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Item

Description

Parts Switching

Select the method for switching parts. (Bit/Word)

Parts Switching
Device

Set a device to be monitored.

Preview List

Displays the status when the device turns ON/OFF.

Model

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Select the type of part to be displayed.

Parts Data*1

Mark Data*1

The registered part is displayed.

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part types.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Parts Type

Base Screen

Displays the registered base screen as part.

Window Screen

Displays the registered window screen as part.

Image File*1

Select an image file to display the image file saved in the CF card as a part.
After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
(1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

(Continued to next page)

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

20 - 3

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

Item

Description

Model

Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.

Replace
: The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.
This item is not available when [Parts Type] is set to [Base Screen] or [Window Screen].

Display
parts

Switch
parts

Shape
XOR

Parts

New parts

: Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping portion of
the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.4 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

Display
parts

Display Mode

Shape (Blue)

Overwrite

Switch
parts

Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape +
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2

: Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.

Display
parts

Switch
parts

Shape

Parts

New parts

Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left

Center

Set display position

Set display position

Alignment

(Continued to next page)

20 - 4

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

Item

Description

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type].

Screen No.

Specify the screen No. when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set in [Parts Type].
The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking the [Screen] button.

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.
To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Mark Color

Parts Details

19

20

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

PARTS DISPLAY

Object Name

Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.

Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Set the [Parts No. ] when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
device bit is ON.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Parts No.

Model

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

For details of *1 refer to the following.

*1 How to enable transparent setting of parts

When setting the transparent color to the image data set for [Parts Type], the transparent setting for [Parts Type] is
enabled.
The following shows how to enable the transparent setting of parts.

1.

Set a transparent color to the image data.

(The transparent color can be set to image data in the BMP format only.)

2.

Register the image data to which a transparent color is set in the parts or library.

3.

Set the registered part or library to the part.

For the methods to set a transparent color to the image data, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5. EDITING AND SETTING FIGURES AND OBJECTS

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

20 - 5

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

(1) Image File Setting Dialog Box

Set an image file to be displayed.

Item

Description

Image File Path

Display the full path of the specified image file.

If "0" is set to the image file No., the path is not displayed.
Make setting so that the whole path can be within 78 characters.

Drive Name

Select a drive where an image file is to be stored.

Folder Name

Select a folder where an image file is to be stored.

File Name

Specify a part of image file name (head character except for image file No.).

Digits

Specify the number of digits for [Image File No.] to an image file. (from1 to 5)
Check the item for setting the transparent color to the specified image file.
The transparent color can be set to BMP files.
After checking the item, click the [From Image] button, and then the [Open a File] dialog box is displayed. Select the
file that the transparent color is set.
After selecting the file, the [Transparent Setting] dialog box is displayed. Specify the area that the transparent color is
set.

Transparent

Transparent
: Displays the set transparent color.
Background Color : Change background colors for the preview.
Preview
: Displays the selected image file.
Click the preview, and then the color of the clicked part is specified as the transparent color.

20 - 6

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

17

Extended tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the security, offset, layer or category.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Category

21

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

PARTS MOVEMENT

Layer

20
PARTS DISPLAY

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

20 - 7

 Trigger tab
Set the trigger type.

Item

Trigger Type

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range,
Rise
Fall
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

20 - 8

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

Tab name

21

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

Parts No.

part_no

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Blink

blink

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Device/Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.For the object property feedback timing to the
screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs

20 - 9

PARTS MOVEMENT

Setting dialog box

PARTS DISPLAY

20

20.2 Word Parts Settings

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged part to display the setting dialog box.

[Parts Display]

[Word Parts] from the menu.

Device/Style tab
Here the parts type and parts No. displayed corresponding to word device value is set.

Preview list

Item

Description

Parts Switching

Model

Select the method for switching parts. (Bit/Word)

Set the device to be monitored.

Parts Switching
Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The default of a written data format is signed [Signed BIN16].
To write by the other data format, change the setting in [Data Type].

Data Type

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 BCD16

Preview List*2

Displays the set status for each state.

Creates a new state.
Deletes a state.

Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.

Creates a new state utilizing the setting contents of the selected state.

(Continued to next page)

20 - 10

20.2 Word Parts Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the type of part to be displayed.

Mark Data*1

The registered part is displayed.

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
The registered part can be checked by clicking on [Parts] button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Parts Data*1

(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Base Screen

Displays the registered base screen as part.

Window Screen

Displays the registered window screen as part.

Image File*1

Select an image file to display the image file saved in the CF card as a part.
After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Parts Type

Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.

Replace : The part being displayed is deleted to display a new part.
This item is not available when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set to [Parts Type].

Shape

Switch
parts

Parts

New parts

21

: Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the overlapping portion of
the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.

PARTS MOVEMENT

XOR

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Display
parts

(Fundamentals) Appendix.4 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

Display
parts

Display Mode

Shape (Blue)

Switch
parts

Overlapped part
Part No. 1
Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow.
(White)
changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape +
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1
color of part No. 2

Overwrite : Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed part.

Display
parts

Shape

Switch
parts

Parts

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

New parts

(Continued to next page)

20.2 Word Parts Settings

20 - 11

Item

Description

Model

Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left

Center

Set display position

Set display position

Alignment

Bit

Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.
Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).

Word

Select this item to change the display based on a word device.

After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device value with the [Range]
button.

Parts No.

Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.

Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Set the [Parts No. ] when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
device bit is ON.

Mark Color

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type]

Screen No.

Specify the screen No. when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set in [Parts Type].
The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking the [Screen] button.

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to 0, the parts are deleted.
Set 0 for [Image File No.] of power off, to display images only during power on.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Range

Detail Settings of
Parts*3

Preview No.

Display the part of specified No. on the GT Designer3 screen.

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
20.1 Device/Style tab
For details of *2, *3 refer to the following.

20 - 12

20.2 Word Parts Settings

17

*2 State

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

(1) When states are overlapped

When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Parts Switching Device : D100
Data Type
: Signed BIN16
Part No.1

Part No.10

1 set

10 sets

Part No.100 Part No.101

18
State No.

High

$V<=0

No.0

1<=$V<=100

Indirect

101<=$V<=199

Hold

0
(Normal case)

No.101

Low

Range

Display parts

19

* $V indicates monitor device value

State 1

When monitor device value is equal to or less than 0 ($V<=0),

the parts will not be displayed.

State 2

When monitor device value is between 1 and 100

(1<=$V<=100), the parts corresponding to device value will be
displayed.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

The operation
priority for setting
overlap states

SCATTER GRAPH

Over 100 sets Complete

20

1 set

Over 100 sets

PARTS DISPLAY

Registered parts :

State 3

State 0
(Normal case

When monitor device value is between 101 and 199

(101<=$V<=199)s, parts display will not be switched.

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

Over 100 sets

In the case of states other than 1 to 3, the part No. 101 is displayed.

Complete

20.2 Word Parts Settings

20 - 13

*3 Parts switching method

Condition settings are required when other than [Indirect Device] is set for [Detail Settings of Parts].
The following describes how displayed parts are changed depending on the [Detail Settings of Parts] and condition
settings.
State setting

Detail Settings of
Parts type

Indirect Device

Set

Not set

The part is displayed as the following depending on the set

state
When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The displayed part is changed depending on the value of
parts switching device.
The part is displayed as the following depending on the set
state
When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied

Parts No.

Mark Color

Set the state if required.

The displayed part is changed depending on the monitored
device value.
Set the state to change the part except the above condition.

The state must be set.

Only one type of part is kept displayed without state settings.
It cannot be switched to any other part.

The part set in [Detail Settings of Parts] is displayed.

The part is displayed as the following depending on the set
state
When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at the state is kept display

Hold

The state must be set.

Nothing is displayed without state settings.

Example: When [Detail Settings of Parts] is set to [Parts No.]

Make the following settings.
Part

State

[Parts Switching Device]: D10

[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]
[Detail Settings of Parts]: [Parts No. 1]

State 1

State 2

[Range]: 1<=D10<=100
[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 2

[Range]: 100<D10
[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 3

(Displayed part)

Part No. 2

Part No. 1
D10 = 0

D10 = 40

Part set at
[Detail Settings of Parts]
is displayed (Part No. 1).

Part set at condition 1 is

displayed (Part No. 2).

For details of condition, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

20 - 14

20.2 Word Parts Settings

Part No. 3
D10 = 150

Part set at condition 2 is

displayed (Part No.3).

17

Extended tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the security and offset

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
Description

Security Level

Model
PARTS DISPLAY

Item

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

21

Layer

PARTS MOVEMENT

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

Category

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

20.2 Word Parts Settings

20 - 15

 Trigger tab
Set the trigger type.

Item

Trigger Type

Description
Select a condition to display/activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Sampling
Range
Rise
Fall
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise

For details of each item, refer to the following.

Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

20 - 16

20.2 Word Parts Settings

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) For setting details of data operation, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Operation/Script tab

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Description

Model

Bit Mask

Select this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked
in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND
: Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR
: Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to enable bit shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right
: Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.

Data Operation

20.2 Word Parts Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Item

20 - 17

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

Parts No.

part_no

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Blink

blink

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Device/Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

20 - 18

20.2 Word Parts Settings

17

1.

Select [Object]

2.

Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.

3.

Double click the arranged part to display the setting dialog box.

[Parts Display]

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

[Fixed Parts] from the menu.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Style tab
Directly specify and set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

PARTS DISPLAY

20

Item

Description

Model

Parts Data*1

Mark Data*1

The registered part is displayed.

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part types.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Parts Type
Base Screen

Displays the registered base screen as part.

Window Screen

Displays the registered window screen as part.

Image File*1

Select an image file to display the image file saved in the CF card as a part.
After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

(Continued to next page)

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Select the type of part to be displayed.

20 - 19

Item

Description

Model

Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.

XOR
: The parts/base screen/window screen by XOR combination is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is erased at the disabled display condition.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.4 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

When display condition

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)

Display Mode

Shape (Blue)

Overlapped part
changes to yellow.

Part No. 1
(White)

When display condition

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)

Part is erased.

XOR combination of figure

+ part No. 1 colors
Overwrite : The parts/base screen/window screen is overlaid on a figure or other part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is kept displaying without regarding to the display condition.
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100

When display condition

is enabled
(M100: OFF ON)

Shape

Parts

When display condition

is disabled
(M100: ON OFF)

Part is kept displayed.

Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.

Top-Left

Center

Set display position

Set display position

Alignment

(Continued to next page)

20 - 20

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Item

Description
Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.
Click the [Parts] button to set the registered part/base screen/window screen.
Set 0 to [Parts No.] to erase the part.
Set the [Parts No. ] when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the
device bit is ON.

Screen No.

Specify the screen No. when [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] is set in [Parts Type].
The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking the [Screen] button.

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digit : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.
To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Detail Settings of
Parts

Trigger Type
Trigger
Trigger Device

SCATTER GRAPH

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type].

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Mark Color

18

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Parts No.

Select the trigger by which data is displayed. (Rise/Fall)

(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting
Click on the [...] button to specify the device to be set as trigger.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

21

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
This object name is also displayed in the GT Designer3 (Such as Data view, Property sheet).
The object name is also displayed in other than [Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

PARTS MOVEMENT

Object Name

Model

For details of *1 refer to the following.

20.1 Device/Style tab

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

20 - 21

 Extended tab
Set the security and offset

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

Layer

Category

20 - 22

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.

(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Model

17

Script tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

: Execution is possible for the object property.

: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box
Setting dialog box
Tab name

Object property
Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Display Mode

draw_mode

3)

Parts No.

part_no

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Blink

blink

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Extended
*1

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

20.3 Fixed Parts Settings

20 - 23

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.

The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

(1) Correspondence between object setting and property

20.4 Parts Settings

Select [Common]

[Parts]

[Parts Setting] from the menu to display the [Parts Setting] dialog box.

HINT
Functions affected by the setting
The setting contents of some common settings, used in different projects, may affect multiple functions in the GOT.
For the relation between each setting and GOT functions, refer to the following.
20.5 Relevant Settings

Item

Description

Show overlapping areas of shapes in XOR when Display

Mode of Parts Display is XOR.

Select this item to invert grouped figures (XOR display) at once, when the
XOR mode is set to the parts display.

Show image files in the memory card at the time of

specifying Parts No. 9001-9999

Select this item to display BMP/JPEG file parts, which are stored in the CF
card by parts display or parts movement, as parts.

HINT
Operation from the project tree
The [Parts Setting] dialog box can also be displayed by double-clicking [Parts Setting] in the project tree.

20 - 24

20.4 Parts Settings

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

20.5 Relevant Settings

The parts display function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT type settings

Function

Set description

Checking if objects are overlapping.

[Check for overlapping objects within GOT]

Adjusting the order of objects overlapped in GT Designer3 and objects

overlapped on GOT.

[Adjust object display order in GOT to the one in

GT Designer3]

Model

SCATTER GRAPH

18

(Fundamentals) 4.1GOT Type Setting

Parts Setting
20.4 Parts Settings
Set description

Inverting (XOR display) grouped parts at once, when the drawing mode of parts
display is set to XOR.

[Show overlapping areas of shapes in XOR when

Display Mode of Parts Display is XOR.]

Setting whether to use or not image files stored in the CF card for the objects of
parts display or parts movement.

[Show image files in the memory card at the time

of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999]

Model

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Function

GOT internal devices

Function

Set description

Model

GS450.b8

20.5 Relevant Settings

20 - 25

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

Using the image files stored in the CF card for the objects of parts display or
parts movement. (Write device)

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20.6 Actions
Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the CF card
BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.

(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)

(a) When using BMP/JPEG file part in the CF card
In each object setting of Parts Display/Parts Movement, specify the BMP/JPEG file stored in the CF card
for display.

1.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card. For the storage method, refer to the
following.
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.

After the display condition of the part is satisfied in Parts Display, the BMP/JPEG file part in the
specified CF card is displayed.
Set the following items in the [Device/Style] tab (only for word part) of the Parts Display for use.
Image File Setting
Image File No. setting

(b) Display example

The following shows a display example when BMP file parts are stored in the CF card.

IMG0001.BMP

IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP

Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the corresponding BMP file
part is displayed.
Word device for parts display : D100
D100

If specifying "0" to the

part number, BMP file
parts are hidden.

20 - 26

20.6 Actions

D100

Displays BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP).

D100

500

Displays BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP).

D100

999

Displays BMP file part

(IMG0999.BMP).

(a) To ordinarily select a BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card

The BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card will be displayed ordinarily when a parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is
specified

1.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card.

(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.

Select the item [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] in
the [Parts Setting] dialog box, and write the setting to the GOT.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the CF card can be displayed by specifying a number from 9001 to 9999 for
the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the CF card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the setting in the
following procedure.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

(2) Display method in units of projects

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

PARTS DISPLAY

20

The BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card are displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on Parts Display.
The setting of [Image File Setting] and [Image File No.] are not required.

(b) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card by using the GS450.b8
This method enables to switch the display of parts registered by GT Designer3 and BMP/JPEG file parts
stored in the CF card, when the parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.
Parts No.
9001 to 9999

1.

When GS450.b8 is ON
The BMP/JPEG file part in the CF card is
displayed.

When GS450.b8 is OFF

The part registered by the GT Degisner3 is
displayed.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card.

(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.
3.

Turn ON the GS450.b8.

The BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card are displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on Parts Display.

20.6 Actions

20 - 27

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

3.

(c)

Display example
The following shows a display example in the case where the BMP file parts below are stored in the CF
card.

IMG0001.BMP

IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP

Example: BMP file parts are displayed in the Parts Display (Word part)
When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in the word device, the corresponding BMP file part
is displayed.
Word device for parts display : D100
D100

9000

When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.

20 - 28

20.6 Actions

D100

9001

BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed

D100

9500

BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.

D100

9999

BMP file part

(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.

(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999

When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, parts registered by the GT Designer3 are displayed even if
the setting for displaying BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card is made.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of BMP/JPEG file parts with the corresponding parts
No. stored in the CF card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display BMP/JPEG file parts with the corresponding parts No. stored in the CF card while displaying parts
with parts No. within 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT Designer3, operate as follows.
Turn ON the GS450.b8.

2.

Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.

3.

Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the CF card to be displayed.

19

Make setting on the status monitor.

Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

Set the condition monitor cycle to

[Ordinary].

*1 At a GOT startup, the parts of parts display may not be switched to BMP/JPEG file parts.
(Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.

20.6 Actions

20
PARTS DISPLAY

(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on by
using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the memory card from the beginning when using the
GS450.b8.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device: GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8
when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor function.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

1.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

POINT

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

20 - 29

 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts
in the CF card is made.

Parts No.

When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts

in the CF card is not made.

Parts registered by
GT Designer3

BMP/JPEG file parts in the

CF card

Parts registered by
GT Designer3

-*1

-*1

-*1

BMP/JPEG file parts in the

CF card

1 to 8999
-*1

9000
*2

9001 to 9999
10000 to 32767

*1

*2

: Displayable
: Not displayable - : Hidden
When [Indirect Device] in [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement is selected, the parts are not hidden.
(The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement.
20.2 Device/Style tab
The parts cannot be displayed even if they are registered by GT Designer3.
Example: When a part registered by GT Designer3 is registered for the parts No. 9123

The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.

When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
CF card is made.

20 - 30

20.6 Actions

The part registered by the GT Designer3

(parts No.9123) is displayed.

When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
CF card is not made.

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

20.7 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the parts display.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen

(a) Inverting the parts to a figure

Set the parts on the back layer.
(b) Inverting overlapped parts
Only the parts with the "fixed part" attribute can be overlapped.
Place all parts on the same layer.
If parts are placed on the front layer, the area that is not overlapped is inverted to the [Transparent] of
the screen.
(c)

Inverting parts including characters

If the parts include objects with [Bold]/[Solid]/[Raised] text style set, characters of the displayed part may be
chipped or the character color may be incorrect.

(3) Setting of Parts Display

Do not set the display position with which any part of the BMP/JPEG file part will be out of the screen.
If such a display position is set, the part is displayed as follows.
Check the display position on the preview display of GT Designer3.

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

(2) When setting the parts to be inverted (XOR display)

SCATTER GRAPH

18

Up to 1000 objects can be set for the parts display.

PARTS DISPLAY

20

(a) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the GOT

The part is not displayed.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

The BMP/JPEG file part is not displayed.

(b) The BMP/JPEG file parts registered for the CF card

Only displayable portion is displayed.

Only displayable portion is displayed.

The result of inverse (XOR display) can be viewed by using the preview function of GT Designer3.
For details of the layer, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting

(4) When parts overlap with other objects

Make sure to place parts so that they will not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped objects may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, place the parts on the layer different from the other objects.
Also, note that the following cases may cause a similar problem.

20.7 Precautions

20 - 31

When the "Parts type" is "Base screen"

When the "Parts type" is "Part"

Display area

Display area

The objects overlap

with parts display.

Part (Part No. 1 is displayed.)

Part (Base screen 10 is displayed.)

Part No. 1

Base screen 10

The objects overlap

with parts display.

(5) When screen is set as the parts type and "XOR" is set as the display mode
(a) If the base screen or window screen is specified as the parts type for parts display (bit part/word part) and
XOR is set as the display mode, the parts on the screen are deleted and a new screen is displayed.
(b) The area to be deleted ranges from the drawing point (screen (center/upper left)) of the parts display to the
base/window screen.
(c)

If the base/window screen area including objects is deleted, the objects are hidden.
To display the objects, change the parts type from screen to part and adjust the position to avoid overlap
with other objects, or leave the screen parts type and change the display mode to "Overwrite."
However, if "Overwrite" is set, the previously displayed parts remain. Therefore, make sure to adjust the
parts so that they will be the same in size.

(d) If the target base screen or window screen includes objects with [Bold]/[Solid]/[Raised] text style set,
characters of the displayed part may be chipped or the character color may be incorrect.

Precautions for use

(1) Erasing parts
To erase the part, use the [Parts Data] or [Mark Data] setting in [Parts Type].
Parts set to [Base Screen] or [Window Screen] in [Parts Type] are not erased even if 0 is specified.
(The part can be erased by redisplaying the current screen after switching to another screen.)

(2) Reading the BMP/JPEG file

The monitor screen pauses during a file reading.

(3) The partway-displayed BMP/JPEG file parts

In the process of a file displaying, the display may be paused with the image partway-displayed.
In such a case, display the parts again or check the BMP/JPEG file.

(4) While displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the CF card

Do not remove the CF card from the GOT while displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts of the CF card.

(5) Discontinuing to use the BMP/JPEG file parts of the CF card

Perform either of the following operations.
Change the [Parts Setting] of the GT Designer3 and then write the project data.
Turn the GOT internal device (GS450.b8) off.
The BMP/JPEG file parts of the CF card may be displayed even if the memory card is removed without the
operations above. The following explains the reason.
The BMP/JPEG file part displayed on the GOT is retained in the GOT built-in memory. (Only one BMP/JPEG file
part can be retained.)
If a BMP/JPEG file part with the same parts No. is specified subsequently, the BMP/JPEG file part retained in
the GOT built-in memory is displayed. Therefore, the part registered by the GT Designer3 is not displayed.

(6) The validating priority of settings between GT Designer3 and GS450.b8

The BMP/JPEG file parts of the CF card are displayed regardless of the GS450.b8 if [Show image files in the
memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] is selected.

20 - 32

20.7 Precautions

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

21. PARTS MOVEMENT

SCATTER GRAPH

18
It is the function to change parts position and display (movement) according to the value of word device.
Parts movement can be displayed by the following 2 types of devices.
Position device
: The device storing parts move destination.
21.6 Move way of parts (Control with position device)

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Parts switching device : The device to switch the types of parts to be displayed.

Parts switching method (Control with parts switching device)

The following 3 switching methods can be selected.

(1) Bit parts movement

21.1 Device/Style tab

20

Switches to display 2 types of parts.

PARTS DISPLAY

(a) Switch different parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.

[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON

M10: OFF

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

(b) Displays/hides parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.

[Parts switching
bit device]
: M10
M10: ON

M10: OFF

(2) Word parts movement

21.2 Device/Style tab
Switches to display more than 3 types of parts.
(a) Switch to display parts of which parts No. is the same as the word device value.

[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
D10

D10

D10

D10

(b) Switch parts type according to the range and condition of word device value.
[Parts switching
word device]
: D10
[Display condition]
1) 50 D10 100

Part No.1

2) D10 < 100

Part No.2

1) D10

2) D10 250

3) D10

3) Parts No.0 (not displayed) at

normal case (other than above
conditions)

21 - 1

(3) Fixed parts movement

21.3 Style tab
Only one type of parts is displayed.
[Parts Switching Device] is not set.

[Parts switching
word device]
: need not to be set

HINT
Parts displayed by Parts movement
The following two types of parts are available to be displayed by Parts movement, and need to be registered in
advance.
(1) Parts data registered as parts by GT Designer3 (Registered parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts
(2) BMP/JPEG files stored in the CF card (BMP/JPEG file parts)
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

Applicable parts types

Type

Description

Remarks

The figures registered as parts are displayed.

Example: Registrable figures as parts
Parts must have been registered in advance.
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/
JPEG file parts in a CF card

Parts

Figures

Text

BMP/JPEG file

The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the
device value.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be
displayed by a single part.

White

Blue

Red

Mark

D100 = 0
D100 = 50
D100 = 100
The color changing is displayed in the white area.

21 - 2

BMP/JPEG format parts cannot be used.

Draw the color-changed area in white.
During the fixed parts movement, the color
change (multiple-color display) is disabled.
Only one color is used.

17

Select [Object]

[Parts Movement]

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

[Bit Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Device/Style tab
Set the parts move way, the parts to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF, and the condition.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Preview list

Item
Parts Switching

Description

Model

Select the method for switching parts. (Bit/Word)

Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Parts Switching
Device

Example:

X10: ON

X10: OFF

Display part No.1

Display part No.10

Select the movement type when moving parts.

Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
21.6 Move way of parts (Control with position device)
After setting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.

Move Format

Device

Data Type

PARTS DISPLAY

20

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Move Way].
Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point
: Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device.
(Fixed to [Unsigned BIN16] when selecting [Position]/[Point])
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16

(Continued to next page)

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

21 - 3

Item

Description

Model

Select the move way.

Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X and Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position.
From the set device, two device points are set continuously for X and Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)

Move Format

Move Way

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Line *1

Point

: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
: Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
After selecting this item, set the parts move route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

Route No.
Preview list

Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29)

Displays the set status for each condition.

Select the type of the part to be moved.
Parts Data*2

Parts Type

Mark Data*2

Displays the registered part

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts
switching device change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark. The registered part can be checked by
clicking on [Parts] button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Image File*2

Select an image file to display the image file saved in memory card as a part.
After the selection, clicking the [Setting] button displays the Image File Setting dialog box.
20.1 Bit Parts Settigs (1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.

Movement
: Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Locus
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:

When selecting [Movement]

Display Mode

Erase the previous display

Erase the previous display

The previous display

The previous display

When selecting [Locus]

(Continued to next page)

21 - 4

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the base point to display the part.

Top-Left : Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center : Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)

Device
for Y
coordinate

18

Device for X coordinate

SCATTER GRAPH

Device for X coordinate

Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left

19

Center

Destination

Destination

Starting
point

Top-left

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)

Starting
point

Center

20

When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)

Top-left

Object Name

4
PARTS DISPLAY

Center

Parts No.

Set the pat No. to be displayed.

Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
(To display the part only when the device is on, set [Parts No.] when the device is off to 0.)

Mark Color

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type].

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.
To display the image only at power-on, specify [Image File No.] at power-off to "0".

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Alignment

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

21 - 5

*1 Line
Set the line to be the parts move range when [Line] is set for [Move Way].
Execute the following operations after making the settings in the [Bit Parts Movement] dialog box.

1.

Click the start position in the drawing screen.

2.

Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking the destination.

*2 How to enable transparent setting of parts

When setting the transparent color to the image data set for [Parts Type], the transparent setting for [Parts Type] is
enabled.
The following shows how to enable the transparent setting of parts.

1.

Set a transparent color to the image data.

(The transparent color can be set to image data in the BMP format only.)

2.

Register the image data to which a transparent color is set in the parts or library.

3.

Set the registered part or library to the part.

For the methods to set a transparent color to the image data, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5. EDITING AND SETTING FIGURES AND OBJECTS

21 - 6

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

17

Extended tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the security, offset, layer or category.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Item

Description

Security Level

Model

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

21

Category

PARTS MOVEMENT

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Layer

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

PARTS DISPLAY

20

21 - 7

 Trigger tab
Set the trigger type.

Item
Trigger Type

Description
Select the condition to display or activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise

For details of each item, refer to the following.

Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

21 - 8

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and the
object setting dialog box is shown below.

Setting dialog box

Tab name

Extended
*1

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Parts No.

part_no

4)

Blink

blink

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Device/Style

Object property

Setting item

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

21.1 Bit Parts Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

: Execution is possible for the object property.

: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

PARTS DISPLAY

20

21 - 9

21.2 Word Parts Settings

Select [Object]

[Parts Movement]

[Word Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Device/Style tab
Set the move way of parts, the parts displayed by the device value, and states.

Preview list

Item

Description

Parts Switching

Model

Select the method for switching parts. (Bit/Word)

Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Parts Switching
Device

Example:

D10: 1

D10: 2

D10: 3

Display part No.1

Display part No.2

Display part No.3

Select the movement type when moving parts.

Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
21.6 Move way of parts (Control with position device)
After setting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Move Format

Device

Data Type

The setting items varies according to the setting in [Move Way].

Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point
: Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Device], select the data type of word device.
(Fixed to [Unsigned BIN16] when selecting [Position]/[Point])
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16

(Continued to next page)

21 - 10

21.2 Word Parts Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the move way.

Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word devicevalues as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position.
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X . Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
Move Way

18

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Line *2

Point

SCATTER GRAPH

Move Format

: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
: Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
After selecting this item, set the parts move route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.

19

Route No.
Preview list

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

*3

Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29)

Displays the set status for each state.

Creates a new state.
Deletes the state.

20

Changes the priority of the states in the preview list.

PARTS DISPLAY

Creates a new condition utilizing the setting contents of the selected condition.
Select the type of the part to be moved.

Parts Type

Mark Data*1

Displays the registered part

Changes the white part of the part into the different color according to the parts switching device
change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part types.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Parts Data*1

(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Image File*1

Select an image file to display the image file saved in memory card as a part.
After selecting, click the [Setting] button to display the [Image File Setting] dialog box.
20.1 Bit Parts Settigs (1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.

Movement
: Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Locus
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:

When selecting [Movement]

Display Mode

When selecting [Locus]

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Erase the previous display

Erase the previous display

The previous display

The previous display

(Continued to next page)

21.2 Word Parts Settings

21 - 11

Item

Description

Model

Select the base point to display the part.

Top-Left : Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center : Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:

Device for X coordinate

Device
for Y
coordinate

Device for X coordinate

Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left

Center

240)
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Alignment

Destination

Starting
point

Destination

Starting
point

Top-left

Center

When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)

Top-left

Center

Select the condition for display change depending on the state.

Bit
: Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device. Then, set the bit device and the
device status (ON/OFF).
Word : After selecting this item, set a conditional expression for the word device value with the [Range] button.

Range

Displays the [Parts No.] corresponding to the parts switching device.

When the value of parts switching device is 0 (When setting 0 or 9000 when specifying the BMP/
JPEG file parts in the CF card), the current display is held.
To erase the part, set $V==0 in [Range].
Example:
Indirect Device

D200: 100
Display the parts
with parts No. 100

Detail Settings of
Parts*4

Monitor device value

Parts No.

Set the pat No. to be displayed.

Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
(To display the part only when the device is on, set [Parts No.] when the device is off to 0.)

Mark Color

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type].

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the [Image File Setting] dialog
box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.

(Continued to next page)

21 - 12

21.2 Word Parts Settings

Description

Model

Detail Settings of

Hold

Select this item to hold current parts display.

Parts*4

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Device/Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Item

For details of *1, refer to the following.

21.1 Device/Style tab
For details of *2 to *4, refer to the following.

19
HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

*2 Line
Set the line to be the parts move range when [Line] is set for [Move Way].
Execute the following operations after making the settings in [Word Parts Movement].

1.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Click the start position in the drawing screen.

Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking the destination.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

2.

PARTS DISPLAY

20

21.2 Word Parts Settings

21 - 13

*3 State

(1) When states are overlapped

When states are overlapped, the state with smaller No. has priority.
Example) Parts Switching Device : D100
Data Type
: Signed BIN16
Parts No. 1

Registered parts

Parts No. 10 Parts No. 11 Parts No. 12

The operation
priority for setting
overlap states

State No.

High

M10 ON

No.11

1<=$V<=9

Indirect

10<=$V

Hold

0
(Normal Case)

No.12

Low

Range

Display parts

*$V indicates the value of monitor device.

State 1

Display parts No.11 when M10 is ON.

State 2

Display the parts corresponding to parts switching device value when

the value is between 1 and 9 (1<=$V<=9).

State 3

Do not switch parts display when parts switching device value is 10 or

greater (10<=$V).

State 0
(Normal Case)

21 - 14

Display parts No. 12 in states other than 1 to 3.

21.2 Word Parts Settings

State settings are required when other than [Indirect Device] is set for [Detail Settings of Parts].
The following describes how displayed parts are changed depending on [Detail Settings of Parts] and the state
settings.
State setting

Parts No

Mark Color

Hold

Set

18

The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state

When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The displayed part is changed depending on the value of parts
switching device.

Set the state if required.

The displayed part is changed depending on the monitored
device value.
Set the state to change the part except the above condition.

The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state

When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The part set in [Detail Settings of Parts] is displayed.

The state must be set.

Only one type of part is kept displayed without state settings.
It cannot be switched to any other part.

The part is displayed as the following depending on the set state

When trigger is satisfied
The part set in the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at the state is kept display

The state must be set.

Nothing is displayed without state settings.

PARTS DISPLAY

Part

State

[Parts Switching Device]: D10

State 1

State 2

[Parts Type]: [Parts Data]

[Range]: 1 <= D10 <= 100

[Range]: 100 < D10

[Detail Settings of Parts]: [Parts No. 1]

[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 2

[Detail Settings of Parts]: Parts No. 3

Part No. 3

Part No. 2

Part set at "Attribute"

is displayed (Part No. 1).

D10 = 40

Part set at State 1 is

displayed (Part No. 2).

D10 = 150

Part set at State 2 is

displayed (Part No. 3).

For details of the state, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.3 State setting

21.2 Word Parts Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

(Displayed part)

D10 = 0

19

20

Example: When [Detail Settings of Parts] is set to [Parts No.]

Make the following settings.

Part No. 1

SCATTER GRAPH

Indirect Device

Not set

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Detail settings of
parts type

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

*4 Parts switching method

21 - 15

 Extended tab
Set the security, offset, layer or category.

Item

Description

Security Level

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.

Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Layer

Category

21 - 16

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)

(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

21.2 Word Parts Settings

Model

17

Trigger tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the trigger type.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Item

Model

Select the condition to display or activate the object.

When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary

21

ON

Rise
Fall

PARTS MOVEMENT

OFF
Settings

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Trigger Type

Description

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

21.2 Word Parts Settings

21 - 17

 Operation/Script tab
The operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by the data operation function or script
function.
For the settings of each function, refer to the following.

(1) Data Operation

For setting details of data operation, refer to the following
(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

Item

Description

Bit Mask

Select this item to enable the bit mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked
in hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
AND : Carries out logical AND.
OR
: Carries out logical OR.
XOR : Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Bit Shift

Select this item to enable the bit shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of
Shifts].
Left
: Left shift
Right : Right shift

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

Data Operation

21 - 18

21.2 Word Parts Settings

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

(2) Script

For details of script settings, refer to the following.

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.
: Execution is possible for the object property.
: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

Tab name

Extended
*1

Object property

Setting item

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Parts No.

part_no

4)

Blink

blink

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Device/Style

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

Setting dialog box

PARTS DISPLAY

20

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

21.2 Word Parts Settings

21 - 19

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Select [Object]

[Parts Movement]

[Fixed Parts] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Style tab
Set the parts move way and the displayed parts.

Item

Description

Model

Select the movement type when moving parts.

Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
21.6 Move way of parts (Control with position device)
After selecting the [Move Way], set the position device to store the movement destination of parts.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Device

Data Type
Move Format

The setting items varies according to the setting in [Move Way].

Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)
Line
: Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Point
: Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Move Way], select the data type of word device.
(Fixed to [Unsigned BIN16] when selecting [Position]/[Point])
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Select the movement type.
Position : Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinator points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position storage.
(The set device is for X storage)

Move Way

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Line *2

Point

: Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and end
point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
: Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

Route No.

Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29)

(Continued to next page)

21 - 20

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Item

Description

Model

Select the type of the part to be moved.

Parts Data*1

Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the parts
switching device change.
After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark. The registered part can be checked by
clicking on [Parts] button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.

Mark Data*1

18
SCATTER GRAPH

Parts Type

Displays the registered part

(Fundamentals) 4.12.2 Registering parts

Select an image file to display the image file saved in memory card as a part.
After the selection, clicking the [Setting] button displays the Image File Setting dialog box.

Image File*1

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

20.1 Bit Parts Settigs (1) Image File Setting Dialog Box
Displays the full path of the specified image file.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.

Movement
: Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Locus
: Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the screen.
Example:

When selecting [Movement]

20
Erase the previous display

When selecting [Locus]

PARTS DISPLAY

Display Mode

Erase the previous display

The previous display

PARTS MOVEMENT

21
The previous display

Select the base point to display the part.

Top-Left : Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
Center : Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Example:
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)

Device for X coordinate

Device for X coordinate

Device
for Y
coordinate

Device
for Y
coordinate
Top-left

Center

When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)

Alignment

Destination

Starting
point

Destination

Starting
point

Center

Top-left

When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)

Top-left

Center

(Continued to next page)

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

21 - 21

Item

Description

Parts No.

Set the pat No. to be displayed.

Click the [Parts] button to confirm the registered part.
Set 0 in [Parts No.] to erase the part.
(Set the [Parts No.] when the device is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the device
is ON.)

Mark Color

Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark Data] is set in [Parts
Type].

Image File No.

Can specify image file No.

The available ranges for specification depends on the [Digits] in the Image File Setting dialog box.
5 digits : 00001 to 65535
4 digits : 0001 to 9999
3 digits : 001 to 999
2 digits : 01 to 99
1 digits : 1 to 9
If the [Image File No.] is set to "0", the image is deleted.

Blink

Select the blinking pattern of the Parts. (None/Low/Medium/High)

Detail Settings of
Parts

Object Name

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
The object name is also displayed in other than [Style] tab.
Up to 30 characters can be input.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
20.1 Device/Style tab
For details of *2, refer to the following.

*2 Line
Set the line to be the parts move range when [Line] is set for [Move Way].
Execute the following operations after making the settings in the [Fixed Parts Movement ] dialog box.

21 - 22

1.

Click the start position in the drawing screen.

2.

Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Model

17

Extended tab

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Set the security, offset, layer or category.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
Description

Security Level

Model
PARTS DISPLAY

Item

When the security function is used, set the security level. (1 to 15)
When the security function is not used, set this value to 0.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Extended
Use Offset

Select this item to set monitoring by switching multiple devices.

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

21

Layer

Category

PARTS MOVEMENT

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

Switches the layer to allocate the object. (Front/Back)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.6 Superimposition setting
Select a category to assign when assigning categories to objects.
(Fundamentals) 8.5.1 Batch setting and managing figures/objects for each purpose (Category list)

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

21 - 23

 Trigger tab
Set the trigger type.

Item
Trigger Type

Description
Select the condition to display or activate the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the sampling is set in one second units. (1s to 3600s)
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger
The setting descriptions vary depending on the trigger type.
Ordinary
ON
OFF

Settings

Rise
Fall

For details of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Sampling
Range
Bit Trigger

21 - 24

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Script tab
For details of script settings, refer to the following.
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

SCATTER GRAPH

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

(a) Correspondence between object setting and property

Reading/changing (writing) of object setting is possible with the object property.
The correspondence between the items for which setting can be read/written with the object property and
the object setting dialog box is shown below.

Setting dialog box

Tab name

Extended
*1

Property name

Read

Write*1

active

1)

4)

4)

Parts No.

part_no

4)

Blink

blink

3)

Mark Color

mark_color

3)

Security Level

security

4)

Style

Object property

Setting item

1) to 5) of Write indicate the timing of feedback of object property to the screen.

For the object property feedback timing to the screen, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Control structure

21.3 Fixed Parts Settings

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

: Execution is possible for the object property.

: Execution is not possible for the object property.
- : Items that correspond to the object property do not exist in the setting dialog box

PARTS DISPLAY

20

21 - 25

21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for

Each Screen)
When [Point] is selected for [Move Way], set the parts move route for the positions where parts are to be displayed.
Up to 30 parts move routes can be set in one screen.
The parts move route can be used for multiple parts movement.

1.

Select [Object]

2.

The [Parts Move Route] dialog box is displayed. Make the following settings and click the [OK] button.

[Parts Movement]

[Parts Move Route] from the menu.

Item

Description

Route No.

Set the route No. of the parts move route to be created. (0 to 29)

Points

Set the number of points of the movement position. (1 to 100)

Select this item to move parts in a line.
When arranging in a line, points proportion set in [Points] will be arranged automatically according to the setting of
starting point and destination.

Example: Points: Set to 5

Arrange in a Line

Set the start point and destination point

(2 to 4: automatic arrangement)

Object Name

21 - 26

The object name being set can be renamed to meet the purpose of use.
The changed object name is displayed in the GT Designer3 (such as Data View, Propertysheet) and in the operation
log.
Up to 30 characters can be input.

21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Click the mark (+) that appears on the screen to arrange the Point 1.
Click on the positions as many as the number of set points for arrangement.
Click

Click

SCATTER GRAPH

The point number is displayed at the set position after the setting is completed.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
PARTS DISPLAY

4.

18

HINT
Correction of parts move route

21

(1) Change the point position

1.
2.

Click to select the parts move route, right click the route and select [Edit Points].
The route is now in Edit Vertex mode. Drag a point of the selected route to the destination position to
change the point position.

Edit vertex mode

Drag to change point position

(2) Change the number of points and route No.

Double click the parts move route to display the setting dialog box. Then change the [Points] and [Route No.]
in the corresponding items.

21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

21 - 27

PARTS MOVEMENT

3.

21.5 Relevant Settings

The parts movement function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

Parts Settings
20.4 Parts Settings
Function
Setting whether to use or not image files stored in the CF card for the objects of
parts display or parts movement.

Set description

Model

[Show image files in the memory card at the time

of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999]

GOT internal device

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function
Using the image files stored in the CF card for the objects of parts display or
parts movement. (Write device)

21 - 28

21.5 Relevant Settings

Set description

GS450.b8

Model

17
STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

21.6 Actions
Move way of parts (Control with position device)
The following three types of move ways can be selected.

(1) Position
Display parts at the position (dot notation).
Specify the display position using 2 points indicated by the word device values in X/Y axis, respectively.
The display position can be changed in dot unit by changing the value of position device.

SCATTER GRAPH

18

2) (200, 16)
1) (30, 90)

1)
30

2)
200

3)
130

Position device (Y coordinate): D101

90

16

170

(a) Datum position

A part displayed on the overlap window has the datum position at the upper left corner of the overlap
window.
Example: Overlap window

Datum position
(origin)

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Position device (X coordinate): D100

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

3) (130, 170)

Datum position
(origin)

Datum position
(origin)

21.6 Actions

21 - 29

PARTS MOVEMENT

21
In other cases (base screen, superimpose window, etc.), the upper left corner of the displayed base screen
is taken as the datum position.
Example: Base screen
Example: Set overlay screen, superimpose window, etc.

(2) Line
Move parts along lines between starting point and destination point that have been set.
Set the start point as minimum value, and the maximum value for the destination position, in order to display the
parts using this method.
<Setting image>

<Movement image>

Destination (maximum: 100)

80%
20%

D100: 100

D100: 20

Starting point (minimum: 0)

D100: 0

Position device: D100

(3) Point
Display parts at preset display position (point).
Point setting is made by registering a line connecting multiple points (parts move route).
Parts are displayed at the place indicated by the point No. that is the same as the value of position device.
<Setting image>
1

<Movement image>

Parts move route

Point

Position device: D100

Up to 30 Parts move routes can be set in one screen. This setting is made for each screen.
The parts move route can be used for moving multiple parts.
Parts movement A

Route No. 1------For parts movement A

Parts movement B
Route No. 2------For parts movement B
Parts movement C

Parts movement D
Route No. 3------For parts movement C, D

HINT
Locus
Movement locus that keeps the locus can be set in each move way.
21.1 Device/Style tab
21.2 Device/Style tab
21.3 Style tab

21 - 30

21.6 Actions

17

Parts movement example

Point1

2) [Parts switching device] : D15

[Switching way] : Parts movement

Point2

Point3

Part No. 50

18

Part No. 100 :

Part No. 150 :

Move to point2

Changes into the parts

of part No. 100

Changes into the parts

of part No. 150
Move to point3

SCATTER GRAPH

1) [Position device] : D10

[Move way] : [Point]

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

Execute parts movement display by position device and parts switching device as the following.

1) [Position device]
: D10

2) [Parts switching
device] : D15

50

50

100

150

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

19

20
PARTS DISPLAY

Setting order of parts movement

When setting the object of parts movement, select [Parts Switching] and then, [Move Way].

2.

Select the parts switching method on the [Device/Style] tab (For fixed parts, select on the [Style] tab).
The switching method cannot be changed after setting the object of parts movement.
Select the parts moving method on the [Device/Style] tab (For fixed parts, select on the [Style] tab).
The move method can be changed even after setting the object of parts movement.

21
PARTS MOVEMENT

1.

POINT
When Point is specified as the type for the parts movement
Set [Parts Move Route] before setting the object of parts movement.
21.4 Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen)

21.6 Actions

21 - 31

 Displaying method of the BMP/JPEG file stored in the CF card

BMP/JPEG file parts are displayed in units of objects/projects.

(1) Display method in units of objects (using image file)

(a) When using BMP/JPEG file part in memory card
In each object setting of Parts Movement, specify the BMP/JPEG file which is stored in the CF card to
display.

1.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card.

For the storage method, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.

After the display conditions of the part are satisfied in the Parts Movement, the BMP/JPEG file part in
the specified CF card is displayed.
Set the following items in each [Device/Style] tab and [Style] tab (Only for fixed parts) for use.
Image File Setting
Image File No. setting

(2) Display method in units of projects

The BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the CF card can be displayed by specifying a number from 9001 to 9999 for
the parts No.
To display a BMP/JPEG file part in the CF card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the setting in the
following procedure.

1.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card.

(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.

3.

21 - 32

Select [Show image files in the memory card at the time of specifying Parts No. 9001-9999] on the
[Parts Setting] dialog box, and then write the setting to the GOT.

The BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card are displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the Parts Movement.

21.6 Actions

The BMP/JPEG file part in the memory card is

displayed.

9001 to 9999

1.

When GS450.b8 is OFF

The part registered by the GT Degisner3 is
displayed.

Store a BMP/JPEG file to be displayed as parts in the CF card.

(Fundamentals) 4.13.2 Storing BMP/JPEG file parts in a CF card

2.
3.

Turn ON the GS450.b8.

The BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card are displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No.:
9001 to 9999) is satisfied on the Parts Movement.

The following shows a display example when BMP file parts are stored in the CF card.

IMG0001.BMP

IMG0500.BMP

Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)

When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the corresponding BMP file part is
displayed.
Word device for parts display: D100
9000

D100

9001

D100

9500

19

20

IMG0999.BMP

D100

18

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

(3) Display example (display method in units of projects)

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

When GS450.b8 is ON

D100

9999

PARTS DISPLAY

Parts No.

17

SCATTER GRAPH

(a) To display a BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card by using the GS450.b8
This method enables to switch the display of parts registered by GT Designer3 and BMP/JPEG file parts
stored in the CF card, when the parts No. of 9001 to 9999 is specified.

When a part No.of 0 or 9000

is specified, no BMP file
part is displayed.

BMP file part

(IMG0001.BMP)
is displayed

BMP file part

(IMG0500.BMP)
is displayed.

BMP file part

(IMG9999.BMP)
is displayed.

21.6 Actions

21 - 33

PARTS MOVEMENT

21

POINT
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999
When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999, parts registered by the GT Designer3 are displayed even if
the setting for displaying BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card is made.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of BMP/JPEG file parts with the corresponding parts
No. stored in the CF card (Only when using the GS450.b8.)
To display BMP/JPEG file parts with the corresponding parts No. stored in the CF card while displaying parts
with parts No. within 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT Designer3, operate as follows.

1.

Turn ON the GS450.b8.

2.

Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.

3.

Specify the parts No. of the BMP/JPEG file parts stored in the CF card to be displayed.

(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT is powered on by
using the status observation function.
It is convenient for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts in the CF card from the beginning when using the
GS450.b8.

1.
2.

On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device: GS0.b4) to store "1" to
GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor function.
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8
immediately after the GOT is switched
ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].

*1 The parts for Parts Movement may not be switched to BMP/JPEG files at the GOT startup.
(Switch the screen to switch the parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.

21 - 34

21.6 Actions

The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.

Parts registered by
GT Designer3

BMP/JPEG file parts in the

CF card

Parts registered by
GT Designer3

-*1

-*1

-*1

BMP/JPEG file parts in the

CF card

1 to 8999
-*1

9000
9001 to 9999

*2

19

10000 to 32767

21.2 Device/Style tab

The parts cannot be displayed even if they are registered by GT Designer3.
Example: When a part registered by GT Designer3 is registered for the parts No. 9123

The BMP/JPEG file part is displayed.

20

The part registered by the GT Designer3

(parts No.9123) is displayed.

PARTS DISPLAY

*2

: Displayable
: Not displayable - : Hidden
When [Indirect Device] in the [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement is selected, the parts are not hidden. (The
current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Detail Settings of Parts] of the word parts movement.

When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
memory card has been made.

21

When the setting for displaying

the BMP/JPEG file parts in the
memory card has not been made.

21.6 Actions

PARTS MOVEMENT

*1

18
SCATTER GRAPH

When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts

in the CF card is not made.

HISTORICAL TREND
GRAPH

Parts No.

When the setting for displaying the BMP/JPEG file parts

in the CF card is made.

STATISTICS PIE
GRAPH

17

Parts No.

21 - 35

21.7 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the parts movement function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of objects which can be set on one screen
Up to 1000 objects can be set for the parts movement.

(2) Display position of parts

If parts are set in a display position out of the screen in GT Designer3, those parts are not movement-displayed,
and the previous display is held.
Example: In the case of movement type [Point]

Parts out of the screen will not be displayed.

(3) When parts overlap with other objects

Make the settings so that the part destination position do not overlap with other objects.
If they overlap, the overlapped object may not be displayed correctly.
In this case, set the moving part on a layer different from the other object.
When the "Move way" is "Point"
Display area
The object overlap with
the part destination position.

Part movement (Part No. 1 is displayed.)

Part No.1

Precautions for use

(1) The value stored in position device
If the value stored in the position device exceeds the display range (position, out of the range of maximum to
minimum, point No.), parts are not movement-displayed, and the previous display is held.

21 - 36

21.7 Precautions

REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date
Oct., 2009

*Manual Number

Revision

SH(NA)-080867ENG-A

First printing: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.01B

Japanese Manual Version SH-080837-A

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be
held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

REVISIONS - 1

REVISIONS - 2

WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.

[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customers expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

This product uses Arphic Mobile Font.

VSFlexGrid8

LEADTOOLS(r) DLL for Win32

(c)ComponentOne LLC. All rights reserved

Copyright(c) 1991-2003 LEAD Technologies, Inc.

SH(NA)-080867ENG-A-1/2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and handle the
product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

DANGER

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that failure to observe the

CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]

DANGER
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device value, a current or set
timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the relevant manual to fully understand the
operating procedures.
When testing, never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.

A-1

CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE

(1) Required memory of a personal computer and the free capacity of the hard disk
For required memory and the free capacity of the hard disk, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.1 Operating environment

(2) Error messages displayed while starting and editing

"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to secure
at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.

(3) GT Designer3 and the GOT display

(a) Precautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line and others) in bold
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer.
However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line, line freeform, or polygon is displayed differently between
GT Designer3 and the GOT.
GT Designer3

(c)

On GOT

Start position for filling patterns

Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different between
GT Designer3 and the GOT.

(d) Drawing of different type lines

The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
The display position of the scale value displayed in the graph is different between GT Designer3 and the
GOT.
Even if the display-start-line of a comment is set, the comment is displayed from the first line on GT
Designer3.
(f)

Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the filled-paint
may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as well.
Example: When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200%

A-2

Display magnification: 100%

(4) Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system
environment (256 colors
2 colors)
The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a red rectangle-figure is changed to [2(mono)], the red color remains.
The colors of the image data (BMP format file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is closed
and that image data is double-clicked.

(5) When device type is changed

Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device. The device flag
may be represented as "??", depending on the settings.
Example: D0.b0

D0D0.b5

??

(6) OS setting
Set the font size to [Normal] when setting OS (Windows) screens.
If the font size is set to other than [Normal], the GT Designer3 dialog box and others cannot be displayed
correctly.

A-3

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in
advance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................................................................................A - 1
CAUTIONS FOR USING THIS SOFTWARE ............................................................................................A - 2
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................A - 4
CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................................................A - 4
MANUALS...............................................................................................................................................A - 13
ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ...........................................................................................A - 16
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................A - 20

FIGURES
1. FIGURES
1.1

Line .................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 2

1.2

Line Freeform .................................................................................................................................. 1 - 4

1.3

Rectangle......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 5

1.4

Polygon ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 8

1.5

Circle................................................................................................................................................ 1 - 9

1.6

Arc ................................................................................................................................................. 1 - 10

1.7

Sector ............................................................................................................................................ 1 - 12

1.8

Scale .............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 13

1.9

Piping ............................................................................................................................................. 1 - 14

1.10 Paint............................................................................................................................................... 1 - 17
1.11 Import Figure File........................................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.1 Importing figure files ........................................................................................................... 1 - 19
1.11.2 Precautions for importing data............................................................................................ 1 - 30
1.12 Capture .......................................................................................................................................... 1 - 31
1.12.1 Capturing displays .............................................................................................................. 1 - 31

TOUCH SWITCH, LAMP

2. TOUCH SWITCH
2.1

Setting Switch .................................................................................................................................. 2 - 3

2.2

Setting Bit Switch ........................................................................................................................... 2 - 27

2.3

Setting Word Switch ...................................................................................................................... 2 - 31

2.4

Setting Go To Screen Switch......................................................................................................... 2 - 34

A-4

2.5

Setting Change Station No. Switch................................................................................................ 2 - 44

2.6

Setting Special Function Switch .................................................................................................... 2 - 50

2.7

Setting Key Window Display Switch .............................................................................................. 2 - 58

2.8

Setting Key Code Switch ............................................................................................................... 2 - 60

2.9

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 2 - 62

2.10 Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 2 - 64

3. LAMP
3.1

Setting Bit Lamp .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 2

3.2

Setting Word Lamp ........................................................................................................................ 3 - 11

3.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 3 - 22

3.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 3 - 23

NUMBERS, CHARACTERS
4. GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
4.1

Text.................................................................................................................................................. 4 - 1

4.2

Logo Text......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5

5. NUMERICAL DISPLAY/NUMERICAL INPUT

5.1

Setting Numerical Display................................................................................................................ 5 - 3

5.2

Setting Numerical Input ................................................................................................................. 5 - 14

5.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 5 - 31

5.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 5 - 34

6. ASCII DISPLAY/ASCII INPUT

6.1

Setting ASCII Display ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2

6.2

Setting ASCII Input .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 7

6.3

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 6 - 16

6.4

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 18

6.5

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 6 - 19

7. DATA LIST
7.1

Settings............................................................................................................................................ 7 - 2

7.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 7 - 12

7.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 7 - 13

7.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 7 - 15

8. DATE DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY

8.1

Setting Date Display ........................................................................................................................ 8 - 2

8.2

Setting Time Display........................................................................................................................ 8 - 6

8.3

Relevant settings ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 10

8.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 8 - 11

9. COMMENT DISPLAY
A-5

9.1

Setting Bit Comment ........................................................................................................................ 9 - 3

9.2

Setting Word Comment ................................................................................................................. 9 - 14

9.3

Setting Simple Comment ............................................................................................................... 9 - 28

9.4

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 9 - 29

9.5

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 9 - 30

ALARM
10. ALARM
10.1

Preparatory Operations for Using Alarms ...................................................................................... 10 - 3

10.1.1 Alarm function................................................................................................................... 10 - 14
10.1.2 Advanced alarm function .................................................................................................. 10 - 18

10.2

Advanced Alarm Common ........................................................................................................... 10 - 23

10.3

Advanced User Alarm Display ..................................................................................................... 10 - 24

10.3.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................... 10 - 25
10.3.2 Setting advanced user alarm observation ........................................................................ 10 - 42
10.3.3 Setting advanced user alarm display................................................................................ 10 - 54
10.3.4 Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 10 - 72
10.3.5 Useful operations and functions ....................................................................................... 10 - 73
10.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 94

10.4

Advanced System Alarm Display............................................................................................... 10 - 102

10.4.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................. 10 - 103
10.4.2 Advanced system alarm observation settings ................................................................ 10 - 119
10.4.3 Advanced system alarm display setting.......................................................................... 10 - 123
10.4.4 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 140
10.4.5 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 141
10.4.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 149

10.5

Alarm History Display ................................................................................................................ 10 - 155

10.5.1 Alarm history settings ..................................................................................................... 10 - 157
10.5.2 Alarm history display setting ........................................................................................... 10 - 169
10.5.3 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 175
10.5.4 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 176
10.5.5 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 182
10.5.6 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 185

10.6

User Alarm Display .................................................................................................................... 10 - 187

10.6.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 188
10.6.2 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 195
10.6.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 196
10.6.4 Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 203
10.6.5 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 206

10.7

System Alarm Display................................................................................................................ 10 - 208

10.7.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 209
10.7.2 Relevant Settings............................................................................................................ 10 - 211
10.7.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 212
10.7.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 213

10.8

Advanced Alarm Popup Display ................................................................................................ 10 - 214

10.8.1 Before setting.................................................................................................................. 10 - 215
10.8.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 219
10.8.3 Relevant Settingss.......................................................................................................... 10 - 230

A-6

10.8.4
10.8.5
10.9

Useful operations and functions ..................................................................................... 10 - 231

Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 241

Scrolling Alarm Display.............................................................................................................. 10 - 247

10.9.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 248
10.9.2 Relevant Settings ........................................................................................................... 10 - 252
10.9.3 Actions ............................................................................................................................ 10 - 253
10.9.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 255

GRAPH, METER
11. LEVEL
11.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 2

11.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 11 - 11

11.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 11 - 11

11.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 11 - 13

12. PANELMETER
12.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 2

12.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 12 - 11

12.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 12 - 12

13. LINE GRAPH

13.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 2

13.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 13 - 13

13.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 13 - 13

13.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 13 - 14

14. TREND GRAPH

14.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 2

14.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 14 - 12

14.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 - 12

14.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 14 - 14

15. BAR GRAPH

15.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 1

15.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 15 - 11

15.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 15 - 11

15.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 15 - 12

16. STATISTICS BAR GRAPH

16.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 1

16.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

16.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 16 - 10

16.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 16 - 11

A-7

17. STATISTICS PIE GRAPH

17.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 1

17.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 17 - 10

17.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 17 - 10

17.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 17 - 11

18. SCATTER GRAPH

18.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 2

18.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 18 - 13

18.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 18 - 13

18.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 17

19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

19.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 2

19.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 19 - 15

19.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 19 - 15

19.4

Useful operations/functions ......................................................................................................... 19 - 17

19.5

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 19 - 21

PARTS
20. PARTS DISPLAY
20.1

Bit Parts Settigs ............................................................................................................................. 20 - 3

20.2

Word Parts Settings ..................................................................................................................... 20 - 10

20.3

Fixed Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 20 - 19

20.4

Parts Settings .............................................................................................................................. 20 - 24

20.5

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 20 - 25

20.6

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 20 - 26

20.7

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 20 - 31

21. PARTS MOVEMENT

21.1

Bit Parts Settings ........................................................................................................................... 21 - 3

21.2

Word Parts Settings ..................................................................................................................... 21 - 10

21.3

Fixed Parts Settings..................................................................................................................... 21 - 20

21.4

Setting of Parts Move Route (Common Setting for Each Screen) ............................................... 21 - 26

21.5

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 21 - 28

21.6

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 21 - 29

21.7

Precautions .................................................................................................................................. 21 - 36

A-8

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2

DATA COLLECTION
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION
22.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 22 - 3

22.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 22 - 6
22.2.1 Saving and managing recorded data.................................................................................. 22 - 6
22.2.2 Display and process ........................................................................................................... 22 - 7
22.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file ................................................................................... 22 - 15

22.3

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 22 - 16

23. LOGGING FUNCTION

23.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 1
23.1.1 Control of logging settings .................................................................................................. 23 - 9

23.2

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 23 - 10

23.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 23 - 11
23.3.1 File save mode ................................................................................................................. 23 - 13
23.3.2 Buffer historical mode ....................................................................................................... 23 - 16
23.3.3 Display and process ......................................................................................................... 23 - 18
23.3.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file ................................................................................ 23 - 21

23.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 23 - 23

RECIPE
24. RECIPE
24.1

Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function ........................................ 24 - 5

24.2

Recipe Function........................................................................................................................... 24 - 11
24.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 24 - 11
24.2.2 Relevant settings .............................................................................................................. 24 - 17
24.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 24 - 18

24.3

Advanced Recipe Function.......................................................................................................... 24 - 19

24.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 24 - 19
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting ................................................................................... 24 - 25
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value.................................................................................... 24 - 28
24.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file............................................................. 24 - 31
24.3.5 Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error................................ 24 - 41
24.3.6 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 24 - 43

TRIGGER ACTION
25. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION
25.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 25 - 2
25.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting ................................................................................ 25 - 7

25.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 25 - 9

25.3

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 25 - 10

25.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 25 - 12

A-9

26. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

26.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 26 - 2

26.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 26 - 6

26.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 26 - 7

27. TIME ACTION FUNCTION

27.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 27 - 2

27.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 27 - 5

27.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 27 - 7

SCRIPT FUNCTION
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION
28.1

Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 28 - 1
28.1.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 28 - 1
28.1.2 Precautions for use............................................................................................................. 28 - 5

28.2

Project Script, Screen Script ........................................................................................................ 28 - 10

28.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 28 - 10
28.2.2 Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 28 - 22
28.2.3 Actions and settings.......................................................................................................... 28 - 23
28.2.4 Control structure ............................................................................................................... 28 - 26
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 28 - 33
28.2.6 Program examples............................................................................................................ 28 - 50
28.2.7 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 28 - 55
28.2.8 Precautions for using bmov .............................................................................................. 28 - 59

28.3

Object Script ................................................................................................................................ 28 - 62

28.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 28 - 63
28.3.2 Settings and procedure for execution ............................................................................... 28 - 73
28.3.3 Actions and settings.......................................................................................................... 28 - 74
28.3.4 Control structure ............................................................................................................... 28 - 76
28.3.5 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 28 - 89
28.3.6 Program examples............................................................................................................ 28 - 90
28.3.7 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 28 - 95

28.4

Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................... 28 - 98
28.4.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger ............................................ 28 - 98
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check ........................................................................ 28 - 102
28.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................. 28 - 104
28.4.4 Troubleshooting for object script..................................................................................... 28 - 113

PERIPHERALS
29. BARCODE FUNCTION
29.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 29 - 2

29.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 29 - 3

29.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 29 - 4

29.4

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 29 - 7

A - 10

30. RFID FUNCTION

30.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 30 - 2

30.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 30 - 4

30.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 30 - 5

30.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 30 - 16

31. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATION FUNCTION

31.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 31 - 2

31.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 31 - 4

31.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 31 - 4

31.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 31 - 6

32. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

32.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 32 - 2

32.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 32 - 5

32.3

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 32 - 14

33. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

33.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 33 - 3

33.2

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 33 - 8

33.3

Multimedia Interaction Tool.......................................................................................................... 33 - 19

33.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 33 - 30

34. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

34.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 34 - 2

34.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 34 - 6

34.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 34 - 6

34.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 34 - 8

35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION

35.1

Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 35 - 2

35.2

Relevant settings ........................................................................................................................... 35 - 3

35.3

Actions ........................................................................................................................................... 35 - 4

35.4

Precautions.................................................................................................................................... 35 - 7

36. REPORT FUNCTION

36.1

Report screen creation (screen property) ...................................................................................... 36 - 2

36.2

Setting common to each report (report setting) ............................................................................. 36 - 6

36.3

Print layout setting ......................................................................................................................... 36 - 8

36.4

Relevant Settings......................................................................................................................... 36 - 16

36.5

Actions ......................................................................................................................................... 36 - 17

36.6

Precautions.................................................................................................................................. 36 - 19

37. HARD COPY FUNCTION

A - 11

37.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 37 - 2

37.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 37 - 5

37.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 37 - 5

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

38.1

Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 38 - 1

38.2

Relevant Settings........................................................................................................................... 38 - 2

38.3

Precautions .................................................................................................................................... 38 - 2

APPENDICES
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File .............................................................................App - 1
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board................................................................................App - 2
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT .................................................App - 3

REVISIONS

A - 12

MANUALS

The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.

Refer to each manual for any purpose.
Packaging

Manual Number
(Model code)

GT Works3 Version1 Installation Instructions

Enclosed in product

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080866ENG
(1D7MB9)

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions) 1/2, 2/2

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080867ENG
(1D7MC1)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080868ENG
(1D7MC2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 1)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080869ENG
(1D7MC3)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi Products 2)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080870ENG
(1D7MC4)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080871ENG
(1D7MC5)

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080858ENG
(1D7MA7)

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080859ENG
(1D7MA8)

GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080860ENG
(1D7MA9)

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080861ENG
(1D7MB1)

GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080862ENG
(1D7MB2)

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080863ENG
(1D7MB3)

GT16 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080778ENG
(1D7M88)

GT15 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080528ENG
(1D7M23)

GT12 Supplementary Description

Stored in CD-ROM

SH-080864ENG
(1D7MB7)

GT11 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D17501
(09R815)

Handy GOT User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D20101
(09R817)

GT10 User's Manual

Stored in CD-ROM

JY997D24701
(09R819)

Manual Name

A - 13

 Creating a project
Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3
Setting available functions on GT Designer3
Creating a screen displayed on the GOT

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals)

Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing

Setting details for figures and objects
Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)

1/2, 2/2

Setting functions to use peripheral devices

Simulating a created project on a personal computer

GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual

Connecting a controller to the GOT

Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT
Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products)

Connecting multiple controllers (Multi-channel function) to one GOT

Obtaining information of Non-Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Products 1)

Connecting Non-Mitsubishi products to the GOT

Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT

Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non-Mitsubishi

Products 2)

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Microcomputer,

MODBUS Products, Peripherals)

Transferring data to the GOT

Writing data to the GOT
Reading data from the GOT
Verifying a editing project to a GOT project

A - 14

GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual

(Fundamentals)

 Others
Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and
options) of each GOT
Installing the GOT
Operating the utility

GT16 User's Manual

GT15 User's Manual
GT11 User's Manual
Handy GOT User's Manual
GT10 User's Manual

Configuring the gateway function

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

Configuring the MES interface function

GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual

Configuring the extended function and option function

Using a personal computer as the GOT

GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option

Functions)
GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual

A - 15

ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS

GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms
GT1695M-X

Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M-XTBD

GT1685

GT1685M-S

Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M-STBD

GT1675M-S

Abbreviation of GT1675M-STBA, GT1675M-STBD

GT1675M-V

Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M-VTBD

GT1665M-S

Abbreviation of GT1665M-STBA, GT1665M-STBD

GT1665M-V

Abbreviation of GT1665M-VTBA, GT1665M-VTBD

GT1595-X

Abbreviation of GT1595-XTBA, GT1595-XTBD

GT1585V-S

Abbreviation of GT1585V-STBA, GT1585V-STBD

GT1585-S

Abbreviation of GT1585-STBA, GT1585-STBD

GT1575V-S

Abbreviation of GT1575V-STBA, GT1575V-STBD

GT1575-S

Abbreviation of GT1575-STBA, GT1575-STBD

GT1575-V

Abbreviation of GT1575-VTBA, GT1575-VTBD

GT1575-VN

Abbreviation of GT1575-VNBA, GT1575-VNBD

GT1572-VN

Abbreviation of GT1572-VNBA, GT1572-VNBD

GT1675

GT1665
GT16
GT1595
GT1585

GT157

GT156

GOT1000
Series

Description

GT1695

GT155

Abbreviation of GT1695,GT1685, GT1675, GT1665

GT1565-V

Abbreviation of GT1565-VTBA, GT1565-VTBD

GT1562-VN

Abbreviation of GT1562-VNBA, GT1562-VNBD

GT1555-V

Abbreviation of GT1555-VTBD

GT1555-Q

Abbreviation of GT1555-QTBD, GT1555-QSBD

GT1550-Q

Abbreviation of GT1550-QLBD

GT15

GT115

Handy GOT

Abbreviation of GT1595, GT1585, GT157 , GT156 , GT155

GT1155-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA, GT1155-QSBDA,

GT1155-QTBD, GT1155-QSBD

GT1150-Q

Abbreviation of GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA, GT1150-QLBD

GT1155HS-Q

Abbreviation of GT1155HS-QSBD

GT1150HS-Q

GT11
GT105

GT104

Abbreviation of GT1150HS-QLBD
Abbreviation of GT115 , GT11 Handy GOT,

GT1055-Q

Abbreviation of GT1055-QSBD

GT1050-Q

Abbreviation of GT1050-QBBD

GT1045-Q

Abbreviation of GT1045-QSBD

GT1040-Q

Abbreviation of GT1040-QBBD

GT1030

Abbreviation of GT1030-LBD, GT1030-LBD2, GT1030-LBL, GT1030-LBDW, GT1030-LBDW2,

GT1030-LBLW, GT1030-LWD, GT1030-LWD2, GT1030-LWL, GT1030-LWDW, GT1030-LWDW2,
GT1030-LWLW

GT1020

Abbreviation of GT1020-LBD, GT1020-LBD2, GT1020-LBL, GT1020-LBDW, GT1020-LBDW2,

GT1020-LBLW, GT1020-LWD, GT1020LWD2, GT1020-LWL, GT1020-LWDW, GT1020-LWDW2,
GT1020-LWLW

GT10

Abbreviation of GT105 , GT104 , GT1030, GT1020

GT SoftGOT1000

Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000

GOT900 Series

Abbreviation of GOT-A900 series, GOT-F900 series

GOT800 Series

Abbreviation of GOT-800 series

A - 16

 Communication unit
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description
GT15-QBUS, GT15-QBUS2, GT15-ABUS, GT15-ABUS2, GT15-75QBUSL, GT15-75QBUS2L,
GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-75ABUS2L

Bus connection unit

Serial communication unit

GT15-RS2-9P, GT15-RS4-9S, GT15-RS4-TE

RS-422 conversion unit

GT15-RS2T4-9P, GT15-RS2T4-25P

Ethernet communication unit

GT15-J71E71-100

MELSECNET/H communication unit

GT15-J71LP23-25, GT15-J71BR13

MELSECNET/10 communication unit

GT15-75J71LP23-Z*1, GT15-75J71BR13-Z*2

CC-Link IE controller network communication

unit

GT15-J71GP23-SX

CC-Link communication unit

GT15-J61BT13, GT15-75J61BT13-Z*3

Interface converter unit

GT15-75IF900

Serial multi-drop connection unit

GT01-RS4-M

Connection Conversion Adapter

GT10-9PT5S

*1
*2
*3

A9GT-QJ71LP23 + GT15-75IF900 set

A9GT-QJ71BR13 + GT15-75IF900 set
A8GT-J61BT13 + GT15-75IF900 set

Option unit
Abbreviations and generic terms
Printer unit

Video/RGB unit

Description
GT15-PRN

Video input unit

GT16M-V4, GT15V-75V4

RGB input unit

GT16M-R2, GT15V-75R1

Video/RGB input unit

GT16M-V4R1, GT15V-75V4R1

RGB output unit

GT16M-ROUT, GT15V-75ROUT

Multimedia unit

GT16M-MMR

CF card unit

GT15-CFCD

CF card extension unit*1

GT15-CFEX-C08SET

External I/O unit

GT15-DIO, GT15-DIOR

Sound output unit

GT15-SOUT

Fingerprint unit

GT15-80FPA
*1

GT15-CFEX + GT15-CFEXIF + GT15-C08CF set.

A - 17

 Option
Abbreviations and generic terms
CF card

Description
GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05-MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC,
GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM-512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC

Memory card adaptor

GT05-MEM-ADPC

Option function board

GT16-MESB, GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M,

GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT11-50FNB, GT15-MESB48M

Battery

GT15-BAT, GT11-50BAT

For GT16

GT16-90PSCB, GT16-90PSGB, GT16-90PSCW, GT16-90PSGW,

GT16-80PSCB, GT16-80PSGB, GT16-80PSCW, GT16-80PSGW,
GT16-70PSCB, GT16-70PSGB, GT16-70PSCW, GT16-70PSGW,
GT16-60PSCB, GT16-60PSGB, GT16-60PSCW, GT16-60PSGW

For GT15

GT15-90PSCB, GT15-90PSGB, GT15-90PSCW, GT15-90PSGW,

GT15-80PSCB, GT15-80PSGB, GT15-80PSCW, GT15-80PSGW,
GT15-70PSCB, GT15-70PSGB, GT15-70PSCW, GT15-70PSGW,
GT15-60PSCB, GT15-60PSGB, GT15-60PSCW, GT15-60PSGW,
GT15-50PSCB, GT15-50PSGB, GT15-50PSCW, GT15-50PSGW

For GT11

GT11-50PSCB, GT11-50PSGB, GT11-50PSCW, GT11-50PSGW,

GT11H-50PSC

For GT10

GT10-50PSCB, GT10-50PSGB, GT10-50PSCW, GT10-50PSGW,

GT10-40PSCB, GT10-40PSGB, GT10-40PSCW, GT10-40PSGW,
GT10-30PSCB, GT10-30PSGB, GT10-30PSCW, GT10-30PSGW,
GT10-20PSCB, GT10-20PSGB, GT10-20PSCW, GT10-20PSGW

Protective Sheet

Protective cover for oil

GT05-90PCO, GT05-80PCO, GT05-70PCO, GT05-60PCO, GT05-50PCO

USB environmental protection cover

GT16-UCOV, GT15-UCOV, GT11-50UCOV

Stand

GT15-90STAND, GT15-80STAND, GT15-70STAND, A9GT-50STAND, GT05-50STAND

Attachment

GT15-70ATT-98, GT15-70ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-97, GT15-60ATT-96,

GT15-60ATT-87, GT15-60ATT-77, GT15-50ATT-95W, GT15-50ATT-85

Backlight

GT16-90XLTT, GT16-80SLTT, GT15-90XLTT, GT15-80SLTT,

GT16-70SLTT, GT16-70VLTT, GT16-60SLTT, GT16-60VLTT,
GT15-70SLTT, GT15-70VLTT, GT15-70VLTN, GT15-60VLTT, GT15-60VLTN

Multi-color display board

GT15-XHNB, GT15-VHNB

Connector conversion box

GT11H-CNB-37S

Emergency stop sw guard cover

GT11H-50ESCOV

Memory loader

GT10-LDR

Memory board

GT10-50FMB

Software
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

GT Works3

Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA

GT Designer3

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series

GT Simulator3

Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT SoftGOT1000

Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000

GT Converter2

Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GT Designer2 Classic

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series

GT Designer2

Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series

GX Works2

Abbreviation of SW DNC-GXW2-E and SW DNC-GXW2-EA type programmable controller

engineering software

GX Simulator2

Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function

GX Simulator

Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT-E(-EV) type ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT (-EV) or later versions)

GX Developer

Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW-E(-EV)/SW D5F-GPPW-E type software package

PX Developer

Abbreviation of SW D5C-FBDQ-E type FBD software package for process control

MT Works2

Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 (SW DNC-MTW2E)

MT Developer

Abbreviation of SW RNC-GSV type integrated start-up support software for motion controller Q series

A - 18

Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

MR Configurator

Abbreviation of MRZJW -SETUP E type Servo Configuration Software

FR Configurator

Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software (FR-SW -SETUP-WE)

FX Configurator-FP

Abbreviation of parameter setting, monitoring, and testing software packages for FX3U-20SSC-H
(SW D5C-FXSSC-E)

FX3U-ENET-L Configuration tool

Abbreviation of FX3U-ENET-L type Ethernet module setting software (SW1D5-FXENETL-E)

RT ToolBox2

Abbreviation of robot program creation software (3D-11C-WINE)

License key (for GT SoftGOT1000)

Abbreviations and generic terms
License

Description
GT15-SGTKEY-U, GT15-SGTKEY-P

Others
Abbreviations and generic terms

Description

OMRON

Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation

KEYENCE

Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION

KOYO EI

Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

SHARP

Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation

JTEKT

Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation

SHINKO

Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co., Ltd.

CHINO

Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION

TOSHIBA

Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION

TOSHIBA MACHINE

Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO., LTD.

HITACHI IES

Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

HITACHI

Abbreviation of Hitachi, Ltd.

FUJI FA

Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems Co., Ltd.

PANASONIC

Abbreviation of Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd.

FUJI SYS

Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd.

YASKAWA

Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation

YAMATAKE

Abbreviation of Yamatake Corporation

YOKOGAWA

Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation

ALLEN-BRADLEY

Abbreviation of products manufactured by Rockwell Automation, Inc.

GE FANUC

Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation

LS IS

Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.

SCHNEIDER

Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA

SIEMENS

Abbreviation of Siemens AG

RKC

Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

PLC

Abbreviation of programmable controller

Temperature controller

Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation

Indicating controller

Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation

CHINO controller

Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION

PC CPU module

Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO., LTD

GOT (server)

Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function

GOT (client)

Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function

Windows font

Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows

(Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3)

Intelligent function module

Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU, power supply module and I/O module that are mounted
to the base unit.

MODBUS/RTU

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial
communication.

MODBUS/TCP

Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP/IP network.

A - 19

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

The following symbols are used in this manual.

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT11,
GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are
applicable or not.

: Applicable

: Not applicable

[ ] : Shows the setting item displayed on

the software screen or the GOT
screen.

POINT

Refers to information
required for operation.

HINT

Refers to information useful

for operation.

Shows a chapter, section, relevant manual, or

others of relevant information.
(Fundamentals): GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual
(Fundamentals)
(Functions): GT Designer3 Version1
Screen Design Manual
(Functions)
Shows the operation steps.
Operate the steps from the step 1.

Shows whether the GT16, GT15, GT11,

GT10, and GT SoftGOT1000 are
applicable or not.
Black: Applicable
Gray: Not applicable

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.

A - 20

DATA COLLECTION

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Operations performed on the GOT can be saved to a CF card as the operation history.
If a trouble occurs at the production site, the operation history can be used to locate the cause of the trouble.
The saved history can be confirmed by the operation indicated below.
22.2.2 Display and process

24

PRODUCTION LINE
LINE A 558
LINE B 197

RECIPE

Displaying the operation history using the GOT utility

Saving the operation history in a CSV file or Unicode text file and displaying it on a personal computer

Switching the screen to Base screen 10

25
Screen

Details

10:40

---

Switching
the screen

Before
switching
---

After
switching
Base
screen 10

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Date

Change Target
LINE A 600

PRODUCTION LINE
LINE A 563
LINE B 199

27

Date

Screen

Details

10:40

---

Switching
the screen

10:45

Base
Entering
screen 10 numeric value

Change Target
LINE A 700
LINE B 300

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Set the changed value

Before
switching
--600

After
switching
Base
screen 10

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

LINE B 300

26

700

28

Switching the screen to Base screen 20

Date

Screen

Details

10:40

---

Switching
the screen

10:45

Base
Entering
screen 10 numeric value

600

700

10:50

---

---

Base
screen 20

Switching
the screen

Before
switching
---

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Change Target
LINE A 700

Changing the value by entering numerical value

After
switching
Base
screen 10

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

LINE B 300

22 - 1

 Items that can be recorded by the operation log function

The operation log function can record the items indicated below.
Item
GOT startup

Application switching

Recording timing
Operation log is recorded at the timing when the GOT is started up. (The log of GOT startup is always recorded.)
Operation log is not recorded for the restart of GOT by reset operation.
Operation log is recorded when the screen is switched to any of the following.
Monitor screen (project data)
Utility
Logging information, advanced recipe information and operation log information of the utility
Monitor functions such as system monitor and ladder monitor, Backup/restore
Operation log is recorded when an OS is installed or the project data is downloaded.

Clock data changing

Operation log is recorded when [Adjust] is executed on the GOT.

Operation log is recorded when the clock of the GOT is set by the utility.

System language switching

Operation log is recorded when the language used for displaying the system message is switched by the utility.

Operator authentication

Operation log is recorded when logging in or logging out of the GOT.

Password Authentication

Operation log is recorded when the security level is changed with the security level authentication selected.
(Changing the password and/or security level device)

Screen switching

Operation log is recorded when the base screen is switched or a window screen is displayed.

Station No. switching

Operation log is recorded when the station No. is switched.

Language switching

Operation log is recorded when the language (language switching device) is switched.
Touch
switch

Operation log is recorded at the timing when a touch switch is touched.

(Operation log is not recorded for the key code switch and key window display switch.)
When auto repeat setting is made, operation log is recorded immediately before and after
completion of operation.
Operation log is recorded at the timing when a numerical input is executed.

Numerical
input

Operation log is recorded at the timing when the write check device turns ON.

Object

22 - 2

Operation log is recorded at the timing when a value is written to a write device.

ASCII input

Operation log is recorded at the timing when an ASCII input is executed.

Alarm
history

Operation log is recorded when an alarm or all alarms are deleted.

Advanced
alarm
display

Operation log is recorded when an alarm or all alarms are deleted.

Operation log is recorded when an alarm is reset.

Operation log is recorded when an alarm is reset.

Operation panel

Operation log is recorded at the timing when an operation panel key is touched.
(Operation log is not recorded for the key code switch and key window display switch.)
When the auto repeat is set, operation log is recorded immediately before the operation and after the completion
of the operation.

Object script

Operation log is recorded when an object script operates.

Log discard information

If an operation log could not be recorded due to some reason (such as an access failure to a CF card or
insufficient free space), this operation log is recorded when the recording of the operation log is enabled.

1.
2.

Select [Common]
[GOT Environmental Setting]
Setting] dialog box.

[Operation Log] from the menu to display the [Environmental

Select [Collect operation logs] and set the following items.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

22.1 Settings

23

Operation log
(1) Basic tab

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Set items such as save location, collection start time, or saving period.

RECIPE

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Item

Description

Model

26

Select the save destination drive name.

Folder Name
Save to

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Set the name of the folder where a file is saved.

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT
The default folder name is set at [Project Folder] of the [GOT Type Setting]dialog box
displayed by selecting [Common] from the menu.

27

Set the name of a file to be saved.

File Name

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

Default file name is OPELOG.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Date and sub-number are automatically appended to a file name.

Select the switching mode for the save destination file of an operation log.
When selecting [Weekly], select [Day] to specify the day of the week to start the collection.
After selecting, set the following.
Switching Time
Log File Save
Period*1
Specify the total log
file size*1

Set the collection start time for the operation log.

28

Set the operation log file keeping period.

When selecting [Daily], set the number of days (7 to 100).
When selecting [Weekly], set the number of weeks (4 to 53).
Files having been stored exceeding the keeping period are deleted.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Log File Switching

Mode

Set the total size of the operation log files to be stored in a CF card (10 to 256).
If the size of operation log files stored in a CF card exceeds the set value, the oldest operation log file is deleted.
Select the processing to be taken when the size of free space in a CF card is insufficient.
Delete an existing
Log and continue to
collect*1
Stop to collect

Notify the operation

log status*2

29

Continuously collects the operation log by deleting the oldest log file.

Ends collection of the operation log.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Behavior when
memory card runs
out of space

Set the device to notify the operation log collecting status.

22.1 Settings

22 - 3

*1 When operating with the utility (file copy, file rename, file move), log files are not automatically deleted.
22.2.2 Display and process
*2 This function notifies the specified device of the status of the operation log function in bit units.
Bit number
b0
b1 to b7

Description
Turns ON if operation logs cannot be collected.
This automatically turns OFF when collecting of operation logs is enabled.
Must not be used.

b8

Turns ON when operation log file is being converted from binary file to CSV/Unicode text file.
Turns OFF automatically when the conversion terminates.

b9

Turns ON when operation log file is being converted with Log File Auto Convert.
Turns OFF automatically when the conversion terminates.

b10 to b15

Must not be used.

(2) Log Target tab

The target items for recording the operation log are selected.

Item

Description

Function list

Displays the list of functions for which operation logs are recorded.

Operation Log Target list

Displays the target items of the operation log.

Specifies the target items for the operation log to be recorded.
Select an item from [Function list]. Click this button to move the selected item to [Operation Log
Target list].
Cancels the items selected for the operation log to be recorded.
Select an item from [Operation Log Target list]. Click this button to move the selected item to
[Function list].
Click this button to move all items in [Function list] to [Operation Log Target list].
Click this button to move all items in [Operation Log Target list] to [Function list].

Description

22 - 4

Displays the explanation for the selected item.

22.1 Settings

Model

POINT
When recording the operation log for objects
Select [Object] in function list to record the operation logs of all objects used for one project.
To record only the specific operation logs, select [Operation Log Target] in each object setting (without selecting
[Object]).
For objects whose operation logs can be recorded, refer to the following.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

(3) File Convert tab

Make setting to control operation log file conversion with a device.

RECIPE

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Item
Convert a log file
into Unicode Text/
CSV

Description

Model

Select this item to convert an operation log file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Specify File
Convert Trigger

Set the trigger device for file conversion.

27

File 1

File 2

Operation log file (G1O)

Converted
automatically
Unicode text file/CSV file

28
Converted automatically to Unicode
text file/CSV file at the timing when
new operation log file is created.

Conversion Format

Select the file format after conversion ([Unicode text] or [CSV]).

Save To

Select the location where the converted file is saved.

When selecting [Change], set [Drive Name] and [Folder Name] of which the file is stored.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Automatically
convert log files

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Select this item to automatically convert a binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file
when the operation log file recording ends (at the timing when the next operation log file is
created).
File Conversion
Timing

29

Set system language used for file conversion.

System
Language
Switching
Interlock

Select this item to convert a file in system language displayed on the GOT.

Fixed

Select this item to convert a file in specified language.

After the selection, specify the language.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

File Conversion
Language

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

22.1 Settings

22 - 5

22.2 Actions
22.2.1

Saving and managing recorded data

Saving the operation log

The data recorded by the operation log function is created in drive A (standard CF card) or drive B (extended memory
card) as a binary file (*.G1O).
One log file has the capacity to record up to 65500 operations.
If the number of operations exceeds 65500 times, a new operation log file is created. (File names of operation log
files include sub-numbers.)
PRODUCTION LINE
LINE A 558

Change Target
LINE A 700

LINE B 197

OPELOG_20060318_0000.G1O

LINE B 197

OPELOG_20060318_0000.G1O
65500 operations

65500 operations

OPELOG_20060318_0001.G1O
1 operation

Management of operation log files

(1) File saving intervals
Operation log files can be saved in daily or weekly.
The saved operation log file can be deleted automatically after storing it for a specified period.
(a) Setting for daily saving
A file is created daily.

OPELOG_
20090406_
0000.G10

OPELOG_
20090407_
0001.G10

OPELOG_
20060408_
0002.G10

OPELOG_
20090412_
0007.G10

2009/4/6 (Mon.)

2009/4/7 (Tue.)

2009/4/8 (Wed.)

2009/4/12 (Sun.)

(b) Setting for weekly saving

A file is created weekly.

OPELOG_
20090406_
0000.G10

OPELOG_
20090413_
0001.G10

OPELOG_
20090420_
0002.G10

OPELOG_
20090511_
0006.G10

2009/4/6 (Mon.)

2009/4/13 (Mon.)

2009/04/20 (Mon.)

2009/5/11 (Mon.)

(2) Setting the operation log file saving size

The size of area in a CF card to save operation log files (total size of all operation log files) can be set.
If the set size is exceeded, the oldest operation log file is automatically deleted.

HINT
Sub-number in operation log file name
The sub-number in the name of the first created operation log file is "0000". The sub-number increases by one
every time an operation log file is created.
The next sub-number of "9999" is "0000".

22 - 6

22.2 Actions

22

Display and process

This section explains how to display and process the created operation log files on the GOT and personal computer.

Displaying by the utility

Operation log contents can be checked and operation log files can be managed by [Operation log information] of the
utility.
For the operations of the utility, refer to the following manual.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22.2.2

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Users Manual for the GOT used

24

RECIPE

Operation by the utility

By using the utility, the following operations are available for operation log files.
Management of operation log files is possible on the GOT without using a personal computer.

25

Users Manual for the GOT used

Creating folder

Creates a folder where operation log files are stored.

This allows management of operation log files by creating folders by date or period.

Deleting folder

Deletes a folder that stores operation log files.

Copying file

Copies an operation log file.

This operation is used to make a backup file of an operation log file.

Deleting file

Deletes an operation log file.

Renaming file

Renames an operation log file.

Moving file

Moves an operation log file to another folder.

This operation is used to make a backup file of an operation log file.

G1O

Converts a binary file (*.G1O) to a Unicode text file or CSV file.

26

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Searches for an operation log in an operation log file using the log creation date or time as a key.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Search

CSV / Unicode text conversion

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Description

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Item

22.2 Actions

22 - 7

 Saving the log file in Unicode text file/CSV file and displaying it on a personal computer
The created operation log file is saved in a binary file (*.G1O).
This binary file can be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file to be displayed on a personal computer.
22.2.3 Creating Unicode text file/CSV file

Log file

Unicode text file/CSV file

HINT
When displaying operation log files on personal computer available for multilingual input
For displaying operation log files, use the Unicode text file.
With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly displayed.

Display example and details of operation log file

An operation log file, after conversion, is displayed on a personal computer as shown below.
Example: Display in Microsoft Excel

* "-" is displayed if there are no corresponding outputs.

Contents displayed for each item differ depending on the function for which the operation log has been recorded.
The following shows the contents displayed for each item by function.

POINT
Display differences with authentic method
The display details for some items differ depending on the set authentic method.
The following shows the items that the display details differ.
Display details

Item

OPERATOR

OPE_ID

22 - 8

22.2 Actions

Operator authentication

Security level authentication

Displays the operator name when the operation

Displays the level when the operation is

is executed.

executed.

Displays the operator ID when the operation is

Displays the level when the operation is

executed.

executed.

22
Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [Start].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays [Start GOT].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

No data is displayed.

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Item

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(1) GOT startup

(2) Application switching

Description

Item

24

Description

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [AppChng].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays [Switch applications].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the type of screen after change.*1

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

RECIPE

Displays a log No.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Item
NO

*1 Switching to each menu in the utility is recorded as an operation on the utility.

(3) Clock data changing

Description

Item

Description
No data is

NO

Dispalys a log No.

OPE_ID

DATE

Dispalys the date on which the operation log was

collected. (date before changing the clock data).

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the time after change.

PREV_VALUE

Displays the time before change.

Displays [GetTime] or [SetTime].*1

Displays [ChngTime].*2
Displays [Adjust (External device)] or [Adjust (GS)].*1

ACTION

Displays [Change clock].*2

OPNAME
OPERATOR

No data is displayed.
No data is displayed.*1
Displays the operator name or level.*2

*2

Displays the operator ID or level.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

ACT_ABBR

26

displayed.*1

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Item

*1 When the clock of the GOT was adjusted.

*2 When the clock of the GOT was changed by the utility.

28

NO

Dispalys a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the operator ID or level.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

(4) System language switching

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

29

ACT_ABBR

Displays [SysLang].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays [Switch system languages].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the language after switching.

OPERATOR

Displays the operator name or level.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

Description

Item

Description

22.2 Actions

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Item

22 - 9

(5) Security setting (Operator authentication)

Item
NO

Description

Item

Displays a log No.

Displays the date on which the operation log was

DATE

collected.

Description

OPE_ID

Displays the operator ID.*1

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [Login]/[LoginNG]/[Logout]/[ALogout].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays [Login]/[Login failed]/[Logout]/[Automatic logout].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

No data is displayed.

OPERATOR

Displays the operator name.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

*1 Applicable only with login, login failed, and logout.

(6) Security setting (Security level authentication)

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.*1

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

*1

*2.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [ScrtPwd]

ACTION

Displays [Change security levels (password)] or [Change

levels (device)].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the level after change.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

OPERATOR

or [ScrtLv]

Displays the level at which the operation was

executed.*1

*1 Only when the security level was changed using the password of the utility.
*2 Only when the level device was changed.

(7) Screen switching

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the screen switching type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays the screen switching type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

Displays the screen title.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the screen No. after switching.

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

(8) Station No. switching

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the station No. switching type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays the station No. switching type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays "ST_" + "Station No. after switching" (network

No. and PLC station No.).

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

22 - 10

22.2 Actions

22
Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [DispLang].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

23

Displays [Switch languages].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the column No. after switching.

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

ACTION

(10) Touch switch

24

(a) Bit set, bit reset, bit alternate, bit momentary, word set
Description

Item

Description

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Dispalys the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen number on which the object is set.

(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.)

ACT_NO

Dispalys the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

Dispalys the data type.

ACTION

Displays the action type.

DEV_NAME

Dispalys the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Dispalys the value written to the device.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

26

(b) Application swtiching

Item

Description

Item

Description

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Dispalys the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Dispalys the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen number on which the object is set.

(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.)

ACT_NO

Dispalys the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Dispalys the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Dispalys the action type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

Dispalys the object name.

CHG_VALUE

No data is displayed.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

28

Screen switching

Item

Description

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

NO

(c)

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

NO

RECIPE

Item

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Description

Item

Description

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Dispalys the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen number on which the object is set.

(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.)

ACT_NO

Displays the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Dispalys the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Dispalys the action type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

Dispalys the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the screen No. after switching.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

22.2 Actions

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

NO

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Item

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(9) Language switching

22 - 11

(d) Station No. switching

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen number on which the object is set.

(For operation panel keys, [PNL_1] is displayed.

ACT_NO

Displays the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays the action type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the "Station switching type (abbreviation in

alphanumeric)" + "Station No. after switching (Network
No. and PLC station No.)".

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

(e) Start/end auto repeat

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Dispalys the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [TSW_REPB]*1 or [TSW_REPE]*2.

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

Displays [Touch switch: Start auto repeat]*1 or [Touch

ACTION

switch: End auto repeat]*2.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the number of auto repeats.*2

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

*1 Displayed when auto repeat starts.

*2 Displayed when auto repeat ends.

(11) Numerical input

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

Displays the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [NUM_VAL].

DATA_TYPE

Displays the data type.

ACTION

Displays [Numerical Input].

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the value after change.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

Displays the value before change.

(a) Write device

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

Displays the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [NUM_WDEV].

DATA_TYPE

Displays the data type.

ACTION

Displays [Numerical Input (Write device)].

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the value written to the device.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

22 - 12

22.2 Actions

Description

Item

Description

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

Displays the execution order number if multiple actions

are set.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [NUM_WCHK].

DATA_TYPE

Displays the data type.

ACTION

Displays [Numerical Input (Write check)].

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the value written to the device.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

24

(12) ASCII input

Description

Item

Description

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

RECIPE

NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [ASC_VAL].

DATA_TYPE

Displays whether the input data is ASCII or SJIS.

ACTION

Displays [Ascii Input].

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the character string after change.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

Displays the character string before change.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

SCRN_NO

(13) Alarm history and advanced alarm display (user alarm / system alarm)
(a) In delete or all delete operation
Item

Description

26
Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

Displays the action type.

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

No data is displayed.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

ACTION

(b) In reset operation

Item

Description

Item

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Item

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

NO

28

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays the action type in an abbreviation

(alphanumeric).

DATA_TYPE

Displays the data format.*1

ACTION

Displays the action type.

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.*1

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the value written to the device.*1

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Item

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(b) Write complete device

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

*1 Not displayed for an advanced alarm display (system alarm).

22.2 Actions

22 - 13

(14) Object script

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

Displays the level at which the operation was executed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

Displays the user ID.

SCRN_NO

Displays the screen No. on which the object is set.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [ObScr].

DATA_TYPE

Displays the data type.

ACTION

Displays [Object Script].

DEV_NAME

Displays the device name and device No.

OPNAME

Displays the object name.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the value written to the device.

OPERATOR

Dispalys the level at which the operation was executed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

(15) Log discard information

Item

Description

Item

Description

NO

Displays a log No.

OPE_ID

No data is displayed.

DATE

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

USER_ID

No data is displayed.

SCRN_NO

Displays the date on which the operation log was

collected.

ACT_NO

No data is displayed.

ACT_ABBR

Displays [LostLog].

DATA_TYPE

No data is displayed.

ACTION

Displays [LostLog].

DEV_NAME

No data is displayed.

OPNAME

No data is displayed.

CHG_VALUE

Displays the number of operation logs that could not be

recorded.

OPERATOR

No data is displayed.

PREV_VALUE

No data is displayed.

22 - 14

22.2 Actions

 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by GT Designer3

A binary file (*.G1O) saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file by GT Designer3.
The file conversion on GT Designer3 reduces the additional load on the GOT.

1.

Store a binary file (*.G1O) in a personal computer using either of the methods below.
Transferring by GT Designer3

23

Select [Communication]
[Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to the personal computer.
Storing the file in a CF card or USB memory
Save the operation log file in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB memory
using the personal computer.
Select [Tools]
[File Conversion]
[Operation Log File Conversion] from the menu to display the setting dialog
box on GT Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.

24

RECIPE

2.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Creating Unicode text file/CSV file

LOGGING
FUNCTION

22.2.3

25
Displays the type of a conversion source file.

Path

Specify the path of the conversion source file.

Target files with in

the same path

Select this item to target all the files (G1O files only) in the same path for conversion.
When performing a file conversion with this item checked, the conversion log is recorded
for the specified path automatically.
With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result (OK/NG),
and the file creation date can be checked.

Type

Select the type of the conversion destination file (CSV / Unicode Text) and the language
being output to the file.

Path

Displays the path (same as the path of the conversion source file) where the conversion
destination file is saved.

Destination File

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Type

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Model

Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by the utility

A binary file (*.G1O) saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file by the utility.This method
enables the conversion without using GT Designer3.

1.

In [Operation log information] of the utility, select a G1O file and touch the [G1O
convert the file.
For the utility operation method, refer to the following manual.

CSV] or [G1O

TXT] button to

Users Manual for the GOT used

2.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Source of
Conversion

Description

28

Store the converted file (Unicode text file or CSV file) to the personal computer using either of the following
methods.
Transferring by GT Designer3
Select [Communication]
[Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to the personal computer.
Storing the file in a CF card or USB memory
Save the operation log file in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data saved in the CF card or USB memory
using the personal computer.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Item

29

By turning on the specified device, the binary file saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV
file.
22.1 Settings
22.2 Actions

22 - 15

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file with the device

22.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the operation log function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) When recording operation logs in object units
Do not select [Object] in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
When object is selected, the operation log function is enabled for all the objects.
To record operation logs in object units, select [Operation Log Target] in the setting of each object.

(2) When recording operation logs in operation panel key units

Do not select [Object] in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
When object is selected, the operation log function is enabled for all the operation panel keys.
To record operation logs in operation panel key units, select [Operation Log Target] in the settings of each
operation panel key.

(3) When recording operation logs of object script

(a) The following two items must be set.
[Operation Log Target] is selected in the setting of the object to be recorded.
[Object Script] is selected in the [Log Target] tab for the operation log setting.
(b) To record a device value for the operation log of object script, use the device of the controller.
If an internal device of the GOT is used, operation logs are not recorded.
(c)

Operation logs are recorded only when the script execution trigger is set to [Key Code Input],[Input
Fixation],or [Device Writing].
For details of the display trigger and action trigger, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

(4) Functions to be set as the operation log target

Select the functions that are set by GT Designer3 as the targets of operation log.
Even for a function that is not set by GT Designer3, if such a function is selected as the target of operation log,
an operation log may be recorded due to internal action of the GOT.

Precautions for OS
To use the operation log function, install the following OS to the GOT.
Option OS (Operation Log)
Extended function OS (Device name converter)

Precautions for hardware

(1) Option function board
To use the operation log function with GT15, mount the option function board on the GOT.
For GT16, no option function board is required.
For GOTs with built-in option function boards, refer to the following.
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

(2) CF card
Operation log are not recorded in the following cases.
A CF card is not installed in the GOT
When a CF card is installed in the GOT, CF card access switch is turned off.

22 - 16

22.3 Precautions

(a) Operation log of alarm

For alarms, an operation log is recorded only when an operation (delete, delete all, or reset) is made to the
alarm that has occurred.
When an alarm that has been restored is selected or when operation is made without selecting an alarm,
any operation log is not recorded. (Since the attempted operation is an invalid operation, any log is not
recorded.)
Also note that an operation log is not recorded for resetting operation in the upper or middle hierarchy.
(b) Operation log of alarm deletion
Alarm deletion with [History Clear] in the alarm history and [Buffer Clear] in the advanced alarm is not
recorded to an operation log.
To record an operation log of alarm deletion in the alarm history or extended alarm, execute [Clear the
selected alarm data] or [Display date/time of all data] in the key code switch.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) When using the alarm history or advanced alarm (user alarm/system alarm)

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for use

24

If the offset function is set for a numerical input object, the device name of the device that is offset by the value
set in the offset device is recorded in the operation log.
For details of the offset function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

(b) Operation logs are not recorded if a CF card is not installed in the GOT or if the CF card access switch of
the GOT is turned off.
The operation log file size cannot be calculated in advance.
When the CF card is also used for other functions, it is recommended to limit the memory size used for
operation log files by setting [Specify the total log file size] of GT Designer3.

(4) Using the Unicode text file

For the precautions for using Unicode text files, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(a) To save files, a CF card is necessary.

The CF card must have a larger memory capacity than the operation log file size to be saved.
For the file size that can be saved in a CF card, refer to the following.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

(3) Saving files

(c)

RECIPE

(2) When using numerical input

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

22.3 Precautions

22 - 17

22 - 18

22.3 Precautions

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

23. LOGGING FUNCTION

The logging function collects and stores device values of a controller at an arbitrary timing or in specified intervals.
The collected data can be displayed in either of the methods shown below.
Displaying the collected data using the historical trend graph
19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

24

LINE 2
100
98
95
92

LINE 3
250
260
270
280

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

LINE 1
150
152
158
170

RECIPE

Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving in a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Logging data
DAY / TIME
2009/10/01 10:30:00
2009/10/01 10:30:10
2009/10/01 10:30:20
2009/10/01 10:30:30

23.1 Settings
Select [Common]

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

26

[Logging] from the menu to display the [Logging List] dialog box.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Display the list of logging settings and control the logging settings.
Up to 32 logging settings can be configured.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

Item

Description

Model

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Set a new logging.

Click this button to display the [Logging] dialog box.
Change the contents of the selected logging setting.
Click this button to display the [Logging] dialog box.
Copies the selected logging setting.
Click this button to set the [Destination No.] of the copied logging settings after clicking.
Pastes the logging setting in the logging setting list as the set logging ID.

29

Deletes the selected logging setting.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Deletes all logging settings.

Closes the [Logging List] dialog box.

23.1 Settings

23 - 1

 Logging setting
(1) Basic tab
Logging mode, logging trigger and buffering area are set.

Item

Description
Set the logging ID of the logging to be set (1 to 32767).

Logging ID

23.1.1 Control of logging settings

Logging Name

Set the name of logging. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

The set logging name is displayed in a Unicode text file, CSV file, or others.
Select the logging mode, and then set the contents.
File Save:

Logging Mode

Buffer Historical:

(a) When selecting File Save

(b) When selecting Buffer Historical

For details, refer to the following.

23.1 Logging setting
Set the trigger for collecting a device value.

Logging Trigger

Trigger Type

Select the type of trigger for activating device value collection.

Rise Fall Sampling ON Sampling OFF Sampling
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the trigger interval
(1 to 36000).
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Device
Logging Notification
Device

Set the device that notifies device values of a controller are being collected into the buffering area.

Logging Count
Device

Set the device to enable notifying the number of device value collection after the GOT is turned on.

Buffering

23 - 2

Set the device used for the trigger.

23.3 Devices to be used

23.3 Devices to be used

Log Storage
Number

23.1 Settings

Set the number of logs that are temporarily saved in the buffering area (1 to 32767).

Model

Description

Model

23

Number of Files

Set the number of files to be saved in a CF card (1 to 9999).

Number of Logs a
file

Set the number of logs that can be stored in a file (1 to 65500).

The value to be set for this item must be larger than the value set for [Log Storage Number].

File Terminal
Trigger

Set the trigger device to create and save a file at specified timing.

File Terminal
Notification Device

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Item

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(a) When selecting File Save

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the device to enable notifying of interrupted device value collection by [File Terminal Trigger].
Setting for this item is available only when [File Terminal Trigger] is set.

24

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

RECIPE

(b) When selecting Buffer Historical

Item

Description

Model

Set whether the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card or not.
The logging data in the buffering area is not saved to a CF card.
This selection enables high speed operated logging since logging processing is not
interrupted due to file saving.

Yes

The logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card.

By saving the data in a CF card, the logging data can be read out from the CF card and
restored when the GOT is turned on.

Yes (Auto Backup at

Save)

The logging data immediately before saving to memory card is saved as a backup file.
When the logging data is broken, the data is read out from the backup file if available.

Buffer Save

Action When Buffer

is Full

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

No

Select the processing to be taken if the number of logs stored in the buffering area reaches the value set for
[Log Storage Number].

27

Delete old Data

New logging data is added by clearing the oldest data.

Stop New Addition

Device values are not collected even if the logging trigger condition is established newly.

23.3.2 Buffer historical mode

After selecting this item, set the device for Full Notification Signal Device and the following.

28

Select this item to clear the temporarily saved logging data in the buffering area.
After selecting this item, set the device for [Buffer Historical Data Clear].
23.3.2 Buffer historical mode
Select this item to notify when the buffering area clear is completed by [Buffer Historical Data Clear].
After selecting this item, set the device for [Buffer Historical Data Clear Alert].

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Buffer Historical
Data Clear Alert

Set the timing (remaining number of logs that can be saved: 0 to 255) for the notification
when the available capacity of the buffering area is reduced.
When the remaining number of logs that can be saved in the buffering area is reduced to
the number set for this item, [Full Notification Signal Device] turns on.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Buffer Full Alert

Capacity

Buffer Historical
Data Clear

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Select this item to notify the specified controllers when the remaining number of logs, which can be saved in the
buffering area, is reduced to the value set for [Buffer Full Alert Capacity].
Full Notification
Signal Device

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

23.1 Settings

23 - 3

(2) Device tab

Target devices of logging data collection are set.

Item

Description
Set the number of blocks in the logging setting (1 to 250).

Block
Number

23.1.1 Control of logging settings

Select this item when changing the format of device values to be output to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
After selecting this item, set the [File Output Attribute] displayed at the right of the [Device Comment] column.
Setting for this item is available only when [File Save] is selected for [Logging Mode].

File Output
Attribute

Inserts a block. Select a line when inserting a block.

Cuts, copies, or pasts the selected item.
If [Device Comment] is selected, clears the device comment.
If [Digits] is selected, resets the digit value to the default value.

Logging edit
buttons *1

Deletes the setting for the selected row.

*2

Reads out the settings edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT Designer3.

*2

Saves the logging setting made in the [Device] tab as a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Displays the target of device value collection in a list.

Device

Set the device for which the values are collected when the logging function is executed.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Device Type

Select the data type of a device.

Bit
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Point

Set the number of points of devices for which data is collected in block units.
The set continuous device points are set from head device.
The allowable number of points varies depending on [Device Type].
Bit:1 point
Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16/BCD16:1 to 250 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real:1 to 125 points

Device Comment*3

Set a device comment (Up to 32 characters can be entered).

The set device comment is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Device list

Set the format of device values to be output to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
For setting the format, select [File Output Attribute] to the right of [Block Number].

File Output
Attribute

23 - 4

Display Type

Displays the data display type.

Digits

Set the number of digits to be displayed (1 to 32).

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding a device value.

Example: When a collected device value is "125" with "6" set for [Digits].
If this item is checked:000125
If this item is not checked:125

23.1 Settings

Model

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

*1 Insert, Copy, Paste, Clear, and Delete are also operated using the menu displayed by right click.
For details of *2 and *3, refer to the following.

*2 Import/Export
An exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited using spreadsheet software and others.
After editing, the Unicode text file or CSV file can be read out to GT Designer3 by importing the file.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Example: Import/export of a CSV file

RECIPE

24

Export to a CSV file

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Editing the exported file

Adding the setting using
Microsoft R Excel, etc.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

27

Import to GT Designer3

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The addition is displayed.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

POINT

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Import/export in multilingual environment

Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment.
Characters in a file can be correctly imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.

23.1 Settings

23 - 5

*3 Adjusting the column width

When the set device comment is displayed only a part of it, the column width can be adjusted so that the entire
comment is visible.
Expand the column width.

(3) File save tab

Configure the settings to save the logging data stored in the buffering area to a CF card.
The settings are available when selecting the following items in the [Basic] tab.
[File Save]
[Buffer Save] is set to [Yes] or [Yes (Auto Backup at Save)] in [Buffer Historical].

Item

Description

Model

Set the file where the logging data is saved.

Drive Name

Select a drive where a file is stored.

Set the folder name where the file is saved.
The default folder name is set at [Project Folder] displayed by selecting the [Common]

Folder Name

[GOT Type Setting] from the menu.

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

File Access

Enter the file name to be saved.

File Name

The default file name is set at "LOG

"(

: Logging ID).

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

Add date
information to file
name

Select this item to add the file saving date (year, month, day) and time (hour, minute,
second) to the file name.

Set the timing for saving the logging data, temporarily stored in the buffering area, to a CF card.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Store Trigger

Trigger Type

Device

When selecting [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling], set the trigger interval (1
to 1440).
When selecting [None], the logging data is automatically saved to a CF card when the
buffering area becomes full.
Rise Fall None Sampling ON Sampling OFF Sampling
Specify the save trigger device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to next page)

23 - 6

23.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

Set this item to save a Unicode text file or CSV file at the same time the logging data is saved.
23.3.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file

Specify File Output

Time Information
Format

Saves only the binary data (*.G1L).

CSV File

Saves the binary data (*.G1L) and CSV file.

Unicode Text File

Saves the binary data (*.G1L) and Unicode text file.

Destination

Select this item to store a Unicode text file or CSV file to which [Additional File Type] is
executed into the save destination different from that of binary data.
After selecting this item, set [Drive Name] and [Folder Name] where the file is to be
stored.
The Unicode text file or CSV file can be used for a data fetch by storing the file in the
different drive.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

Set the display type of date and time, which is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.
*1

Select this item to set [Date/Time Format].

Writing Notification
Device

Set the device used for notifying that logging data is being saved.

Writing Error
Notification Device

Set the device that notifies an error if saving of the logging data is faulty.

23.3 Devices to be used

RECIPE

Additional File Type

None

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

23.3 Devices to be used

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

For details of *1, refer to the following.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

23.1 Settings

23 - 7

*1 Date and time settings

Set the display type of date and time.
The set display type can be confirmed in the preview area.

Preview area

Item

Description

Preview area

Contents

The result of date and time setting is displayed as a display example.

Select a display type of date and time.
Confirm the set display type in the preview area.
Date/Time
Date
Time
When selecting [Date/Time ] or [Date ] for [Contents], set the following items.
Sort

Select a sorting order of year, month and day.

yy/mm/dd (Example: 09/9/1) mm/dd/yy (Example: 9/1/09) dd/mm/yy (Example: 1/9/09)
Select asorting type of date.
Select the display type depending on upper or lower case characters and display of the day of a
week.
The display examples below show the setting of [yy/mm/dd] for [Sort] and [/] for [Delimiter].

Type
09/9/1
Sep/1
SEP/1
Sep/1(WED)
SEP/1(WED)
09/Sep/1
09/SEP/1
09/Sep/1(WED)
09/SEP/1(WED)
2009/Sep/1
2009/SEP/1
2009/Sep/1(WED)
2009/SEP/1(WED)

Date Setting

Delimiter

Select a delimiter used for separating expressions of year, month and day.
/ (Example: 09/9/1) - (Example: 09-9-1)
. (Example: 09.9.1)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding month and day.

Example: To display September 1, 2009
Selected :09/09/01
Not selected :09/9/1

When selecting [Date/Time] or [Time ] for [Contents], set the following items.

Type

Select the display type of time.

Select the display type depending on whether to use, presence or absence of am and pm.
10:1
10:1:27
10:1(AM)

Fill with 0

Select this item to display "0" preceding hour, minute, and second.
Example: To display 1 past 10
Selected :10:1
Not selected :10:01

Time Setting

23 - 8

23.1 Settings

22

Control of logging settings

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

23.1.1

The logging function can control multiple loggings in one logging setting by setting the following items.
Logging IDs
The number of blocks
32767

Max. 32 IDs

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

No. 100
Logging ID 1No. 10

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

24

RECIPE

Max. 250 blocks

Max. number of device points
is 250 (total of all blocks)

Logging IDs

25

Logging ID indicates a number that distinguishes the logging setting.

It is also used to specify the data that is displayed in historical trend graph.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

(1) Setting method

Logging ID is set in the [Basic] tab of the [Logging] dialog box.
23.1 Logging setting

26

(2) Setting range

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Setting range of logging ID is 1 to 32767.

Note that the number of allowable logging settings is 32.

Blocks
The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block enables to perform the following settings.
Setting that multiple device types (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting

27

Set the number of blocks in the [Device] tab of the [Logging] dialog box.
23.1 Logging setting
The following explains an example of setting that bit devices and word devices (singed BIN16 and signed
BIN32) exist in one logging setting.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(1) Setting method

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Set [Device], [Device Type], [Point] and

[File Output Attribute] for each block.

Specify the number of blocks.

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

(2) Setting range

Up to 250 block settings can be set in one logging setting.
23.1 Settings

23 - 9

POINT
(1) For max. No. of device points
For each logging setting, the allowable maximum number of device points is 250 points in total.
One device is counted as 1 point, regardless of word device or bit device.
For 32-bit devices, however, 1 device is counted as 2 points.
When multiple blocks are set, the device points for a device data transfer setting are the total device points of
all the blocks.
Example)
In the case of block 1: 30 points, block 2: 70 points and block 3: 120 points
The number of device points in this setting is counted as 220 points (30 + 70 + 120).
(2) When setting random device numbers
One point of device number can be set in one block.
Therefore, setting must be made in different blocks to set random device numbers.
(3) When the device type is bit
The device that can be set in a block is 1 point (fixed).

23.2 Relevant Settings

The logging function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant setting.

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function

Saving the data in the buffering area to a CF card (Buffer flash forced
saving signal)*1
*1

23 - 10

Set description

Model

GS520.b0

When setting not to save the data in a CF card (when [Buffer Save] in the logging setting is set to [No]), the logging data in the
buffering area is not saved to a CF card.

23.2 Relevant Settings

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

23.3 Actions
The logging function is enabled by a device or sampling.(Rise/Fall/Sampling/On sampling/Off sampling)
23.1 Logging setting

Logging mode

23

The logging mode includes the file save mode and buffer historical mode.

File save mode

Application

Buffer historical mode

High speed operated logging and high speed

Saves large-quantity logging data.

Save location of the collected data

operated display of historical trend graph.

After saving the data in the buffering area temporarily,

saves it to a CF card.
(For a file name, a number (in the range of 0001 to

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Logging mode

Item

24

Saves the data in the buffering area only

temporarily.*2

is full*3

Saves the logging data in the buffering area to a CF

card.

To be selected from the following.

Further logging data is not taken into the buffering
area.
Logging data is deleted from older data.

File format for saving

Binary file (*.G1L) *4

Binary file (*.G1L) *4

To display the collected data

To be used as the backup data of the buffering area in

the event of power failure

Application of logging data saved in

a memory card
*1
*2

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Processing when the buffering area

When the number of logs being stored in a file exceeds the set value, a new file is automatically created.
It is set at [Number of Logs a File] in the logging setting.
The logging data can be saved to a CF card as the backup of the buffering area in the event of power failure.
23.3.2 Saving data

*3
*4

The allowable maximum number of logs that can be temporarily saved in the buffering area is set at [Log Storage Number] in the
logging setting.
The logging data may also be saved in a Unicode text file or CSV file to be displayed on a personal computer.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

23.3.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file

Devices to be used
The logging status can be output to a device.
Devices to be used for the logging function are as follows.

27

(1) File terminal notification device

[File Terminal Trigger] notifies that the collection of device values is interrupted.
This can be used for the file save mode.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

When the file terminal notification device turns on, the collection of device values is interrupted.
ON
Logging trigger

RECIPE

9999) is automatically appended.)*1

OFF

Collecting

Saving the logging data

to memory card

Collecting

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28
Collecting the device
value to the buffering
area

Collecting

Saving

ON
[File Terminal Trigger]

29

OFF
ON

[File Terminal Notification

Device]
OFF
Device value collection is not executed while the logging data is being saved.
The established trigger condition is ignored.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

*1

23.3 Actions

23 - 11

(2) Full notification signal device

This device notifies that the buffering area becomes full.
This can be used for the buffer historical mode.

(3) Buffer historical data clear alert

[Buffer Historical Data Clear] notifies that the buffering area has been cleared.
This can be used for the buffer historical mode.

(4) Logging notification device

The device notifies that device values of a controller are being collected to the buffering area.
When [Trigger Type] of [Logging Trigger] is [Rising]

Logging trigger

OFF

Collecting the device

value to the buffering
area

Collecting

Collecting

Collecting

ON
[Logging Notification
Device]

OFF

The logging notification device goes OFF in the state the logging
trigger is not established and the device value collection processing
has completed.

(5) Logging count device

The device notifies the number of times the device value collection has been executed since the start up of
GOT. (This is not the number of logs stored in the buffering area.)
Using this count value, it is possible to check if the logging is executed correctly.
Counting range is 0 to 65535 and when the count value reaches 65535, it cycles back to 0. (In the case of
unsigned BIN16)
The count value is cleared when the GOT is turned OFF, or when it is reset or restarted.

(6) Writing notification device

This device notifies that the logging data is being saved in a CF card.

(7) Writing error notification device

This device notifies that an error occurred while the logging data was being written in a CF card.
The writing error notification device is not automatically turned OFF even if the error state is released.
Therefore the device must be turned OFF by the user.
When this device turns on, confirm the following.
Is the CF card access switch of GOT main unit is ON?
Is the CF card free of errors?

POINT
(1) Timing to establish a logging trigger
Have the logging trigger established when the file terminal notification device and logging notification device
are turned off.
While the file terminal notification device and logging notification device are turned on, device value collection
is not executed even when the logging trigger is established.
23.4 Precautions
(2) Timing to establish a save trigger
Have the save trigger established when the writing notification device is turned off.
While the writing notification device is turned on, file saving is not executed even when the save trigger is
established.

23 - 12

23.3 Actions

The file save mode stores the collected logging data in a CF card.
When a file becomes full, another file is automatically created to save large quantity of logging data.
The file save mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
To save large quantity of logging data
To save the logging data in multiple files. The number of logs to be stored in a file is set and when the number of
stored logs exceeds the set value and new file is created. (Example: Creating a file after collecting the data for a day)

1.

When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value

of a controller is colleted and taken into the buffering area.

User area
(C drive + Extension memory)

Buffering area

-1

-2

Logging
data

-3

Displayed in the historical trend graph.

2.

LOG00001_0002.G1L

LOG00001_0001.G1L
No. of Logs
1
2
3

Time

2005/7/1 9:00:00
2005/7/1 9:01:10
2005/7/1 9:02:00

Line 1 Line 2
150
174
196

25

Saved in a CF card

300
312
305

No. of Logs
1
2
3

Time

2005/7/2 9:00:00
2005/7/2 9:01:10
2005/7/2 9:02:00

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

3.

RECIPE

23

24

100
50

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

File save mode

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23.3.1

Line 1 Line 2
140
145
150

302
317
307

26
2005/7/1 22:09:00 215

320
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

65500

One file can store up to 65500 logs.

If the number of logs in a file exceeds the value set for [Number of Logs a File], a new file is
automatically created to save the data.
Up to 9999 files can be created.

3.

Logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area is saved to a CF card.

Using the collected logging data, displays as indicated below are possible.
Display by historical trend graph
Display on a personal computer by saving the data in a Unicode text file or CSV file.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

2.

When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is collected and taken into the
buffering area.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

1.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

23.3 Actions

23 - 13

 Saving data
In the file save mode, the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card at the following timings.
When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data is automatically saved.
The logging data is saved at the specified timing (timing when the file terminal trigger is satisfied) regardless
of the number of logs.

(1) When the buffering area becomes full

The logging data is automatically saved to a CF card when the number of collected logs reaches the value set
for [Log Storage Number] in the logging setting.
Example: When [Number of Logs a File] setting is 30

Logging
data
(Temporary file)
LOG00001_0000.G1L
No. of Logs
Time
Line 1
2009/10/1 9:00:00 150
1
2009/10/1 9:01:10 174
2
2009/10/1 9:02:00 196
3

No. of Logs
Time
Line 1
2009/10/1 9:20:00 205
1
2009/10/1 9:21:00 211
2

Line 2
256
255
254

(File to be created)
LOG00001_0001.G1L
Time

Line 1

Line 2

1
2
3

2009/10/1 9:00:00
2009/10/1 9:01:10
2009/10/1 9:02:00

150
174
196

256
255
254

20
21
22

2009/10/1 9:19:00
2009/10/1 9:20:00
2009/10/1 9:21:00

215
205
211

250
216
217

30

2009/10/1 9:29:00

230

217

No. of Logs

2009/10/1 9:19:00

20

3.

215

250

When the number of logs in the temporary file

reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File],
the data is saved in a file (No. 0001 to No. 9999).

Line 2
216
217

10
11

2009/10/1 9:29:00
2009/10/1 9:30:00

230
231

217
220

20

2009/10/1 9:39:00

250

210

1.

Buffering area is full.

2. Appended

to the existing data

(Temporary file after file creation)

LOG00001_0000.G1L
Time

No. of Logs

Line 1

Line 2

2009/10/1 9:30:00

231

220

10

2009/10/1 9:39:00

250

210

3. The logging data stored in the file is cleared from

the temporary folder.

1.
2.
3.

When the buffering area becomes full, the logging data in the buffering area is automatically saved to a CF
card (appended to the existing data).
The data is saved in a temporary file (file No. 0000).
When the number of logs saved in the temporary file reaches the value set for [Number of Logs a File], the
data in the temporary file is saved in a file (file No. 0001 to 9999).
When the number of files exceeds the number set for [Number of Files], the file number returns to 0001.
In this case, the logging data to be saved overwrites the data in the file (file No. 0001).
(The existing data in the file is deleted.)
If [Number of Files] is "12"
LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L

LOG00001_0012.G1L

Creation
of a file

File contents are overwritten.

LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L

LOG00001_0012.G1L

If the file must not be overwritten, save the file in the CF card to other location.

4.
23 - 14

After saving the file, the logging data in the buffering area is automatically cleared and logging restarts.

23.3 Actions

22

(2) When using the file terminal trigger

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Use [File Terminal Trigger] in the logging setting to save the data at the specified timing by creating a file
regardless of the number of logs.

Logging
data
LOG00001_0000.G1L
No. of Logs
1
2
3

Time
Line 1
2009/10/1 9:00:00 150
2009/10/1 9:01:10 174
2009/10/1 9:02:00 196

2009/10/1 9:19:00

20

Time

Line 1

Line 2

1
2

2009/10/1 9:20:00
2009/10/1 9:21:00

205
211

216
217

2009/10/1 9:26:00

230

217

No. of Logs

250

1. Turns on from off [File Terminal Trigger]

1.

(File to be created)

215

Line 2
256
255
254

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

(Temporary file)

24

at the desired timing of file creation.

LOG00001_0001.G1L
Line 2

150
174
196

256
255
254

20
21
22

2009/10/1 9:19:00
2009/10/1 9:20:00
2009/10/1 9:21:00

215
205
211

250
216
217

27

2009/10/1 9:26:00

230

217

1.

(Temporary file after file creation)

LOG00001_0000.G1L
No. of Logs

Time

Line 1

RECIPE

Line 1

2009/10/1 9:00:00
2009/10/1 9:01:10
2009/10/1 9:02:00

Line 2

25
2. The logging data stored in the file is cleared
from the temporary folder.

The logging data in the buffering area and temporary file (file No. 0000) are saved in a file (file No. 0001 to
9999) when [File Terminal Trigger] is turned on.
(The logging data is saved regardless of the number of logs.)
When the number of files exceeds the number set for [Number of Files], the file number returns to 0001.
The logging data to be saved overwrites the data in the file (file No. 0001).
(The existing data in the file is deleted.)

LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L

LOG00001_0012.G1L

Creation
of a file

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

If [Number of Files] is "12"

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Time

1
2
3

No. of Logs

File contents are overwritten.

LOG00001_0001.G1L
LOG00001_0002.G1L

27

LOG00001_0012.G1L

After saving the file, the logging data in the buffering area is automatically cleared and logging restarts.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

2.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

If the file must not be overwritten, save the file in the CF card to other location.

23.3 Actions

23 - 15

23.3.2

Buffer historical mode

The buffer historical mode retains the logging data only in the buffering area to display the data in historical trend graph
on GOT at high speed.
The buffer historical mode is mainly used in the operations indicated below.
To execute high speed logging and high speed display of historical trend graph
Cases where saving of large quantity of data is not necessary

1.

When the logging trigger condition is

established, the device value of a controller
is colleted and taken into the buffering area.

User area
(C drive + Extension memory)

Buffering area

Logging
data

2. Displayed in the historical trend graph.

1.
2.

When the logging trigger condition is established, the device value of a controller is colleted and temporarily taken
into the buffering area.
The logging data temporarily saved in the buffering area is displayed in historical trend graph.

Saving data
In the buffer historical mode, the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card by executing buffer saving.
If logging data is saved in a CF card, the logging data is read out from the CF card to be restored when the GOT is
turned on. (Restoration is automatically executed.)
This setting is used in the operations indicated below.
To retain the logging data even when a power failure occurs.
To save the data in a CF card due to a filled capacity of the buffering area.
CF card
Saves
data.

The timing to save the data in a CF card can be set as specified.

(Rising / Falling / None / Sampling / ON Sampling / OFF Sampling)
The data can be saved using the touch switches.

User area
Buffering area

Logging
data

User area
Buffering area

Logging
data

Logging data collected

Logging data collected
before turning off the GOT after turning on the GOT

Power turned OFF

23 - 16

23.3 Actions

Logging
data

Power turned ON

(1) Precautions for restoring the logging data

When restoring the logging data by reading it out from a CF card, install the CF card to the GOT before turning
on the GOT.
Once the GOT is turned on, the logging data cannot be restored by reading out the data from the CF card.
Also when the CF card is installed after turning on the GOT, the logging data in the CF card is overwritten
when saving the data to the CF card.
(2) When the buffering area becomes full
When the number of logging data saved in the buffering area reaches the value set for [Log Storage Number]
of the logging setting, this state can be notified using [Full Notification Signal Device].
23.1 Logging setting
Further settings enable the operations as below.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

POINT

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

24

(a) To notify before the buffering area becomes full by setting [Buffer Full Alert Capacity]

Save

Buffering area full notification OFF

25

ON

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Buffering
area full
notification:

RECIPE

(b) To select the processing when the buffering area is full by using [Action When Buffer is Full]

Delete

26

When the buffering area full notification signal turns on,

the logging data in the buffering area is saved to a CF card.*1

To clear the logging data in the buffering area without saving the logging data by using [Buffer Historical
Data Clear]

Save

27
Buffering area full notification OFF

ON

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Buffering
area full
notification:

Delete

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28
Clears the logging data in the buffering area.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

(c)

The trigger for saving the loging data is set for [Store Trigger] in the logging setting.
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

*1

23.3 Actions

23 - 17

23.3.3

Display and process

This section explains how to display and process the collected logging data on the GOT and personal computer.

Displaying in the historical trend graph

The collected logging data can be displayed in the historical trend graph.
The displayed data is specified using the logging ID.
19. HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH

(1) Display target in the file save mode

The logging data in a CF card and the buffering area (for the logging function) can be displayed.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
(For historical trend graph)

Buffering area
(For logging function)

Logging
data

Logging
data

(2) Display target in the buffer history mode

Only the logging data in the buffering area (for the logging function) can be displayed.
The logging data saved in a CF card is not displayed.
To display the older logging data, use the file save mode.
User area (C drive + Extension memory)
Buffering area
(For historical trend graph)

Logging
data

Buffering area
(For logging function)

Logging
data

The logging data in a CF card is

not displayed.

23 - 18

23.3 Actions

22

Operating by the utility

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

By using the utility, the following operations are available for logging files.
Management of logging files is possible on GOT, without using a personal computer.
Users Manual for the GOT used
Item

Description

23

Creates the folder that stores logging files.

Folder for
storing line 1
logging files

Creating folder

Folder for
storing line 2
logging files

LOGGING
FUNCTION

This enables management of logging files by creating a folder for each line or line of products.

Folder for
storing line 3
logging files

24

Manages logging files by creating folders for

lines or line of products
Deleting folder

Deletes the folder that stores logging files.

Copies a logging file.

Copying file
Deleting file

Deletes a logging file.

Renaming file

Renames a logging file.

25

Moves a logging file to other folder.

Moving file
CSV/Unicode text conversion

Converts a binary file (*.G1L) into a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Displaying the collected data on a personal computer after saving the data in a Unicode
text file or CSV file
The collected logging data is saved in a binary file (*.G1L).
The collected logging data can be displayed on a personal computer by creating a Unicode text file or CSV file from
the binary file.
23.3.4 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

G1L

RECIPE

This operation is used when making a backup file of a logging file.

Unicode text file / CSV file

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Logging
data

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

23.3 Actions

23 - 19

POINT
(1) When displaying logging data on personal computer available for multilingual input
For displaying logging data, use the Unicode text file.
With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly displayed.
(2) Display example and description for the logging data
When binary logging data is converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file, the logging data is displayed as
shown below.
1)

2)

3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

10)

11)

No.

Description

1)

Logging ID

2)

Logging name

Indicates the logging name.

3)

ID number

Indicates the number (0001 to 9999) that is at the end of the file name.

4)

Number of set devices

Indicates the number of devices.

5)

Number of logging data

Indicates the number of logging data.

6)

Device comment

Indicates the device comments.

Device format

Indicates the device formats.

BIT:Bit
BIN16:Signed BIN16 or unsigned BIN16
BIN32:Signed BIN32 or unsigned BIN32
BCD16:BCD16
BCD32:BCD32
REAL:Real number

8)

Display format

Indicates the display formats.

BIN:Binary number
DEC:Signed decimal number
UNSIGNED_DEC:Unsigned decimal number
REAL:Real number

9)

Device size

Indicates the device size. (Unit: Byte)

1: Bit device or word device (16 bits)
2: Word device (32 bits)

7)

23 - 20

Item
Indicates the logging ID.

10)

Time data

Indicates the time that the device values are collected.

11)

Logging data

Indicates the collected device values.

23.3 Actions

22

Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

23.3.4

Creating a file when saving the logging data to a CF card

A Unicode text file or CSV file is saved when saving the logging data to a CF card.
This method does not require special operation since a Unicode text file or CSV file is automatically created.

23

Set [Additional File Type] in the [File Save] tab in the logging setting.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

1.

RECIPE

24

25

Setting of [Additional File Type]

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

File save operation automatically creates a Unicode text file or CSV file.
A Unicode text file or CSV file is not created at the timing of temporary file creation.
23.3.1 File save mode

HINT
Interruption of logging processing due to file saving operation
Logging processing is interrupted during data saving to a file.
To shorten the interruption time, set [None] for [Additional File Type] and convert a binary file (*.G1L) into a Unicode
text file or CSV file using GT Designer3 or the utility.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

2.

23.3 Actions

23 - 21

 Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by GT Designer 3

The binary file (*.G1L) saved in a CF card can be converted into a Unicode text file or CSV file by GT Designer3.
The file conversion on GT Designer3 reduces the additional load on the GOT.

1.

Store a binary file (*.G1L) to a personal computer using either of the methods below.
Transferring by GT Designer3
Select [Communication]
[Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to a personal computor.
Storing data in CF card or USB memory
Save the logging data in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data in the CF card or USB memory using the
personal computer.

2.

Select [Tools]
[File Conversion]
[Logging File Convert] from the menu to display the setting dialog box on GT
Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file into a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Item

Description
Type

Displays the type of a conversion source file.

Path

Specify the path of the conversion source file.

Source of
Conversion
Target files in the
same path

Model

Select this item to target all the files (G1L files only) of the same path for conversion.
When converting files with this item selected, the conversion log is recorded for the
specified path automatically.

With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result
(OK/NG), and the file creation date can be checked.

Type

Select the type of the conversion destination file (CSV/Unicode Text).

Path

Displays the path (same as the path of the conversion source file) where the conversion
destination file is saved.

Destination File

Creating a Unicode text file/CSV file by the utility

Convert the binary file (*.G1L) saved in a CF card to a Unicode text file or CSV file by the utility.
A Unicode text file or CSV file can be converted without using GT Designer3.

1.

In the [Logging Information] of the utility, select the G1L file and touch the [G1L
For utility operation, refer to the following manual.

CSV] or [G1L

TXT] button.

Users Manual for the GOT used

2.

Store the converted Unicode text file or CSV file in a personal computer using either of the following methods.
Transferring by GT Designer3
Select [Communication]
[Read from GOT] from the menu and transfer the file to a personal computer.
Storing data in CF card or USB memory
Save the logging data in a CF card or USB memory, and read the data in the CF card or USB memory using the
personal computer.

23 - 22

23.3 Actions

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

23.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the logging function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of logging settings

23

Up to 32 logging settings can be configured in one project.

(2) Buffering area size

To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], refer to the following.
(a) When a large number is set for [Log Storage Number]
The size of user area (C drive + Extension memory) is reduced.
Adjust the setting for [Log Storage Number] according to the size of user space (C drive + Extension
memory).
(b) When a small number is set for [Log Storage Number]
In the file save mode, file saving frequency increases.
Since device value collection is interrupted while the data is saved to a file, device value collection may be
disabled. (Especially when device values are collected in short intervals.)
To adjust the value set for [Log Storage Number], refer to the following.

24

RECIPE

23.1 Logging setting

LOGGING
FUNCTION

The size of the buffering area varies according to the setting for [Log Storage Number] of the logging setting.

25

[Log Storage Number]

[Logging Trigger]

100

10000

100ms intervals)

Saving in 1 second intervals

Saving in 100 second intervals

Saving in 10000 second

intervals

1000(

100ms intervals)

Saving in 100 second intervals

Saving in 10000 second

intervals

Saving in 1000000 second

intervals

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

10 (

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Example: Relationships among logging trigger log storage number and saving frequency

POINT
Setting of [Log Storage Number] in the file save mode
To collect device values in short intervals, increase the value set for [Log Storage Number].

27

(3) Mixed use of file save mode and buffer historical mode
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Do not overlap the folder name and file name between the two modes.
If there is an overlap, logging cannot be executed correctly.
In the file save mode

In the buffer historical mode

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28
Overlapped designation of folder
and file names is not allowed.

In the file save mode, management file "LOG00001.G1L****"

is saved at the same timing the "LOG00001_****.G1L" file
(*: number) is saved. Since this overlaps with the file name
"LOG00001.G1L" used in the buffer historical mode, correct
logging is disabled.

[Data Check..].

23.4 Precautions

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Check of overlapped designation is possible by selecting [Tools]

29

23 - 23

(4) Number of settings

When the total capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the logging function
cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points, may not be set.
Make the settings within the free user space available for the GOT.
For calculating the setting data size of the logging function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals)Appendix.1.2 Data Capacity Available for Storage on CF Card
For the free user space available for the GOT, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer

(5) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size
The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.

Precautions for OS
To use the logging function, install the extension function OS (Logging) to GOT.

Precautions for hardware

To use the logging function with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT.(For GOTs with built-in option
function boards, no option function board is required.)
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board
For the GT16, no option function board is required.

23 - 24

23.4 Precautions

(1) If device value collection is not executed as set

In the cases shown below, the collection of device values may be impossible in the set intervals or even if the
trigger device condition is satisfied.
A large number of device points is set for collection, taking a long communication time between GOT and a
controller.
Logging trigger interval is short (trigger conditions is established during the collection of device value).

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for use

23

Example: When logging trigger interval is short

LOGGING
FUNCTION

ON
Logging trigger

OFF

Device value is
being collected to
buffering area.

24

During
collection

During collection

When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], reduce the device points for a logging setting enabled with short
intervals. (Set the logging setting enabled with long intervals separately from the logging setting enabled with
short intervals.)

25

Logging setting (logging ID 1)

Interval: 10 ( 100ms)

D200
D202
D204
D206
D208

D101
D103
D105
D107
D109

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Devices to be transferred
D100
D102
D104
D106
D108

RECIPE

Take any of the following measures.

D201
D203
D205
D207
D209

26

Logging setting (logging ID 1)

Interval: 10 ( 100ms)

Logging setting (logging ID 2)

Interval: 100 ( 100ms)

Devices to be transferred

Devices to be transferred

D200
D202
D204
D206
D208

Setting with short intervals

D101
D103
D105
D107
D109

27

D201
D203
D205
D207
D209

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

D100
D102
D104
D106
D108

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Divide the settings.

Setting with long intervals

Have the trigger condition established while the logging notification device is OFF.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

23.1 Logging setting

If the baud rate can be changed, increase the baud rate in the Communication detail settings.

POINT
If device value collection is impossible
A device value is collected when the trigger device is established next.
The device value to be collected is the value at the time the trigger condition is established next.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

23.4 Precautions

23 - 25

(2) Integrity of the device values between the controller device values and the collected device values
When the number of device points set for device value collection is large, integrity of device values may not be
secured between the device values of a controller and the collected data values.
Logging data at GOT

Device values at controller

D0
D1
D2

120
140
160

D0
D1
D2

120
140
160

D100

200

D100

200

Logging data at GOT

120
140
160

D0
D1
D2

Device value reading

processing by GOT

Device values at controller

140
Remains

D0
D1
D2

120
145
160

Device value changed

during reading processing

Device value reading

processing by GOT
200

D100

D100

200

If such a problem occurs, set an interlock at the controller so that the device value will not change until the
logging by GOT finishes.
Logging status can be checked by [Logging notification device].
23.1 Logging setting

(3) Timing at which processing stops or is suspended

(a) Timing at which device value collection stops or is not executed
In the cases shown below, device value collection is not executed even if the trigger condition is
established.
Device values may be collected incorrectly as device value collection stops temporarily. (Particularly when
device value collection is executed in short intervals.)
Description
When saving the logging data to memory
card

When clearing the buffering area

During the access of the historical trend
graph to the logging data

Countermeasure
In the file save mode, increase the value set for [Log Storage Number].
Use [Writing Notification Device] appropriately so that the trigger condition is not

established during writing.

Have the trigger condition established only after [Buffer Historical Data Clear Alert] is

turned on.
Decrease the device points to be monitored by the historical trend graph.

(b) Timing at which file saving and buffering area clear are suspended
In the case shown below, file saving and buffering area clear are not executed.
Item
During the access of the historical trend
graph to the logging data

23 - 26

23.4 Precautions

Countermeasure
Decrease the device points to be monitored by the historical trend graph.

22

(4) To maintain the access performance

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(a) Before starting logging

It is recommended to format a CF card before starting logging.
(b) Number of files stored in a folder
The number of files to be stored in a folder should be less than 500.
If 500 or more files are stored in a folder, file access performance may be lowered.
Repeated write/delete of CF card
If write/delete of memory card has been done many times, it can deteriorate file access performance
independent of the set number of files.
If this is the cause of lowered file access performance, format the CF card.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(c)

(5) Saving a file

To save a file, use a CF card.
The CF card must have larger memory capacity than the logging file size to be saved.
For the file size to be saved in a CF card, refer to the following.

24

(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

If no CF card is installed, saving a file to a CF card fails.
[Writing Error Notification Device] turns on and device value collection is not executed. (Device value collection
is executed even if a CF card is not installed until saving failure occurs.)
Device values are not collected until saving succeeds.
File saving and logging restarts by inserting a CF card.
When using the logging function, insert a CF card to the GOT.

RECIPE

(6) If no CF card is installed when saving a file

25

(7) When using historical trend graph

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

The historical trend graph is not displayed during the following period when using the logging function.
From the start to the end of saving the logging data in a CF card

(8) Deletion prohibited file (only in the file save mode)

In the file save mode, a number is appended to the set file name.
Do not delete the management data and the temporary file indicated below.
If deleted, correct logging is disabled.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

File without a number in the file name : Management data*1

File with 0000 appended to the file name : Temporary file*1
File with a number (0001 to 9999) appended to the file name : Logging data
*1 Deletion prohibited file

27

(9) When turning off GOT power, restarting or resetting GOT

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The logging data in the buffering area is cleared.

If the logging data must not be cleared, save the data using [File Terminal Trigger] or [Store Trigger].

Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

(11) When opening CSV file with Microsoft Excel

When opening a Unicode text file or CSV file created using the logging function with Microsoft Excel, the file is
displayed in the standard format for Microsoft Excel.
In some setting, data display such as date and hour of logging may differ from the actual format.
If they differ, the format output with the GOT can be checked by opening the Unicode text file or CSV file using
text editor.

(12) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer2.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

23.4 Precautions

23 - 27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For the precautions for using a Unicode text file, refer to the following.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

(10) Using a Unicode text file

23 - 28

23.4 Precautions

RECIPE

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24. RECIPE
The recipe function enables to easily set and change the conditions required for production or others.
A value is set and changed when the preset value is written to the devices of a controller.
The value can be read from the specified device.
The read values are stored in a file. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.
This function includes the recipe function and the advanced recipe function.
For the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

Recipe file
A recipe file stores the device values read by a controller.
The device values stored in the recipe file can be edited on the personal computer.
The data of the recipe file can be written to the devices.

24

Procedure for reading or writing of the device value using the recipe
RECIPE

(1) Writing of the device value in the controller without using the recipe file
The values preset with GT Designer3 are stored in the GOT built-in memory (user area).
The set values are written to the devices of the controller according to the status of the device (on or off).
The recipe file is not required for the following cases.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Only writing the value to the devices of a controller

Not necessary for displaying or editing the writing value on the personal computer

26
GT Designer3 setting
D10
D11
D12

Download the set data

to GOT

1.

3.

Write trigger : OFF

ON
(Write the set data to the device)

D10 150
D11 250
D12 350

27

Configure the recipe setting on GT Designer3.

Do not select the item to use the recipe file.

2.

Download the set data to the GOT.

3.

Write the values set in GT Designer3 to the device of the controller with the write trigger.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

2.

150
250
350

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Device Device value

28

POINT

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

How to read the value from the device of a controller

Use the recipe file.
When the recipe file is not used, only writing the devices to the GOT is available according to the status of the
device (on or off).

SCRIPT FUNCTION

1.

24 - 1

(2) Using the recipe file for reading or writing of the device values
Reading or writing of the device values by using the recipe file is available for project management and
production management on the personal computer.
The following shows how to read or write of the device values by using the recipe file.
(a) Writing the devices to the GOT is performed according to the status of the device (on or off).

1.

GT Designer3 setting
Device Device value
D10
D11
D12

150
250
350

2. Download the set data to GOT

3.

Read trigger : OFF

ON

Recipe
file

(Read the device value)

D10 50
D11 100
D12 150

Device Device value

D10
D11
D12

150
250
350

50
100
150

4. The device values read to recipe file are stored.

Recipe
file

5.

The recipe file is stored in PC.

8.

Write trigger : OFF

6. Recipe file is displayed or edited in PC.

Device
D10
D11
D12

7.

Device value
50
100
150

500
600
700

Transfer the edited recipe file

to GOT.

Device Device value

D10
D11
D12

1.

24 - 2

ON
(Write the set values to the device.)

500
600
700

Configure the recipe setting on GT Designer3.

Select the item to use the recipe file.

2.

Download the set data to the GOT.

3.

The device values of the controller are read with the read trigger.

4.

The read values are stored in the recipe file.

5.

Store the recipe file in the personal computer.

6.

Display and edit the file stored at the step 5. on the personal computer.

7.

Store the edited recipe file in the GOT.

8.

The values are written to the devices of the controller with the write trigger.

D10 500
D11 600
D12 700

22

1.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(b) Writing the devices to the GOT is performed in the utility (Only advanced recipe function)

GT Designer3 setting

23

Device Device value

150
250
350

2. Download the set data to GOT

3.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

D10
D11
D12

Advanced recipe file

(Create a binary file (*.G1P).)
Touch the
the utility.

Save record
PLC GOT

24

button on

Advanced
recipe file

(Read the device value)

D10 50
D11 100
D12 150
RECIPE

4.

Device Device value

D10
D11
D12

6.

Advanced
recipe file

7.

The Unicode text file or CSV file is

displayed or edited on the personal computer.

50
100
150

25

The device values read to the advanced

recipe file (binary format file (*.G1P))
are stored.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

5.

150
250
350

Convert the binary file (*.G1P) to

a Unicode text file or CSV file. *1
Store the converted file and binary
file (*.G1P) in the personal computer.

26

Convert the edited file to a binary

file (*.G1P) in GT Designer3. *2
Transfer the binary file
(*.G1P) to the GOT.

10. Touch the

the utility.

Load record
GOT PLC

button on

Device Device value

D10
D11
D12

(Write the set values

to the device.)

500
600
700

1.

Configure the setting on GT Designer3.

2.

Download the set data to the GOT.

3.

Create the advanced recipe file with the utility.

4.

The device values of the controller are read with the utility.

5.

The read values are stored in the advanced recipe file (binary file (*.G1P)).

6.
7.

27

D10 500
D11 600
D12 700

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

9.

500
600
700

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

8.

50
100
150

29

Convert the binary file (*.G1P) to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Store the converted file and the binary file in the personal computer.
BARCODE
FUNCTION

D10
D11
D12

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Device Device value

Display and edit the converted file stored at the step 6. on the personal computer.

24 - 3

8.

Convert the edited file to the binary file (*.G1P) on GT Designer3.

9.

Store the binary file (*.G1P) in the GOT.

10. The set values are written to the devices of the controller with the utility.
POINT
Advanced recipe file
The advanced recipe file is a recipe file used for the advanced recipe function.
24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 4

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and

Advanced Recipe Function
The following shows the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function.
Select the recipe to use based on the followings.

23

24.2 Recipe Function

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Maximum number of
recipes

Option function board

Option OS (Advanced recipe)

Up to 256 settings

Up to 2048 settings

GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, GT11: Up to

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Option function board

Option OS (Recipe)

Appendix2 Precautions for

Option Function Board

Number of device points

GT10: Up to 4000
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points
for 1 device.)

When the number of record settings is 240 or

less: Up to 32767 points per setting
When the number of record settings is 241 or
more: Up to 4096 points per setting
(When device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points
for 1 device.)

Number of records

1 (Only one record)

More than one (Up to 2000 records)

Device type

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16

Signed BIN32 Unsigned BIN32
Only one device type for each setting

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16

Signed BIN32 Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Bit
Allowed to set multiple device types for each
setting.

Device name

Only one device name for each setting

Allowed to set multiple device names for each

setting.

Trigger device

Set trigger device for each setting

Set the trigger device for each setting

Allowed to read/write all advanced recipes in
common trigger device

Trigger device for

reading/writing device
value

Use of utility

Not allowed

Allowed

Operation in utility

Notification of
processing status

Reading/writing being executed

Reading/Writing being executed

Reading/Writing being completed
Recipe process error
Displaying the advanced recipe information in
utility

Notifying the process

status to the device of
controller

Stored file type

GT16: GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, GT10: CSV file

GT11: CSV file, binary file

Binary file*2

Storing file type

Required memory area

Change depending on the setting

8192 points

*1

points*1

*1
*2
*3

Max. No. of recipes

24

RECIPE

option OS*3

25
Max. No. of values in
one device (For each
setting)

Applicable device name

and device type

(Fundamentals)Appendix.
1 DATA CAPACITY LIST

Settable for each recipe setting for GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11.
Total number of points in one project for GT10.
Can be converted to a CSV file or Unicode text file in GT Designer3. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.
No option function board is required for GT16.
No option function board and option OS are required for GT SoftGOT1000 and GT10.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Option function board,

GT16
GT15
GT SoftGOT1000

Reference

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Applicable GOT

Advanced recipe function

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Recipe function
GT16
GT15
GT SoftGOT1000 GT11
GT10

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Item

29

POINT

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

BARCODE
FUNCTION

For compatibility of recipe function and advanced recipe function

Setting for Recipe Function and advanced recipe function cannot be utilized.
Select between recipe function and advanced recipe function before using the recipe.

24 - 5

 Max. No. of recipes

Multiple recipes can be set for each setting.
Also, the setting can be managed separately for each line or line of products.
Max. No. of recipes and device points are shown as the following table.
Advanced recipe function*2

Recipe function
Max. 256
recipes

Max. 2048
recipes

Max. 8192 points can be set*1.

(When device type is 32 bit,
calculate as 2 points for 1 device.)

Max. 32767 points can be set for each setting.

(When device type is 32 bit,
calculate as 2 points for 1 device.)

*1

Settable for each recipe setting for GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000, and GT11.

*2

Total number of points in one project for GT10. (Max. 4000 points for GT10)
For the maximum number of device points, refer to the following.
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting

Max. No. of values in one device (For each setting)

Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple values in one device are
shown below.
Example : When setting 3 values in D11 to D13 of device,
Device name

Device value 1

Device value 2

Device value 3

D11

100

150

500

D12

200

250

600

D13

300

350

700

When setting the above values, the functions will be as the following table.
Recipe function
One value can be set in one device.
When setting multiple values in one device, separate the setting for each
device value.

Advanced recipe function

Multiple values can be set in one device.
Multiple recipe information can be managed in one setting.

Device value 1 setting

Device value 1 to 3 can be set in one device!

Multiple values
(max. 2000 records)
can be set in one device.

Device value 2 setting

24 - 6

Device value 3 setting

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

Differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function when setting multiple device names and device
types are shown below.

(1) Example for setting multiple device names

(a) Settings
It is explained as example for setting that is shown below.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Applicable device name and device type

23
Correspondence to the following setting (b)

Device type

Device value

D11

Signed BIN16

100

D12

Signed BIN16

200

R0

Signed BIN16

400

R1

Signed BIN16

500

Recipe function

Advanced recipe
function
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Device name

1)
3)

24

2)

Recipe function

Advanced recipe function

Multiple device names cannot be set in one setting.

Separate the setting for each device name.

25

Multiple device names can be set in one setting.

2)

3)
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

1)

RECIPE

(b) GT Designer3 setting

When setting above (a), GT Designer3 setting will be as the following table.

D and R device setting can be set in one setting!

R device setting

(2) Example for setting multiple device types

(a) Settings
It is explained as example for setting that is shown below.
Correspondence to the following setting (b)

D11

Signed BIN16

100

D12

Signed BIN16

200

D13

Unsigned BIN32

300

D15

Unsigned BIN32

400

Recipe function

Advanced recipe
function

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Device value

1)
3)
2)

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Device type

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Device name

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

D device setting

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 7

(b) GT Designer3 setting

When setting above (a), GT Designer3 setting will be as the following table.
Recipe Function

Advanced recipe function

Multiple device types can be set in one setting.
The setting can be put together for each line or line of products.

Multiple device types cannot be set in one setting.

Separate the setting for each device type.

3)

2)

1)

Signed BIN16 setting

The setting of signed BIN16 and unsigned BIN32

can be set in one setting!

Unsigned BIN32 setting

(3) Example for setting multiple device numbers

(a) Settings
It is explained as example for setting that is shown below.
Correspondence to the following setting (b)
Device name

Device type

Device value

D11

Signed BIN16

100

D12

Signed BIN16

200

D1000

Signed BIN16

1000

D1001

Signed BIN16

2000

Recipe function

Advanced recipe
function

1)
3)
2)

(b) GT Designer3 setting

When setting above (a), GT Designer3 setting will be as the following table.
Recipe Function
Only continuous device number can be set.
When the device number is not continuous, separate the setting.

2)

1)

Setting of D11 to D12

Setting of D1000 to D1001

Advanced recipe function

The random device type can be set in one setting.

3)

The random device number can be set in one setting!

POINT
Device type for the recipe function
BCD16, BCD32 and the bit device (bit specification of word device) cannot be set for the device type.
To set the above device types, use the advanced recipe function.

24 - 8

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

The recipe performs read/write of the device value depending on status of the trigger device (ON/OFF).
When reading/writing device value, differences between recipe function and advanced recipe function at the trigger
device setting are shown below.
Example : When four settings exist
Recipe Function

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Trigger device for reading/writing device value

23

Advanced recipe function

1)

2)

1)

2)

3)

4)

24

4)
RECIPE

3)

Trigger device can be set for each setting as recipe function.

Also, all advanced recipes can be read/written in common trigger device.
For this, it is not necessary to newly set trigger device even if increasing
settings.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Set the trigger device for each setting.

25
1)

1) 2) 3) 4)

2)
1)

3)

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Trigger device setting

Trigger
device
setting

26

Or

Set the trigger device

for each setting. *1

3)

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

4)

2)

Set the common

trigger device. *2

4)

27

Set the trigger device for each setting

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

*1 It is necessary to specify additional record No. when reading/writing device value.

24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
*2 It is necessary to specify additional recipe No. and record No. when reading/writing device value.
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value

28

Operation in utility

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Advanced recipe function can perform the following operation in utility.

Advanced recipe file operation
Recipe execution
G1P
Unicode text file or CSV file conversion
Recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading the file to PC.
24.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 9

 Notifying the process status to the device of controller

Recipe can notify the status for read/write of device value with storing to the device of controller.
Recipe function

Reading/writing being executed

24.2.2 Relevant settings

Advanced recipe function

Reading/writing being executed

Reading/writing being completed
Recipe process error
Displaying advanced recipe function information in utility
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value

Storing file type

Recipe can read the device value of controller and store in recipe file.
Also, the data of recipe file can write to device.
Recipe can use the file type as shown below.
Recipe function
CSV file*1
Binary file (Only GT11)

Advanced recipe function

Binary file*2

*1 The stored CSV file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.

*2 The binary file can be converted to a CSV file or Unicode text file. The file can be displayed or edited on a personal computer.

24 - 10

24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24.2 Recipe Function

The recipe function enables reading or writing of a value from or to the specified device according to the operation status
of the device (on or off).
For the reading or writing procedure, refer to the following.
24. RECIPE
Example

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

Changing the quantity of used material according to the

products

24.2.1

Switch the
production of A to B

During product
A production
a
b
c
d

20
42
22
65

D100: 20
D101: 42
D102: 22
D103: 65

51
52
94
16

25

Pr. A
Pr. B

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Product A
D100: 20
D101: 42
D102: 22
D103: 65
Product B
D100: 51
D101: 52
D102: 94
D103: 16

RECIPE

Make setting in the recipe setting dialog box

Settings

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Select [Common]
[Recipe]
[Recipe] from the menu to display the [Recipe List] dialog box.
The data for each recipe function are displayed.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

Item

Description

Model

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Set the new data for the recipe function.

Click this button to display the [Recipe] dialog box.
Set the selected data for the recipe function.
Click this button to display the [Recipe] dialog box.
Copies the selected data for the recipe function.
Pastes the copied data for the recipe function in the end of the list.

29

Deletes the selected data for the recipe function.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Deletes all the set data for the recipe function.

Closes the [Recipe List] dialog box.

24.2 Recipe Function

24 - 11

 Recipe
Set the data for the recipe function.

(Example: Setting screen for the GT16)

(Example: Setting screen for the GT11)

Item

Description

Recipe Name

Model

Set a recipe name. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

Points

Set the points of the device to be read or written.

The specified number of devices with consecutively starting from the start device is set.
The number of maximum points differs according to the data type of the devices.
Signed BIN16/Unsigned BIN16: Up to 8192 points (Up to 4000 points for the GT10)
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32: Up to 4096 points (Up to 2000 points for the GT10)

Data Type

Select the data type of the devices.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Unsigned BIN32

Device Points

Signed BIN32

Deletes the device value of the selected No.

Copies the device value of the selected No.
Recipe Edit Button

Pastes the device value of the copied No. to the device value of the selected No.
*1

Reads the edited recipe data with a CSV file to GT Designer3.

*1

Stores the recipe data set on GT Designer3 as a CSV file.

A list of the devices that are set to read or write the recipe function data is displayed.
Clicking the No. selects the data, and the data can be edited by clicking the recipe edit buttons.
Device View

Set the start device that executes read or write the data for the recipe function. Set the
device in the row of No. 1.

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Value

Enter the device value to be written to the PLC when the condition is satisfied.

Set the device that executes the write of data and the trigger condition (on or off) for the recipe function.
Write Trigger1/
Write Trigger2

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set [Write Trigger2] to write the data when two conditions are satisfied.
The device writes the data only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are satisfied.
Set the device that executes the read of data and the trigger condition (on or off) for the recipe function.

Read Trigger1/
Read Trigger2

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set [Read Trigger2] to read data when two conditions are satisfied.
The device reads the data only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are satisfied.

(Continued to next page)

24 - 12

24.2 Recipe Function

Item

Description

Model

Not use a recipe file

(Write Only)

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Select whether to use the recipe file.

The recipe file is not used.
The values stored in the built-in memory of the GOT (the value set in GT Designer3) are
written to the device.
By using the recipe file with the recipe name set for the following, the devices are written
or read.

23

Select a drive that saves the recipe file.

GT16, GT15, GT SoftGOT1000: [A:Standard CF Card]/[B:Extended
Memory Card]
GT11: [A:Standard CF Card]/[D:Built-in SRAM]
GT10: [D:Built-in SRAM] (Fixed)

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Drive Name

Set a folder name where the file is stored.

Recipe File*2

Use a recipe file (Read

and Write)

Folder Name

22

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used

24

in GOT
By default, [Project Folder] of [GOT Type Setting] for [Common] is set.
Set a file name where the file is stored.
(For the GT11, select the file format.)
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used
in GOT
By default, RECIP

: Recipe No.)

25

When no recipe file exists in the drive set in the above, a recipe file is created by the
values set on GT Designer3.

Select this item to specify a file register name.

After selecting this item, set the drive No. and the file name.
The specification is only available when the following settings are satisfied.
Only when the controller type is set as [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*] or [MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q-Motion] in
GT Designer3
When a device that executes the read or write is set in the file register (R, ER, ZR)
When no file register is specified, the file register with the file name specified by the QCPU in the "END" process is
the target file register.
Select the drive No. of a controller.

File Name

Set a file name.

(Up to 8 characters can be entered.)

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Drive

26

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Specify a file
register

" is set. (

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Create a recipe file with

the value set in this
dialog if a recipe file is
not available at the time
of startup

RECIPE

File Name

24.2 Recipe Function

24 - 13

*1 Import/Export
The exported CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file

Exporting to a CSV file

Editing the exported file

Add the setting using

such as Microsoft Excel.
R

Importing to GT Designer3
The added contents
are displayed.

24 - 14

24.2 Recipe Function

Available operation for the recipe function differs according to the selected items.
The following shows the operation differences.
Available operation for the recipe function
The values stored in the built-in memory of the GOT (the values set on GT Designer3) are written to the
devices.

controller

GOT

Write
device

controller

When [Create a recipe file with the value set in this dialog if a recipe file is not available at the time of
startup] is not selected
When no recipe file exists in the specified drive with starting the GOT, a recipe file is not created. When
the data is only written, the recipe file is required by the user. (The recipe file is required to be read from
the controller. Reuse the recipe file created in the CF card or D drive in the GOT. When no recipe file to
be read exists, the file is automatically created.)
Because the value setting in GT Designer3 is not required, data volume transferred to the GOT can be
decreased and download time can be shortened.

1) Read device value

2) Write CF card value

GOT

Write
device

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Specified drive
(A drive or others)

26

controller

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

1) User created
recipe file

25

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Use a recipe file (Read and

Write)

24

RECIPE

When [Create a recipe file with the value set in this dialog if a recipe file is not available at the time of
startup] is selected
When no recipe file exists in the specified drive with starting the GOT, a recipe file is created with the
values set on GT Designer3. Required memory capacity of the GOT differs according to the number of
the set values.
Select this item to write the values set on GT Designer3 into a controller.

1) Write value when starting GOT

2) Read the
Specified drive
value of CF card
(A drive or others)
Value set by
GT Designer3
3) Read the device value

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

GOT

Write
device

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Not use a recipe file (Write

Only)

1) Write value

Saved value in
build in Memory

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Item

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

*2 Operation for the recipe file setting

24.2 Recipe Function

24 - 15

POINT
(1) CF card or D drive check when using the recipe function
The GOT executes the following operation according to the status of the CF card or D drive.
(a) When recipe file is not valid or corrupted
A system alarm "351:Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file." occurs and recipe operation is
stopped.
(b) When no CF card is installed in the GOT
A system alarm "352:Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting memory card." occurs.
(c)

If the capacity of D drive is insufficient

A system alarm, "571: Capacity shortage of user memory (RAM)" appears.

(2) Reading/writing procedure for GT11

When a device value read from a controller is stored to the D drive as a G1R file, editing of the stored G1R file
by a personal computer is not allowed.
(The data on the D drive can be written to the controller.)
To edit the data, save the data in a CSV file on the A drive.

D Drive
D10 100
D11 200
D12 300

X10 (Reading trigger) OFF ON

Device values of the controller are read.

D10 100
D11 200
D12 300

X20 (Writing trigger) OFF

ON
Value on D drive is written.

HINT
Precautions when executing recipe function
(1) When many read/write devices are set
Other processing such as monitoring of other object function or key input will not be executed until the
completion of the recipe function.
<Confirming the recipe function execution>
Set such as a lamp, which monitors the recipe in-processing signal of system signal 2-1, on the GOT screen,
and it is possible to confirm whether the recipe function is executed or not.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
System signal 2-1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9

b8

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Recipe in-processing signal

Recipe in-processing signal

The lamp is lit while the recipe

function is executed.

24 - 16

24.2 Recipe Function

Recipe in-processing signal

The lamp goes off at the completion

of the recipe function.

22

Recipe name

File name (can be randomly changed)

Recipe operation 1

RECIP001.CSV

Recipe operation 2

RECIP002.CSV

Recipe operation 3

RECIP003.CSV

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(2) CSV file stored in CF card

A CSV file is created in a CF card for each recipe setting.

23

Recipe name

File name (can be randomly changed)

Recipe operation 1

RECIP001.G1R

Recipe operation 2

RECIP002.G1R

Recipe operation 3

RECIP003.G1R

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(3) G1R file stored in D drive (only when using the GT11)
A G1R file is created in the D drive for each recipe setting.

24
24.2.2

Relevant settings
RECIPE

The recipe function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings.

GOT environment settings (System information)

25

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Model

[System Signal 2-1]

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Notifying the recipe processing progress (Write device: System signal 2-1.b10)

Setting item

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Function

24.2 Recipe Function

24 - 17

24.2.3

Precautions

This section explains the precautions for using the recipe function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of recipe settings
Up to 256 settings can be configured in one project.

Precautions for OS
To use the recipe function, install the option OS (Recipe) on the GOT. (The option OS is not required for the GT10.)

Precautions for hardware

To use the recipe function with the GT15 or the GT11, mount the option function board on the GOT. (No option
function board is required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board
For the GT16, no option function board is required.

Precautions for use

(1) Recipe file saved in CF card or D drive
Only one recipe file can be saved in the CF card or D drive for one recipe function.
For the recipe file data, only the read data are saved and historical data are not saved. (Old data is overwritten.)
When historical data are required, save data in the personal computer every time the recipe function is
executed.

(2) File data size

Refer to the following for the data size stored into a memory card/D drive when the recipe function is used.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

(3) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer2.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

24 - 18

24.2 Recipe Function

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

The advanced recipe function enables reading or writing of a value from or to the specified device according to the
operation status of the device.
For the differences between the recipe function and the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.
24.1 Differences between Recipe Function and Advanced Recipe Function

24.3.1

Settings

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

Advanced Recipe Common Setting

[Advanced Recipe Common] from the menu to display the [Advanced Recipe
RECIPE

Select [Common]
[Recipe]
Common Setting] dialog box.

Set the device to control the advanced recipe function.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Item

Description

Model

Specify a common trigger device, and then set the device to read or write of the device value.
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value

Recipe No. Storage

Device

Stores the recipe No. when reading or writing a value with [External Control Device]. (1
to 32767)

Record No. Storage

Device

Stores the record No. when reading or writing a value with [External Control Device]. (1
to 2000)

File Convert External

Control

Select this item to control advanced recipe file conversion with a device.
Displays required memory for advanced recipe file conversion.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

External Control
Information

External Control Device

Set the device to control the read or write of the device value for the recipe specified in
[Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No. Storage Device].
When [External Control Device] is set, the subsequent devices of this device are
automatically set in sequential device order.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Select this item to set the device to output the execution status of the advanced recipe.
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value

Delete

External Notification
Device

Controls the controller notification of the execution status of the advanced recipe.
When [External Notification Information] is set, the subsequent devices of this device
are automatically set in sequential order.

Recipe No. Notification

Device

Stores the recipe No. of the device value being written. (1 to 32767)

Record No. Notification

Device

Stores the record No. of the device value being written. (1 to 2000)

29

Deletes the set data of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe Setting].
BARCODE
FUNCTION

External Notification
Information

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 19

 Advanced Recipe List

Select [Common]

[Recipe]

[Advanced Recipe] from the menu to display the [Advanced Recipe List] dialog box.

The list of the advanced recipe setting is displayed and the advanced recipe setting is controlled.
Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be configured.
To configure this setting, set the advanced recipe common setting in advance.

Item

Description
Set the new data for the advanced recipe.
Click this button to display the [Advanced

Recipe] dialog box.

Change the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.

Click this button to display the [Advanced

Recipe] dialog box.

Copies the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.

Click this button to set [Destination No.] for the copied advanced recipe setting.
Pastes the copied data as the new data for [Destination No.] in the advanced recipe list.
Deletes the selected data for the advanced recipe setting.
Deletes all data for the advanced recipe setting.
Closes the [Advanced Recipe List] dialog box.

24 - 20

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Model

22

(1) Advanced Recipe

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(a) Basic tab

Set the data for the advanced recipe function.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

Item

Recipe Name

Model

25

Set the recipe No. (1 to 32767) of the advanced recipe to set.

24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting
Set a recipe name.(Up to 32 characters can be entered.)
The set recipe name is displayed at creating the advanced recipe file in the utility.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Recipe No.

Description

Set the advanced recipe file setting.

24.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file
When selecting [Use], set the following.
Drive Name

26

Select a drive where the file is stored.

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.

Folder Name

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

By default, [Project Folder] of [GOT Type Setting] for [Common] is set.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Recipe File

RECIPE

24

Set the name of the file where the data are saved.
File Name

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

By default, ARP

is set. (

27

: Recipe No.)

Select this item to set the trigger conditions to read or write of the data.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
Set the device that executes the write data and the trigger condition (on or off).
Set [Write Trigger 2] to be written the data when two conditions are satisfied. The data
are written to the device only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are
satisfied.

Read Trigger 1/
Read Trigger 2

Set the device that executes the read data and the trigger condition (on or off).
Set [Read Trigger 2] to be read the data when two conditions are satisfied. The data are
read from the device only when the conditions of both trigger devices 1 and 2 are
satisfied.

Trigger Device

Record No. Device

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Write Trigger 1/
Write Trigger 2

Set the device that stores the record No. of the read or write of the target data.
(1 to 2000)
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting

Convert Format

Select a file format. (CSV/Unicode text)

Storage location

To change the folder where the converted file is stored, set a drive name and folder
name for the file.

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

BARCODE
FUNCTION

File Convert
External Control

29

Configure the setting to control advanced recipe file conversion with a device.
To use this setting, enable the file conversion external control for the advanced recipe common setting.
Click the [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] button to select [File Convert External Control].

24 - 21

(b) Device tab

Configure the device setting.

Item
Block Number

Record Number

Description

Model

Set the number of blocks for the advanced recipe setting. (1 to 2048)
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting
Set the number of records for the advanced recipe setting. (1 to 2000)
24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting
Inserts a block. To insert the block, select a row.
Inserts a record. To insert the record, select a column of the record.
Cuts, copies, and pastes the selected item.
Clears the device value of the selected record to 0.
Multiple consecutive records can be selected.

Advanced recipe
edit button

Deletes the selected block or record.

To delete the block or record, select the block No. or the column of the record.
Multiple consecutive records can be selected.
*1

Reads the advanced recipe setting that is edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to
GT Designer3.

*1

Stores the data for the [Device] tab setting as a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Change the record attribute.

To change the record attribute, select the column of the record.
Multiple consecutive records can be selected.
Click the [Record Attribute] button to display the [Record Attribute] dialog box.

(Continued to next page)

24 - 22

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Item

Description

Model

A list of the devices that are set to read or write the advanced recipe function data is displayed.
Device

Set the device that executes read/write the advanced recipe function data.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

23

Select the data type of the devices.

(Fundamentals) 2.9 Available Numeric Data
Bit
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Unsigned BIN32
BCD16
BCD32

Signed BIN32
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Device Type

Set the device points to read/write in block unit.

Points

24.3.2 Control of advanced recipe setting

The set the continuous device points from head device are set.
Applicable points differ depending on [Device Type].
Bit:1 point
Signed BIN16/unsigned BIN16/BCD16: 1 to 32767 points
Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32: 1 to 16383 points

Display Type

Displays the display type of data to read or write.

Device Comment

Set a device comment. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

The set device comment is displayed in a Unicode text file or CSV file.

Record

Set the value to be read or written.

The number of records can be changed in [Record Number].

24

RECIPE

Device List

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

25

POINT

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Multiple selection of records

The multiple selection of the records is available by dragging the record title of the column. (The selected record
column is highlighted in blue.)

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

For details of *1, refer to the following.

Record titles of columns

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 23

*1 Import/Export
The exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited Unicode text file or CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file

Exporting to a CSV file

Editing the exported file

Adding the setting using
Microsoft R Excel, etc.

Importing to GT Designer3
Addition is displayed.

POINT
When importing or exporting files on personal computer available for multilingual input
Importing or export the Unicode text file. With the Unicode text file, multiple languages are correctly imported or
exported.

24 - 24

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

22

Record Attribute
The selected record attribute is changed.
For the record attribute change, refer to the following.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(c)

24.3.4 Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file

Item

Description

Record No.

Displays the selected record No. (When the multiple records are selected, this item is not
displayed.)

Record Comment

Set the record comment. (Up to 32 characters can be enterd.)

The record comment is displayed in utility at saving/loading record.

Not to set the device value*1

Select this item to set a record with no device value.

in a recipe file*1

24

Select this item not to be written a new device value over the device value stored in the record.

RECIPE

Not to overwrite the device value

Model

*1 [Not to set the device value] and [Not to overwrite the device value in a recipe file] cannot be set at the same time.

25

Control of advanced recipe setting

The advanced recipe function can control multiple advanced recipe settings in one project by setting the following items.
Recipe No.
Number of blocks
Number of records

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

24.3.2

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

No.32767

Max. 2048
recipes
No.
10 100
Recipe No. No.
1

27

Max. 2048 blocks

No. of device points
is 32767 points.(A total of all blocks)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

Max. 2000 records

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Recipe No.
Recipe No. is to identify advanced recipe setting that will be a target of reading/writing the device value.

(1) Setting method

The recipe No. is set on the [Basic] tab in the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
24.3.1 Settings

29

(2) Setting range

BARCODE
FUNCTION

The recipe No. can be set in the range of 1 to 32767.

Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be set.

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 25

 Block
The block is setting unit to set random device number or different device type.
Setting for each block can perform the following setting.
Setting that multiple device type (bit, word, etc.) exist in one setting
Setting that continuous device number setting and random setting exist in one setting

(1) Setting method

The number of blocks is set on the [Device] tab in the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
24.3.1 Settings
The following explains as example of setting that bit device and word device (signed BIN16 and signed BIN32)
exist in one advanced recipe setting.
2) Set [Device], [Device Type] or [Points] for each block.

1) Specify block number

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

(2) Setting range

For each advanced recipe setting, up to 2048 blocks can be set.

Record
The record is setting unit for identifying a groups of device value to read/write.
Setting device value for writing to controller in record unit can set multiple values to the same device.

(1) Setting method

The number of records is set in the [Device] tab of the [Advanced Recipe] dialog box.
24.3.1 Settings
The following shows as example of setting two values (two records) in one device.
Specify record number

Record 1

Record 2

(2) Setting range

For each advanced recipe setting, up to 2000 records can be set.

24 - 26

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

POINT

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) Maximum number of device points

For each advanced recipe setting, up to 32767 points in total can be set.
Calculate as 1 point for 1 device regardless of word device or bit device.
However, when device type is 32 bit, calculate as 2 points for 1 device.
In the case of multiple blocks, it is a total for device points of all blocks.
Example:
In the case of block 1: 500 points, block 2: 2000 points, block 3: 30000 points, a total for No. of device points
will be 32500 points. (500 + 2000 + 30000 = 32500 points.)

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(2) When setting random device number

Device number can be set in one block is one point.
When setting random device number, set separating block.

24

(3) When the device type is bit

Device can be set in one block is one point (fixed).

RECIPE

(4) For No. of device points when No. of device points for each block is one point
When setting one point for each block as follows, max. No. of device points will be 2048 points.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)
Example: When all device type is bit

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Max. 2048 blocks can be set in

one advanced recipe setting.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26
When device type is bit, one device can be set in one block.
For this, when all device type is bit, 2048 devices can be set.
(Because max. 2048 blocks can be set in one advanced recipe setting.)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 27

24.3.3

Reading or writing of device value

The following two methods show how to read or write a device value from or to a device of a controller.
Reading or writing of the device depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
Reading or writing of the device in the utility

Reading or writing of a device value depending on status of device (ON/OFF)

By controlling the recipe with the devices, the device value is read or written.

(1) Reading or writing of a device value with specifying a common trigger device
By setting the external control device, all advanced recipe settings are controlled.
With the common trigger device, the external control device is used for reading or writing of the device value.
24.3.1 Settings

No.1
Recipe No.

No.
3
2

Specify conditions of recipe No., record No. and trigger conditions

to read/write device value in common trigger device.

(a) Details for device

Device

Bit No.

Signal name

Description

Controls reading or writing the device value of the recipe specified in [Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No.
Storage Device].

External Control
Device*1

Recipe No.
Storage Device*1
Record No.
Storage Device*1
*1

24 - 28

b0

Loading record
trigger signal

ON: Writes the values to the device of the controller.

OFF: -

b1

Saving record
trigger signal

ON: Reads the values from the device of the controller.

OFF: -

b2 to b7

Must not be used

b8

Advanced recipe file

convert signal

b9 to b14

Must not be used

b15

Advanced recipe
process error clear
signal

ON: Clears an advanced recipe process error.

OFF: -

Stores the recipe No. when the device value is read or written with [External
Control Device]. (1 to 32767)

Stores the record No. when the device value is read or written with [External
Control Device]. (1 to 2000)

ON: Converts the advanced recipe file.

OFF:-

When [External Control Device] is set, [Recipe No. Storage Device] and [Record No. Storage Device] are set in sequential device
order.

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(b) Setting a target device that value is read or written

By using the device shown in (a), the target device that value is read or written is set.
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
D100. b0 Loading record trigger signal
(External Control Device.b0)
: OFF
D101 [Recipe No. Storage Device]
:2
D102 [Record No. Storage Device] : 1

ON

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Read/write of device value is

controlled in common trigger device!

24
Record 1

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

Record 2
550
650
750

Device

Record 1

D10
D11
D12

100
200
300

Record 2

(Writing)

150
250
350

D10 100
D11 200
D12 300

RECIPE

Device

<Recipe No.2>

25

(2) Executing with specifying the condition of reading or writing of the device value for each
advanced recipe setting
The trigger device for reading or writing a device value and the targeted record No. are set for [Trigger Device] of
[Advanced Recipe].
The trigger device can be set for each advanced recipe setting.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

<Recipe No.1>

: D100
[External Control Device]
[Recipe No. Storage Device] : D101
[Record No. Storage Device] : D102

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

No. 120
Recipe No. No.
1 100

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

Set the trigger device for each advanced recipe setting.

Device
Write Trigger 1
Write Trigger 2

Read Trigger 2

The trigger device reads a value from a device of a controller.

Executes the reading of values when the set conditions (ON/OFF) are satisfied.
The read trigger 2 executes the reading of a value when two conditions (AND condition) are satisfied.

Record No. Device

Stores the record No. of the target device that value is read or written. (1 to 2000)

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Read Trigger 1

Description
The trigger device writes a value to a device of a controller.
Executes the writing of values when the set conditions (ON/OFF) are satisfied.
The write trigger 2 executes the writing of values when two conditions (AND condition) are satisfied.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

(a) Details for device

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 29

(b) Setting a target device that value is read or written

By using the device shown in (a), the target device that value is read or written is set.
Example: When writing the values of recipe No.2 and record No.1 to controller device
X20 ([Write Trigger 1])
: OFF
X20 ([Write Trigger 2])
: OFF
D100([Record No. Device]) : 1

<Recipe No.1>
[Write Trigger 1]
: X10
[Write Trigger 2]
: X11
[Record No. Device] : D0

ON
ON

<Recipe No.2>
[Write Trigger 1]
: X20
[Write Trigger 2]
: X21
[Record No. Device] : D10

(Write)

Device

Record 1

Record 2

Device

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

550
650
750

D10
D11
D12

100
200
300

150
250
350

D10 100
D11 200
D12 300

Reading or writing of a device value in the utility

Specify the advanced recipe file and the target record No. in the utility to read or write from or to the device value of
the controller.
Without designing the dedicated screen for the advanced recipe function, the device value is read or written.
For utility operation, refer to the following.
Users Manual for the GOT used

1.

Touch the record

to read/write.

2. Touch the

24 - 30

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Load record or Save record

GOT PLC
PLC GOT

22

Procedure of operation with advanced recipe file

By storing the value read from the device in the advanced recipe file, the file is available for project or production
management on the personal computer.
The device value read from a controller can be stored in the advanced recipe file.
The value in the advanced recipe file can be written to a device of the controller.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24.3.4

23

Reading or writing the value as shown below, the advanced recipe file is required.
Reading or writing of the device depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
Reading or writing of the device in the utility

LOGGING
FUNCTION

24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value

POINT

24

To create the advanced recipe file

The advanced recipe file is created by the set data of [Advanced Recipe].
Configure the setting for [Advanced Recipe] in advance.

RECIPE

24.3.1 Settings

Creating an advanced recipe file and storage area

(1) Automatically creating when reading/writing the device value depending on the status of the
device (ON/OFF)
When the advanced recipe file does not exist at the read/write of the device value, the advanced recipe file is
automatically created.
As the advanced recipe file is automatically created, creating operation for the advanced recipe file is
unnecessary.

26

Set [Recipe File] to [Use] on the [basic] tab of [Advanced Recipe] in GT Designer3.
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

1.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

To create the advanced recipe file, operate any of the following method.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

2.

When the device value of a controller is read or written, an advanced recipe file is automatically created.

POINT
Timing of which an advanced recipe file is automatically created
The advanced recipe file is automatically created only when the advanced recipe file set for [Recipe File] does not
exist.
The existing advanced recipe file is not overwritten.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

24.3.6 Precautions

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

[Recipe File] setting

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 31

(2) Creating in the utility

The following explains the procedure for creating the advanced recipe file when configuring the advanced recipe
setting in GT Designer3 and reading or writing device value of the controller in the utility only.
For utility operation, refer to the following manual.
Users Manual for the GOT used

1.

Touch the [Create G1P] button on the advanced recipe information in the utility.

2.

Select the advanced recipe setting.

3.

Touch the [Next] button to create an advanced recipe file.

Touch the Create button.

G1P

Select the Advanced Recipe Setting.

Touch the Next button.

POINT
To create the advanced recipe file in the utility
Configure the advanced recipe setting in GT Designer3 and download the data to the GOT.
The advanced recipe file is created by the advanced recipe settings downloaded to the GOT.

Project data of Advanced

Recipe Setting

24 - 32

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

The created advanced recipe file is a binary file (*.G1P).

To display or edit the advanced recipe file on the personal computer, convert the file to a Unicode text file or CSV file.
The following methods show how to convert the advanced recipe file to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
Using GT Designer3
Using the utility
Using a device

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Displaying or editing the created advanced recipe file on the personal computer

23

1.

Store the binary file on the personal computer with any of the following methods.
Transferring the file with GT Designer3
Select [Communication] [Read from GOT] [Communication with GOT] from the menu, and transfer
the file to the personal computer.
Storing the file with a CF card or USB memory
Store the advanced recipe file in the CF card or USB memory. Read out the file data stored in the CF
card or USB memory by the personal computer.

24

RECIPE

Convert the binary file stored in a CF card to the Unicode text file or CSV file by using GT Designer3.
The file conversion on GT Designer3 reduces the additional load on the GOT.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file in GT Designer3

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

2.

CF card/
USB memory

CF card/
USB memory

26

Advanced
recipe file

Select [Tools]
[File Conversion]
[Advanced Recipe File Conversion] from the menu to display the
setting dialog box on GT Designer3.
Set the following items and convert the binary file to the Unicode text file or CSV file.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Advanced
recipe file

Destination File

Model

Type

Select the type of the file to be converted. (CSV/Unicode Text/G1P)

Path

Specify the path of the file to be converted.

Target files in the

same path

Select this item to convert all files (any of CSV/Unicode Text/G1P) that has the same
path as the path of the file to be converted.
With this item selected, the conversion log is automatically recorded for the specified
path.
With the conversion log, the full path of the converted file, the conversion result (OK/NG),
and the file creation date can be checked.

Type

Select the type of the converted file (CSV/Unicode Text/G1P).

Path

Displays the path (same as the path of the file to be converted) where the converted file
is saved.

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Source of
Conversion

Description

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Item

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 33

3.

Display or edit the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer.
The record attribute, the record comment, and the device value can only be edited on the Unicode text file
or CSV file.

1)

2) 3) 4)

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)
: Can be edited : Cannot be edited

No.

Item

Description

Can be or cannot
be edited

1)

Recipe No.

Displays the recipe No.

2)

Recipe name

Displays the recipe name.

3)

Setting device
number

Displays the number of devices.

4)

Record number

Displays the number of records.

5)

Line number

Displays the row number.

6)

Device comment

Displays the device comment.

Device type

Displays the device type.

BIT: Bit
BIN16: Signed BIN16 or unsigned BIN16
BIN32: Signed BIN32 or unsigned BIN32
BCD16: BCD16
BCD32: BCD32

8)

Display type

Displays the display type.

BIN: Binary
DEC: Signed decimal
UNSIGNED_DEC: Unsigned decimal

9)

Device size

Displays the device data size. (Unit: byte)

Bit device or word device (16 bit): 2
word device (32 bit): 4

10)

Record No.

Displays the record No.

11)

Record comment

Displays the record comment. Edit the comment.

7)

Displays the record attribute. Edit the attribute.

12)

Record attribute

Blank : Applicable to edit device value*1 *3

P : Not applicable to edit device value*1 *3

N : No device value*2 *3
13)

Record update time

Displays updated time of the records in the advanced recipe file by being read the device value.

14)

Device value

Displays the device value. Edit the value.

*1

*2
*3

Make sure to set the value into the device value area of the above 14). (The blank is not allowed.)
When the value is not set, an error occurs at converting the Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file (*. G1P) on GT
Designer3.
Do not set the value into the device area of the above 14). (Make the blank.)
Even if the value set, the set value is cleared when converting the Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file on GT Designer3.
Correspondence to the record attribute that is set in GT Designer3 and displayed in the Unicode text file or CSV file
Operations when setting the record attribute

24 - 34

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

5.

To use the advanced recipe file edited in the personal computer again, convert the Unicode text file or CSV
file to the binary file (*.G1P).
Open the [Advanced Recipe File Conversion] dialog box at the step 2., and convert the Unicode text file or
CSV file to the binary file.
Save the binary file in the CF card or USB memory, and install the CF card and USB memory in the GOT.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

4.

22

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

CF card/
USB memory

24

Advanced
recipe file

POINT
(1) Converting Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file (*.G1P) in GT Designer3
For the conversion, the binary file is required.
When the binary file does not exist, store the binary file in the same hierarchy as that of the Unicode text file or
CSV file.
(2) Downloading advanced recipe file (Personal computer
GOT)
The advanced recipe file cannot be downloaded to GT Designer3.
To transfer the advanced recipe file from the personal computer to the GOT, use a CF card or USB memory.

RECIPE

CF card/
USB memory

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Advanced
recipe file

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 35

(2) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file in the utility
Convert the binary file stored in a CF card to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
The Unicode text file and CSV file can be created without GT Designer3.
For utility operation, refer to the following.
Users Manual for the GOT used

1.

Select the G1P file for [Advanced Recipe Information] in the utility, and touch [G1P CSV] or [G1P TXT]
for the conversion.

G1P

2.

TXT Button

Store the converted Unicode text file or CSV file on the personal computer with any of the following
methods.
Transferring the file with GT Designer3
Select [Communication]
[Read from GOT]
[Communication with GOT] from the menu, and transfer
the file to the personal computer.
Storing the file with a CF card or USB memory
Store the advanced recipe file in the CF card or the USB memory. Read out the file data in the CF card
or the USB memory by using the personal computer.

Advanced
recipe file

3.

CSV , G1P

CF card/
USB memory

CF card/
USB memory

Advanced
recipe file

Display the converted Unicode text file or CSV file and edit the file by using the personal computer.

POINT
Converting a Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file (*.G1P) in the utility
The file cannot be converted in the utility.
To use the Unicode text file or CSV file on the GOT again, convert the Unicode text file or CSV file to the binary file
(*.G1P).

24 - 36

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

After the settings, convert the files to CSV files or Unicode text files by turning on b8 (Advanced recipe file
convert signal) of the external control device.

POINT
Precautions for file conversion with the external control device
Before converting an advanced recipe file, write the recipe No. for the advanced recipe to be converted into the
recipe No. storage device.
Even though b8 (Advanced recipe file convert signal) of the external control device turns on before writing the
recipe No., the advanced recipe file cannot be converted to a Unicode text file or CSV file.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

By turning on the specified device, the binary file stored in a CF card or USB memory can be converted to the
Unicode text file or CSV file.
To convert the file to the Unicode text file or CSV file, configure the following settings.
External control information (Advanced Recipe Common Setting)
File conversion external control (Advanced recipe (Basic tab))

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(3) How to create a Unicode text file or CSV file with a device

24

RECIPE

24.3.1 Settings

In the utility, the following operations are available for the advanced recipe file.
Creating folder
Deleting folder
Copying file
Deleting file
Renaming file
Moving file
Creating file
Saving record
Loading record
Matching record
Delete device value Converting G1P
CSV/Unicode text
The recipe can be operated without designing dedicated screen or reading out the file to the personal computer.
For utility operation, refer to the following manual.
Users Manual for the GOT used

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Operation in the utility

26

Item

Description
The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is created.
The folder is created for each line or line of products, and the advanced recipe file can be
managed.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(1) Advanced recipe file operation

27
Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 1

Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 2

Advanced recipe
file storage
folder for line 3

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Creating folder

Management with creating folder for each line or line of products!

The folder that stores the advanced recipe file is deleted.

Copying file

The advanced recipe file is copied.

Use it when the advanced recipe file is backed up.

Deleting file

The advanced recipe file is deleted.

Renaming file

The advanced recipe file is renamed.

Moving file

The advanced recipe file is moved to other folder.

Use it when the advanced recipe file is made backup.
The advanced recipe file is newly created.

Creating file

29

24.3.4 Creating an advanced recipe file and storage area

CSV/Unicode text

The binary file (*.G1P) is converted to the Unicode text file or CSV file.
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Converting G1P

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Deleting folder

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 37

(2) Operation for executing the recipe

Item

Load record
GOT

PLC

Save record
PLC

GOT

Description
The device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value) is written to controller device.
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
The device value of controller is read and stored in the specified record.
24.3.3 Reading or writing of device value
This operation checks whether the device value in the advanced recipe file (selected record value) matches
with the device value of controller.
Use it to check whether the read value is reflected to the advanced recipe file.

Device
D10
D11
D12

Match records
GOT

Record 1 Record 2

PLC

500
600
700

Check whether
they are matched!

100
200
300

D10 500
D11 600
D12 700

Advanced recipe file

Touch !

The device value (selected record value) in the advanced recipe file is deleted.
When the device value is deleted, the record attribute will be status for not setting device value.
Operations when setting the record attribute

Delete device value

Device
D10
D11
D12

Record 1 Record 2
500
600
700

100
200
300

Advanced recipe file

24 - 38

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Delete the selected record device value!

In the advanced recipe function, the presence/absence of device value setting for each record or device value in the
advanced recipe file can be changed.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
24.3.1 Settings

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Operations when setting the record attribute

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

(3) When device values are not set ([Not to set the device value])
By setting the record with no device value, file capacity can be saved.

24

(a) For reading

RECIPE

(Reading to record 2)

Device

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

150
250
350

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Previously setting when not

setting the device value.
When read the device value,
the read value is stored.

(b) For writing

26

Device

Record 1

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(Writing to record 2)

Record 2
Not setting of device value
For not device value setting,
write can be performed.

D10 :
D11 :
D12 :

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

By storing the read device value in the record of [Not to set the device value], the status of the device value
setting is enabled, and the device value can be written.
(Reading to record 2)

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

150
250
350

28
Not setting

Setting

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Device

D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350

(Writing to record 2)

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

150
250
350

Device value setting

Write is allowed!

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Device

29
D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 39

(4) When the device value is not overwritten

By setting [Not to overwrite the device value in a recipe file], the record cannot be overwritten.
Use a special record for being dedicated to store the value for writing to a controller device.
(a) For reading

(Reading to record 2)

Device

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

100
200
300

For not allowed to overwrite,

read is not allowed.

D10 : 150
D11 : 250
D12 : 350

(b) For writing

(Writing to record 2)

Device

Record 1

Record 2

D10
D11
D12

500
600
700

100
200
300

Write is allowed!

D10 : 100
D11 : 200
D12 : 300

POINT
(1) For check method of record attribute
Record attribute can be checked in the advanced recipe information of the utility.
For utility operation, refer to the following.
Users Manual for the GOT used

(2) Corresponding to the setting of record attribute, utility, and record attribute displayed in the CSV file,
Unicode text file, or others
Setting for record attribute of GT
Designer3
(Not setting)
Device Values are not set.
Device Values are not overwritten in Recipe
file.

24 - 40

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Record attribute displayed in utility

Record attribute displayed in CSV file/

Unicode text file

(Blank)

(Blank)

VP

To check whether an error occurs or not, check [External notification Device] for [Advanced Recipe Common Setting].

(1) External Notification Device

Storing the executing status into controller device can check the executing status of advanced recipe function.
When error occurs, the device value of controller cannot be read/written.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Detection and corrective actions for advanced recipe process error

23

24.3.1 Settings
(a) Details for device
Signal name

Description

Set the device to store information regarding to the advanced recipe function.

Device*1

Record loading
notification signal

ON : Writing the value to controller device

OFF : Completion of writing, or advanced recipe process error occurs.

b1

Record saving
notification signal

ON : Reading the device value of controller

OFF : Completion of reading, or advanced recipe process error occurs.

b2 to b3

Must not be used

Record load
complete signal

ON : Completion of writing the value to controller device

OFF : At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.

b5

Record save
complete signal

ON : Completion of reading the device value of controller

OFF : At reset operation (ON to OFF) by user, or starting next read.

b8

Reserved

ON : Converting the advanced recipe file.

OFF : Converting the advanced recipe file is not executed.

Must not be used

b14

Advanced recipe
information
displaying signal

ON : Displaying advanced recipe information in utility

OFF : Completion of advanced recipe information of utility

b15

Advanced recipe
process error
notification signal

ON : Advanced recipe process error is occurring.

OFF : Advanced recipe process error is not occurring.
Or, eliminate the causes of error and turn on the advanced recipe process
error clear signal (external control device. b15).

Stores the recipe No. of the device that value being written. (1 to 32767)
The stored recipe No. is updated when the reading or writing of the device
value is started.

Stores the record No. of the device that value being written. (1 to 2000)
The stored record No. is updated when the reading or writing of the device
value is started.

Device*1
Record No.
Notification
*1

*1

25

Advanced recipe file

converting
notification signal

b9 to b13

Recipe No.
Notification

Device

RECIPE

b4

b6 to b7

When [External notification Device] is set, [Recipe No. Notification Device] and [Record No. Notification Device] are set in
sequential device order.

(b) Timing of ON/OFF

Timing of ON/OFF for each signal is shown.

26

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

At being normally completed

Next read/write is started.

ON
Read/Write trigger

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

External Notification

b0

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Bit No.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Device

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

24.3.5

OFF
ON

Record saving/loading notification signal

(External notification device. b0/b1)

OFF

Record save/load complete signal

(External notification device. b4/b5)

OFF

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

ON

Advanced recipe process error notification

OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 41

 At being faulty completed

ON
OFF

Read/write trigger

ON
Record saving/loading notification signal
(External notification device. b0/b1)

OFF

Record save/load complete signal

(External notification device. b4/b5)

OFF

When error occurs,

read/write is not allowed. *1

Error occurs!

ON

Advanced recipe process error notification

OFF
signal (External notification device. b15)
*1

When the causes of the advanced recipe process error is eliminated even if the advanced recipe process error notification signal
turns on, read/write of device value is allowed.

POINT
Operations when multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously
For details when another trigger device conditions are satisfied while the Advanced recipe information displaying
signal turns on, refer to the following.
24.3.6 Precautions

(2) Corrective actions for advanced recipe process error

Eliminate the advanced recipe process error with the following procedure.

1.

When error occurs, the advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device. b15) turns
on, and the system alarm occurs.
Check the message of system alarm.

(Display example)

2.

Eliminate the causes of error according to the message of system alarm.

3.

Reset the system alarm.

For the advanced system alarm: 10.4 Advanced System Alarm Display
For the system alarm display: 10.7 System Alarm Display

4.

Turn on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15) to perform error reset.
When turning on the advanced recipe process error clear signal (external control device. b15), the
advanced recipe process error notification signal (external output device. b15) is turned off.
ON
Advanced recipe process
error notification signal
(External output device. b15)

OFF

Error occurs!
Advanced recipe process
error clear signal
(External control device. b15)

24 - 42

OFF

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

ON

22

Precautions

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

24.3.6

This section explains the precautions for using the advanced recipe function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of advanced recipe settings

23

Up to 2048 advanced recipe settings can be configured in one project.

(2) Devices that are set in the advanced recipe common setting

Device of system information

(3) Estimate of processing time

24

It takes processing time depending on block numbers of advanced recipe setting.

To reduce processing, decrease the block number.
(Reference value)
QCPU and CPU directly connection (device points: 32767 points setting, transmission speed: 115200bps)
For 1 block setting : Approximately 17 seconds
For 2048 block settings : Approximately 4 minutes

(4) Folder to store the recipe file

Do not overlap the file of other functions (advanced alarm function or other functions) with folder to store.
When performing the overlapped setting, the recipe file and the file of other functions are stored together in
folder.
The file of other functions is not displayed in utility.
For it, as the file in folder cannot be deleted, deleting folder in utility will not be allowed.

(5) Using the utility

When operating the advanced recipe in the utility, set [Recipe Name].
When [Recipe Name] is not set, only the recipe No. is displayed at creating the advanced recipe file in utility.

RECIPE

Switching station No. device

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Screen switching device

LOGGING
FUNCTION

[External Control Information] and [External Notification Information] cannot be set the same device.
The above devices cannot be overlapped with the following devices.

26

the exported file with a text editor or Microsoft Excel 2007.

(7) Number of settings

When the total memory capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the advanced
recipe function cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points and number of records, may not be set.
Make the settings within the free user space available for the GOT.
For calculating the setting data sizes of the advanced recipe function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.1 Data Capacity List
For the free user space available for the GOT, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

When an advanced recipe file with more than 251 records is exported to a Unicode text file or CSV file, display

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(6) Import/export

The setting size and the file size of the advanced recipe are considerably affected by the device comment.
Therefore, they get larger when the device comment is set for each device.

(9) The relationship between the record number and the setting size
When treating many data groups in the recipe, using the record to reduce the setting size is better than
increasing the setting number of the advanced recipe function.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

(8) The relationship between the device comment and the setting size

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Example: Setting size when 200 data groups are treated

(1 record 200 setting) size > (200 records 1 setting) size

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 43

(10) Recipe device setting value

When the default value is not required for the recipe, set [Not to set the device value] on GT Designer3. Setting
this item reduces the setting data size. (The file data size is not changed.)

Precautions for OS
To use the advanced recipe function, install the option function OS (Advanced recipe) to the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

To use the advanced function with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT. (No option function board
is required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)
Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board
For the GT16, no option function board is required.

Precautions for use

(1) Record number applicable to read/write
Record number applicable to read/write in one setting is one record.
Multiple records cannot be read/written simultaneously.

Read/write is performed
in record unit.

(2) When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously

(a) When other trigger conditions are satisfied while reading/writing, the satisfied trigger conditions are
ignored.
ON

Write trigger*1
(Example: Recipe No.1 trigger
of advanced recipe setting)

OFF

Write trigger*1
(Example: Recipe No.2 trigger
of advanced recipe setting)

OFF
ON

Ignored!

Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device. b0)
*1 Correspond to trigger are shown below.
The read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe Common Setting]
The read/write trigger with device set in [Advanced Recipe]

24 - 44

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Executed!

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(b) When trigger conditions of different recipe No. are satisfied simultaneously
Execute reading/writing prior to recipe of small number.
ON
Write trigger of advanced
recipe setting (recipe No.1)

OFF

Write trigger of advanced

recipe setting (recipe No.2)

OFF

Write trigger of advanced

recipe setting (recipe No.3)

OFF

ON

23

ON

Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device.b0)

(c)

LOGGING
FUNCTION

ON

Processing for Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1
recipe No.2
recipe No.3

24

When trigger conditions of read/write are satisfied simultaneously

Execute prior to read.
Execute write after completion of reading.

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.1)

OFF

Read trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.1)

OFF

RECIPE

ON

ON

25

OFF

Record loading notification signal

(External notification device.b0)

OFF

ON

(d) When trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] and [Advanced Recipe] are satisfied
simultaneously
Execute with prior to trigger conditions of advanced recipe setting.
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced
Recipe Common Setting]

OFF

Write trigger of
[Advanced Recipe Setting]

OFF

ON

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Record saving notification signal

(External notification device.b1)

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

ON

27

Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device.b0)

(3) When simultaneous satisfied trigger conditions are not satisfied before the processing

ON

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.1)

OFF

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.2)

OFF

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.3)

OFF

ON

29

ON

Processing
for recipe No.1

BARCODE
FUNCTION

When conditions of recipe

No.3 are not satisfied at
the processing, the processing
is not executed.

ON

Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device.b0)

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

When multiple trigger conditions are satisfied simultaneously, the processing is executed because they are not
satisfied before processing turn has come.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

ON

Processing for
recipe No.2

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 45

(4) When the trigger conditions are satisfied while displaying advanced recipe information in utility
The trigger conditions of [Advanced Recipe Common Setting] or [Advanced Recipe] are ignored.
The presence/absence of utility operation can be checked in [External Notification Device] of [Advanced Recipe
Common Setting].
ON
Write trigger of [Advanced
Recipe Common Setting]

OFF

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting]

OFF

All kinds of trigger are ignored

while the advanced recipe
information displaying signal
turns on.

ON
Advanced recipe information
OFF
displaying signal
(External notification device.b14)

(5) For executing multiple recipes in order

Make the status of the trigger conditions satisfied until executing the processing.
When performing the process again after completion of the process, make the status of the trigger conditions to
not satisfied, and then satisfied again.
Do not execute the
process until trigger
conditions will be status
of not satisfied once.

ON
Write trigger of [Advanced
Recipe Setting] (recipe No.1)

OFF
ON

Write trigger of [Advanced

Recipe Setting] (recipe No.2)

OFF
ON

Record loading notification signal OFF

(External notification device.b0)

Processing for
recipe No.1

Processing for
recipe No.2

Processing for
recipe No.1

HINT
Useful method for executing multiple recipes in order
Turn off satisfied trigger conditions (trigger conditions are satisfied at ON
Set the trigger device to OFF
ON (trigger conditions are not satisfied)

OFF) in the advanced recipe setting.

OFF at the status.

ON
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe Setting] OFF
(recipe No.1)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
Write trigger of [Advanced Recipe Setting] OFF
(recipe No.2)
(Trigger conditions are satisfied at OFF.)
Record loading notification signal
(External notification device.b0)

ON

ON

OFF
Processing for Processing for
recipe No.1
recipe No.2

Processing for Processing for

recipe No.1
recipe No.2

When setting the same devices to multiple trigger devices, multiple recipes can be executed depending on the
status of one device (OFF
ON
OFF) in order.

(6) Saving a file

A CF card is required to save the file.
Memory capacity of the CF card must be larger than the file data size of the advanced recipe file to be saved.
For the file data size that can be saved in the CF card, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.4 Figures and Data Capacity

24 - 46

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

Change read/write target (recipe No., record No.) after record load/save complete signal turns on.
When changing before record load/save complete signal turns on, next read/write may not be normally
performed.

(8) When read/write cannot be performed

When the binary file (*.G1P) of the file name is the same as that of the file created in different project, the device
value cannot be read/written.
Delete the binary file (*.G1P), and then execute the read/write of the device value.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(7) When changing read/write target

23

When the advanced recipe file setting in [Recipe File] exists, the change is not reflected to the advanced recipe
file even if changing the setting (device value, number of records, and others) in GT Designer3.
For it, device value cannot be read/written in the changed settings.
When reading/writing device value in the changed settings, create the advanced recipe file with the following
procedure again.

3.

RECIPE

2.

Perform either of the following operations in utility.

Delete the advanced recipe file.
Change the file name of the advanced recipe file.
Move the existing advanced recipe file to other area.

24

Download the changed advanced recipe setting into GOT.

25

Create the advanced recipe file.

When reading/writing device value depending on the status of device (ON/OFF)
As reading/writing device value, the file is automatically create.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

1.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(9) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already

When reading/writing device value in utility

The advanced recipe file is created in utility.

26

(10) Setting change when an error occurs

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

When an error occurs, a recipe file may be created.

When changing the setting in GT Designer3 and reading or writing of the device value with the changed
settings, create the advanced recipe file again.
(9) For setting change when the advanced recipe file exists already

(11) Reading/writing of the device value in advanced recipe file moved or renamed
Match [Recipe File] of the advanced recipe setting to the file of moved or renamed.
Download the advanced recipe setting to the GOT after the setting change.

27

Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

(13) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including MicrosoftExcel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer3.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For the precautions for using the Unicode text file, refer to the following.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(12) Unicode text file converted in the utility or GT Designer3

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

24 - 47

24 - 48

24.3 Advanced Recipe Function

TRIGGER ACTION

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

25. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION

The device data transfer function enables the GOT to read values of specified devices and write the values into the other
devices at any timing or by trigger intervals.
Trigger condition : When D0.b0 turns on
Source device
: D100 of controller 1
Destination device: R100 of controller 2
D0.b0: 0

Condition satisfied !!

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

Controller 2
Transferring device data

RECIPE

Destination device
R100: 0 200

Controller 1

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Source device
D100: 200

Collecting controller data without sequence program

With the device data transfer function, the GOT can collect controller data without a sequence program.
Example 1) When collecting controller data without device data transfer function
A sequence program is required for collecting controller data. (The GOT monitors the data only.)

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Collecting data (Sequence program)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27
Sequence program for collecting data

Example 2) Collecting controller data with device data transfer function

By setting the device data transfer, a sequence program is not required.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Collecting data (Device data transfer function)

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Device data transfer setting

25 - 1

25.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Device Data Transfer] from the menu to display the [Device Data Transfer List] dialog box.

The set data for the device data transfer is displayed in a list and controlled.
Up to 255 device data transfer settings are available.

Item

Description
Set the new data for the device data transfer setting.
Click this button to display the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
Change the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
Click this button to display the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
Copies the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
After clicking this item, set [Destination ID] of the copied data for the device data transfer setting.
Pastes the copied data as the data of the set device data transfer ID in the list.
Deletes the selected data for the device data transfer setting.
Deletes all data for the device data transfer setting.
Closes the [Device Data Transfer List] dialog box.

25 - 2

25.1 Settings

Model

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Device data transfer

(1) Basic tab
Set the device data transfer trigger and the external notification information.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24
Description

Model

Device Data
Transfer ID

Set the device data transfer ID (1 to 255) corresponding to the device data transfer setting to be set.

Device Data
Transfer Name

Set the name of the device data transfer setting.For the device data transfer name, up to 32 characters,
including one-byte and two-byte characters, can be entered.

RECIPE

Item

25.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting

25

Set conditions for transferring device values.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Trigger Type

Select a trigger type for transferring device values.

Rise Fall
Sampling
When [Sampling] is selected, set the interval between executions of the device data
transfer. (1 to 36000)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Trigger Device

26

Set a device for the selected [Trigger Type].

Set this item to select [Rise] or [Fall], or to use the transfer inverting flag device for
[Sampling].
Bit 0 of the device set for [External Control Device] is specified.
When trigger conditions are met, the GOT transfers the source device value to the
destination device.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Device Data
Transfer Trigger

External Control
Device

(2) Device tab

This item is available only when [Rise] or [Fall] is selected.

27

Bit 1 of the device set for [External Control Device] is specified.

When trigger conditions are met, the source and destination devices are inverted.
25.3 External control device

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Transfer Inverting
Flag Device

Set the device for notifying the transfer status.

25.3 External control device

28

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Device Data
Transfer Notification
Signal

Bit 0 of the device set for [External Notification Device] is specified.

The signal notifies that the GOT transfers device data in process.

Device Data
Transfer Error
Notification Signal

Bit 15 of the device set for [External Notification Device] is specified.

The signal notifies that errors occur during transferring device data.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

External Notification
Information

Select this item to set the device that notifies the device data transfer status.
After selecting this item, set the device.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

External Notification
Device

25.1 Settings

25 - 3

(2) Device tab

Set the source device, destination device, and others.

Item

Description
Set the number of blocks (1 to 2048) for device data transfer settings.

Block Number

25.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting

Inserts a block on the selected row.
Cuts, copies, or pastes the selected row.
Clears a comment.

Device data transfer

edit buttons*1

Deletes the selected setting. Select a row to delete the setting.

*1

Reads edited setting data as Unicode text files or CSV files to GT Designer3.

*1

Stores the device data transfer setting data set with GT Designer3 (setting data on
the [Device] tab) as Unicode text files or CSV files.

Displays the source device and the destination device for transferring device data in a list.
Device type

Select a data type of the devices.

Bit
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32 BCD16
BCD32
Real
Set the number of points for devices to be transferred per block.

Points

Device list

Source Device*2

Destination Device*2

Comment

25.1.1 Control of device data transfer setting

The consecutive devices starting from the head device equivalent to the set points
are specified.
The maximum number of points differs depending on [Device type].
1 point: Bit
1 to 250 points: Signed BIN16 /Unsigned BIN16/BCD16
1 to 125 points: Signed BIN32/Unsigned BIN32/BCD32/Real
Set the device with values to be transferred to the destination device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Set the device that stores transferred values read from the source device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set a comment. (Up to 32 characters, including two-byte and one-byte

characters, can be entered.)
The set comment is displayed as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
Displays the offset target and the offset device.
Click the [...] button to display the [Offset setting] dialog box.
(a) Offset setting

Offset

For details of the offset, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting
For details of *1 to *2, refer to the following.

25 - 4

25.1 Settings

Model

22

*1 Import/Export

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited Unicode text file or CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

RECIPE

Exporting to a CSV file

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Editing the exported file

Adding the setting using
Microsoft R Excel, etc.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

Importing to GT Designer3

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The addition is displayed.

POINT
Import/export in multilingual environment
Use a Unicode text file to import/export a file in the multilingual environment. Characters in a file can be correctly
imported/exported when a Unicode text file is used.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

25.1 Settings

25 - 5

*2 Setting same device for source device and destination device

When a device set for the source device is set for the destination device in one device data transfer setting, the GOT
may not correctly transfer the device data.
For setting the same device for the source and destination devices, set a device for the source device in one device
data transfer setting, and set the same device for the destination device in another device data transfer setting.
The following shows a setting example.
Example: When transferring values of D100, D105, D110 to D110, D115, D120 (D100 is set for the source and
destination devices.)
Device data transfer ID

Trigger type

Trigger device

Number of blocks

Source device

Destination device

Sampling

D1000.b0

D110

D120

Sampling

D1000.b0

D100

D110

D105

D115

When the same trigger device (D1000.b0) is set in multiple device data transfer settings, the GOT executes the
device data transfer with the smallest device data transfer ID first.
The GOT transfers the value of D110 to D120 before transferring the value of D100 to D110. As a result, the GOT can
transfer the value of D110 that is not overwritten with the value of D100 to D120.
Device data transfer ID

Trigger type

Sampling

Trigger device

Number of blocks

D1000.b0

Source device

Destination device

D110

D120

D100

D110

D105

D115

When the above settings are set in one device data transfer setting, the GOT transfers the value of D100 to D110
before transferring the value of D110 to D120, and the value of D110 is overwritten with the value of D100.
After that, the GOT transfers the value of D110 to D120. As a result, the value of D100 is stored in D120.

(a) Offset setting

Set the offset target and the offset device.
When [Bit] is selected for [Device type], and the word device is set for [Source Device] or [Destination
Device] as bit devices, the offset is not available.

Item

25 - 6

Description

Offset Target

Select the offset target.

None
Source
Destination

Offset Device

Set the offset device.

This item can be set when [Offset Target] is set to [Source], [Destination], or [Both].
When [Offset Target] is set to [Both], one offset device can be set for both [Source Device] and
[Destination Device] in common.

25.1 Settings

Both

Model

22

Control of device data transfer setting

The device data transfer function can control multiple device data transfer settings in one project by setting the following
items.
Device Data Transfer ID
Block Number

23

255

Max. 255 IDs

10 100

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Device data transfer ID 1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

25.1.1

24

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

RECIPE

Max. 2048blocks
Max. number of device points
is 2048 (total of all blocks)

25

Device data transfer ID

A device data transfer ID is a number that identifies the corresponding device data transfer setting.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(1) Setting method

The device data transfer ID is set on the [Basic] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
25.1 Settings

(2) Setting range

26

The setting range for the device data transfer ID is 1 to 255.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Block
A block is a setting unit for setting random device numbers or different device types.
The following settings are available by setting device numbers or device types per block.
Setting different types of devices, including bit data and word data, in one setting
Setting consecutive device number settings and random device number settings in one setting

27

(1) Setting method

The number of blocks is set on the [Device] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box.
The following shows an example of setting bit devices and word devices (signed BIN16 and signed BIN32) in
one device data transfer setting.
2 Set [Device Type], [Points], [Source Device], and

[Destination Device] per block.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

25.1 Settings

28

1 Specify the number of

SCRIPT FUNCTION

blocks.

Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Block 4

29
(2) Setting range
BARCODE
FUNCTION

For each device data transfer setting, up to 2048 blocks can be set.

25.1 Settings

25 - 7

POINT
(1) Maximum device points
Up to 32767 device points can be set for each device data transfer setting.
Each bit device and word device is counted as one point.
One double-word device is counted as two points.
When multiple blocks are set, the device points for a device data transfer setting are the total device points of
all the blocks.
Example)
In the case of block 1: 30 points, block 2: 70 points and block 3: 120 points
The number of device points in this setting is counted as 220 points (30 + 70 + 120).
(2) When setting random devices
One device can be set for one block.
Set random devices in different blocks.
(3) When device type is bit
The device that can be set for one block is one point (fixed).
(4) Maximum device points when device point for each block is one point
When the device point for each block is set to one point as below, up to 2048 device points can be set. (That
is because up to 2048 blocks can be set for one device data transfer setting.)
Example) When setting all device types to bit
Up to 2048 blocks can be set for
one device data transfer setting.

When the device type is set to [Bit], only one point can be set for one block.
When the device types for all the blocks are set to [Bit], up to 2048 points
can be set.
(Because up to 2048 blocks can be set.)

25 - 8

25.1 Settings

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

25.2 Relevant Settings

The device data transfer function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings.

GOT internal devices

23

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

Model

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Setting item

Turning on the signal clears the error device data transfer ID and the device data
transfer error count (Device data transfer error clear signal)

GS510.b0

Turning on the signal clears the device data transfer processing time, device data
transfer minimum processing time, and device data transfer maximum processing time.
(Device data transfer processing time clear signal)

GS510.b1

Storing the device data transfer ID with an error when an error occurs during
transferring device data (Error device data transfer ID)

GS642

Storing the number of error occurrences during transferring device data (Device data
transfer error count)

GS643

Storing the processing time for transferring device data (Device data transfer
processing time)

GS644

RECIPE

Function

Storing the device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer when GS644
stores the processing time (Device data transfer ID)

GS645

25

Storing the minimum processing time among data stored in the device data transfer
processing time (Device data transfer min. processing time)

GS646

Storing the device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer when GS646
stores the minimum processing time (Device data transfer ID (min. processing time)

GS647

Storing the maximum processing time among data stored in the device data transfer
processing time (Device data transfer max. processing time)

GS648

Storing the device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer when GS648
stores the maximum processing time (Device data transfer ID (max. processing time)

GS649

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

24

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

25.2 Relevant Settings

25 - 9

25.3 Actions
The device data transfer function is available by setting the devices or the set sampling cycle. ([Rise]/[Fall]/[Sampling])
25.1 Device data transfer
The following devices are available for the device data transfer function.
External control device
External notification device

External control device

The device is a trigger to execute the device data transfer.

(1) Trigger device (External control device .b0)

The device transfers the source device value to the destination device.

(2) Transfer inverting flag device (External control device .b1)

The device inverts the source device and the destination device.
With inverting the source device and the destination device, data can be transferred from the source device to
the destination device and vice versa by one device data transfer setting.
The following shows the relation among the transfer inverting flag device, source device, and destination device.
(a) When transfer inverting flag device is off
The GOT transfers device data from the source device to the destination device.
Source device:
GD100

Transferring device data

Destination device:
D100

(b) When transfer inverting flag device is on

The GOT transfers device data from the destination device to the source device.
Source device:
GD100

Transferring device data

Destination device:
D100

POINT
(1) Alternative to the script function
Substituting the device data transfer function for the bmov instruction of the script function is available.
With the device data transfer function, the GOT communicates with controllers only when trigger conditions
are met. Therefore, the GOT has no communication loads by always monitoring the device used for the script
function.
For the script function, refer to the following.
28. SCRIPT FUNCTION
(2) Timing to invert the source device and destination device
Turn on the transfer inverting flag device before turning on the trigger device, or turn on the transfer inverting
flag device and the trigger device at once by the word data.

25 - 10

25.3 Actions

(1) Device data transfer notification signal (External notification device.b0)

The signal notifies that the device data transfer is in process.
When the device data transfer trigger condition is met, the signal (.b0) turns on.
When the device data transfer trigger condition is not met and the device data transfer is completed, the
signal (.b0) turns off.
The next device data transfer can be executed when the processing device data transfer is completed, even if
the signal is on.

(2) Device data transfer error notification signal (External notification device.b15)
The signal notifies if errors occur during transferring device data.
The signal (.b15) turns on when errors occur during transferring device data.
The signal (.b15) turns off when the device data transfer executed after an error occurs is correctly
completed.
The following shows the actions and corrective actions for the device data transfer when an error occurs.
When an error occurs, the following actions are executed.

OFF
ON

25

ON

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

OFF

Error
occurred

Transferring device data (GOT)

ON

Device data transfer error notification signal

(Example: External notification device. b15 OFF
of device data transfer ID 1)

26

Error device data transfer ID

(GS642)

Device data transfer error count

(GS643)

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Device data transfer notification signal

(Example: External notification device .b0
of device data transfer ID 1)

ON

27

ON

3.
4.

The error device data transfer ID (GS642) stores the device data transfer ID corresponding to the device
data transfer with the error.
The number of error occurrences with the device data transfer is counted.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

2.

The device data transfer error notification signal (external notification device.b15) turns on.

A system alarm occurs.

When the system alarm occurs, check the message and remove the error causes.
For system alarms and corrective actions, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for the GOT used

5.
6.

Execute the device data transfer again.

29

When the transferring is normally completed, the device data transfer error notification signal (external
notification device.b15) turns off.
For clearing the error device data transfer ID (GS642) and the device data transfer error count (GS643),
turn on the device data transfer error clear signal (GS510.b0).
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
25.3 Actions

25 - 11

BARCODE
FUNCTION

1.

OFF

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Device data transfer error clear signal

(GS510.b0)

24

RECIPE

ON
Device data transfer trigger
(Example: Device data transfer ID 1)

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

The GOT can output the device data transfer status to devices.
Doing so enables checking the execution status of the device data transfer function.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

External notification device

25.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the device data transfer function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of device data transfer settings
Up to 255 device data transfer settings can be configured in one project.

(2) Estimate of processing time

The processing time depends on the number of blocks for the device data transfer setting.
For shortening the processing time, reduce the number of blocks.
(Reference value)
Connecting to QCPU with direct CPU connection (Device points: 32767, transmission speed: 115200bps)
When the number of blocks is 1: Approximately 31 seconds
When the number of blocks is 2048: Approximately 159 minutes

(3) Number of settings

When the total memory capacity of the object settings exceed the user space of the GOT in size, the device data
transfer function cannot be used.
The maximum number of all the settings, including device points, may not be set.
Make the settings within the free user space available for the GOT.
For calculating the setting data size of the device data transfer function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.1.1 Data Capacity List
For the free space of the GOT user area, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 7.1 Transferring Data between GOT and Personal Computer

(4) Comments and setting data size

[Comment] set on the [Device] tab in the [Device Data Transfer] dialog box significantly affects the setting data
size of the device data transfer.
Therefore, setting comments for each device increases the setting data size.

(5) Changing [Device type]

Set [Device type] before setting [Source Device] and [Destination Device].
When the set [Device type] is changed to a device type with a different data length, settings for [Source Device]
and [Destination Device] are cleared.
Example 1) When data length is different between before and after changing [Device type]
Before change
Signed BIN16

After change

Result
Settings for [Source Device] and [Destination Device] are cleared because the data
length is changed from 16 bits to 32 bits.

Real

Example 2) When data length is the same between before and after changing [Device type]
Before change
Signed BIN16

After change
BCD16

Result
Settings for [Source Device] and [Destination Device] are not changed because the
data length is the same.

Precautions for OS
To use the device data transfer function, install the extended function OS (Device Data Transfer) on the GOT.

25 - 12

25.4 Precautions

(2) When the device data are not transferred as required

The device data may not be transferred correctly due to the following causes or others.
The communication time between the GOT and a controller takes time because of high device points to be
transferred.
Two or more trigger conditions are met during a device data transfer.
Functions other than the device data transfer function, including the logging function and recipe function, are
set.
When the device data is not transferred, take any of the following actions.
When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], reduce the device points for one device data transfer setting
enabled with short intervals. (Set device data transfer settings enabled with long intervals separately from
those enabled with short intervals.)

Devices to be transferred
D101
D103
D105
D107
D109

26

D201
D203
D205
D207
D209

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

D200
D202
D204
D206
D208

Divide the settings.

Devices to be transferred
D100
D102
D104
D106
D108

D200
D202
D204
D206
D208

Setting with short intervals

27

Device data transfer setting

(Device data transfer ID 2)
Interval: 100 ( 100ms)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Device data transfer setting

(Device data transfer ID 1)
Interval: 10 ( 100ms)

Devices to be transferred
D101
D103
D105
D107
D109

25

D201
D203
D205
D207
D209

28

Setting with long intervals

Make sure that the trigger condition is met when the device data transfer notification signal is off.
25.3 External notification device

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Set a higher transmission speed in the communication detail settings if the transmission speed can be
changed.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

D100
D102
D104
D106
D108

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Device data transfer setting

(Device data transfer ID 1)
Interval: 10 ( 100ms)

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

The device data transfer cannot be executed with some GOT statuses.
The device data transfer cannot be executed during the following processing.
The GOT downloads project data.
The GOT installs OSs.
The GOT restarts.
When the device data transfer is interrupted because of the above processing, values in the source device and
destination device for the transfer are not synchronized.
When the device data transfer is interrupted, execute the device data transfer again after the GOT completes
the above processing.

RECIPE

(1) Device data transfer and GOT status

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for use

25.4 Precautions

25 - 13

(3) When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met

(a) When trigger condition for another device data transfer setting is met during device data transfer
The GOT cannot detect that the trigger condition for another device data transfer setting is met.
ON
Device data transfer trigger
(Example: Device data transfer ID 1)

OFF
ON

Device data transfer trigger

(Example: Device data transfer ID 2)

OFF
ON

Device data transfer notification signal

(Example: External notification device .b0 OFF
of device data transfer ID 1)

Not
detected!

Executed!
ON

Device data transfer notification signal

OFF
(Example: External notification device .b0
of device data transfer ID 2)

Transferring device data (GOT)

For ensuring the device data transfer, set [Trigger Type] to [Rise], and establish a handshake with the
trigger device and the device data transfer notification signal.
Device data transfer trigger
(Example: Device data transfer ID 1)

1. ON
OFF
ON

Device data transfer trigger

(Example: Device data transfer ID 2)

OFF

Device data transfer notification signal

(Example: External notification device .b0 OFF
of device data transfer ID 1)

2.
ON

3.

Device data transfer notification signal

(Example: External notification device .b0 OFF
of device data transfer ID 2)

ON

4.
Transferring device data (GOT)

1.
2.
3.
4.

25 - 14

Turn on the device data transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1).
The device data transfer notification signal (Device data transfer ID: 1) turns on. Turn off the device data
transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1), and then turn on the device data transfer trigger (Device data
transfer ID: 2) only.
When the device data transfer is completed and turn off the device data transfer trigger (Device data
transfer ID: 1), the device data transfer notification signal (Device data transfer ID: 1) turns off.
The next device data transfer can be executed. The device data transfer corresponding to the device data
transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 2) turned on in the step 2. is executed.

25.4 Precautions

The GOT executes the device data transfer corresponding to the smallest device data transfer ID first.
ON
Device data transfer trigger
(Example: Device data transfer ID 1)

OFF

ON
Device data transfer trigger
(Example: Device data transfer ID 2)

OFF

Device data transfer trigger

(Example: Device data transfer ID 3)

OFF

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(b) When trigger conditions for different device data transfer IDs are simultaneously met

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

ON

ON
Device data transfer notification signal
OFF
(Example: External notification device .b0
of device data transfer ID 1)

24
ON

RECIPE

Device data transfer notification signal

OFF
(Example: External notification device .b0
of device data transfer ID 2)
ON
Device data transfer notification signal
OFF
(Example: External notification device .b0
of device data transfer ID 3)

Transferring device data (GOT)

When trigger conditions for multiple device data transfer IDs are met after device data transfer is
completed, the GOT executes the device data transfer. The smallest device data transfer ID next to the
device data transfer ID for the completed device data transfer is transferred.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Example) When the device data transfer (Device data transfer ID: 2) is completed (turning on the device
data transfer trigger), and the device data transfer trigger (Device data transfer ID: 1, 3) is met, the GOT
executes the device data transfer (Device data transfer ID: 3).

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

For precautions for using Unicode text files, refer to the following.
Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

(5) Editing exported files

When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, "0" can be deleted with application
functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.
When "0" is deleted and the file is stored, the file cannot be correctly imported into GT Designer3.
When the device with the first character of the device number "0" is set, edit files with applications, including text
editors.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(4) Using Unicode text files

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

25.4 Precautions

25 - 15

25 - 16

25.4 Precautions

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

26. STATUS OBSERVATION FUNCTION

This function enables operations such as turning a device ON/OFF and writing a value when the specified conditions are
satisfied.

Write

24

Operate

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

RECIPE

Condition
satisfied

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

Available setting conditions

Up to two settings are available for the following conditions.
Turning on or off a bit device
Range specification of word device values

26

Turning ON a bit device when the condition is satisfied

Turning ON/OFF a bit device
Reversing a bit device status
Writing a value into a word device
Outputting sounds with external speakers (Only applicable to GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000)

Types of status observation functions

The status observation function can be set with the following two types of monitoring method.
Status observation of project common devices
In one project, the GOT monitors the devices satisfied with the specified conditions.
Status observation of devices in each screen
When the GOT only displays the monitoring target screen, the GOT monitors the devices satisfied with the
specified conditions.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Write or other operations allowed when conditions are satisfied

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

26 - 1

26.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Status Observation] from the menu to display the [Status Observation] dialog box.

Set the monitoring method for the status observation function.

Status observation of the project common devices (Setting in the [Project] tab)
Status observation of the devices in each screen (Setting in the [Screen] tab)

Item

Description

Screen Type
(for screen tab only)

Select a screen for setting the status observation function. (Base Screen/Window Screen)
(For the GT10, [Window Screen] cannot be selected.)

Screen No.
(for screen tab only)

Set the screen number of the screen to configure the status observation function settings.
Click the [Browse] button to check the screen image.

Model

Displays the data (trigger conditions, actions) in a list for the status observation function.

*1

List of Status
Observation
Function data

Adds new data for the status observation function.

Up to 512 settings can be set in one project.
Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box, and set the data for the status
observation function.
Change the selected data for the status observation function.
Click this button to display the [Trigger/Action] dialog box.
Copies the selected data for the status observation function.
Pastes the copied data for the status observation function to the end of the list.
Deletes the selected data for the status observation function.

Observation Cycle
*1

Select the observation cycle for the status observation function. (Ordinary/Sampling)
When selecting [Sampling], set the sampling cycle (time). (1 to 60 second)

To set multiple data for the status observation function, set [N/W No.] and [Station No.] for the [Trigger/Action] dialog box. The
set [N/W No.] and [Station No.] must be the same as those of the multiple data.

POINT
Constant observation for the devices satisfied with set trigger conditions
By setting [Ordinary] for [Observation Cycle], the status of the device set in the [Trigger] tab is monitored. The
status of the device is monitored when END processing of sequence program scan time or ink scan time is
completed.

26 - 2

26.1 Settings

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Trigger/Action
(1) Trigger tab
Set the trigger conditions to execute the status observation function.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

Item

Description

Model

Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.

Up to two triggers can be set. (Setting one trigger only is allowed.)
With two triggers, the status observation function is executed when both triggers are satisfied.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

After setting the trigger, set the device that is used as the trigger.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
ON

Executes operation when the bit device turns on.

OFF

Executes operation when the bit device turns off.

26

Select the data size for the word device. (16bit/32bit)

DataType*1

Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.

Signed BIN Unsighned BIN BCD Real

Specified Range
of Word Device
Value

Set the word device value range to satisfy the trigger conditions.
For the word device value, set the operator in the left, and the constant in the right.
Example)
[<=], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is less than
100.
[==], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is equal to 100.
[!=], [100]: Executes operation when the word device value is not equal to
100.

Word Range

Delete

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Data Size

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Executes operation when the word device value is within the set range.
To use this item, set the following triggers.
Trigger1/Trigger2

Deletes the data of [Trigger2].

Select this item to switch multiple devices to be monitored the devices. (Only for each screen observation)

28

(Fundamentals) 5.3.5 Offset setting

SCRIPT FUNCTION

After selecting this item, set the offset device.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Data size is fixed as 16bits.
*1 The real number can be set only when [32bit] is selected for [Data Size].

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Offset

RECIPE

24

26.1 Settings

26 - 3

(2) Action tab

Set the data of the action for the status observation function.

Item

Description

Model

Select the type of action for the status observation function when the trigger are satisfied.

Action

Momentary

Turns on a bit device only while the triggers are satisfied.

Set

Turns on a bit device.

Reset

Turns off a bit device.

Altimate

Switches the current status of the bit devices (OFF

Data Set (16bit/32bit)

Writes the value to the word device (16 bits/32 bits).

Sound Output

Outputs the sound. (Only the GT15, GT SoftGOT1000)

After selecting this item, set the number for a sound file to be output.
Click the [Browse] button to select the sound in the list.

ON)

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

Set the target device when the trigger is satisfied for status observation function.

Points

Set the number of action devices (points) when the trigger is satisfied.
The maximum number of device points differs according to [Action].
40 points: Momentary/Set/Reset/Altimate
20 points: Data Set (16bit)
10 points: Data Set (32bit)

Data

Select the data type of the data that is written to the device when [Data Set (1616bit)] or
[Data Set(32bit)] is set for [Action]. (For the real number, only the data set (32 bits))
Signed BIN Unsighned BIN BCD Real
Select the setting method of the device.
When more than two points are set for [Points], select [Continuous] or [Random].

Storiong Device

Indirect*1

Select this item to enable writing other word device value into this
word device when the trigger is satisfied.
When two or more points are set in [Points], select [FMOV] or [BMOV].

Continuous

Sets the specified number of devices continuously with starting from

the set device automatically.

Random

Sets the devices one by one arbitrarily.

(This item cannot be selected when the GT10 is used.)

Device Settings

Displays the target devices for when the trigger is satisfied.

Device

Indirect

Fixed*1

26.1 Settings

Displays the target word device to be written to [Device].

Click each column to set the device.

Select this item to enable writing a fixed value into the word device when the trigger is
satisfied.
After selecting this item, set the fixed value.

For details of *1, refer to the following.

26 - 4

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Click each column to set the device.

Device

When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are set, the fixed value or other word device value can be written into the set device.
[Fixed] and [Indirect] can be set simultaneously.
(1)[Fixed]

(2)[Indirect]

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

*1 Fixed and Indirect

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24
Write fixed value(50) into D100 when trigger is satisfied.

Write value of D200 into D100 when trigger is satisfied.

RECIPE

(3)[Fixed] + [Indirect]

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26
Write value of D200 + fixed (50) into D100
when trigger is satisfied.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

26.1 Settings

26 - 5

When two or more setting device points are set for the indirect setting (as shown in above (2), (3)), select the write
action to the device. (When the fixed is set, the fixed value is added to the written value.)
FMOV
When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current value of the word device specified in [Indirect] to the set
device.
BMOV
When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current values of multiple word devices specified in [Indirect] to the set
device.
(1) FMOV

(2) BMOV

When trigger is satisfied, writes D200 value

into D100 to D104.

When trigger is satisfied, writes values of D200

to D204 into D100 to D104 respectively.

26.2 Relevant Settings

The status observation function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the function that is available by the relevant settings.

GOT internal device

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function

26 - 6

Setting item

Keeping on during one cycle from the switching of the base or window screen to the
completion of object processing for status monitoring on the screen (Base screen initial
scan complete signal: write device)

GS0.b2

Keeping on during one cycle from the switching of the base screen to the completion of
object processing for status monitoring on the screen (Base screen initial scan
complete signal: write device)

GS1.b2

26.2 Relevant Settings

Model

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

26.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the status observation function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of status observation settings

23

Up to 512 status observation settings can be configured in one project or screen.

(2) Maximum number of points for the writing action

Data Set (16bit)

20

Data Set (32bit)

10

24

(3) Data size of the status observation function

When data size exceeds 64k bytes, even if the number of status observation settings is fewer than 512, no more
status observation settings can be set.
Change the settings to be the data size less than 64k bytes.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

(4) When the observation cycle does not function as set

(a) When the setting of the observation cycle is not correct
When the object with the offset function specified is set on the screen, the trigger device monitored in the
status observation function is delayed.
When the monitoring of the trigger device is delayed, the observation cycle may not function normally.
Because data collection timing is changed and the data is not collected normally.
Set [Ordinary] for [Observation Cycle] so that the data are normally collected.
(b) For GT10
When [Ordinary] is set for [Observation Cycle], the screen display of monitored device value may be
delayed. To avoid the delay, set [Sampling] for [Observation Cycle].

(5) Trigger device

The status of the device that executes the status observation function (trigger device) must be held for the time
of the status observation cycle or longer.

Precautions for use

RECIPE

40

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Momentary Set Reset Altimate

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Maximum points

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Action

27

(1) Sound output function

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

This function is available for the GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000.

For the sound output, refer to the precautions for the sound output function.
38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

26.3 Precautions

26 - 7

26 - 8

26.3 Precautions

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

27. TIME ACTION FUNCTION

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

The time action function turns on or off a device or writes a value to the device on the set day of week or time.
This function is operated by the day of the week and time set for the GOT.

Turning on or off a bit device of a controller

Start time

End time

ON

OFF

24

RECIPE

ON

Writing a value to a word device of a controller

End time

Write the set value

Write the set value

25

Outputting sounds with an external speaker (Available for only the GT16, the GT15, and
GT SoftGOT1000)
Start time

26

End time

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

The operation
starts.
Sound output

Sound output

Application example
Designated bit device is turned ON on Monday mornings and

Values are written on word devices at the designated time every

turned OFF on Friday evenings.

day.

Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab.
Monday Mornings

Friday Evenings

M10

M10

M10 is turned ON.

M10 is turned OFF.

Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab.
10:00

15:00
D10
100

"100" is written to D10.

D10
200
"200" is written to D10.

played on Friday evenings.

Configure settings on the (1) Time tab and (2) Action tab.

29

Friday Evenings

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Good
morning.

27

28

The sound 1 is played on Monday mornings, and the sound 2 is

Monday Mornings

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

100

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Start time

SCRIPT FUNCTION

OFF

Have a
nice weekend.

27 - 1

27.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Time Action] from the menu to display the [Time Action] dialog box.

Set the data of the action, start time, and end time of the time action.

Item

Description
Displays the [Time Action Attribute] dialog box to set or edit the data of the time action list.
Select the row of data to be set or edited in the list, and then click the [Edit] button.
Deletes the selected data for the time action setting in the list.
Deletes all data for the time action setting in the list.
Select this item to control the data of the time action setting with a device. (To set this item, set [External Control
Device].)
After selecting this item, set each device for [External Control (Common)].

Enable External
Control (Common)

By setting this item, the following actions are enabled.

27.2 Actions
Outputting the data for the time action setting to the external control device
Changing the data for the time action setting with the external control device

External Control
(Common)

27 - 2

Setting No. Device

Set the device to specify the data for the time action setting to be controlled.

External Control
Signal Device

Set a trigger device to control the setting with the device.

External Control
Status Notification
Device

Set the device to notify the execution result of the output or change.

27.1 Settings

Model

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Time Action Attribute

(1) Time tab
Set the day-of the-week and time when the time action function is to be used.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

Item

Description

Model

Daily

Time action is executed only on the specified day-of-the-week/time.

Through

Time action is executed continuously for the specified number of days.

Select the day-of-the-week and time when the time action function starts/ends.
Set the day/time when the time action starts.

Start

When [Daily] is set, multiple days can be set.

External Control
Device

26

Set the day/time when the time action ends.

End

Only when [Through] is set, the day-of-the-week setting is available.

Set this item to control the time action with a device.

Continuous eight points from the set device are set as external control devices.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Start/End

27.2 Actions
To use this setting, set [Enable External Control (Common)].

27

HINT
Setting the same action settings in a week
When [Through] is set, only one time action setting is available.
To set one time action setting that is executed more than twice a week by [Through], set the same settings as the
set time action setting. To set the multiple time action settings, start and end time must be different from each
setting. (Set [Daily] of [Mode] for the [Time] tab.)

M0 ON

Tuesday

Wednesday Thursday

M0 OFF

M0 ON

Friday

29

M0 OFF

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Monday

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Setting example)
Turn M0 ON in AM of Monday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Tuesday (Set this in time action1)
No action on Wednesday
Turn M0 ON in AM of Thursday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Friday (Set this in time action2)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Mode

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Set the mode type for the time action function.

RECIPE

24

27.1 Settings

27 - 3

(2) Action tab

Set the condition trigger executing the time action function.

Item
Bit

Description

Model

Select this item to turn a bit device ON/OFF at the start/end time.
After selecting the item, set the bit device to be turned ON/OFF.
Select this item to write the specified value to a word device at the start/end time.
After selecting the item, set the word device to write in a value, and then set the following.
Data Type

Word

Select the data type of the word device for value write.
Signed BIN

Unsigned BIN

BCD

Real*1

Data Size

Select a data size for the word device. (16bit/32bit)

Start Write Value

Set the value to be written to the specified word device at the start time.

End Write Value

Set the value to be written to the specified word device the at end time.

Select the item for outputting sounds at the start or end time.
After selecting this item, set the following.
Click the [Browse] button to select a sound file to be output in the list.
Sound

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

Start

Set the number for the sound file to be played at the start time.

End

Set the number for the sound file to be played at the end time.

*1 Only when [32bit] is selected for [Data Size].

27 - 4

27.1 Settings

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

27.2 Actions
To control the time action with a device, use the external control device.
The set time action data are output to a device, or the time action setting can be changed.
This section explains the devices relevant to the external control and the action for the external control.
27.1 Time Action Attribute

23

External control device

Device

Set device

Item

Mode

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Stores time action setting.

Continuous eight points from the set device are set as external control devices.
If changing the external control device value to 0 and executing it, the time action setting can be disabled.
Description

24

Indicates time action mode.

b0
: 0 (Daily), 1 (Through)

Set device + 2

Start time (Hrs)

Set device + 3

Start time (Min)

Set device + 4

Start time (Sec)

Set device + 5

End time (Hrs)

Set device + 6

End time (Min)

Set device + 7

End time (Sec)

Indicates the start time of time action. (Data format: BCD)

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Start day of the week

End day of the week

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Set device + 1

Indicates start day of the week/end day of the week for time action.
(When the mode for the time action is set to [Daily], do not set the device for the end day of
the week.)
Start day of the week
End day of the week
b0: Sun
b8: Sun
b1: Mon
b9: Mon
b2: Tue
b10: Tue
b3: Wed
b11: Wed
b4: Thu
b12: Thu
b5: Fri
b13: Fri
b6: Sat
b14: Sat
b7: Must not be used
b15: Must not be used

RECIPE

b1 to b15: Must not be used

Indicates the end time of time action. (Data format: BCD)

Setting No. device

By storing the time action settings with the setting No. 1 to 32 to the set device, the time action setting for the external
control is specified.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

External Control Signal Device

27

Executes external control.

Each bit turns on according to the execution contents.
(If the devices turn on simultaneously, b0 is given the highest priority.)
b0
: Output trigger (outputs the contents of time action to an external device)
b1
: Change trigger (changes time action setting according to external device contents)
b2 to b15 : Must not be used

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

External Control Status Notification Device

Notifies the result of when external control is executed.
When turning off external control signal device after output/change, this device automatically turns off.
b0
: Normal termination of output
b1
: Normal termination of change
b2
: Error (System alarm occurs.)
b3 to b15 : Must not be used

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

27.2 Actions

27 - 5

 Action example for the external control

(1) Output (when time action contents are output to an external device)
Output (when time action contents are output to an external device)
Time Action Attribute

3.

1.
2.

Setting No.
External control signal device
External control device for each
time action setting (8 points)

1.

Specify the setting No. of the time action setting to be output.

2.

Turn ON b0 of external control signal device.

3.

The time action setting is output to the external control device.

(2) Change (when time action setting is changed with external device contents)
Change (when time action setting is changed with external device contents)
Time Action Attribute

27 - 6

4.

1.

Specify the setting No. of the time action setting to be changed.

2.

Write a value desired to set to the external control device.

3.

Turn ON b1 of external control signal device.

4.

Time action is set with the setting contents.

27.2 Actions

1.
3.
2.

Setting No.
External control signal device
External control device for each
time action setting (8 points)

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

27.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the time action function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of time action settings

23

Up to 32 time action settings can be configured in one project.

(2) Multiple time action settings

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Do not set different time actions to the same day-of-the-week and time.
Otherwise GOT may work abnormally.

Precautions for use

(1) Clock function

24

For the precautions and restrictions about the clock function, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

(2) During operation of time action function

RECIPE

Changing the GOT built-in clock time or any preset device status may affect the time action behavior.
Example1:When the set bit device (M0) is turned ON before the time action is executed
The action is not executed at the time set by the time action function
9:00

10:00

11:00

12:00

25

13:00

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

ON
OFF
M0 device status

ON

26

OFF
Action set by time action function

Example2:When the GOT's built-in clock time is changed

D0=100
D0=200

7:00

8:00

9:00

10:00

8:00

7:00

Writes 100 to D0.

GOT's clock time is

changed from 10:00 to 20:00.

9:00

10:00

28

21:00

SCRIPT FUNCTION

GOT's clock time is

changed from 10:00 to 7:00.

20:00

29

Writes 100 to D0
Since 17:00 is not identified,
200 is not written to D0.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Start action: 8:00

End action: 17:00

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The action is executed at the next start time.

It will not be executed if the change is made after the start/end action time.
The probable causes of why times set by the clock are changed are described below.
The GOT built-in clock is changed for [Time] in the utility. (Time notification setting)
Time of the GOT clock synchronizes with that of controller when "Clock data GOT is matched to clock data
External" is checked on Clock Settings of GT Designer3.
Times may be changed by GOT's internal devices from GS513 to GS516.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

8:00

27.3 Precautions

27 - 7

(3) When using external control

When the time action setting is changed with a device, it can be restored to the setting made with GT Designer3
by either of the following operations.
Powering off the GOT, resetting
Transferring OS or project data

(4) When using sound output function

Only the GT16, GT15, and GT SoftGOT1000 are available for this function.
For the sound output, refer to the precautions for the sound output function.
38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

27 - 8

27.3 Precautions

SCRIPT FUNCTION

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

28. SCRIPT FUNCTION

The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (hereafter abbreviated to
"script").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script drastically reduces the load on the system side (e.g. controller,
microcomputer) display.
This section explains the specifications, GT Designer3 settings, program example and troubleshooting of the script
function.

28.1.1

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.1 Overview

24

Features

As the necessary programs can be created and assigned to GOT with the script functions in advance, the system
side handles only machine control programs, facilitating system maintenance.

Various screen controls by GOT alone

RECIPE

Ease of system maintenance

25

Using the script function enables the following operations that cannot be achieved by the GOT alone.

(1) Various object functions are available

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(a) A single lamp represents multiple bit device statuses.

(b) A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is ON, and is erased if they are all OFF.
At the same time as a numeric value is input, a part indicating "Already input" is pasted to the place
adjacent to the input value display frame.

26

(d) A single touch switch can make multiple operations corresponding to multiple statuses.
(e) At the same time as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error (*1), the corresponding
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
*1

When an error occurs in the alarm list (system alarm), error contents are stored to GOT error code of [System Information].

(2) Processing of complicated arithmetic

(a) A polynomial operation can be more simply represented on a single line as compared with ladder program.
Ladder program

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(c)

27

Script

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

[w:D5] = ([w:D1] - [w:D2])/100+[w:D3]-[w:D4])-100;

(b) Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions, such as
trigonometric and exponential functions, can be used optionally.
(a) The date is calculated by entering the start date (month, day and year) and the duration (number of days)
after that date.
What is the date 345 days after May 20, 2008?
April 30, 2009
(b) The day of the week is calculated by entering the corresponding date (month, day and year).
Which day of the week falls on February 21, 1961?
Tuesday

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

(3) Expanded applicable fields

29

Easy programming language

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Script can be created with entry-level programming knowledge, as it is C language-like program.

28.1 Overview

28 - 1

 Compatibility with commercially-available programming editors

Commercially-available text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windowsstandard memo pad, Wordpad) are applicable for
programming to improve program productivity.

Execution condition selectable for each script

Any of various conditions (ordinary, periodic, bit Rise/Fall, during bit ON/OFF, periodic during bit ON/OFF) can be
selected as a trigger to execute each script, which enables script execution scheduling.
In addition to the above conditions, an object script can be executed in synchronization with object input/display and
touching of a touch switch.

Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. MicrosoftVisual C++)
can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using GOT.
The test and device monitor functions are available to check conditional branching in a script. By monitoring the GOT
special registers (GS), error information and a script in execution can be easily confirmed.

Check the validity of the syntax for the created scripts

The validity of the syntax for the created scripts can be checked by using GT Designer3 before executing the scripts
on the GOT. Doing so increases the programming efficiency.

The script language created on digital package is convertible

It is possible to convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital package in order to operate it
on GOT.

HINT
(1) Execution condition setting and syntax validity check
The execution condition setting and the syntax validity check are made on GT Designer3 at the time of
monitor screen creation.
For details, refer to the following.
Project script and screen script : 28.2.1 Settings
Object script

: 28.3.1 Settings

(2) Converting script language created on Digital package

Convert the script language created on Digital package using GT Converter2.
Refer to the following for details of convertible data and conversion method.
GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual

28 - 2

28.1 Overview

22

Script functions types

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

There are three types of script functions as below.

(1) Project script

23

(a) Target of setting/action

Project script means the script function that is set / operated for the project as a whole.

(c)

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(b) GOT status that enables execution of a project script

A project script can be executed any time while the GOT is online.
Script execution condition
A script is executed when the condition is established.

(d) Allowable number of scripts

Up to 256 scripts can be set for a project.

24

POINT
RECIPE

Precautions for setting a project script

Devices monitored by project scripts are always operating.
Therefore, if monitor target devices increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.

HINT

(2) Screen script

27

(a) Target of setting/action

Screen script means the script function that is set / operated for the screens indicated below.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Base screen*1, *2
Window screen*1, *2(Superimpose windows, overlap swindows)
The called screen by the set overlay screen function is also the target of a screen script.
The screen displayed by the parts display function is not the target of a screen script.

(b) GOT status that enables execution of a screen script

A screen script can be executed when two conditions below are satisfied.
GOT is online.
The target screen is displayed.
(c)

28

Script execution condition

A script is executed when the condition is established.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

(d) Allowable number of scripts

Up to 256 scripts can be set in a screen (including the called screens by the set overlay screen function)

SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1
*2

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Application of project scripts

Since a project script operates for a project as a whole, it can be conveniently used in such as the case shown
below.
Example: To call up the troubleshooting screen automatically at the same time that the alarm list (system alarm)
detects an error

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

28.1 Overview

28 - 3

POINT
Precautions for setting a screen script
If the number of monitor devices of screen scripts increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.

(3) Object script

(a) Target of setting/action

Object script means the script function that is set / operated for the objects indicated below.
Setting/Operation Target of Object Script Function
Touch switch (switch only),

Bit lamp,

Word lamp,

Numerical display,

Numerical input,

ASCII display,

ASCII input,

Date display,

Time display,

Comment display,

Level,

Panelmeter,

Line graph,

Trend graph,

Bar graph,

Statistics bar graph,

Statistics pie graph,

Scatter graph,

Parts display,

Parts movement

(b) GOT status that enables execution of an object script

An object script function can be executed when four conditions below are all satisfied.
GOT is online.
The screen where arranged target object is displayed.
The target object is displayed/operating.
Target object operating is not restricted by the security function.
(c)

Execution condition for script function

A script is executed when the condition is established. Execution of a script is also triggered by object input
/ display and touch operation of a touch switch.

(d) Allowable number of script function

Numerical input and ASCII input allows the setting of input object script and display object script for one
object.
For objects other than numerical input and ASCII input, one script can be set for one object.

POINT
Precautions for setting an object script
If number of monitor devices on object scripts increase, display on the monitor screen will be delayed.

28 - 4

28.1 Overview

This section explains the precautions for using the script function.

Applicable range of the script functions

Since script functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them for machine control that requires the
severe timing for execution.
When changing the data within PLC from GOT, create an interlock circuit in a sequence program to ensure that the
whole system will operate safely.

Stop of the script processing

Any of the following cases disables the corresponding script to be processed, resulting in an error.
A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a script
data format.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for use

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.1.2

24

Example: 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999

32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
As the write target device of the while statement, a temporary device area (TMP) is not used but the PLC
CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) is used.
For details, refer to the following.
Applicable data range
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods
Details of while statement

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a script data
format.

RECIPE

Example: [D0]=[D1]: Current value of D1 is "0x991A"

26

28.2.4 Control structure

Differences in processing result between data formats

The following cases may result in an unintended processing.
When other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit BCD" has been selected as script data format, the constant is
described that is outside the selected format range.
When "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit unsigned BIN" has been selected as the script data format, the
negative constant is described.
When other than "real number" has been selected as script data format, the constant with a decimal point is
described.
For details on data format, refer to the following.
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

28.4 Troubleshooting

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Corrective actions to be taken when script processing has stopped

Instructions for monitor device description

Some controller includes the monitor devices of which Nos. have to be described in the specific number of digits.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction.
For details on describing method, refer to the following.
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.1 Overview

28 - 5

 Instructions for assignment delay

(1) For assignment delay
When a script function writes the operation result to a device at the end of script execution, writing to a device
(assignment) can be delayed with some devices.
The table below shows if such assignment delay occurs for each kind of devices.
Synchronized: Operation result is written to a device in synchronization with script.
Delay: Assignment delay occurs.
Script

Device and Temporary Device

Area

Project Script

Screen Script

Controller's devices

Object Script

Delay

GB

Delay*1

GD
GS

Synchronized

Delay

TMP

Synchronized
*1

By setting [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay] on GT Designer3, the operation result can be written to a device in
synchronization with the execution of script.
For the setting on GT Designer3, refer to the following.
28.2.1 Option tab

Therefore, performing assignment processing as "Example 1" causes a write delay.

Describe a script as "Example 2" and "Example 3" to reduce the frequency of communications with the PLC
CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing.
Example 1: Assignment processing using PLC CPU devices

[w:D1] = [w:D0];
[w:D2] = [w:D1];

//substitutes D0 into D1.

//substitutes D1 into D2.

D0

100

100

D1

200

100

D2

300

200
Script start

Script end

In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately, causing a write delay.
This status persists until this script is processed.

28 - 6

28.1 Overview

22

[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0];
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001];
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001];

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Example 2: Assignment processing using temporary device areas

//substitutes D0 into TMP0001.

//substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
//substitutes TMP0001 into D2.

100

100

D1

200

100

D2

300

100

Script start

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23
D0

Script end

24

Using the temporary device areas designed for script functions prevents a write delay.
For details on temporary device areas, refer to the following.

RECIPE

28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

Example 3: Assignment processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)

Using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) enables the same processing timing as temporary device areas and
prevents a write delay.
With project scripts and screen scripts, the setting of [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay] is
necessary on GT Designer3.
For the setting on GT Designer3, refer to the following.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

28.2.1 Option tab

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

//substitutes D0 into GD1.

//substitutes GD1 into D1.
//substitutes GD1 into D2.

(1) When GOT internal device is used.

When GOT internal device (GD, GB) assignment delay is cancelled, a link scan will be made on each line
including the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GOT internal devices (GD, GB) are used in
many places.
(2) LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package
The LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package are designed to be
free from an assignment delay.
Therefore, when Digital-based script language including LS devices as shown in the example 1) is converted,
this may result in different operation on the GOT. As shown in the example 2), use temporary device areas in
Digital-based script language including LS devices to prevent an assignment delay.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

POINT

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

[w:GD1] = [w:D0];
[w:D1] = [w:GD1];
[w:D2] = [w:GD1];

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.1 Overview

28 - 7

(2) Assignment delay with offset function

(a) When reading values from devices
For using the offset function in scripts, when devices for controllers and GOT internal devices (GB, GD) are
used as base devices, assignment delays occur and scripts might not operate correctly even though values
of offset devices are changed.
Example 1) Incorrect operations with offset function (R200 = 10)

[w:TMP0000] = [w:R200];
[w:TMP0001] = [w:R100[w:TMP0000]];

The value of R100 cannot be read.

Offset device
Base device

With the above example, the offset device (TMP000) keeps the value before the assignment.
When device numbers are out of the base device (R) numbers, an error occurs.
For no assignment delays, use the temporary device area or GOT internal devices as both base devices
and offset devices.
When the GOT internal device is used, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
28.2.1 Option tab
Example 2) No assignment delays with temporary device area (R200 = 10)

bmov([w:R100],[w:TMP0100],11)
[w:TMP0000] = [w:R200];
[w:TMP0001] = [w:TMP0100[w:TMP0000]];

The value of TMP110 can be read.

Assign the values of base devices to the temporary device area with the bmov control statements in
advance, and then the inoperative operations in Example 1 work.

POINT
Notes for Example 2
For Example 2, the range of the offset device (R200) is 0 to 10, and values of 11 devices starting from the base
device (R100) are assigned to the temporary device area.
As a result, the number of devices to be assigned to the temporary device area must be changed depending on the
range of offset devices.

(b) When writing values to devices

No restrictions as reading values from devices exist. (Refer to the following Example 1.)
When devices for controllers and GOT internal devices (GB, GD) are used as base devices, the values of
offset devices with the while control statements cannot be changed repeatedly as shown in Example 2.
Use the temporary device area or GOT internal devices as both base devices and offset devices as with
reading values from devices, and the values of offset devices with the while control statements can be
changed repeatedly.
When the GOT internal device is used, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
28.2.1 Option tab

28 - 8

28.1 Overview

22

[w:TMP0000] = 10;
[w:R100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001];

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Example 1) Using offset function for write devices (Enabled)

A value can be assigned to R110.

Offset device
Base device

23
[w:TMP0000] = 10;
while([w:TMP0000] < 20) {
[w:R100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001];
[w:TMP0000] = [w:TMP0000]+2;
}

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Example 2) Using offset function for write devices with while control statements (Disabled)

An error occurs.

24

Assign the values assigned to the temporary device area to base devices with the bmov control statements
after operations with the temporary device area, and then the inoperative operations in Example 2 work.

Project scripts and screen scripts share the same temporary device area, while object scripts use the independent
temporary device area.
Accordingly, data exchange between an object script and a project script / screen script using the temporary device
area is not possible.
Screen script

Object script

27

(b)

(a)
Temporary device area

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

Exchanging data among scripts using the temporary device area

Project script

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

No error occurs.

Temporary device area

(An image showing the case where the access is made to the temporary device area of the same number)

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

To exchange the data between a project script / screen script and an object script, use GOT internal devices GD or
GB.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

bmov([w:R110],[w:TMP0110],10);
[w:TMP0000] = 10;
while([w:TMP0000] < 20) {
[w:TMP0100[w:TMP0000]] = [w:TMP0001];
[w:TMP0000] = [w:TMP0000]+2;
}
bmov([w:TMP0110],[w:R110],10);

RECIPE

Example 3) No assignment delays using offset function for write devices with while control statements

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.1 Overview

28 - 9

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28.2.1

Settings

Select [Common]

[Script]

[Script] from the menu to display the [Script] dialog box.

Project tab
Set the Project script applicable for the whole projects.

Item
Script setting list

Description

Model

Displays the set script settings in the list.

The script for the selected script No. is shown below the script setting list.
Adds a new script setting.
Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box.
(1) Script Edit
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit the selected script setting.
Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box.
(1) Script Edit
Copies the selected script setting.
Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list.
After clicking the [Paste] button, select the method to paste the copied script.
Yes: Creates a new script from the source script.
(3) Script data registration
No : Refers to the copied script.
Deletes the selected script setting.

Changes the order of executing selected script settings.

Edit the selected project script by the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
[Option] tab: Option tab
Script Editor : (2) Script editor

(Continued to next page)

28 - 10

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

Item

Description

Model

Displays the registered scripts in the list.

A script can additionally registered or edited on the list.
(4) Script file list

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) Script Edit

24
Item
Order

Script No.

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Description

Model
RECIPE

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Display the order of the script under editing.

Register the script No. for the current script which is being edited.
Click the [View] button to confirm the registration No. of other script files.

25

File Name

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Display the drive and folder that include the script file to be executed.
When the script file is not registered, click the [Browse] button to specify the script file to be executed.

Script Name

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Set the name of the script to be executed.
Click the [Import] button and the script edited in a text file is read out to GT Designer3.
When importing the script file, the file name with the extension (".TXT") eliminated from the script file name is
displayed at [Script Name].

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(4) Script file list

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Edit the script selected by [Script File Name] or [Script Name] using the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection]
in the [Option] tab.
[Option] tab: Option tab
Script Editor : (2) Script editor
Comment

Input the comment of the script being edited.

27

Checks the validity of the syntax for the script selected in [File Name] or [Script Name].
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.

Trigger Type

Select the data type of script to be executed.

Signed BIN 16
Unsigned BIN 16
Signed BIN 32 Unsigned BIN 32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Select the trigger for operating the script.
Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
When [Ordinary], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600s) in 1-second

28

unit.*1

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Data Type

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Set the trigger device that executes the script.
(When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected for [Trigger Type])
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
For details of *1, refer to the following.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Trigger Device

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 11

*1 Update timing when the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling]
The sampling cycle counting is started when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger type is set to [ON Sampling] and the sampling cycle is set to 10 seconds, for example, the script is
executed 10 seconds after the device set at [Trigger Device] turns on. (When the trigger device turns off after 10
seconds, the script is not executed.)
When the trigger condition is not satisfied, counting of the sampling cycle is reset.

HINT
(1) Script file name
A file name of a script file (excluding extension ".TXT") must be within 32 characters independent of the
character type (1-byte character or 2-byte character).
The file name is used for [Script Name] when converting the script data with [Project Data] selected in the
[Option] tab.
When a specified file name is more than 33 characters, only the first 32 characters are available for [Script
Name].
(2) Script name
Set a unique script name.
The script name set at [Script Name] is used as the script file name when converting the file with [External
File] selected in the [Option] tab.
Therefore, if a script name already existing is assigned, take any measures including the file name change.

28 - 12

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22

(2) Script editor

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The script editor is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.

Script edit area

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

RECIPE

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

25
Item

Description

Model

Scripts can be edited directly.

Returns the script edit operation one step.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

26

Redoes returned operation.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Cuts the selected character string.

Copies the selected character string.
Pastes the copied or cut character string.
Deletes the selected character string.

27

Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer3.

*1

Saves the script edited by GT Designer3 in a text file.

Set script symbols.

Click the [Sym] button to display the [Script symbol] dialog box.

28

Script symbol tab / Script symbols

Input
Navigation

Select this item to display [Input Navigation] in the [Edit Script] dialog box.

Line No.

Select this item to display the row numbers in the script.

(Continued to next page)

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Displays the search dialog box.

Enter the search target texts and select the search direction (upward/downward). Click the
[Search Next] button to search for the entered texts.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

*1

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Script edit area

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 13

Item

Description

Model

Functions, devices, etc. that are inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
Click the [Insert] button to enter the functions and devices at the cursor position on the script edit area.

Input Navigation

This button is displayed when [External File] is selected for the [Option] tab.
Overwrites the script file with the project script and save it.
This button is displayed when [External File] is selected for the [Option] tab.
Closes the script editor.
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
For details of *1, refer to the following.

*1 Import/Export
Even if a script is stored in the project data, the exported text file can be used for simulating the operation using a
commercially-available general-purpose C compiler and editing the script using a commerciallyavailable text editor.
The edited text file is imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example: When editing the script data stored in the project data using a commercially-available text editor

Exporting the data as a text file

Editing the exported file

Edit the script using
the ext editor.

Importing to GT Designer3
Edited contents are
reflected.

28 - 14

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

POINT
Use example of input navigation
How the input navigation is used is explained below using an example of inserting an assignment statement of the
temporary device area to a script.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

2.

RECIPE

3.

25

Select [Items]

2.

Edit the temporary device area number, assignment operator, and others referring to [Description].

3.

[Other]

[Temporary device area] from the tree.

26

Click the [Insert] button. The edited assignment statement in the temporary device area shown as the
step2. is inserted to the cursor position in the script edit area.

(3) Script data registration

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

1.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

1.
1.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Set the script No. and the script name/script file name of the copied data for registration.

Item

Script No.

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Description

Set the script No. of the copied script data for registration. (Default: Minimum script number among the
unregistered script numbers)
After registration, the data is displayed on the list.
(4) Script file list
(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)
Click the [Browse] button to set the path name and file name of the copied script data for registration.

Script Name

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Set the script name of the copied script data for registration. (Up to 32 characters can be entered.)

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Script File Name

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 15

(4) Script file list

The registered scripts are displayed in a list, where scripts are added or edited.

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Item

(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Description

Model

Displays the registered scripts in a list (script file/script name *1, modified date and comment).
The script file specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box is reflected in this dialog box.
A comment can be directly input in the Comment column of the list.
The contents of the selected script are displayed in the area below the list.

Script List

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Registers the script file to be referred in the script list.
(When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab)
Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer3.
*2

(When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab)

Changes the path name of the selected script file.
Select the row to be changed. Click the [Convert Path] button to set a new path name.
Checks the validity of the syntax for the selected script or all the registered script.
When an error occurs, the error line No. and its details are displayed.
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
Deletes the selected script.
Edit the selected script using the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
For details of the [Option] tab and script editor, refer to the following.
[Option] tab : Option tab
Script Editor : (2) Script editor
Makes the script set in [Script No.] to be the selected status.

*1 When [External File] is selected in the [Option] tab, the path name is displayed.
When [Project Data] is selected in the [Option] tab, the script name is displayed.
*2 Click the [Convert Path] button to display the [Convert File Path] dialog box.

Item

28 - 16

Description

Before

Display the old path name of the script file.

After

Click the [Browse] button to set the path name of the converted script file.

Convert the same path

Select this item to convert all the files with the same path name as the file to be converted.

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

HINT
Script file in the project data folder
Save a script file into the project data folder of GT Designer3. Doing so updates the script path name automatically
when the project data folder is moved to other drive or path, which eliminates the necessity to modify the path
name.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

23

Screen tab
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Set the Screen script to be executed for each screen.

RECIPE

24

Description

Screen Type

Description

Model

Set the screen (Base/Window) on which the script function will operate and the screen No.
A screen title can be used for the screen No.

26

(Fundamentals) 3.7 Creating/Opening/Closing Screen

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Displays the set script settings in the list.

The script for the selected script No. is shown below the script setting list.
Adds a new script setting.
Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box.
Project tab (1) Script Edit
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.

27

Edit the selected script setting.

Click this button to display the [Script Edit] dialog box.
Project tab (1) Script Edit

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Copies the selected script setting.

Pastes the copied script setting to the last line of the list.
After clicking the [Paste] button, select the method to paste the script.
Yes: Creates a new script from the source script.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Project tab (3) Script data registration

No: Refers to the copied script.
Deletes the selected script setting.

Changes the order of executing selected script settings.

29

Edit the selected project script by the editor selected at [Script Editor Selection] in the [Option] tab.
[Option] tab: Option tab
Script Editor: Project tab (2) Script editor
Displays the registered script in the list.
A script can be additionally registered or edited on the list.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Script setting list

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Project tab (4) Script file list

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 17

 Script symbol tab / Script symbols

A script can be described using a character string, instead of a device or fixed value.
This is possible by setting a device or fixed value to each character string in the Script Symbol window (Even when a
character string is described in the script, the script operates on GOT.)
This setting is valid to project scripts and screen scripts.

When the [Script Symbol] tab is selected

Item

When clicking the [Sym] button of the script editor

Description

Symbol Name

Input the character string to be described in script (Up to 32 characters).

The symbol "#" is not available.
Up to 100 symbol names can be set.

Device and Constant

Input the device or character string for the symbol name, i.e., character string (Up to 32 characters).
Deletes the settings (symbol name, device, or constant).
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the row to be deleted.

*1

Reads out the script symbol settings that are edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT Designer3.

*1

Saves the script symbol settings that are set by GT Designer3 as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(When the [Script symbol] tab is selected)
Displays the [Script File List] dialog box.
Displays the registered script in list format.
Script can be added, registered and edited on the list.
Project tab (4) Script file list
(This button is displayed only when the [Sym] button of the script editor is clicked.)
Inserts the selected script symbol to the script.
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the script symbol to be inserted.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

28 - 18

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

Model

22

*1 Import/Export

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited Unicode text file or CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.

POINT
Editing exported files
When "0" is used as the first character of symbol names and device or field values, "0" can be deleted with

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.

Pay attention to the above for editing exported files.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file

RECIPE

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Exporting to a CSV file

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

Editing the exported file

27

Add the setting using applications

such as Microsoft Excel.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Importing to GT Designer3

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28
The added contents
are displayed.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 19

 Option tab
Set the script data storing area, the text editor used for editing a script and the processing when an internal device is
used.

Item

Description
Select the area where the script data of project scripts and screen scripts are stored.

Project Data

Stores the script data in the project data.

If the setting is changed from [External File] to [Project Data], the script data is
converted from the script file to the project data.*1

Script Data Storage

Destination

External File

Stores the script data in the script file.

If the setting is changed from [Project Data] to [External File], the script data is
converted from the project data to the script file.*2

Display the script data

update confirmation
message when
processing write to GOT

This item is available when [External File] is selected for the script data storage
area.
Select this item to display the message to ensure the update of the script data
when communicating with the GOT. (When selecting [Communication] from the
menu)

Set the editor used to edit project scripts and screen scripts.

Editor Type
Script Editor Selection

Editor Path
Option
File Handling Function
Storage Order

Cancel internal device

(GD/GB) assignment
delay
Update Script Data
(Project and Screen)

Script Editor: Select this item to use the built-in script editor of GT Designer3 to edit
the scripts.
User-specified Editorr: Select this item to use the text editor specified by the user to
edit the scripts. This item can be selected only when [External File] is selected for
[Script Data Storage Destination].
When [User-specified Editor] is selected, set the following [Editor Path] or [Option].
Set the file (including Notepad (NOTEPAD.EXE) or WordPad (WORDPAD.EXE) of
Windows) to open the text editor.
Specify the options used on the text editor.

Select an order of storing data with file_read or file_write.

Low-->High : Data are stored in the order of lower to upper data.
High-->Low : Data are stored in the order of upper to lower data.
Select this item to avoid substitution delay, which occurs when the project script or screen script is used, by
using the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Refer to the following for cautions about substitution delay.
28.1.2 Instructions for assignment delay
Click the [Update] button to update the script data read by GT Designer3.
Displays the registered script in list format.
Script can be added, registered and edited on the list.
Project tab (4) Script file list

For details of *1 and *2, refer to the following.

28 - 20

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

Model

1.

When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [External File] to [Project Data],
the following dialog box appears.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

*1 Converting the script data from script file to project data

23
Click the [Yes] button to convert the script data to the project data.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

2.

*2 Converting the script data from project data to script file

When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [Project Data] to [External File],
the following dialog box appears.

24

RECIPE

1.

For [Destination to create the script file], specify the folder where the script is saved.

3.

Click the [OK] button to convert the script data to the script file.

POINT
(1) File name of the converted script file
When the script data in the project data is converted to a script file, the script file name before conversion is
used as the file name of the script file (extension is ".TXT").
If the script name already exists, the dialog box as shown below is displayed.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

2.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

When the above dialog box appears, click the [No] button to change the file name.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(2) Number of characters of the file name

Up to 32 characters are available for the script file name in the project data.
When the data storage area are changed from [External File] to [Project Data], and when the file name is more
than 33 characters, the first 32 characters are only available.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 21

28.2.2

Settings and procedure for execution

This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script.
Start

Create/edit scripts using a script editor or commercially

available text editor.

For a complicated script including many control statements,

the operation has to be simulated using general Compiler as
necessary.

......

......

28.2.1 Project tab (2) Script

editor

28.4.1 Simulation using general

C language compiler or debugger

If a commercially available text editor is used to create or edit

scripts, read them using GT Designer3.

Set the data type, trigger type, and others for the scripts
using GT Designer3.

......

28.2.1 Settings

......

28.2.1 Project tab (2) Script

editor

Write the project data from the personal computer to the GOT
by GT Designer3.

......

GT Designer3 Version Screen

Design Manual (Fundamentals)

Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the
system monitor.

......

Perform the syntax check on the scripts using GT Designer3.

No

Valid?

Yes

No

Normally operating?
Yes
End

28 - 22

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

GOT1000 Series User's Manual

(Extended Functions, Option
Functions)(Chapter2 SYSTEM
MONITOR FUNCTION)

This section explains how to execute the project script and screen script.

Execution conditions
When an execution condition is satisfied, the Project script, Screen script executes the corresponding script and
writes the result to the PLC CPU.
The execution condition is set when the monitor screen is created using GT Designer3.
There are following execution conditions.
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
ON/OFF Sampling
Sampling (1s increments)

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Actions and settings

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.2.3

24

Execution unit

RECIPE

Project script, Screen script executes scripts one by one.

If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are satisfied, the scripts are not processed concurrently.

Execution sequence
The project script and screen script are executed in the following order.
Screen Calling Function
Laying Order

Script Executing Order Set with GT

Designer3
Script A

Project script

----

----

1)

Script B

256

Script A
Base

Execution
Sequence

2)

26

Script B

Script A
First called screen

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Screen Setting Order

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Function executing
Order

25
Max.
Execution
Count

Script B

Base

256

27

Script B

Screen script
Script A

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Superimpose window 1

3)

Script B

Script A
First called screen

Script B

Superimpose window 1

256

29

Script A
16th called screen

Script B

(Continued to next page)

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 23

BARCODE
FUNCTION

16th called screen

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Script A

Function executing
Order

Screen Setting Order

Screen Calling Function

Laying Order

Script Executing Order Set with GT

Designer3

Superimpose window 2

Script B

Max.
Execution
Count

Script A

Execution
Sequence
4)

Script A
First called screen

Script B

Superimpose window 2

256

Script A
16th called screen

Script B

Script A
Overlap window 1

5)

Script B

Script A
First called screen

Script B

Overlap window 1

256

Script A
16th called screen

Script B

Screen script
Script A
Overlap window 2

6)

Script B

Script A
First called screen

Script B

Overlap window 2

256

Script A
16th called screen

Script B

Overlap window 3

Script B

Script A

7)

Script A
First called screen

Script B

Overlap window 3

256

Script A
16th called screen

Script B

(Continued to next page)

28 - 24

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

Screen Setting Order

Screen Calling Function

Laying Order

Script Executing Order Set with GT

Designer3

Max.
Execution
Count

Script A

22
Execution
Sequence
8)

Script B

Overlap window 4

23

Script A
Script B

First called screen

256
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Overlap window 4

Script A
Script B

16th called screen

Screen script

24

Script A

9)

RECIPE

Script B

Overlap window 1

Script A
Script B

First called screen

25

256

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Overlap window 5

Script A
Script B

16th called screen

26

Execution status

Stop

When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU and the corresponding script "waits its turn".
And, the next script "waits for execution".
If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next script "waits for execution".
If a screen is changed when the screen script is used, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all "executed" and
then the next script "waits for execution".

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Execution

27

Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.

Enabled: The corresponding script is "executed".
Disabled: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next script "waits for execution".

The script is kept "stopped" until the error history is cleared.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Waiting for execution

Processing
A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Waiting for turn

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

The following table describes the script statuses and the corresponding processings to be performed.
Script Status

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Function executing
Order

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 25

28.2.4

Control structure

This section explains the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.

Control statement
Control statement

if

if to else

while
break

Description

Statement example

if (conditional expression) {set of expressions}

Function

Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0),
executes the {set of expressions}.

Point

An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
given value or to change a program sequence.

Statement example

if (conditional expression) {set of expressions 1} else {set of expressions 2}

Function

Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0),
executes the {set of expressions 1}, or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.

Point

An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a
given value or to change a program sequence.

Statement example

while (continuous conditional expression) {set of expressions}

Function

Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0), repeats
execution of the {set of expressions}.
Processing exits the "while" statement, in the following cases:
If the evaluation result of "continuous condition" is false (0).
If a "break" statement exists in the "set of expressions".

Point

A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a specific purpose.

(For example, the statement is repeated until the device value becomes "0".)
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0) results in an infinite loop.
A temporary device area must be used as the write target device.

Statement example

switch (term)
{
case constant: set of expressions;break;
case constant: set of expressions; break;
default: set of expressions;
}

Function

Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case, break and default.
In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions" following the case and default
statements.
The (term) value matches the "constant"
It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
In either of the following cases, escapes from { } of switch without execution.
There is a break statement within a script
There are no case statements including the "constants" corresponding to the (term) and no default
statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement.

Point

The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings to be performed.

Statement example

return;

Function

Ends a script.

Point

A single script can have multiple returns.

Statement example

Function

Represents the end of a single statement.

This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement.

switch
case
default
break

return

28 - 26

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Operator
Operator

Description

Statement example

if ((relational operation expression) && (relational operation expression)) {.....}

Function

If two (relational operation expressions) are both true, resulting in 1; if either is false, resulting
in 0. (Logical AND operator)

Statement example

if ((relational operation expression) || (relational operation expression)) {.....}

Function

If either of relational operation expressions is true, resulting in 1; if both are false, resulting in
0.
(Logical OR operator)

Statement example

if (!(relational operation expression)) {.....}

Function

If the relational operation expression is 0, resulting in 1; otherwise, resulting in 0.

(Logical NOT operator)

&&

||

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) Logic

24

Description

Statement example

<Term 1> < <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)

Statement example

<Term 1> <= <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence left inequality operator)

Statement example

<Term 1> > <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)

Statement example

<Term 1> >= <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence right inequality operator)

Statement example

<Term 1> != <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)

Statement example

<Term 1> == <term 2>

Function

<Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

<

<=

>

26

>=

!=

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Operator

RECIPE

(2) Relation

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

==

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 27

(3) Arithmetic
Operator

Description

Statement example

<Term> + <factor>

Function

Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)

Statement example

<Term> - <factor>

Function

Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)

Statement example

<Term> * <factor>

Function

Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)

Statement example

<Term> / <factor>

Function

Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)

Point

If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.

Statement example

<Term> % <factor>

Function

Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.

(Remainder operator)

Point

If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.

(4) Bit device

Operator

Description

Statement example

<Term> & <factor>

Function

Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit accumulation operator)

Statement example

<Term> | <factor>

Function

Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit addition operator)

Statement example

~ <bit>

Function

Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)

Statement example

<Term> ^ <factor>

Function

Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit difference operator)

Statement example

<Term> << <factor>

Function

Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)

Statement example

<Term> >> <factor>

Function

Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)

&

<<

>>

(5) Assignment
Operator

Description

Statement example

<Device> = <term>

Function

Stores <term> into <device>. (Assignment operator)

28 - 28

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22

Variable

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Variables
Description

Device and
temporary device
area

Statement example

[w:GD150]

Function

Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary device area.
Refer to the following for details of the devices and temporary device areas.

23

28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Function
(1) Device operation
Function

Description

Statement example

set (<bit device>)

Function

SETs <bit device>.

Statement example

rst (<bit device>)

Function

RSTs <bit device>.

Statement example

alt (<bit device>)

Function

Inverts <bit device>.

24

set

RECIPE

rst

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

alt

Function

Description

Statement example

bmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

Function

Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 1>,
to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 2>.

Statement example

fmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

Function

Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from
<word device 2>.

bmov

fmov

27

(3) Application arithmetic operation

Statement example

sin (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

Statement example

cos (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Cosine)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

Statement example

tan (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>. (Tangent)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

Statement example

asin (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

cos

tan

asin

28

29
(Continued to next page)
BARCODE
FUNCTION

sin

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Description

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Function

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(2) Continuous device operation

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 29

Function

Description

Statement example

acos (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

Statement example

atan (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)

Specify <word device or constant> in radian units.

Statement example

abs (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.

(Absolute value)

Statement example

log (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the power (base e) of <word device or constant>. (Natural logarithm)

Statement example

log10 (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the logarithm (base 10) of <word device or constant>.

(Common logarithm)

Statement example

exp (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the power (base e) of<word device or constant>. (Exponent)

Statement example

1dexp (<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)

Function

Multiplies <word device 1 or constant 1> by 2 to the power of <word device 2 or constant 2> .
(Exponential product)

Statement example

sqrt (<word device or constant>)

Function

Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)

acos

atan

abs

log

log10

exp

ldexp

sqrt

(4) File operation

Function

file_getlist

file_read

Description

Statement example

file_getlist (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of files>,
<maximum number of characters>)

Function

Obtains file names equivalent to <number of files>, starting from the <offset>th file when <file
name> in <folder name> is set as the head file. <Maximum number of characters> of each file
name is stored in <storage device> and subsequent devices.

Return value

Normal: Number of obtained files

Error: -1

Statement example

file_read (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of read bytes>)

Function

Reads data equivalent to <number of read bytes>, starting from the <offset>th byte, from <file
name> in <folder name>, and stores the read data in <storage device> and subsequent
devices.

Return value

Normal: Number of read data (bytes)

Error: -1

(Continued to next page)

28 - 30

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

file_copy

file_xcopy

#pragma
folder_name_leng
th

#pragma
file_name_length

Normal: Number of written data (bytes)

Error: -1

Statement example

file_rename (<folder name>, <file name>, <renamed file name>)

Function

Renames <file name> in <folder name> to <renamed file name>.

Return value

Normal: 0
Error: -1

Statement example

file_delete (<folder name>, <file name>)

Function

Deletes <file name> in <folder name>.

Return value

Normal: 0
Error: -1

Statement example

file_copy(<copy source folder name>, <copy source file name>, <copy destination folder
name>, <copy destination file name>, <copy mode>)

Function

Copies <copy source file name> in <copy source folder name> to <copy destination folder
name> with renaming the file name to <copy destination file name>.
By using <copy mode>, whether to overwrite the file can be specified.
When no <copy destination folder name> exists, a folder is created and the file is copied to the
folder.
A zero-byte file can be copied. A file cannot be copied in one drive.

Return value

Normal: 0
Error: -1

Statement example

file_xcopy(<copy source folder name 1>, <copy source folder name 2>, <copy destination
folder name 1>, <copy destination folder name 2>, <copy mode>)

Function

Copies files in <copy source folder name 1> and <copy source folder name 2> to <copy
destination folder name 1> and <copy destination folder name 2>.
By using <copy mode>, whether to overwrite the files and folders and whether to copy
subfolders can be specified. Files and folders cannot be copied in one drive.

Return value

Normal: 0
Error: -1

Statement example

#pragma folder_name_length (<maximum number of folder name characters>)

Function

Sets <maximum number of folder name characters> when specifying a folder name with
devices.

Statement example

#pragma file_name_length (<maximum number of file name characters>)

Function

Sets <maximum number of file name characters> when specifying a file name with devices.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Return value

23

RECIPE

24

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

file_delete

Function

Writes data with the method specified for <mode>.

New: 0
Newly creates <file name> in <folder name> that contains data equivalent to <number of
write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent devices.
When <file name> already exists, the existing file is deleted and a new file is created.
Addition: 1
Adds data equivalent to <number of write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent
devices to the end of <file name> in <folder name>.
When no <file name> exists, a new file is created.
Overwrite: 2
Overwrites the <offset>th byte and subsequent bytes of <file name> in <folder name> with
data equivalent to <number of write bytes> in <storage device> and subsequent devices.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

file_rename

file_write (<folder name>, <file name>, <storage device>, <offset>, <number of write bytes>,
<mode>)

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

file_write

Statement example

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Description

28

For arguments used for the file operation functions, refer to the following.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Function

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 31

HINT
Folder/file name character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma
file_name length)
(1) Application
The folder/file name character number specification functions are used for specifying a file or folder name with
devices.
The functions are invalid for specifying the folder or file name with any character string.
(2) Maximum number of folder/file name characters without functions
Up to 12 characters are available for a folder or file name without the folder/file name character number
specification functions.

Others
Item

Description

Statement example

1234

Function

Represents a constant (decimal / hexadecimal / BCD / real number / character strings).

Refer to the following for details of constants.

Constant

28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

Statement example

// (comment)

Function

A comment for a script can be described in (comment).

Comment

28 - 32

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Applicable data and representation methods

Script data formats

Any of the following seven different data formats can be selected for the script functions.
Note that the selected data format is fixed for each script.
The data format is selected in GT Designer3 when the monitor screen is created.
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
BCD16
BCD32
Real number

Signed BIN32

23

Unsigned BIN32

HINT
To operate different types of data
Device value of integral number can be calculated as real number by using integral number
conversion function for each script.

real number

LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.2.5

24

Integer <--> Real number conversion function

RECIPE

Applicable constants and representation methods

The following four different constants are applicable for the script functions.

Decimal number

124

Hexadecimal number

0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1

Real number

32.124, 3.2124e+10

BCD

344

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Representation Method

Unsigned BIN16

Signed BIN32

Unsigned BIN32

BCD16

BCD32

Real number

Applicable Data Range

Decimal number

-32768 to 32767

Hexadecimal number

0 to FFFF

Decimal number

0 to 65535

Hexadecimal number

0 to FFFF

Decimal number

-2147483648 to 2147483647

Hexadecimal number

0 to FFFFFFFF

Decimal number

0 to 4294967295

Hexadecimal number

0 to FFFFFFFF

BCD

0 to 9999

Hexadecimal number

0 to 270F

BCD

0 to 99999999

Hexadecimal number

0 to 5F5E0FF

Real number
Hexadecimal number

27

28

Signed 13-digit representation

(Representation with a decimal point only)*1
0 to FFFFFFFF

*1 The real number precision is given below dicimal point to the 6th digit. The 7th and later digits are illegal.
For examples of display of a number having 7th and later digits, refer to the following.

29

(Fundamentals) 2.9 Available Numeric Data

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Signed BIN16

Usable Constant

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Data Format

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Note that the data format of each script determines the applicable constants and data ranges as shown below.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Constant

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 33

 Applicable devices and representation methods

The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions.
The following table shows the device representations by device type; a station No.-specified device is represented
differently from others.
Device Type

Statement Example

Representation Example

Word device

*2

[w: device No. ]

[w:D100]

Bit device

[b: device No. *2]

[b:X100]

Specified bit of word device

[b: device No.*2. bit position]

Specified word of bit device

[w: device No. *2]

Station No.-specified device

*1

Offset device specification

*4

[0-FF:w:D100]

[Network No.-station No./CPU No.: w: device No.]

[0-FF/1:w:D100]

*5

register block No.*6

Specification of buffer memory
head I/O No.*7
Channel No.-specified device*8
*9

*2

[w:X100]

[w:D100[s16:D200]]

[w: device No. [s16: device No. ]]

Specification of extension file

*1

[b:D100.01]

[Network No.-station No.: w: device No. *2]

Multiple CPU No. specification*3

Model

[w: ER block No.-device No.]

[w:ER255-100]

[w: BM buffer memory head I/O No.-device No.]

[w:BM1E-100]

[@Channel.:w:device No.]

[@3:w:D100]

When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network No. and station No. monitors the devices of the host station (0FF).
Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device No. must be described in the following number of digits.

PLC CPU

OMRON PLC

Device Name

Number of Described
Digits (Digits)

Representation
Example

Word
specified

Bit
specified

..

[b:..2303]

LR,AR,HR,WR

[b:HR207]

[w:B000003]
[b:MB02343]

Allen-Bradley PLC
N,TP,TA,CP,CA

[w:N007255]

TT,TN,CU,CD,CN

[b:TT004255]

[w:D000100000]

SIEMENS PLC

Remarks

As the channel + relay format is used,

the relay part is described in 2 digits.
The file No. is described in 3 digits, the
element No. in 3 digits, and the bit
position in 1 digit.
The file No. is described in 3 digits, and
the element No. in 3 digits.
The data block (DB) is described in 4
digits, and the data word (DW) in 5 digits.

*3
*4

Even if the target PLC is set to the host station (0-FF), be sure to specify the station No. in statements.
For details of the offset device, refer to the following.

*5
*6
*7
*8
*9

The available data range is 16 bits. (-32768 to 32767)

The block No. of the extension file register can be specified only with ER devices.
The head I/O No. of the buffer memory can be specified only with BM devices.
When specifying both channel No. and station No., specify the channel No. first. (Example: [@3:0-FF:w:D100])
When specifying a device at channel No. 1, designation of a channel No. ("@Channel.:) can be omitted. (In the case of
[@1:w:D100], representation of [w:D100] is allowed by omitting "@1:".)

Device offset

HINT
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor target PLC CPU.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices

28 - 34

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

The following shows arguments applicable to the file operation functions.

Applicable Data Range

For specifying with character string : "FILE00001.CSV"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

Renamed file name

For specifying with character string : "FILE00001.BAK"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

For specifying with character string*3:

folder name + file name: 78 characters or less
For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods
Applicable devices

Storage device

*1

Number of files

Offset*2

[w:GD200]

Applicable devices and representation

methods
1 to 32

16 bits : 0 to 65535
32 bits : 0 to 2147483647
For using the offset in the file name obtaining function
(file_getlist), only 16 bits can be specified.
For the file write function (file_write), the offset is
applicable only when the mode is set to "2"
(Overwrite).
When the mode is set to any other than "2", set the
offset to "0".

1 to 78

Number of read bytes

16

1 to 2048

Number of write bytes

16

1to2048

Mode

24

Maximum number of characters

New: 0
Addition: 1
Overwrite: 2
The operation of the file write function (file_write) for each
mode, refer to the following.

28.2.4 Control structure

For specifying with character string : "FILE00001.CSV"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

For specifying with character string*3:

copy destination folder name
+ copy destination file name: 78 characters or less
For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods

(Continued to next page)

26

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Copy destination file name

Available drives are the drive A, B, D (for GT11 only), and

E (for GT16 and SoftGOT1000 only).

25

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Copy destination folder name

For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

File name/copy source file name

Available drives are the drive A, B, D (for GT11 only), and

E (for GT16 and SoftGOT1000 only).

RECIPE

For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Folder name/copy source folder

name

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Expression example

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Argument

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Applicable arguments and representation methods

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 35

Argument

Expression example

Applicable Data Range

Copy source folder name 1

For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

Copy source folder name 2

For specifying with character string : "A:\\Project1\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

For specifying with character string : "A:\\backup\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

Copy destination folder name 2

For specifying with character string : "A:\\backup\\"

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

For specifying with character string : 3

For specifying with devices
: [w:D0001]

For specifying with character string*3:

copy source folder name 1
+ copy source folder name 2: 78 characters or less
For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods
Available drives are the drive A, B, D (for GT11 only), and
E (for GT16 and SoftGOT1000 only).

Copy destination folder name 1

Copy mode

Available drives are the drive A, B, D (for GT11 only), and

E (for GT16 and SoftGOT1000 only).

For specifying with character string*3:

copy destination folder name 1
+ copy destination folder name 2:
78 characters or less
For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods
For specifying with character string :
Bit 0
File overwrite prohibited: 0
File overwrite permitted: 1
Bit 1
Subfolders not copied: 0
Subfolders copied: 1
For specifying with devices:
Applicable devices
Applicable devices and representation
methods

Maximum number of folder name

characters

12

1 to 78

Maximum number of file name

characters

12

1 to 78

*1 Bit devices cannot be specified as word devices.

For *2 and *3, refer to the next page.

*2 How to use offset

The offset is an argument that represents the storage position of the target data in a folder or file.
For representing the storage position of the target data with an offset, the first byte of a folder or file is recognized as
the zeroth byte.
The following shows an offset example using the file read function (file_read).
Example) Offset for the file name "ARP00001.DAT":
For reading the data equivalent to six bytes (number of read bytes) starting from the fourth byte, and storing the read
data in the storage device "D100" and sequential devices
[s16:D500] = file_read("A:\\Progect1\\", "ARP00001.DAT", [w:D100], 4,6);

//Reading file

A drive
Project 1
ARP00001.DAT
The first byte is counted
as the zeroth byte.

Storage device
D100
D101
D102

2
8
2

10584268123

Reading 6-byte data, starting from

the fourth byte, from
ARP000001.DAT, and storing the
read data in the devices from
D100 to D102.

28 - 36

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

4
6
1

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

*3 Folder name and file name

(1) Folder name and file nameHow to use delimiter "Y"

For specifying a folder name with a character string, set "\\" as a directory delimiter in a path.
In the file operation functions, the first delimiter "\" is recognized as a control character.
Therefore, fialure to set "\\" causes an error due to incorrect path specification.

23

Example: "A:\Project\" (Actual path) "A:\\Project\\" (Path as argument)

For specifying a folder name with a device, do not set "\\" as a directory delimiter in a path.
Doing so causes an error due to incorrect path specification.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(2) Restrictions on folder name and file name

For the character strings that are not applicable to folder names and file names, refer to the following.
Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

24

(3) Wild card specification

In the file name obtaining function (file_gtlist), a wild card can be used for specifying a file name.
(For the copy destination file name, no wild card is available.)
Use the wild card under the following conditions.

RECIPE

(a) The symbol that can be used as the wild card is "*" only.
Applicable example : "ARP*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP?????.DAT"

25

(c)

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(b) Only one "*" can be used in one argument.

Only "*.*" without characters can be set as an exception.
Applicable example : "*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP*.*"
For using "*" for the file name part in <file name>, "*" can be set right before "." (Period) only.
Applicable example : "ARP*.DAT"
Inapplicable example : "ARP*01.DAT"

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(d) For using "*" for the extension in <file name>, only "*" can be set.
Applicable example : "ARP00001.*"
Inapplicable example : "ARP00001.*AT"

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 37

HINT
Wild card
A wild card is a symbol that treats an unknown part in a file name as any character string.
The part specified with the wild card can be any character string.
The following shows an example of using the wild card.
Example : For obtaining file names starting with "ARP" and ending with ".DAT" from the "A:\\Project1\\" folder.
[s16:D500] = file_getlist("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP*.DAT", [w:GD100], 0, 5, 12);

//Obtaining file name

ARP * .DAT
Wild card (any character string)
A drive
Project 1

ARP00001.CSV
ARP00002.CSV
ARP00003.CSV
ARP00004.CSV
ARP00005.CSV
ARP00001.DAT
ARP00002.DAT
ARP00003.DAT
ARP00004.DAT
ARP00005.DAT

"*" part

28 - 38

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

Obtained character strings

ARP00001.DAT
ARP00002.DAT
ARP00003.DAT
ARP00004.DAT
ARP00005.DAT

For temporary device area, 1024 points of from TMP0 to TMP1023 are applicable.
One variable is handled as 32 bits, and stores 0 at power-on of the GOT.
Read/write of the temporary device area is possible from multiple scripts created by the project script and screen
script.
The temporary device area representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below.
Statement Example

Word device

[w: temporary device area No.]

Bit device

[b: temporary device area No. bit position]

23

Representation Example
[w:TMP0001]
[b:TMP1023.01]

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Device Type

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Applicable temporary device areas and representation methods

Temporary device areas are used in the following cases.

Example 1: Prevention of a write delay in assignment processing of the PLC CPU

24

28.1.2 Precautions for use

Example 2: Write target device of while statement
28.2.4 Control structure

RECIPE

Example 3: Variable for operation

When assigning a D0 + 1 value to D1 and assigning a D1 + 1 value to D2

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

//substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.

//substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
//substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.

POINT

(a) A value is read in the script of which data format is different from that of the script used to write the value
to the temporary device area.
Example: Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w:TMP0000] = 0x1234;
Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)
[w:GD0000] = [w:TMP0000];

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

Precautions for using temporary device area

The temporary device area is a 32-bit global variable.
Note that a correct value cannot be read in either of the following cases.

27

(b) A value is read in the script represented (as word device/bit device) differently from the script used to
write the value to the temporary device area.
Example: Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w:TMP0000] = 0x3;
if( [b:TMP0000.b0] == ON) {

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]+1;
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001];
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001]+1;

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Make sure to write and read a value to and from one temporary device area in the same data format and
representation.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 39

 Representing bit device (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.

(1) When performing relational operation of bit device

A device value, which is normally represented as "1" or "0", can also be represented as "ON" or "OFF".

if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;}

//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;}

//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

(2) When performing assignment processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented by assigning "1" or "0", can be also represented by assigning "ON"
or "OFF".

set([b:X100]);

//X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=1;

//X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=ON;

//X100 turns ON.

Replacing devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced with any character string.
Configure the user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer3.
For details of the setting method, refer to the following.
28.2.1 Script symbol tab / Script symbols
Example) When replacing "b:X100" with "LS1_ERROR" using GT Designer3

if(LS1_ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100(LS1_ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.

28 - 40

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22

Device offset

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The device offset can be specified.

This specification is allowed only in screen script.

(1) Format
Example: When D200 is 5, store 48 in D105.

(2) Applicable device

(a) Base device
The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is not applicable)
(b) Offset device
The controller device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary device area can be specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is applicable. Please set device as the
multiple of 16.)

(3) Example

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Switch the parameter according to operation mode.

D10 : for switching operation mode
D100 to D900 : for storing parameter value
GD500 : base device
TMP100 : offset device
(a) Script 1 (specify parameter value)
//parameter value of operation mode1

26
//parameter value of operation mode2
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

[w:GD500]=10;
[w:GD501]=11;
[w:GD502]=12;
:
[w:GD600]=20;
[w:GD601]=21;
[w:GD602]=22;
:
[w:GD700]=30;
[w:GD701]=31;
[w:GD702]=32;
:

24

RECIPE

Offset device
Base device

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

[ w:D100[ w:D200] ] = 48;

//parameter value of operation mode3

27

switch( [w: D10] ){

case1:[w:TMP100]=0;break;
case2:[w:TMP100]=100;break;
case3:[w:TMP100]=200;break;
}

//when D10 is 0, offset value is 0.

//when D10 is 2, offset value is 100
//when D10 is 3, offset value is 200

28

Script 3 (write parameter according to offset value)

SCRIPT FUNCTION

(c)

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(b) Script 2 (offset value is determined by the device value for switching operation mode)

bmov([w:GD500[w:TMP100]],[w:D100],10); //write the device value of (GD500+TEM100) to D100 to D109.

POINT

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Precautions for example (b) and (c)

When script (b) and script (c) are executed simultaneously or in a single script, the offset switching is delayed,
causing the system to operate abnormally.

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 41

(4) Precautions
(a) Data type of the offset device
Regardless of [Data Type] set in [Script Edit], the device type is converted to the signed 16-bit binary data.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[s32:GD1000]];
1) When "65535" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "-1" (signed 16-bit binary data).
The value in D999 is assigned to GD 100.
2) When "65537" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "1" (signed 16-bit binary data).
The value in D1001 is assigned to GD100.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[d32:GD1000]];
When "10" is set for GD1000 (signed 32-bit binary data), the value is "16" (signed 16-bit binary data). The
value in D1016 is assigned to GD100.
Example) [w:GD100] = [w:D1000[flt:GD1000]];
1) When "65535.0" is set for GD1000 (real number), the value is "-1" (signed 16-bit binary data). The value
in D999 is assigned to GD100.
2) When "65537.0" is set for GD1000 (real number), the value is "1" (signed 16-bit binary data). The value
in D1001 is assigned to GD100.
(b) Processing delay when the offset device value is assigned
When a device for a controller is used as the base device, the processing is delayed and the operation can
be incorrectly executed even though the offset device value is changed.
When offset cannot be performed normally, use temporary device area or GOT internal device.
28.1.2 Precautions for use
To use the GOT internal devices, select [Cancel internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
28.2.1 Option tab

Example of using file operation functions

The following shows examples of using the file operation functions.

(1) File list obtaining function (file_getlist)

For obtaining two file names, starting from the third file among DAT files in the "Project1" folder of the A drive,
and for storing eight characters of each file name in devices from D100 to D109, the statement is as shown
below.
s16:D500]=file_getlist("A:\\Project1\\", "*.DAT", [w:D100], 3, 2, 8); //Obtaining file list

A drive
Project 1
Storage device
ARP00001.CSV
ARP00002.CSV
ARP00003.CSV
ARP00004.CSV
ARP00005.CSV
ARP00001.DAT
ARP00002.DAT
ARP00003.DAT
ARP00004.DAT
ARP00005.DAT

28 - 42

Obtaining two file names,

starting from the third
file among DAT files, and
storing eight characters
of each file name in
devices from D100 to D109

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107
D108
D109

R
0
0
4
\0
R
0
0
5
\0

A
P
0
0
\0
A
P
0
0
\0

For reading 16-byte data, starting from the fourth byte, from "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A
drive, and for storing the read data in devices from D100 to D107, the statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500]=file_read("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP00001.DAT", [w:D100], 4, 16); //Reading file

A drive

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(2) File read function (file_read)

23

Project 1
Storage device
0

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107

7
2
1
5
0
2
b
d

0
1
1
1
2
3
a
c

LOGGING
FUNCTION

APR00001.DAT

24

RECIPE

Reading 16-byte data, starting

from the fourth byte, from
ARP000001.DAT, and storing
the read data in devices from
D100 to D107

25

For overwriting the fourth byte and subsequent bytes of "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A drive
with 16-byte data in devices from D100 to D109, the statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500]=file_write("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP00001.DAT", [w:D100], 4, 16, 2); //Writing to file

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(3) File write function (file_write)

26

A drive

D106

D107

D108
D109

0
0

0
0

0
1
1
1
2
3

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Overwriting the fourth byte and

subsequent bytes of
"ARP00001.DAT" with 16-byte
data in devices from
D100 to D109

7
2
1
5
0
2

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105

ARP00001.DAT
0 0 0 0
0 7 1 2

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Storage device

Project 1

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 43

(4) File rename function (file_rename)

For renaming the file name of "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder of the A drive to "DATA1201.DAT", the
statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500]=file_rename("A:\\Project1\\", "ARP00001.DAT", "DATA1201.DAT"); //Renaming file

A drive
Project 1

Renaming <file name> in

<folder name> to
<renamed file name>

ARP00001.DAT
DATA1201.DAT

A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT
<folder name>

<file name>

DATA1201.DAT
<renamed file name>

(5) File copy function (file_copy)

For copying "ARP00001.DAT" in the "Project1" folder in the C drive to the "backup" folder in the A drive, the
statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500] =file_copy("C:\\Project1\\","ARP00001.DAT","A:\\backup\\","",1); //Copying file

A drive

B drive

Project 1
ARP00001.DAT

backup
ARP00001.DAT

Copying <copy source file name> in

<copy source folder name> to
<copy destination folder name>

28 - 44

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

For copying data (including subfolders) in the "Project1" folder in the C drive to the "backup" folder in the A drive,
the statement is as shown below.
[s16:D500] =file_xcopy("C:\\Project1\\","","A:\\backup\\","",3); //Copying folder

A drive

B drive

Project 1

23

backup
sample 1

ARP00001.DAT

LOGGING
FUNCTION

sample 1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(6) Folder copy function (file_xcopy)

ARP00001.DAT

24

RECIPE

Copying data (including subfolders) in

<copy source folder name 1> and
<copy source folder name 2> to
<copy destination folder name 1> and
<copy destination folder name 2>

(7) Folder/file name character number specification functions

(#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma file_name_length)
For setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 14 and that of file name characters to 12, the
statements for reading data from a file are as shown below.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

GD2000 to GD2006 :Storing a folder name of "A:\FOLDER01\"

GD2100 to GD2105 :Storing a file name of "ARP00001.DAT"
GD3000 to GD3015 :Storing data read from the file
#pragma folder_name_length(14)
//Setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 14
#pragma file_name_length(12)
//Setting the maximum number of file name characters to 12
[s16:D500]=file_read([w:GD2000],[w:GD2100],[w:GD3000],0,32);
//Reading 32-byte data from the specified file

27

A:\FOLDER01\

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Specifying the folder name with 14 characters

read from GD2000 to GD2006
A : \ FOLDER01 \
Specifying the file name with 12 characters
read from GD2100 to GD2105
ARP00001.DAT

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

ARP00001.DAT

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 45

 Integer <--> Real number conversion function

In script function, the data type is selected for each script. Once it is set, it cannot be changed (fixed). However, the
integer device value can be calculated as real number by using integer
real number conversion function.

(1) Conversion method

Integer
real number conversion is executed by taking GOT internal device (GD) as conversion target.
Integer
real number conversion can be executed by specifying the following devices.
Maximum 4096 devices can be converted once.
For details about GOT internal device, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

POINT
Device that can be the target of integer

real number conversion

Integer
real number conversion can only be executed by GOT internal devices (GD).
To convert the device value of controller, transmit the device value of controller to GOT internal device (GD) by
script (bmov instruction).
(a) Read device
Device

Function

Description

GS460

Conversion start instruction

Specify the conversion start and conversion method by each bit.

b0
:Unsigned 16-bit binary data are converted to real numbers.
b1
:Signed 16-bit binary data are converted to real numbers.
b2 to b3 :Disabled
b4
:Real numbers are converted to unsigned 16-bit binary data.
b5
:Real numbers are converted to signed 16-bit binary data.
b6 to b14:Disabled
b15
:Execute conversion when it is turned ON.

GS461

Number of conversion devices

Number of devices

GS462

Conversion source head

device No.

Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value before
conversion.

GS463

Conversion destination head

device No.

Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value after
conversion.

GS464

Storage error value

When error occurs, specify the device value to be stored in the conversion source device.
(Useful for error recognition)

(b) Write device

Device

Function

GS260

Status

GS261

Error code *1

Store the error during conversion.

Store 0 when the conversion is completed normally.

For details of *1, refer to the following.

28 - 46

Description
Store the conversion completion notification and error occurrence status into each bit.
When conversion start instruction (GS460.b15) is turned OFF (0), each bit becomes 0.
b0 to b13 : Disabled
b14
: It is turned ON when error occurs during conversion
processing by GOT. (Store error code in GS261)
b15
: It is turned ON when conversion is completed by GOT.

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22

*1 Error code

Remark

Conversion start instruction is not initialized

Conversion start instruction is not set correctly.

Number of devices is set out of the range.

Device is out of range.

Conversion source overlaps with conversion destination.

Not used

Conversion error (overflow, ect.)

23

Conversion processing is not executed.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

--Conversion processing continues.

(2) Example
The average value of the data (signed 16-bit binary data) stored in the controller device is displayed on the GOT
as the real number.
(a) Operate when GB50 (trigger) turns ON
Transmit the value to GOT internal device
50

D109

139

GD100 50
(b) Integer
real number
conversion GD109 139

RECIPE

D100

25

(c) Store average

value in GD300
GD300

68.25

GD300 68.25

Display on GOT

(a) Script 1 (conversion start processing)

Transmit the devices (D100 to D109) value of controller to GOT internal devices (GD100 to GD109) and
execute integer
real number conversion.
After conversion is started, script 2 starts.
Data type: Signed BIN16
Trigger: GB50 is ON
bmov([w:D100],[w:GD100],10);
[w:GS461]=10;
//Number of object devices to be converted
[w:GS462]=100;
//Conversion source head device No.
[w:GS463]=200;
//Conversion destination head device No.
[w:GS460]=0x8002;
//Conversion starts
set([b:GB100]);
//Script 2 starts

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

(b) Script 2 (conversion completion monitor processing)

Wait the completion of integer
real number conversion.
If error does not occur after conversion is completed, clear the conversion start instruction device
simultaneously when starting script 3.
Data type: Signed BIN16
Trigger: GB100 is ON

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

//Conversion completed.

//Conversion is completed normally (script 3 starts).

//Clear conversion start.
//Clear the start of script 2.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

if([b:GS260.15]==1)
{
if([b:GS260.14]==0)
{
set([b:GB101]);
}
[w:GS460]=0;
rst([b:GB100]);
}

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Description

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Error code

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Error codes stored in GS261 and the error information are as follows:

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 47

(c)

Script 3 (Average calculating processing)

After converting to real number, calculate the average value of GOT internal device and store in GD300.
Data type: Real number
Trigger: GB101 is ON
[w:TMP001]=0;
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD200];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD202];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD204];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD206];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD208];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD210];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD212];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD214];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD216];
[w:TMP001]=[w:TMP001]+[w:GD218];
[w:GD300]=[w:TMP001]/10;
//Store the average in GD300 (real number)
rst([b:GB101]);
//Clear start of script 3.

(3) Precautions
(a) Turn the conversion start instruction (GS460) OFF after conversion completion.
When the device is ON, the conversion cannot be executed even if conversion start instruction is executed.
(b) During integer
real number conversion, figures after the decimal point will be rounded off. (1.53
1)
(When it is out of the real number range, error code will be displayed during operation and the conversion
cannot be executed.)

28 - 48

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

[s16:D0]=[w:GD0];

//Refers to the value in GD0 as the data type of [Data

Type].
//Converts the device value into
//the signed 16-bit binary data, and
//substitutes the data to D0.

Unsigned BIN16

[u16:device]

[w:GD0]=[u16:D0];

//Refers to the value in D0 as the unsigned 16-bit //binary

data.
//Coverts the value into the data type of
//[Data Type], and substitutes the data to
//GD0.

Signed BIN32

[s32:device]

if([s32:TMP0]<0){

//Refers to the value in TMP0 to TMP1 as

//the signed 32-bit binary data.
//Compares the data with "0".

[u32:GD10]=[w:GD0]*[w:GD1];

//Refers to the value in GD0 and GD1 as

//data type of [Data Type].
//Executes calculation, and converts the result //data into
the unsigned 32-bit
//binary data, and substitutes the data to GD10 //and
GD11.

[d16:GD0]=[w:D0]&0x000F;

//Refers to the value in GD0 as the data type

//of [Data Type].
//Executes calculation, and converts
//the result data into BCD16, and substitutes
//the data to GD0.

[w:GD0]=[d32:D0];

//Refers to the value in D0 to D1 as BCD32.

//Converts the value into the data type of
//[Data Type], and substitutes the data to GD0.

[flt:D100]=log([w:D200]);

//Refers to the value in D200 as the data type //of [Data

Type].
//Executes calculation, and converts the result
//data into the real number, and
//substitutes the data to D100 to D101.

Unsigned BIN32

BCD16

BCD32

Real number

[u32:device]

[d16:device]

[d32:device]

[flt:device]

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

[s16:device]

Representation example

24

RECIPE

Signed BIN16

Expression example

25

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Data type after conversion

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

The GOT can calculate integer device values as real numbers easier with the data type conversion function than with
real number conversion function.
the integer
The function allows reading / writing of a word device value after converting the value into the specified data type.
The data type to which a device value should be converted is specified when reading / writing the device value.
The table below shows the list of the data types that can be specified by the data type conversion function.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Data type conversion function

27

[flt:D10]=([w:D20]+[w:D30]+[w:D40]+[w:D50]+[w:D60])/5;

Example 2) Writing a real device value in Signed BIN32 after dropping the fractional portion of the device value

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Example 1) Substituting the average of device values when Signed BIN16 is set as [Data Type]

28

[s32:D100]=[flt:D200];

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Example 3) Writing a real device value in Signed BIN32 after rounding off the device value
[s32:D100]=[flt:D200]+0.5;

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 49

28.2.6

Program examples

This section explains script program with examples.

Touch switches with interlock function

(1) Operation
When the ready switch and run/stop switch turns on, the running lamp is lit.
System operation is controlled synchronously with the running lamp.
Screen Image

Part Operation Definition

Running lamp:
Indicates the operating status of the system.
Ready switch:
Acts as an interlock for the [Run/Stop] switch.
Run/Stop switch:
Used to switch the operating status (run/stop) of the system.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name

Object Type

Setting Item

Setting

Running lamp

Bit lamp

Monitor device

M0003
(System operation controlling device)

Ready switch

Bit switch

Monitor device

M0001

Operation setting

Alternate

Run/Stop switch

Bit switch

Monitor device

M0002

Operation setting

Alternate

(3) Program example

Item

Description

Data format

Signed BIN16

Trigger type

Ordinary

Script

28 - 50

if ([b:M0001]&&[b:M0002]==1){
set([b:M0003]);
}
else{
rst([b:M0003]);
}

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

//if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON

//the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.
//if not
//the running lamp turns off and the system is stopped.

(1) Operation
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control statuses of three lines are represented
by one lamp.
Screen Image

Part Operation Definition

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions

23
The lamp color and comment are changed according to the operating status of
each line.
Line 1 switch to Line 3 switch:
Controls the operation status of the line 1 to line 3.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Control status lamp:

24

Stop all lines switch:

RECIPE

Stops all lines.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Setting Item

Word lamp

Line 1 switch

Bit switch

Line 2 switch

Bit switch

Line 3 switch

Bit switch

Stop all lines switch

Bit switch

Style, text

Display range
Text

: $V==1 Lamp color: 3

: Line 1 running

Display range
Text

: $V==2 Lamp color: 224

: Line 2 running

Display range
Text

: $V==3 Lamp color: 227

: Line 3 running

Display range
Text

: $V==4 Lamp color: 28

: Lines 1, 2 running

Display range
Text

: $V==5 Lamp color: 31

: Lines 1, 3 running

Display range
Text

: $V==6 Lamp color: 252

: Lines 2, 3 running

Display range
Text

: $V==7 Lamp color: 162

: Lines 1, 2, 3 running

Monitor device

X1

Operation setting

Alternate

Monitor device

X2

Operation setting

Alternate

Monitor device

X3

Operation setting

Alternate

Monitor device

X0

Operation setting

Set

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

: $V==0 Lamp color: 182

: All lines stop

26

27

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Control status lamp

D10
Display range
Text

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Monitor device

25

Setting

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Object Type

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Part Name

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 51

(3) Program example

Item

Description

Data format

Signed BIN16

Trigger type

Ordinary

Script

28 - 52

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=0;
}

//if line 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF

//stores 0 into D10

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=1;
}

//if line 1 is ON and line 2 and 3 are OFF.

//stores 1 into D10

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=2;
}

//if line 2 is ON and line 1 and 3 are OFF.

//stores 2 into D10

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=3;
}

//if line 3 is ON and line 1 and 2 are OFF.

//stores 3 into D10

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){
[w:D10]=4;
}

//if line 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.

//stores 4 into D10

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=5;
}

//if line 1 and 3 are ON and line 2 is OFF.

//stores 5 into D10

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=6;
}

//if line 2 and 3 are ON and line 1 is OFF.

//stores 6 into D10

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){
[w:D10]=7;
}

//if line 1, 2 and 3 are ON.

//stores 7 into D10

if ([b:X0]==ON){
rst([b:X1]);
rst([b:X2]);
rst([b:X3]);
rst([b:X0]);
}

//if all lines stop turns ON

//turns OFF line 1.
//turns OFF line 2.
//turns OFF line 3.
//turns OFF all lines stop.

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

(1) Operation
The password enter screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds
after it appeared.
Screen Image

Screen with the Manager

Part Operation Definition

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Password input screen with time limit function

23

switch (base screen 3)

Manager button:

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Shifts to the password enter screen (base screen 4).

Screen change

Returns in 10 seconds
Password entry:

24

Displays the password entered by using the 0 to 9 switches.

0 to 9 switch:

RECIPE

Enters a value.

Clear switch:

25

Clears the entered value.

Password match

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Confirm switch:
Confirms the entered value.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Setting

Operation setting

Switching to base screen 4

Password entry

Numerical input

Monitor device

D10

1 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0031H]

2 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0032H]

3 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0033H]

4 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0034H]

5 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0035H]

6 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0036H]

7 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0037H]

8 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0038H]

9 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0039H]

0 switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0030H]

Clear switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [0088H]

Confirm switch

Key code switch

Operation setting

Key code [000DH]

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Setting Item

Screen switching switch

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Part Name

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Object Type

Manager button

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 53

(3) Program example

Item

Description

Data format

Signed BIN16

Trigger type

Ordinary
if([b:GS1.01]==ON){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:GS7];
}

Script

//only when the password input screen has appeared

//assigns GS7 to TMP0001.

if([w:D10]==3238){
[w:D0]=5;
[w:D10]=0;
}

//when the correct password is entered

//switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
//clears the password.

if([w:GS7]-[w:TMP0001]>=10){

//if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password enter screen
//had appeared
//returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).

[w:D0]=3;
}

POINT
Program example using GOT special registers (GS)
This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers store the GOT's internal data, communication status, script error data and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by correctly using the GOT special registers together with the script
functions.
For details on GOT special registers, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

28 - 54

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22

Precautions

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

28.2.7

This section explains the precautions for using the project script or screen script.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Maximum number of script settings
Up to 256 script settings can be configured in one project or one screen.

23

(2) Maximum number of scripts that can be registered

Up to 32767 scripts can be registered.
GT Designer3 cannot be operated while editing a script file by a script editor or a text editor after clicking the
[Edit Script] button.
While the scripts are edited, GT Designer3 seems to be frozen. Operation is restored when exiting the script
editor or text editor.

(4) Restoration of a script file

LOGGING
FUNCTION

(3) When editing scripts

24

RECIPE

When the project for which [External File] is set in the [Option] tab is opened, if the script file does not exist in the
set path, GT Designer3 restores the script file.
In this case, set the folder where a script file should be restored at the dialog box as shown below.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Do not write a script that causes the operation result to exceed the allowable range of a device value.
Script operation is executed internally by double-precision real numbers.
Therefore, when judgment is made using such as an IF statement, results of judgment can differ depending on
the operation method.
Example: Judgment for the difference between GD100 and D100 using an IF statement (for signed 16-bit BIN)
When GD100=-32758 and D100=32767
(a) When operation is executed in evaluation expression
if ( ( [w:GD100] - [w:D100] ) >= 10 ) {
//If difference between GD100 and D100 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0;
//"0" is written to D200.
}
The calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is "-65525", meaning that the condition is not
met.
(b) When processing the script after substitution
[w:GD200] = [w:GD100] - [w:D100];
//Substitutes the value of "GD100 - D100" to GD200.
if ( [w:GD200] >= 10) {
//When the value of GD200 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0;
//"0" is written to D200.
}

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(1) Operations that exceed the allowable range of a device value

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Precautions for writing a script

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

When "-65525" which is the calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is substituted to
GD200 in signed 16-bit BIN, GD200 becomes "10", meaning that the condition is met.
(Since a value that cannot be handled by a variable (device) is substituted as the result of operation, the
result differs from that obtained in (a).)

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 55

(2) Precautions for using bmov and fmov instructions

(a) Data type
For using the bmov or fmov instructions, make sure that the data types for the word device 1 and the word
device 2 are the same.
When the data types differ, errors occur with the syntax check.
28.2.1 Settings
(b) Data type for [w:device]
The data type for [w:device] is set to the data type specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box.
The following example shows an error occurrence with the syntax check when using [w:device].
Example: When setting [Signed BIN16] for the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box
bmov([w:GD200],[flt:GD201],10);
Because the data type for GD200 is the signed BIN16 and the data type for GD201 is the real number,
errors occur with the syntax check.
28.2.5 Data type conversion function

POINT
Precautions for syntax check
When the syntax check is executed in the [Script File List] dialog box, the data type is processed as [Signed
BIN16].
For executing the syntax check with the arbitrary data type, set the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box, and
then execute the syntax check in the dialog box of the script editor.

(3) Precautions for using file operation functions

(a) Data type
For using the file operation functions, do not specify BCD data for the data types of the storage devices.
Doing so cannot detect errors with the script.
28.2.1 Settings
(b) Data type for [w:device]
The data type for [w:device] is set to the data type specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box.
For using [w:device] in any file operation function, do not specify BCD data for the data types of the storage
devices.

POINT
Precautions for syntax check
When the syntax check is executed in the [Script File List] dialog box, the data type is processed as [Signed
BIN16].
For executing the syntax check with the arbitrary data type, set the data type in the [Script Edit] dialog box, and
then execute the syntax check in the dialog box of the script editor.
(c)

28 - 56

Operations while files are read or written

The following file operation functions cannot be executed while the target file is accessed with the other
functions.
Execute the following functions after accessing the target file with the other functions is completed.
During reading : file_read, file_write, file_delete
During writing : file_read, file_write, file_rename, file_delete

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(d) Precautions for using file rename function (file_rename)

When the full path to the file is specified in <folder name>, be sure to set <file name>.
Failure to do so cannot rename the file name correctly.

//Renaming file name

The file name is renamed from "ARP00001.DAT" to "ARP00001.DATDATA-15-JAN-08.DAT".

When the full path to the file is specified in <file name>, specify the full path to the file in <renamed file
name>.
Failure to do so change the file name and the path.
Therefore, the file is stored in a different storage area.
Example: When specifying full path to file in <file name> without setting <folder name>
[s16:D500] = file_rename("","A:\Project1\ARP00001.DAT","DATA-15-JAN-08.DAT"); // Renaming file name

//Copying file

When the "backup" folder does not exist in the A drive, "ARP00001.DAT" is copied in "A:YY" with renaming the file name to "backup".

Do not create a folder with the same name as the file specified in <copy source file name> in the copy
destination drive.
Doing so cannot copy the file correctly.
(f)

Precautions for using folder copy function (file_xcopy)

When an error occurs during a copy process, the copy stops.
For files copied before the copy stops, the copy processing is completed.
Do not create a folder with the same name as the file specified in <copy source file name> in the copy
destination drive.
Doing so cannot copy the file correctly.

(g) How to use folder/file name character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length,
#pragma file_name length)
Use the folder/file name character number specification functions only one time at the head of a script.
Failure to do so cannot specify folder/file names correctly.

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Example: When no folder specified in <copy destination folder name> exists and "YY" is not added to the
end of <copy destination folder name>

25

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(e) Precautions for using file copy function (file_copy)

When no folder specified in <copy destination folder name> exists, a folder is created and the file is
copied in the folder.
Make sure to add "YY" to the end of <copy destination folder name>.
Failure to do so copies the file with renaming the file to the folder name specified in <copy destination
folder name>.

RECIPE

24

The file name is renamed from "ARP00001.DAT" to "DATA-15-JAN-2008.DAT".

[s16:D200] =file_copy("A:\\Project1\\ARP00001.DAT","B:\\backup","",1);

23

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

[s16:D500] =file_rename("A:\Project1\ARP00001.DAT","","DATA-15-JAN-08.DAT");

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Example: When specifying full path to file in <folder name> without setting <file name>

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 57

(h) Precautions for specifying folder/file names with devices

Do not set values that exceed the numbers of actual folder/file name characters in the folder/ file name
character number specification functions (#pragma folder_name_length, #pragma file_name length).
For specifying folder/file names with devices, the GOT reads device data equivalent to the numbers of
characters specified in the folder/file name character number specification functions.
When the values specified in the functions exceed the actual numbers of the file/folder name characters,
the GOT reads unnecessary data.
Reading unnecessary data increases loads on communication processing. As a result, updating screens
and executing scripts may take a longer time than those without reading unnecessary data.
Example: When maximum number of file name characters is set to 22 and number of actual file name
characters is 16
D100 to D110: Storing a folder name of "A:\\folder-001\\"
D200 to D210: Storing a file name of "DATA-15-JAN-2008"
GD100
: Storage device
#pragma folder_name_length(22);
#pragma file_name_length(22);
[s16:D500]=file_read([w:D100],[w:D200],[w:GD100],0,16);

12-byte
unnecessary
data

28 - 58

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107
D108
D109
D110

:
\
o
d
r
0
1
\

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

A
\
f
l
e
0
\

//Setting the maximum number of folder name characters to 22

//Setting the maximum number of file name characters to 22
//Reading 16-byte data from the specified file

D200
D201
D202
D203
D204
D205
D206
D207
D208
D209
D210

A
A
1
A
0
8

D
T
5
J
N
2
0

If using the bmov instruction (many times) in Project script or Screen script to read device values from the controller into
the GOT internal devices, this may cause the performance of the GOT display refresh and screen change by use of the
touch switch to slow down considerably.
This Section provides guidelines for using the GOT in order to improve the monitoring performance by reducing the
number of times to communicate with the controller using the bmov instruction.

POINT
How to read device values from controllers without bmov instruction
The GOT can read device values with the device data transfer function instead of the bmov instruction.
With the device data transfer function, the GOT communicates with controllers only when trigger conditions are
met. Therefore, the GOT has no communication loads by always monitoring the device used for the script function.
For the device data transfer function, refer to the following.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for using bmov

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.2.8

24

*1
*2

When the offset is specified in the device, the offset device is the device described in the direct address.
The Screen script applies only to the currently displayed screen on the GOT.

The following counter measures should be taken into consideration.

(a) The batch of divided blocks are read from the controller to the GOT internal memory during one
communication processing.
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices into separate blocks and transferred to the
temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices, such as GD.
Script solution examples
(b) The batch of divided blocks (for each 'if' and 'switch' statement) are read from the controller to the GOT
internal memory during one communication processing.
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices according to the 'if' and 'switch' statements
and transferred to the temporary device area and then to the GOT internal devices, such as GD.
Script solution examples(2) Reading bmov in a batch of steps within a script
When reading a batch of devices from the controller to the temporary device area, make sure the devices
fall within the specified range, as shown in the table below.
If the number of words is greater than the specified reference, the number will be automatically divided and
then transferred.
Connected controller
QCPU (bus connection only)
Motion controller CPU (Q mode)

Number of words transferred by bmov for each communication

processing
960 words

26

27

28

29

QCPU (other than bus connection)

QnACPU

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

GOT is done one or more times for each instruction*2, depending on the amount of data.
Therefore, in order to reduce the communication time, it is recommend to read a batch of values from the source
devices into a TMP (Temporary device area) area before transferring the data to the GOT internal devices.

25

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

address*1, regardless of script execution condition, or conditional 'if' or 'switch' statements.

Also, when using the bmov instruction to read devices from the controller, communication with the controller from the

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

With Project script or Screen script, the GOT only reads*2 a batch of device values from the controller direct

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Reducing the communication time when using bmov instruction

RECIPE

25. DEVICE DATA TRANSFER FUNCTION

480 words

ACPU
FXCPU

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Motion controller CPU (A mode)

64 words

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 59

 Script solution examples

(1) Reading a batch of device values into temporary device area
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal memory and
the controller down to just once, where it took 3 times to do the same processing before.
(When transferring from the temporary device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory*1
does not communicate with the controller.)
*1 System area used for communication processing. The user is not permitted access to this area.

[Normal process]
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, R1010 to R1014 and R1020 to R1024 into GD360 to
GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to GD384, respectively.
(b) Script description
bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5);
bmov([w:R1010],[w:GD370],5);
bmov([w:R1020],[w:GD380],5);

GOT
controller internal
device

Internal
memory

GD

R1000 to R1004

GD360 to GD364

R1010 to R1014

GD370 to GD374

R1020 to R1024

GD380 to GD384
3 times

: Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing

[Solution applied]
(c)

Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1024 into TMP0 to TMP24 within GOT at once.
Then they are transferred from TMP0 to TMP24 into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to
GD384, respectively, as shown below.

(d) Script description

bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],25);
bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5);
bmov([w:TMP10],[w:GD370],5);
bmov([w:TMP20],[w:GD380],5);

GOT

controller internal
device

Internal
memory

GD

TMP0 to TMP4

GD360 to GD364

TMP5 to TMP9
TMP10 to TMP14

R1000 to R1024

GD370 to GD374

TMP15 to TMP19
TMP20 to TMP24
1 time

28 - 60

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

GD380 to GD384

: Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing

This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal memory and
the controller to just once, where it took 10 times to do the same processing before.
(When reading internal devices within the controller in 'if' or 'switch' statement, the internal memory
communicates with the controller regardless of the execution condition. When transferring from the temporary
device area to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory does not communicate with the controller.)

(a) Processing outline

Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, ... and R1900 to R1904 into GD360 to GD364
depending on the amount of data.

GOT

R1800 to R1804

:
:

10 R1900 to R1904
10 times

: Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing

[Solution applied]
Processing outline
A batch of device values is transferred from R1000 to R1904 into TMP0 to TMP904 within GOT once, and
then it is transferred from TMP0 to TMP904 into GD360 to GD364 depending on the amount of data.

GOT

controller internal
device

Internal
memory

R1000 to R1904

TMP

case
TMP0 to TMP4 1
TMP5 to TMP99
TMP100 to TMP104 2
:
:
:
:

GD
GD360 to GD364

26

27

TMP800 to TMP804 9
TMP900 to TMP904 10

1 time

: Indicates the communication with controller

: Indicates the bmov processing

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

TMP805 to TMP899

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(d) Script description

bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],905);
switch([w:D1000]){
case 1:bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5);
break;
case 2:bmov([w:TMP100],[w:GD360],5);
break;
:
case 9:bmov([w:TMP800],[w:GD360],5);
break;
case10:bmov([w:TMP900],[w:GD360],5);
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);

25

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

(c)

24

RECIPE

R1100 to R1104
:
:

GD
GD360 to GD364

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

2
:
:

Internal
memory

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

controller internal
device
case
1 R1000 to R1004

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

[Normal process]

(b) Script description

switch([w:D1000]){
case1:bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5);
break;
case2:bmov([w:R1100],[w:GD360],5);
break;
:
case9:bmov([w:R1800],[w:GD360],5);
break;
case10:bmov([w:R1900],[w:GD360],5);
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(2) Reading bmov in a batch of steps within a script

28.2 Project Script, Screen Script

28 - 61

28.3 Object Script

This section explains the object script that operates for each object.
Three types of object script are available as shown below.

Input object script

Input object script is executed for objects where input numerical, etc.
Example:
The value to be written to a device is changed according to the input value.
28.3.6 Data calculation by numerical input script

When "-145" is written.

When "456" is written.

Display object script

Display object script is executed for objects where display characters, lamps, etc.
Example:
The script changes the numerical value display color and makes the value blink when a numerical value is not
updated for 5 seconds. (The script notifies that the device value update is stopped.)
28.3.6 To start blinking after the elapse of set time

Switch object script

Switch object script is executed for the touch switch (Switch only).
Example:
The script shows or hides a touch switch so that a switch can be touched only when the operation is required.
28.3.6 Showing/hiding the input/touch operation object

28 - 62

28.3 Object Script

1.

22

Settings

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

28.3.1

Double click an object arranged on the screen to display the setting dialog box.

23

Double click

Open the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script] tab to configure the settings for the object script.
LOGGING
FUNCTION

2.

24
Numerical input for [Operation/Script] tab

Target object
Numerical input*1,

Input object script

Bit lamp,

Reference
Script tab and operation/script tab of
input object scripts

ASCII input*1

Word lamp,

Numerical display,

Numerical input*2,

*2

Display object script

Switch object script

Time display,
ASCII display,
ASCII input , Date display,
Comment display,
Level,
Panelmeter,
Line graph,
Trend graph,
Bar graph,
Statistics bar graph,
Statistics pie graph,
Scatter graph,
Parts display,
Parts movement
Touch switch (Switch only)

25

Script tab and operation/script tab of

display object scripts

Script tab of switch object scripts

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Object script type

RECIPE

The items to be set in the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script] vary depending on the object type.
For details of setting items displayed in the [Script] tab or the [Operation/Script], refer to the following.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

*1 When selecting the input object script

*2 When selecting the display object script

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 63

 Script tab and operation/script tab of input object scripts

(Screen for the input object script setting in the numerical input)
Item

Description
Click the [Input] button to set the input object script.
Clicking this button displays the setting items for the input object script.
This button is displayed only for the following objects.
Numerical input
ASCII input

Use Object Script

Select this item to use the object script.

Script User ID

Set a script user ID No.

The script user ID No. must be unique.
By setting unique numbers, it is possible to identify the object script that caused an error.

Data Type

Select the device data type to be used by a script.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Trigger Type*1

Unsigned BIN32

Select the execution condition of a script.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Key Code Input
Input Fixation
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle by the second. (1 to
3600 seconds)
(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Trigger Device

Set the trigger device when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected for [Trigger
Type].
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Script

Displays the scripts.

The scripts can be edited. After editing the scripts, click the [Syntax Check] button to check the edited scripts.
Opens the editor to edit the scripts.
Script editor
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
*1 For precautions when [ON], [OFF], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, refer to the following.
Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles

28 - 64

28.3 Object Script

Model

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Script tab and operation/script tab of display object scripts

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24
(Screen for the display object script setting in the numerical input)
Item

Description

Model
RECIPE

Click the [Display] button to set the display object script.

Clicking the button displays the setting items for the display object script.
This button is displayed only for the following objects.
Numerical input
ASCII input
Select this item to use the object script.

Script User ID

Set a script user ID No.

The script user ID No. must be unique.
By setting unique numbers, it is possible to identify the object script that caused an error.

Data Type

Select the device data type to be used by a script.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real
Select the execution condition of a script.
Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall

Unsigned BIN32

26

ON Sampling

OFF Sampling View Change Synchronize Display Trigger*2

When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle by the second. (1 to
3600 seconds)

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Trigger Type*1

Sampling

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Use Object Script

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Trigger Device

Set the trigger device when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected for [Trigger
Type].

27

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Displays the scripts.

The scripts can be edited. After editing the scripts, click the [Syntax Check] button to check the edited scripts.
Opens the editor to edit the scripts.
Script editor
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.

28

28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check

SCRIPT FUNCTION

*1 For precautions when [ON], [OFF], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, refer to the following.
Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles
*2 Not available for the bit lamp, word lamp, date display, time display, and panelmeter.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Script

28.3 Object Script

28 - 65

 Script tab of switch object scripts

Item

Description

Model

Use Object Script

Select this item to use the object script.

Script User ID

Set a script user ID No.

The script user ID No. must be unique.
By setting unique numbers, it is possible to identify the object script that caused an error.

Data Type

Select the device data type to be used by a script.

Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
BCD16
BCD32
Real

Unsigned BIN32

Select the execution condition of a script.

Ordinary
ON
OFF
Rise
Fall
Sampling
ON Sampling
OFF Sampling
Device Writing
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle by the second. (1 to
3600 seconds)

Trigger Type*1

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Set the trigger device when [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected for [Trigger
Type].

Trigger Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

When substituting the value processed by the script to a device in response to the operation of a touch switch,
set the target device.
$W (Writing Device)

Data Type

Select the data type of object internal variable $W (write device).

Bit Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32 BCD16 BCD32 Real
Set the object internal variable $W (write device).

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Opens the editor to edit the scripts.

Script editor
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
Script

Displays the scripts.

The scripts can be edited. After editing the scripts, click the [Syntax Check] button to check the edited scripts.
*1 For precautions when [ON], [OFF], [Sampling], [ON Sampling], or [OFF Sampling] is selected, refer to the following.
Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles

28 - 66

28.3 Object Script

22

Script editor

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The Edit Script tab is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Script edit area

RECIPE

24

Item

Description

Model

Scripts can be edited directly.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Returns the script edit operation one step.

Redoes returned operation.
Cuts the selected character string.

26

Copies the selected character string.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Pastes the copied or cut character string.

Deletes the selected character string.
Script edit area

*1

Reads out the script edited in a text file or Unicode text file to GT Designer3.

*1

Saves the script edited by GT Designer3 in a text file or Unicode text file.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The search dialog box is displayed.

Enter the search target texts and select the search direction (upward/downward). Click the
[Search Next] button to search for the entered texts.
Set an object script symbol.
Click the [Sym] button to display the [Object Script Symbol] dialog box.
Object script symbol

Line No.

Selecting this item displays the row numbers in the script.

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Selecting this item displays [Input Navigation] in the [Edit Script] dialog box.

Function / device/ property, etc. that is inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
Click the [Insert] button to enter the functions and devices at the cursor position on the script edit area.
Checks the displayed script syntax, and checks the available device type and device range.
28.4.2 Message displayed during syntax check
For details of *1, refer to the following.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Input Navigation

Input
Navigation

28.3 Object Script

28 - 67

*1 Import/Export
For the exported text file / Unicode text file, operation simulation is possible using general C compiler. It is also
possible to edit scripts using general text editor.
The edited text file and Unicode text file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example: Editing a script by text editor

Exporting to a text file / Unicode text file

Editing the exported file

Edit the script using
the text editor.

Importing to GT Designer3
Edited contents
are reflected.

HINT
About Unicode text file
Unicode text file is used for importing / exporting in the multilanguage environment.
For multilanguage input, refer to the following manual.
(Fundamentals) 8.6 Entering Multiple Languages (Multi-Language Input Function)

28 - 68

28.3 Object Script

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

POINT
(1) Use example of input navigation
The following shows how to insert the line drawing function (d_line()) to a script.

2.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

3.

24

RECIPE

1.
1.

25
1.

Select [Items]

2.

Edit the arguments of d_line() referring to [Description].

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

[Line] from the tree.

For how to set the argument, refer to the following.

28.3.4 Functions (1) (a) Argument

26

For the setting of the line color, refer to the color number in (2) as shown below.

3.

Clicking the [Insert] button inserts the assignment of d_line() edited in the step 2. to the cursor position in
the script edit area.

(2) Color code number

The following procedure shows how to display the color code number to be used.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Open the color setting dialog box and check the code number of the color to be used.
The displayed number can be used as a script.

28
2.
2.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

2.

27

Draw an appropriate figure on the screen and open the setting dialog box.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

1.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

[Drawing]

28.3 Object Script

28 - 69

 Object script symbol

Select [Common]
box.

[Script]

[Object Script Symbol] from the menu to display the [Object Script Symbol] dialog

Devices, constants, etc. to be described in a script may be an arbitrary character string.

To use an arbitrary character string in a script, set a device or constant that corresponds to the character string in this
setting. (The script operates on GOT even if a character string is described in a script.)
The object script symbol setting is valid only to object scripts.

Item

Description

Symbol Name

Input an arbitrary character string to be described in script. (Up to 32 characters)

The symbol of "#", the control statement, or the operator is not available.
Up to 100 symbol names can be set.

Device and Constant

Input the device or constant that corresponds to symbol name. (Up to 32 characters)
Deletes the settings (symbol name, device, or constant).
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the row to be deleted.

*1

Reads out the object script symbol settings that are edited in a Unicode text file or CSV file to GT
Designer3.

*1

Saves the object script symbol settings that are set by GT Designer3 as a Unicode text file or CSV file.
(This button is displayed only when the [Sym] button of the script editor is clicked.)
Inserts the selected script symbol to the script.
Click the number shown in the left of the list, and select the object script symbol to be inserted.
For details of *1, refer to the following.

28 - 70

28.3 Object Script

Model

22

*1 Import/Export

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The exported Unicode text file or CSV file can be edited by using the spreadsheet software and others.
The edited Unicode text file or CSV file can be imported and read by GT Designer3.
Example) Importing or exporting to CSV file

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24

RECIPE

Exporting to a CSV file

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

Editing the exported file

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Adding the setting using

Microsoft Excel, etc.

Importing to GT Designer3

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27
The addition is displayed.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

POINT
Editing exported files
When "0" is used as the first character of symbol names and device or field values, "0" can be deleted with

BARCODE
FUNCTION

application functions for editing files, including Microsoft Excel.

Pay attention to the above for editing exported files.

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 71

 Precautions when executing the script action at the set sampling cycles
(1) Execution timing when [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is set for [Trigger Type]
28.3.1 Settings
(a) Execution timing
The device status is checked in the sampling cycles set for [Trigger Type].
If the condition is not established when checked, the object script is not executed.
(When the sampling cycle is set at one second, and [ON Sampling] is set for [Trigger Type])
1 sec.

1 sec.

1 sec.

Sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type]

ON
Status of the device set for [Device]

OFF
3.
1.

2.

4.

5.

The object script is executed at the timing of "1.".

The object script is executed at the timing of "2.".
At the timing of "3.", the object script is not executed since the timing is not the condition check sampling
cycle.
At the timing of "4.", the object script is not executed since the device condition is not established.
The object script is executed at the timing of "5.".
(b) To start counting of a sampling cycle when the device condition is established
The sampling cycle set for [Trigger Type] does not depend on the device status. (The sampling cycle does
not change when the device turns ON/OFF.)
To start counting of a sampling cycle, make settings as below.

1.
2.

Set [Rise] or [Fall] for [Trigger Type].

Make a sequence program so that the device turns ON / OFF at the timing when an object script
should be executed.

(2) Execution timing when sampling cycle is set in any of [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF
Sampling]
Counting of a sampling cycle starts and is reset at the timing indicated below.
The object itself is displayed (display in response to switching of the screen, changing of the security level,
etc.).
At language switching
At station No. switching
At security level changing
After the execution of any of the events above, the object script is executed at the time that the set sampling
cycle is reached.

28 - 72

28.3 Object Script

22

Settings and procedure for execution

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

28.3.2

Settings and the procedure before executing object scripts are explained below.
Start

For a complicated script including many control statements,

the operation must be simulated using general C compiler as
necessary.

23

28.3.1 Script editor

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Create / edit the script in the Edit Script dialog box of GT

Designer2.

28.4.1 Simulation using general

C language compiler or debugger

Set the data type, trigger type, and others for the object script
using GT Designer3.

28.3.1 Settings

Perform the syntax check on the scripts using GT Designer3.

28.3.1 Script editor

RECIPE

24

25
Valid?

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

No

Yes

Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the
system monitor function.

(Fundamentals) 7.
COMMUNICATION WITH GOT

27

GOT1000 Series User's Manual

(Extended Functions, Option Functions)
(2. SYSTEM MONITOR)

Normally operating?

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Yes
End

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

No

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Install the option OS and write the project data from the personal c
omputer to the GOT using GT Designer3.

GT15 User's Manual

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Install the option function board to GOT. (GT15 only)

28.3 Object Script

28 - 73

28.3.3

Actions and settings

This section explains the functions and execution of the object script.

Object script functions

(1) Object internal variables
Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Using an object internal variable, it is possible to calculate a monitored device value of an object and display the
results of calculation in the object.
For details of object internal variables, refer to the following.
Object internal variable kinds : 28.3.4 Variables and properties
Use of object internal variables : 28.3.5 Object internal variables

(2) Object properties

For the object properties, the settings of objects drawn by GT Designer3 can be read or changed (written).
It is possible to change object setting dynamically on the screen by changing object properties during
monitoring.
For details of object properties, refer to the following.
Reading/writing: [Operation/Script] or [Script] tab of each object
Setting: 28.3.4 Variables and properties
Representation method: 28.3.5 Object internal variables

(3) Free figure drawing function

Figures (line, rectangle, circle, character, etc.), comments and others can be drawn on an object.
For the settings of free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Functions (1) Free figure drawing

POINT
Execution condition for the free figure drawing function not to execute drawing
To use the free figure drawing function, execute an object script with execution conditions other than those
indicated below.
When executed the free figure drawing function using the execution conditions shown in the below, a figure is not
drawn and any errors do not cause.
Key code input
Input fixation
Device write

(4) Screen control function

The screen control function controls redrawing / erasing of screens and objects.
For the available kinds of screen control function, refer to the following.
28.3.4 Functions (2) Screen control

28 - 74

28.3 Object Script

22
A script user ID means an arbitrary number that is set to an object script.
If an error occurs with an object script, the script user ID of that object script is stored to a GOT special register
(GS).

HINT

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

(5) Script user ID

Setting a script user ID

By setting a unique value for script user ID of respective object scripts, it is possible to identify an object script
involved with an error.

(6) Execution condition of scripts

24

RECIPE

An object script can be executed in response to object input / display or touching of a touch switch, according to
the object script kind.
It is also possible to execute an object script using a trigger other than input/display of object or touch switch
operation.
For the execution conditions of object scripts, refer to the following.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Execution conditions

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

An object script is executed when all of the triggers (1) to (4) below are satisfied.
It is not executed if any of these triggers is not satisfied.

(1) On GOT, the screen arranged a target object is displayed.

The screen arranged a target object must be displayed with a controller connected to GOT.

(2) The object is displayed / operating.

(3) The object is not restricted by the security function of GOT.

When the security function is used, the object with an object script set in higher security level must not be
restricted during display / operation.

(4) The execution condition of the script is established.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

The target object must be displayed / operating.

27

An object script can be executed when the execution condition set for it is established.
For details of execution conditions of scripts, refer to the following.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Execution units
Object scripts are executed in order in script units.
If the condition of multiple scripts are established, scripts are not executed simultaneously.

28

Execution sequence

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Object scripts are executed in the order of object IDs.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 75

 Execution status
Object scripts execute the processing as indicated below depending on the script status.
Script status

Processing

Waiting for turn

A script waits for its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
When its turn has come, the script enters the "waiting for execution" status.

Waiting for execution

Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.

Enabled : The target script enters the "execution" status.
Disabled : The target script enters the "waiting for run" status and the next script enters the "waiting for execution"
status.
When the execution of a script finishes, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU, and it enters the "waiting for
run" status.
At the same time, the next script enters the "waiting for execution" status.

Execution

If a fatal error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enters the "stop" status.*1
If an execution error occurs, execution of a script stops and the script enter the "waiting for run" status.*1
Stop

The script retains the "stop" status until the error history is cleared.
*1 For details of fatal errors and execution errors, refer to the following.
28.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

28.3.4

Control structure

An object script can use the control structure of project scripts/screen scripts (with exceptions of the following function)
as well as the control structure explained in this section.
Project script / screen script functions that cannot be used by object scripts
Classification

Name
bmov

Successive device operation function

fmov

For the control structure of project scripts/screen scripts, refer to the following.
28.2.4 Control structure

Variables and properties

(1) Object internal variables
(a) Input object script
Variable

$$

Description

Statement example

[w:D100] = $$

Function

References when processing a monitor device value by a script.

Substitution is not possible.

Data format

Data type set at the script setting

Point

Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor device value.
(This does not cause an error.)
If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is executed, "$$" is
read out.

(Continued to next page)

28 - 76

28.3 Object Script

22

Description

Statement example

[w:D100] = $K

Function

References when processing the latest key code input from a touch key by a script.
Substitutes when writing a key code to an object.

Data format

16-bit unsigned BIN

$K

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Variable

23

Statement example

[w:D100] = $W

Function

References when processing the value input with a fix touch key by a script.
Substitutes when writing a value to an object.

Data format

Data type set at the script setting

$W

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Gets 0xFFFF if referenced when a key code has not been input.

Hint

Gets 0 if referenced when an input has not been made using the Enter key.

Hint

24

Usability of object internal variables is indicated below.

RW: Reference/substitution possible, R: Reference possible, W: Substitution possible, -: Cannot be used

Trigger Type

$W

$V

Ordinary, ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling,

OFF Sampling

Key code input

RW

Input fixation

RW

Ordinary, ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling,

OFF Sampling

26

Key code input

RW

Input fixation

(b) Display object script

Variable

$V

27

Description

Statement example

[w:D100] = $$

Function

References when processing a monitor device value by a script.

Substitution is not possible.

Data format

Data type set at the script setting

Point

Script execution is interrupted if "$$" is used before an object displays the monitor device value.
(This does not cause an error.)
If an object is displaying a monitor device value when a succeeding script is executed, "$$" is
read out.

Statement example

$V = [w:D100]

Function

Reference is not possible.

Substitutes when changing a value to be displayed by an object.

Data format

Data type set at the script setting

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

$$

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

$K

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

ASCII input

$$

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Numerical input

25

Variable

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Object

RECIPE

For the input object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object
and trigger type to be used.

28.3 Object Script

28 - 77

For the display object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object
and trigger type to be used.
Usability of object internal variables is indicated below.
RW: Reference/substitution possible, R: Reference possible, W: Substitution possible, -: Cannot be used

Object

Trigger Type

Numerical display, numerical input,

comment display, Level, parts
display, parts movement

Bit lamp, word lamp, panelmeter

ASCII display, ASCII input, date

display, time display, line graph,
trend graph, bar graph, statistics bar
graph, statistics pie graph, scatter
graph

Variable
$$

$K

$W

$V

Ordinary, Synchronize Display Trigger

ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, OFF Sampling

View Change

Ordinary

ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling, OFF Sampling

View Change

Ordinary, ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling,

OFF Sampling, View Change, Synchronize Display Trigger*1

*1 For the date display and time display, [Synchronize Display Trigger] cannot be set for [Trigger Type].

(c)

Switch object script

Variable

Description

Statement example

$W = [w:D100]

Function

Reference is not possible.

Substitutes when a value processed by a script is used as the value to be written using a touch
switch.

Data format

Data type set using the script setting

$W

For the switch object script, some of object internal variable can be used by the combinations of the object
and trigger type to be used.
Usability of object internal variables is indicated below.
RW: Reference/substitution possible, R: Reference possible, W: Substitution possible, -: Cannot be used

Object

Touch switch (Switch only)

Trigger Type
Ordinary, ON, OFF, Rise, Fall, Sampling, ON Sampling,
OFF Sampling, Device Writing

POINT
Using object internal variables that cannot be confirmed by syntax check
Syntax check cannot check the use of internal variables indicated below
Referencing an object internal variable that cannot be referenced
Substituting an object internal variable that cannot be substituted
When creating a script, use an object internal variable correctly.

28 - 78

28.3 Object Script

Variable
$$

$K

$W

$V

22

(2) Object properties

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

For the read / write correspondence of object properties, refer to the following.
Object script tab of respective objects
For the timing that the set object property is reflected to screen display, refer to the following.
(a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display

23

Object property list is indicated below.

my.active = 1

Function

Specifies whether or not the object itself is updated.

1: Updates the object itself.
0: Does not update the object itself.
Object is not updated even if the display condition is established.

Point

When "0" is specified before the object is displayed on the screen had been switched, the
object itself is not displayed.

Statement example

my.x = 0

Function

Specifies the X coordinate of object itself move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767") "0":
Left end of the screen

Point

For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for [Move
Way] of [Move Format] by GT Designer3.

Hint

24

When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.

Statement example

my.y = 0

Function

Specifies the Y coordinate of object move position in dots. (Range: "0" to "32767") "0": Upper
end of the screen

Point

For a parts movement object, this property is valid only when [Line] is selected for [Move
Way] of [Move Format] by GT Designer3.

Hint

When a position out of the screen size is specified, the object itself is not displayed.

Statement example

[w:D100] = my.width

Function

Obtains the width of the object frame.(Range: 1 to 2000)

Statement example

[w:D100] = my.height

Function

Obtains the height of the object frame.(Range: 1 to 1600)

Statement example

my.decimal_point = 1

Function

Specifies the number of digits after the decimal point.(Range: 0 to 32)

Point

This property is enabled only when [Real] is selected for [Format] of [Display Format] in the
numerical display or numerical input setting.

width

27

height

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(Continued to next page)

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

decimal_point

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Statement example

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

active

Description

RECIPE

Property

28.3 Object Script

28 - 79

Property

blink*2

Description

Statement example

my.blink = 0

Function

Specifies the blink interval and target.

(For 129 and the subsequent values, only the numerical display, numerical input, ASCII
display, or ASCII input can be specified.)
0 : Does not blink.
1 : Blinks numerical values/characters (1 second intervals).
2 : Blinks numerical values/characters (0.5 second intervals).
3 : Blinks numerical values/characters (0.2 second intervals).
128 : Does not blink.
129 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (1 second intervals).
130 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (0.5 second intervals).
131 : Blinks numerical values/characters and a plate (0.2 second intervals).

Hint

Statement example

my.highlight = 0

Function

Specifies highlighting of the object itself.

0 : Does not highlight the object.
1 : Highlights the object.

Statement example

my.part_no = 1

Function

Specifies the part number of the part to be displayed.(Range: 0 to 32767)

Statement example

my.mark_color = 255

Function

Specifies the color, to be changed from white, when a part is displayed as a mark.
(Range: 0 to 255)
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

[w:D100] = my.frame_color

Function

Gets the frame color.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.plate_color = 255

Function

Specify the plate color of the figure.

(Range: 0 to 255)
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.graph_color = 255

Function

Specifies the color for specifies the Level Color/Needle Color of Needle/Fill Attribute. /
level.(Range: 0 to 255)
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.back_color = 0

Function

Specifies the color for specifies the background color/BG Color of Meter Panel Attribute. /
background.(Range: 0 to 255)
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

highlight*2

part_no*2

Reading out my.blink after writing "128" causes the script to get "0".

mark_color*2

frame_color

plate_color*2

graph_color*2

back_color*2

(Continued to next page)

28 - 80

28.3 Object Script

22
my.pattern = 1
Specifies the pattern.
0 : Does not use a pattern.(Must not be used when panelmeter is used.)

Function

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9:

10 :

11 :

12 :

13 :

14 :

15 :

16 :

17 :

18 :

19 :

20 :

21 :

22 :

23 :

24 :

25 :

26 :

27 :

28 :

29 :

30 :

31 :

32 :

33 :

34 :

35 :

36 :

37 :

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

pattern*2

1:

24

Statement example

my.pattern_bg_color = 255

Function

Specifies the Fill Color of Meter Panel Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.fill_color = 255

Function

Specifies the Fill Color of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.fill_bg_color = 255

Function

Specifies the BG Color of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.fill_pattern = 1

pattern_bg_color

fill_color

fill_bg_color

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9:

10 :

11 :

12 :

13 :

14 :

15 :

16 :

17 :

18 :

19 :

20 :

21 :

22 :

23 :

24 :

25 :

26 :

27 :

28 :

29 :

30 :

31 :

32 :

33 :

34 :

35 :

36 :

37 :

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

1:

27

my.core_color = 255

Function

Specifies the Fill Color of Core Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.core_bg_color = 255

28

Function

Specifies the BG Color of Core Attribute.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

core_bg_color

(Continued to next page)

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

core_color

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Statement example

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Function

25

26

Specifies the Pattern of Needle/Fill Attribute.(Range: 1 to 37)

0 : Must not be used.

fill_pattern

RECIPE

Statement example

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Description

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Property

28.3 Object Script

28 - 81

Property

Description

Statement example

my.core_pattern = 1
Specifies the Pattern of Core Attribute.(Range: 1 to 37)
0 : Must not be used.

core_pattern

Function

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9:

10 :

11 :

12 :

13 :

14 :

15 :

16 :

17 :

18 :

19 :

20 :

21 :

22 :

23 :

24 :

25 :

26 :

27 :

28 :

29 :

30 :

31 :

32 :

33 :

34 :

35 :

36 :

37 :

my.text_color = 255

Function

Specifies the color of numbers/characters to be displayed.(Range: 0 to 255)

The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the
specification of figure colors by GT Designer3.

Statement example

my.text_width = 1

Function

Specifies the scaling factor (width) of numbers and characters the object itself displays.
0 : 0.5 times
1 to 8 : 1 to 8 times

Hint

text_height

Statement example
text_color*2

text_width

1:

For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", "6" and "8" is possible.

Statement example

my.text_height = 1

Function

Specifies the scaling factor (height) of numbers and characters the object itself displays.
0 : 0.5 times
1 to 8 : 1 to 8 times

Hint

Statement example

arrange

Function

For HQ characters, designation of only "2", "4", "6" and "8" is possible.
my.arrange = 1
Selects the arranging type of character strings in multiple lines.
0 : Left flush
1 : Right flush
2 : Centering

Left flush

Statement example

my.scale_max[0] = 255

Function

Specifies the upper limit value of scale.

scale_max[0] and scale_max[1] specify the upper limit value
in the horizontal direction and that in the vertical direction,
respectively.
(Range: Range of the monitor devices)

scale_max[0],
*1

scale_max[1]

Right flush

Centering

scale_max[1]

scale_max[0]

(Continued to next page)Z

28 - 82

28.3 Object Script

22
my.scale_min[0] = 0

Function

Specifies the lower limit value of scale.

scale_min[0] and scale_min[1] specify the lower limit value
in the horizontal direction and that in the vertical direction,
respectively.
(Range: Range of the monitor devices)
my.security = 0

Function

Sets the security level of an object.(Range: 0 to 15)

Hint

my.input_security = 0

Function

For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this sets the
security level for input.(Range: 0 to 15)

Statement example

my.draw_mode = 0

Function

Specifies the drawing mode

For numerical and comment display
0 : Transparent
1 : XOR
For parts display
0 : Replace
1 : XOR
2 : Overwrite
The setting for the draw mode is the same as with the setting at the setting dialog box of GT
Designer3.

Statement example

my.delay = 5

Function

Specifies the delay time in unit of second, for the object itself takes an action after the
touch.(Range: 0 to 5)
If "0" is set, the object itself takes an action immediately after the touch.

Statement example

my.beep = 0

Function

Specifies beep length and timing.

0 : One shot
1 : One short (only when the execution condition is established)
2 : No beeps
128 : While a key is pressed
129 : While a key is pressed (only when the execution condition is established)

draw_mode

delay

beep

25

26

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For the object indicated below, only scale_max[0]/scale_min[0] can be specified.

Designation of scale_max[1]/scale_min[1] is not allowed.
Panelmeter
When an object has multiple conditions, including the ON/OFF state of the bit and the state, the object property is reflected only
for the normal case (when the bit is off or the state is set to "0").
When the bit is on or the state is set to any other than "0", the object property is not reflected.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

*2

24

Statement example
input_security

*1

For the object that allows the setting of security level for both input and display, this sets the
security level for display.

RECIPE

security

Statement example

23

scale_min[0]

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

scale_min[1]*1

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

scale_min[0],

scale_min[1]

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Statement example

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Description

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Property

28.3 Object Script

28 - 83

POINT
Valid duration of changed object property
Changes of the object property are retained until executing the operation below.
Turning ON/OFF or resetting of GOT
Writing of project data
(a) Timing when the property changes are reflected to screen display
After the setting of an object property, the setting is reflected to the screen display in any of the timings 1 to
5 indicated below.
1. The display changes to the specified one at the same time changed the object property.
2. The specified action is executed at the next action after changing the object property.
3. The display/action changes to the specified one at any of the timing indicated below.
The timing when redraw_object() is executed
Functions (2) Screen control
The timing when the display condition / execution condition of the object itself is established
4. The display/action changes to the specified one at any of the timing indicated below.
The timing when redraw_screen() is executed
Functions (2) Screen control
The timing when switching screen is executed
5. The display/action changes to the specified one at any of the timing indicated below.
The timing when redraw_object() / redraw_screen() is executed
Functions (2) Screen control
The timing when switching screen is executed
The timing (1 to 5) when changing the object script is reflected to the screen display varies depending on
the object and object property kind.
For the correspondence between the object and object property kind, and the reflection timing, refer to the
following.
Object property tab of respective objects

HINT
(1) Use of redraw_object()
To reflect the setting of multiple object properties to the screen by specifying redraw_object(), use one
redraw_object() for multiple object properties to reduce the number of times the objects are redrawn.
my.text_height=2;
redraw_object();
my.arrange=1;
redraw_object();

my.text_height=2;
my.arrange=1;
redraw_object();

(2) Display/action until the setting is reflected to the screen display

An object may not be displayed or fail to act correctly until the setting is reflected to the screen.

28 - 84

28.3 Object Script

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Functions
(1) Free figure drawing
For the arguments of the free figure drawing function, refer to the following.
(a) Argument

Statement example

d_line(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)

Function

Draws a line.

Statement example

d_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)

Function

Draws a rectangle.

d_circle(<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>,

<Line color>)

Function

Draws a circle.

Statement example

d_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)

Function

Draws an ellipse.

Hint

p_rectangle

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).
p_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)

Function

Draws a rectangle (fill).

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

Statement example

p_circle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <Radius>, <Line type>, <Line width>, <Line
color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)

Function

Draws a circle (fill).

Statement example

p_ellipse(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
type>, <Line width>, <Line color>, <Pattern>, <Pattern color>, <Pattern background color>)

Function

Draws an ellipse (fill).

26

27

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

p_circle

Statement example

d_line(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>,
<Line type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)

28

Function

Draws a line.

Hint

d_textout

25

Statement example

Hint

p_ellipse

RECIPE

Statement example
d_circle

d_ellipse

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Hint

24

Hint

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

(Continued to next page)

SCRIPT FUNCTION

d_rectangle

Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Hint

23

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

d_line

Description

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Functions

28.3 Object Script

28 - 85

Functions

d_commentout

Description

Statement example

d_rectangle(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>, <X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>, <Line
type>, <Line width>, <Line color>)

Function

Draws a rectangle.
Draws between (<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>) and (<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>).

Hint

screen_draw

Statement example

screen_draw(<screen draw flag>)

Function

Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
If the drawing area is not specified by screen_draw, drawing is executed in the object area.
Object area is the same as the area defined by the coordinates shown in the data list of GT
Designer3.

Hint

(a) Argument
Argument

<X coordinate 1>,

<Y coordinate 1>
<X coordinate 2>,
<Y coordinate 2>

Description
Specifies the area (the area defined by two points of (<X coordinate 1>,<Y coordinate 1>) and (<X
coordinate 2>,<Y coordinate 2>) in which a figure is drawn in dots.(Range: -32768 to 32767)
(0, 0) indicates the coordinates of the upper left position of an object.
Example: Ellipse (d_ellipse())

(<X coordinate 1>, <Y coordinate 1>)

(<X coordinate 2>, <Y coordinate 2>)

<X coordinate>, <Y coordinate>

Specifies the coordinates of the center of a figure in dots.(Range: -32768 to 32767)

<Radius>

Specifies the radius of a circle in dots.(Range: 1 to 32767)

Selects the line type from those shown below.
0:

<Line type>

1:
2:
3:
4:

<Line width>

Specifies the line width in dots.(Range: 1 to 5, 7)

<Line color>, <Character color>,

<Pattern color>,
<Pattern background color>,
<Character shadow color>

Specifies the color of line/character/pattern/background of pattern/background of character by a code

number.
(Range: 0 to 255)
The correspondence between colors and color code numbers is the same as that in the specification of
figure colors by GT Designer3.
Select the fill pattern from the following.
(The following patterns shows the case when white and black are specified for the pattern color and the
pattern background color, respectively.)

<Pattern>

<Character X scaling factor >,

<Character Y scaling factor >

1:

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9:

10 :

11 :

12 :

13 :

14 :

15 :

16 :

17 :

18 :

19 :

20 :

21 :

22 :

23 :

24 :

25 :

26 :

27 :

28 :

29 :

30 :

31 :

32 :

33 :

34 :

35 :

36 :

37 :

Specifies the scaling factor of characters.

Specify "2", "4", "6" or "8" when HQ characters are set <Character attribute>.
Designation of "0" and "1" to "8" is allowed when HQ characters are not set.
If "0" is specified, scaling factor is 0.5.

Character Y
scaling factor

Character X
scaling factor

(Continued to next page)

28 - 86

28.3 Object Script

22
Specifies the display attribute of characters.
The explanation below assumes binary notation. When specifying in a script, change the representation
meeting the applicable notation of the script, such as hexadecimal number.

b11 to 10

b9

b8

b7

b6 to 5

b4 to 3

b2

b1 to 0

23

Standard Gothic Shadow Engraving

b2 :
0(fixed)

24

b4 to b3 :
Select the arranging type of character strings of multiple lines.
00 : Left flush
01 : Right flush
10 : Centering
11 : Reserved

Left flush

Right flush

Centering

b6 to b5 :
0(fixed)
b7 :
Select whether or not HQ characters are used.
This bit can be used only for d_commentout().
Specify "0" (fixed) for other functions.
0 : Does not use HQ characters.
1 : Uses HQ characters.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

<Character attribute>

LOGGING
FUNCTION

b12

b1 to b0 :
Select the display type of characters.
These bits can be used only for d_textout().
Specify "00" (fixed) for other functions.
00 : Standard
01 : Bold
10 : Shadow
11 : Engraving

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Description

RECIPE

Argument

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

b8 :
0(fixed)
b9 :
Specify font size.
0 : 16 dots
1 : 12 dots

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

b11 to b10 :
Specify Kanji region.
00 : Japanese
01 : Chinese (GB)
10 : Chinese (Big5)
11 : Reserved
b12 :
Specify the face.
This bit can be used only when the use of HQ characters is specified (b7=1).
Specify "0" (fixed) when HQ characters are not used.
0 : Mincho
1 : Gothic

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

Specify character sting in up to 256 characters.

<Comment group No.>

Specify a comment group No.(Range: 1 to 255)

<Comment No.>

Specify a comment No.(Range: 0 to 32767)

<Screen draw flag>

Specifies the area in which drawing is executed by the free figure drawing function.
0 : After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the object area.
Object area is the same as the area defined by the coordinates shown in the data list of GT Designer3.
1 : After the execution of screen_draw(), a figure is drawn in the entire screen size.

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

<Character>

28.3 Object Script

28 - 87

HINT
Drawing results of circle / ellipse
To use the circle / ellipse drawing function (d_circle(), d_ellipse(), p_circle(), p_ellipse()), set solid line for line type
and 1 dot for line width.
If designation is other than the combination of solid and 1 dot, a circle / ellipse is drawn as shown below.
Drawing example) The figure below shows the results of ellipse drawn by setting dashed line and 4 dots for line
type and line width, respectively.

(2) Screen control

Functions

Description

Statement example

redraw_object()

Function

Executes processing as indicated below for the object itself.

1. Clears the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function.
2. Re-draws the object itself.

Statement example

clear_object()

Function

Clears the items indicated below.

Data (number/character, etc.) displayed by the object itself
Figure drawn by the free figure drawing function of the object script of the object itself
If a state is set, the display changes to the ordinary state (state 0).

Statement example

redraw_screen()

Function

Executes processing as indicated below for the entire screen.

1. Clears all figures drawn by the free figure drawing function.
2. Re-draws all objects.

redraw_object

clear_object

redraw_screen

28 - 88

28.3 Object Script

With object scripts, the data and representation methods explained below can be used in addition to the data and
representation methods applicable to project scripts / screen scripts.
For details of data and representation methods with project scripts / screen scripts, refer to the following.
28.2.5 Applicable data and representation methods

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Applicable data and representation methods

23

Applicable constants and representation methods

With object scripts, constants explained below can be used in addition to the constants that can be used for project
scripts / screen projects.
Constant

Representation Method

Text

"To be enclosed by double quotations"

LOGGING
FUNCTION

28.3.5

24

Object internal variables

RECIPE

Object internal variables mean the variables allocated to inputs/outputs of an object, etc.
Processing as shown below is possible by using object internal variables.
Can process the monitor device value by referencing it. ($$)
Can change the object display to the processing result of the script. ($V)

25

Can substitute the processing result of the script by the operation of a touch switch. ($W)

28.3.4 Variables and properties

Example: To add the device value (GD0) to the monitor device value ($$) and display ($V) the result at an object in
numerical display

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

For reading/writing of an object internal variable, refer to the following.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

$V=$$+[w:GD0];

Automatic adjustment of decimal point

When using automatic adjustment of decimel point, the processing as below is executed.
(a) When a value is substituted to $V
The decimal point of the value substituted to $V is shifted right by the value set for [Decimal Point] and
substituted to the object.
(b) When a value is substituted to $W
The decimal point of the value substituted to $W is shifted left by the value set for [Decimal Point] and
substituted to a monitor device.

When "$V=1;" is executed, the substituted value is divided by

and "0.01" is displayed in Numerical Input.

When "$W=1;" is executed, the substituted value is multiplied by 102 and "100" is written to the monitor device

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

Example) When the adjust decimal point range is used by setting "2" for [Decimal Point]
102

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

POINT

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 89

 Object properties
For the object properties, settings of the objects drawn by GT Designer3 can be referenced or changed (substituted).
For details of object properties, refer to the following.
Reference/Substitution : Object script tab of each object
Setting : 28.3.4 Variables and properties (2) Object properties

(1) Format
When describing an object property in a script, specify "my." preceding the object property name.
Example: For changing text colors and blink display corresponding to the object security level
if(5<=my.security){// If object security level is 5 or higher
my.text_color=224;// changes text color to red (224).
my.blink=1;// blinks the object display at a low speed.
}else{// If object security level is lower than 5
my.text_color=255;// changes text color to white (255).
my.blink=0;// does not blink the object display.
}

28.3.6

Program examples

This section explains program examples of object script program.

Data calculation by numerical input script

(1) Operation
Data calculation is executed when a device value is written.
Screen image

Parts operation
Numerical input :
When the write value is "0" or larger, the write value is multiplied by
10.
When the write value is smaller than "0", the write value is set as
"5000".

(2) Program examples

Item

28 - 90

Description

Data Type

Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Input fixation

Script

[w:TMP0] = $W;
if([w:TMP0] >= 0) {
$W = [w:TMP0] * 10;
}else{
$W = 5000;
}

28.3 Object Script

// Stores the write value to the temporary area.

// If the write value is "0" or larger,
// the write value is multiplied by 10.
// If the write value is less than "0",
// the write value is set as "5000".

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

To start blinking after the elapse of set time

(1) Operation
The displayed value (monitored device value) blinks when it does not change for the set time.
This feature can be used to give a caution after the elapse of a set time.
Screen image

Parts operation

23
Numerical Display :

LOGGING
FUNCTION

If the displayed value (monitored device value) does not change for 5
seconds, the characters blink in red.

(2) Program examples

24

Description

// When the displayed value changes,

// counting starts (sets time (seconds) for staring blinking).
// saves the displayed value.
// sets "does not blink".
// changes the character color to white.
// When the displayed value does not change,
// If the count is not "0",
// reduces the count value.
// When the count value reaches "0",
// changes the character color to red.
// starts high-speed blinking.

RECIPE

Script

if([w:TMP0002] != $$){
[w:TMP0001] = 5;
[w:TMP0002] = $$;
my.blink = 0;
my.text_color = 0xFF;
}else{
if([w:TMP0001] > 0){
[w:TMP0001] = [w:TMP0001] - 1;
if([w:TMP0001] == 0){
my.text_color = 0xE0;
my.blink = 3;
}
}else{
[w:TMP0001] = 5;
}
}
redraw_object();

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Sampling (1 second)

26
// reflects property.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Trigger Type

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Signed BIN16

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

Data Type

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Item

28.3 Object Script

28 - 91

 Showing/hiding the input/touch operation object

(1) Operation
The script controls "show / hide" of the specific objects for input / touch operation corresponding the execution
condition at switching screen.
Since an object used for input / touch operation is displayed only when necessary, this feature can be used to
avoid inputting error.
Screen image

Parts operation

Numerical Input :
Numerical input is displayed when M0 turns ON.
Numerical Input is hidden when M0 turns OFF.
Switch 1 switch:
The touch switch is displayed when M1 turns ON.
The touch switch is hidden when M1 turns OFF.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name

Object Type

Setting item

Numerical input

Numerical input

Display / Trigger

Switch 1

Switch

Trigger

ON

Trigger device

M0

Trigger Type

ON

Trigger device

M1

(3) Program examples

(a) Numerical input
Item

Description

Data Type

Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Ordinary

Script

if([b:M0] == ON){
my.active = 1;
redraw_object();
}else{
my.active = 0;
clear_object();
}

// Euables update.
// Updates the object.
// Disables update.
// Clears the object.

(b) Switch 1 switch

Item

28 - 92

Description

Data Type

Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Ordinary

Script

if([b:M1] == ON){
my.active = 1;
redraw_object();
}else{
my.active = 0;
clear_object();
}

28.3 Object Script

Setting

Trigger Type

// Euables update.
// Updates the object.
// Disables update.
// Clears the object.

(1) Details of operation

A figure is drawn on the screen corresponding to the device value.
Screen image

Parts operation

23

Reset switch:
Resets Operation 1 to Operation 3.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Operation 1 lamp :
Turns ON when D500 is "1" and a circle is drawn around the lamp.
Operation 2 lamp :
Turns ON when D500 is "2" and a circle is drawn around the lamp.
Operation 3 lamp :
Turns ON when D500 is "3" and a circle is drawn around the lamp.

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Drawing responding to a device value

Operation 1 switch to Operation 3 switch:

Starts Operation 1 to Operation 3.

24

(2) Monitor screen settings

D500

Text

Operation 1

State 0
State 1

Lamp color

Red

Word Range

$V < 1

Lamp color

Black

Device

D500

Text
Word lamp

State 0
State 1

Operation 3 lamp

Word lamp

Operation 1 switch

Operation 2 switch

Operation 3 switch

Word switch

Word switch

Word switch

Word switch

Red

Word Range

$V < 2

Lamp color

Black

Device

D500

Text

Operation 2

State 0
State 1

Reset switch

Operation 2
Lamp color

Lamp color

Red

Word Range

$V < 3

Lamp color

Black

Device

D500

Set value(fixed)

Text

Reset

Device

D500

Set value(fixed)

Text

Operation 1

Device

D500

Set value(fixed)

Text

Operation 2

Device

D500

Set value(fixed)

Text

Operation 3

26

27

28

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Operation lamp 2

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Device

RECIPE

Setting

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Word lamp

Setting item

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Operation 1 lamp

Object Type

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Part Name

28.3 Object Script

28 - 93

(3) Program examples

(a) Operation 1 lamp
Item
Data Type

Description
Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Ordinary

Script

if ([w:D500] == 1){
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
}else{
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
}

// When D500 is "1",

// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// draws a circle.
// When D500 is not "1",
// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// clears a circle. (draws a circle in the same color as the
// background color)

(b) Operation 2 lamp

Item
Data Type

Description
Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Ordinary

Script

if ([w:D500] == 2){
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
}else{
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
}

(c)

Operation 3 lamp
Item

28 - 94

// When D500 is "2",

// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// draws a circle.
// When D500 is not "2",
// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// clears a circle. (draws a circle in the same color as the
// background color)

Description

Data Type

Signed BIN16

Trigger Type

Ordinary

Script

if ([w:D500] == 3){
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 224);
}else{
screen_draw(1);
d_circle(57, 52, 65, 0, 2, 255);
}

28.3 Object Script

// When D500 is "3",

// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// draws a circle.
// When D500 is not "3",
// sets the drawing area on the entire screen.
// clears a circle. (draws a circle in the same color as the
// background color)

22

Precautions

Precautions for OS
To use the object script, install the option OS (Object script) on the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

To use the object script with the GT15, mount an option function board on the GOT. (No option function boards is
required for GOTs with built-in option function boards.)

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

28.3.7

23

Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

Precautions for objects

When the setting dialog box is closed by clicking the [OK] button after changing from the numerical input or ASCII
input to the numerical display or ASCII display, the input object script settings are cleared.
Only the display object settings are not cleared.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

For the GT16, no option function board is required.

24

Precautions for the object script execution condition

(1) Functions that cannot be set simultaneously
RECIPE

Object scripts cannot be used when any of the functions below is set.
To use object scripts, do not set the functions indicated below.
Data Operation
Store memory
Locus display (line graph only)

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(2) Object status

Object script cannot be executed when the object is in the status indicated below.
The object is not displayed / operating since it is out of the screen.
The object is not displayed / operating since a monitor device has not been set.

When a multiple display of the same screen is given due to overlap window/superimpose window/screen
overlay, only the object script in the screen displayed first is executed.
While the object script on the screen displayed first is executed, the object scripts on the same screens
displayed later are not executed.
The object script displayed in the same screen is executed when the object script displayed in the first screen
has been executed.

(4) When the device write is set for the execution condition

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

(3) Execution of object scripts on the same screen

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Set the write device to the object for which a script is set.
The script is not executed if a write device is not set.

Precautions for devices

(1) The number of write enabled devices in a controller
When writing data to a device in a controller, writing is possible only for one device with one script.
To execute writing to multiple devices in controllers, use multiple object scripts.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

(2) Operation programmed by object script during write device

Execution of an object script is interrupted.
Interrupted operation restarts after the completion of write device.
Object display is not updated.
Object display is updated after the completion of write device.
Input is disabled even when touch an object on the screen.
Input is enabled after the completion of write device.

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 95

 Precautions for object property

(1) Movements of numerical display/comment display whose level display are superimposed
When drawing with the level display superimposed on GT Designer3, the numerical display or comment display
can move only in the area inside of level display.
When numerical display/comment display moves to out of the level display area, numerical display/comment
display is not displayed correctly.
When drawing without superimposing on GT Designer3, the superimposing processing is not executed even
when the numerical display or comment display is moved to the inside of the level display area.

(2) Properties that are valid only when set on GT Designer3

Among the setting items of objects, those which are valid only when they are set on GT Designer3
(such as the settings which are not valid unless a certain item is checked), cannot be referenced/changed by
object property.

Precautions for free figure drawing function

(1) Drawing while an object is blinking
While an object is blinking, the figure drawn using the free figure drawing function blinks together with the object.

(2) Superimposing of drawing figure and an object

If a figure drawn using the free figure drawing function is superimpose to an object, the figure in the
superimposed area may disappear.

(3) Drawing when other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger] are set for the
execution condition
When the execution condition is other than [View Change] and [Synchronize Display Trigger], the object itself
overwrites the figure drawn by the free figure drawing function. Therefore, the figure drawn by the free figure
drawing function may be cleared.

(4) When [Key Code Input], [Input Fixation] or [Device Writing] is set for action trigger
Drawing is not executed.
In this case, any errors do not occured.
When using the free figure drawing function, set the execution condition other than [Key Code Input], [Input
Fixation], and [Device Writing].

(5) Maximum number of settings

Concerning figures to be drawn by the free figure drawing function, the drawing is possible for up to 40 points by
a single object.

(6) Drawing area

With the upper left corner of GOT screen set as (0, 0), it is not possible to draw a figure outside of the area from
(-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).
Specify the coordinates to draw inside of the area from (-2400, -2400) to (4799, 4799).

Drawing is not possible outside the frame.

(-2400,-2400)
(0,0)

In the area inside the frame, drawing is allowed.

(4799,4799)

28 - 96

28.3 Object Script

Do not write a script that causes the operation result to exceed the allowable range of a device value.
Script operation is executed internally by double-precision real numbers.
Therefore, when judgment is made using such as an IF statement, results of judgment can differ depending on the
operation method.
Example: Judgment for the difference between GD100 and D100 using an IF statement (for signed 16-bit BIN)
When GD100=-32758 and D100=32767

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(a) When operation is executed in evaluation expression

if ( ( [w:GD100] - [w:D100] ) >= 10 ) {
//If difference between GD100 and D100 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0;
// "0" is written to D200.
}

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Precautions for writing a script

The calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is "-65525", meaning that the condition is not
met.

RECIPE

(b) When processing the script after substitution

[w:GD200] = [w:GD100] - [w:D100];
// Substitutes the value of "GD100 - D100" to GD200.
if ( [w:GD200] >= 10) {
// When the value of GD200 is 10 or larger,
[w:D200] = 0;
// "0" is written to D200.
}

24

When "-65525" which is the calculation result of "GD100 - D100" ("-32758" - "32767") is substituted to
GD200 in signed 16-bit BIN, GD200 becomes "10", meaning that the condition is met.
(Since a value that cannot be handled by a variable (device) is substituted as the result of operation, the
result differs from that obtained in (a).)

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

26

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

28.3 Object Script

28 - 97

28.4 Troubleshooting
The script function does not display an error message at the time of error.
It stops the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping.
Therefore, each script must be debugged without fail by reference to the followings.

28.4.1

Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger

Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. MicrosoftVisual C++) can
be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
Observe the following procedure to perform simulation using the general C language compiler or debugger.

Project script, Screen script

Changing file extension

1.

text1.txt text1.c

Change the script file (extension .txt) created

for the GOT into a C language source file
(extension .c).

Additional description of main and include

Additional description
Additional description

2.

#include<stdio.h>
main(){
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;

Open the C language source file with a

commercially-available text editor and create a
frame with main(){}.
Also, describe #include<stdio.h> at the
beginning.

......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional description

Changing device (variable) describing method

Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change

#include<stdio.h>
main(){
_wTMP0001_ _=0;
while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__ ){
if(!((_wTMP0000_ _-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__ =_wTMP0001_ _+1;
......(Omitted)......

Description change
Description change
Description change

_wTMP0010_ _=_wTMP0002_ _+_wTMP0003__

+_wTMP0004__-1;
_wD200__ = _wTMP0010_ _%7;
}

(To the next page)

28 - 98

28.4 Troubleshooting

3.

Change the device (variable) describing

method from that for script function to that for C
language.
Changing the variables into for C language
based on the following definition enables
smooth restoration to the GOT script.
Definition 1 [w: _w
Definition 2 [b: _b
Definition 3 ] __
Using the batch replacement function of the
commercially available text editor is convenient
to make changes.

Variable definition (auto variable declaration)

4.

#include<stdio.h>
void main(void){
unsigned short _wTMP0000_ _;
unsigned short _wTMP0001_ _;
unsigned short _wTMP0002_ _;
unsigned short _wD100__ ;

Description change
Addition

Addition

Addition

Addition

For C language, the variables must be defined

prior to use.
As only one data format can be selected for
one script, the variable types of the C language
must be set all the same.*1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

(From the preceding page)

23

......(Omitted)......

LOGGING
FUNCTION

_wTMP0001__ =0;
while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__ ){
if(!((_wTMP0000_ _-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__ =_wTMP0001__ +1;

24

......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0010__ =_wTMP0002_ _+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004_ _-1;
_wD200_ _ = _wTMP0010__ %7;

5.

Execution of simulation

Perform simulation with the general C

language compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
The step run, variable watch and other
functions specific to debugger are usable.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

On completion of debugging, execute the

steps 1. to 4. in reverse order to restore the
GOT script file.

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

RECIPE

*1 Data type of script

The following shows the data type of the script.
Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler or
debugger.

Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
Real
BCD32/BCD16

28

short

SCRIPT FUNCTION

Signed BIN16

Variable Type

unsigned short
long
unsigned long
float

29

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Data type of script

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

For details of *1, refer to the following.

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 99

 Object script
Changing file extension

1.

text1.txt text1.c

Export the object script, created by GT

Designer3, to a text file or Unicode text file
(extension ".txt") and change the exported
script file into a C language source file
(extension ".c").

Additional description of main and include

Additional description
Additional description

2.

#include<stdio.h>
main(){
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
my.x = 200;
my.scale_max[0] = 500;

Open the C language source file with a

commercially-available text editor and create a
frame with main(){}.
Also, describe #include<stdio.h> at the
beginning.

......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
$W = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional description

Changing device (variable) describing method

Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change
Description change

#include<stdio.h>
main(){
_wTMP0001__=0;
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
my_x = 200;
my_scale_max_0__ = 500;
......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004__-1;
device_write = _wTMP0010__%7;
}

3.

Change the device (variable / property)

describing method from that for script function
to that for C language.Changing the variables
into those for C language, based on the
following definition, enables smooth restoration
to the GOT script.
Definition 1
Definition 2
Definition 3
Definition 4
Definition 5
Definition 6
Definition 7
Definition 8
Definition 9

[w:_w
[b:_b
] __
my.my_
$W device_write
$V device_value
$$ monitor_ device
$K key_input
[ _

Using the global replacement function of the

commercially-available text editor is
convenient to make changes.

(To the next page)

28 - 100

28.4 Troubleshooting

4.

Variable definition (auto variable declaration)

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

#include<stdio.h>
void main(void){
unsigned short _wTMP0000__;
unsigned short _wTMP0001__;
unsigned short _wTMP0002__;
unsigned short _wD100__;
short
my_c;
unsigned sort my_scale_max_0__;
unsigned sort device_write;

Description change
Addition
Addition
Addition
Addition
Addition
Addition
Addition

For C language, the variables must be defined

prior to use.
As only one data format can be selected for
one script, the variable types of the C language
must be set all the same.*1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22
((From the preceding page)

......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0001__=0;
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1;
my_x = 200;
my_scale_max_0__ = 500;

24

RECIPE

......(Omitted)......
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__
+_wTMP0004__-1;
device_write = _wTMP0010__%7;

25

5.

Perform simulation with the general C

language compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.)
The step run, variable watch and other
functions specific to debugger are usable.

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Execution of simulation

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

27

The following shows the data type of the script.

Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler or
debugger.

(1) Device
Signed BIN16
Unsigned BIN16
Signed BIN32
Unsigned BIN32
Real
BCD32/BCD16*1

Variable Type
short
unsigned short

29

long
unsigned long
float

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Data type of script

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For details of *1, refer to the following.

*1 Data type of script

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 101

(2) Property
Select the data format according to the property range.

(3) Internal variable

Assign the same variable type as the script data type.

POINT
Precautions for simulation with the general C language compiler or debugger
Selecting [BCD32] or [BCD16] as the script data type disables simulation with the general C language compiler
or debugger.
As dedicated for the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov statements cannot be simulated with the
general C language compiler or debugger.
Use assignment of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged, the define must be added to the
C language source file.
The assignment delay does not occur during simulation with the general C language compiler or debugger,
although it occurs when a script is executed on GOT. Therefore, take the possibility of assignment delay
occurrence into consideration when performing simulation.
By applying the above, a new program created using C language can be used as a GOT script after being
debugged.
Offset designation of a device cannot be used in the above debugging.
If debugging of the offset designated device is required, it is necessary to set the corresponding device in
advance.

28.4.2

Message displayed during syntax check

The dialog box displayed during syntax check

The following dialog box will be displayed during syntax check.
If there is an error in script, the error code will be displayed in the dialog box.
When the error code is displayed, refer to the following.
Error code list

Error code

POINT
About errors that cannot be checked by syntax check
There are errors that cannot be checked by syntax check.
If a script includes an error that cannot be checked by syntax check, an error occurs when a script is executed on
GOT.
For the errors detected during script execution on GOT and the corrective action, refer to the following.
28.4.3 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

28 - 102

28.4 Troubleshooting

22

Error code list

Error Definition

4*2

Out of the range of device No. (displayed in HEX. number)

5*2

Out of the range of device No. (displayed in DEC. number)

Out of the range of device No. (displayed in OCT. number address)

The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.

The setting is not within the range of 0 to 15 when specifying word device bit.

The set device is out of the range or does not exist.

11

Illegal address.

14

Access to the device disabling word accessibility by using bit.

15

Access to the device disabling bit accessibility by using bit.

16

Octal device are set with odd number.

17

The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.

20

The specified CPU does not exist.

21

The specified Word type does not exist.

22

A CPU not included with network settings has been specified.

25

No expression exit between {and}.

26

The operator type of expressions table flow.

27

The control type table overflew.

28

case outside of switch

29

"Default" exist although there is no switch statement.

30

There are multiple "default" settings in switch statements.

31

There are too many switch "case" statements.

32

There are too many "switch break" statements.

33

Switch nest is deep.

34

System memory is insufficient.

35

Parenthesis nest is deep.

36

Regarded as invalid statement.

37

No semicolon.

38

There are invalid characters.

39

File input is not specified.

40

The specified input file does not exist.

41

The nest of if/while is deep.

45

The CPU incompatible with multi-CPU is specified as multi-CPU.

46

The multi-specified station No. is incorrect.

47

Network specification or station No. specification is incorrect.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

The bit device made word access.

24

RECIPE

Extended file register (ER) setting error. (inter-block settings)

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

The address of device is not an even number.

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The configuration error of script.

28

48

Set network in GOT internal devices.

101

No closed parenthesis.

111

The bit device is specified for the device with indirect specification.

112

The controller type for any channel number (1 to 4) is not specified or the GOT cannot communicate with the specified controller.

113

Channel number is illegal.

114

Channel designation is not allowed for a common device.

115

Write is attempted for a read-only internal variable.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

29

(Continued to next page)

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 103

BARCODE
FUNCTION

Error code*1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The following list provides the error codes that may be displayed in the script error dialog box.

Error code*1
116

Read is attempted for a write-only internal variable.

117

Write is attempted for a read-only property.

118

Read is attempted for a write-only property.

119

A character string does not end with '"'.

120

EOF is used in a character string.

121

A character string includes too many characters.

122

Unicode conversion error of a character string.

123

EG device cannot be used in an object script.

124

Data type conversion function cannot be used.

125

An unusable internal variable is used.

126

An unusable property is used.

127

An unusable function is used.

136

The data types for the word device 1 and the word device 2 in the bmov or fmov function differ.

137

value out of range

138

can't use #pragma except in script head

139

#pragma folder_name_length redeclared

140

#pragma file_name_length redeclared

141

Bit device word cannot be used.

142

Word device bit cannot be used.

201

The device code is unknown.

202

The device No. is beyond the valid range

203

Device No. + Device Points are beyond the valid range.

204

The network No./Station No./CPU No. are beyond the valid range.

205

The device name is invalid.

206

The device No. notation is invalid.

207

The address No. is invalid (not in even number or multiples of 8/16).

208

The device type is invalid.

209

The GOT series is unknown.

*1
*2

28.4.3

Error Definition

The same error code may be displayed twice when station No. setting of a device is incorrect.
For devices (such as coil (MB) of YASKAWA PLC CP-9200SH) that have mixed representation (decimal and hexadecimal) of a
device number, error code "4" occurs when a number outside the address range is specified.

Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

Error checking method

The error data of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers (GS).
Check the stored data using the system monitor function and various object functions (numerical display, lamp
indication and others) of the GOT.
Details of GOT special registers
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Details of system monitor function
GOT1000 Series Users Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)

(1) Items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the project script or screen script
The following items for the GOT special register (GS) are relevant to the project script or screen script.

28 - 104

28.4 Troubleshooting

GS14

Item

Script common information

(read only)

22

Description
Stores the data of error occurrence.
GS14.00
: Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS14.07
: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS14.08
: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12
: Turns ON at communication error occurrence
(including access to out-of-range device).

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Address

Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.

The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS16 to GS47).
The value at GS15 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.

23

Script execution pointer

GS49 to 79

Script execution number

Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.

GS154

File operation function information

(write only)

Notifies the execution statuses of the file operation functions.

GS154.00
: Turns on during executing a file operation function.
The bit turns off when the file operation function is completed.
GS154.15
: Turns on when an error occurs with a file operation function.
The bit turns off when the next file operation function is completed normally.
The bit does not turn off even if the script error clear signal (GS384.0) turns on.

GS384

Script common control

(write only)

GS384.0 : When ON, clears Script error data (GS16 to 47).

GS384.1 : Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error when turned ON.

Script monitoring time

Sets the monitor time of one script in second unit.

If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped. (Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
The following shows the setting examples.
When GS385 is set to 0, the monitor time is set to 10 seconds.
When GS385 is set to 1, the monitor time is set to 1 second.
When GS385 is set to 10, the monitor time is set to 10 seconds.
When GS385 is set to 11, the monitor time is set to 11 seconds.

26

27

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(Continued to next page)

25

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

GS385

RECIPE

GS48

Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script execution numbers
(GS49 to GS79).
The value at GS48 cycles as shown below each time a project script/screen script is executed.
"-1""49""50" ....... "79"(cycles back to "49".)
The relationships between the GS48 value and the latest script execution number storing area are
shown below.
When the GS48 value is 49, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS49.
When the GS48 value is 50, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS50.
:
:
When the GS48 value is 79, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS79.

GS16 to 47*1

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Script error data

Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due order, starting
from the higher addresses of the storage area.
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

The relationships between the GS15 value and the latest error code storing area are shown below.
When the GS15 value is 16, the latest error code address is stored to GS16 and GS17.
When the GS15 value is 18, the latest error code address is stored to GS18 and GS19.
:
:
When the GS15 value is 46, the latest error code address is stored to GS46 and GS47.

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Script error pointer

LOGGING
FUNCTION

"-1""16""18" "46"(cycles back to "16".)

GS15

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 105

Address

Item

Description
Sets whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following conditions is
satisfied.
The screen script is used.
[Rise] or [Fall] is selected for [Trigger Type] of the execution condition.
Switched to the screen including scripts.
Security switching
Language switching
Switching station No.
Offset switching

GS386

Screen script initial operation

File operation function data

storage order
(read only)

GS390

*1

When GS386 is set to 0

When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT executes the screen script only once.
When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT executes the screen script only once.
When GS386 is set to other than 0
When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT does not execute the screen script.
When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT does not execute the screen script.
Select an order of storing data with file_read or file_write.
[Low-->High]: Data are stored in the order of lower to upper data.
[High-->Low]: Data are stored in the order of upper to lower data.
The order of storing data for the file operation functions can be set with GT Designer3.
When 1 or 2 is set for GS390, the order of storing data set with GT Designer3 is disabled.
The following shows the setting examples.
When GS390 is set to 0, the data is stored by the order of storing data set with GT Designer3.
When GS390 is set to 1, the data are stored by the order of lower to upper data.
When GS390 is set to 2, the data are stored by the order of upper to lower data.
When GS390 is set to 3 or more, the data is stored by the order of storing data set with GT
Designer3.

According to the error, script No. may be "0".

For the script function error, refer to the following.
28.4.2 Error code list

(2) Items for the GOT special register (GS) relevant to the object script
The following items for the GOT special register (GS) are relevant to the object script.
Address

GS80

GS81

GS82 to 113*1

Item

Description

Object script common information

(read only)

Stores the data of error occurrence.

GS80.00
: Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS80.07
: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS80.08
: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS80.12
: Turns ON at communication error occurrence
(including access to out-of-range device).

Object script error pointer

Stores the pointer where the latest error code is stored.

The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS82 to GS113).
The value at GS81 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
"-1""82""84" ....... "112"(cycles back to "82".)
The relationships between the GS81 value and the latest error code storing area are shown below.
The following shows the setting examples.
When the GS81 value is 82, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS82 and
GS83.
When the GS81 value is 84, the address of the latest script execution number address is stored to
GS84 and GS85.
:
:
When the GS81 value is 112, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS112 and
GS113.

Object script error data

Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due order, starting
from the higher addresses of the storage area.
When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.

(Continued to next page)

28 - 106

28.4 Troubleshooting

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

GS389

Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.

Object script common control (write

only)

GS387.0 : When ON, clears Script error data (GS82 to 113).

GS387.1 : Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to error when turned ON.

Object script monitoring time

Sets the monitor time of one object script in unit of second.

If an object script does not end after elapsing the preset time, object script processing is
stopped. (Error code: 1015)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
The following shows the setting examples.
When GS388 is set to 0, the monitor time is set to 10 seconds.
When GS388 is set to 1, the monitor time is set to 1 second.
When GS388 is set to 10, the monitor time is set to 10 seconds.
When GS388 is set to 11, the monitor time is set to 11 seconds.

Object script initial operation

Sets the contents of initial operation to be performed when the following conditions are satisfied.
The object script is used.
[Rise] or [Fall] is selected for [Trigger Type] of the execution condition.
The screen is switched to the one that includes object scripts.
Switching security
Switching language
Switching station No.
Set the contents of initial operation to be performed at the start up of the GOT.
Object for which store memory is set
Line graph for which locus display is set
When GS389 is set to 0
When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT executes the object script only once.
When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT executes the object script only once.
When GS389 is set to other than 0
When [Rise] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns on, the GOT does not execute the object script.
When [Fall] is set for [Trigger Type], the above conditions are satisfied, and the trigger device
turns off, the GOT does not execute the object script.

*1

According to errors, script user ID may be "0".

For the script function error, refer to the following.

23

RECIPE

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

GS388

Object script execution number

Object script execution pointer

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

GS387

Stores the pointer where the latest script execution number is stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script execution
numbers (GS115 to GS145).
The value at GS114 cycles as shown below each time an object script is executed.
"-1""115""116" ....... "145"(cycles back to "115".)
The relationships between the GS114 value and the latest script execution number storing area
are shown below.
When the GS114 value is 115, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS115.
When the GS114 value is 116, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS116.
:
:
When the GS114 value is 145, the latest script execution number address is stored to GS145.

Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

GS115 to 145

22

Description

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

GS114

Item

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Address

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 107

 Error code list

(1) Project script, Screen script
Error Code

Error Definition

Corrective Action

1 *1

Initialization of project script failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts.

Reduce the number of times to execute the project script.

2 *1

Initialization of screen script (base) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and base
screens.
Reduce the number of times to execute screen script (base).

Initialization of screen script (superimpose window) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
superimpose window 1.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script
(superimpose window) .

Initialization of screen script (overlap window 1) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
overlap window 1.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 1) .

Initialization of screen script (overlap window 2) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
overlap window 2.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 2) .

*1

*1

*1

An error occurred in reading data from the device that always

collects the data.

Correct the script of the device of which the data is outside the
specified range.

The number of times to execute scripts exceeded the limit. And

some scripts were left unexecuted.

Change the number of times to execute scripts in one project to 256

or less.
Change the number of times to execute scripts on one screen to 256
or less.

When [BCD16] or [BCD32] is selected as the script data type,

the monitor device value cannot not be handled as BCD.

Check whether the device to be monitored is correct.

Check the processing of the device which could not be handled as
BCD, and correct the script and sequence program.

When [BCD16] or [BCD32] is selected as the script data type,

the operation result is outside the BCD data range.

Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the
BCD data range.

10

The numerator was divided by the denominator of 0.

Check the factor that caused zero division in the corresponding

script, and correct the script.

Write to a device failed.

Check the device description of the corresponding script.

12

Reservation of an internal area for device write failed.

Reduce the number of write device points in the corresponding

script.

13

The while statement includes the description of a device other

than a temporary device area.

Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary

device area.

14

An expression was too complicated to process.

Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding

script.

15

A script did not end within the script monitoring time.

Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless

loop.
Increase the value of script monitoring time (GS385).

Access to GOT internal device failed, resulting in error (BCD

conversion out of device range) occurrence.

Check the corresponding processing to GOT internal device and

check the script and PLC program.
Check the object script description.

Access to gateway device failed.

Check whether Extended Function OS of gateway function is

installed in GOT.
Check the cable.

19

Failed to initialize screen script

(superimposed window 2)

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
superimpose window 2.
Reduce the number of scripts to be executed (Superimposed
Window 2).

20

The GOT fails to access a temporary device area because the

specified value is outside the range of the temporary device
area.

Correct statements with the temporary device area in the target

script.

*1

11 *1

16

(Continued to next page)

28 - 108

28.4 Troubleshooting

Error Definition

Corrective Action

24

The GOT fails to execute the file operation function because

data in the arguments used in the function are invalid. (The path
is invalid, the data are out of range, or the other errors occur.)

Check if the data in the arguments are not out of range.

Correct the folder and file names.
Check if the storage device data and file size are not out of range by
the offset, number of write bytes, and/or number of read bytes.

25

The GOT fails to write data because the CF card has

insufficient free space.

Check the free space of the CF card.

26

The GOT fails to access the file because no CF card is installed

or the CF card access switch is off.

Check if a CF card is installed.

Check if the CF card access switch is on.

27

The GOT fails to write the data because the CF card is writeprotected, the specified file is a read-only file, or the file that
name is the same as the folder name in the path of the copy
target file.

Check if the CF card is not write-protected.

Check if the specified file is not the read-only file.
Check if a file with the same name as the folder name in the copy
target file exists.

28

The GOT fails to access the file because the CF card is not
formatted or the CF card is faulty.

Check if the CF card is formatted.

Check if the CF card is not broken.

29

The GOT fails to access the file because the specified file is
used for the other functions.

Check if the specified file is not used for the other functions when
executing the file operation function.

30

The GOT stops the copy because a file with the same name as
the copy source file exists in the copy destination folder.

Check if the copy destination folder has no file with the same name
as the copy source file.
If the copy mode is set to overwrite prohibited, set the copy mode to
overwrite permitted.

Initialization of screen script (overlap window 3) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
overlap window 3.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 3).

Initialization of screen script (overlap window 4) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
overlap window 4.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 4).

Initialization of screen script (overlap window 5) failed.

Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and the
overlap window 5.
Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script (overlap
window 5).

LOGGING
FUNCTION
RECIPE
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

26

Script No. "0" is stored to GOT special register (GS).

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

*1

25

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

37

24

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

36

23

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

35

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

22

Error Code

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 109

(2) Object script

Error Code

Error Category*1

Error Definition

Corrective Action

1000

Fatal error

Object script cannot be executed since the option

function board is not recognized.

1002

Fatal error

Initialization of objects related to the object scripts

failed when switching the screen.

1006

Fatal error

An error occurred in writing the data from the

ordinarily collected devices.

Correct the description of the device, taken as the out of the

range device.

Execution error

Writing to a device failed.

Check the description of the target script.

1014

Fatal error

The expression is too complicate to be processed.

Simplify the script operation expression by dividing it or by

using other appropriate method.

1015

Fatal error

Execution of object script does not finish although

the object script monitor time has elapsed.

Check the script if it constitutes endless loop.

Increase the value set for object script monitoring time
(GS388).

1016

Fatal error

Access to a GOT internal device failed.

Check the access operation to a GOT internal device and

also the script and sequence program.
Check the description of the target script.

1017

Fatal error

The script that caused an error in the syntax check

by GT Designer3 is executed.

Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
check by GT Designer3.

1018

Fatal error

Access failed since temporary device outside the

range is specified.

Specify the temporary device within the range.

1020

Fatal error

Write to multiple devices was attempted in a single

script.

Correct the specified number of write devices to the allowable

number.

1021

Fatal error

Illegal device type was detected.

Correct the device to the one that can be used by the script.

1011*2

Mount the option function board correctly.

Reduce the number of object scripts and the monitor device
points of the base screen.
Reduce the number of object scripts presently executed.

1031

Fatal error

Reference of an internal variable was impossible.

Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows

referencing of the corresponding internal variable.

1032

Fatal error

Substitution to an interval variable was impossible.

Correct to the object / object script / trigger type that allows

substitution to the corresponding internal variable.

1039

Fatal error

The script that caused an error in the syntax check

by GT Designer3 is executed.

Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
check by GT Designer3.

1045

Fatal error

Setting that is not in the object was referenced or

changed.

Refer to or change the property that can be set by the object

itself.

Fatal error

The script that caused an error in the syntax check

by GT Designer3 is executed.

Check and correct the script that caused an error in the syntax
check by GT Designer3.

1108

Execution error

The result of operation cannot be treated by BCD

data.

1109

Execution error

The result of operation falls outside the BCD data

range.

1057
1060

Check the device setting for monitoring.

Check the device operation that the BCD data could not
process.
Check the operation of the device that caused the BCD data to
be outside the range.

1110

Execution error

Zero division was executed.

Check the zero division of the script.

1131

Execution error

Reference of an internal variable was impossible.

Cheek the internal variable to be referenced.

1141

Execution error

A value outside the property range was set.

Check the value to be substituted in property.

1142

Execution error

For the element number of the property that

specifies an array, a value outside the range was
set.

Check the element number of the property that specifies an

array.

1143

Execution error

Object font was not the standard font.

For the object font other than 16-dot standard, "0"
(display in 0.5 times) was set.

Check the substituted value of property.

1144

Execution error

The scale ratio value set in the target object is larger

than the value set in the figure.

Check the substituted value of property.

(Continued to next page)

28 - 110

28.4 Troubleshooting

22
Error Definition

Corrective Action

1251

Warning

There is an error in coordinates or radius.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.

1252

Warning

There is an error in line style, line width or line color.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.

1253

Warning

There is an error in pattern, pattern color or pattern

background color.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.

1254

Warning

There is an error in character attribute, character

color, character shade color, character scale ratio,
character string code or character string length.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.

1255

Warning

There is no comment assigned to the specified

comment No. of the specified comment group No.

Check the argument in the drawing execution function.

1256

Warning

The stored amount of drawing data exceeded the

allowable capacity.

Reduce the number of functions.

RECIPE

24

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

25

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

Script user ID "0" is stored to GOT special register (GS).

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

*2

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

For details of error category, refer to the following.

23

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

*1

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Error Category*1

LOGGING
FUNCTION

Error Code

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 111

 Error category of object script and operation at the occurrence of error

(1) Error category
Object script errors are classified into the categories shown below.
Script operation at the occurrence of error is also indicated.
Error Category

Object Script Operation at the Occurrence of Error

Object script stops.
Object script does not operate even if the trigger condition is established again.

Fatal error

Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped.*1
Object script stops.
Object script operates when the trigger condition is established again.

Execution error

Drawing and device write of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, are stopped.*1
If the error occurs repeatedly, the occurrence of error in the second time and later is not written to GS82 to GS113.

Warning

Object script does not stop.

*1

Operation of the object, set with the object script where an error occurred, differs depending on the action and execution trigger set.

Trigger Executed to Act for Object Script

Monitor Function of Object

Write Function of Object

Operates

Stops

View change
Synchronize display trigger

Stops

Operates

Other than above

Stops

Stops

Key code input

Input fixation
Device writing

(2) Script executed before the occurrence of an error

Reflection of the written value and execution of a function differ depending on the write target device and the
function to be executed.
(a) Writing to a device
If writing to a device was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the error, the
written value is reflected as indicated below.
Write Target Device

Operation at the Occurrence of Error

GOT internal device (GB/ GD)

GOT internal device (Other than GB/ GD)

Controller device

Temporary device area

: Written value is reflected. : Written value is not reflected.

(b) Execution of function

If a function was executed by the script that was executed before the occurrence of the error, execution of
the function is processed as indicated below.
Execution Target of Write and Function

Operation at the Occurrence of Error

Free figure drawing

Object update function

Object display clear function

Screen update function

Internal variable

Property

: Function is executed. : Function is not executed.

28 - 112

28.4 Troubleshooting

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Troubleshooting for object script

One of the object scripts does not

run.

The option function board is not installed on the GOT.

Install the option function board on the GOT.

The option OS is not installed on the GOT.

Install the option OS (Object script) on the GOT.

The syntax for the script is incorrect.

Check if no error occurs with the syntax check on GT

Designer3.

The object is out of the GOT display area.

Set the object in the GOT display area.

The displays and operations of the object are limited

because of the security.

Decrease the security level.

The settings for the object, including the device, are not
set.

Set the device and the other settings for the object.

The trigger conditions are not met for the object script.
(For such as [Key Code Input], [Input Fixation], [View
Change], [Synchronize Display Trigger], and [Device
Writing] of [Trigger Type])

Set the correct trigger condition.

The same screens, including the screens for the overlay

screen function, overlap windows, and superimposed
windows, are displayed.

Review the configuration of the screens.

(Only the object scripts on the first displayed screen are
executed. The object scripts on the second or later
displayed screens are not executed.))

An error occurs during the execution of the object script.

Check the error code for the object script.

The values are written in multiple devices on a script.

For operations in process, use the internal devices or the

temporary device area of the GOT
Set the correct device.

A communication error occurs.

Check if the cable is unplugged. Check if the communication

unit is correctly installed on the GOT.
Check if the status of the controllers is ready for
communications.

The specified internal variable is incorrect.

Set a correct internal variable.

(Some internal variables cannot be read or assigned
depending on an object and trigger condition.)

The specified property is incorrect.

Set a correct property.

(Some properties cannot be set depending on an object.)

The value assigned to the property is incorrect. (For

example, the value assigned to the property is out of
range.)

Check the setting range for the value to be assigned.

The script is stopped in the

formula with operations.

When the operation is executed with BCD data, the data

become out of range.
Division by zero

Set a correct formula.

The script is stopped in the

formula with a free figure drawing
function.

The value for the argument is incorrect.

Check the the value for the argument.

The script is stopped in the

formula with an internal variable.

The script is stopped in the

formula with a property.

The display of the object is not

changed even though the object is
set.

25

26

27

28

The key input cannot be operated

even though the keys are pressed.
Even though the device is entered
for the numerical input, the
entered value cannot be written in
the device.

24

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

The specified device is incorrect.

A value cannot be assigned to the

device.

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

Corrective Action

RECIPE

The object script does not

operate.

Cause

DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

Error

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

The following shows the troubleshooting for the object script

An error occurs on the script.

Check if no error occurs during the execution of the object

script.

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28.4.4

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

A value cannot be written in the

device with touch switches.

28.4 Troubleshooting

28 - 113

28 - 114

28.4 Troubleshooting

PERIPHERALS

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

29. BARCODE FUNCTION

The barcode function enables to connect the barcode reader to the GOT and write the data read by the barcode reader
into a controller.

D0
D1
D2

Barcode

D3
D4

123456789

D5

GOT

9
(00 H)
2
(32 H)
4
(34 H)
6
(36 H)
8
(38 H)
SP
(20 H)

(09 H)
1
(31 H)
3
(33 H)
5
( 35H)
7
(37 H)
9
(39 H)

24

Read byte
number

Storage
data

RECIPE

Read data
"123456789"

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

QCPU(Q mode)

26

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

36H

37H

38H

39H

0DH

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Terminator

HINT
How to connect a barcode reader to the GOT
For the system configuration and communication settings for connecting a barcode reader to the GOT, refer to the
following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

27
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

Read data

SCRIPT FUNCTION

28

BARCODE
FUNCTION

29

29 - 1

29.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Peripheral Settings]

[Bar Code] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
Read data
"123456789"
D0
D1
D2

Barcode

D3
D4

123456789

D5

GOT

9
(00 H)
2
(32 H)
4
(34 H)
6
(36 H)
8
(38 H)
SP
(20 H)

(09 H)
1
(31 H)
3
(33 H)
5
( 35H)
7
(37 H)
9
(39 H)

Read byte
number

Storage
data

QCPU(Q mode)

Read data
1

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

36H

37H

38H

39H

0DH

Item
Destin
ation I/
F

Description
Select the connection target interface for the barcode reader.
Select the [Detail Setting] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box for the barcode function.
(1) Detail Setting
Use Bar Code
Device

Functio
n
Setting

Terminator

Select this item to enable the settings of the barcode function.

Set the start device of the devices that store the data read by the barcode reader.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Device Points

Set the device points of the device that stores the read data.
GT16, GT15, GT11
: 2 to 2000
GT10
: 2 to 1000

Header

Select the header of the barcode data read by the barcode reader.
None
: No header
STX
: Adds the STX to the header.

Terminator

Select the terminator of the barcode read by the barcode reader.

ETX
: The ETX terminator is added to the data.
LF
: The LF terminator is added to the data.
CR
: The CR terminator is added to the data.
CR+LF
: The CR and LF terminator are added to the data.
Set the order of writing data to controller device.
Low

High

: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower

High

Low

: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper

8 bits to upper 8 bits.

Data Writing Order

8 bits to lower 8 bits.

Fill up a space when

imported data is less
than the writing points

Select this item to fill in devices without data with spaces or NULLs when the number of bytes for the
data read by the barcode reader is less than that of bytes equivalent to the set device points.
After selecting the item, select the data to fill in devices without data.
Space
: Fills devices without data with spaces (20H).
NULL

29 - 2

29.1 Settings

: Fills devices without data with NULLs (00H).

Model

22

(1) Detail Setting

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

Configure the barcode reader detail settings.

LOGGING
FUNCTION

23

24
Item

Description
Transmission
Speed

Select the transmission speed. (4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200(BPS))

Data Bit

Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)

Stop Bit

Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)

Parity

Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)

RECIPE

Detail setting list

Model

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

29.2 Relevant Settings

The barcode function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

26

GOT environment settings (System information)

CH7

CH8

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b0). (Read device:
System signal 1-2.b3)

[System Signal 1-2]

27

Storing the data read by the barcode reader into the specified device can be notified. (Write device:
System signal 2-3.b0)

[System Signal 1-2]

Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-2.b5)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b1). (Read device:
System signal 1-2.b6)

[System Signal 1-2]

Storing the data read by the barcode reader into the specified device can be notified. (Write device:
System signal 2-3.b1)

[System Signal 1-2]

Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-2.b8)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b2). (Read device:
System signal 1-2.b9)

[System Signal 1-2]

Storing the data read by the barcode reader into the specified device can be notified. (Write device:
System signal 2-3.b2)

[System Signal 2-3]

Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-1.b5)

[System Signal 1-1]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-1.b6). (Read device:
System signal 1-1.b6)

[System Signal 1-1]

Storing the data read by the barcode reader into the specified device can be notified. (Write device:
System signal 2-1.b6)

[System Signal 2-1]

29.2 Relevant Settings

Model

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

CH6

[System Signal 1-2]

Setting item

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

CH5

Switching enabled or disabled of the barcode function. (Read device: System signal 1-2.b2)

Function

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Target
CH

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

29 - 3

29.3 Actions
Storing data read by barcode reader and device points
(1) Device that data can be stored
The data can be stored into word device.
Word of bit device cannot be specified.

(2) Maximum number of device points

Up to 2000 device points can be set. (For the data read by the barcode reader, up to 1999 device points can be
stored to the devices.)

(3) Data stored in the device

Data read by the barcode reader is written into controller devices as ASCII data.
Example) Read data: F123456789
Order of writing data: low
high
(a) When the number of read data is less than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 8)
Write device

Stored data

ASCII data

D0

0009H

D1

3231H

21

D2

3433H

43

D3

3635H

65

D4

3837H

87

D5

2039H

D6

2020H

D7

2020H

The GOT writes the number of read bytes.

The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the
lower byte.

When the number of bytes for the read data is less than
that of the set device points, fill in devices without ASCII
data with spaces (20H) or NULLs (00H).
29.1 Settings

Space

(b) When the number of the read data is more than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 4)
Write device

Stored data

ASCII data

D0

0009H

D1

3231H

21

D2

3433H

43

D3

3635H

65

The GOT writes the number of read bytes.

The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the
lower byte.

The data that exceed the maximum number of device

points are not written.

29 - 4

29.3 Actions

22

Header/terminator

Header

None (Default), STX

OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

The header or terminator of the barcode read by barcode reader can be set.
The following shows applicable header/terminator.

Terminator

ETX, LF, CR (Default), CR+LF

23

Item

Description

The following explains the header and terminator with an example of reading "12345" by the barcode reader.
LOGGING
FUNCTION

(1) Header
(a) None (Default)
Set when not adding the header to the head of data.

24

Read data
1

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

Header

RECIPE

(b) STX
Set when adding the STX to the head of data.

25

Read data
1

02H

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

STX

(2) Terminator
(a) ETX
Set when adding the ETX to the end of data.

26

ETX

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

03H

STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

Terminator

Read data

(b) LF
Set when adding the LF to the end of data.
Read data
2

LF

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0AH
TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

CR (Default)
Set when adding the CR to the end of data.
Read data

Terminator

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

(c)

27

Terminator

(d) CR+LF
Set when adding the CR+LF to the end of data.
Terminator

CR

LF

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

0AH

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

Read data

29.3 Actions

29 - 5

 Order of writing data to controller

When writing the data read by barcode reader to controller, set the order of writing.

(1) Low

High

Write the data to controller device in order of lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits.
Storage in order of lower 8 bits

higher 8 bits.

Read data
"12345"
5

D0

Barcode

(00 H)
2
D1
(32 H)
4
D2
(34 H)

12345

D3

<GOT>

Read data

(20 H)

(05 H)
1
(31 H)
3
(33 H)
5
(35 H)

Read byte
number
Storage
data

Terminator

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

(For header: none, terminator: CR)

(2) High

Low

Write the data to controller device in order of upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits.
Storage in order of higher 8 bits
Read data
"12345"
D0

Barcode

12345

(00 H)
1
D1
(31 H)
3
D2
(33 H)
5
D3
(35 H)

<GOT>

Read data

Terminator

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

(For header: none, terminator: CR)

29 - 6

29.3 Actions

5
(05 H)
2
(32 H)
4
(34 H)
(20 H)

lower 8 bits.

Read byte
number

Storage
data

22
OPERATION LOG
FUNCTION

29.4 Precautions
Precautions for drawing
(1) Barcode that can be read
For the barcode that can be read, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A-0010)
separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation
products.
MELFANSweb website:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html

(2) Number of barcode settings

23
LOGGING
FUNCTION

This section explains the precautions for using the barcode function.

24

Only one barcode setting is available for one project.

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

User's Manual for the GOT used
(b) Operation of barcode reader function with system signal status.
When the following System signals are ON, the data read by the barcode reader is not written to a
controller.
The External device I/O signal and the External device I/O complete signal can be automatically turned off
by using a sequence program and others. (Refer to (c) below.)
When connecting the barcode reader to the channel No.8

b15

b14

b13

b12

b11

b10

b9

b8

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Barcode input invalid signal

External device I/O complete sign

27

System signal 2-1

b12

b11

b10

b9

b8

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

TIME ACTION
FUNCTION

b13

External device I/O signal (CH8)

28
SCRIPT FUNCTION

b14

29
BARCODE
FUNCTION

b15

26
STATUS
OBSERVATION
FUNCTION

System signal 1-1

25
DEVICE DATA
TRANSFER
FUNCTION

(a) System information setting

To connect the barcode reader to the channel No.8, set the System signal 1-1 and the System signal 2-1.
To connect the barcode reader to any of the channels from No.5 to No.7, set the System signal 2-1 and the
System signal 2-3.
The barcode function is unavailable without the settings.
For details of the system information, refer to the following.

RECIPE

(3) System information setteing

29.4 Precautions

29 - 7

(c)

Execution timing of the external device I/O signal and the external device I/O complete signal, and a
sequence program example
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
When the data read by the barcode reader are stored in the specified device, this signal turns ON.
To turn off the signal, turn on the external device I/O complete signal.
External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6)
Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal.
This signal is to be turned OFF by users.
Relation between barcode input and signals
Data read by
barcode reader

1234567890123ET

Store the read

data to the
specified device

"1234567890123ET"
ON

External device
I/O signal(CH8)

OFF
ON

External device
I/O complete
signal(CH8)
*1

*1

OFF

After reading barcodes, make sure to turn off the External device I/O signal and the External device I/O complete signal.
Otherwise, the barcode reader does not read data next time.

Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using channel No.8)
It is recommended to create a sequence program so that turning off the external device I/O signal turns off
the external device I/O complete signal.
GT Designer3 setting
System signal 1-1 D10
System signal 2-1 D12

Device
Device points

Signal for using in sequence program

External device I/O complete signal (CH8)
External device I/O signal (CH8)
After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only

D100
20

M106
M126
SM403
Transfer the value of D10 to M100 to M115
The external device I/O complete signal (CH8) is stored
in M106.

Transfer value of D12 to M120 to M135

The external device I/O signal (CH8) is stored in M126.
After standby until barcode data is stored in D100, transfer
the value of D100 to D119 to W100 to W119
Turn M106 ON GOT turns M126
OFF after M106 is turned ON.
Standby until M126 is OFF, turn M106 OFF
Transfer the value of M100 to M115 to D10

Precaution for OS
To use the barcode function, install the extended function OS (Barcode) on the GOT. (Excluding the GT10)

Precaution for hardware

For the system configurations for using the barcode reader, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

29 - 8

29.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

30. RFID FUNCTION

The RFID function enables to connect a RFID controller to the GOT, send and receive data with a RFID reader/writer and
write the received data to devices.
RFID reader/writer

Requesting to read data

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GOT

RFID controller
IC tag

33
Received data

Data of IC tag

SP

SP

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Receiving data

34

HINT
How to connect a RFID controller to the GOT
For the system configuration and communication settings for connecting a RFID controller to the GOT, refer to the
following.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

30 - 1

30.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Peripheral Setting]

[RFID] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Item
Destinat
ion
I/F

Description
Select the connection target interface for the RFID controller.
Click the [Detail Setting] button to display the [Detail Setting] dialog box for the RFID function.
(1) Detail Setting
Use RFID

Select this item to enable the settings of the RFID function.

Device

Select a device to be used for the RFID function.

Devices equivalent to 5 points starting from the selected device are set as the RFID controller signal.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Transmitted Data
Points

Set the item with the dedicated protocol (ICU-60S or ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS
TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.) or the nonprocedural protocol.
Set the device points for data to be sent. (0 to 10000)
Set the item so that the device points for [Transmitted Data Points] and [Received Data Points] in total
are 10000 points or less.

Received Data Points

Set the device points for received data. (0 to 10000)

Set the item so that the device points for [Transmitted Data Points] and [Received Data Points] in total
are 10000 points or less.

Device Points

Displays the total device points of [Transmitted Data Points], [Received Data Points], and the RFID
controller signal (5 points).
Select this item when using nonprocedural protocol.
(1) Detail Setting

Functio
n
Setting

Header

Select either of the following suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller.
None: No header
STX: Adds the STX to the header.
Select this item when using nonprocedural protocol.
(1) Detail Setting

Terminator

ETX: The ETX terminator is added to the data.

LF: The LF terminator is added to the data.
CR: The CR terminator is added to the data.
CR+LF: The CR and LF terminator are added to the data.
Select an order of writing data into controller devices.
Low

Data Writing Order

High: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from lower 8 bits to upper

8 bits.
High

Low: The GOT writes data into controller devices in order of data from upper 8 bits to lower

8 bits.

Fill up a space when

imported data is less
than the writing points

Select this item to fill in devices without data with spaces or NULLs when the number of bytes for the
data received by the RFID reader/writer is less than that of bytes equivalent to the device points set
for [Received Data Points].
After selecting the item, select the data to fill in devices without data.
Space: Fills devices without data with spaces (20H).
NULL: Fills devices without data with NULLs (00H).

30 - 2

30.1 Settings

Model

30

(1) Detail Setting

RFID FUNCTION

Configure the RFID detail settings.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

Transmission Speed

Select the transmission speed. (4800/9600/19200/38400/57600/115200(BPS))

Data Bit

Select the data length. (7bit/8bit)

Stop Bit

Select the stop bit length. (1bit/2bit)

Parity

Select the type to check parity. (None/Even/Odd)

Sum Check

Select whether to perform sum check. (Done/None)

Retry

Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs.

When receiving no response after retries, the communication times out. (0 to 5 (Times))

Timeout Time

Set the time required for communication to time out. (3 to 30 (Sec.)

Delay Time

Set the delay time to lower the load of the network/connected PLC. (0 to 3000(ms))

Format

Select the communication format. (10/11/12/15)

Format10: Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)
Format11: Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)
Format12: Dedicated protocol (ICU-215 (Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.)
Format15: Nonprocedural protocol

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

34

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

list

Model

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Detail setting

Description

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Item

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

30.1 Settings

30 - 3

30.2 Relevant Settings

The RFID function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Target
CH

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

Function

Setting item

Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data.

(Read device: System signal 1-2.b4)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b0).
(Read device: System signal 1-2.b3)

[System Signal 1-2]

With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are
stored in the specified device.
With the nonprocedural protocol, this signal notifies that sending data to the RFID controllers is
completed.
(Write device: System signal 2-3.b0)

[System Signal 2-3]

Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data.

(Read device: System signal 1-2.b7)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b1).
(Read device: System signal 1-2.b6)

[System Signal 1-2]

With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are
stored in the specified device.
With the nonprocedural protocol, this signal notifies that sending data to the RFID controllers is
completed.
(Write device: System signal 2-3.b1)

[System Signal 2-3]

Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data.

(Read device: System signal 1-2.b10)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-3.b2).
(Read device: System signal 1-2.b9)

[System Signal 1-2]

With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are
stored in the specified device.
With the nonprocedural protocol, this signal notifies that sending data to the RFID controllers is
completed.
(Write device: System signal 2-3.b2)

[System Signal 2-3]

Turning on this signal requests the RFID controller to read data.

(Read device: System signal 1-2.b1)

[System Signal 1-2]

Turning on this signal turns off the external device I/O signal (System signal 2-1.b6).
(Read device: System signal 1-1.b6)

[System Signal 1-1]

With the dedicated protocol, this signal notifies that data read by the RFID reader/writer are
stored in the specified device.
With the nonprocedural protocol, this signal notifies that sending data to the RFID controllers is
completed.
(Write device: System signal 2-1.b6)

[System Signal 2-1]

Model

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Function

30 - 4

Setting item

Notifying that external authentication or fingerprint authentication succeeds. (Read

device)

GS240.b0

Notifying that external authentication or fingerprint authentication fails. (Read device)

GS240.b1

Notifying that the login screen for the external authentication or fingerprint
authentication is displayed. (Write device)

GS240.b14

30.2 Relevant Settings

Model

30
RFID FUNCTION

30.3 Actions
The following explains settings and functions required for the RFID function.

Storing data read by RFID reader/writer and device points

(1) Devices that can store data

(2) Maximum number of device points

Up to 10000 points can be set for the send data points and receive data points in total.

(3) Data to be stored in devices

ASCII data

D1005

0009H

D1006

3231H

21

D1007

3433H

43

D1008

3635H

65

D1009

3837H

87

D1010

2039H

D1011

2020H

D1012

2020H

The GOT writes the number of read bytes.

The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the
lower byte.

When the number of bytes for the read data is less than
that of the set device points, fill in devices without ASCII
data with spaces (20H) or NULLs (00H).

Space

(b) When device points for read data are more than set device points
Settings (Storage device: D1005, Data points: 4)
ASCII data

D1005

0009H

D1006

3231H

21

D1007

3433H

43

D1008

3635H

65

35

The GOT writes the number of read bytes.

The GOT writes read data in order of byte starting from the
lower byte.

The data that exceed the maximum number of device

points are not written.

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Data to be stored

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Write device

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

30.1 Settings

33

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Data to be stored

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(a) When device points for read data are less than set device points
Settings (Storage device: D1005, Data points: 8)
Write device

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

The following shows how the GOT writes data to be sent or received by a RFID reader/writer into controller
devices as ASCII data.
Example) Received data: 123456789
Order of writing data: low
high

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

The data can be stored in word devices.

Bit devices cannot be specified as word devices.

30.3 Actions

30 - 5

 Order of writing data to controller

For writing data read by a RFID reader/writer into a controller device, the order of writing data can be set.

(1) Low

High

Write the data to controller device in order of lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits.
Storing data in order of data from
lower 8 bits to upper 8 bits
Read data
12345
D1000

Requesting to read data

D1001

D1002

D1003

Number of
read bytes

Stored
data

Receiving data
1

(2) High

Low

Write the data to controller device in order of upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits.
Storing data in order of data from
upper 8 bits to lower 8 bits
Read data
12345
D1000

Requesting to read data

Receiving data
1

30 - 6

30.3 Actions

Number of
read bytes

D1001

D1002

D1003

Stored
data

30

Header/terminator

RFID FUNCTION

Set the header and terminator suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used.
30.1 Settings
The following shows applicable header/terminator.
Description

Header

None (Default), STX

Terminator

ETX, LF, CR (Default), CR+LF

31

The following explains the header and terminator with an example of reading "12345" by the RFID reader/writer.

(1) Header
(a) None (Default)
Set when not adding the header to the head of data.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Item

32

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Read data

(b) STX
Set when adding the STX to the head of data.

33

Read data

STX

02H

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Header

(2) Terminator
(a) ETX
Set when adding the ETX to the end of data.

34

ETX

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

03H

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Terminator

Read data

(b) LF
Set when adding the LF to the end of data.

LF

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0AH

CR (Default)
Set when adding the CR to the end of data.
Read data

36

Terminator

CR

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

REPORT FUNCTION

(c)

35

Terminator

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Read data

(d) CR+LF
Set when adding the CR+LF to the end of data.
Terminator

CR

LF

31H

32H

33H

34H

35H

0DH

0AH

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Read data

30.3 Actions

30 - 7

 RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area
Set the RFID controller signal for controlling data transmissions with the RFID function.
Set [Device] in the RFID dialog box to automatically set the RFID controller signal.
30.1 Settings
The following shows an setting example of the RFID controller signal, send data points, and receive data points.
Example) RFID settings
Device
: D1000
Send data points : 4
Receive data points: 8
(a) RFID controller signal
Device

Bit number
b0

D1000

Item
RFID receive signal

b1 to b14

D1004

Error signal

Turns on when the GOT receives an error signal.

b0 to b7

IC tag communication time

Stores time (second) that the RFID reader/writer sends or receives

data from/to an IC tag, when the dedicated protocol (LSRF
manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.) is used.

b8 to b15

RFID reader/writer No.

Stores the number of the RFID reader/writer that sends or receives

data from/to an IC tag, when the dedicated protocol (LSRF
manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.) is used.

b0 to b15

D1003

With the nonprocedural protocol, the bit turns on when the GOT
receives data from the RFID controller.

b15

D1001

D1002

Description

b0 to b7

Error No.

Stores error codes when errors occur.

b8 to b15

Number of errors

Stores the number of error occurrences.

RFID communication time

Stores the communication time for the RFID function.

With dedicated protocol
The bits store the total of the send data time and receive data time.
With nonprocedural protocol
The bits store the send data time or receive data time.

b0 to b15

(b) Send data area, receive data area

Device

30 - 8

Item

Description

D1005 to D1008

Send data area

Stores data to be sent to an IC tag.

The head device stores the number of bytes for data to be sent.

D1009 to D1016

Receive data area

Stores received data from an IC tag.

The head device stores the number of bytes for the received data.

30.3 Actions

Protocol

Reference

Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)

Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.)
Dedicated protocol (ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO
SCIENCE Corp.)
Nonprocedural protocol

This section (1) Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by

LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)

This section (2) Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S and ICU215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE Corp.)

This section (3) Nonprocedural protocol

Select the dedicated protocol that corresponds to the RFID controller to be used.
With no dedicated protocol that corresponds to the RFID controller to be used, select the nonprocedural protocol.
For selecting a protocol, refer to the following.

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

The following dedicated protocol and nonprocedural protocol are available for communications between the GOT
and the RFID controller.

RFID FUNCTION

30

Protocols and communication flow

The following shows devices used for each protocol and an handshake example.

(1) Dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)

Example: Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
System signal 1-1 D10
System signal 1-2
D11
System signal 2-1 D12
Device to be set D1000
Receive data points 4 points

33

Item
External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6),
RFID request signal (CH8) (System signal 1-2.b1),
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)

System information

34

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

RFID reader/writer No.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

IC tag communication time,

RFID controller signal

RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area

(b) Handshake

RFID request signal (CH8)

(System signal 1-2.b1)
GOT

Receive data area

External device I/O signal
(System signal 2-1.b6)
User-created program

1.
'3','2'

8.
2.
Sending data/
receiving data

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

RFID controller signal

(IC tag communication time,
RFID reader/writer No.)

3.
02h,'0','3','D','*','A',
'B','1','2','3','4','*',03h

4.

36

7.
5.
D1005

8.

R1005

External device I/O complete

signal (CH8)
(System signal 1-1.b6)

REPORT FUNCTION

Device

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(a) Control devices

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

6.

30.3 Actions

30 - 9

1.

(c)

Set the RFID reader/writer No. and the time that the RFID reader/writer sends data to an IC tag.
Example) RFID reader/writer No.: 3, Time to send data to IC tag: two seconds

2.

Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID reader/writer communicates with an IC tag.

3.

Data of the IC tag read by the RFID reader/writer is stored in the receive data area.

4.

The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8).

5.

Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices.

6.

Check that the data is moved, and then turn on the external device I/O complete signal (CH8).

7.

The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).

8.

Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).

Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using the channel No.8)
After the GOT receives data from the RFID controller, make sure to turn off the external device I/O
complete signal and the RFID request signal.
When those signals are on, the GOT cannot send the next data read request to the RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the external device I/O complete signal and the RFID request signal
turn off.

POINT
Before using example programs
For applying the example programs in this manual to the actual system, make sure that the target system has no
troubles on the control.
Signal to be used in sequence program
RFID reader/writer No.3 read command: M200
M200
MOVP

D12.6

H302

D1001

SET

D11.1

Set the RFID reader/writer No. and the time that the
RFID reader/writer sends data to an IC tag.
(RFID controller No.: 3, Time to send data to IC tag:
2 seconds)
Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID
reader/writer communicates with an IC tag to read
data.

D1000.F
BMOVP

24

D12.6
60

D1005

R1005

K4

SET

D10.6

RST

D11.1

The data is stored in the receive data area. Move

the data to any of the other devices after the
external device I/O signal (CH8) turns on.
After moving the data, turn on the external device
I/O complete signal (CH8).

D10.6

Turn off the external device I/O complete signal

(CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).
RST

30 - 10

30.3 Actions

D10.6

Example) Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
System signal 1-1 D10
System signal 1-2
D11
System signal 2-1
D12
Device to be set D1000
Send data points
30 points
Receive data points 30 points
(a) Controlling device

31

Item

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Device

External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6),

RFID request signal (CH8) (System signal 1-2.b1),
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

(b) Handshake

41h,01h,03h

8.
2.
Sending data/
receiving data

GOT
Receive data area

33

3.
00h, 10h, 'A' to 'P'

External device
I/O signal (CH8)
(System signal 2-1.b6)

4.

7.
5.
D1036

User-created program

1.

8.

R1036

External device
I/O complete signal (CH8)
(System signal 1-1.b6)

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

RFID request signal (CH8)

(System signal 1-2.b1)

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Receive data area

32

1.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

System information

30
RFID FUNCTION

(2) Dedicated protocol (ICU-60S and ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.)

6.

Set the data to be sent to the RFID controller in the send data area.
Set the data suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used.
Example) Reading record No.3 by "rf_read" command
Turn on the RFID request signal, and then the RFID reader/writer communicates with an IC tag.

3.

Data of the IC tag read by the RFID reader/writer is stored in the receive data area.

4.

The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8).

5.

Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices.

6.

Check that the data is moved, and then turn on the external device I/O complete signal (CH8).

7.

The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).

8.

Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal (CH8).

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

2.

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

30.3 Actions

30 - 11

(c)

Sequence program example (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using the channel No.8)
After the GOT receives data from the RFID controller, make sure to turn off the external device I/O
complete signal and the RFID request signal.
When those signals are on, the GOT cannot send the next data read request to the RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the external device I/O complete signal and the RFID request signal
turn off.

POINT
Before using example programs
For applying the example programs in this manual to the actual system, make sure that the target system has no
troubles on the control.
Signal to be used in sequence program
Record No.3 read command
M200
0

M200
MOVP

K3

D1005

MOVP

H141

D1006

MOVP

H3

D1007

SET

D12.6

BMOVP

D12.6
64

D1036

R1036

30.3 Actions

K9

SET

D10.6

RST

D11.1

The data is stored in the receive data area.

Move the data to any of the other devices
after the external device I/O signal (CH8)
turns on.
After moving the data, turn on the external
device I/O complete signal (CH8).

D10.6

RST

30 - 12

D11.1

D1000.F

28

Make the setting to read the record.

Turn on the RFID request signal, and
then the RFID reader/writer communicates
with an IC tag to read data.

D10.6

Turn off the external device I/O complete

signal (CH8) and the RFID request signal
(CH8).

30

(3) Nonprocedural protocol

RFID FUNCTION

Example: Settings with GT Designer3 (When connecting the RFID controller to the channel No.8)
System signal 1-1 D10
System signal 1-2 D11
System signal 2-1
D12
Device to be set
D1000
Send data points
5 points
Receive data points 8 points
(a) Controlling device
Device

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

External device I/O complete signal (CH8) (System signal 1-1.b6),

RFID request signal (CH8) (System signal 1-2.b1),
External device I/O signal (CH8) (System signal 2-1.b6)
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

RFID controller signal

RFID receive signal

RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area

32

(b) Handshake

1.

2.
Sending data

3.

33

Receiving data

4.

RFID request signal

(CH8)
(System signal 1-1.b6)

5.
02h,'0','3','D','*','A',
'B','1','2','3','4','*',03h

Receive data area

RFID controller signal
(RFID receive signal)

2.
3.
4.

6.

8.
7.
D1010

User-created program

1.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

External device I/O

signal (CH8)
(System signal 2-1.b6)

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

GOT

8.

R2017

Set the data to be sent to the RFID controller in the send data area.
Set the data suitable for the protocol of the RFID controller to be used.
Example) "02h, '0', '3', 'G', '0', '2', 03h"

35

Turn on the RFID request signal (CH8), and then the RFID reader/writer sends the data stored in the
send data area to the IC tag.
The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8).
Check that the external device I/O signal (CH8) is on, and then turn on the external device I/O
complete signal (CH8).
The GOT turns off the external device I/O signal (CH8).
Turn off the external device I/O complete signal (CH8).

5.

The IC tag sends data to the RFID reader/writer, and the data is stored in the receive data area.

6.

The GOT turns on the external device I/O signal (CH8).

7.

Move the data stored in the receive data area to any of the other devices.

8.

Turn off the RFID request signal (CH8) and the RFID receive signal.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

RFID request signal

(CH8)
(System signal 1-2.b1)

02h, '0', '3', 'G',

'0', '2', 03h

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Send data area

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

System information

Item

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

30.3 Actions

30 - 13

(c)

Sequence program example (For QCPU) (When connecting the GOT to QCPU by using channel No.8)
Be sure to turn off the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal before the GOT sends the next data
read request to the RFID controller.
When the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal are on, the GOT cannot communicate with the
RFID controller.
Create a sequence program so that the RFID request signal and the RFID receive signal turn off.

POINT
Before using example programs
For applying the example programs in this manual to the actual system, make sure that the target system has no
troubles on the control.
Signal to be used in sequence program
Data send command M201
M201
0

MOVP

H7

D1005

MOVP

H3002

D1006

MOVP

H4733

D1007

MOVP

H3230

D1008

MOVP

H3

D1009

SET

D11.1

Turn on the RFID request signal, and send

the data.

SET

D10.6

After the external device I/O signal (CH8)

turns on, turn on the external device I/O
complete signal (CH8).

RST

D10.6

After the external device I/O signal (CH8)

turns off, turn off the external device I/O
complete signal (CH8).

D12.6
31
D12.6

D10.6

55
D1000.0
76

30 - 14

30.3 Actions

D1000.F
BMOVP

D1010

Write data to be sent in the send data area.

R2017

K8

When the RFID receive signal turns on,

move the data stored in the receive data
area to any of the other devices.

RST

D1000.0

Turn off the RFID receive signal.

RST

D11.1

Turn off the RFID request signal.

30

Errors during communications

RFID FUNCTION

The GOT detects errors when the errors occur while the GOT communicates with the RFID controller.
For the RFID controller signal, refer to the following.

FFH

Time out

Check if the cable is unplugged and check the RFID controller status.
Take the following corrective actions.
Connect the cable again.
Correctly wire the cable.
Turn on the RFID controller.

FEH

SIO error

Check the communication settings and communication environments

surrounding controllers. Set the communication settings for the RFID
controller suitable for those for the GOT

FDH

Send setting error

Set the station No. and time within the setting ranges.

FCH

Receive overflow

Set the receive data area suitable for the received data size.

14H

Time out or no IC tags

Make the GOT send a data read request when communications are
available between a RFID controller and an IC tag.

For error codes and corrective actions other than the above, refer to the manual for the RFID controller.
After removing error causes, manually turn off the error signal and send data again.

(2) With dedicated protocol (ICU-60S or ICU-215(Mifare) manufactured by MARS TECHNO SCIENCE
Corp.) or nonprocedural protocol
When an error occurs, an error code is stored in the receive data area or the error No. of the RFID controller
signal.
(a) When GOT receives error reply from RFID controller
When the GOT receives an error replay from the RFID controller, an error code is stored in the receive data
area.
Check if errors occur with data stored in the receive data area.
For errors and corrective actions, refer to the manual for the RFID controller. After removing error causes,
send data again.
(b) When GOT receives no error reply from RFID controller
When the GOT receives no error reply from the RFID controller, the GOT turns on the error signal of the
RFID controller signal, and the error code is stored in the error No.
Check if an error occurs with the error signal of the RFID controller signal.
The following shows error codes to be stored in the error No.
Error code

Description

Corrective action

FFH

Time out

Check if the cable is unplugged and check the RFID controller

status. Take the following corrective actions.
Connect the cable again.
Correctly wire the cable.
Turn on the RFID controller.

FEH

SIO error

Check the communication settings and communication

environments surrounding controllers. Set the communication
settings for the RFID controller suitable for those for the GOT.

FDH

Send setting error

Set the station No. and time within the setting ranges.

FCH

Receive overflow

Set the receive data area suitable for the received data size.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Corrective action

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Description

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Error code

31

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

When an error occurs, the error signal of the RFID controller signal turns on, the number of error occurrences is
counted, and an error code is stored in the error No.
Check if an error occurs with the error signal of the RFID controller signal.
The following shows error codes to be stored in the error No

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(1) With dedicated protocol (LSRF manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co., Ltd.)

36
REPORT FUNCTION

RFID controller signal, send data area, and receive data area

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

After removing error causes, manually turn off the error signal and send data again.

30.3 Actions

30 - 15

30.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the RFID function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Number of RFID settings
Only one RFID setting is available for one project.

(2) Connecting RFID controller for operator authentication

To use the RFID controller for the operator authentication, the controller can be connected to only the RS-232
interface built in the GOT.
Set the channel No.8 for connecting the RFID controller.

(3) Applicable RFID controller

For applicable RFID controllers, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A-0010)
separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation
products.
MELFANSweb website: http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html

(4) Setting system information

(a) System information
To connect the RFID controller to the channel No.8, set the system signal 1-1 and the system signal 2-1. To
connect the RFID controller to any of the channels from No.5 to No.7, set the system signal 2-1 and the
system signal 2-3.
The RFID function is unavailable without the settings.
For details of the system information, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
User's Manual for the GOT used
(b) Operation of RFID function with control device status
Depending on the status of the control device to be used, the GOT may not send or receive data to/from
the RFID controller.
For control devices for each protocol, refer to the following.
30.3 Protocols and communication flow

Precautions for OS
For using the RFID function, install the extended function OS (RFID) on the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

(1) System configuration with RFID controller
For the system configuration with the RFID controller, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

(2) Communication in multiple RFID readers/writers connection

When connecting multiple RFID readers/writers, some controllers may communicate with each RFID reader/
writer.
For communicating the RFID controller with the each RFID reader/writer, set an interlock so that the RFID
controller does not communicate with RFID readers/writers until the executing communication is completed.

30 - 16

30.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

31. REMOTE PERSONAL COMPUTER

OPERATION FUNCTION

The remote personal computer operation function enables to operate the mouse pointer on a personal computer by
touching the computer screen displayed on the GOT using RGB display function.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

The GOT displays the personal

computer screen using the RGB
display function.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

The coordinates of the position touched on the

GOT and the touch status are sent to the personal
computer for operating the mouse pointer.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

POINT
Settings for remote personal computer operation function
(1) RGB display function settings
The RGB display function is required to use the remote personal computer operation function,
For how to set the RGB display function, refer to the following.
For RGB display function settings

35

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

(2) Remote personal computer operation function driver
To use the remote personal computer operation function, install the remote personal computer operation
function driver on the personal computer.
For how to install the driver, refer to the following.
31.1 Settings
(3) GT Designer3 setting
For the remote personal computer operation function, no parameter setting is required with GT Designer3.

36
REPORT FUNCTION

For system configurations and communication settings for the remote personal computer operation
connection

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

31 - 1

31.1 Settings
How to set the remote personal computer operation function
Select [Common]

[Peripheral Settings]

[PC Remote Operation] from the menu to display the setting dialog

box.

Settings for the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X)
The remote personal computer operation function driver is a mouse emulation software for operating the mouse
pointer on the personal computer with device data of the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and touch status sent by the
GOT.
The copyright of the software belongs to DMC Co., Ltd.
Use the software under the license agreement displayed when installing the software.

(1) Software
Obtain the software with either of the following methods.
GT Works3 CD-ROM
Download the software from the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE (MELFANSweb) website.
(MELFANSweb website: http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/melfansweb/english/index.html)

(2) Operating environment

The following shows the operating environment for the personal computer.
Item

Description

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Service Pack 4 (English version)
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 2 (English version)
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 2 (English version)

OS

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Service Pack 3 (English version)

Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Service Pack 3 (English version)
Compatible with the operating environment for the above OS.
Equipped with the RS-232 serial port (9-pin).

Computer

Setting GOT
Install the extended function OS (Video/RGB, PC Remote Operation) on the GOT, set the communication settings,
and connect cables.
The remote personal computer operation function driver setup starts automatically after installing the driver.
Therefore, display the computer screen on the GOT with the RGB display, and connect the GOT to the personal
computer via the RS-232 connection, in advance.
For the connections and settings for the RGB display and the RS-232 connection, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

POINT
Device setting
To send the touch status of the GOT screen to the personal computer, turn on the touch status communication
control signal (GS511.b0).
For the touch status communication control signal (GS511.b0), refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

31 - 2

31.1 Settings

5.
6.

The Select Installation Folder screen appears. Select a folder for installation. Select [Everyone] for anyone who
uses the computer or [Just me] for yourself, and then click the [Next] button.
The Confirm Installation screen appears. Click the [Next] button to start the installation.
The MES_2X Driver Select screen appears. Select [RS232C] and a communication port to be used, and then
click the [Next] button.

7.

The MES_2X Driver EEPROM screen appears. Select [DO NOT USE], and then click the [Next] button.

8.

The Hardware Installation screen appears during the installation. Click the [Continue Anyway] button.

9.

The Found New Hardware Wizard screen appears, and then the [Installation Complete] screen appears. Click
the [close] button to exit the setup wizard.

Setting up remote personal computer operation driver (MES_2X)

Setting up remote personal computer operation driver (MES_2X)

To calibrate the difference in the position of the coordinates between the GOT screen and the personal computer
screen, set the calibration for the remote personal computer operation driver (MES_2X).
Refer to the following procedures.

3.
4.

Set up the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X).

Refer to either of the following.
Set up the driver on the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen automatically displayed after the driver
installation.
Set up the driver on the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen opened by selecting [All Programs]
[Touch
Screen Driver MES_2X]
[TPControl] from the start menu.
Execute the calibration on the [Calibration] tab in the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen.
Select [5p] for the calibration points, and then click the [Calibration] button in the bottom of the screen.
For the calibration points, [5p] is recommended.
The calibration points are displayed on the personal computer. Touch the calibration points of the personal
computer screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB display.
Click the [Test] button in the bottom of the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen.
The test screen appears. Touch the [Clear] button on the test screen displayed on the GOT using the RGB
display to check for the correct operation.
After checking, touch the left [End] button, and then touch the right [End] button to close the test screen.

6.

Click the [OK] button in the bottom of the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen to close the screen.

35

36

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

5.

34

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

2.

32

33

10. After exiting the setup wizard, the Touch Panel Driver Properties screen appears. Set up the driver.

1.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

4.

The License Agreement screen appears, and read the [license agreement]. Select [I Agree] to accept the terms
of the agreement, and then click the [Next] button.

31

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

3.

The Welcome to the Touch Screen Driver MES_2X Setup Wizard screen appears, and then click the [Next]
button.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

2.

Start Install.exe.

REPORT FUNCTION

1.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

To use the remote personal computer operation function, install the remote personal computer operation driver
(MES_2X) on the personal computer.
Refer to the following procedures.

RFID FUNCTION

30

How to install the remote personal computer operation function driver (MES_2X)

31.1 Settings

31 - 3

31.2 Relevant Settings

The remote personal computer operation function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Function

Setting item

Controlling whether to send or not the touch status to the personal computer. (Write
device)

GS511.b0

Notifying the position touched on the GOT (X-coordinate, Y-coordinate). (Write

device)

GS654, GS655

Notifying whether the screen is touched or not. (Write device)

GS656

Model

31.3 Actions
When the GOT displays the personal computer screen using the RGB display, turning on the touch status
communication control signal (GS511.b0) sends the data in the touch status external notifications (X-coordinate
(GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655), touch status (GS656)) to the personal computer.
The following shows operations according to each touch status.
Touch status communication control signal:
(GS511.0) = ON
Touch status external notification (X-coordinate): (GS654) = 391
Touch status external notification (Y-coordinate): (GS655) = 301
Touch status external notification (touch status): (GS656) = 1

Touch status external notification function

X-coordinate = 391, Y-coordinate = 301, touch status =1

RGB display function

POINT
GOT internal devices
For the GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices

31 - 4

31.2 Relevant Settings

(1) Touching the GOT screen

When the GOT screen is touched while the touch status communication control signal is on, the data in the
touch status external notifications (X-coordinate (GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655)) are sent to the personal
computer and the mouse pointer moves to the corresponding position.
The device value 1 is sent as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to the personal
computer, during touching the GOT.
As a result, the mouse pointer moves on the personal computer screen.

(2) Stopping GOT screen touch

When the touch operation is stopped while the touch status communication control signal is on, the device value
0 is sent only one time, as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to the personal
computer.
As a result, the mouse pointer clicks the personal computer screen one time.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

The following explains the operation of the mouse pointer according to the touch status.

RFID FUNCTION

30

Operation of mouse pointer

32

When the touch status communication control signal turns off during touching the GOT screen due to cable
disconnection, GOT power disconnection, and others, the touch status external notifications (X-coordinate
(GS654), Y-coordinate (GS655)) hold the values right before the signal turns off.
The device value 0 is sent only one time, as the touch status in the touch status external notification (GS656) to
the personal computer.
As a result, the mouse pointer clicks the personal computer screen one time.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(3) Turning off touch status communication control signal during touching GOT screen

33

Touch 1)
X:391, Y:301

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

The following shows the operation timing.

Touch 2)
X:199, Y:263

Touch operation (operator)

(Holding the coordinates of Touch2))

(Holding the coordinates of Touch 1))

X-coordinate (GS654)

391

199

Y-coordinate (GS655)

301

263

(Output for Touch 1))

35

(Output for Touch 2))

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Touch status (GS656)

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34
Touch status external
notification function

Touch status communication control function

Touch status communication
control signal (GS511.0)

Y-coordinate (GS655)

36
(Not outputting the coordinates of Touch 1))

(Holding the coordinates of Touch2))

199

263

Touch status (GS656)

1
(No output for Touch 1))

REPORT FUNCTION

X-coordinate (GS654)

(ON)

37

(Output for Touch 2))

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Touch status external

notification function

(OFF)

31.3 Actions

31 - 5

31.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the remote personal computer operation function.

Precautions for OS
To use the remote personal computer operation function, install the extended function OS (Video/RGB, PC Remote
Operation) on the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

(1) Applicable GOT
The following GOTs are applicable to the remote personal computer operation function.
GT16, GT1585V-S, GT1575V-S

(2) System configurations for remote personal computer operation function

For the system configurations for the remote personal computer operation function, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Precautions for use

(1) Drag operation
When dragging on the GOT screen, the touch status data is not correctly sent to the personal computer and the
mouse pointer operation may stop.
For the remote personal computer operation function, do not use the drag operation on the GOT screen.

(2) Precautions for RGB display

For the precautions for the RGB display, refer to the following.
35.4 Precautions

31 - 6

31.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

32. VIDEO DISPLAY FUNCTION

This section explains the function to display the image taken by a video camera on a video window.
As the video window operates independently of other screens, the base screen can be switched while leaving the video
window open.

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Video camera
(Channel No. 1)
Video camera
(Channel No. 2)
Video camera
(Channel No. 3)

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Video camera
(Channel No. 4)

Video window 4
Video window 3
Video window 2

34

Video window 1

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

For the video display, the full mode and clip mode are provided.
Displaying in full mode
Displaying clip mode
Differences between full mode and clip mode
Full mode
GT16

GT15

Displays the total image.

Video window resolution (dots)

640

480 / 720

768

576 (dots)

480 /

GT16

GT15

Displays a part of the image in its original size.

640

480 /

720

480 (dots)

64
64 to 768
(dots)

576

64
64 to 720
(dots)

Diplay size shange

100%, 50% or 25% of the original size

Unchangeable (fixed at 100%)

Number of screens

1 (video window 1 only)

480

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Overview

35

Clip mode

36

POINT
Selection of video image resolution and video input signal
480 dots, or 768
576 dots) and the video input signal
The video image resolution (640 480 dots, 720
(NTSC format or PAL format) can be set by the utility or [Communication Setting] on GT Designer3.
Utility operation

REPORT FUNCTION

Item

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

37

User's Manual for the GOT used

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

About Communication Settings

(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting

32 - 1

32.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Peripheral Setting]

[Video/RGB Input] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Setting items
Set the device to be used for video display.
The dialog box is used in common for the video display setting and RGB display setting.

The video/RGB setting list

Item
Destination
I/F

Description

Model

Select the connection target interface for the video/RGB input.

Click the [Detail Setting] button to display the detail setting dialog box.
(1) Detail setting
Use Video/RGB
Input

Select this item to enable the video/RGB input function.

Select the unit to be used.

Function
Setting

Video input display

Select this item when using the video window only or both video window and RGB screen.
Unit Type Name
(GT16M-V4/GT16M-V4R1/GT15V-75V4/GT15V-75V4R1)
RGB input display
Select this item when using the RGB screen.(GT16M-R2(RGB screen only)/GT15V-75R1(RGB
screenonly))
Video window

Select the number of video windows to be displayed.(1 to 4)

To set multiple video windows, set the video windows 2 to 4.(Setting contents are the same as those for
video window1.)

First Device

Set a start device for the devices to be used.

When the start device is set, subsequent devices of the start device are automatically set in the video/RGB
setting list.

(Continued to next page)

32 - 2

32.1 Settings

Item

Description
Displays the devices that are used for the video window/RGB screen display.
(When selecting the RGB input display, only the devices for [Video/RGB Input Common] are
displayed.)
The values set at the devices used for video/RGB screen display are handled as 16-bit binary
file.
Setting items of [Video/RGB Input Common] device

Video/RGB
setting list

Clip

X Position

Specify the X coordinate of the position to display a video image in clip

mode.

Y Position

Specify the Y coordinate of the position to display a video image in clip

mode.

Width

Specify the video image clipping width.

32

Height

Specify the video image clipping height.

Channel No.

Specify the channel No. of a video image to be displayed in video window 1.

(0 to 4)

Video
Size
Window1

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Function
Setting

31

Specify a color when executing transparent processing.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Transpar 0(Black)ent
255(White)

30
RFID FUNCTION

Video/
RGB
Input
Common

Model

Specify the size of a video window. (0: 100%, 1: 50%, 2: 25%)

When the display size of a video window is changed by touching, the value
set for the corresponding device remains unchanged.

X Position

Specify the X coordinate of the position to display a video window.

Y Position

Specify the Y coordinate of the position to display a video window.

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(1) Detail setting

Detail settings for video/RGB input can be set as follows.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

Video Input Signal

Select the video input signal.(NTSC/PAL)

Video Resolution

Select the video resolution.(640

480/ 720

Model

36
480/ 768

REPORT FUNCTION

Detail setting
list

Description

576)

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Item

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

32.1 Settings

32 - 3

 Setting items of [Video/RGB Input Common] device

The device specified as the [Video/RGB Input Common] device stores the data as indicated below.
It controls the operation of the video window / RGB screen by turning ON/OFF the bit devices.
The settings for a video window are used in common to video windows 1 to 4.
Bit
position

Description

Bit status

Remarks

b0

Full/Clip mode selection

ON : Selects clip mode.

OFF : Selects full mode.

Valid when a video window is displayed.

Bit status can be changed while a video
window is displayed.

b1

Screen selection for placing a

video window

ON : Selects overlap window 1.

OFF : Selects the base screen.

Transparent processing is executed

automatically when b1 is ON.

b2

Transparent processing
selection

ON : Executes transparent processing.

OFF : Does not execute transparent processing.

b3

Through color specifying method

selection

ON : Makes colors other than the specified color

transparent.
OFF : Makes the specified color transparent.

b4

Selection for whether or not the

display size of video window is
changed when touched

ON : Does not change the size.

OFF : Changes the size.

b5

b6*3

Selection for motion video / still

ON : Selects still image.

OFF : Selects motion video.

Display priority selection for

video windows
(When b2 (Transparent
processing selection) is OFF.)

ON : Displays a video window over an overlap

window or a test window.
OFF : Displays a video window behind an overlap
window or a test window.

Valid when a video window is opened.

Bit status can be changed while a video
window is displayed.

Selection for transparent

processing target screen
(When b2 (Transparent
processing selection) is ON.)

ON : Base screen only

OFF : Base screen and overlap windows 1 and 2

Must not be used

b13

Display position of RGB screen

b15

Selection for display/hide of

RGB screen (CH2)*2*4
Selection for display/hide of the
RGB screen(CH1)*2*4
*1
*2
*3
*4

32 - 4

Valid when a video window is opened.

Bit status can be changed while a video
window is displayed.

image*1

b7 to b12

b14

32.2 Transparent processing

32.2 Displaying still image

ON : Displays on the upper left side.

OFF : Displays on the middle side.
ON : Displays an RGB screen.
OFF : Displays a GOT monitor screen.
ON : Displays an RGB screen.
OFF : Displays a GOT monitor screen.

Valid only GT16

35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION
Valid when mounting the GT16M-R2 on
GT16
35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION
35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION

When this bit is turned ON with other bits at the same time, the contents of other bits are disregarded. (b5 has priority.)
When a screen of the utility, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, intelligent module monitor function, network monitor
function, or list editor function is displayed on the GOT, an RGB screen is not displayed even if the bit turns ON.
The contents of control differ depending on the setting for b2 (Transparent processing selection).
When both b14 and b15 are turned on, b15 has priority.

32.1 Settings

 Displaying a video window

Video windows are displayed when any numbers of 1 to 4 are stored in the video window-channel No. devices.
(There is no close button on a video window.)

RFID FUNCTION

30

32.2 Actions

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Example) Displaying the image of the channel number 1 on the video window 1 for GT16
Setting on GT Designer3

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

34
1
0
32
32

(channel No.)
(Display size: 640 480)
(X position)
(Y position)

35

Video window 1 is displayed

according to the setting for
Channel No., Size, X Position
and Y Position

POINT
Size and position of video window
The size and position of a video window can be controlled according to the values set at the corresponding devices
(video window-size device, video window-X/Y position devices).

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

0
0
0
0

36
REPORT FUNCTION

D106
D107
D108
D109

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Operation

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

32.2 Actions

32 - 5

 Display position of video window

A video window can be arranged on the base screen or overlap window 1.
The position of a video window can be specified within the range indicated below.

A
Specify the top-left position
of video window as the
display position.
B
Video window

GOT model

Screen type

GT1695M-X
GT1685M-S,
GT1675M-S,
GT1665M-S
GT1585V-S,
GT1575V-S
GT1675M-V,
GT1665M-V

Base screen
Overlap
window 1

A
(dots)

B
(dots)

0 to 960

0 to 704

0 to 736

0 to 528

0 to 576

0 to 416

POINT
Display of video window
(1) Setting of display position
Set the display position with a multiple of 16 (dots).
Even if the display position is set with a value other than a multiple of 16 (dots), the position is automatically
adjusted to a multiple of 16 (dots).
(2) Video window arranged beyond the screen
If a video window is arranged beyond the screen, display position of the video window is automatically
adjusted to fit to the screen.
(3) Order of laying video screens
A video window can be displayed over or behind an overlap window (1 or 2) or a test window according to the
setting for the [Video/RGB Input Common] device.
32.1 Settings
However, the following items are displayed over a video window.
Advanced alarm popup display
Key window
Comment window
Confirmation or similar message displayed on the GOT

Method of moving video window

The move button is not provided for the video window.
To move a video window, change the device values set for the display position (X and Y coordinates).
If multiple video windows are moved frequently, an overlap window may not be moved even when the overlap
window is touched.
In this case, move the overlap window by changing the device values or move it after the video window has been
moved.

32 - 6

32.2 Actions

30

Placing video window on overlap window

RFID FUNCTION

(1) A video window can be arranged on overlap window 1 only.

(3) When a video window is arranged on overlap window 1, transparent processing will be executed
for the video window.
Transparent processing
If figures or objects are set on overlap window, they may be visible in the background of the video window.

(4) If arrangement setting (base screen / overlap window 1) is switched while a video window is
displayed, the video window is closed temporarily and then opened at the specified position (base
screen / overlap window 1).
(5) The size of a video window placed over an overlap window is not changed even when the video
window is touched.
To change the size of a video window, change the value of the device that has been set for window size change.
32.1 Settings

Displaying in full mode

In full mode, an image taken by a video camera is displayed on the GOT as it is.
When full mode is used, up to four video windows can be displayed simultaneously.
It is also possible to display images taken by different video cameras in one video window by switching the channel
No.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 2.3.2 Relations of base screen and window screen

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

For the display order of windows, refer to the following.

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(2) A window displayed over overlap window 1 will appear over a video window.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

Video image

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Image taken by a video camera is displayed as it is.

(1) Resolution and display size of video window

The following shows the resolution of video windows that can be displayed in full mode.
640
480 dots 720
480 dots 768
576 dots
(The resolution of 768
576 dots is available for GT16 only.)
The display size of each video window can be changed in three levels (100%, 50%, or 25%).

640

480

720

480

768

576

100%

640

480

720

480

768

576

50%

320

240

360

240

384

28

REPORT FUNCTION

36

25%

160

120

180

120

192

144

37

Resolution of video windows (dots)*1

Display size

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

*1 The same resolution is set for 4 channels.

32.2 Actions

32 - 7

(2) Changing the display size

To change the display size of a video window, use the methods indicated below.
(a) Changing the size by touching the video window
(Changing the size by touching can be disabled by turning on b4 of the [Video/RGB Input Common]
device.)
Transparent processing

Display size: 25%

Display size: 50%

Display size: 100%

When the video window display size is changed by touching, the window size changes as follows.
Display size change

Display size: 50%

When a video window is displayed at magnification of 25%,

the first touch changes the magnification of display size to

Display size: 25%

Display size:

50%.
* When a video window is displayed at 50% magnification, the first
touch changes the magnification to 100%.

Display size: 50%

(b) Changing the size by writing a value to the display size setting device
(Window display size and the value to be written ... 0: 100%, 1: 50%, 2: 25%)
D106
D107
D108
D109

1 1 1
(Channel No.)
2 1 0
(Display size:640
32 32 32 (Xposition)
32 32 32 (Yposition)

480)

Display size: 25%

Display size: 50%

Display size: 100%

(3) Display of multiple video windows

(a) The video window displayed last is located at the topmost position.
(b) The video window, of which the display position or size is changed, is displayed in the topmost position.
(c)

When video windows are superimposed, the hidden video window is displayed in the topmost position
when it is touched.
If transparent processing is executed, video windows do not operate as above.

(d) Do not display the same image (taken by the same channel) in multiple video windows.
If an attempt is made to display the same image in multiple video windows, the image is displayed only in
the video window assigned with the smallest number and not displayed in other video windows.

32 - 8

32.2 Actions

30

(4) Invalid area of a touch switch around the video window

Video window

Right

RFID FUNCTION

Depending on the size of displayed video window, the following areas are invalid for touch switches.
: Touch switch valid area
: Touch switch invalid area
: Touch switch area invalid

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31
Down

Resolution of video windows (dots)

Display size
720

576

480

640

480

100%

768 576
(No invalid area)

720 480
(No invalid area)

640 480
(No invalid area)

50%

384 288
(No invalid area)

360 240
(Invalid area: Right 8 dots)

320 240
(No invalid area)

25%

192 144
(No invalid area)

180 120
(Invalid area: Right 12 dots,
Lower 8 dots)

160 120
(Invalid area: Lower 8 dots)

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

768

This mode is used to specify a part (clip area) of the image taken by a video camera and display it in the original size
on the GOT.
With this mode, the video window display area can be reduced without reducing the size of the image to be
displayed.
The clip mode can be used only in video window 1 and cannot be used in video windows 2 to 4.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Displaying clip mode

34

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Precautions for using the full mode

When the display size of a video window is returned to the size when the video window was displayed by
touch operation, the display position is also returned to the position when the video screen was displayed.
If the resolution of a video image is higher than the resolution of a video window, a part of the image is not
displayed in the video window.
The image display position can be adjusted by changing the setting for the video display setting items of the
utility.
If the resolution of a video window displayed on the GOT is higher than that of the video image, an indefinite
image is displayed in the window area where the video image is not displayed.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

POINT

REPORT FUNCTION

36
Specified
part
Video image

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

The specified part of video image is displayed in the actual size.

32.2 Actions

32 - 9

(1) Selecting a clip area

When setting a clip area, specify the upper left corner of the part of the video image to be displayed by its
coordinate values and specify the vertical size (Y: 64 to 768 dots) and the horizontal size (X: 64 to 576 dots).
Set the coordinate values of the upper left corner of the part of the
video image to be displayed in the clip mode.
Set the X display size.

Set the Y display size.

Video image

POINT
Operations of video windows 2 to 4 in clip mode
(1) When switched from full mode to clip mode
If the mode is switched from full mode to clip mode while any or all of video windows 2 to 4 are open, these
video windows are erased forcibly.
(2) When switched from clip mode to full mode
When the mode is switched back from clip mode to full mode, any or all of video windows 2 to 4 are displayed
according to the channel number, display position and display size specified at that timing.

Displaying still image

The video image displayed in full or clip mode can be switched to a still image.
When multiple video windows are displayed in full mode, the video images displayed on them are all switched to still
images.
(Motion Video/still image selection
bit: b5) Turn the selection bit ON to
switch a motion video to a still image.
D10

b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
OFF

ON

POINT
Precautions for using still images
(1) Operations that are invalid during still image display
The operations indicated below are disabled during still image display.
To enable these operations, switch the mode back to the motion video mode.
Changing the video window channel
Changing the display size
Changing the display position
Erasing the video window
Displaying the video window
(2) Video window on overlap window
Do not move an overlap window when the image in the video window arranged on the overlap window is
switched to a still image.
If the overlap window is moved, the still image is not displayed.
(3) Turning the GOT ON
When a still image is displayed (motion video/still image selection bit: ON), do not turn ON the power to the
GOT.
If the power to the GOT is turned ON while the bit is ON, the video window cannot be displayed.

32 - 10

32.2 Actions

(1) Displaying transparent processing

A FED
B CDE

Through color specification method selection bit: b3

Through color

Display

OFF(makes the specified color transparent)

0(black)

Figures or objects of colors other than black are visible on the

video window.

ON(makes colors other than the specified color

transparent)

0(black)

Figures or objects of black color are visible on the video window.

POINT
Arranging a video window on an overlap window
When a video window is arranged on overlap window 1, the transparent processing is automatically executed even
if the transparent processing selection bit (b2) is OFF.

HINT

(2) Display examples (with and without transparent processing)

Item

Transparent
processing is not
executed

Front display

A FED
B CDE

Transparent
processing is
executed

Transparent processing
target:
Base screen

A FED
B CDE

Back display

A FED
B CDE

Transparent processing
target:
Base screen
Overlap window

35

36

Display example
A FED
B CDE

34

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Touch switches and numerical/ASCII inputs behind the video window

By executing the transparent processing, objects such as touch switches and numerical/ASCII input functions
behind the video window are made visible.
(While the transparent processing is applied, the video window size does not change even if it is touched.)

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Example)

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

The figures/objects of the specified

color are made visible.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

b3 b2 b1 b0
OFF ON
OFF ON

A video window is displayed at the front of the base

screen.
For overlap and test windows, it is possible to select
whether a video window is arranged at the front or
back of an overlap or test window.

A video window is displayed at the back of the base

screen.
If the target of transparent processing is only the
base screen, the overlap window is not made
visible.
If both the base screen and an overlap window are
set as the target of transparent processing, both of
them are made visible.

32.2 Actions

32 - 11

REPORT FUNCTION

D10

A FED
B CDE

31

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

(Transparent processing selection

bit:b2). Turn the selection bit ON to
execute the transparent processing.
(Through color specification method
selection bit:b3)
Turn the selection bit ON to make
the specified color transparent.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

It is possible to display the objects or figures located behind the video window by specifying the through color.
There are two processing methods: [making colors other than the specified color transparent] and [making the
specified color transparent].
When multiple video windows are displayed, transparent processing is performed on all windows.

RFID FUNCTION

30

Transparent processing

 Application examples of video window

The following are examples of video window usage.

(1) Switching the channel by touch switch

The channel displayed on video window 1 is switched each time the touch switch is touched.

Channel1

Device

D100

Channel2

Setting

Channel3

Device

Setting

D106

1
2
3
4
(Channel No.)

D107

0 (size)

1Repeated

Channel4

Device

Setting

D108

32 (X position)

D109

32(Y position)

(2) Enlarging the screen as necessary

(a) In a normal state, small-size video windows are displayed at the bottom of the screen and they are
enlarged when necessary. (The size is changed by the sequence program or a touch switch.)

Device

D100

32 - 12

Setting

32.2 Actions

Device

Setting

Device

Setting

D106

1 (Channel No.)

D114

3 (Channel No.)

D107

2 (Size)

D115

D108

32 (X position)

D116

384

32 (X position)
0 (Y position)

0 (Size)

D109

480 (Y position)

D117

480

D110

2 (Channel No.)

D118

4 (Channel No.)

D111

2 (Size)

D119

2 (Size)

D112

208 (X position)

D120

560 (X position)

D113

480 (Y position)

D121

480 (Y position)

30
RFID FUNCTION

(b) In a normal state, small-size video windows are displayed at the bottom of the screen and they are
enlarged one by one when necessary. (The size is changed by a touch switch and script.)

D100

Device

Setting

Device

Setting

D106

1 (Channel No.)

D114

3 (Channel No.)

D107

D115

2 (Size)

2 (Size)

D108

32

32

32 (X position)

D116

384 (X position)

D109

480

480 (Y position)

D117

480 (Y position)

D110

2 (Channel No.)

D118

4 (Channel No.)

D111

D119

2 (Size)

D112

208

208

32 (X position)

D120

560 (X position)

D113

480

480

0 (Y position)

D121

480 (Y position)

0 (Size)

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Setting

33

Write a script that repeats the following operations each time a touch switch is touched.
(1) Window 1 Small

Large

(2) Window 1 Large

Small

Window 2 Small

Large

(3) Window 2 Large

Small

Window 3 Small

Large

In a normal state, a part of a video image is displayed at the bottom of the screen and it is switched to the
display of full size when necessary. (The video display mode is switched between full mode and clip mode
by the sequence program or a touch switch.)

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

(c)

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Device

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

35
Setting

Device

Setting

D101

70 (X position of the clipped

area)

D105

1 (Channel No.)

D102

50 (Y position of the clipped

area)

D106

0 (Size)

D103

256 (Width of the clipped area)

D107

32 (X position)

D104

256 (Height of the clipped area)

D108

400

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Full mode / Clip mode selection

D100.b0 ON
OFF

Device

36

32 (Y position)

REPORT FUNCTION

D100

Setting

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Device

32.2 Actions

32 - 13

(3) Changing the display target part of video image

A part of a video image is displayed at the bottom of the screen and the display position is switched when
necessary. (The X and Y coordinates of the area to be clipped are switched by the sequence program or a
touch switch.)

Device

D100

Setting

Clip mode selection

Device

Setting

Device

Setting

D101

70
90
80
(X position of the clipped area)

D105

1 (Channel No.)

D102

50
60
20
(Y position of the clipped area)

D106

0 (Size)

D103

256 (Width of the clipped area)

D107

112 (X position)

D104

256 (Height of the clipped area)

D108

112 (Y position)

32.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the video display function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Number of settings
Only one video display function setting is available for one project.

(2) Arranging object on video window

Objects cannot be arranged on a video window.

(3) Displaying video window, RGB screen, and multimedia screen

The simultaneous display of a video window, RGB screen, and multimedia screen is not available.

Precautions for OS
To use video display, be sure to install the extended function OS (Video/RGB) in the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

(1) GOTs that can be used
Video display can be used only on the GOT indicated below:
GT16, GT1585V-S, GT1575V-S

(2) System configuration for using a video camera

For the system configuration for using a video camera, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
For the operation-checked models, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A0010) separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial
automation products.
(MELFANSweb website:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)

32 - 14

32.3 Precautions

(a) If a video signal is not input to the specified channel due to cable disconnection or power-off of a video
camera, a video image is not displayed.
(b) A video image may be given in still image or disappear temporarily when the hard copy function is
executed or when a system message is displayed/cleared.
(c)

A video image may be disturbed or stopped depending on the setting for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] of the
utility (video display setting).
(In this case, the normal display will be restored by changing the settings to default values.)
Whether or not such a problem occurs depends on the used equipment such as a video camera.
Use values that allow normal video display.
For the operations of the utility, refer to the following manual.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

(1) Display of video image

RFID FUNCTION

30

Precautions for use

32

User's Manual for the GOT used

Set a video input signal according to an output format of the video camera to be connected as shown below.
If the setting is different, some video images may not be displayed correctly.
Output format of video camera

Video input signal setting

NTSC format

NTSC
PAL

EIA format

NTSC

CCIR format

PAL

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

PAL format

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(2) Output format of video camera and video input signal setting

When using multiple video cameras

When using multiple video cameras, refer to the above table. Select video cameras with output formats that
correspond to the input signal setting of the GOT.
Only one video input signal can be set for each project.
When the output format of the video camera does not correspond to the video input signal setting of the GOT,
some video images may not be displayed correctly.
GOT side

NTSC

EIA

35

NTSC

NTSC

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

NTSC

Video camera side

PAL

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Video camera side

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

GOT side

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

POINT

32.3 Precautions

32 - 15

32 - 16

32.3 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

33. MULTIMEDIA FUNCTION

This function enables to display or record video images taken by a video camera connected to a multimedia unit and play
video files stored in a CF card.
Recorded video images can be stored in the CF card with the multimedia unit.
Stored video files are sent from the GOT or multimedia unit to a personal computer via Ethernet.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

32

Ethernet

CF card

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Video files are sent

from the multimedia
unit to a personal
computer via Ethernet.*2

Video files are sent from

the GOT to a personal
computer via Ethernet.*1

Video camera

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Microphone

Speaker
GOT
The GOT displays video images.
The GOT can play video files in
the CF card.

For sending video files via Ethernet, insert a CF card in the GOT.
When video files are sent from the GOT to the personal computer, the files are temporarily stored in the CF card.
For sending video files together with advanced user alarm data to the personal computer, insert a CF card in the GOT.
The advanced user alarm data are stored in the CF card, and then the data are sent from the multimedia unit.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

*2

34

The GOT can store video

images in the CF card
with the multimedia unit.

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

*1

Multimedia unit

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Personal computer

33 - 1

POINT
(1) System configuration and communication settings
For the system configuration and communication settings for using the multimedia function, refer to the
following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
(2) CF card
Required number of CF cards varies depending on the usage.
To send no video files to the personal computer
One CF card is required for the multimedia unit.
To send only video files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer
One CF card is required for the multimedia unit.
To send only video files from the GOT to the personal computer
Two CF cards are required for the GOT and the multimedia unit.
To send video files together with advanced alarm log files of the advanced user alarm to the personal
computer
Two CF cards are required for the GOT and the multimedia unit.
(3) Multimedia interaction tool
To send video files from the GOT to the personal computer, the multimedia interaction tool must be installed
on the personal computer.
To send video files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer, the multimedia interaction tool and the
multimedia interaction FTP service must be installed on the personal computer.
33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 2

30

Select [Common]

[Peripheral Setting]

RFID FUNCTION

33.1 Settings
[Multimedia] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Recording Setting tab

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

When the recording mode is set to [Standard]

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

When the recording mode is set to [Extended]

Item
Destination
I/F
Enable the
setting of
Multimedia

Description

Model

Select the connection target interface.

Click the [Detail Setting] button to display the detail setting dialog box for the multimedia function.
(1) Detail setting

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

35

Select this item to enable the multimedia function setting.

Select the recording mode.

Standard:
Select this item to select the Standard mode.
In the Standard mode, the Recording size and the Frame rate can be set.
The maximum recording time is 900 seconds.
Extended:
Select this item to select the Extended mode.

REPORT FUNCTION

36
*1

Video setting

In the Extended mode, the Recording size and the Frame rate cannot be set.
The maximum recording time is 3,000 minutes.

Recordin
g Setting
Video Input
Signal

Displays the current format of the video input signal.

The video input signal can be set in the detail settings.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
(1) Detail setting

Recording Size

37

Select a resolution for recording.

Setting range
When the recording mode is set to[Standard]: 640

480/320 240

When the recording mode is set to[Extended]: 320

240

(Continued to next page)

33.1 Settings

33 - 3

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Recording
Mode

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Configure the setting regarding video image recording.

Item

Description

Model

Select a frame rate for recording.

This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Standard].

Frame Rate

The setting range differs depending on the video input signal and recording size.*1
Set the recording time.
Recording range
When the recording mode is set to [Standard]:
The setting range differs depending on the recording mode, the video input

Recording
Time

signal, and the frame rate.*1

When the recording mode is set to [Extended]: 15 to 3,000 minutes
Recordin
g Time

Video setting

Folder Name

Set the folder name for storing recorded video files.*2

This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Extended].

File Name

Set the file name when storing a recorded video image as a video file.*2
When the recording mode is set to [Standard]: MR_MMR (Default)
When the recording mode is set to [Extended]: SS (Default)

Save To File
Server

Select this item to send recorded video images to a personal computer.

After selecting this item, the [File Server Connection Setting] tab is displayed.
This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Standard].
Configure the setting for connecting the personal computer with the GOT or the
multimedia unit.

Recording
Loop

When the recording mode is set to [Extended], select this item to continue recording by
overwriting old files after the recording time.

Set the before-after event recording settings.

This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Standard].

BeforeAfter
Event
Recordin
g Setting

Enable

Select this item to enable the before-after event recording.

Event Trigger
Device

Set a trigger device to start recording before and after the event.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Recording
Time

Set a recording time of before and after the event.

Recording time of before the event :10 to 120 seconds (Default: 120 seconds)
Recording time of after the event :10 to 120 seconds (Default: 120 seconds)

File Name

Set a file name of the video file recorded before and after the event.*2

Save To File
Server

Select this item to send recorded video images to a personal computer.

After selecting this item, the [File Server Connection Setting] tab is displayed.
This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Standard].
Configure the setting for connecting the personal computer with the GOT or the
multimedia unit.

Save
Advanced User
Alarm Log File
to File Server

Select this item to record images and send alarm log files to a personal computer
simultaneously.
Set [Alarm ID] of the advanced user observation to be stored.
After selecting this item, the [File Server Connection Setting] tab is displayed.
This item can be set only when the recording mode is set to [Standard].
Configure the setting for connecting the personal computer with the GOT or the
multimedia unit.

For *1 to 2, refer to the following.

*1 Setting range of frame rate and available recording time

(1) When the recording mode is set to [Standard]

Recording size

VGA(640

480)

Video input signal

NTSC format

15

PAL format

12.5

NTSC format
QVGA(320

240)
PAL format

33 - 4

33.1 Settings

Frame rate (fps)

Available recording
time (Second)
10 to 240

15

10 to 900

30

10 to 450

12.5

10 to 900

25

10 to 450

30

240)

Frame rate (fps)

NTSC format

15

PAL format

12.5

Available recording
time (Second)
15 to 3000

31

*2 Setting of folder name and file name

(1) When the recording mode is set to [Standard]

A file name can be set up to 44 characters using one-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols
(#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}~).
For a video file recorded on the multimedia screen, the recording date and time are added to the end of the file
name when storing the file.
For the video file recorded on the before-after event recording, the event occurred date and time are added to
the end of the file name when storing the file.
Example: When "MMR" is set for [File Name] and recorded at 15:31:56 on May 25, 2008.

MMR_20080525_153156.3GP
Recording time (15:31:56)
Recording date (May 25, 2008)
(An underscore "_" is added automatically.)

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

QVGA(320

Video input signal

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Recording size

RFID FUNCTION

(2) When the recording mode is set to [Extended]

33

For a folder name and a file name, one-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}~)
are available.
The total number of characters for a folder name and a file name must be 56 or less.
When storing a file, a serial number that indicates the recording order is automatically added to the end of the
file name.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

CRT_REC\SS_001.3GP

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(2) When the recording mode is set to [Extended]

Number indicating the recording order

(1) Detail setting

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

Description
Select the video input signal (NTSC / PAL).

Video Resolution

Select the video resolution (640

IP Address

Set the IP address of the personal computer. (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)

Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask. (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)

Default Gateway

Set the default gateway. (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)

480 / 768

Model

37

576).

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Item
Video Input Signal

REPORT FUNCTION

36

33.1 Settings

33 - 5

 Playback/External Notification tab

Item

Description

Model

Set a device to store the recording data and recording time of the video file to be played.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting
Playb
ack
Settin
g

Playback File
Time
Specification
Device

For the playback file time specification device, the 16-bit unsigned BIN word device can be set.
Sets four points of devices starting from the head device specified by the user.
First device: Year,
Second device: Date,
Third device: Hour,
Fourth device: Minute/Second
The device value of the device is added to the file name when playing video files on the special function
switch.*1
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

Extern
al
Notific
ation

Recording/
Playback Status
Notification
Device

Set a device to notify the status during playing video files.

Settable device: 16-bit unsigned BIN word device*2

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

For *1 to 2, refer to the following.

*1 Device value of playback file time specification device

Only when [Add date to playback files] is selected in the special function switch setting, the device value is added to a
file name to be played.
Example: When "MMR" is set for [File Name] of video file to be played

MMR_20080525_153156.3GP
The device value of the playback file time
specification device is added.
(An underscore "_" is added automatically.)
For how to set the special function switch, refer to the following.
2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

33 - 6

33.1 Settings

Bit

Item

Description

Recording status

b1

Enabling or disabling recording before and after event

ON
OFF

: Enabling recording before and after the event

: Disabling recording before and after the event

b2

Recording before and after event status

ON
OFF

: Recording before the event

: Records after the event

b3

b4 to b6

Use prohibited
000
: Stopping playing
001
: Playing
010
: Pause
Other than above : Disabling

Playing video file status

31

32

Use prohibited

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

b7 to b15

: Recording
: Stopping recording

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

b0

ON
OFF

RFID FUNCTION

30

*2 Recording/playback status notification device

File Server Setting tab

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

35

Description

Model

Connect to the file server

with the use of Ethernet
in Multimedia Unit

Select this item to send video files to the file server via Ethernet by using the Ethernet interface built in the
multimedia unit.
When this item is selected, [Connect to the file server with the use of Ethernet in GOT] cannot be set.

Connect to the file server

with the use of Ethernet
in GOT

Select this item to send video files to the file server via Ethernet by using the Ethernet interface built in the
GOT.
When this item is selected, [Connect to the file server with the use of Ethernet in Multimedia Unit] cannot be
set.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Item

When connecting the GOT to Ethernet

36

(Continued to next page)

REPORT FUNCTION

When connecting the multimedia unit to Ethernet

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

33.1 Settings

33 - 7

Item

Description

Model

IP Address

Set the IP address of the personal computer. (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)

Port No.

Set the port number for the GOT or the multimedia unit.
(When connecting the multimedia unit to Ethernet: 0 to 1024)
(When connecting the GOT to Ethernet: 1024 to 5010, 5014 to 65534)

Timeout

Set the time for communication to time out. (3 to 120 seconds)

Retry

Set the number of retries when the communication times out.(0 to 10 times)
With no response after retries, the communication times out.

Retry Interval

Set the time for the next retry after retrying. (0 to 300 seconds)

FTP Login Name

Set the login name of the file server.

This item can be set only when [Connect to the file server with the use of Ethernet in
Multimedia Unit] is selected.

FTP Password

Set the password of the file server.

This item can be set only when [Connect to the file server with the use of Ethernet in
Multimedia Unit] is selected.

File Server Setting

33.2 Actions
Specifications
(1) Video display
The following table explains the specifications of displaying and recording video images.
(a) Display specifications
GOT

Video input signal

Display size on GOT

GT1695M-X,
GT1685M-S,
GT1675M-S

NTSC format

640

480 dots

PAL format

672

504 dots

GT1675M-V,
GT1665M-V

NTSC format
480

360 dots

PAL format

(b) Recording specifications

When the recording mode is set to [Standard]
Recording size of video
images
VGA
(640

480)

Video input signal

NTSC format

15

PAL format

12.5

NTSC format
QVGA
(320

Available frame rate

(fps)

240)
PAL format

Recording bit rate

1Mbps

15

384Kbps

30

768Kbps

12.5

384Kbps

25

768Kbps

When the recording mode is set to [Extended]

Recording size of video
images
QVGA(320

33 - 8

33.2 Actions

240)

Video input signal

Available frame rate

(fps)

NTSC format

15

PAL format

12.5

Recording bit rate

384Kbps

Storing place for video file

Recorded video files are stored in a CF card with the multimedia unit with the 3GPP file.
When selecting [Save To File Server] in the [Recording Setting] tab of the [Multimedia] dialog box, video
files can be stored in a CF card and sent to a personal computer via Ethernet simultaneously.
For how to send video files to the personal computer via Ethernet, refer to the following.
Interaction with personal computer

31

(2) Playing video file

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

The following explains the specifications of playing video files.

(a) Video files that can be played
The GOT can play video files using the following files.
3GPP file
MP4 file
(b) Profile for MP4 file
When playing a MP4 file, use the MP4 file created by MPEG-4 Simple Profile.
MP4 files created by the profile other than above cannot be played.

32

Video file editing software

When editing video files, use QuickTime 7 Pro.
Edited video files other than above software may not be played.
QuickTime 7 Pro is software for editing video files.
AThe software can be obtained from the website of APPLE Inc. for a fee.
The software is the copyright of APPLE Inc.
A sound cannot be played even when video files include the sound.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(c)

30
RFID FUNCTION

(c)

33

By connecting a video camera, a microphone, and a speaker to the multimedia unit, the GOT can display a video
image with sound on the multimedia screen.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Displaying video image

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

The GOT displays

video images.

Video camera
Microphone

35

CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Speaker

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Multimedia unit

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

GOT

33.2 Actions

33 - 9

 Recording video image

By connecting a video camera and a microphone to the multimedia unit, the GOT can record a video image with
sound.
The following shows the recording methods.

(1) Recording currently displayed video image

The GOT records a video image currently displayed on the multimedia screen by the user operation.

1
2

The GOT displays

video images.

Touching the record

button
Video camera
Microphone
CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

GOT

Multimedia unit

Speaker

Storing the video image

in the CF card with the
multimedia unit

(2) Recording before and after event

The total time for recording a video image is at most before and after 120 seconds when an event trigger device
turns on.
When the setting for recording before and after event are enabled, the multimedia unit always stores video
images before 120 seconds.
When the event trigger device turns on, a video image recorded before and after the device turns on is stored in
the CF card.
Example) Storing video images before and after 60 seconds when an event trigger device turns on
Event trigger device
ON
Always storing video
images before 120
seconds

Storing video images in the CF card

before and after 60 seconds

Video camera
CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

Multimedia unit
GOT

33 - 10

33.2 Actions

Microphone

Example) Storing a video image before and after an alarm specified by the user

M1002: ON is detected.
An alarm occurs!

Storing a video image

before and after the
alarm occurs

Event trigger device

turns on by the status
observation function.
GB500: OFF ON

GOT settings:
Setting M1002 for the trigger device of
the advanced user alarm
Setting GB500 for the event trigger
device
Setting GB500 to turn on when M1002
turns on with using the status
observation function

Video camera
Micro
phone

An error occurs!
CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

Multimedia unit

An error occurs!

PLC setting:
Setting M1002 to turn on when an error
occurs

PLC
Detecting the error
M1002: OFF ON

34

(3) Long time recording

By setting the long time recording, the GOT can record video images for 400 video files (approximately 3,000
minutes).
One load of long time recording can be saved in the specified folder.
When recording starts, all the video files in the same folder, which are recorded last time, are deleted and start
recording.
When the recording loop mode is set, recorded video files are overwritten in the order starting from the oldest
file, so that the GOT can continue recording after 400 files (approximately 3,000 minutes).
In the recording loop mode, the GOT continues recording until the user stops recording.

399

400

401

Feb.3
10:00

Feb.3
10:07

Feb.3
10:15

Feb.5
11:45

Feb.5
11:52

Feb.5
12:00

3,000
minutes

0 minutes
Old

36
REPORT FUNCTION

3,000 minutes
or more
New

Video camera

37

Multimedia unit

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Microphone

GOT

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

The video files are overwritten in order,

starting from the oldest file.

Video files

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

GOT

32

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Using advanced user alarm together

When using the advanced user alarm together, a video image can be recorded before and after an alarm occurs.
When detecting an advanced user alarm, the event trigger device is set to turn on with the status observation
function and the script function.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

HINT

RFID FUNCTION

30

Speaker

33.2 Actions

33 - 11

HINT
Recording time and data size per file
With the long time recording, the GOT can record a video image for approximately 7 minutes and 30 seconds per
video file (approximately 20MB).
The GOT records a video image for a minimum of 7 minutes and 30 seconds.
Even if a video image is recorded for more than the minimum recording time, the data size does not differ
significantly from the data size of a seven-and-half-minute video image.

(4) Playing video file

The GOT can play video files stored in the CF card with the multimedia unit on the multimedia screen.
Sound of video files are output from the speaker that is connected to the multimedia unit.
Playing video files stored in the
CF card on the multimedia screen

CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

Multimedia unit

Speaker

GOT

HINT
Playing video files on monitor screen
When setting a file name in the special function switch, video files can be played directly on the monitor screen with
the touch switch.
Touch the special function
switch that is set for the video
file to be played!

Playing the video file that is set

for the special function switch

Error detail

Play
Multimedia unit
GOT

(5) Hard copy

The GOT can print the screen image including currently displayed video image. Also, the GOT can store the
screen image in the CF card with the BMP or JPEG file.

1
Storing the whole image of
the screen in the CF card

Touching the hard

copy start button

CF card

Video camera

Printing the whole image

of the screen by the printer

33 - 12

33.2 Actions

GOT

Multimedia unit

(a) Sending video files

The GOT or multimedia unit can send video files to the personal computer via Ethernet.
For a video file that is recorded before and after the event, an alarm log file for the advanced user alarm
can be sent together with the video file.
Sending files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer
Connect the multimedia unit to Ethernet and send video files to the personal computer.
To send alarm log files to the personal computer, install a CF card in the GOT.
Ethernet

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

By using the multimedia interaction tool, the personal computer can receive video files or alarm log files sent
from the GOT or multimedia unit.
Received video files and alarm log files can be displayed as a list or searched on the same screen.

RFID FUNCTION

30

(6) Interaction with personal computer

32
1
2

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Sending video files to the

personal computer via
Ethernet
Video camera
Microphone

33

Storing video images

in the CF card
CAUTION

Personal computer

GOT

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Do not mount not desmount

a module while the power is
supplied.

Multimedia unit

Sending files from GOT to the personal computer

Connect the GOT to Ethernet, and send video files to the personal computer.
To send the files from the GOT to the personal computer, insert a CF card in the GOT.
When sending video files, the files are temporarily stored in the CF card.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

Ethernet

Sending video files to the

personal computer via
Ethernet

Storing video files

temporarily in the CF
card with the GOT

35

CF card

Microphone

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Video camera

Storing video images

in the CF card

36

Multimedia unit

REPORT FUNCTION

GOT

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Personal computer

33.2 Actions

33 - 13

(b) Displaying video file list or searching for video file

Received video files and alarm log files can be displayed as a list or searched for on the same screen.

Video file

Alarm log file

Occurred
Comment
08/05/01 An error occurs!
08/05/02 An error occurs!
08/05/05 An error occurs!

Restored
08/05/01
08/05/03
08/05/08

MMR_20080501_163025.3GP
MMR_20080502_155132.3GP
MMR_20080505_155132.3GP

Personal computer

Multimedia screen
The multimedia screen enables to use the multimedia function on the GOT.
The following operations are available for the multimedia screen.
Displaying or recording video images taken by a video camera connected to a multimedia unit
Playing video files
Displaying or deleting video file lists
For how to operate the multimedia screen, refer to the following.
GT16 Users Manual

(1) How to start multimedia screen

The multimedia screen is started from the special function switch.
For settings of the special function switch, refer to the following.
2.6 Setting Special Function Switch

Hard copy
Before printing the hard copy for the multimedia screen, set the following.

(1) Installing extended function OS

For printing the multimedia screen, install the extended function OS (Printer) in the GOT.

(2) Settings for output target of hard copy

The output target of the hard copy (CF card or printer) can be set in the hard copy setting. (select [Common]
[Hard Copy] from the menu).
For how to set, refer to the following.
37. HARD COPY FUNCTION

33 - 14

33.2 Actions

30

Interaction with personal computer

RFID FUNCTION

Set up the following before connecting the GOT to the personal computer.

(1) On personal computer

(a) Installing and setting up software
Install the multimedia interaction tool on the personal computer.
To connect the multimedia unit to Ethernet, also install the multimedia interaction FTP service.
After the installation, set up the multimedia interaction tool.
After the installation, set up the multimedia interaction tool.
For how to install and set up the multimedia interaction tool, refer to the following.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

(b) Connecting personal computer to Ethernet
Connect the personal computer to Ethernet.
For the connection method, refer to the following.

32

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(2) On GT Designer3
(a) Setting up multimedia function
The setting is available in the [Multimedia] dialog box.
To send recorded video files to the personal computer, select the following items.
Select [Enable the setting of Multimedia]
In the recording setting of the [Recording Setting] tab
Select [Save To File Server]
In the before-after event recording setting of the [Recording Setting] tab
Select [Enable]

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

(b) Communication settings

Configure the communication settings for connecting the GOT or multimedia unit to the personal computer.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
33.1 Settings
(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting
Setting advanced user alarm
Set the following before sending alarm log files of the advanced user alarm for recording before and after
the event.
Set the same [Alarm ID] in the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box as [Alarm ID] set in the
[Multimedia] dialog box.
Select [Convert alarm logs into Unicode Text/CSV (project common)] in the [Advanced Alarm Common
Setting] dialog box.
Select [Save alarm log files] in the [File Save] tab of the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
To interact with the personal computer, select a Unicode text for [File Convert] in the [File Save] tab of
the [Advanced User Alarm Observation] dialog box.
For how to set the advanced user alarm, refer to the following.

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

(c)

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

33.1 Settings

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

For the setting method, refer to the following.

10.3 Advanced User Alarm Display

(d) Enabling FTP server function
To connect the GOT to Ethernet, enable the FTP server function of the GOT.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

33.2 Actions

33 - 15

(3) On GOT
(a) Inserting CF card
Insert a CF card in the GOT in the following cases.
To send video files from the GOT to the personal computer
When sending video files, the "G1MMR" folder is created in the root folder of the CF card in the GOT,
and the video files are temporarily stored in the "G1MMR" folder.
When no CF card is inserted in the GOT, video files are not temporarily stored. Therefore, the video files
cannot be sent to the personal computer.
To send video files together with advanced user alarm data from the multimedia unit to the personal
computer
The advanced user alarm data are stored in the CF card in the GOT.
When no CF card is inserted in the GOT, advanced user alarm data cannot be sent to the personal
computer.
(b) Connecting to Ethernet
To send video files from the GOT to the personal computer, connect the GOT to Ethernet.
To send video files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer, connect the multimedia unit to
Ethernet.
For how to connect, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Example of setting for recording before and after event

Using the function for recording before and after the event with the advanced user alarm enables to record a video
image before and after the event. The video image can be played when an alarm occurs by using the advanced user
alarm display.
The following shows the example of the setting items and using method for playing the recorded video file when an
alarm occurs.

1.

2.

Displaying advanced user

alarm

3.

Displaying window
screen

Occurred Comment Restore

4.

Playing the video file

when the alarm occurs

Error detail

Play

Multimedia
unit

An error occurs!
Touch the occurred alarm.

Touch the touch switch.

(1) Setting items

The following shows each setting item.
Item

Multimedia

Advanced user alarm observation

Advanced user alarm display

Description
Before-after event
recording

Enabling

File name

ER_MMR

Event trigger device

X1000

playback file time

specification device

GD501 to GD504

alarm ID

Trigger device

X1000

Alarm ID

External Output Device

Alarm ID
: GD500
Occurred date : GD501 to GD502
Occurred time : GD503 to GD504

Reference

33.1 Settings

10.3.2 Setting advanced

user alarm observation

10.3.3 Setting advanced

user alarm display

(Continue to next page)

33 - 16

33.2 Actions

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen

Switching Device Setting

Window Screen

Screen Number

Screen Type

Window screen

2.6 Setting Special Function

Switch

HINT
For settings
(1) Settings for trigger device
For recording before and after the event when an alarm occurs, set the same device for the following items.
(X1000)
[Event Trigger Device] for the [Multimedia] dialog box.
The trigger device for the advanced user alarm
(2) Adding occurred date and time
For adding the alarm occurred data and time to the video file name in the special function switch, set the same
device for the following items.
(GD501 to GD504)
[Playback File Time Specification Device] for the [Multimedia] dialog box
[Occurred Date] and [Occurred Time] for the external output device
(3) Settings for screen switching device
For displaying the same number of [Alarm ID] for the occurred alarm as that of window screen when touching
the advanced user alarm display, set the same device for the following items (GD500).
Screen switching device
[Alarm ID] for the external output device

(2) Actions
When a PLC detects an error, X1000 turns on.
The GOT detects that the trigger device for the advanced user alarm and the event trigger device turns on.
(When an alarm occurs, a video image is stored for recording before and after the event.)

May 25, 2008 15:31:56

An alarm occurs!

Event trigger device (X1000) :ON

33

34

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Trigger device (X1000) :ON

32

Storing the video image for recording before

and after the event
File name: ER_MMR_20080525_153156.3GP

REPORT FUNCTION

36
Occurred Comment Restore

Video camera
An error occurs!
Multimedia unit

37

GOT

PLC

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

1.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Set the special function switch.

Settings for the special function switch
Switch action
: Multimedia
Initial display screen
: Video Playback
File name
: ER_MMR
Add date to playback files : Checked

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GD500

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

screen switching device

(overlap window 1)

30

Reference

RFID FUNCTION

Description

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Item

Detecting the error

turns on X1000.

33.2 Actions

33 - 17

2.

When an alarm occurs, the advanced user alarm appears.

When touching the data of the occurred alarm, the following data are written in the external output device.
Alarm ID
Occurred date
Occurred time

External output device

(Alarm ID, occurred date, occurred time):
GD500 005
GD501 0525 (Date)
GD502 2008 (Year)
GD503 3156 (Minute, second)
GD504 0015 (Hour)

3.

Occurred Comment Restore

The data of the alarm ID is written in the screen switching device, and then the window screen is called.
Touch the special function switch arranged on the window screen.
Touching the special function switch plays the set video file.
The data of the playback file time specification device (alarm occurred date and time) are added to the file
name of the video file to be played.
Playing the video file set in the special
function switch
File name:
ER_MMR_20080525_153156.3GP
Data of the playback file time specification
device
(Alarm occurred date and time)

4.

Error detail
CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

Play

Multimedia unit

The video file for the occurred alarm is played on the multimedia screen.

CAUTION
Do not mount not desmount
a module while the power is
supplied.

Multimedia unit

33 - 18

33.2 Actions

 How to obtain software

Obtain the software with either of the following methods.
The software is stored in the GT Works3 CD-ROM.
Download the software from the the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE (MELFANSweb) website.
(MELFANSweb website: http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/melfansweb/english/index.html)

Operating environment
The following shows the operating environment.
Item

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

The multimedia interaction tool on the personal computer receives or controls video files and alarm log files sent from the
GOT or the multimedia unit via Ethernet.

RFID FUNCTION

30

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

32

Description
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System SP4 (English version)*1

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System SP3 (English version) *2 *4 *5

Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System SP3 (English version)*2 *4 *5
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System SP1 (English version) *3 *4 *5
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System SP1 (English version)*3 *4 *5
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System SP1 (English version) *3 *4 *5

33

Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System SP1 (English version)*3*4*5
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System SP1 (English version) *3 *4 *5
Computer

Compatible with the operating environment for the above OS.

Hard disk space

For installation : 1MB or more (Excluding setting data, alarm log files, and video files)
For execution : 500MB or more (For QVGA size, 15fps, and receiving 10 video files of 900 seconds with the
data size around 42.2MB)*6

Disk Drive

CD-ROM drive

Display color

True Color or more

Display

Resolution of 800

Network connection

Ethernet 100Base-TX

Video file format

3GPP file

Others

The mouse, keyboard, printer, and CD-ROM driver must be compatible with the above OS.
Internet Explorer Ver5.0 or more must be installed.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

600 dots or more

QuickTimePlayer7 must be installed.*7

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

*5
*6
*7

36
REPORT FUNCTION

*4

35

Administrator authority is required for installing the multimedia interaction tool.

Administrator authority is required for installing and using the multimedia interaction tool.
Administrator authority is required for installing the multimedia interaction tool.
A standard user or Administrator account is required for using the multimedia interaction tool.
The following functions are not supported.
[Compatibility mode]
[Fast user switching]
[Change your desktop themes (fonts)]
[Remote desktop]
Only the 32-bit OS is available.
The required hard disk space differs depending on the data volume of alarm log files and video files.
The required version differs depending on the OS.
For Windows 2000: QuickTime 7.1.6 (final version)
For Windows XP SP3/Vista: QuickTime 7.4.5 or later

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

*1
*2
*3

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

OS

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 19

 How to install
(1) Installation procedures
Software to be installed varies depending on how to connect the GOT to Ethernet.
(a) To connect the GOT by using the Ethernet interface of the GOT
Install the multimedia interaction tool.
(b) To connect the GOT by using the Ethernet interface of the multimedia unit
Install the multimedia interaction tool and the multimedia interaction FTP service.
(c)

When one system has a GOT connected by using the Ethernet interface of the GOT and a GOT connected
by using the Ethernet interface of the multimedia unit
Install the multimedia interaction tool and the multimedia interaction FTP service.

(2) Firewall setting

After the installation, configure the Windows firewall setting to allow communications with the following
software.
Failure to do so cannot send video files to the personal computer.
(a) To send video files from the GOT to the personal computer
Set "GTMMDataConnector.exe" to [Exceptions].
(b) To send video files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer
Set "GTMMFtpService.exe" to [Exceptions].
(c)

1.

To send video files from the GOT and the multimedia unit to the personal computer when multiple GOTs
are connected to Ethernet.
Set "GTMMDataConnector.exe" and "GTMMFtpService.exe" to [Exceptions].
Display the Windows Firewall dialog box by the following operations.
MicrosoftWindowsXP:
Select [Control Panel]

[Security Center]

[Windows Firewall] from the menu.

MicrosoftWindows Vista :
Select [Control Panel]

[Security]

[Windows Firewall] from the menu.

The following shows an setting example by using the MicrosoftWindowsXP screens.

Select the [Exceptions] tab in the [Windows Firewall] dialog box.

2.

33 - 20

Click the [Add Program] button.

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

30

Select the software from the program list.

If "GTMMDataConnector.exe" or "GTMMFtpService.exe" is not displayed in the program list,
directly specify the path by clicking the [Browse] button.
After selecting, click the [OK] button.

RFID FUNCTION

3.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

Select

The screen returns to the Windows Firewall dialog box.

Confirm that "GTMMDataConnector.exe" or "GTMMFtpService.exe" is selected in the list of [Programs and
Services], and then click the [OK] button.

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

4.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34
Check that the
item is marked.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

How to start
The following shows how to start the multimedia interaction tool.
Select [Start]

2.

The multimedia interaction tool starts.

[All Programs]

[MELSOFT Application]

[GT MMDataConnector].

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

1.

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 21

 Screen configurations
The screens of the multimedia interaction tool are configured as shown below.

(1) Main window

The main window displays the menu for executing each function of the tool and the GOT alarm list for selecting
or displaying.
The main window appears when starting the multimedia interaction tool.

(2) GOT alarm list window

The GOT alarm list window displays the alarm data and video files sent from the GOT as a list.
Video files can be selected in the GOT alarm list and played.

The GOT alarm list window appears when double-clicking the GOT alarm list in the left side of the main window.

33 - 22

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

30

Settings

2.

Start the multimedia interaction tool, and then select [File]

[Create new project].

The following dialog box appears.

Input a project name in [Project name] and the folder path in [Path name] to store the project.
After inputting, click the [OK] button to create a new project file.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

1.

RFID FUNCTION

Before receiving the alarm data or video files from the GOT, set the following.
For settings, refer to the following procedures.

32
Select [Project]
[Create new GOT alarm list].
The following dialog box appears.
Input the name of the GOT alarm list in [Alarm list name] and the stored folder in [Folder].
After inputting, click the [OK] button to create the GOT alarm list.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

3.

Select [Edit]
[Environment setting].
Clicking the button displays the following dialog box.
Input the setting items, and then click the [Close] button.
Check the following information before setting.
GOT IP address
FTP user name
FTP password
GOT communication port No.
For how to check the FTP user name and the FTP password, refer to the following.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual

REPORT FUNCTION

36

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

4.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 23

Item

Description

Project

Click this item when setting the display conditions for the project.
Displays the GOT alarm list as the tree structure.

GOT Alarm

When clicking the GOT alarm list in the tree structure, the settings for connecting to each GOT are available.*1

Project name

Displays the project file name for the environment setup.

GOT communication port

No.

Set the GOT communication port number.

Use occurred date as

second sort key

When sorting data of the GOT alarm list other than the occurred date, select the ascending or descending order for the
second sort key (occurred date).*2

Alarm display range

(occurred date)

Set the alarm display range (occurred date) to be displayed on the GOT alarm list.

Alarm display contents

Select the items to be displayed on the GOT alarm list.

For *1, refer to the following.

*2 When sorting the data of the GOT alarm list other than the occurred date, the second sort key is set to the occurred date.

*1 Settings for connecting to each GOT

Item
GOT alarm list name

Description
Displays the set GOT alarm list name.
Select this item to set the connection with the GOT.

Ethernet (GOT main unit)

connection

Ethernet (multimedia unit)

GOT IP address

Set the GOT IP address.

FTP user name

Set the FTP user name.

FTP password

Set the FTP password.

GOT communication
timeout (unit:Second)

Set time required for the communication time out to the GOT.

FTP timeout (unit:Second)

Set time required for the communication time out with the FTP server function.

Select this item to set the connection with the multimedia unit.
MMR IP address

Set the IP address of the multimedia unit.

(Continued to next page)

33 - 24

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

Item

30

Description

RFID FUNCTION

Click this button to check the FTP server setting of the multimedia interaction FTP service.
Clicking the button displays the following dialog box.

FTP server settings

(common)

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

To change the FTP account, click the [Change FTP Account] button.
Clicking the button displays the [Change FTP Account] dialog box.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

33

Input a new FTP user name for [FTP user name] and a password for [Enter FTP password].
Input the same password as [Enter FTP password] for[Confirm FTP password].
Clicking the OK button changes the FTP account.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

How to operate
(1) Operating project file
(a) Creating new project file

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

When creating a new project file, select [File]

[Create new project].
The following dialog box appears.
Input a project name in [Project name] and the folder path in [Path name] to store the project.
After inputting, click the [OK] button to create a new project file.

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(b) Opening project file

[Open project].
When opening a project file, select [File]
The following dialog box appears.
Select the project to be opened.
And then, click the [Open] button to open the project file.

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 25

(c)

Storing project file

[Save project].
To store the project file, select [File]
After selecting, the project file is overwritten.

(2) Operating GOT alarm list

The alarm data that are sent from each GOT are displayed in the GOT alarm list.
The GOT alarm list is created for each GOT to be connected to a personal computer.
(a) Creating new GOT alarm list
[Create new GOT alarm list].
Select [Project]
The following dialog box appears.
Input the name of the GOT alarm list in [Alarm list name] and the folder to store the alarm list in [Folder].
After inputting, click the [OK] button to create the GOT alarm list.

(b) Non-display GOT alarm list

Select the GOT alarm list to be hidden from the GOT alarm tree, and then select [Project]
GOT alarm list].
The following dialog box appears.
To hide the GOT alarm list from the GOT alarm tree, click the [Yes] button.

(c)

[Non-display

Re-display GOT alarm list

Select [Project]
[Re-display GOT alarm list].
The following dialog box appears.
Input the name of the GOT alarm list that is hidden from [Alarm list name].
After inputting, click the [OK] button to re-display the GOT alarm list in the GOT alarm tree.

(3) Receiving alarm data or video file

The multimedia interaction tool can receive alarm data or video files of multiple GOTs connected to Ethernet.
Received alarm data or video files are stored in a personal computer automatically.
The storage data can be checked in the GOT alarm list.

33 - 26

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

30
RFID FUNCTION

POINT
Folder structure of project file
The following shows the folder structure of the project file for the multimedia interaction tool.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

A folder for storing a project file

A folder name is set by the user when creating a new project file.

(Folder for project file)

A folder for storing the GOT alarm list

The folder for the GOT alarm list is created for each GOT.

AlarmList

Folder for GOT alarm list

Movies

A folder for storing received alarm data automatically

The folder name is set by the user.

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

A folder for storing received video files automatically

Folder for GOT alarm list

33

(4) Playing video file

1.

Select a video file to be played in the GOT alarm list.

2.

Select [Display]

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

The following shows the procedure for playing a video file in the GOT alarm list.

[Play video].

Quick Time Player starts.

Clicking the
button plays the video file.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

REPORT FUNCTION

36

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

3.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 27

(5) Searching for alarm data

The GOT alarm data is searched for using the GOT alarm list.
[Search]. The following dialog box appears.
Display the GOT alarm list, and then select [Edit]
Input searching conditions, and then click the [Search] button. All displayed items become searching targets.
To search for the next alarm data, select [Edit]

[Search next].

(6) Editing memo

The memo for the alarm data can be edited.
[Edit memo].
Select the alarm data to be edited in the GOT alarm list, and then select [Edit]
The following dialog box appears.
Input a text to [Memo], and then click the [OK] button. The input text is displayed in the GOT alarm list.

(7) Exporting GOT alarm list

The GOT alarm list can be exported in a CSV file.
The following shows the procedures for exporting.

33 - 28

1.

Select the GOT alarm list in the GOT alarm tree to be exported.

2.

Select [File]

3.

The following dialog box appears.

4.

Select a storage area, and then click the [Save] button. The GOT alarm list is exported.

[Export].

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

 Check that network cables are connected correctly.

Check that the network setting is set correctly.

Failed to open project file "*****".

Either of the project file (*.Mpj), video file

definition file (*.Mmd), or alarm data file (*.Mai)
is prohibited to write or deleted.

Check that a folder or file for the target project is

enabled to write.
Check that a folder or file for the target project are
not deleted.

Failed to create project file "*****".

A new project is not created in the folder

specified by the user for the following causes.
The hard disk space is insufficient.
Writing the data in the folder specified by the
user is prohibited.

Check that the hard disk space for the personal

computer is sufficient.
Check that the folder specified by the user is not
prohibited to write.

Failed to save project file.

The project cannot be stored by the following

causes.
The hard disk space is insufficient.
Writing the data in the folder specified by the
user is prohibited.

Check that the hard disk space for the personal

computer is sufficient.
Check that the existing folder or file is not
prohibited to write.

Failed to create GOT alarm list "*****".

A new GOT alarm list cannot be created by the

following causes.
The hard disk space is insufficient.
Writing the data in the folder specified by the
user is prohibited.

Check that the hard disk space of the personal

computer is sufficient.
Check that the existing folder or file is not
prohibited to write.

Failed to re-display GOT alarm list

"*****".

The GOT alarm list cannot be created by the

error of the alarm data file (*.Mai).

Check that the hard disk space of the personal

computer is sufficient.
Check that the existing folder or file is not
prohibited to write.

Failed to upload video file "*****" in

GOT alarm list "*****".

For recording before and after the event, the

video file cannot be uploaded because the
advanced user alarm log file is not formatted.

Use a Unicode text file to output the advanced user

alarm log file.

Project "*****" already exists.

When creating a new project, the project name

that already exists is input.

Input another project name.

GOT alarm list "*****" already exists.

When creating a new GOT alarm list, the GOT

alarm list name that already exists is input.

Input another name.

GOT alarm list "*****" is already

displayed.

The displayed GOT alarm list is input for [Redisplay GOT alarm list].

Select a GOT alarm list that is not displayed.

Invalid path.
Please enter again.

When creating a new project, the invalid

path is specified for the project.

Input a valid path.

Invalid project name.

Please enter again.

When creating a new project, the invalid path is

specified for the project.

Input a project name.

Invalid FTP user name.

Please enter user name.

When changing the FTP account in the

environment setting, nothing or 13 or more
characters are input for the FTP user name.

Set the FTP user name with 1 to 12 characters.

Invalid FTP user password.

Please enter password again.

When changing the FTP account in the

environment setting, nothing or nine or more
characters are input for the FTP password.

Set the FTP password with 1 to 8 characters.

Password entry does not match

confirmation entry.
Please enter password again.

When changing the FTP account in the

environment setting, different passwords are
input for [Enter FTP password] and [Confirm
FTP password].

Input the same pass words for [Enter FTP

password] and [Confirm FTP password].

Cannot connect to GTMMFtpService.

Ethernet (multimedia unit) connection
settings are disabled.

The multimedia interaction FTP service is not

installed.

Uninstall or disable the other FTP server software,

and then install the multimedia interaction FTP
service.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Failed to initialize the communication

processing.

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Failed to initialize Windows socket.

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Corrective action

34

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Cause

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Error message

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

The following shows the error messages of the multimedia interaction tool.

RFID FUNCTION

30

Error messages

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 29

33.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the multimedia function.

Precautions for drawing

The simultaneous display of a multimedia screen, video window, and RBG screen is not available.

Precautions for OS
To use the multimedia function, install the extended function OS (Multimedia) on the GOT.
To send video files from the GOT to the personal computer, also install the option OS (Gateway (FTP)).
To send video files from the multimedia unit to the personal computer, the option OS (Gateway (FTP)) is not required.

Precautions for hardware

(1) Applicable GOT
The following GOT is applicable to the multimedia function.
GT16

(2) CF card for GOT

For interacting with a personal computer, ensure the sufficient free space in a CF card with the GOT.
For sending video files, the files are temporarily stored in the CF card with the GOT.
When the sufficient free space is not ensured, video files cannot be sent to the personal computer.

(3) CF card for multimedia unit

(a) Format type
The FAT32 format is recommended to a CF card with the multimedia unit.
When the FAT16 formatted CF card is inserted, the following may occur.
Requiring time to read, write, or store the video file.
When playing a video file, the video seems to stop temporarily.
(b) Operation during accessing CF card
When turning on the CF card access switch, the multimedia unit checks the status of the CF card.
During checking, the multimedia screen may not be operated correctly.
For operating the multimedia screen, operate after the CF card access LED turns off.
(c)

Storage video files

The number of video files to be stored in the CF card is up to 512.
In the following cases, some video files may not be displayed even if the number of video files is up to 512.
In the following cases, some video files may not be displayed even if the number of video files is up to 512.
When a video file that has a long file name exists
When a video file that uses 2-byte characters for a file name exists
When the data other than a video file exists in the CF card

(d) Inapplicable characters

Do not use 2-byte characters for a path or a file name.
Failure to do so may operate the multimedia unit incorrectly.

33 - 30

33.4 Precautions

(5) Ethernet interface of multimedia unit

The Ethernet interface of the multimedia unit is used for communication with the multimedia interaction tool only.
To connect the GOT to Ethernet, use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT.

(6) System configuration for using the multimedia function

For the system configuration for using the multimedia function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
For the operation-checked models, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A0010) separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial
automation products.
(MELFANSweb website:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)

Precautions for playing video file and editing software

(1) Required software

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

GT16 Users Manual

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Before using the multimedia function, check that the unit software version of the multimedia unit is 02.00.** or
later.
The multimedia function is supported when the unit software version of the multimedia unit is 02.00.** or later.
For how to check and update the unit software version, refer to the following.

RFID FUNCTION

30

(4) Unit software version of multimedia unit

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

To use the multimedia interaction tool, install Quick Time Player or QuickTime 7 Pro.
The software is the copyright of APPLE Inc.
Use the software under the license agreement that appears when installing.
Quick Time Player is the software to play video files.
The software can be obtained from APPLE Inc. free of charge.
QuickTime 7 Pro is the software to edit video files.
The software can be obtained from the website of APPLE Inc. for a fee.
The multimedia interaction tool does not have the editing function for video files.
To edit video files, use Quick Time 7 Pro.
Video files edited by other than the above software may not be played.

(3) Playing software for video file

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

To play video files of 3GPP file or MP4 file on a personal computer, set with Quick Time Player.
When playing a video file, the multimedia interaction tool starts the playing software for the file set on the
personal computer.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

(2) Editing video file

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

33.4 Precautions

33 - 31

 Precautions for use

(1) Display of video image
(a) If a video signal is not input to the specified channel due to cable disconnection or power-OFF of the
camera, a video image is not displayed.
(b) A video image may be given in still image or disappear temporarily when the hard copy function is
executed or when a system message is displayed/cleared.
(c)

A video image may be disturbed or stopped depending on the setting for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] of the
utility (video display setting).
(In this case, the normal display will be restored by changing the settings to default values.)
Whether or not such a problem occurs depends on the used equipment such as a video camera.
Use values that allow normal video display.
For the operations of the utility, refer to the following manual.
GT16 Users Manual

(2) Settings for video input signal

Set the input signal accoding to the output format etc. of the video camera to be connected as shown below.
If the setting is different, the video image may not be displayed correctly.
Output format of video camera etc
NTSC format

Input signal setting

NTSC

PAL format

PAL

EIA format

NTSC

CCIR format

PAL

(3) Playing video file during recording

Video files cannot be played during recording video images.
After recording, play video files.

(4) Playing sound included in video file

Only images can be played for video files.
A sound cannot be played even when video files include the sound.

(5) Installing multimedia interaction FTP service

To connect the multimedia unit to the personal computer, install the multimedia interaction FTP service on the
personal computer in addition to the multimedia interaction tool.
For how to install the multimedia interaction FTP service, refer to the following.
33.3 Multimedia Interaction Tool

33 - 32

33.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

34. OPERATION PANEL FUNCTION/

EXTERNAL I/O FUNCTION

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

This function enables input operations with an operation panel (including touch inputs, numerical inputs, and screen
switching) with using the external I/O unit.
To use the operation panel function, settings are required on GT Designer3.
For the operation panel function settings, refer to the following.
34.1 Settings

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Operation panel function

33

External I/O unit

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

X0

X0 = ON
Press the key that enables
X0 to be turned on.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

External I/O function

This function enables external inputs and external outputs (lamps and relays) by the external I/O unit.
When using the external I/O function, no settings are required on GT Designer3.

35

External input:
Up to 128 points

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

External I/O unit

External output:
Up to 15 points

Lamp, relay

POINT
System configurations with external I/O function
For the system equipment and cable wiring methods required for the external I/O function, refer to the following
manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

34 - 1

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Push button, operation panel, and others

REPORT FUNCTION

36

34.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Peripheral Setting]

[Operation Panel] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Set actions and key codes for operation panel keys.

Item
Destination I/
F

Description

Model

Select the connection target interface.

Use Operation
Panel

Select this item to enable the operation panel function.

Select the panel key settings according to key arrangements of the KANADEN operation panel or
A8GT-TK numeric keypad panel.
: Sets the panel key settings according to the key arrangement of
KANADEN operation panel.

Initialize*1

: Sets the panel key settings according to the key arrangement of

the A8GT-TK numeric keypad panel.
: Clears the settings.
Select the display type.
: The key codes assigned to keys are displayed.
Example:

Dieplay Type

0042

: [*] is displayed on the keys that actions are set.

Operation
Panel Setting

Example:
Set actions and key codes for an input signal when the input signal turns on.
Click a button for an input signal, and then the [Action/Key Code Setting] dialog box is displayed. Set
the action, trigger, and key code.
Each of the input signals for the operation panel (X000 to X07F) is assigned to each button.
The operations corresponding to each button must be assigned to each operation panel key.
Click the
switched.
Panel Key

and

buttons, and then input signals to be set (+00 to +07

+08 to +15) are

Example:

Setting*2

Setting for the input signal X010

Setting for the input signal X005

For details of *1 to *2, refer to the following.

34 - 2

34.1 Settings

The operation panel settings are initialized according to key arrangements of the KANADEN operation panel and
A8GT-TK numeric keypad panel.
A8GT-TK numeric keypad panel

Arrangement of input signal

Arrangement of input signal

X0

X8

X10

X18

X19

X20

X28

X21 X29

X30

X31

X38

X39

X5

XD

X15 X1D

X25

X20

X35 X3D

X6

XE

X16 X1E

X1

X9

X11

X2

XA

X12 X1A

X22

X2A X32

X3A X26

X3

XB

X13 X1B

X23

X2B X33

X3B

X4

XC

X14 X1C X24

X7

X2E X36 X3E

XF

X17

X1F

X2F X37

X3F

31
MELSEC/A8GT-TK

MELSEC/A8GT-TK

X0

X8

X10

F1

F2

F3

X18

X20

X28

F4

F5

F6

X30

X38

X39

F7

F8

F9

F10

SCROLL
UP

SCROLL
DOWN

X3A
X2C X34 X3C X27

Key arrangement

X15

X35

32

XD

X25

Key arrangement
F3

F4

F5

F6

X2D

F7

Scroll
up

Pre.

Scroll
down

Next

Clear

Set

SP

SP

2
0

X6

XE

X16

X26

X2E

X36

X7

XF

X17

X2F

X1F

X27

X2C

X37

X3F

SP

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

F2

X5

33

BS

GO

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

F1

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

KANADEN operation panel

RFID FUNCTION

30

*1 Initialize

Edit Action/Key Code

34

Set the actions and triggers to be set for the operation panel keys.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

(1) Action tab

Set the operations (actions and key codes) for the operation panel keys.
For details of action settings, refer to the following.
2.1 Setting Switch

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

34.1 Settings

34 - 3

Item

Description
Set actions for the operation panel keys.
The settings of set actions are displayed in a list.
Setting methods and operations for each action, including the bit and word, are the same as those for touch
switches.

Action List

Click this button to set the ON/OFF operation for a bit device.
Click this button to set the word device value change.
Click this button to set the action of the base screen switching or window screen switching
for an operation panel key.
Add Action

Click this button to set the station number switching function for an operation panel key.
([Dialog Window] cannot be set for [Screen Type] in the [Mode] of the station number
switching function.)
Click this button to set a key code for the operation panel.
Click this button to set the key window display position.
Select the item to be utilized from the [Action List], and then click the [Utilize] button. The selected item is copied
and added to the [Action List].
Select the item to be edited from the [Action List]. Click the [Edit] button to edit the setting.
Select the item to be deleted from the [Action List]. Click the [Delete] button to delete the setting.

User ID for a key

input and date
change

Set the ID to specify an object for the key code input (0 to 65535).

Click this button to change the order of actions.

When the security function is used, set the security level (1 to 15).
When the security function is not used, set this item to "0".

Security

(Fundamentals) 5.3.4 Security setting

Simultaneous Press

User ID

Select this item to disable operations of other operation panel keys (Simultaneous Press) when other operation
panel keys are pressed while an operation panel key is pressed.
After the selection, select an operation for simultaneously pressing keys (ON priority/ OFF priority).
Select this item to set the user ID number (1 to 65535).
Setting the user ID enables the following.
The used operation panel key can be identified with the operation log.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

Operation Log
Target

34 - 4

Select this item to set the set object for the operation log target.
22. OPERATION LOG FUNCTION

34.1 Settings

Model

30

(2) Trigger tab

RFID FUNCTION

Set operation conditions for the operation panel keys.

For details of the operation conditions, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 4.9 GOT Display and Operation Setting

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

Item

Description

Model

Select an operation condition to operate an operation panel key.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Ordinary
Trigger Type

ON
OFF

For settings of each item, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.7 Trigger Setting

Range
Bit together

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Select this item to automatically repeat the operations set for an operation panel key while touching the key.

REPORT FUNCTION

36

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Repeat the
operation while
the switch is
pressed

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

34.1 Settings

34 - 5

34.2 Relevant Settings

The operation panel function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT environment settings(Screen Switching/Window)

(Fundamentals) 4.2 Screen Switching Device Setting
Function

Setting the timing for screen switching when the screen switching switch is pressed (off/on)

Setting item

Model

[Operation Timing]

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Setting item

Executing the external output with the external I/O function (read device)

[External I/O Function Output

Information]

Notifying the external input or no power supply with the external I/O function or operation panel
function (write device)

[External I/O Function Input

Information1], [External I/O Function
Input Information2]

Model

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Function

Setting item

Notifying the external input or executing the external output with the external I/O function or
operation panel function

GB10 to GB25, GB30 to GB37,

GB50 to GB57

Notifying the input status when the 128-point input is enabled with the external I/O function

GS658 to GS665

Switching the 128-point input from enabled to disabled (or vice versa) with the external I/O
function

GS517

34.3 Actions
Applicable operation panels
For applicable operation panels, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Setting keys of operation panel

The action and key code can be set for a key of an operation panel.

34 - 6

34.2 Relevant Settings

Model

30

(1) Action

GT15

actions *1
:1

Data change

:1

Key code

: 16

Key code

: 16

Word set

: 20

Word set

: 20

Set

: 20

Set

: 20

Reset

: 20

Reset

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Alternate

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Momentary

: 20

Base screen switching

:1

Base screen switching

:1

Overlap window1

:1

Overlap window1

:1

Overlap window2

:1

Overlap window2

:1

Overlap window3

:1

Superimpose window1

:1
:1

Overlap window4

:1

Superimpose window2

Overlap window5

:1

Station No. switching

Superimpose window1

:1

User-customized dialog screen switching

Superimpose window2

:1

Station No. switching

:9

31

32

:6
:1

User-customized dialog screen switching : 1

Total

High

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Data change

Low
: 135

Total

: 129

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GT16

Order of action
excution priority
for multiple

RFID FUNCTION

Multiple actions in the following can be set per key of an operation panel.

33

*1 The order of actions except the data change and key code can be changed on the Action tab.

(2) Key code

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Key codes for each object can be set. (Up to 16 key codes can be set for each operation panel key.)
Key codes for the alphanumeric character input (Numerical input and ASCII input)
Key codes for operating object functions
(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

34

(3) Other key codes

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

The following screens can be operated with setting a key code to an operation panel key.
Screen

Screen for login (Operator authentication),

Screen for changing passwords (Operator authentication)

The following shows key codes applicable to each screen.

(a) Screens for login and changing passwords

0008H

Deletes the first character and shifts the entire characters to the right by one
character.

000DH

Inputs passwords.

001BH

Cancel

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Application

Inputs characters*1

36

0088H

Deletes characters being input.

0090H

Move cursor to right within object

0091H

Move cursor to left within object

0092H

Switch character input modes (Value)

0093H

Switch character input modes (Alphabet in capital letters)

0094H

Switch character input modes (Alphabet in small letters)

REPORT FUNCTION

0030H to 0039H, 0041H to 005AH, 0061H to 007AH

37

For key codes for characters, refer to the following.

(Fundamentals) Appendix.3 Key Code List

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

*1

35

Key code(H)

34.3 Actions

34 - 7

34.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the operation panel function and external I/O function.

Precautions for drawing (Operation panel function)

Only one operation panel function setting is available for one project.

Precautions for OS (Operation panel function/External I/O function)

To use the operation panel function or external I/O function, install the extended function OS (External I/O or
Operation panel) on the GOT.

Precautions for hardware (Operation panel function/External I/O function)

For the system configurations of the operation panel function and external I/O function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Precautions for use (Operation panel function/external I/O function)

(1) Screens operable with operation panel function
The operation panel function is enabled only with the following screens.
Screen
User-created screen,
*1

Screen for login (Operator authentication)*1,

Screen for changing passwords (Operator authentication)*1

For applicable key codes for operation panel keys, refer to the following.
34.3 Actions

The [OK] or [Cancel] button displayed on the GOT can be operated with the [Enter] or [ESC] key of the operation
panel.

(2) Operations with operation panel function

(a) The actions set for keys are executed, regardless of the displays on the GOT.
(b) When a touch switch displayed on the GOT and a key of an operation panel are simultaneously pressed,
both operations are enabled. The first detected operation is processed first.

(3) When using 128-point input with external I/O function

(a) nput signals (X0 to XF) for the external I/O function with the 128-point input enabled exist. When any of the
signals turns on, GOT internal device(s) corresponding to an input signal (X0 to XF) with the 128-point
input disabled also turn(s) on. The GOT internal devices include GB30 to GB37 and GB50 to GB57.

(4) Delay of input/output

When using the [External I/O Function Output Information], the [External I/O Function Input Information1] or the
[External I/O Function Input Information2] in the system information, input or output may be delayed for
approximately three seconds.
When a quicker response is needed, use the internal devices below, instead.
Input: GB30 to GB37, GB50 to GB57
Output: GB10 to GB25

34 - 8

34.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

35. RBG DISPLAY FUNCTION

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31
With the RGB display function, a screen of a personal computer can be displayed on the GOT.
The RGB screen can be used by selecting the resolution and the refresh rate as shown below.
Resolution

Refresh rate (Hz)

XGA (1024

768 dots)

60

SVGA (800

600 dots)

60/72/75

VGA (640

480 dots)
*1

32

60/72/75/85

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

*1

Selectable for the GT1695M-X only.

HINT

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

RGB output
Outputting (RGB output) of a GOT screen to a commercially-available display is also available.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

To execute the RGB output, set the RGB output in the communication settings.
(Fundamentals) 4.10 Station No. Switching Device Setting

35

For the system configuration for using the RGB output, refer to the following manual.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

35 - 1

35.1 Settings
Select [Common]
[Peripheral Setting]
[Video/RGB Input] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
Set the devices used for the RGB display function.
The dialog box is used in common to the video display setting and RGB display setting.
For details of video display function settings, refer to the following.
32.1 Settings

The video/RGB setting list

Item
Destination
I/F

Description

32.1 Settings
Use Video/
RGB Input

Function
Setting

Model

Select the connection target interface for the video/RGB input.

Click the [Detail setting] button to display the detail setting dialog box.

Unit Type
Name

Select this item to enable the video/RGB input function.

Select the unit to be used.
Select this item when using RGB screen.(GT16M-R2(RGB screen only)/GT15V-75R1(RGB screen only))

Set a start device for the devices to be used.

First Device When the start device is set, subsequent devices of the start device are automatically set in the video/RGB
setting list.

(Continued to next page)

35 - 2

35.1 Settings

Item

Description

Model

b14

b13

31

b12 to b0

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

b15

RFID FUNCTION

Set the devices that are used for video window/RGB screen display.
(When RGB input display is selected, only the device for [Video/RGB Input Common] is displayed.)
The values set at the devices used for video window/RGB screen display are handled as 16-bit binary values.
The device, which is specified as the [Video/RGB Input Common] device, stores the data as indicated below.
Turning ON/OFF the bit devices controls the RGB display operation.
For GT16

Enabled/disabled in video window

Function
Setting

Selecting a display position ON : Displays on the middle side.

of RGB screen
OFF : Displays on the upper left side.

Video/RGB
setting list

30

Selecting a displaying/hiding ON : Display RGB screen

of RGB screen (CH2) *1*2
OFF : Display GOT monitor screen

32

Selecting a displaying/hiding ON : Display RGB screen

of RGB screen (CH1) *2
OFF : Display GOT monitor screen

b15

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

For GT15
b14 to b0

Enabled/disabled in video window

Select the display/hide of RGB screen ON : Display RGB screen
OFF : Display GOT monitor screen

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Valid when mounting the GT16M-R2

When both b14 and b15 are turned on, b15 has priority.

35.2 Relevant settings

34

The RGB display is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT internal device

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Setting item
GS252.b15

The input status of the RGB signal for CH2 can be checked. (Only when using the GT16M-R2
for the RGB input unit)

GS252.b14

The input status of the RGB signal can be checked. (GT16 only)

GS1025

The horizontal resolution of the RGB signal can be checked. (GT16 only)

GS1026

The vertical resolution of the RGB signal can be checked. (GT16 only)

GS1027

The refresh rate of the RGB signal can be checked. (GT16 only)

GS1028

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

The input status of the RGB signal for CH1 can be checked.

Model

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Functions

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

*1
*2

33

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

35.2 Relevant settings

35 - 3

35.3 Actions
Displaying the RGB screen
The RGB screen is composed and displayed on the monitor screen of the GOT according to the ON/OFF setting of
the RGB screen display/hide selection bit (bit device in a word device).
The RGB screen is displayed through a black colored base screen by making the base screen transparent.
Set the screen color of the base screen to black.
For how to set the screen color, refer to the following.
(Fundamentals) 3.9 Changing Screen Property

Merging the RGB display with the base

screen (Making the black colored base
screen transparent)

(RGB screen display/hide selection bit: b15)

Turn the selection bit ON to compose an
RGB screen on the GOT monitor screen.
D10 b15
OFF

b2 b1 b0
ON

Base screen

RGB display
Even when an RGB screen is displayed,
the monitor screen operates as well.

(1) Display position

(a) When the resolution of RGB display screen is lower than that of the GOT screen for GT16, an RGB display
position can be selected for the upper left side or the middle side of the GOT.
The RGB display position is set at [Video/RGB Input Common] in the [Video/RGB Input] dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
35.1 Settings
When the resolution of an RGB display screen is lower than that of the GOT screen for GT15, the RGB
screen is displayed at the upper left side of the GOT.
(b) The RGB display can be performed only for the user-created screen.
Screens other than the user-created screen (such as the utility, ladder monitor screen) are not composed
with the RGB screen.
(c)

The display position may be out of place depending on the RGB output device.
If the display position is out of place, adjust the position by the utility of the GOT ([Display Position] of [RGB
Display Settings]).
For details of the utility, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for the GOT used

(2) Displaying a window screen

An overlap window and a test window are displayed over the RGB screen after composition.
A superimpose window is displayed as a part of the base screen.

35 - 4

35.3 Actions

When GT16 with the GT16M-R2 is used, an input source for an RGB screen to be displayed can be selected
from CH1 or CH2.
The input source channel is set at [Video/RGB Input Common] in the [Video/RGB Input] dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the following.
35.1 Settings

RFID FUNCTION

30

(3) Channel switching for RGB screen

(1) To use the RGB screen efficiently

It is convenient to make a touch switch without frame at the position where the RGB screen is displayed and
set the functions to display a menu for monitor screens or to hide the RGB screen to this touch switch.
Displaying a menu for monitor screens
Make the setting for displaying an overlap window to a touch switch.
Hiding the RGB screen
Make the setting for turning the RGB screen display/hide selection bit OFF.
Example: When hiding the RGB screen

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

HINT

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

33
Touching the screen while
the RGB screen is displayed
(Touching the touch switch)

The RGB screen is erased.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Touch switch without frame

(RGB screen display/
hide selection bit OFF)

Example: When hiding the RGB screen

The RGB screen is erased

and the monitor screen is
displayed.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Touching the screen while

the RGB screen is displayed
(Touching the touch switch)

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Touch switch without frame

(RGB screen display/hide
selection bit OFF
+
Go to screen switch)

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

35.3 Actions

35 - 5

 Screen save of the RGB screen

When the RGB screen is displayed, the screen save function of the GOT operates after the power saving function of
the personal computer display operates.
While the power saving function of the personal computer display is not active, the screen save function is disabled
even if it is set at the GOT.
The RGB screen is saved as indicated below.

The RGB screen is displayed.

When the GOT detects the power

saving state of the personal
computer display, the RGB screen
is hidden and only the monitor screen
is displayed.
(The GOT internal device
(GS252.b15) turns on.)

When the screen save time

set on GOT side has passed,
GOT is in screen save status.

Relation between personal computer statuses and validity of the GOT screen save function
Personal computer status
Personal computer screen displayed
Screen saver operating
Display power saving function operating

Validity of GOT screen save function

Invalid
(Personal computer screen displayed)
Valid
(Personal computer screen

Monitor screen

GOT screen save status)

HINT
(1) Screen save operation during monitoring
While the RGB screen is not displayed, the screen save function operates independent of the power saving
function of the display of a personal computer.
For details of the GOT's screen save function, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for the GOT used
(2) When no RGB signal is input to the GOT
When no RGB signal is input to the GOT due to cable disconnection and others, the GOT internal device
(GS252.b15) turns on as with detecting the power saving state of the personal computer display.

35 - 6

35.3 Actions

30
RFID FUNCTION

35.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the RGB display function.

Precautions for drawing

Only one RGB display function setting is available for one project.
The simultaneous display of a video window, RBG screen, and multimedia screen is not available.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Precautions for OS
To use the RGB display function, install the extended function OS (Video/RGB) to the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

(1) GOTs that can be used

(2) System configuration for using the RGB display function

For the system configuration for using the RGB display function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Precautions for use

(1) Object function when the RGB screen is displayed
All objects will operate even while the RGB screen is displayed.

(a) The RGB screen display may be given in still image or disappear temporarily when the hard copy function
is executed or when a system message is displayed/cleared.
(b) RGB display may be disabled, disturbed or stopped depending on the setting for [Horizontal] or [Vertical] of
the utility (RGB display setting).
In this case, return the set values to the default values and then make re-setting within the range that
allows RGB display.
For the operations of the utility, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual for the GOT used

(4) Setting of resolution and refresh rate for RGB output device
When the RGB input image is incorrectly displayed, check if the resolution and the refresh rate for the RGB
output device are set in the range as shown below.
When the resolution and the refresh rate are set outside the range, the RGB input image cannot be displayed
correctly.
Refresh rate (Hz)

XGA (1024 768 dots)*1

60

SVGA (800

60/72/75

*1

480 dots)

36

37

60/72/75/85

Selectable for the GT1696M-X only.

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

VGA (640

600 dots)

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(3) Display of RGB screen

REPORT FUNCTION

For the 640

400 dot resolution screen of the NEC PC-9800 series, RGB display is not possible on the GOT.
Change the screen resolution to other setting or change the personal computer.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

(2) Personal computers for which RGB display is not possible

Resolution

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

For the operation-checked models, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A0010) separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial
automation products.
(MELFANSweb website:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

RGB display function can be used only on the GOTs indicated below:
GT16, GT1585V-S, GT1575V-S

35.4 Precautions

35 - 7

35 - 8

35.4 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

36. REPORT FUNCTION

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31
The report function collects and prints the data of production management and status.
Following information can be printed with this function.
Word device value
Comment corresponding to the device status

Operation
status

Production
volume

MC-1

RUN
RUN

10
20

RUN

60

RUN

80

HALT

10

RUN

80

RUN

90

MC-1

33

Word device value

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Comment corresponding
to device status

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Line

MC-2

32

05/11/25 16: 53:24

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

HINT

(Fundamentals) 4.11 Comment Setting

To print the data using the report function, specify the data collection timing and print timing.
The collected data are stored in a CF card until the specified print timing is established.
When the specified print timing is established, the stored data in the CF card are printed based on the page break
setting.

POINT
(1) Report function for GOT1000 series
The report function for GOT1000 series is equivalent to the report function for GOT900 series with setting
[Log/Page] for the report style.
(2) Report function for GT SoftGOT1000
GT SoftGOT1000 cannot directly output data to a printer.
The virtual A drive of the personal computer stores print image data (CSV files). Print out the files.

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

The comment must be registered in advance

36
REPORT FUNCTION

Comment to be printed

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

36 - 1

36.1 Report screen creation (screen property)

Select [Screen]

[New]

[Report Screen] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Basic tab
Set the screen No. and screen name.

Item

Description

Screen No.

Select the report screen No.

Screen Name

Enter the title of report screen as necessary.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Screen Type

Displays [Report Screen].

Detailed Description

Enter the explanation of the newly created report as necessary.

Up to 512 characters can be entered.

36 - 2

36.1 Report screen creation (screen property)

Model

30

Printing tab

RFID FUNCTION

Set the print trigger and print format.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

Item

Description
Select the timing to print the data stored in a CF card.
Rise
: Print when the bit device turns on.
Fall
: Print when the bit device turns off.
After selecting, set the bit device for the print trigger.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Trigger
Print Abort
Trigger

Select the method used to abort printing.

None : The abort trigger is not set. (Printing is not aborted.)
Rise
: Aborts printing when the bit device turns on.
Fall
: Aborts printing when the bit device turns off.
After selecting, set the device for the abort trigger.

35

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Time*1

Select whether to print the page number.(Ptrint (on the upper right)/Not print)
Select where to print the time.(Not print/On upper center/On upper left/On upper right)
The time is displayed using the format of yy(year)/mm(month)/dd(day)/hh(hour): mm(minute):
sec(second).

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Page No.

09/09/11 17:38:04
Space

Printing
Order

Set Header

36

Select the order of printing.(Chronological/Reverse chronological)

Select this item to enable the header setting, and then set the following.
Start
: Set the start line. (1 to 30)
End
: Set the end line. (1 to 30)
36.3 Set header/repeat line

(Continued to next page)

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Print Format

REPORT FUNCTION

Print Trigger

Model

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

36.1 Report screen creation (screen property)

36 - 3

Item

Description

Model

Set the following items to print the repeat lines repeatedly.

Start
: Set the start line. (1 to 30)
Number of Repeats : Set the number to repeat.(0 to 499 times)
End
: Set the end line.(1 to 30)
The repeat lines are set on the report screen.
36.3 Print layout setting
To print all the data stored in a CF card, set the number, which is the result of subtracting 1 from [Number
of Collections] of the [Data Collection] tab, to [Number of Repeats].
Example: When the settings are [Number of Collections:3] and [Number of Repeats:2].

Collect data
Print Format

Details
Repeat

Print result
Production list

Memory card
1st sampling

Line 1
Line 2

10
50

2nd sampling

Line 1
Line 2

15
82

3rd sampling

Line 1
Line 2

20
78

Repeated
times: 2

Sampling times: 3

Line
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2
Line 1
Line 2

36.3 Set header/repeat line

*1 For details, refer to the following.

*1 Time printing
Time printing may be unavailable according to the connection method or the PLC CPU.

36 - 4

36.1 Report screen creation (screen property)

15
82
20
78

Print repeat lines and

repeat times (2 lines)

Set [Start],[Number of Repeats], and [End] for the repeat lines.

(Fundamentals) 2.7 Clock Function Specifications

Vol.
10
50

30

Data Collection tab

RFID FUNCTION

Set the data collect trigger and collecting times.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

Item

Model

Select the timing to collect data.

Rise
: Collects data when the bit device turns on.
Fall
: Collects data when the bit device turns off.
Sampling : Collects data at fixed intervals and stores the data into a CF card.
Then, set the data collecting interval.(3 to 3600)
When selecting [Rise] or [Fall], set the bit device for the collect trigger.

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Collection Trigger

Description

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Deletion Trigger

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

Select the timing to delete all the collected data stored in a CF card.
Rise
: Deletes data when the bit device turns on.
Fall
: Deletes data when the bit device turns off.
Power-on : Deletes data when the GOT is turned on.
Print
: Deletes after printing.
When selecting [Rise] or [Fall], set the bit device for the delete trigger.

35

Number of Collections

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Set the number of times to collect data.(1 to 500)
Make settings according to the capacity of the CF card.
(Fundamentals) 2.6 Specifications of Available Functions Set with GT Designer3

REPORT FUNCTION

File Name

Enter the file name of collected data to be stored in a CF card.

Files can be created on each report screen.
Up to 8 characters, including one-byte alphabets in capitals and one-byte values (0 to 9), can be entered.
The number of the file extension characters is not counted in the file name.
Example: REP00001.G1Z (File name: Up to 8 characters, Extension: 3 characters)

36

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Operation when the number

of collections is in excess

Select the processing method when data are collected more than the number of times set in [Number of
Collections].
Abort
: Interrupts data collecting.
When restarting data collecting, clear all the data stored in a CF card
by the delete trigger.
Overwrite : Continues data collecting and overwrites the data in the collected order.

36.1 Report screen creation (screen property)

36 - 5

36.2 Setting common to each report (report setting)

Select [Screen]

[Report Settinig] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Item

Description

Model

Set the cycle for GOT to monitor the device ON/OFF status that has been set in each trigger (collect trigger/
abort trigger/print trigger/delete trigger).
Make the settings in order that the device set for each trigger will keep the ON/OFF status longer than the
period set by trigger watch cycle.
GOT may not recognize the device ON/OFF status, if the period of device ON/OFF is shorter than the
trigger sampling.

ON
Trigger Watch
Cycle

Bit device of
collect trigger
(trigger action:
Rise)

Common

ON

OFF

3s
Trigger watch
cycle (3s)

ON

OFF

3s

Unrecognized
(OFF OFF)

3s

Recognized
(OFF ON)

ON

OFF

3s
Unrecognized
(OFF OFF)

3s
Recognized
(OFF OFF)

Select the method of interrupting the printing operation.

Abort Print
Trigger

None : The abort trigger is not set.

Rise
: Interrupts printing when the set device turns on.
Fall
: Interrupts printing when the set device turns off.
After selecting, set the device for the abort trigger.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

(Continued to next page)

36 - 6

36.2 Setting common to each report (report setting)

30
Item

Description

Model
RFID FUNCTION

Set the number of lines (1 to 127) and columns (1 to 255), and the space for the top (the number of lines)
and the left (the number of characters) of the printout.

Top
space

MC-1
MC-2
MC-1
MC-2
MC-1
MC-2

Machine
type
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2

Operation
status
Running
Running
Running
Running
Halt
Running
Running
Running
Running
Running
Running
Running

Production vol.
Planned Actual
10
300
20
250
60
300
80
250
10
300
80
250
90
300
250
115
300
10
250
128
300
130
250
180

Lines

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Columns

Print area
Print sheet

33

POINT
Print format setting
Refer to the following for the methods to calculate the width (number of columns + maximum set value of left
margin) and length (Number of lines + maximum set value of top margin) based on the printable area of the printer.
(Fundamentals) 3.15.1 Print setting

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Print
Format

Top Margin/
Lines/
Left Margin/
Columns

31

05/11/25 16:53:24
Line

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Left
space

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

36.2 Setting common to each report (report setting)

36 - 7

36.3

Print layout setting

Arrange figures and objects to be printed on the created report screen.

Before creating report screen

Arrange figures and objects on report screen based on grid.
Grid
: Displayed in the fixed unit of 16 dots (vertical) 8 dots (horizontal).
Space between figures/objects : Arranged in the unit of 16 dots (vertical) and 8 dots (horizontal).
8 dots
Grid

16 dots

HINT
(1) Grid display
Set the grid color as black when the grid is indistinct.
The grid color can be changed in the [View] tab of the [Options] dialog box. (Select [View]

[Display Items]

[Options] from the menu.)

(2) Arrange the figures and objects to be printed
By using toolbar, report screen can be created more efficiently.
The report function tool bar can be displayed by selecting [Report]. (Select [View]

[Toolbar] from the

menu.)

Draw lines and quadrangle

(1) Drawing method
Select [Figure]

[Line] from the menu.

Drag from the starting point (1)) to the end point (2)) of line/quadrangle, release the left key on mouse, and line/
quadrangle will be displayed.
Draw line

1)

2)

Draw by dragging from starting point vertically/

horizontally.

Draw quadrangle

1)
Draw by dragging from starting point sideways.

2)

POINT
Arranging the line/quadrangle
Make sure not arrange text and line/quadrangle in order they will overlap.

36 - 8

36.3 Print layout setting

30

(2) Precautions

RFID FUNCTION

Line attributes cannot be changed. (Style: Full line, Width; 1 dot, Color: Black)

Text arrangement
(1) Arrangement method
[Text] from the menu.

1.

Click the position where the text is arranged.

2.

As the [Text] dialog box appears, enter the text.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Select [Figure]

(Fundamentals) 2.5 Specifications of Applicable Characters

3.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32
Click the [OK] button to arrange the entered text in the screen.

(2) Precautions
(a) Page change cannot be done for text arranged on report screen.

33

(b) Text attributes (style, text color, etc.) cannot be changed.

Character is displayed in the unit of 16

8 dots.
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

(c)

16 dots
8 dots

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

(d) Up to 124 characters can be printed (when [Columns] is set to the maximum value).

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

36.3 Print layout setting

36 - 9

 Numerical print arrangement

(1) Arrangement method
Select [Object]

1.
2.

[Print]

[Numerical Print] from the menu.

Click the position where the numerical print object is arranged.

Double click the arranged numerical print object to display the [Numerical Print] dialog box. Make settings
with the reference to the following explanation.

(2) Numerical Print dialog box

(a) Device/Style tab
Set the print format and the device for printing value.

Item

Description
Device

Device

Print Format

Model

Set the word device for printing device value.

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Data Type

Select the data type of device.

Signed BIN16 Unsigned BIN16
Real

Format

Select the print format of word device for printing.

Signed Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
Binary
Real

Print Digits

Set the number of digits for numeric value to be printed.

The following shows the number of digits that can be set in [Format].
Signed or unsigned decimal numberl :1 to 13 digits (minus ( ) is included)
Hexadecimal
: 1 to 8 digits
Binary
: 1 to 32 digits
Real
: 1 to 32 digits (minus ( ), decimal point and decimal part are included)

Decimal Point

When [Real] is selected in [Format], set the number of digits (1 to 32) for the decimal part.

Signed BIN32

Unsigned BIN32

Hexadecimal

Select how to align objects within the print area.

Alignment

: Align to the left of the print area.

: Align to the right of the print area.
When

is selected in [Alignment], select this item to print "0" to the left of numeric value.
Example (In the case of five digits)

Fill with 0

5
Zero not suppressed

36 - 10

36.3 Print layout setting

00005
Zero suppressed

(Fundamentals) 5.3.8 Data operation setting

30
RFID FUNCTION

(b) Data Operation tab

Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by operating the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the dialog
box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

Item

Bit Mask

Model

Select this item to enable the operation.

34

Select this item to set the mask operation.

After selecting this item, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in hexadecimal in [Mask
Pattern].
AND :Carries out logical AND.
OR

:Carries out logical OR.

XOR

:Carries out exclusive logic OR.

Select this item to set the shift operation.

After selecting this item, select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Number of Shifts]. (Left/Right)

Data Operation

Select an operational expression format for data operation.(None/Data Expression)

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Bit Shift

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Operation
Type

Description

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

36.3 Print layout setting

36 - 11

 Bit comment print arrangement

(1) Arrangement method
Select [Object]

[Print]

[Bit Comment Print] from the menu.

1.

Click the position where the comment print object is arranged.

2.

Double click the arranged print object.

3.

As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

(2) Bit Comment Print dialog box

Set the print format and the device for printing comment.

Item

Description
Set the bit device for printing comments

Device

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Print
Digits

Set the number of digits for the comment to be printed

Up to 124 digits can be set.

Comment
Type

Select the comment type (Basic Comment or Comment Group) used for the comment printing.
When selecting [Comment Group], select the comment group number.
Fixed
: Select this to input a comment group number directly.
Device
: Select this to display the comment group number that is identical to the device value to be used.
After selecting this, set the device.
(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

Comment
No.

ON/OFF

Set the comment No. (0 to 32767) to be printed when the bit turns ON/OFF.
The comment will not be printed when setting comment No. to 0.
(To print comment only when the bit turns ON, set the comment No. when the bit turns OFF to 0)

(3) Precautions
(a) Only the first line of multi-line comment is printed.
(b) The text attribute (style, text color etc.) cannot be changed.
(c)

Characters are displayed in the size of 16 dots

8 dots.

16 dots
8 dots

(d) Up to 124 characters can be printed (when [Columns] is set to the maximum value).

36 - 12

36.3 Print layout setting

Model

30
RFID FUNCTION

Word comment print arrangement

(1) Arrangement method
[Print]

[Word Comment Print] from the menu.

1.

Click the position where the comment print object is arranged.

2.

Double click the arranged comment print object.

3.

As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Select [Object]

(2) Word Commento Print dialog box

(a) Device/Style tab
Set the print format of comment and the device to print comment.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

Item

Device

Description

Model

Set the word device for printing comment.

Print the comment of which No. corresponding to the set word device value.

35

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Select the comment type (Basic Comment or Comment Group) used for the comment printing.
When selecting [Comment Group], select the comment group number.
Fixed
: Select this to input a comment group number directly.
Device : Select this to display the comment group number that is identical to the device value to be used.
After selecting this, set the device.

36

(Fundamentals) 5.3.1 Device setting

REPORT FUNCTION

Comment Type

Set the number of digits for the comment to be printed

Up to 124 digits can be set.

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Print Digits

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

36.3 Print layout setting

36 - 13

(b) Operation tab

The setting items of the [Operation] tab are the same as numerical print.
Refer to the following for the details of the setting items.
Numerical print arrangement

(3) Precautions
(a) Only the first line of multi-line comment is printed.
(b) The text attribute (style, text color etc.) cannot be changed.
(c)

Characters are displayed in the size of 16 dots

8 dots.

16 dots
8 dots

(d) Up to 124 characters can be printed (when [Columns] is set to the maximum value).

Set header/repeat line

Set print range (header/repeat line) on the report screen.

Line

Model

MC-1
MC-2

A1
A2
A1
A2

Operation
Status
Running
Running
Running
Running

Production vol.
Expected
Actual
300
10
250
20
300
60
250
80

Header
Maximum 10 lines
The range for the header of each
page that can be printed only once.
Repeat line
Maximum 20 lines
Lines repeatedly printed when collect
trigger acts.
Line
MC-1

[Print example]
MC-2

[Print repeatedly]
MC-1
MC-2

36 - 14

36.3 Print layout setting

Model
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2

HINT
Printable area
Number of lines
:Up to 30 lines can be printed/collected for 1 timing.
Number of Columns :Columns as many as the number set in the [Columns] of [Print Format] can be printed.

31
REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

36.2 Setting common to each report (report setting)

(1) Setting method

Select [Edit]

1.

[Object of Selection]

RFID FUNCTION

30

[Report Line] from the menu.

Drag and select the area specified for the header and repeat line on the report screen.

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

32

Carry out either of the following operations.

3.

: Click on the

[Header] on the tool bar

When setting the repeat line : Click on the

[Repeat] on the tool bar

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

When setting the header

The selected range for header and repeat line will be set.
The header area is shown by cyan frame, and repeat line area is shown by yellow frame.

HINT
Set the header/repeat line on the dialog box.
Header/repeat line can be set on the dialog box too.
Select [Screen]
[Header/Repeat] from the menu to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Description

Model

36

Select this item to set the header in the report

screen.
To cancel the header setting, clear this item.
After selecting, set the start line and end line of the
header.
Up to 10 lines can be set as the header in the range
of 1 to 30 lines (for whole screen).

Header

Set

Repeat

Set the start line and end line of the repeat lines.
Up to 20 lines can be set as the repeat lines in the range of 1 to 30
lines (for whole screen)

REPORT FUNCTION

Item

37
HARD COPY
FUNCTION

(2) Precautions
Numerical print and comment print objects cannot be set in the header.

36.3 Print layout setting

35
RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

2.

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

33

36 - 15

36.4 Relevant Settings

The report function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT environment settings (System information)

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
Function

Setting item

Storing the report screen number under printing (Write device)

[Currently Printed Report Screen]

Notifying the report printing state (Write device: system signal 2-1.b8)

[System Signal 2-1]

Aborting printing (Read device: system signal 1-2.b15)

[System Signal 1-2]

Notifying a printer error during printing (Write device: system signal 2-1.b15)

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying the printing state (Write device: system signal 2-2.b15)

[System Signal 2-2]

Model

GOT internal device

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2 Supported Devices
Function

36 - 16

Setting item

Notifying the connection state between the GOT and printer (Write device)

GS258.b0

Notifying the occurrence of a warning level error (Write device)

GS258.b1

Notifying the occurrence of a fatal level error (Write device)

GS258.b2

Notifying the printer status if printing is enabled or disabled (Write device)

GS258.b3

36.4 Relevant Settings

Model

30
RFID FUNCTION

36.5 Actions
Operation of the report function
Operation of the report function is shown below.
30

50

1)

Collect trigger

70

2)

40

3)

4)

60
5)

80

31

6)

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

10

Print trigger

Clear trigger

32

A The 1st time

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

The data stored in a CF card are printed at each print trigger.

Those data are deleted at each delete trigger.
B The 2nd time
2

10
30
50

70
40
60

Print the remained data

after clearing the collected
data with clear trigger.

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

Print format
Create the print format on the report screen. Up to 8 formats (8 screens) can be registered.
This section provides the general procedure for print format setting.

2.

34

Create report screen (

36.6 Precautions)
Create a report screen and make the report function settings on that screen.
Set print range(
36.2 Setting common to each report (report setting))
Set the number of lines, the number of columns, and a margin according to the printable area of the printer in
the [Report Settinig] dialog box.
Time

Set by

35

1.

Top space

05/11/25 16: 53: 24

1.

Header

Set by

3.

Repeat line

Set by

3.

Line

Model

Operation
status

Expected

MC-1

A1
A2

Running
Running

300
250

10
20

MC-2

A1
A2

Running
Running

300
250

60
80

MC-1

A1
A2

Halt
Running

300
250

10
80

MC-2

A1
A2

Running
Running

300
250

90
115

A1

Inspection
Running

300

10

A2

250

128

REPORT FUNCTION

Set by

A1
A2

Running
Running

300
250

130
180

37

MC-1
MC-2

Left space

Actual

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

Lines

Production volume

Page No.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

1.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Device value

Columns

36.5 Actions

36 - 17

3.

Set print layout

For details of print layout setting, refer to the following.
36.3 Print layout setting
Open the created report screen to set the print layout.

Line
MC-1
MC-2

Production

Model

Operation
status

Plan

Actual

A1

Run normally

550

125

A2

Run normally

400

89

A1

Run normally

600

136

A2

Error occurs

380

81

Header

Repeat line

Bit comment print

Line

Text
Line
MC-1
MC-2

Word comment print

Production

Numerical prin

Run normally

550

Run normally

400

89

A1

Run normally

600

136

A2

Error occurs

380

81

Machine
type

Operation
status

Plan

Actual

125

A1
A2

Line

Used to draw a report table.

36.3 Draw lines and quadrangle

Text

Used to draw fixed texts in the table.

36.3 Text arrangement

Numerical Print

Used to arrange the object that prints the word device value.

36.3 Numerical print arrangement

Bit Comment Print

Used to arrange the comment to be changed according to the

ON/OFF status of bit device.

arrangement

Word Comment Print

Used to arrange the comment to be changed according to word

device value.

arrangement

Header

Used to set the header part of the report table.

36.3 Bit comment print

36.3 Word comment print

36.3 Set header/repeat line

Repeat Line

Used to set the part to be repeatedly printed in the report table.

HINT
Edit of created report screen
As the base screen, the created report screen can be copied and deleted for each screen.
Refer to the following manual for screen editing operation.
(Fundamentals) 3.12 Copying/Deleting Screen

36 - 18

36.5 Actions

30
RFID FUNCTION

36.6 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the report function.

Precautions for drawing

Up to eight report screens can be set for one project.

As the number of devices (numerical print, comment print, etc.) set on the report screen increases, GOT
monitoring may be delayed. If this occurs, elongate the data collection cycle time or reduce the number of
devices.

(3) Arrangement of figures and objects

The figures and objects arranged on the report screen must not overlap with each other.
If they overlap with each other, they may not be printed correctly.
Arranging an object or figure adjacent to the line or the line of a rectangle may also cause the object or figure to
be printed incorrectly.
If this occurs, allow appropriate space between the line and the object or figure when arranging it.

(4) Use of Kanji region

Objects and figures arranged on the same report screen must have the same Kanji region setting.
If Kanji region setting differs among the objects and figures arranged on the same report screen, they are
displayed according to the Kanji region setting made for text/comment print of the object/figure arranged the
upper left end (including the header section) of the report screen. (If setting is made for both text and comment
print, the Kanji region set for comment print is used.)

(5) Precautions for using comment group

When a value (column No.) that does not exist is entered in the language switching device, the comment will not
be printed.

33

34
OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Precautions for OS

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

(2) Influence of the number of devices (on the report screen)/collection cycle over monitor display

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

260 points (total number of the devices that are set for numerical and comment print (including devices used for
data operation), and the collect trigger and similar devices that are set on the report screen).

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

(1) Maximum number of devices that can be set on one report screen

To use the report function, install the extended function OS (Report) to the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

(1) System configuration when using a printer

35

For the system configuration requirements for using a printer, refer to the following manual.

(2) Usable printer

36
REPORT FUNCTION

For the usable printers, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A0010) separately
available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation
products.
(MELFANSweb website:http://wwwf2.mitsubishielectric.co.jp/english/index.html)

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

36.6 Precautions

36 - 19

 Precautions for use

When the print trigger of other object or report screen occurs during report print, other object or report screen is
printed after the report print completion.
However, if the same print trigger occurs before the report print, that was executed when the former report trigger
occurred, is completed, the latter print trigger will be handled as invalid.

HINT
Check the report function operation
The printing status by report function and the printed report screen can be checked using the system information.
Controlling the relevant signals by PLC CPU prevents the overlap of print trigger occurrence timing.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
(1) Report function-relevant signals of system information
(a) Report output signal (system signal2-1(b8))
ON : Report function is printing
OFF : Printing by report function is completed or interrupted
(b) Printing report number (write device)
Write the report screen No. being printed to PLC CPU.
After printing, the written report screen No. is kept until the next report screen will be printed, instead of
being cleared.
(2) Operation of the system information function when printing the report screen.
Printing status of
the report screen

Printing report screen "1"

ON
OFF

Report output signal

Printing report screen

(1) When data collection timing is overlapped

After a data collection is competed once, the data of other report screen, that was delayed because its collection
timing overlapped with the completed one, will be collected.
However, when the same collect trigger occurs before the data collection, that was executed when the former
collect trigger occurred, is completed, the latter collect trigger will be handled as invalid.

(2) Executing delete trigger

Execution of the delete trigger deletes the contents of the report file but does not delete the report file.
To delete the report file, do so using a personal computer or format the memory card.

36 - 20

36.6 Precautions

30
RFID FUNCTION

37. HARD COPY FUNCTION

The hard copy function prints the currently displayed GOT monitor screen, and also saves it to a CF card in BMP/JPG
files.
This function can be executed by switching ON/OFF bit devices, or by touching the touch switch (extension, hard copy)
function.
The BMP/JPEG files saved in CF card can be used for various documents on the personal computer.
GOT

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Line A pro. situ.

Line A pro. situ.

Prints the currently displayed

monitor screen.

Printer

Screen oper. meth.

33

Line A pro. situ.

Save in the
BMP/JPEG
format.
PC
(Edit)

Printer

MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

CF card
Monitor screen can be used
in various documents.

Line A pro. situ.

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34
POINT
GOT status during execution of hard copy function
When the hard copy function is executed, the GOT interrupts the monitor screen display temporarily.
As the monitor display reappears after completion of the hard copy, please wait for a while.

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

35

REPORT FUNCTION

36

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

37 - 1

37.1 Settings
Select [Common]

[Hard Copy] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Item

Description

Model

Destination

Select the output target. (Printer/File)

Drive Name

Select a drive where a file is stored. (A:Standard CF Card/B:Extended Memory Card)

Folder Name*1

Set the name of the folder where the file is stored.

The default folder name is set at [Project Folder] of the [GOT Type Setting] displayed by selecting [Common]
from the menu.

File Name*1

Enter the file name.

SNAP is displayed by default.

Style

Select the file format (BMP/JPEG) if [File] is selected for [Destination].

Select this item to output a small-size file for thumbnail display when [File] is selected for [Destination].
1/2: The file is output in the half display size of its original size.
(Output destination: Folder specified in [Folder Name]\M)
1/4: The file is output in an one-fourth display size of its original size.
(Output destination: Folder specified in [Folder Name]\S)
Example) For 1/2

Thumbnail Output

1/2

Normal screen size

Screen size for Thumbnail Output

1/2

Delete the file with the

minimum No. if the
capacity is exceeded
and start from the initial
condition when there is
a file with the maximum

Select the processing method for the case of CF card capacity is insufficient or a file with the maximum file
number (9999) exists.

No.*2
Invert*3

Check to reverse and print monochrome area of the monitor screen.

Print Image Size

Select the print image size. (L/Postcard/2L/A4)

Start Trigger

Set the device to start the hard copy.

Abort Trigger

Set the device used to abort printing.

(Continued to next page)

37 - 2

37.1 Settings

30

Notification Device

*5

File Number External

Control Device

31

Set a device by which a file writing error is notified.

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

Writing Error

Set a device by which file writing is notified.

Select this item to control the file number with the device when [File] is selected for [Destination]. (1 to 9999)
The device data type is set as a unsigned 16-bit binary data.
This setting is not a setting target for [Delete the file with the minimum No. if the capacity is exceeded and start
from the initial condition when there is a file with the maximum No.].
The file is not output in case of insufficient free space.
Even if the maximum file number (9999) exists, the file with the specified file number is output.

32

For details of *1 to *5, refer to the following.

*1 Folder Name, File Name

(1) Serial number in file name

When a BMP/JPEG file is output to the CF card, a serial number is automatically appended to the set file name.
BMP/JPEG files stored in the CF card can be read out to a personal computer using image processing software.
Example: Storing data with the default file name (SNAP)

BMP file
SNAP0001.BMP

JPEG file
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

No. of screens stored on

CF card
1st screen

33

File name

SNAP0001.JPG

2nd screen

SNAP0002.BMP

SNAP0002.JPG

3rd screen

SNAP0003.BMP

SNAP0003.JPG

9999th screen

SNAP9999.BMP

SNAP9999.JPG

34

(2) Setting thumbnail output

When [Thumbnail Output] is set, a folder (m, s) is created according to its file size. Therefore, set the names with
76 characters or less.

(3) Restrictions for folder names and file names.

For the restrictions for folder names and file names, refer to the following.

35

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name used in GOT

*2 The minimum number's file is deleted when capacity is exceeded and make initial state when the maximum is
filled
Not selected: A new monitor screen is not saved in the CF card when the CF card capacity is insufficient or
when the maximum number file (9999) exists.
Selected: Execute the following operation according to the CF card status.
File number in the CF card

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

Device*4

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Writing Notification

Set the watch cycle of the start trigger in seconds. (2 to 60)

Set the bit device of the start trigger to remain on or off for the set trigger watch cycle or more.

36

With spare capacity in the CF card

No spare capacity in the CF card

When file No. 9999 does not

exist.

Creates a file with the number next to the exiting

largest file number in the CF card

Deletes the file with the smallest No. and creates

a file with the number next to the largest one.

When file No. 9999 exists.

Deletes all the data in the CF card and creates a new No.1 file.
(Data-deletion timing can be confirmed in the system information (System Signal 2-1. b12).)

When deleting files, files that are output for thumbnail display are also deleted.

REPORT FUNCTION

Trigger Watch Cycle

Model
RFID FUNCTION

Description

VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Item

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

37.1 Settings

37 - 3

*3 Rev./Norm

(1) Target of Rev./Norm

Rev./Norm is applied only to areas displayed in white or black.
Areas displayed in other colors (gray, red, etc.) are printed as they are.
Rev./Norm: Not selected

Rev./Norm: Selected

Areas other than white or black are

printed in the displayed colors.

Rev./Norm can be effectively used in the following cases.

The screen image has large black areas and printing by white/black reverse will save printer ink.
The screen image has large black area and printing the image as it is will be unclear to see.

(2) Changing the Rev./Norm setting using the system information

The setting for [Invert] (white/black reverse) can be changed online by changing the bit state of the following
system information function devices.
Hard copy setting validate signal (System Signal 1-1.b10)
The hard copy output setting can be changed using the system information function by turning this signal ON.
The signal must be turned ON before executing hard copy.
It is necessary to turn ON the signal at least about 300ms (the time taken by the GOT internal processing to
recognize the changed signal state) earlier than the start of hard copy.
Hard copy white/black reverse signal (System Signal 1-1.b12)
ON : Outputs the monitor screen after reversing white/black display.
OFF : Outputs the monitor screen without reversing white/black display.
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting
*4 Writing Notification Device
While file writing is being executed, the specified bit device is turned ON.
If this device is ON, writing of any other file cannot be executed. In this case, execute the writing after the device turns
OFF.
*5 Writing Error Notification Device
When an error occurs in file writing, the specified bit device is turned ON.
Since this device does not automatically turn OFF even if the system is recovered from the error, turn it off manually.

37 - 4

37.1 Settings

30
RFID FUNCTION

37.2 Relevant Settings

The hard copy function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT environment settings (System information)

Setting item

Enabling changes of the hard copy output setting at the system information. (Read device: System Signal 11.b10)

[System Signal 1-1]

Specifying the hard copy printing after reversing white/black display. (Read device: System Signal 1-1.b12)

[System Signal 1-1]

Notifying the hard copy print state. (Write device: System Signal 2-1.b7)

[System Signal 2-1]

Aborting printing. (read device: System Signal 1-2.b15)

[System Signal 1-2]

Notifying a printer error during printing. (Write device: System Signal 2-1.b15)

[System Signal 2-1]

Notifying the printing state. (Write device: System Signal 2-2.b15)

[System Signal 2-2]

Notifying that the number of files in the CF card is close to the upper limit (9999). (Write device: System Signal
2-1.b12)

[System Signal 2-1]

Model

32
VIDEO DISPLAY
FUNCTION

Function

REMOTE PERSONAL
COMPUTER
OPERATION FUNCTION

31

(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

33
MULTIMEDIA
FUNCTION

37.3 Precautions
This sections explains the precautions for using the hard copy function.

Precautions for drawing

Only one hard copy setting is available for one project.

(1) Bit device for start trigger

Turn on or off the bit device for the start trigger, which is set in [Trigger Watch Cycle], for the set trigger watch
cycle or more.
To use the touch switch (bit momentary), set the device with Delay setting (OFF Delay) of touch switch (bit
momentary) so that it may keep ON status equal to or longer than trigger watch cycle.

(2) Hard copy during touch operation

OPERATION PANEL
FUNCTION/EXTERNAL
I/O FUNCTION

34

Precautions for use

35

With some models of printers, a part of GOT screen may not be printed.
If this occurs, change the setting at the printer to invalidate trimming. (Note that trimming valid/invalid setting
may be impossible depending on the printer model.)

(4) A printer error occurs during printing

If a printer error occurs during printing, or if printing is possible pressing the [restart] button after a blank sheet is
output, set [A4] for [Print Image Size], and set A4 size paper (portrait setting).
With some models of printers, an error occurs if the size of set paper and the set print image size do not match
with each other.
Even with printers which error occurs if [A4] is set for [Print Image Size], printing may be available in print image
size other than A4.
(a) Set [Print Image Size] to other than [A4].
An error such as output of blank sheets occurs. However, correct printing may occur by pressing the
[restart] button.

37.2 Relevant Settings

37 - 5

HARD COPY
FUNCTION

37

(b) Set A4 size paper (portrait setting) in the printer.

(c)

36
REPORT FUNCTION

(3) Part of GOT screen is not printed

RBG DISPLAY
FUNCTION

During touch operation of the screen, the hard copy function cannot be used.

HINT
Printer operations and settings
For printer operations and settings, refer to the following.
Manual of the printer being used

(5) Before starting hard copy

If the printer power supply is OFF at the start of hard copy, the monitor screen display cannot be printed.
Turn the power supply to the printer ON.
Otherwise, a system alarm will occur (340 A printer error occurs or the power supply is OFF).
Turning the power supply ON for the printer executes printing.

(6) Hard copy execution timing

If the hard copy is going to be executed while the hard copy function is being executed (when the monitor screen
image is saved to the GOT internal memory or when printing/saving to CF card), the new hard copy request is
not executed.
Execute the next hard copy function after printing/saving to the CF card.
Completion of the printing/saving to CF card can be confirmed in the system information (System Signal 2-1).
(Fundamentals) 4.6 System Information Setting

Precautions for hardware

(1) System configuration when using a printer
For the system configurations for using a printer, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

(2) Printers that can be used

For the printers that can be used, refer to "List of Valid Devices Applicable for GOT1000 Series" (GOT-A-0010)
separately available.
The Technical News above is available as a reference at the Information site for Mitsubishi industrial automation
products.
MELFANSweb website: http://www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/english/index.html

37 - 6

37.3 Precautions

38
SOUND OUTPUT
FUNCTION

38. SOUND OUTPUT FUNCTION

APPENDICES

The function enables speakers connected to the GOT to output sounds.

The sound output can be used with the following functions.
Touch switch function
Status observation function
Time action function
For using the sound output function with the GOT, register sound files on the GOT with the settings in this section.
Application example
The GOT outputs a sound file to speakers when set conditions are met.

M0
OFF

The operation stops.

ON

The GOT outputs the specified sound file to the speaker when the set condition is met (when M0 turns on).

38.1 Settings
Sound Files
Select [Common]
[Sound]
[Sound Files] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.
Register sound files to be output with the GOT.

Item

Description

Model

Sound Files

Click a cell in the column of the file name, and then select a sound file to be output.
Up to 100 sound files can be set.

Delete

Deletes the selected sound file.

38.1 Settings

38 - 1

 Sound File Setting

Select [Common]

[Sound]

[Sound File Setting] from the menu to display the setting dialog box.

Set sound files to be output with the GOT.

Item

Description

Model

Use a sound file for touch key tone

Select this item to set the sound when touching a touch switch.
Click the [Browse] button to display the [Sound Files] dialog box.

Give top priority to sound output of

a switch

Select this item to cancel all running sound outputs and output a touch key sound when a
touch switch is touched.

38.2 Relevant Settings

The sound output function is available for the relevant settings other than the specific settings.
The following shows the functions that are available by the relevant settings.

GOT internal devices

(Fundamentals) Appendix.2.1 GOT internal devices
Function

Setting item

Cancelling the executing sound output (Pending sound outputs are not cancelled.)

GS518.b0

Cancelling all sound outputs (Pending sound outputs are also cancelled.)

GS518.b1

Outputting the executing sound file number to the device

GS669

Detecting the jack disconnection of a sound output device

GS668.b15

Model

38.3 Precautions
The following shows precautions for the sound output function.

Precautions for drawing

(1) Number of sound files
Up to 100 sound files can be set in one project for the sound output function.

(2) Sound file specifications

(a) A sound file playable on the GOT is up to eight seconds long.
The sound after eight seconds is not played.
(b) When a WAV file is set as a sound file, even though the file data is changed after the setting, the changes
are not updated.
Set the WAV file with changes as a sound file again.
(c)

The audio format of sound files playable on the GOT is an audio format of "8.000 kHz, 16 Bit, Mono". Most
commonly used sound files are created in other audio formats.
When a commonly used sound file is used on the GOT, convert the audio format to "8.000 kHz, 16 Bit,
Mono" with general-purpose sound editing software, including the sound recorder for WindowsXP.

38 - 2

38.2 Relevant Settings

HINT
(1) Creating sound files
Record sounds in quiet places. Adjust the volume on a microphone, and then sounds from speakers do not
get distorted.
It is recommended that you use the recorded sounds on the GOT after playing the sounds on a personal
computer and checking the sound quality.

SOUND OUTPUT
FUNCTION

38

1.

Select [All Programs]

[Accessories]
[Entertainment]
[Sound Recorder] from the [Start] menu of
Windows, and then start the sound recorder. (When [Sound Recorder] does not exist in the menu, add the
sound recorder with [Add or Remove Programs] of WindowsXP.)

2.

Select [File]

[Open] from the menu, and then select a sound file to be converted.

3.

Select [File]

[Properties] from the menu, and then click the [Convert Now] button.

4.

The Sound Selection dialog box is displayed, and then set [Attributes] to [8.000 kHz, 16 Bit, Mono].

5.

Save the converted file ([Save] or [Save As]).

Precautions for OS
When the sound output function is used, be sure to install the extended function OS (Sound Output) on the GOT.

Precautions for hardware

For the system configurations for the sound output function, refer to the following manual.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual

Precautions for use

(1) Output other sounds during sound output
When the GOT outputs any of other sound files while a sound output is executed, the GOT holds the sound
output until the executing sound output ends.
The executing sound output ends, and then the held sound output is executed.
The GOT can hold up to 16 sound outputs.

(2) Output the same sound file

When the sound file same as the playing one is output or the sound file same as the one that the GOT already
holds is output, the output sound file becomes invalid.

38.3 Precautions

38 - 3

APPENDICES

(2) How to convert sound files with sound recorder of WindowsXP

38 - 4

38.3 Precautions

APPENDICES

38
SOUND OUTPUT
FUNCTION

Appendix1 Precautions for Using Unicode Text File

The following explains the precautions for using an Unicode text file imported/exported by GT Designer3.

How to save Unicode text files

Displaying Unicode text file
To display Unicode text files on personal computers and others, use a software compatible to the Unicode.
If the software used to display the Unicode text file is not compatible to the Unicode, the file may not be displayed
correctly.

Displaying Unicode text files with Microsoft Excel

To open a Unicode text file that contains a comment of multiple lines by the Microsoft Excel, drag the Unicode text
file to the Microsoft Excel.
If the Unicode text file is opened in other methods, it may not be displayed in the Microsoft Excel correctly.

Drag.

App - 1

APPENDICES

To edit and use an Unicode text file exported by GT Designer3, save the file in the Unicode text file format (*.txt).
The character code applicable to Unicode text files is Unicode (file format: UTF16 LittleEndian).

Appendix2 Precautions for Option Function Board

The following shows the option function boards used for each GOT.
GOT

Option function board

GT16

GT16-MESB

GT15

GT15-FNB, GT15-QFNB, GT15-QFNB16M, GT15-QFNB32M, GT15-QFNB48M, GT15-MESB48M

GT11

GT11-50FNB

GT10

Not necessary

An option function board (GT15-FNB or GT11-50FNB) is built in the following GOTs.

GOT
GT15

GT11

Description*1

Model
All models
GT1155-QTBDQ, GT1155-QTBDA,
GT1155-QSBDQ, GT1155-QSBDA,
GT1150-QLBDQ, GT1150-QLBDA

Function version D or later

GT1155-QTBD

Hardware Version A or later

GT1155HS-QSBD, GT1150HS-QLBD

Hardware Version B or later

GT1155-QSBD, GT1150-QLBD

Hardware Version C or later

*1 For how to confirm the function version or hardware version, refer to the following.
User's Manual for the GOT used

When using the GOTs mentioned above, option functions operated with the GT15-FNB or GT11-50FNB can be used
without installing an option function board.
For using functions operated with the GT16-MESB, GT15-QFNB( M), or GT15-MESB48M, and for adding more
memory to the GT15, install an applicable option function board.
For option function boards required for each option function, refer to the following.
GOT1000 Series User's Manual (Extended Functions, Option Functions)
An additional option function board can be installed on the GOT with a built-in option function board.
(However, an option function board inapplicable to the GOT, such as a GT15 option function board to the GT16, cannot
be used.)

App - 2

 Characters which can be used in folder names and file names

One-byte alphanumeric characters
Symbols (#$%&'()+-.=@[]^_{}~)

APPENDICES

Character strings which cannot be used in folder names and file names
The following character strings are not applicable. (Regardless of upper or lower case)
COM1 to COM9

LPT1 to LPT9

AUX

NUL

PRN

CLOCK$

CON

Also, the following folder and file names cannot be used.

Folder names starting with G1 (Except for file operation functions of script function used as arguments)
Folder and file names starting with . (period) or \
Folder and file name ending with . (period) or \
Folder and file name with only . (period) or .. (two periods)

Number of characters set for the folder name or file name

The GOT recognizes the file location according to the path explained below.
Set a folder or file name, and total characters of the path cannot exceed 78 characters.
Users only can rename the folder or file name.
(Other than the folder and file name are automatically added.)
Example: File path stored by GT16 in a CF card (for CSV files)

A :\

Folder name

(2 characters)

File name

(1 character)

Drive name
(1 character)

38
SOUND OUTPUT
FUNCTION

Appendix3 Restrictions on Folder Name and File Name

used in GOT

.CSV
Extension
(4 characters)

Max. 78 characters

HINT
Setting hierarchy to the folder
When setting the folder name, enter \ between folder names.
(\ is counted as one character.)
The maximum number of hierarchy levels for creating folders is 20.
(Setting example)
[Folder Name]: Project1\abc
Project1

abc

App - 3

App - 4

REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date
Oct., 2009

*Manual Number

Revision

SH(NA)-080867ENG-A

First printing: Compatible with GT Works3 Version1.01B

Japanese Manual Version SH-080837-A

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be
held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

REVISIONS - 1

REVISIONS - 2

WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range

If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the
gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that
involves replacement of the failed module.

[Gratis Warranty Term]

The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty-six (36) months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the
longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty-two (42) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.

[Gratis Warranty Range]

(1) The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified.
If requested by the customer, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary failure
diagnosis at the customers expence.
The primary failure diagnosis will, however, be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
(2) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which follow
the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.
(3) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused by the
user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions or
structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry
standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly
serviced or replaced.
5. Replacing consumable parts such as the battery, backlight and fuses.
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure
such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi.
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production

(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center
may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not
to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products, special
damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for damages to
products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other
tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications

The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal, the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major
accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device, and that backup and fail-safe
functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries, etc.
Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by
respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required, such as for Railway
companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft, medical applications,
incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement, and safety devices, shall also
be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative
outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
solely at our discretion.
In some of three cases, however, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application, provided that
the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention, the application is clearly defined and any special quality is
not required.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

This product uses Arphic Mobile Font.

VSFlexGrid8

LEADTOOLS(r) DLL for Win32

(c)ComponentOne LLC. All rights reserved

Copyright(c) 1991-2003 LEAD Technologies, Inc.

SH(NA)-080867ENG-A-2/2

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS

EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES

EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.

EUROPE
German Branch
Gothaer Strae 8
D-40880 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. CZECH REPUBLIC
Czech Branch
Avenir Business Park, Radlick 714/113a
CZ-158 00 Praha 5
Phone: +420 (0)251 551 470
Fax: +420 (0)251-551-471
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
FRANCE
French Branch
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
IRELAND
Irish Branch
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount
IRL-Dublin 24
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
ITALY
Italian Branch
Viale Colleoni 7
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB)
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
SPAIN
Spanish Branch
Carretera de Rub 76-80
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valls (Barcelona)
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.
UK
UK Branch
Travellers Lane
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
JAPAN
Office Tower Z 14 F
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc.
USA
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53

GEVA
AUSTRIA
Wiener Strae 89
AT-2500 Baden
Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20
Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60
TEHNIKON
BELARUS
Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711
BY-220030 Minsk
Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION
BELGIUM
Culliganlaan 3
BE-1831 Diegem
Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30
Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31
Koning & Hartman b.v.
BELGIUM
Woluwelaan 31
BE-1800 Vilvoorde
Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40
Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49
INEA BH d.o.o.
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
Aleja Lipa 56
BA-71000 Sarajevo
Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164
Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539
AKHNATON
BULGARIA
4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21
BG-1756 Sofia
Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6004
Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1
INEA CR d.o.o.
CROATIA
Losinjska 4 a
HR-10000 Zagreb
Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03
Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
Technologick 374/6
CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec
Phone: +420 595 691 150
Fax: +420 595 691 199
B:ELECTRIC, s.r.o.
CZECH REPUBLIC
Mladoboleslavsk 812
CZ-197 00 Praha 19 - Kbely
Phone: +420 286 850 848, +420 724 317 975
Fax: +420 286 850 850
Beijer Electronics A/S
DENMARK
Lykkegrdsvej 17, 1.
DK-4000 Roskilde
Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66
Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26
Beijer Electronics Eesti O
ESTONIA
Prnu mnt.160i
EE-11317 Tallinn
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40
Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49
Beijer Electronics OY
FINLAND
Jaakonkatu 2
FIN-01620 Vantaa
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501
UTECO A.B.E.E.
GREECE
5, Mavrogenous Str.
GR-18542 Piraeus
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999
MELTRADE Ltd.
HUNGARY
Fert utca 14.
HU-1107 Budapest
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727
Beijer Electronics SIA
LATVIA
Vestienas iela 2
LV-1035 Riga
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281
Beijer Electronics UAB
LITHUANIA
Savanoriu Pr. 187
LT-02300 Vilnius
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980

ALFATRADE Ltd.
MALTA
99, Paola Hill
Malta- Paola PLA 1702
Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816
Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817
INTEHSIS srl
MOLDOVA
bld. Traian 23/1
MD-2060 Kishinev
Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242
Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V.
NETHERLANDS
Wolweverstraat 22
NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk
Phone: +31 (0)180 46 60 04
Fax: +31 (0)180 44 23 55
Koning & Hartman b.v.
NETHERLANDS
Haarlerbergweg 21-23
NL-1101 CH Amsterdam
Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00
Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Beijer Electronics AS
NORWAY
Postboks 487
NO-3002 Drammen
Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00
Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77
MPL Technology Sp. z o.o.
POLAND
Ul. Krakowska 50
PL-32-083 Balice
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
Sirius Trading & Services srl
ROMANIA
Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o.
SERBIA
Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86
SER-18106 Nis
Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
INEA SR d.o.o.
SERBIA
Izletnicka 10
SER-113000 Smederevo
Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
AutoCont Control s.r.o.
SLOVAKIA
Radlinskho 47
SK-02601 Dolny Kubin
Phone: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
Fax: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
CS MTrade Slovensko, s.r.o.
SLOVAKIA
Vajanskeho 58
SK-92101 Piestany
Phone: +421 (0)33 / 7742 760
Fax: +421 (0)33 / 7735 144
INEA d.o.o.
SLOVENIA
Stegne 11
SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
Beijer Electronics AB
SWEDEN
Box 426
SE-20124 Malm
Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
Econotec AG
SWITZERLAND
Hinterdorfstr. 12
CH-8309 Nrensdorf
Phone: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 11
Fax: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 12
GTS
TURKEY
Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
TR-34775 Yukari Dudullu-Umraniye-ISTANBUL
Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
CSC Automation Ltd.
UKRAINE
4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66

MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
FACTORY AUTOMATION

EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
Kazpromautomatics Ltd.
Mustafina Str. 7/2
KAZ-470046 Karaganda
Phone: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50

KAZAKHSTAN

MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES

ILAN & GAVISH Ltd.
ISRAEL
24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
CEG INTERNATIONAL
LEBANON
Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
Lebanon - Beirut
Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438

AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
CBI Ltd.
Private Bag 2016
ZA-1600 Isando
Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 928 2000
Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 392 2354

SOUTH AFRICA

Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Strae 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com